1.

Features

2. Programming

Features Manual
00.01
This manual has been developed by NEC Infrontia Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd. It is intended for the use of its customers
and service personnel, and should be read in its entirety before attempting to install or program the system. Any
comments or suggestions for improving this manual would be appreciated. Forward your remarks to:

NEC Infrontia Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.

24, Jalan Juruhebah U1/50,
Temasya Industrial Park Phase 2,
Seksyen U1 Glenmarie,
40150 Shah Alam,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia.

www.necinfrontia-ap.com

Nothing contained in this manual shall be deemed to be, and this manual does not constitute, a warranty of, or
representation with respect to, any of the equipment covered. This manual is subject to change without notice and
NEC Infrontia has no obligation to provide any updates or corrections to this manual. Further, NEC Infrontia also
reserves the right, without prior notice, to make changes in equipment design or components as it deems
appropriate. No representation is made that this manual is complete or accurate in all respects and NEC Infrontia
shall not be liable for any errors or omissions. In no event shall NEC Infrontia be liable for any incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the use of this manual. This document contains proprietary information
that is protected by copyright. All rights are reserved. No part of this document may be photocopied or reproduced
without prior written consent of NEC Infrontia

NEC Infrontia Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.

 Table of Contents

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
About This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Charts and Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Account Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Alphanumeric Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Analogue Communications Interface (ACI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Attendant Call Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Automatic Route Selection (F-Route) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Background Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Barge In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Call Forwarding, Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Call Forwarding with Follow Me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Call Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Call Redirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Call Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Call Waiting / Camp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Callback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Central Office Calls, Answering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Central Office Calls, Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Continued Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Data Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Department Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Department Step Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Dial Number Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Dial Tone Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Direct Inward Line (DIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 1

Table of Contents
Directed Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Directory Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Door Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Dual Line Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Dual OPX/2-OPX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
External Alarm Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Fax Machine Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flexible System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Forced Trunk Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Group Listen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Handsfree and Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Hotline, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
InDepth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Intercom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Intercom Abandoned Call Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
ISDN Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Labelmaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Last Number Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Line Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Long Conversation Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Meet Me Conference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Meet Me Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Meet Me Paging Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Memo Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Message Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Microphone Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Name Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Night Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Off Hook Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
One-Touch Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Table of Contents - 2 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Table of Contents
Paging, External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Paging, Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
Paging, Privacy Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
PBX Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Prime Line Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Private Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Pulse to Tone Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
Repeat Redial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Reverse Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Ring Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Room Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Save Number Dialed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Secretary Call (Buzzer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Secretary Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Selectable Display Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Selectable Ring Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
Serial Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
Single Line Telephones - Digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
Station Message Detail Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Toll Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Toll Restriction, Dial Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Toll Restriction Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Traffic Management Report (TMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Trunk Group Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Trunk Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Trunk Queuing/Camp On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Universal Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Voice Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
Voice Response System (VRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Volume Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Warning Tone For Long Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 3

Table of Contents

Programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Introduction to Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Before You Start Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

10-01 : Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
10-02 : Location Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
10-03 : PCB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
10-04 : Music on Hold Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
10-14 : Managed Network Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
10-15 : Client Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
10-16 : Option Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
10-19 : VoIPU DSP Resource Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
10-21 : NTCPU Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
10-27 : IP System ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

Program 11 : System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472

11-01 : System Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
11-02 : Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
11-09 : Trunk Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Table of Contents - 4 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Table of Contents
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) . . . . . . . . . . .507
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . .532
13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
13-06 : . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539

14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
14-05 : Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
14-10 : Power Failure Telephone for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560

15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 5

Table of Contents
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
15-13 : Loop Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Program 16 : Department Group Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
16-03 : Secondary Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Program 20 : System Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

20-01 : System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
20-05 : Charging Cost Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
20-17 : Operator’s Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
20-18 : Service Tone Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
20-23 : System Options for CTI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
20-25 : ISDN Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654

21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665

Table of Contents - 6 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Table of Contents
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670
21-09 : Dial Block Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .678
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686

22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696
22-07 : DIL Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .700
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .702
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .704
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .709
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711
22-14 : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .713
22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .715

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717

23-01 : System Options for Group Call Pickup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .722

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724

24-01 : System Options for Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724
24-02 : System Options for Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726
24-03 : Park Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .728
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .730
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .732
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734
24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .736

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 7

Table of Contents
25-01 : DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740
25-03 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . 742
25-04 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy . . . . . . . . . . . 744
25-05 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 746
25-06 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 748
25-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 750
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 753
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 757
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 759
25-13 : System Option for DISA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761

Program 26 : ARS Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763

26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
26-04 : ARS Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774
30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784

31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 792
31-05 : Universal Night Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 794
31-06 : External Speaker Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798
31-08 : BGM on External Paging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 800

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

32-01 : Door Box Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 806

Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808

Table of Contents - 8 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Table of Contents
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .810

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812

34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .812
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .816
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .818
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .820
34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .822
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .826
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 831

35-01 : SMDR Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831
35-02 : SMDR Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .836
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838
35-05 : Account Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843

40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .843
40-02 : Mailbox Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845
40-03 : Message Recording Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .847
40-04 : Live Recording Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .849
40-05 : Call Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .851
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .853
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . .855
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .857
40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .859
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .860
40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .862

Program 41 : ACD Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 863

41-01 : System Options for ACD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .863
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .866
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .868
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .870
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .872
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .876

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 9

Table of Contents
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878
41-10 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
41-11 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886
41-14 : ACD Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 895
41-19 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

Program 42 : Hotel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899

42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 901
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 905
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 907

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909

44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 909
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
44-03 : Dial Analyze Extension Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 915
44-06 : Additional Dial Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 917
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 918
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 920
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 922
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 924

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .925

45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
45-02 : NSL Option Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 927
45-03 : NSL Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931

80-01 : Service Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 931
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 938
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 940
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 945

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 946

Table of Contents - 10 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Table of Contents
81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .946
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .948
81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .950
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .952
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .953
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .955
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .957
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .959

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 963

82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .963
82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .966
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .968
82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .970
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .972
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .974
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .976

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 978

83-01 : CS Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .978
83-02 : Air Clock Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .979
83-03 : Frame Offset Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .980
83-04 : Frequency Number Between PS and PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .981
83-05 : CS Area Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .982
83-06 : CS Area Number Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .983
83-07 : CS DL2 Information Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .984
83-08 : CS Additional ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .985
83-09 : CS Additional ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .986
83-10 : Virtual Master CSID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .987

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 988

84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .988
84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .993
84-03 : NGT Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996
84-04 : VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .998
84-05 : VoIPU IP Address Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .999
84-06 : VoIPU Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1001
84-07 : F/W Download Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1003
84-08 : F/W Name Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1005
84-09 : VLAN Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1007
84-10 : ToS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1008
84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1010
84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1013

Aspila EX Software Manual Table of Contents- 11

Table of Contents
Program 85 : SHUBU LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1016
85-01 : SHUBU LAN Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016
85-02 : VLAN Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018
85-03 : Priority Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1020
85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022

Program 90 : Maintenance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024

90-01 : Installation Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024
90-02 : Setting the Programming Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025
90-03 : Save Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1028
90-04 : Load Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029
90-05 : Slot Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030
90-06 : Trunk Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032
90-07 : Extension Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034
90-08 : System Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036
90-10 : System Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1038
90-11 : System Alarm Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1041
90-12 : System Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1043
90-13 : System Information Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
90-16 : Main Software Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1047
90-17 : Firmware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1048
90-18 : Password Initialization for Japanese Character Telephone . . . . . . . . . 1050
90-19 : Dial Block Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1051
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1052
90-21 : Traffic Report Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054
90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1055
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1058
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1060

Program 92 : Copy Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

92-01 : Copy Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1061

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1067

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1068

Table of Contents - 12 Aspila EX Software Manual

 Features

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 1

2 Features Aspila EX Software Manual
 About This Manual
About This Manual

Section 1 - Features

Before Reading This Section

This section provides detailed information on the system’s features. If you don’t know what the
various features are, review the Table of Contents for this section and the manual’s Index. After
reviewing, turn back to this section for the specifics.

Using This Section

The features in this section are in alphabetical order, like a dictionary. This section subdivides each
feature definition into headings as follows:

Description tells what the feature is and describes its benefits. Along with the Description are the
Conditions and Default Setting. Conditions provides the feature’s operational limits (if any).
Default Setting outlines how the feature works with the default programming. When initially
installed, the system uses the default setting. For specific default settings on each program, refer to
the chart at the end of this book.

Programming explains the system programming that lets you customize the feature. Some features
require programming; other’s don’t. If you decide to customize a feature, use Section 2 to enter the
change into the system.

Related Features presents the feature interaction.

Operation consists of instructions on how to use each feature.

Read These Notes

Simplifying System Phone Operation with One-Touch Keys...
A system phone user can access many features through Service Codes (e.g., Service Code 841
leaves a Message Waiting for a co-worker). To streamline the operation of their phone, a system
phone user can store these codes under One-Touch Keys. This provides one-button operation for
almost any feature. To find out more, turn to the One-Touch Calling and One-Touch Serial Opera-
tion features.

Programmable Keys...
When reading an instruction using programmable keys, you will see a notation similar to (PGM 15-
07 or SC 9nn). This means that the key requires function code nnn, and you can program this code
through Program 15-07 or by dialing Service Code 851 or 852. Refer to the Programmable Func-
tion Keys feature for more information.

Using Handsfree...
The manual assumes each extension has Automatic Handsfree. This lets a user just press a line key
or CALL key to answer or place a call. For extensions without Automatic Handsfree, the user
must:
• Lift the handset or press SPK for Intercom dial tone
• Lift the handset or press SPK, then press a line key for trunk dial tone

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 3

About This Manual
Port Assignments: How the System Assigns Ports to the PCBs
Port Calculation for Trunks:
With the 4COIU-LS1, 8 COIU-LS1, 4COIU-LG1, 8COIU-LG1, 8ESIU-PR2, 16ESIU-PR2,
4DIOPU-A1, 8DIOPU-A1, 2BRIU, 4BRIU, and 8BRIU PCBs, the system detects the type of
PCB (trunk or extension) and assigns the required extension or trunk ports to the slot. The sys-
tem will use the next available port number - it will not reserve any ports.

The PRI PCB assigns the first 32 consecutive trunk ports.

Port Calculation for Extensions:

With the 8/16ESIU or 8SLIU PCBs, the system detects the type of PCB (trunk or extension)
and assigns the required number of extension ports for the PCB to the slot. For example, the
8ESIU will have 8 station ports assigned - the 16ESIU will have 16 ports assigned.

4 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Charts and Illustrations

Table 1: Abbreviated and Post Dialing Service Codes

Single Digit Post Dialing Codes

For this feature. . . When you are. . .

1 Handsfree Answerback / Forced intercom Changing the signaling mode of your outgoing
Ringing Intercom call
2-0, # Not used

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 5

Charts and Illustrations

Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1
Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
* + Enter Account Code + * Entering an Account Code Account Codes -
815 Picking up a call ringing or wait- Directed Call Pickup -
ing at another extension Voice Response Sys-
tem (VRS)
867 Picking up a call ringing an Group Call Pickup 24
extension in your own pickup
group (except Ring Group calls)
841 Answering a Message Waiting Message Waiting 38
request
833 Setting the Automatic Transfer Transfer -
for each trunk line
834 Canceling the Automatic Trans- Transfer -
fer for each trunk line
835 Setting the Destination for Auto- Transfer -
matic Trunk Transfer
751 Making a Combined Page Paging -
888 + 0 Canceling Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 16
888 + 1 + Type (2-4) Activating Personal Answering Voice Mail (Personal 16
Machine Emulation Answering Machine
Emulation)
888 + 2 + Destination + Type (2- Activating Call Forwarding when Call Forwarding 16
4) Busy/Not Answered
888 + 3 + Destination + Type (2- Activating Call Forward Follow Call Forwarding with 16
4) Me at the destination extension Follow Me
888 + 4 + Destination + Type (2- Activating Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 16
4) Immediate
888 + 6 + Destination + Type (2- Activating Call Forwarding when Call Forwarding 16
4) Unanswered (delayed)
888 + 7 + Destination + Type (2- Activating Call Forwarding Call Forwarding 16
4) (Both Ringing)
724 (After 805 + 001-200 + Disconnecting a call in progress Forced Trunk -
busy) on a trunk Disconnect
713 + 3 + Message (01-20), or Activating and canceling Selectable Display 17
713 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Selectable Display Messaging Messaging

6 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
713 + 6 + Trunk access code + Forwarding your calls to an off- Call Forwarding Off- 17
Outside number, or 713 + 6 + premise telephone number Premise
Hold + Hang up to cancel
713 + 7 + Record message + # + Recording, listening to or erasing Voice Response Sys- 17
Condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + Desti- a Personal Greeting or Park and tem (VRS) (Personal
nation + Type (2 or 3) or 713 + 7 Page Greeting)
+ 3 to cancel
839 Logging out of or in to an ACD Automatic Call Distri- *10
group bution (ACD)
861 + Orbit (01-64) Picking up a call parked in a sys- Park *04 + orbit
tem Park orbit (01-64)
894 Splitting (switching) between Call Waiting / Camp On -
calls on an SLT
717 Calling your mailbox Voice Mail 67
#*#* Entering the system program- System Programming -
ming mode Password Protection
#*# 9 Backing up system data Maintenance -
Hookflash + 891 + Enter Entering an Account Code at an Account Codes -
Account Code + Hookflash SLT
872 Using Universal Answer Code to Central Office Calls, -
pick up a call ringing over the Answering
paging system
Hookflash + 826 + extension + Activating Conference from a Conference -
hookflash twice Single Line set
813 + bin Dialing a Common Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing 27
Dialing number
806 Flashing a trunk from an SLT Flash -
814 + bin Dialing a group Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing 28
Dialing number
816 Using Last Number Redial Last Number Redial -
831 + orbit (01-64) Parking a call in a system Park Park *04 + orbit
orbit (1-8, 01-32 or 01-64) (1-64)
761 Using Personal Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing -
dialing
753 Setting up an Unsupervised Tandem Trunking -
Conference (Unsupervised Confer-
ence)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 7

Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
805 + 001 -200 Placing a call over a specific Central Office Calls, *01 + trunk
trunk Placing (001-200)
1 (Off-hook) Changing the signaling mode of Handsfree -
your outgoing Intercom call Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
4 (On-hook) Listening to the General Message Voice Response Sys- -
tem (VRS)
6 (On-hook) Checking an extension’s number Voice Response Sys- -
tem (VRS)
8 (On-hook) Listening for the time Voice Response Sys- -
tem (VRS)
9 Placing a call using ARS or Automatic Route *02
Trunk Group Routing Selection
Trunk Group Routing
700 + code + 0 Using Dial Block Toll Restriction, Dial -
Block
701 + code + 0 A supervisor using Dial Block Toll Restriction, Dial -
Block
702 + Group number (01-64) Setting Automatic Transfer Setup Transfer -
for each extension group
703 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling Automatic Transfer Transfer -
Setup
704 + Group number (01-64) + Setting the destination for Auto- Transfer -
mode + extension matic Transfer Setup for each
extension group
705 + Group number (01-64) Setting Delayed Transfer for Transfer -
each extension group
706 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling Delayed Transfer Transfer -
707 + Group number (01-64) Setting up DND for each exten- Transfer -
sion group
708 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling DND for each exten- Transfer -
sion group
711 SLT Listening to the General Voice Response Sys- -
Message tem (VRS)
712 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 Recording, listening to or erasing Voice Response Sys- -
to record the General Message tem (VRS)

8 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
716 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 Recording, listening to or erasing Voice Response Sys- -
to record a VRS Message tem (VRS)
718 Night Mode Switching for other Night Answer
group
720 Common Cancelling Service TBD -
Code
721 Print the SMDR Extension Accu- Station Message Detail -
mulated printout Recording (SMDR)
722 Print the SMDR Group Accumu- Station Message Detail -
lated printout Recording (SMDR)
723 Print the SMDR Account Code Station Message Detail -
Accumulated printout Recording (SMDR)
726 Leaving a message at an exten- Hotel/Motel -
sion, without first calling that (Message Waiting)
extension
727 Enabling DND at a room Hotel/Motel -
telephone (Do Not Disturb)
728 Canceling DND at a room Hotel/Motel -
telephone (Do Not Disturb)
729 Enabling DND for another room Hotel/Motel -
telephone (Do Not Disturb)
730 Canceling DND at another room Hotel/Motel -
telephone (Wake Up Call)
731 Setting up a Wake Up call for Hotel/Motel -
your own room telephone (Wake Up Call)
732 Canceling a Wake Up Call for Hotel/Motel -
your own room telephone (Wake Up Call)
733 Setting a Wake Up Call for Hotel/Motel -
another guest’s room telephone (Wake Up Call)
734 Canceling a Wake Up Call for Hotel/Motel -
another guest’s room telephone (Wake Up Call)
735 Enabling Room to Room Call Hotel/Motel -
Restriction for a guest’s room (Room to Room Call
telephone Restriction
736 Disabling Room to Room Call Hotel/Motel -
Restriction for a guest’s room (Room to Room Call
telephone Restriction)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 9

Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
737 Changing a room’s telephone Hotel/Motel (Toll -
Toll Restriction (When Checked Restriction When
In) level Checked In)
7381 Setting a room as checked in Hotel/Motel -
(Room Status)
739 Setting a room as checked out Hotel/Motel -
(Room Status)
740 Setting a room as available Hotel/Motel -
(clean) from the room’s tele- (Room Status)
phone
741 Setting a room as available Hotel/Motel -
(clean) from another telephone (Room Status)
742 Requesting a Room Status Print- Hotel/Motel -
out (Room Status Printouts)
745 Trunk Port Disable TBD
750 + 0 (install) or 1 (remove) Logging in (0) or logging out (1) Department Calling
for your Department Calling
Group
754 Enabling Conversation Record at Voice Mail -
an SLT set
755 Logging out of or in to an ACD Automatic Call -
Group from an SLT Distribution (ACD)
756 Activating Work Time from an Automatic Call *17
SLT Distribution (ACD)
757 Canceling Work Time from an Automatic Call *17
SLT Distribution (ACD
758 Activating Rest Mode from an Automatic Call *13
SLT Distribution (ACD)
759 Canceling Rest Mode from an Automatic Call *13
SLT Distribution (ACD)
Hookflash + 760 ACD Recording for SLT Automatic Call -
Distribution (ACD)
763 + 6-digit code + line + phone Overriding Toll Restriction Toll Restriction -
number
766 Changing Toll Restriction for a Hotel/Motel (Toll -
checked in room Restriction [Checked in])

10 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
767 Logging an agent into their ACD Automatic Call -
Group Distribution (ACD
768 Logging an agent out of their Automatic Call -
ACD Group Distribution (ACD
769 Supervisor assigning an agent Automatic Call -
into another ACD Group or Distribution (ACD
changing an agent’s status
775 + ACD Group Changing your ACD Group Automatic Call -
assignment Distribution (ACD)
772 + Line number (001-200) Answering a call on a specific Central Office Calls,
trunk Answering
Hold
770 Monitoring a room’s phone Hotel/Motel -
(Room Monitor)
777 Changing the COS of another Class of Service -
extension. Must be allowed in
Program 20-13-28.
778 Displaying the language of the Maintenance -
system.
799 + 1 (set) or 0 (cancel) Changing the ability for a second Central Office Calls, -
call with DID/DISA/DIL Answering
725 Live Monitoring Voice Mail -
771 Charge Cost Display by the Station Message Detail -
supervisor. Recording
774 Entry Credit for Toll Restriction Toll Restriction -
780 Change to STG All Ring Ring Groups -
800 + extension # + enter name + Programming extension names Name Storing 55
HOLD
801 + zone (1-9 or 01-64) 801 + Making an Internal Zone Page Paging, Internal 21 + zone
zone (0 or 00) Making an All Call Internal Page 22
802 + Door Box (1-8) Placing a call to a Door Box Door Box -
803 + zone (1-8) Making an External Zone page External Paging 19 + zone
803 + zone (0) Making an External All Call 20
page
804 + trunk group (1-9 or 001- Placing an outside call over a Central Office Calls, *02 + group
200) trunk group Placing

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 11

Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
807 Overriding Do Not Disturb or Call Forwarding 37
Call Forwarding Do Not Disturb
808 Stepping through a Department Department Step 36
Group Calling
809 Sending a Call Waiting tone to a Call Waiting 33
busy extension
810 Breaking into another exten- Barge In -
sion’s call
811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) + tone Listening to the incoming ring Selectable Ring Tones -
(1-8) choices
812 Changing the signal type for call- Intercom -
ing an extension
815 Saving a number (from SLT) or Save Number Dialed 30
dialing a saved number
818 + 1 Activating Day 1 Mode Night Service 09 + 1
818 + 2 Activating Night 1 Mode 09 + 2
818 + 3 Activating Midnight 1 Mode 09 + 3
818 + 4 Activating Rest 1 Mode 09 + 4
818 + 5 Activating Day 2 Mode 09 + 5
818 + 6 Activating Night 2 Mode 09 + 6
818 + 7 Activating Midnight 2 Mode 09 + 7
818 + 8 Activating Rest 2 Mode 09 + 8
820 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (trk) + tone Changing your extension’s Selectable Ring Tones -
(1-8) incoming ring tones
821 Enabling Handsfree Answerback Handsfree -
for incoming Intercom calls Answerback/Forced
Intercom Ringing
822 Calling off-premise with a Door Call Forwarding, Off- 54
Box Premise
Door Box
823 Enabling Forced Ringing for Handsfree Answerback/ -
incoming Intercom calls Forced Intercom ringing
824 Enabling/disabling Dial Pad Dialing Pad -
Confirmation Tone Confirmation tone
825 Turning Background Music on Background Music 04
and off
827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827 + 1 or Checking, setting or canceling an Alarm -
2 + 9999 to cancel alarm

12 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
828 + hour + minutes Setting the system Time Time and Date -
829 Checking or changing ring Volume Control
volume
830 Remote maintenance - -
832 Placing a call on Group Hold Hold -
836 Text Message Settting Select Display -
Messaging
840 System alarm message delete - -
842 Setting Call Forward (Both Ring) Call Forwarding 14
843 Setting Call Forward (Busy) Call Forwarding 11
844 Setting Call Forward (Busy/No Call Forwarding 13
Answer)
845 Setting Call Forward (No Call Forwarding 12
Answer)
846 Setting Call Forward (Follow Call Forwarding 15
Me)
848 Setting Call Forward Call Forwarding 10
(Immediate)
847 + Activating Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb -
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM, Call Forward
and transfers)
3 (All calls)
4 (Call Forwards)
849 Placing a call on Exclusive Hold Hold -
at a SLT set.
850 Camping On to an extension Voice Response Sys- 35
when calling into the system tem (VRS)
through the VRS
851 + key + code Changing the function of a pro- Programmable -
grammable key using 851 service Function Keys
codes
852 + key + code Changing the function of a pro- One-Touch -
grammable key using 852 service Serial Operation
codes

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 13

Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
853 + bin + number + HOLD + Storing Common Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing -
Name + HOLD to store Dialing numbers
854 + bin + number + HOLD + Storing Group Abbreviated Abbreviated Dialing -
Name + HOLD to store Dialing numbers
855 + One Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key One-Touch Dialing -
or Personal Speed Dial
856 Answering a call ringing a phone Group Call Pickup -
in your pickup group (except
Ring Group calls)
773 Parking a call or picking up a Park -
parked call at an extension
859 Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold -
Hold at a DSL/SLT set.
860 DID ACD Access Code Automatic Call -
Distribution (ACD)
862 Picking up a call from Group Hold -
Hold
863 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Conference 23 or 32
Meet Me Page on an Internal Meet Me Paging
Paging Zone (if your extension is
in the group called)
864 + zone paged Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Paging 23 or 32
(0-9 or 00-64) Meet Me Page if your extension
is not in the group paged
865 + zone (0-8) Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Conference 23 or 32
Meet Me Page on an External Meet Me Paging
Paging Zone
866 Using trunk access via Networking Networking -
868 + pickup group Answering a call ringing a phone Group Call Pickup 26 + group
(1-9 or 01-64) in another pickup group (except
Ring Group calls)
869 Answering a call ringing a phone Group Call Pickup 25
in another pickup group if you
don’t know the group’s number
(except Ring Group Calls)
870 Canceling a Callback request Callback -
871 + ext Canceling Messages Waiting you Message Waiting -
have left at a specific extension

14 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 2: Service Codes by Number

Also see
Dial this Service Code. . .1 When you are. . . For this feature. . . Function
Key. . .
1 Except where indicated, dial Service Code from Intercom dial tone
(e.g., press idle CALL key first).
873 Canceling all Messages Waiting Message Waiting -
you have left at other extensions
875 + pswd (0000) + place Temporarily overriding an Toll Restriction -
outside call extension’s Toll Restriction Override
876 Clearing number saved by Last Last Number Redial -
Number Redial
880 + Relay (0-8) Using the General Purpose Relay Paging, External 51
Night Service
881 + 00 (no tone), 01 (general) Changing the Music on Hold Music on Hold -
or 02 (holiday) Tone
882 Routing ANI/DNIS to the VRS. Transfer
It can also be used when transfer- Voice Reponse Service
ring to VRS. (VRS)
883 Enabling the data communication Data Communications -
auto-answer mode
884 Accessing the VRS Voice Reponse Service -
(VRS)
885 Clearing the number saved by Save Number Redial -
Save Number Redial
890 Using Voice Over after calling a Voice Over 48
busy extension
894 Splitting between two calls on an Call Waiting
SLT
899 Testing Callback operation for Callback -
SLT

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 15

Charts and Illustrations

Table 3: Service Codes by Feature

Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1
Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Abbreviated Dialing 853 + bin + number + HOLD Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing -
+ Name + HOLD to store numbers
854 + bin + number + HOLD Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing -
+ Name + HOLD to store numbers
813 + bin Dialing a Common Abbreviated Dialing 27
number
814 + bin Dialing a Group Abbreviated Dialing 28
number
761 + bin Using Personal Abbreviated Dialing -
Account Codes * + Enter Account code + * Entering an Account Code -
Hookflash + 891 + Enter Entering an Account Code at an SLT -
account code + Hookflash
Alarm 827 + 1 or 2 + time, or 827 + Checking, setting or canceling an alarm -
1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel
Automatic Call 839 Logging out of or in to an ACD Group *10
Distribution (ACD)
755 Logging out of or in to an ACD Group
from an SLT
756 Activating Work Time from an SLT *17
757 Canceling Work Time from an SLT *17
758 Activating Rest Mode from an SLT *13
759 Canceling Rest Mode from an SLT *13
Hookflash + 760 ACD Recording for SLT -
767 Allowing ACD Agent to log into a group
768 Allowing ACD Agent to log out of a
group
769 Allowing supervisor to change agent’s status
775 + ACD Group Changing your ACD Group assignment -
860 DID ACD Access Code -
Automatic Route 9 Placing an call using Trunk Group *02
Selection or Trunk Routing or Automatic Route Selection
Group Routing
Background Music 825 Turning Background Music on and off 04

16 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Call Forwarding 888 + 0 Canceling Call Forwarding 16

842 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding 14
(Both Ringing)
843 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding when Busy 11
844 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding when Busy/ 13
Not Answered
845 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding when 12
Unanswered (delayed)
846 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding Follow Me 15
848 + 1 + Destination Activating Call Forwarding Immediate 10
Call Forwarding 713 + 6 + Trunk access code Forwarding your calls to an off-premise 17
Off-Premise + Outside number, or telephone number
713 + 6 + Hold + Hang up to
cancel
Call Forwarding, Off- 822 Calling off-premise with a Door Box 54
Premise
Door Box
Call Forwarding/Do 807 Overriding an extension’s Call Forward or 37
Not Disturb Override DND setting.
Call Forwarding with 888 + 3 + Destination + Type Activating Call Forward Follow Me at the 16
Follow Me (2-4) destination extension
Call Waiting / Camp 894 Splitting (switching) between calls on an -
On SLT
Callback / Camp On / 870 Canceling a Callback request -
Trunk Queuing
899 Testing Callback operation for SLT -
Central Office Calls, 872 Using Universal Answer to pick up a call -
Answering / ringing over the paging system
Hold
772 + Line number (001-200) Answering a call on a specific trunk -
799 + 1 (set) or Changing the ability for a second call with
0 (cancel) DID/DISA/DIL
Central Office Calls, 805 + 001-200 Placing a call over a specific trunk *01 + trunk
Placing (100-200)
804 + trunk group (1-9 or Placing an outside call over a trunk group *02 + group
001-200)
Class of Service 777 Changing the COS of another extension. -
Must be allowed in Program 20-13-28.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 17

Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Conference Hookflash + 826 + extension Activating Conference from a Single Line 1016
+ hookflash twice set
Data Communications 883 Enabling the data connection auto-answer -
mode
884 Disconnecting an active data call -
Department Calling 750 + 0 (install) or Logging in (0) or logging out (1) for your 46
1 (remove) Department Calling Group
Dial Pad Confirmation 824 Enabling/disabling Dial Pad -
Tone Confirmation Tone
Directed Call Pickup 815 + ext. Picking up a call ringing or waiting at an -
extension
Do Not Disturb 847 + Activating Do Not Disturb -
0 (Cancel)
1 (Trk calls)
2 (Paging, ICM, Call
Forwards, and Transfers)
3 (All calls)
4 (Call Forwards)
Door Box 802 + Door Box (1-8) Placing a call to a door Box -
822 A Door Box is forwarded off-premise -
Flash 806 Flashing a trunk from an SLT -
Forced Trunk 724 (after 805 + 001-200 + Disconnecting a call in progress on a trunk -
Disconnect busy)
Group Call Pickup 867 Picking up a call ringing an extension in 24
your own pickup group (except Ring
Group calls)
868 + pickup group (1-9 or Answering a call ringing a phone in 26 + group
01-64) another pickup group
869 Answering a call ringing a phone in 25
another pickup group if you don’t know
the group’s number (except Ring Group
calls)
Handsfree 1 (Off-hook) Changing the signaling mode of your -
Answerback/Forced outgoing Intercom call
Intercom Ringing
821 Enabling Handsfree Answerback for -
incoming Intercom calls
823 Enabling Forced Ringing for incoming -
Intercom calls

18 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Hold 832 Placing a call on Group Hold -

849 Placing a call on Exclusive Hold at a SLT -
set
859 Retrieving a call from Exclusive Hold at a -
DSL
862 Picking up a call from Group Hold -
Hotel/Motel 726 Leaving a message at an extension, -
(Message Waiting) without first calling that extension
Hotel/Motel 727 Enabling DND at a room telephone -
(Do Not Disturb)
Hotel/Motel 728 Canceling DND at a room telephone -
(Do Not Disturb)
Hotel/Motel 729 Enabling DND for another room -
(Do Not Disturb) telephone
Hotel/Motel 730 Canceling DND at another room -
(Do Not disturb) telephone
Hotel/Motel 770 Monitoring a room’s phone -
Hotel/Motel 731 Setting a Wake Up Call or your own room -
(Wake Up Call) telephone
Hotel/Motel 732 Canceling a Wake Up Call for your own -
(Wake Up Call) room telephone
Hotel/Motel 733 Setting a Wake Up Call for another -
(Wake Up Call) guest’s room telephone
Hotel/Motel 734 Canceling a wake Up Call for another -
(Wake Up Call) guest’s room telephone
Hotel/Motel 735 Enabling Room to Room Call Restriction -
(Room to Room Call for a guest’s room telephone
Restriction)
Hotel/Motel 736 Disabling Room to Room Call Restriction -
(Room to Room Call for a guest’s room
Restriction)
Hotel/Motel 737 Changing a room’s telephone Toll -
(Toll restriction Restriction (When Checked In) level
[When Checked In])
Hotel/Motel 738 Setting a room as checked in -
(Room Status)
Hotel/Motel 739 Setting room as checked out -
(Room Status)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 19

Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Hotel/Motel 740 Setting a room as available (clean) from -

(Room Status) the room’s telephone
Hotel/Motel 741 Setting a room as available (clean) from -
(Room Status) another telephone
Hotel/Motel 742 Requesting a Room Status Printout -
(Room Status
Printouts)
Hotel/Motel (Toll 766 Changing a room’s telephone Toll -
Restriction [When Restriction level (when checked in)
Checked In])
Last Number Redial 816 Using Last Number Redial -
876 Clearing number saved by Last Number -
Redial
Maintenance #*# 9 Backing up system data -
778 Displaying the laguage the system is using -
Meet Me Conference 863 Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet 23 (Meet Me
Meet Me Paging Me Page on an Internal Paging Zone (if Paging)
your extension is in the group called) or 32 (Meet Me
Conference)
864 + zone paged Joining a Meet Me Conference or Meet -
(0-9 or 00-64) Me Page if your extension is not in the
group paged
865 + zone (0-8) Joining a Meet Me conference or Meet Me -
Page on an External Paging Zone.
Message Waiting 841 Answering a Message Waiting request 38
871 + ext Canceling Messages Waiting you have -
left at a specific extension
873 Canceling all Messages Waiting you have -
left at other extensions
Music on Hold 881 + 00 (no tone), Changing the Music on Hold Tone -
01 (general) or 02 (holiday)
Name Storing 800 + enter name + HOLD Programming extension names 55
Networking 866 Using trunk access via Networking -

20 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Night Service 718 Night Mode Switching for other group

818 + 0 Activating Day 1 Mode 09 + 0
818 + 1 Activating Night 1 Mode 09 + 1
818 + 2 Activating Midnight 1 Mode 09 + 2
818 + 3 Activating Rest 1 Mode 09 + 3
818 + 4 Activating Day 2 Mode 09 + 4
818 + 5 Activating Night 2 Mode 09 + 5
818 + 6 Activating Midnight 2 Mode 09 + 6
818 + 7 Activating Rest 2 Mode 09 + 7
Off Hook Signaling 809 Sending off-hook signal tones to a busy 33
extension
892 Forcing Off Hook Signaling to voice -
announce your phone
893 Forcing Off Hook Signaling to ring your -
phone
One-Touch Dialing 855 + One-Touch key + code Programming a One-Touch Key or -
Personal Speed Dial
Paging, Combined 751 + Zone (1-8) Making a combined zone page. 19 + zone
751 + Zone (0) Making a combined All Call page. 20
Paging, External 803 + zone (1-8) Making an external zone page 19 + zone
803 + zone (0) Making an external All Call page 20
Paging, External 880 + relay number (0-8) Activating the general purpose relay. 51
Night Service
Paging, Internal 801 + zone (1-9 or 01-64) Making an Internal Zone Page 21 + zone or
801 + zone (0 or 00) Making an internal All Call Page 22
Park 831 + orbit (01-64) Parking a call in a system Park orbit (01- *04 + orbit
64)
861 + orbit ( 01-64) Picking up a call parked in a system Park *04 + orbit
orbit (01-64)
773 Parking a call or picking up a parked call -
at an extension
Programmable 851 + key + code Changing the function of a programmable -
Function Keys key using 851 service codes
852 + key + code Changing the function of a programmable -
key using 852 service codes
Ring Groups 780 Change to STG All Ring -

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 21

Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Save Number Dialed 815 Saving a number (from SLT) or dialing a 30

saved number
885 Clearing the number saved by Save -
Number Redial number
Selectable Display 713 + 3 + message (01-20), or Activating and Canceling Selectable 17
Messaging 713 + 3 + Hang up to cancel Display Messaging
836 Text Message Setting -
Selectable Ring Tones 811 + 1 (ICM) or 2 (Trk) + Listening to the incoming ring choices -
tone (1-8)
820 + 1 (ICM) + 2 (Trk) + Changing your extension’s incoming ring -
tone (1-8) tones
System Programming #*#* Entering the system programming mode -
Password Protection
Station Message 721 Print the SMDR Extension Accumulated -
Detail Recording printout
722 Print the SMDR Group Accumulated -
printout
723 Print the SMDR Account Code Accumu- -
lated printout
771 Charge Cost Display -
Tandem Trunking #8 Setting up an Unsupervised Conference -
(Unsupervised
Conference)
Time and Date 828 + hour + minutes Setting the system Time -
Toll Restriction, Dial 700 + code + 0 Using Dial Block -
Block
701 + code + 0 A supervisor using Dial Block -
774 Entry Credit -
Toll Restriction 875 + pswd (0000) + place Temporarily overriding an extension’s -
Override outside call Toll Restriction
763 + digit digit code + line + Overriding Toll Restriction -
telephone number

22 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Transfer 833 Setting the Automatic Transfer for each

trunk line
834 Canceling the Automatic Transfer for
each trunk line
835 Setting the Destination for Automatic
Trunk Transfer
702 + Group number (01-64) Setting Automatic Transfer Setup for each -
extension group
703 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling Automatic Transfer Setup -
704 + Group number (01-64) Setting the destination for Automatic -
+ mode + extension Transfer Setup for each extension group
705 + Group number (01-64) Setting Delayed Transfer for each exten- -
sion group
Transfer (cont.) 706 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling Delayed Transfer -
707 + Group number (01-64) Setting up DND for each extension group -
708 + Group number (01-64) Cancelling DND for each extension group -
882 Transferring a call to the VRS. This can
also be used for routing ANI/DNIS to the
VRS.
Trunk Group Routing 9 Placing a call using Trunk Group Routing *02
or Automatic Route or Automatic Route Selection
Selection
Voice Mail 888 + 1 + Type (2-4) Activating Personal Answering Machine -
Emulation
717 Calling your mailbox 67
754 Enabling Conversation Record at SLT set -
725 Live Monitoring (In-Skin) -
Voice Over 890 Sending a Voice Over to a busy extension 48
after hearing Busy/Ring tone

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 23

Charts and Illustrations
Table 3: Service Codes by Feature
Also see
For this feature... Dial this Service Code...1 When you are...
Function Key...

1 Except where indicated, dial Service code form Intercom dial tone (e.g., press idle CALL key first).

Voice Response 815 + ringing ext. Picking up a call ringing another exten- -
System (VRS) sion for Directed Call Pickup or VRS Park
and Page.
713 + 7 + Record message + Recording, listening to or erasing a 17
# + Condition (2, 4,6 or 7) + Personal Greeting or Park and Page
Destination+ Type (2 or 3). or
713 + 7 + 3 to cancel
4 (On-hook) Listening to the General Message -
6 (On-hook) Checking an extension’s number -
8 (On-hook) Listening for the time -
711 SLT listening to the General Message -
712 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or Recording, listening to or erasing the -
7 to record General Message
716 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or Recording, listening to or erasing a VRS -
7 to record Message
850 Camping On to an extension when calling -
into the system through the VRS
882 Transferring a call to the VRS. This can -
also be used for routing ANI/DNIS to the
VRS.
884 Accessing the VRS -
Volume Control 829 Checking or changing ring volume -
Common Cancel code 720 Common Cancelling Service Code -
Trunk Port Disable 745 Trunk Port Disable -

24 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations

Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also See
For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Srvc Code

Abbreviated Dialing Code: 27 Dialing a stored Common None 813 + bin

Operation: Press key + Abbreviated Dialing number
bin + Line or CALL
Code: 28 Dialing a stored Group None 814 + bin
Operation: Press key + Abbreviated Dialing number
bin + Line or CALL key
Account Codes Code: 50 Entering Account Codes None *
Operation: Press key +
Dial Account Code
Automatic Call Code: *10 Basic Operation On red when 839
Distribution (ACD) Operation: Press key to Logging in or out of an ACD logged in
log in Group Off when logged
Press key + 1 to log out or out
0 to cancel
Code: *11 Turning ACD Call Recording On red when 760
Operation: Press key on or off recording
Off when not
recording
Code: *12 Emergency Call On while calling -
Operation: Press key Placing or receiving an Emer- your supervisor or
gency Call after being answered
by your supervisor
Flashing fast at the
supervisor while
ringing
Code: *13 Rest Mode On red when Rest -
Operation: Press key Enabling/disabling Rest Mode enabled Off
Mode when Rest Mode
disabled
Code: *14 Out of Service On red when the -
Operation: Press key + Taking an ACD Group out of group is out of
Press 1 (Yes) or 2 (No) Service (for Group Supervi- service.
sors only), or Taking all ACD
Groups out of service (for
System Supervisors only)
Code: *15 Terminal Monitor On red while -
Operation: Call busy Monitoring an ACD Agent’s monitoring
ACD agent + Press key conversation Off when not
monitoring

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 25

Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Automatic Call Code: *16 Switching (splitting) between On red while the -
Distribution (ACD) Operation: Press key to an ACD Agent and their out- agent is on hold
(cont.) put agent on hold. side caller after answering an
Press key again + 1 to emergency call
hang up agent or 0 to
bring agent back into call.
Code: *17 Working Time On when Work -
Operation: Press key Enabling/disabling Work Time enabled,
Time Flashing while on a
call if Auto Work
Time enabled
Off when Work
Time disabled
Code: *18 + ACD Group ACD Overflow Control On when enabled, -
Operation: Press key Overflowing ACD calls to Slow flash when dis-
another group abled
Background Music Code: 04 Turning Background Music None 825
Operation: Press key on or off
Barge In Code: 34 Barging In on a co-worker’s None 810
Operation: Call ext + conversation
Press key
Call Coverage Code: *03 + ext. Placing or answering a call to Slow Flash red when -
Operation: Press key your co-worker’s extension ringing, On red
when busy
Call Forwarding, Code: 14 Call Forwarding Both Ring to Slowly flashes red 888 + 7
Both Ring Operation: Press key + extension
Dest. Extension
Call Forwarding, Code: 11 Call Forwarding Busy to Slowly flashes red 888 + 2
Busy Operation: Press key + extension or Voice Mail
Dest. Extension
Call Forwarding, Code: 13 Call Forwarding Busy/No Slowly flashes red 888 + 2
Busy/No Answer Operation: Press key + Answer to extension or Voice
Dest. Extension Mail
Call Forwarding, Code: 17 Call Forwarding Device to a Slowly flashes red 713
Device Operation: Press key + device or Voice Mail
type
Call Forwarding, Code: 54 Externally Call Forwarding Slowly flashes red 713
External by Door Operation: Press key + Door Box calls
Box Dest. Number
Call Forwarding, Code: 15 Call Forwarding Follow Me Slowly flashes red 888 + 3
Follow Me Operation: Press key + to extension or Voice Mail
Dest. Extension

26 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Call Forwarding, Code: 10 Call Forwarding Immediate Slowly flashes red 888 + 4
Immediate Operation: Press key + to extension or Voice Mail
Dest. Extension
Call Forwarding, No Code: 12 Call Forwarding No Answer Slowly flashes red 888 + 6
Answer Operation: Press key + to extension or Voice Mail
Dest. Extension
Call Forwarding, Code: 17 Setting up Call Forwarding Slowly flashes red 713
Off-Premise Operation: Press key + Off-Premise, Selectable
device type code + Display Messaging, VRS
requested data (depends Park and Page and VRS
on device selected). Personal Greeting
Call Forwarding, Code: 16 Call Forwarding Station to Slowly flashes red 888
Station Operation: Press key + extension or Voice Mail
Dest. Extension
Call Forwarding / Code: 37 Overriding an extension’s None -
Do Not Disturb Operation: Call Call Forwarding or Do Not
Override extension + Press key Disturb
Callback / Camp Code: 35 Leaving a Call back request On red when -
On/ Trunk Queuing Operation: Call busy at a busy extension, Camping activated
extension or access busy On to a busy extension, or
trunk + Press key Queuing for a busy trunk
Call Redirect Code: 49 + extension or Redirect a ringing call to the On red when acti- -
voice mail predefined destination vated
Operation: Press key
Central Office Calls Code: *01 + Trunk num- Pressing a line key to place or On green when 805
ber (001-200) answer a trunk call (where seized, on red when
Operation: Press key trunks are 001-200) in use (by other
party), Slow Flash
green when ringing,
Hold flash when on
Hold
Conference Code: 07 Setting up a Conference or a On red during setup 826
Operation: Set up call + Meet Me Conference
Press key + set up call to
add + Press key twice
Conference, Code: 32 Setting up a Voice Call None -
Voice Call Operation: Set up trunk Conference
call + Press key
Data Code: 66 Placing a data call On red when call -
Communications Operation: Press key + set up
ext or outside number

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 27

Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Department Calling Code: 46 Logging in or logging out of On when removed, 750

Operation: Press Key your Department Calling Off when installed
Group
Department Step Code: 36 Step Calling through a None -
Calling Operation: Dial busy ext Department Group for an idle
+ Press key member
Direct Station Code: 01 Calling an extension using a Off = extension idle -
Selection Operation: Press key DSS key On = extension busy
Flashing = DND
Do Not Disturb Code: 03 Setting your phone in DND DND key on red -
Operation: Press key +
code (0-4)
Do Not Disturb/Call Code: 37 Calling an extension which is None -
Forward Override Operation: Press key in DND or Call Forwarded
General Purpose Code: 51 + relay number Activating the general pur- On when activd -
Relay Operation: Press key pose relay
Group Call Pickup Code: 24 Answering a call ringing None 867
Operation: CALL + another phone in your Pickup
Press key Group
Code: 25 Answering a call ringing a None 869
Operation: CALL + phone in another Pickup
Press key Group - if you don’t know the
group number
Code: 26 + Pickup Group Answering a call ringing a None 868
(1-9 or 01-64) phone in a specific Pickup
Operation: CALL + Group
Press key + Pkup Group
Handset Cutoff Code: 40 Cutting off the handset trans- On when feature -
Operation: Press key mission while on a call active (no transmis-
sion on handset)
Hotline Code: 01 + dest. ext Placing a call to your Hotline Full BLF (red) for -
Operation: Press key partner covered ext.
Headset Operation Code: 05 Enabling or disabling On red when 834
Operation: Press key Headset Operation activated
Hold Code: 44 Putting a call on System Hold None -
Operation: Place or (if your phone’s Hold key is
answer call + Press key reassigned)
Code: 45 Putting a call on Exclusive None -
Operation: Place or Hold
answer call + Press key

28 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Incoming Caller ID Code: 08 Viewing answered and Flashing when -

List (Answered and Operation: Press key missed trunk calls missed call stored
Missed calls)
Loop Keys Code: *05 + 0 Placing or answering a trunk Flashing red when -
(Incoming), 1 (Outgoing) call ringing
or 2 (Both Ways) + 000 On green when in
(All trunk groups incom- use
ing or ARS outgoing) or Flashing green when
Trunk group (001-100). on hold
Operation: Press Key
Meet Me Code: 32 Joining a Meet Me None 863 or 864
Conference Operation: Press key Conference
(Also see
Conference)
Meet Me Paging Code: 23 Joining a Meet Me Page None 863 or 864
Operation: Press key
Memo Dial Code: 31 Storing, using or checking a None -
Operation: Memo dial number
Store: While on call, press
key + number to store
Use: Press Key + Call or
line
Erase: CALL + Press key
Message Waiting Code: 38 Answering/Leaving a None 841
Operation: Leave mes- Message Waiting
sage: Call ext + Press key
OR Answer message:
Press key
Microphone Cutoff Code: 02 Using Microphone Cutoff On red when -
Operation: Set up call + activated
Press key
Multiple Directory Code: *03 + ext. or dept Placing or answering a call to Slow Flash red when -
Numbers group your virtual (phantom) ringing, On red
Operation: Press key extension when busy
Name Storing Code: 55 Entering a name for the None 800
Operation: Press key + extension to be displayed on
ext # + name + HOLD telephones
Networking Code: *06 + network (01- Accessing a networked trunk None -
50)
Operation: Press key
Night Service Code: 09 + mode (1-8) Activating the Day/Night On red when 818 +
Operation: Press key Mode activated +0

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 29

Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Off Hook Signaling Code: 33 Signaling a busy extension None -

Operation: Call ext. and
receive busy + Press key
Paging, External Code: 19 + zone (1-8) Making an external zone page On red when 803 + zone
Operation: Press Key activated
Code: 20 Making an external All Call On red when 803 + 0
Operation: Press key page activated
Paging, Internal Code: 21 + zone Broadcasting to an Internal On red when 801 + zone
(1-9 or 01-64) Paging Zone activated
Operation: Press key
Code: 2 Broadcasting to all Internal On red when 801 + 0 or 00
Operation: Press key Paging zones activated
Park Code: *04 + orbit (1-9 or Placing a call into or Fast flash when orbit 831 (Park)
01-64) retrieving a call from a Park is busy (green at 861 (pickup)
Operation: Place or Orbit originator, red at
answer call + Press key others)
Repeat Redial Code: 29 Activating Repeat Redial Fast Flash while -
Operation: Place call and while on a call system waits to
press key redial
Reverse Voice Over Code: 47 + dest. ext. Initiating Reverse Voice Over Full BLF red -
Operation: Press and
hold key
Room Monitor Code: 39 Activating Room Monitor Dest. Fast Flash red, -
Operation: Press key at Source Hold Flash
destination & source + ext red
Save Number Dialed Code: 30 Saving, redialing or checking None -
Operation: a saved number
Save: Place call + Press
key
Redial: Line or CALL +
Press key
Secretary Call Code: 41 + sec. ext Calling your secretary (using On red at source -
(Buzzer) Operation: Press key the buzzer) Fast Flash red at
destination
Secretary Call Code: 42 + boss ext A secretary picking up a call On red when -
Pickup Operation: Press key ringing your boss’s extension activated
Selectable Display Code: 18 Setting up Call Forwarding Flashes red when 713
Messaging Operation: Press key + Off-Premise, Selectable activated
additional data if needed Display Messaging, VRS
Park and Page and VRS
Personal Greeting

30 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 4: Function Key Codes by Features

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

For this feature... Use this key... When your are... Key Lamp Status Also See
Srvc Code

Serial Call Code: 43 Placing a Serial Call to a None -

Operation: Trk call + co-worker
Hold + ext + Press key
Step Call Code: 36 Stepping through a depart- None -
Operation: Press key ment group
Transfer Code: 06 Transferring a call None -
Operation: Establish call
+ Hold + Ext + Press key
Trunk Group Code: *05 Accessing a trunk using On red when active 9
Routing Operation: Press key Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Groups Code: *02 + Trk group Using a trunk group key to On red when active 804
(1-9 or 001-200) access a Trunk Group
Operation: Press key
Trunk Queuing Code: 35 Camping On or Queuing for a On red while
Operation: Hear busy trunk camped on
tone for Trk + Press key
Voice Response Code: 17 Setting up Call Forwarding Flashes red 713
System (VRS) (Park Operation: Press key + Off-Premise, Selectable
and Page) (Personal device type code + Display Messaging, VRS
Greeting) requested data (depends Park and Page and VRS
on device selected). Personal Greeting
Voice Mail Code: 67 + extension or Calling Voice Mail or Flashes green on 717
Message Center number leaving a message your key for your
Operation: Press key messages or flashes
red for the Message
Center
Code: 68 + code (0-2) Using Voice Mail Service Flashes slowly when -
Operation: Press key monitoring
Code: 69 + 0 Using Voice Mail Record Slow Flash red when -
Operation: Set up call + active
Press key
Voice Over Code: 48 Initiating or responding to On red when -
Operation: Hear Off- Voice Over responding Hold
Hook Signaling tone + Flash red when
Press key listening

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 31

Charts and Illustrations

Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 01 + dest. ext. Direct Station Selection, Calling an extension using a Off = extension idle -
+ HOLD Hotline DSS key On = extension busy
Operation: Press Flashing = DND
key
Code: 02 Microphone Cutoff Using Microphone Cutoff On red when -
Operation: Set up activated
call + Press key
Code: 03 Do Not Disturb Activating DND On red when -
Operation: Press activated
key
Code: 04 Background Music Turning BGM on or off On red when 825
Operation: Press activated
key
Code: 05 Headset Operation Enabling or disabling On red when 834
Operation: Press Headset Operation activated
key
Code: 06 Transfer Transferring a call None -
Operation: Estab-
lish call + Hold +
Ext + Press key
Code: 07 Conference Setting up a conference or a On red during setup 826
Operation: Set up Meet Me Conference
call + Press key +
set up call to add +
Press key twice
Code: 08 Missed Calls Viewing answered/missed Flashing when -
Operation: Press trunk calls missed call stored
key
Code: 09 + mode Night Service Activating the Day/Night On red when 818 + mode
(1-8) Mode activated (1-8)
Operation: Press
key
Code: 10 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 4
Operation: Press Immediate or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 11 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 2
Operation: Press Busy or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.

32 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 12 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 6
Operation: Press No Answer or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 13 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 2
Operation: Press Busy/No Answer or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 14 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 7
Operation: Press Both Ring
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 15 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888 + 3
Operation: Press Follow Me or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 16 Call Forwarding, Call Forwarding to extension Slowly flashes red 888
Operation: Press to Station or Voice Mail
key + Dest. Ext.
Code: 17 Call Forwarding, Setting up Call Forwarding Flashes red 713
Operation: Press to Device Off-Premise, Selectable
key + device type Off-Premise Display Messaging, VRS
code + requested Selectable Display Park and Page and VRS
data (depends on Messaging Personal Greeting
device selected). Voice Response System
(VRS)
(Park and Page)
Voice Response System
(VRS)
(Personal Greeting)
Code: 19 + zone (1- Paging, External Broadcasting to an External On red when 803 + zone
8) Paging Zone activated
Operation: Press
key
Code: 20 Paging, External Broadcasting to all External On red when 803 + 0
Operation: Press Paging Zones activated
key
Code: 21 + zone (1- Paging, Internal Broadcasting to an Internal On red when 801 + zone
9 or 01-32) Paging Zone activated
Operation: Press
Key
Code: 22 Paging, Internal Broadcasting to all Internal On red when 801 + 0 or 00
Operation: Press Paging Zone activated
key

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 33

Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 23 Meet Me Paging Joining a Meet Me Page None 863, 864, or

Operation: Press 865
key
Code: 24 Group Call Pickup Answering a call ringing None 867
Operation: CALL + another phone in your Pickup
Press Key Group
Code: 25 Group Call Pickup Answering a call ringing a None 869
Operation: CALL + phone in another Pickup
Press key Group - if you don’t know the
group number
Code: 26 + Pickup Group Call Pickup Answering a call ringing a None 868
Group (1-9 or 01- phone in a specific Pickup
64) Group
Operation: CALL +
Press key + Pickup
Group
Code: 27 Abbreviated Dialing Dialing a stored Common None 813 + bin
Operation: Press Abbreviated Dialing number
key + bin + Line or
CALL key
Code: 28 Dialing a stored Group None 814 + bin
Operation: Press Abbreviated Dialing number
key + bin + Line or
CALL key
Code: 29 Repeat Redial Activating repeat redial while Fast Flash while -
Operation: Place on a call system waits to
call + Press key redial
Code: 30 Save Number Dialed Saving, redialing or checking None 815
Operation: a saved number
Save: Place call +
Press key
Redial: Line or
CALL + Press key
Code: 31 Memo Dial Storing, using or checking a None -
Operation: Memo Dial number
Store: While on call,
Press key + number
to store
Use: Press key +
CALL or line
Erase: CALL +
Press key

34 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 32 Conference, Voice Call Setting up a Voice Call None 863, 864, or
Operation: Set up OR Conference 865
trunk call + Press Meet Me Conference OR
key OR (Also see Conference) Joining a Meet Me
Press key Conference
Code: 33 Off Hook Signaling Signaling a busy extension None 809
Operation: Call
ext. and receive
busy + Press key
Code: 34 Barge In Barging In on a co-worker’s None 810
Operation: Call ext conversation
+ Press key
Code: 35 Callback / Camp On / Leaving a Callback request at On red when 850
Operation: Call Trunk Queuing a busy extension, Camping activated
busy extension or On to a busy extension,
access busy trunk + Queuing for a busy trunk
Press key
Code: 36 Department Step Calling Step Calling through a None 808
Operation: Dial Department Group for an idle
busy ext + Press key member
Code: 37 Call Forwarding / Do Not Overriding an extension’s On red when 807
Operation: Call Disturb Override Call Forwarding or Do Not activated
extension + Press Disturb
key
Code: 38 Message Waiting Answering/Leaving a None 841
Operation: Leave Message Waiting
message: Call ext +
Press key OR
Answer message:
Press key
Code: 39 Room Monitor Activating Room Monitor Fast Flash red at -
Operation: Press destination, Hold
key at destination Flash red at source
and source + ext
Code: 40 Handset Cutoff Cutting off the handset trans- On when feature -
Operation: Press mission while on a call active (no transmis-
key sion on handset)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 35

Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 41 + sec. ext. Secretary Call Calling your secretary (using On red at source -
Operation: Press the buzzer) Fast Flash red at
key destination
Code: 42 + boss ext. A secretary picking up a call On red when -
Operation: Press ringing your boss’s exten- activated
key sion.
Code: 43 Serial Call Placing a Serial Call to a None -
Operation: TRK co-worker
call + Hold + ext +
Press key
Code: 44 Hold Putting a call on System Hold None -
Operation: Place or (if hold key is reassigned)
answer call + Press
key
Code: 45 Putting a call on Exclusive None -
Operation: Place or Hold
answer call + Press
key
Code: 46 Department Calling Logging in or logging out of On when removed, 750
Operation: Press your Department Calling Off when installed
key Group
Code: 47 + dest. ext. Reverse Voice Over Initiating Reverse Voice Over Full BLF red -
Operation: Press
and hold key
Code: 48 Voice Over Initiating or responding to On red when 890
Operation: Hear Voice Over responding Hold
Off-Hook Signaling Flash red when
tones + Press key listening
Code: 49 + ext or Call Redirect Redirecting an incoming call On red when -
voice mail number to an extension or voice mail activated
Operation: Press Flashes when in
key DND/Call Forward
Code: 50 Account Codes Entering Account Codes None * or 891
Operation: Press
key
Code: 51 + relay General Purpose Relay Activating the general pur- On when activd 880
number pose relay
Operation: Press
key

36 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: 54 Call Forward, Off- Forwarding a Door Box call On red when 822
Operation: Press Premise to an external phone number activated
key
Code: 55 Name Storing Changing the name dis- None 800
Operation: Do not played on your display phone
lift handset + Press
key + Enter exten-
sion number + Enter
name + Press HOLD
Code: 66 Data Communications Setting up a Data Call On red when call set -
Operation: Press up
key + ext or outside
number
Code: 67 + ext or Voice Mail Calling Voice Mail or Flashes green on 717
Message Center leaving a message your key for your
number messages or red for
Operation: Press the Message Center
key
Code: 68 + 0-2 Using Voice Mail Service Flashes slowly when
Operation: Press monitoring
key
Code: 69 + 0 Using Voice Mail Record Slow Flash red when -
Operation: Set up active
call + Press key
Code: *01 + Trunk Central Office Calls Pressing a line key to place or On green when 805
number (001-200) answer a trunk call (where seized, on red when
Operation: Press trunks are 001-200) in use (by other
key party), Slow Flash
green when ringing,
Hold flash when on
Hold
Code: *02 + Trk Trunk Groups Using a trunk group key to On red when active 804
group (1-9 or 001- access a Trunk Group
200)
Operation: Press
key
Code: *03 + ext. or Multiple Directory Multiple Directory Number: Slow Flash red when -
department group Numbers/Call Coverage Placing or answering a call ringing, On red
Operation: Press from your virtual (phantom) when busy
key extension or Call Coverage:
Placing or answering a call to
your co-worker’s extension

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 37

Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: *04 + orbit Park Placing a call into or Fast Flash when 831 (Park)
(01-64) retrieving a call from a Park orbit is busy (green 861 (pickup)
Operation: Place or Orbit at originator, red at
answer call + Press others)
key
Code: *05 + 0 Loop Keys, Placing or answering a trunk Flash red when -
(Incoming), 1 Trunk Group Routing call ringing,
(Outgoing) or 2 On green when in
(Both ways) + 000 use,
(All trunk groups Flash green when on
incoming or ARS hold
outgoing) or Trunk
group (001-100)
Operation: Press
key
Code: *06 + Net- Networking Accessing a networked trunk None -
work number (1-50)
Operation: Press
key
Code: *10 Automatic Call Basic Operation On red when logged 839
Operation: Press Distribution (ACD) Logging in or out of an ACD in Off when logged
key to log in Group out
Press key + 1 to log
out or 0 to cancel

38 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 5: Function Key Codes by Number

To program a key, press CALL, dial 851 (for 2-digit codes) or 852 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter
the code (e.g., 48 for Voice Over).

Also see
Use this key... For this feature... When you are... Key Lamp Status
Srvc Code

Code: *11 Automatic Call Call Recording On red while record- 760
Operation: Press Distribution (ACD) Turning ACI Call Recording ing, Off while not
key (cont.) on or off recording
Code: *12 Emergency Call On while calling -
Operation: Press Placing or receiving an your supervisor or
key Emergency Call after being answered
by your supervisor
Flashing fast at the
supervisor while
ringing
Code: *13 Rest Mode On red when Rest -
Operation: Press Enabling/disabling Rest Mode enabled Off
key Mode when Rest Mode
disabled
Code: *14 Out of Service On red when a group -
Operation: Press Taking an ACD Group out of is out of service
key + Press 1 (Yes) service (for Group
or 2 (No) Supervisors only), or Taking
all ACD Groups out of
service (for System
Supervisors only)
Code: *15 Terminal Monitor On red while moni- -
Operation: Call Monitoring an ACD Agent’s toring, Off when not
busy ACD agent + conversation monitoring
Press key
Code: *16 Supervisor Split On while agent is on -
Operation: Press Switching (splitting) between hold
key to put agent on an ACD Agent and their out-
hold. side caller after answering an
Press key again + 1 emergency call
to hang up agent or 0
to bring agent back
into call.
Code: *17 Work Time On when Work -
Operation: Press Enabling/disabling Work Time enabled,
Key Time Flashing (while on a
call) if Auto Work
time enabled Off
when Work Time
disabled
Code: *18 + ACD Enabling ACD overflow On red when -
Group Number activated
Operation: Press Slowly flashes red
key when disabled

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 39

Charts and Illustrations

40 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 6: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

System
Classes of Service 15
Toll Restriction Classes 15
Verifiable Account Code Table 2000
Day/Night Mode Numbers 8
Day/Night Service Patterns 32
Analogue Caller ID Detector 64
Dial Tone Detector 64
DTMF Receiver
Trunk

Trunk Port Number 1 1-200

Trunk Ports (Total) 200

• Analogue Trunks 128
• BRI Trunk Ports 200 (100 BRI circuits)
• PRI Trunk Ports 192 (6 PRI circuits)
• E&M Analogue Trunk Ports 64
• DID Analogue Trunk Ports 128
BRIU Logical Ports T-Bus: 1-200
S-Bus: 1-256
COIU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports 0-200
DIOPU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports LD Trunk: 0-200
OPX: 0-25
PRIU Logical Ports T-Bus: 1-200
S-Bus: 1-256
TLIU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports 0-200
VOIPU:
• Physical Ports 01-32
• Logical Ports 0-200
Trunk Group Numbers 1-100
Trunk Access Maps 1-200
Trunk Routes 1-100
Ring Groups 1-100
DDI Translation Tables 20

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 41

Charts and Illustrations
Table 6: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

DDI Translation Table Entries 2000

Tie Line Classes of Service 15
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15
DISA
• Classes of Service 15
• Users 1-15
Extension

Telephone Extension Port Numbers1 1-512

• System phones (1-512)
• Single Line Phones/Analogue Devices (1-512)

Extension Ports (Total)

• System phones 256
• IP System phones 256
• Single Line Phones/Analogue Devices 256
ESIU
• Physical Ports 01-16
• Logical Ports
-2DCI Adapter 1-32
-PGD for Tone Ringer 1-8
-PGD for Doorbox 1-8
-PGD for Analogue I/F 1-96
-PGD for ACI 1-96
SLIU
• Physical Ports 01-16
• Logical Ports 0-512

Telephone Extension Number Range Up to 8 digits

Virtual Extension Ports 256

Virtual Extension Port Numbers 001-256

Virtual Extension Number Range Undefined

Operator Access Number 0

Operator Extension 1
DSS Consoles, Quantity of extension allocations 8
DSS Consoles, Maximum Installed 32
Door Box Numbers 1-8
Ringdown Assignments 512
Voice Mail Master Numbers Up to 8 digits

42 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations
Table 6: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing Groups 64
Abbreviated Dialing Bins 0-1999
ACD
ACD Group 64
ACD Agent Extensions 512
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers 1-48
Conference
Conference Circuits 64 - maximum
(32 Parties Per Conference)
Data Communication Interfaces
APR Software Port Numbers 193-256
APA, APR, CTA or CTA Modules 128
Module Extension Number Range Up to 8 digits
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group Numbers 1-64
Department (Extension) Group Number Range Up to 8 digits
Call Pickup Group Numbers 1-64
Hotline
Internal Hotline 512
External Hotline 512
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 1-9 or 01-64
External Page Group Numbers 0, 1-8
External Speakers 8
• NTCPU (1)
• PGD Adapter (1-8)
Park Group Numbers 1-64
Park Orbits 1-64
SMDR
SMDR Ports 1-8

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 43

Charts and Illustrations
Table 6: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

VRS
VRS (on DSP Daughter Board) 1
Voice Mail
Voice Mail (DSPDB) Mailboxes 1-300
Voice Mail Channels 1-16
VoIP
RAS Unicast Ports 0-65535
Call Signaling Ports 0-65535
NGT Signal Receive Ports 0-65535
DRS Ports 0-65535
RTP Ports 0-65535
RTCP Ports 0-65535
H.245 Ports 0-65535
DSP Resources 01-32
H.323 Alias Addresses 1-6
Passwords
User Password for setting Toll Restriction Override and Changing Class of 0000
Service using a service code
Programming Passwords
Level 2 (IN) 12345678
Level 3 (SA) 0000
Level 4 (SB) 9999
Programming Password Users 8
Footnotes
1
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (512).
Extension numbers can be from one to eight digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.

44 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations

Figure 1: SUPER DISPLAY TELEPHONE

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 45

Charts and Illustrations

Figure 2: MULTIBUTTON TELEPHONE

46 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations

Figure 3: 110-BUTTON DSS CONSOLE

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 47

Charts and Illustrations

Figure 4: 24-BUTTON DSS CONSOLE

48 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Charts and Illustrations

Figure 5: Digital Two-Button Telephone

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 49

Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing

Aspila EX
• Available

• 2000 bins available (0000-1999) for Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing. Up to 64 Abbreviated Dialing Groups
available.

Description
Abbreviated Dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves
time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of dialing a long tele-
phone number, the extension user just dials the Abbreviated Dialing code.

There are three types of Abbreviated Dialing: Common, Group and Personal. All co-workers can
share the Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers. All co-worker’s in the same Abbreviated Dialing
Group can share the Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. Personal Abbreviated Dialing numbers
are available only at a user’s own extension. To set up Personal Abbreviated Dialing, refer to the
“One-Touch Calling” feature. The system has 2000 Abbreviated Dialing bins that you can allocate
between Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing.

Each Abbreviated Dialing bin can store a number up to 24 digits long.

When placing an Abbreviated Dialing call, the system normally routes the call through Trunk
Group Routing or ARS (whichever is enabled). Or, the user can preselect a specific trunk for the
call. In addition, the system can optionally force Common Abbreviated Dialing numbers to route
over a specific Trunk Group. User pre-selection always overrides the system routing.

DSS Console Chaining

DSS Console chaining allows an extension user with a DSS Console to chain to an Abbreviated
Dialing number stored under a DSS Console key. The stored number dials out (chains) to the initial
call. This can, for example, simplify dialing when calling a company with an Automated Attendant.
You can program the bin for the company number under one DSS Console key (e.g., #200) and the
client’s extension number under the other (e.g., #201). The DSS Console user presses the first key
to call the company, waits for the Automated Attendant to answer, then presses the second key to
call the client (extension 400). See Programming below for additional details.

The DSS Console user can also chain to an Abbreviated Dialing number dialed manually, from a
Programmable Function Key or a One-Touch Key.

Storing a Flash
To enhance compatibility with connected Centrex and PBX lines, an Abbreviated Dialing bin can
have a stored Flash command. For example, storing 9 Flash 926 5400 will cause the system to dial
9, flash the line and then dial 926 5400. The Flash can be stored by the user from their telephone or
by the system administrator during system programming.

Using a Programmable Function Key

To streamline frequently-called numbers, an Abbreviated Dialing Programmable Function Key can
also store an Abbreviated Dialing bin number. When the extension user presses the key, the phone
automatically dials out the stored number. This provides true one-touch calling via a phone’s func-
tion keys.

50 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Abbreviated Dialing

Description (Cont’d)

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Available. There are no Group Abbreviated Dialing bins assigned.

Programming
• 13-01-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup - Common Abbreviated Dialing Bins
Designate the bins the system will use for Common Abbreviated Dialing.
• 13-02-01 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins
Designate the bins the system will use for Group Abbreviated Dialing.
• 13-03-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Groups for Extensions
For Group Abbreviated Dialing, assign extensions to Abbreviated Dialing groups (1-64).
• 13-04-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name
Enter the Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers and names.
• 13-05-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group
For each Common Abbreviated Dialing number, enter the routing option. To use ARS or
Trunk Group Routing, enter 9. To use a specific Trunk Group, enter the group number (1-
100).
• 14-02-06 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Pause Time
Enable/disable the systems ability to pause after dialing the first digit.
• 15-02-04 : Abbreviated Dialing DIAL Key Control
Assign the extensions’ DIAL key for either Common (0) or Group (1) Abbreviated Dialing.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Common Abbreviated Dialing (code 813) or Group Abbreviated
Dialing (code 814). You can program the key as either a general Abbreviated Dialing key or
you can choose to store a bin number with the function key. This key would then always dial
the associated bin number. If storing a bin number along with the code, do not store 0, 00 or
000. To bypass entering a bin number, press HOLD (HOLD is also required if programming
the function key using the service code 851).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-07-04 : COS Options (Administrator Level) - Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries
In an extension’s COS, allow (1) or prevent (0) the storing of Abbreviated Dialing entries
(codes 853 and 854). Preventing this option will also prevent the user’s display from showing
the telephone number. This can be used when you want to prevent account codes from being
displayed.
• 20-08-03 : COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Common Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) Common Abbreviated Dialing.
• 20-08-04 : COS Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Group Abbreviated Dialing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Group Abbreviated Dialing.
• 30-03-01 : DSS Console Key Assignment
For DSS Console Chaining, assign an Abbreviated Dialing Service Code (813 or 814) plus a
two-digit bin number to a DSS Console key.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 51

Abbreviated Dialing
• 80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for out-
going Abbreviated Dialing calls.
• 81-01-16 : ATRU-LS Initial Data Setup - Pause Time
If Abbreviated Dialing numbers include a pause, the system uses this timer to determine the
length of the pause. This timer is enabled/disabled in 14-02-06.

Related Features
Account Codes
Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being dis-
played using 20-07-04.
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user
preselects.
Central Office Calls, Placing
A user can implement Abbreviated Dialing only if their extension has outgoing access to trunks.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
One-Touch Calling
An extension can have a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing operation.
PBX Compatibility
If you enter a PBX trunk access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin, the system automatically
inserts a pause after the bin.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Abbreviated Dialing operation.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only dial Common and Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction may prevent a user from using a stored Abbreviated Dialing number.
Trunk Group Routing
Unless a user preselects a trunk, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk Abbreviated Dialing
uses for trunk calls.

Operation
To store an Abbreviated Dialing number (display phones only):
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 853 (for common) or 854 (for group).
3. Dial common or group storage code (000-999).
Initially, there are 1000 Common Abbreviated Dialing codes. There are Group Abbre-
viated Dialing codes only if you define them in programming.
4. Dial telephone number you want to store (up to 24 digits).
Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. To enter a pause, press MIC. To store a Flash, press
FLASH.
5. Press HOLD.

52 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Abbreviated Dialing
6. Enter the name associated with the Abbreviated Dialing number.

When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
be up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed - ex: STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor
and to the right.
7. Press HOLD
8. Press SPK to hang up.

To dial a Common Abbreviated Dialing number:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 813.
OR
Press DIAL key.
OR
Press Common Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 27).
To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DIAL or
Abbreviated Dialing key)
3. Dial Common Abbreviated Dialing storage code.
The stored number dials out.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call. The system
may optionally select a specific Trunk Group for the call.
If you have a DSS Console, you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a
stored number.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 53

Abbreviated Dialing
To dial a Group Abbreviated Dialing number:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 814.
OR
Press DIAL key.
OR
Press Group Abbreviated Dialing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 28).
To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of CALL) before pressing the DIAL or
Abbreviated Dialing key)
3. Dial the Group Abbreviated Dialing code.
The stored number dials out.
Unless you preselect, Trunk Group Routing selects the trunk for the call.
If you have a DSS Console, you may be able to press a DSS Console key to chain to a
stored number.

To check your stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers (display phone only):

1. Press CHECK.
2. For Common Abbreviated Dialing, press DIAL.
Dial the Abbreviated Dialing Code (e.g., common code 001).
If the entire stored number is too long for your phone’s display, press * to see the rest
of it.
OR
For Group Abbreviated Dialing, press the Group Abbreviated Dialing key.
OR
For Common Abbreviated Dialing key, press the Common Abbreviated Dialing key.
3. Press CLEAR.
To display additional numbers, repeat from step 1.

54 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Account Codes
Account Codes

Aspila EX
• Available.

Description
Account Codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict
trunk calls. The system has three types of Account Codes:

• Optional Account Codes

Optional Account Codes allow a user to enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call or
anytime while on a call. This type of Account Code is optional; the system does not require
the user to enter it.
• Forced Account Codes
Forced Account Codes require an extension user to enter an Account Code every time they
place a trunk call. If the user doesn’t enter the code, the system prevents the call. As with
Optional Account Codes, the extension user can elect to enter an Account Code for an incom-
ing call. However, the system does not require it. Forced Account Codes does not block
emergency assistance calls.

Once set up in system programming, you can enable Forced Account Codes on a trunk-by-
trunk basis. In addition, Forced Account Codes can apply to all outside calls or just long dis-
tance calls. Forced Account Codes for Toll Calls restricts calls according to the following
chart:

Number of Digits Dialed If first digit is not 1 If first digit is 1

1-3 Not allowed Not allowed

4-7 Allowed - does not require Allowed - requires Account
Account Code Code

More than 71 Allowed - requires Account Allowed - requires Account

Code Code
800 and 888 Allowed - requires Account Allowed - does not require
Code Account Code
011 (International) Allowed - requires Account N/A
Code
911 Allowed - does not require N/A
Account Code
1
If you change the local call length in Toll Restriction, this value changes accordingly.

• Verified Account Codes

With Verified Account Codes, the system compares the Account Code the user dials to a list
of up to 1000 pre-programmed codes. If the Account Code is in the list, the call goes through.
If the code dialed is not in the list, the system prevents the call. Verified Account Codes can
be from 3-16 digits long using the characters 0-9 and #. During programming, you can use
“wild cards” to streamline entering codes into system memory. For example, the entry 123W
lets users dial Verified Account Codes from 1230 through 1239.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 55

Account Codes
Operator Notification
To prevent Account Code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an Account Code vio-
lation occurs. This can happen if the user fails to enter an Account Code (if Forced) or enters a Veri-
fied Account Code that is not in the list. The notification is an automatic Intercom call to the
attendant and a “RESTRICT” message in the operator’s display. (If the attendant fails to enter a valid
Account Code, the system drops the call.)

Account Codes for Incoming Calls

The system can control the ability of extension users to enter Account Codes for incoming calls.
When this option is enabled, a user can dial * while on an incoming call, enter an Account Code,
and then dial * to return to their caller. If the option is disabled, any digits the user dials after
answering an incoming call outdial on the connected trunk.

Hiding Account Codes

Account Codes can be optionally hidden from a telephone’s display. This would prevent, for exam-
ple, an unauthorized co-worker from obtaining a Verified Account Code by watching the display
and making note of the digits that dial out. When hidden, the Account Code digits show as the char-
acter “*” on the telephone’s display.

Account Code Capacity

Account Codes print along with the other call data on the SMDR record after the call completes.
Account Codes can be 1-16 digits in length using 0-9 and #. Verified Account Codes can be from
3-16 digits long.

Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Account Codes

When using the Last Number Redial, Save or Repeat Dial features, the system will not retain
Account Code information. Any number redialed with these features, the user will need to reenter
an Account Code.

Note:
If a user enters *12345*203 926 5400*67890*, if the Last Number Redial feature is used, the sys-
tem dials the number as 203 926 5400*67890*. The *67890* is not treated as an Account Code.

Conditions
(A.) If a user enters a code that exceeds the 16 digit limit, the system ignores the Account Code
entry.
(B.) If the system has Account Codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.g., *1234*) appear on the
SMDR report as part of the number dialed.
(C.) Do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code when using Account Codes. Otherwise, after
the *, the trunk will stop sending digits to the central office.

Default Setting
Account Codes are disabled.

56 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Account Codes

Programming
• 14-01-11 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Account Code
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Account Codes for each trunk.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as an Account Code key (code 50). Use this key instead of the dial pad
to enter the * before and after the Account Code.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class
Use this option to assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension.
• 35-05-01 : Account Code Setup - Account Code Mode
For each Class of Service (1-15) use this option to select the Account Code Mode. The
options are:
0 Account Codes disabled. (Any codes you enter dial out as part of your initial
call.)
1 Account Codes optional (not required).
2 Account Codes required (forced) but not verifiable.
3 Account Codes required (forced) and verifiable.
• 35-05-02 : Account Code Setup - Forced Account Code Toll Call Setup
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Forced Account Codes for
just toll calls. Enter 0 to enable Forced Account Codes for local and toll calls.
• 35-05-03 : Account Code Setup - Account Codes for Incoming Calls
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 in this option to enable Account Codes for incoming
calls. Enter 0 to disable Account Codes for incoming calls. If disabled, any codes you enter
dial out on the connected trunk.
• 35-05-04 : Account Code Setup - Hiding Account Codes
For each Class of Service (1-15), enter 1 to have the system hide Account Codes on an exten-
sion’s display as they are entered. Enter 0 to have the Account Codes displayed.
• 35-06-01 : Verified Account Code Table
Use this option to enter data into the Verified Account Code Table. You can enter up to 2000
codes from 3-16 digits in length. For a wild card, press the FLASH key.

Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing bins can contain stored Account Codes. Prevent them from being dis-
played using 20-07-04.
Automatic Route Selection
ARS can force a user to enter an Authorization Code prior to using a certain route. The system
verifies the ARS Authorization Code dialed against the ARS Authorization Code list (Pro-
gram 44-03).
One-Touch Calling
To simplify Account Code entry, store the Account Code (e.g., *1234*) in a One-Touch Key.
Just press the key instead of dialing the codes.
PBX Compatibility
When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code. Otherwise,
after the *, the trunk would stop sending digits to the central office.
Station Message Detail Recording
Account Codes appear on the SMDR report (even if they are hidden on the phone’s display).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 57

Account Codes

Operation
To enter an Account Code any time while on a trunk call:
The outside caller cannot hear the Account Code digits you enter.
You can use this procedure if your system has Optional Account Codes enabled. You
may also be able to use this procedure for incoming calls.
This procedure is not available at SLTs.
1. Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50).
2. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “*” character on the
telephone’s display.
3. Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50).

To enter an Account Code before dialing the outside number:

If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must use this procedure. If it has Veri-
fied Account Codes, you can use this procedure instead of letting the system prompt you
for your Account Code. You may also use this procedure if your system has Optional
Account Codes.
If your system has Verified Account Codes enabled, be sure to choose a code pro-
grammed into your Verified Account Code list.
1. Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code (except 9). Refer to
Central Office Calls, Placing (page 120) for more information.
2. Dial *
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)
3. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If you make an incorrect entry, your system may automatically alert the operator. If
Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “*” character on the tele-
phone’s display.
4. Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)
5. Dial the number you want to call.
If you hear “stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter
an ARS Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection (F-Route) (page 79)
for more information.

58 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Account Codes

Operation (Cont’d)
To dial an outside number and let your system tell you when an Account Code is
required:
1. Access a trunk and dial the number you want to call.
If you hear “stutter dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting that you enter
an ARS Authorization Code. Refer to Automatic Route Selection (F-Route) (page 79)
for more information.
2. Wait for your call to go through.
OR
If you hear “Please enter an Account Code,” and your display shows ENTER ACCOUNT
CODE:
• Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)
• Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
If Account Codes are hidden, each digit you dial will show an “*” character on the
telephone’s display.
• Dial *.
OR
Press your Account Code key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 50)

To enter an Account Code for an incoming call:

This procedure is not available at SLTs.
1. Answer incoming call.
If Account Codes for Incoming Calls is disabled, the following steps will dial digits out
onto the connected trunk.
2. Dial *.
3. Enter the Account Code.
You can enter any code of the proper length. Incoming Account Codes cannot be
Forced or Verified.
4. Dial *.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 59

Account Codes

Operation (Cont’d)
To enter an Account Code while placing a trunk call:
If your system has Forced Account Codes, you must follow this procedure.
1. Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by pressing a line key or dialing a code. Refer to Central Office
Calls, Placing for more information.
With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.” Your display
shows: ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
2. Dial *.
3. Dial your Account Code (1-16 digits, using 0-9 and #).
4. Dial *
If the system has Forced Account Codes and you don’t enter a code, your call cannot
go through. You can, however, dial ** to bypass Forced Account Code entry.
5. Dial number you want to call.
If you hear “stutter” dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter
an ARS Authorization Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more
information on ARS Authorization Codes.

To enter an Account Code at a single line set:

1. Access trunk for outside call.
You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to Central Office Calls, Placing for
more information.
With Forced Account Codes, you hear, “Please enter an Account Code.” Your display
shows: ENTER ACCOUNT CODE.
2. Dial *.
3. Enter Account Code (1-16 digits).
4. Dial *.
5. Dial number you want to call.
If you hear “stutter” dial tone after dialing the number, ARS is requesting you to enter
an ARS Authorization Code. Refer to the Automatic Route Selection feature for more
information on ARS Authorization Codes.

60 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Alarm
Alarm

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Alarm lets a system phone extension work like an Alarm clock. An extension user can have Alarm
remind them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of Alarms:
• Alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time)
• Alarm 2 (sounds every day at the preset time)

Conditions
Single line sets will ring and Music on Hold will be heard when the alarm sounds.

Default Setting
Alarm is enabled.

Programming
• 20-01-06 : System Options - Alarm Duration
Set the duration of the Alarm signal (0-64800 seconds).

Related Features
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 61

Alarm

Operation
To set the alarm:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 827.
3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
Alarm 1 sounds only once. Alarm 2 sounds each day at the preset time.
4. Dial the alarm time (24-hour clock).
For example, for 1:15 PM dial 1315.
A confirmation tone will be heard if the alarm has been set. If the alarm was not set, an
error tone will be heard instead.
5. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.

To silence an alarm:
1. At system phone, press CLEAR.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
The single line set user will hear Music on Hold when the handset is lifted.

To check the programmed alarm time:

1. Press CHECK.
2. Dial 827.
3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
The programmed time displays.
4. Press CLEAR.

To cancel an alarm:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 827.
3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2).
4. Dial 9999.
5. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.

62 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Alphanumeric Display
Alphanumeric Display

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
System display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character per line alphanumeric display that provides
various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls,
identify callers and customize features.

Conditions
The contrast is not adjustable when the telephone has background music enabled.

Default Setting
Enabled for all display telephones (except super display sets).

Programming
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-08 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s incoming Transfer
pre-answer display.

Related Features
None

Operation
Operation is automatic if enabled in programming.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 63

Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)
Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

Aspila EX
• Available - 96 ACI software ports (48 PGDAD modules max. for ACI modes) and 16 ACI Department Groups.

Description
The Analogue Communications Interface (ACI) feature uses a PGDAD module to provide two ana-
logue ports (with associated relays) for Music on Hold, External Paging or external recording. The
system allows up to 48 PGDAD modules, for a maximum of 96 analogue ports. Each PGDAD
module requires an unused port on an ESIU PCB.

• Music on Hold
You can connect up to two customer-provided Music on Hold music sources to a PGDAD
module. This lets you add additional music sources if the external source on the NTCPU PCB
or the internal source are not adequate. By using PGDAD modules, you could even have a dif-
ferent music source for each trunk.

When the system switches the ACI analogue port to a trunk on Hold, the PGDAD relay asso-
ciated with the ACI analogue port closes. You can use this capability to switch on the music
source, if desired.

Extension users can dial the ACI analogue port extension number and listen to the connected
music source. The PGDAD relay associated with the port closes when the call goes through.

For Music on Hold, connect the music source to the PGDAD module. Connect the music
source control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for addi-
tional details.

• External Paging
An ACI analogue port can also be an External Page output. When connected to customer-pro-
vided External Paging equipment, the ACI port provides External Paging independent of the
NTCPU external paging input. To use the External Paging, an extension user just dials the
ACI analogue port extension number and makes the announcement. The system broadcasts
the announcement from the ACI analogue port and simultaneously closes the associated
PGDAD relay. You can use the relay closure to control the External Paging amplifier, if
required.

This external paging zone is not included in external all call paging or combination paging
(internal and external).

For External Paging, connect the Paging amplifier to the PGDAD jack. Connect the amplifier
control leads to the CTL (control relay) jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional
details.

• Auxiliary Device Control

The PGDAD module can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user
dials the ACI analogue port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and
activate the record function. When the user hangs up, the recording stops and the tape
recorder turns off. For tape recording, connect the tape recorder AUX input jack to the
PGDAD jack. Connect the recorder control leads (if available) to the CTL (control relay)
jack. Refer to the Hardware Manual for additional details.

By using Department Calling, you can arrange multiple tape recorders into a pool. When an
extension user dials the Department Group pilot number, they reach the first available tape

64 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)
recorder in the pool.

The relays in the PGDAD module can optionally control customer-provided external ringers
(loud bells) and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analogue port extension num-
ber, the associated PGDAD relay closes and activates the ringer. You could use this capabil-
ity to control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.

• ACI Call Recording

ACI Call Recording allows you to use a recording device connected to a PGDAD module to
automatically record calls. The recording device is typically a customer-provided tape
recorder. Once set up, ACI Call Recording starts automatically as soon as the user answers
their call. You can set up ACI Call Recording to output to a single ACI port/recording device
or to a pool of ACI ports/devices. With a single device, all calls are stored in a centralized
location. With a pool of devices, you’ll be sure to have a port available for recording - even in
peak traffic periods.

Once set up, ACI Call Recording automatically occurs for all trunk calls that ring an exten-
sion. This includes the following trunk types:
• Central Office calls programmed to ring the extension.
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
• Direct Inward Line (DIL)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Tie lines

ACI Call Recording is not available for outgoing trunk calls, transferred calls or Intercom
calls. You can set up recording on a per trunk or per extension basis.

Physical Ports and Software Ports

Each PGDAD module consists of a physical port for connection to the phone system and four ana-
logue ports. For programming purposes, the analogue ports are also called software ports (see the
illustration below). The physical port connects to a station position on a EISU PCB. During installa-
tion, the first PGDAD module you set up is physical port 1; the second PGDAD module is physical
port 2, etc. Each PGDAD module has four software ports, which are numbered independently of the
physical ports. Normally, the first PGDAD module set up has software ports 1-4; the second PGDAD
module has software ports 5-8, etc. There are a total of 96 software ports (24 PGDAD modules x 4
ports each). During programming, you assign ACI extension numbers and Department Group options
to PGDAD software ports, not physical ports. During installation, you connect equipment to the jacks
on the PGDAD module that correspond to the software port. Refer to the system Hardware Manual
for more installation details.

Conditions
The devices connected to the PGDAD module must be compatible with the specifications below.
Refer to the system Hardware Manual for additional details.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 65

Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

PGDAD/ACI Interface Specifications

Relay Contacts
Maximum Contact Ratings 24 V DC @ 500 mA
120 V AC @ 250 mA
Audio/Music Input
Input Impedance 47 K Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Input Level Nominal -10dBm
Audio/Paging Output
Output Impedance 600 Ohms @ 1 K Hz
Maximum Output + 3 dBm

Default Setting
No PGDAD modules programmed.

Programming
• 10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
Assign the number of conversation record circuits.
• 11-06-01 : ACI Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to ACI software ports (1-96). This lets system users dial ACI ports
directly. Select a number outside of the normal extension number range.
• 11-08-01 : ACI Group Pilot Number
Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups (1-16). When a user dials the pilot number, they reach an
available ACI software port within the group.
• 15-12-01 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
Use this option to assign the ACI Call Recording destination on a per extension basis. The
destination can be an ACI port’s extension number (assigned in Program 11-06) or an ACI
Department Group pilot number (assigned in Program 11-08).
• 33-01-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Set each ACI software port (1-96) for input (1) or input/output (2). Use input ports for Music
on Hold sources. Use output ports for External Paging/ringer control.
• 33-02-01 : ACI Department Calling Group
Assign ACI software ports (1-96) to ACI Department Groups (16). This lets ACI callers con-
nect to ACI software ports by dialing the group’s pilot number (set in Program 11-08).

66 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ACD agents which are logged on can be recorded.
Background Music
ACI software ports cannot be Background Music music sources.
Hotline
An extension cannot have Hotline keys for ACI software ports.
Music on Hold ACI software ports can be Music on Hold music sources.
One-Touch Calling
An extension can have One-Touch Keys for ACI software ports. The gives the extension user:
- One touch access to external music
- One touch External Paging
- One touch loud ringer control
Paging, External
ACI software ports can provide External Paging with control, independent of the External
Paging circuits on the NTCPU PCB.

Operation
To call an ACI software port:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial ACI software port extension number.
OR
Dial ACI Department Group extension number.
OR
Press One-Touch Key for ACI extension or Department Group.

After you call an ACI software port:

• If the port is set for input (Program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear
music.
OR
• If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and External Paging is connected, you can
page into the external zone.
OR
• If the port is set for output (Program 33-01-01=2) and a loud ringer is connected, you activate
the loud ringer.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 67

Attendant Call Queuing
Attendant Call Queuing

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy
tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow destina-
tion for unanswered calls. For example, you can program Direct Inward Lines and Voice Mail calls
to route to the attendant when their primary destination is busy. With Attendant Call Queuing, these
unanswered calls would normally “stack up” for the attendant until they can be processed.

The 32 call queue total includes Intercom, DISA, DID, DDI, DIL, tie line and transferred calls. If
the attendant doesn’t have an appearance for the queued call, it waits in line on a CALL key. If the
attendant has more than 32 calls queued, an extension can Transfer a call to the attendant only if
they have Busy Transfer enabled.

Attendant Call Queuing is a permanent, non-programmable system feature.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension
Assign the operator (attendant’s) extension.
• 24-02-01 : System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to Transfer calls to an attendant that has more than 32 calls
is queue.

Related Features
Call Forwarding / Personal Greeting
Forwarding when unanswered or busy can only occur at the attendant if there are more than
32 calls in queue.

Operation
None

68 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Aspila EX
• Available - 64 ACD Groups.

• For more information, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

Description
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) uniformly distributes calls among member agents of a pro-
grammed ACD Group. When a call rings into an ACD Group, the system automatically routes the
call to the agent that has been idle the Automatic Call Distribution is much more sophisticated and
comprehensive than Department Calling and other group services - it can accurately judge the work
load at each agent and distribute calls accordingly. The system allows up to 64 ACD Groups.

You can put any agent in any group. In addition, an agent can be in more than one group as long as only
one of the groups is active at a time. This allows, or example, a Technical Service representation to
answer Customer Service calls at lunch time when many of the Customer Service reps are unavailable.

The ACD Master Number is the “extension number” of the whole group. Calls directly ringing or
transferred to the ACD Master number enter the group and are routed accordingly. Although the
master number can be any valid extension number, you should choose a number that is out of the
normal extension range.

Automatic Call Distribution operation is further enhanced by:

• ACD Overflow (With Announcements)

ACD offers extensive overflow options for each ACD Group. For example, a caller ringing in
when all agents are unavailable can hear an initial announcement (called the 1st Announce-
ment). This announcement can be a general greeting like, “Thank you for calling. All of our
agents are currently busy helping other customers. Please stay on the line and we will help
you shortly.” If the caller continues to wait, you can have them hear another announcement
(called the 2nd Announcement) such as, “Your business is important to us. Your call will be
automatically answered by the first available agent. Please stay on the line.” If all the ACD
Group’s agents still are unavailable, the call can automatically overflow to another ACD
Group or the Voice Mail Automated Attendant. If all agents in the overflow ACD Group are
busy, Lookback Routing automatically ensures that the waiting call will ring into the first
agent in either group that becomes free.
You can assign an ACD Group with any combination of 1st Announcement, 2nd Announce-
ment and overflow method. You can have, for example, a Technical Service group that plays
only the 2nd Announcement to callers and then immediately overflows to Voice Mail. At the
same time, you can have a Customer Service group that plays both announcements and does
not overflow.

• Agent Log In and Log Out Services

An ACD Agent can log in and log out of their ACD Group. While logged in, the agent is
available to receive ACD Group calls. When logged out, the agent is excluded from the
group’s calls. The programmable keys and alphanumeric display on an agent’s phone show at
a glance when they are logged in or logged out.

• Emergency Call
If an ACD Agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an Emergency Call to their
ACD Group Supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the Emergency Call, they automatically
monitor both the ACD Agent and the caller. If the agent needs assistance, the supervisor can
join in the conversation. Emergency Call can be a big help to inexperienced ACD Agents that

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 69

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
need technical advise or assistance with a difficult caller. The supervisor can easily listen to
the conversation and then “jump in” if the situation gets out of hand.

• Enhanced DSS Operation

An ACD Supervisor (Group or System) can use their DSS Console to monitor the status of the
ACD Agents within a group. The DSS Console is an essential tool for supervisors. Once you
assign a DSS Console to a supervisor, the 10 function keys in the last row become ACD Group
select buttons (see the illustration below). When the supervisor presses a button for an ACD
Group, the console key flash rates tell the supervisor at a glance which of the group’s agents are:
- Logged onto the group (i.e., in service)
- Logged out of the group (i.e., out of service)
- Busy on a call
- Placing an Emergency Call to the supervisor
- Not available or installed

The ACD Supervisor can also use their console for placing and transferring calls - just like
any other extension user.

• Flexible Time Schedules

An ACD Work Schedule lets you divide a day into segments (called Work Periods) for sched-
uling the activity in your ACD Groups. You can set up four distinct Work Schedules, with up
to eight Work Periods in each Work Schedule. Each day of the week has one Work Schedule,
but different days can share the same schedule. For example, your Monday through Friday
Work Schedule could consist of only two Work Periods. Work Period 1 could be from 8:00
AM to 5:00 PM - when your business is open. Work Period 2 could be from 5:00 PM to 8:00
AM - which covers those times when your business is closed.

• Headset Operation (With Automatic Answer)

An ACD Agent or ACD Group Supervisor can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of
the handset. The headset conveniently frees up the user’s hands for other work and provides
privacy while on the call. In addition, an ACD Agent with a headset can have Automatic
Answer. This allows an agent busy on a call to automatically connect to the next waiting call
when they hang up.

• Incoming Call Routing

Incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific ACD Groups. These types of calls
ring directly into the ACD Group without being transferred by a co-worker or the Automated
Attendant.

• Rest Mode
Rest Mode temporarily logs-out an ACD agent’s phone. There are two types of Rest Mode:-
- Manual Rest Mode
An ACD Agent can enable Manual Rest Mode anytime they want to temporarily log out
of the ACD Group. They might want to do this if they go to a meeting or get called away
from their work area. While logged out, calls to the ACD Group will not ring the agent’s
phone.
- Automatic Rest Mode
When an ACD Group has Automatic Rest Mode, the system will automatically put an
agent’s phone in Rest Mode if it is not answered. This ensures callers won’t have to wait
while ACD rings an extension that won’t be answered. For system phones, the system
enables Automatic Rest Mode for all phones with Rest Mode keys. For SLTs, you must
set an option in programming to enable Automatic Rest Mode.

• Supervisor, ACD Group

You can designate an extension in an ACD Group to be the group’s supervisor. Once assigned

70 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
as an ACD Group Supervisor, the user can:
- Take the entire ACD Group out of service.
- Check the log out status of each agent after the group taken down.
- Restore the ACD Group to service.

During programming, you can choose one of three modes of operation for each ACD Group
supervisor:
- Supervisor’s extension cannot receive calls to the ACD Group.
- Supervisor’s extension can only receive ACD Group calls during overflow conditions.
- Supervisor’s extension receives calls just like any other ACD Group agent (mode 2).

An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor
for only one ACD Group.

• Supervisor, ACD System

You can designate an extension as an ACD System Supervisor. Once assigned as an ACD
System Supervisor, the user can:
- Take the all the system’s ACD Groups out of service simultaneously.
- Check the log out status of each agent after the groups are taken down.
- Restore all the ACD Groups to service simultaneously.

The system can have only one ACD System Supervisor.

• Traffic Management Reports

The system provides comprehensive Traffic Management (TMS) Reports that help when ana-
lyzing ACD traffic, system usage and calling patterns. Refer to the Traffic Management fea-
ture for more information. The TMS report is in five sections:
- Trunk Calls Sorted by Extension
- Trunk Calls Sorted by Trunk
- ACD Calls Sorted by Agent
- ACD Calls Sorted by ACD Group
- All Trunks Busy Report

• Work Time
Work Time temporarily busies-out an ACD agent’s phone so they can work at their desk
uninterrupted. This gives the agent time to fill out important logs and records as soon as they
are finished with their call. There are two types of Work Time:

- Manual Work Time

An ACD Agent can enable Manual Work Time any time they need to work at their desk
undisturbed. You might prefer this Work Time mode if an agent only occasionally has to
fill out follow-up paper work after they complete their call. When the agent is through
catching up with their work, they manually return themselves to the ACD Group.

- Automatic Work Time

The system implements Automatic Work Time for the agent as soon as they hang up their
current call. This is helpful in applications (such as Tech Service groups) where follow-up
paperwork is a requirement for every call. When the agent is done with their work, they
manually return themselves to the ACD Group.

- ACD Group Call Coverage Keys

To help cover calls during peak periods, a system phone can have Call Coverage keys for
ACD Groups. When a call rings into a covered ACD Group, it rings the appropriate ACD
Group Call Coverage key. The key can ring immediately, after a delay or just flash. The
Call Coverage key also facilitates one-button Transfer for an ACD Group. The covering
extension does not have to be a member of the ACD Group.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 71

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

- Hotline Key Shows Agent Status

An extension’s Hotline keys provide the “normal” Busy Lamp Field (BLF) for co-workers
and a unique BLF for ACD Agents. Similarly to the supervisor’s DSS Console BLF, the
unique BLF shows when the covered agent is in service, out of service or busy on a call.
This enhanced BLF gives a department manager, for example, ACD Group monitoring
capabilities without having to become a supervisor with a DSS Console.

- Enhanced Supervisor Options

An ACD supervisor can individually assign extensions to ACD Groups, and set an agent’s
status once assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign
agents as work loads vary.

- Queue Status Display with Scrolling

To aid in keeping track of call volumes, a display system phone user can view any ACD
Group’s Queue Status Display by pressing a uniquely programmed Programmable Func-
tion Key. The user can the press VOL s and VOL t to scroll through all the system’s ACD
Group queues. The display system phone does not have to be an ACD Agent or supervi-
sor.

- Overflow Announcements from Voice Mail

The NVM-Series Voice Mail system can provide the ACD overflow announcements in
systems that do not have a DSP daughter board installed for VRS. When a caller queues
for an available agent, designated Voice Mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes provide the
overflow messages.

- Escape from Queue with NVM-Series

Escape From Queue uses NVM-Series Call Routing Mailboxes for announcement mes-
sages to provide callers with enhanced options while in queue. After listening to this type
of announcement, they can either wait in queue or dial a digit for an alternate destination.
The destination is typically the operator, a mailbox or an extension.

72 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
- Programmable Wrap-up Timer
When an agent finishes their call, the system automatically starts a wrap-up timer and
blocks any ACD calls to the agent. This gives them time to complete important logs and
records before a new call comes in. When the timer expires, the system returns the agent
to the ACD Group to handle new callers.

- InDepth and inDepth+

InDepth and inDepth+ are Windows-based Management Information Systems that work
with the system’s built-in ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the system with real
time statistics and reports on ACD Group traffic patterns and usage. Refer to the InDepth
on page 222 for more.

ACD Queue Status System Updates Changed

The system follows programming to determine whether or not the Queue Status Information will be
displayed, how long it should display, and how often the system refreshes the queue information.
This change allows quicker system performance as it reduces the number of signals the system
must send.

ACD Group as Overflow Destination

The system can transfer an overflow call to a specific ACD Group or to voice mail using Program
41-09. When Program 41-08-02 : ACD Overflow Destination has the ACD Overflow Destination
set to '65', the system will overflow the call to the ACD Group programmed in Program 41-09.
(The system will not allow you to program an ACD group with that ACD group as the overflow.)

For more on Automatic Call Distribution, refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

Conditions
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

Default Setting
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

Programming
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD) for complete programming details.

• 41-01-01 : System Options for ACD - System Supervisory Extension

41-01-02 : System Options for ACD - Login ID Code Digit
41-01-03 : System Options for ACD - ACD MIS Connection Port
Define the system options for the ACD feature.
• 41-02-01 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
For each ACD extension number, assign an ACD Group (1-64). An ACD Group number is
assigned to each Work Period number (1-8).
• 41-03-01 : Incoming Ring Group Assignments for ACD Group - ACD Group Number
For each incoming trunk group set up in Program 14-05 (1-100), designate into which ACD
Group (1-64) the trunks should ring for each of the eight Work Periods.
• 41-03-02 : Incoming Ring Group Assignments for ACD Group - Night Announcement
Service
For each incoming trunk group set up in Program 14-05 (1-100), determine if the Night
Announcement Service should be enabled (1) or disabled (0).
• 41-03-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignments for ACD Group - Priority Data
Assign an Incoming Trunk Ring Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-05 and 41-06

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 73

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
to set up the Work Schedules and Work Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to assign the
Work Schedules to the days of the week.
• 41-04-01 : ACD Group Supervisor - Group Supervisor Extension
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the group’s supervisor extension port. An ACD Group
can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for only one ACD
Group.
• 41-04-02 : ACD Group Supervisor - Operating Type
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the operating mode for the supervisor (0 = Supervisor’s
extension does not receive ACD Group calls, 1 = Supervisor’s extension receives ACD Group
overflow calls only, 2 = Supervisor’s extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other
agents).
• 41-05-01 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
Set up the Work Schedules for ACD Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1-
4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. Once you set up the
schedules in this program, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the
same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)
• 41-06-01 : Trunk Work Schedules
Set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each Work Schedule (1-4), designate the start and
stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. Once you set up the schedules, assign them to
days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the ACD Agent Work
Schedules.)
• 41-07-01 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
Assign the four Work Schedules (1-4) to days of the week (1=Sunday, 7=Saturday). The
assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work Schedules (Pro-
gram 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06).
• 41-08-01 : ACD Overflow Options - Overflow Operation Mode
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the overflow mode (0-9). Each ACD Group can have
unique overflow options.
• 41-08-02 : ACD Overflow Options - ACD Overflow Destination
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the destination ring group (1-64) or option (65=overflow
table in Program 41-09, 66=Voice Mail Integration (in-skin voice mail).
• 41-08-03 : ACD Overflow Options - Delay Announcement Source Type
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the announcement message types. Delay announcement
functions are not available for ACD pilot number call. Each ACD Group can have unique
overflow options.
• 41-08-04 : ACD Overflow Options - ACD Overflow Transfer Time
For each ACD Group (1-64), assign the overflow transfer time (0-64800 seconds).
• 41-09-01 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
Define the ACD group (01-66) to which a call will be transferred when overflow occurs and
its priority (1-7).
• 41-10-01 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement - 1st Delay Announce-
ment PGDAD Port Number
For each ACD group (01-64), define the PGDAD port number (0-96) to be used for the first
delay announcement. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and
options are assigned as PGDAD in Program 41-08.
• 41-10-02 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement - 2nd Delay Announce-
ment PGDAD Port Number
For each ACD group (01-64), define the PGDAD port number (0-96) to be used for the sec-
ond delay announcement. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and
options are assigned as PGDAD in Program 41-08.
• 41-10-03 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement - 1st Delay Announce-

74 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
ment Connection Timer
For each ACD group (01-64), set the timer the system waits before playing the first delay
announcement (0-64800 seconds).
• 41-10-04 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement - 2nd Delay Announce-
ment Connection Timer
For each ACD group (01-64), set the timer the system waits before playing the second delay
announcement (0-64800 seconds).
• 41-10-05 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement - Delay Announcement
Sending Duration
For each ACD group (01-64), set the timer for the Delay Announcement sending duration (0-
64800 seconds).
• 41-11-01 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - Delay Message Start Time
For each ACD group (01-64), determine how long the system waits before playing the delay
Message. This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are
assigned as VRS in Program 41-08.
• 41-11-02 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - 1st Delay Message Number
For each ACD group (01-64), assign the VRS message number to be used as the message
source for the 1st Delay Announcement Message (0-49). This program is activated when the
delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41-08.
• 41-11-03 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - 1st Delay Message Sending
Count
For each ACD group (01-64), determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count (0-255).
• 41-11-04 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - 2nd Delay Message Number
For each ACD group (01-64), assign the VRS message number to be used as the message
source for the 2nd Delay Announcement Message (0-49). This program is activated when the
delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in Program 41-08.
• 41-11-05 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - 2nd Delay Message Send-
ing Count
For each ACD group (01-64), determine the 2nd Delay Message Sending Count (0-255)
• 41-11-06 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - Tone Kind at Message
Interval
For each ACD group (01-64), determine what the caller should hear between messages
(0=ring back, 1=MOH, 2=BGM).
• 41-11-07 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement - Disconnect Time After the
End of VRS Delay Message
For each ACD group (01-64), assign how long the system should wait after the end of the
VRS delay message before disconnecting (0-64800).
• 41-12-01 : Night Announcement Setup - Night Announcement Source Type
Define the night announce voice resource (0=ACI, 1=VRS [DSPDB]) for each ACD group
(01-64). Night announcement availability depends on the setting in Program 41-03-02. The
night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.
• 41-12-02 : Night Announcement Setup - Night Announcement ACI Port Number
If Program 41-12-01 is set to ‘0’, define the port number for the ACI night announce voice
resource for each ACD group (01-64).
• 41-12-03 : Night Announcement Setup - ACD Night Announce Sending Time
Define the night announce sending time (0-64800) for each ACD group (01-64).
• 41-13-01 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement - VRS Message Number
For each ACD Group (01-64), define the VRS message number (0-48) to be used as the night
announcement. This program is activated when the night announcement source is assigned as
VRS in Program 41-12-01.
• 41-13-02 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement - Tone Kind at Message

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 75

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Interval
For each ACD Group (01-64), define the what the caller will hear between the night
announcements (0=ring back tone, 1=MOH, 2=BGM).
• 41-14-01 : ACD Options - EMG Call Operation Mode
Set the EMG Call Operation Mode (0=Call system supervisory extension when group super-
visory extension is busy, 1=No call to system supervisory extension when group supervisory
extension is busy) for ACD Groups (01-64).
• 41-14-02 : ACD Options - Wrap Up Mode
Set the Wrap Up Mode option (0=After wrap up mode key is pressed, 1=After call is finished
automatically) for ACD Groups (01-64).
• 41-14-03 : ACD Options - ACD Priority for Overflow Calls
Set the priority for overflow calls (0=own group priority, 1=priority set by Program 41-03-03)
for ACD Groups (01-64).
• 41-14-04 : ACD Options - Automatic Answer in Headset Mode
Set the Automatic Answer option (0=off, 1=on) for the headset mode for ACD Groups (01-64).
• 41-14-06 : ACD Options - Transfer to ACD Extension With 2nd Delay Announcement
For each ACD Group (01-64), determine whether or not a call is transferred to an ACD exten-
sion after the 2nd delay announcement (0=transfer, 1=no transfer).
• 41-14-07 : ACD Options - Automatic Off Duty for SLT
For each ACD Group (01-64), determine whether or not an SLT automatically changes to off-
duty mode (0=not changed, 1=changed automatically).
• 41-14-08 : ACD Options - ACD Off Duty Mode
For each ACD Group (01-64), determine whether or not an agent can receive in internal call
in off-duty mode (0=can not receive, 1=can receive).
• 41-14-09 : ACD Options - Automatic Wrap Up End Time
For each ACD Group (01-64), set how long the system waits before automatically ending
wrap up time (0=disabled or 1-64800 seconds).
• 41-14-10 : ACD Options - Supervising ACD Answer to Incoming Call
For each ACD Group (01-64), set how long the system waits for Supervising ACD Answer
(0=disabled or 1-64800 seconds).
• 41-14-11 : ACD Options - Cancel Headset Ear Piece Ringing (KST)
For each ACD Group (01-64), set how long the system waits before cancelling headset ear
piece ringing for system phones (0=disabled or 1-64800 seconds).
• 41-14-12 : ACD Options - Start Headset Ear Piece Ringing (SLT)
For each ACD Group (01-64), set how long the system waits before starting headset ear piece
ringing for single line sets (0=disabled or 1-64800 seconds).
• 41-15-01 : ACD Queue Alarm Information - ACD Queue Alarm
For each ACD Group (01-64), determine the number of calls required in queue to activate the
alarm (0-200).
• 41-15-02 : ACD Queue Alarm Information - Alarm Interval
For each ACD Group (01-64), determine the interval for displaying the alarm information (0-
64800 seconds).
• 41-16-01 : ACD Threshold Overflow - Number of Calls in Queue
For each ACD group (01-64), define the maximum number of calls in ACD queue (0=no
limit, 1-200) before the call overflows.
• 41-16-02 : ACD Threshold Overflow - Operation Mode for ACD Queue
For each ACD group (01-64), determine how the system handles ACD calls when the maxi-
mum number of ACD calls in queue has been reached (0=longest waiting call is transferred,
1=last waiting call is transferred, 2=busy signal sent).
• 41-17-01 : ACD Login Mode Setup
Define the ACD login mode (0=normal, 1=AIC) for each extension.

76 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• 41-18-01 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Agent Identity Code
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD Agent Identity Code (4 digits).
• 41-18-02 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - Default ACD Group Number
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the default ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64).
• 41-18-03 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 1
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 1.
• 41-18-04 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 2
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 2.
• 41-18-05 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 3
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 3.
• 41-18-06 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 4
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 4.
• 41-18-07 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 5
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 5.
• 41-18-08 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 6
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 6.
• 41-18-09 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 7
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 7.
• 41-18-10 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup - ACD Group Number in Mode 8
For each AIC Table (001-512), define the ACD group number (0=no setting, 1-64) in mode 8.
• 41-19-01 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - Delay Message Start Timer
For each ACD group (01-64), determine how long the system waits before playing the Delay
Message (0-64800 seconds).
• 41-19-02 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - Mailbox for 1st Announcement
Message
For each ACD group (01-64), assign voice mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the mes-
sage source for the 1st Announcement Message. This option is only applicable to ACD Over-
flow Modes 1, 4, 6 and 9 (source 0/type2). Use Program 41-08 to set up the ACD overflow
options.
• 41-19-03 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - 1st Delay Message Sending
Count
For each ACD group (01-64), determine the 1st Delay Message Sending Count (0-255).
• 41-19-04 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - Mailbox for 2nd Announcement
Message
For each ACD group (01-64), assign voice mail ACD Announcement Mailboxes as the mes-
sage source for the 2nd Announcement Message. This option is only applicable to ACD Over-
flow Modes 1, 4, 6 and 9 (source 0/type2). Use Program 41-08 to set up the ACD overflow
options.
• 41-19-06 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - Tone Kind at Message Interval
For each ACD Group (01-64), define the what the caller will hear between the messages
(0=ring back tone, 1=MOH, 2=BGM).
• 41-19-07 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - ACD Forced Disconnect Time
After 2nd Announcement
For each ACD group (01-64), assign how long the system should wait after the end of the
ACD delay message before disconnecting (0-64800).
• 41-19-08 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement - Delayed Message Interval Time
For each ACD group (01-64), set the timer for the interval between the Delayed Messages (0-
64800 seconds).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 77

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Related Features
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

Operation
Refer to the ACD Manual (P/N TBD).

78 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)
Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides call routing and digit translation based on the digits a user
dials. ARS consists of look up tables that compare the dialled digits and decide which translation table
should be used. The decision can optionally be dependant on time and day of the week. The transla-
tion table will then delete and/or add digits select the trunk group and seize the outgoing trunk

Conditions
(A.) Line keys, outgoing loop keys, outgoing trunk group keys, dialing 804+trunk group, dialing
805+trunk number, and abbreviated dial numbers assigned to a certain trunk group can all be
used to by-pass ARS.

Default Setting
ARS is not programmed.

Programming
• 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
Specify the single digit code used to access ARS (normally 9).
• 14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Program trunks of the same carrier type into the same trunk group.
• 14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-200). This sets the access options for trunks.
• 15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-200) to extensions.
• 44-01-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Select whether the ARS/F-Route feature should use the time schedule (0=not used, 1=used).
• 44-02-01 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Dial
Set the Dial digits for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route (8 digits).
• 44-02-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Service Type
Set the Service Type (0-3) for the Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.
• 44-02-03 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Additional Data
If a Service Type is selected in Program 44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for the
Pre-Transaction Table for selecting ARS/F-Route
• 44-02-04 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Dial Tone Simulation
Determine if the Dial Tone Simulation is on (1) or off (0) for the Pre-Transaction Table for
selecting ARS/F-Route.
• 44-03-01 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Dial
Set the Dial digits to be used for the Dial Extension Analyze Table.
• 44-03-02 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number
Select the ARS/R-Route table number (0-500) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyze
Table.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 79

Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)
• 44-03-03 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Table Number (251)
Select the ARS/R-Route table number (0-500) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyze
Table 251.
• 44-03-04 : Dial Analysis Extension Table - Next Table Number
Select the Next Table Area Number (0-4) to be used for the Dial Extension Analyze Table
252.
• 44-04-01 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
Assign each ARS/F-Route Selection number (1-500) to an ARS/F-Route table number for
each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are 8 time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.
• 44-05-02 : ARS/F-Route Table - Delete Digits
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Enter the number of dig-
its to be deleted (0-255).
• 44-05-03 : ARS/F-Route Table - Additional Dial Number
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Enter the number of addi-
tional digits to be dialed (0-1000).
• 44-05-04 : ARS/F-Route Table - Beep Tone
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select whether or not a
beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used (0=no beep, 1=beep).
• 44-05-05 : ARS/F-Route Table - Gain Table Number for Internal Call
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the gain table
number to be used for internal calls (0-500).
• 44-05-06 : ARS/F-Route Table - Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the gain table
number to be used for tandem connection (0-500).
• 44-05-07 : ARS/F-Route Table - ARS Class of Service
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the Class of Ser-
vice to be used for ARS (0-16).
• 44-05-08 : ARS/F-Route Table - Dial Treatment
For each ARS/F-Route table (1-500) assign a priority number (1-4). Select the Dial Treatment
to be used (0-15).
• 44-06-01 : Additional Dial Table
Set the additional dial table (1-1000) to add prior to the dialed ARS/F-Route number.
• 44-07-01 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Incoming Transmit
44-07-02 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Incoming Receive
44-07-03 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Outgoing Transmit
44-07-04 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access - Outgoing Receive
Set the gain table to be used (1-500). If an extension dials ARS/F-Route number;
- The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
- The Extension Dial Gain Table follows “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route;

- The Tandem Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
- The Tandem Gain Table follows the “Incoming transmit” and “Incoming receive” settings
for incoming line, and “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings for the outgoing
line.

For the ARS/F-Route call (in the above case), CODEC gain in Program 14-01-02 and 14-01-
03 are not activated.
• 44-08-01 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define the daily pattern of the ARS/F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns.
These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and 44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time set-
tings.

80 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Automatic Route Selection (F-Route)
• 44-09-01 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define a weekly schedule for using ARS/F-Route (day numbers 1-7 (1=Sun, 7=Sat), pattern
numbers 1-10).
• 44-10-01 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
Define a yearly schedule for ARS/F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such
as national holidays (pattern numbers 1-10).
• 80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Use Items 11-32 to set the criteria for dial tone detection for outgoing ARS calls.

Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing may bypass ARS routing.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Set up other options for outgoing calls (e.g., unassign line keys, adjust gains, ARS access key,
loop keys, etc.).
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction overrides ARS.
Trunk Group Routing
A system with Automatic Route Selection cannot also have Trunk Group Routing.
Trunk Queuing/Camp On
With ARS installed, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The
system automatically redials the queued call when the extension user lifts the handset.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 81

Background Music
Background Music

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in sys-
tem phonessystem phones. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays whenever the user’s exten-
sion is idle.

Conditions
(A.) Background Music requires a customer-provided music source connected to the NTCPU’s
CN16 connector. Refer to the system Hardware Manual.

Default Setting
Not installed.

Related Features
Music on Hold
The system can broadcast music to callers on Hold.
Single Line Telephones
Background Music is not available on single line telephones.

Programming
• 10-21-01 : NTCPU Hardware Setup - External Source Control Switch Selection
Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control (0=external MOH
source, 1=BGM source, 2=external speaker, 3=general purpose relay).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-13-30 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Background Music
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension from turning
Background Music on and off.

Operation
To turn Background Music on or off:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 825.
3. Press SPK to hang up.

82 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Barge In
Barge In

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Barge In permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call, including
Conference calls. This sets up a Conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and
the parties on the initial call. With Barge In, an extension user can get a message through to a busy
co-worker right away.

There are two Barge In modes: Monitor Mode (Silent Monitor) and Speech Mode. With Monitor
Mode, the caller Barging In can listen to another user’s conversation but cannot participate. With
Speech Mode, the caller Barging In can listen and join another user’s conversation.

CAUTION

The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or

record telephone conversation or other sound activities, may be illegal in certain circum-
stances. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or
records any telephone conversation. Some form of notification to all parties to a telephone
conversation may be required, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or
requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or
recording the telephone conversation.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled

Programming
• 11-12-08 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge In
Determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use the Barge In feature
(default=810).
• 11-16-02 : One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge In
Use this option to set up Item 02 for single digit Barge In. For example, you can assign Item
02 to use digit 5 for Barge In. This would allow you to program a function key with an exten-
sion number plus the Barge In code (i.e., 205 5). This allows one-touch access to the Barge In
feature for extension 205. If you undefine a service code, be careful when you change this
item that you don’t inadvertently disable any essential dialing function (such as Voice Mail
or Message Waiting).
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Barge In (code 34).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 83

Barge In
• 20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable the Barge In Speech Mode (0) or Monitor Mode (1)
at the initiating extension (i.e., Barge In initiator).
• 20-13-15 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Initiate
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the initiating extension
(i.e., Barge In initiator).
• 20-13-16 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In, Receive
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Barge In at the receiving exten-
sion (i.e., Barge In receive).
• 20-13-17 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Tone/Display
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Barge In Tone. If disabled, this also turns off the Barge In display
at the called extension.
• 20-13-32 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Multiple Barge In
Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to have multiple user’s Barge In to their con-
versation.
• 20-14-11 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M - DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In
Use this option to enabled (1) or disable (0) a DISA or tie trunk user from using the Barge In
feature with the service code defined in Program 11-12-08.
• 20-18-07 : Service Tone Timer - Intrusion Tone Repeat Time
After a user Barges In, the system repeats the Barge In tone after this interval. Normally, you
should disable this timer by entering 0. (This timer also affect any other types of call interrup-
tion features, such as Voice Mail Conversation Recording, Voice Over, etc.)
• 21-01-03 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
Program how long an extension must wait before using the Barge In feature can be used on a
call (this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state). This timer
also affects Voice Over.

Related Features
Conference
An extension user cannot Barge In on a Conference.
Intercom
An extension user cannot Barge In on an Intercom call if one of the Intercom callers is using
Handsfree Answerback. Both Intercom parties must have lifted the handset or pressed SPK.
Off Hook Signaling
If the system has Automatic Off Hook Signaling, an extension user can Barge In on an Inter-
com call only if the second extension appearance is busy or ringing.
Privacy (Data)
Privacy blocks Barge In attempts.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Barge In operation.

84 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Barge In

Operation
To Barge In after calling a busy extension:
The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In.
Listen for busy/ring or busy tone.
1. Call busy extension.
2. Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).

To Barge in without first calling the busy extension:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 810.
OR
Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).
3. Dial busy extension.
To Barge In to a Conference call, dial the extension number of a user active on a Con-
ference call. When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all
parties, depending on system programming, and all display system phones show the
joined party. If Barge In is not possible:
- the extension user will hear a warning tone
- the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group
OR
- the tie line user will hear a busy tone.
OR
Not available for DISA or tie line trunks:
1. Dial the extension number of the busy internal party.
2. Dial the single digit service code.
Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 810 can also be dialed at this
point.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 85

Call Coverage
Call Coverage

Please refer to the Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage (page 259) for information
on this feature.

86 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Call Forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension. Call For-
warding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work area. The
types of Call Forwarding are:
• Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered
Calls to the extension forward when busy or not answered.
• Call Forwarding Immediate
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and only the destination rings.
• Call Forwarding with Both Ringing
All calls forward immediately to the destination, and both the destination and the forwarded
extension ring (not for Voice Mail).
• Call Forwarding when Unanswered
Calls forward only if they are unanswered (Ring No Answer).
• Personal Answering Machine Emulation
Allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to “Voice Mail” for more.

Call Forwarding will reroute calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another
extension. The extension user must enable Call Forwarding from their phone. To redirect calls
while a user is at another phone, use “Call Forwarding with Follow Me”. A periodic VRS
announcement may remind users that their calls are forwarded.

Conditions
(A.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension
316 forwards to 318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318
route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the
chain is forwarded off- premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number).
(B.) Periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System (VRS).
(C.) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv-
ing Department Pilot Calls.
(D.) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.
(E.) Ring Groups do not follow Call Forward to voice mail.
(F.) Multiple Directory and Call Coverage Key calls do not follow Call Forwarding.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 87

Call Forwarding

Programming
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding setup code (code 10 - 17).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-02 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding (When
Busy)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call
Forwarding when Busy.
• 20-11-03 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding (When
Unanswered)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call
Forwarding when Unanswered.
• 20-11-04 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding (Both
Ringing)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set Call
Forwarding with Both Ringing.
• 24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Call Forwarding when
Unanswered occurs after this interval.

Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding is a permanent type of forwarding that automatically reroutes calls
under certain condition - without any user action. User entered Call Forwarding overrides
Fixed Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
An extension user can forward their calls to an off-premise location.
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
While away from their desk, a user can redirect their calls to a co-worker’s extension.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Override Call Forwarding or DND at another extension.
Central Office Calls, Answering
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their phone.
Department Calling
An extension user can forward their calls to a Department number.
Do Not Disturb
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from for-
warding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND
option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding operation.
Voice Response System (VRS)
The periodic reminder message requires a Voice Response System (VRS).

88 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding

Operation
To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:
1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset) + Dial 888.
Also allowed are 848 (Call Forward Immediate), 843 (Call Forward Busy), 845 (Call
Forward No Answer, 844 (Call Forward, Busy/No Answer, or 842 (Call Forward Both
Ring).
OR
Press Call Forwarding key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 10).
2. Dial Call Forwarding condition:
1 = Personal Answering Machine Emulation (then skip to step 4 - refer also to “Voice Mail”).
2 = Busy or not answered
4 = Immediate
6 = Not answered
7 = Immediate with simultaneous ringing (not for Voice Mail)
0 = Cancel
3. Dial destination extension, Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key.
4. Dial Call Forwarding type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
5. Press SPK to hang up (hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed 888 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key flashes when
Call Forwarding is activated.
Press Call Forwarding key.
PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 10 for Forward All Calls Immediately
PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 11 for Forward when Busy
PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 12 for Forward when Unanswered
PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 13 for Forward Busy/No Answer
PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 14 for Forward with Both Ringing

When you enable Call Forwarding, your Call Forwarding key flashes slowly. If you
don’t have a Call Forwarding key, DND flashes slowly.
6. Dial 1 plus extension to enable; dial 0 to disable.
DND flashes slowly.
Once you activate Call Forwarding, only your Call Forwarding destination can place
an Intercom call to you.
7. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line set, hang up.
You’ll hear stutter dial tone when placing a new call.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 89

Call Forwarding, Fixed
Call Forwarding, Fixed

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Fixed Call Forwarding is a type of forwarding that is permanently in force at an extension. Calls to
an extension with Fixed Call Forwarding enabled automatically reroute - without any user action.
Unlike normal Call Forwarding (which is turned on and off by extension users), Fixed Call For-
warding is set by the administrator in system programming. Fixed Call Forwarding complements
Voice Mail, for example. The administrator can program Fixed Call Forwarding to send a user’s
unanswered calls to their Voice Mail mailbox. Each individual user no longer has to manually set
this operation.

In system programming, the administrator can set the Fixed Call Forwarding destination and type
for each extension and virtual extension. The forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise
extension or Voice Mail. The Fixed Call Forwarding types are:
• Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (Program 24-06 Option 1)
• Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered (Program 24-06 Option 2)
• Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate (Program 24-06 Option 3)
• Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Unanswered (Program 24-06 Option 4)
• Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise (Program 24-07)

Fixed Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

• Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
• Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail
• Direct Inward Lines
• DISA, DID and tie line calls to the forwarded extension
• Transferred calls

90 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding, Fixed

Description (Cont’d)
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining
Fixed Call Forward Chaining allows Fixed Call Forwards to loop from one extension to the next.
For example, you could have the chain 301 + 302 + 303 + 304 set up for Fixed Call Forwarding
when Busy. If extension 301 is busy, calls to 301 route to 302. If 302 is also busy, the calls route to
303 and so on. Chaining allows you to set up very basic hunting between co-workers.

Keep the following in mind when setting up Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining:
• If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining forms a complete Call Forwarding loop (i.e., 301 + 302 +
303 + 301), the system rings the last extension in the chain (303). It does not complete the
loop.
• If Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining finds an extension with user-implemented Call Forward-
ing in the middle of a chain, it rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other
extensions in the chain.
• If one of the extensions in a Fixed Call Forwarding chain has its fixed option set for Both
Ringing (1), the system rings that extension. It does not continue routing to the other exten-
sions in the chain.
• The receiving extension’s display shows:

STA AAA AAA is the extension that initially placed the call.
TRANSFER<< STA BBB BBB is the first extension in the Fixed Call Forwarding
chain.

Conditions
(A.) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv-
ing Department Pilot Calls.
(B.) Multiple Directory and Call Coverage Key calls follow Call Forwarding.
(C.) Ring Group calls do not follow Call Forward to voice mail.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 91

Call Forwarding, Fixed

Programming
• 24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the Delayed Call Forwarding interval. For an unanswered call, Fixed Call Forwarding
When Unanswered occurs after this interval.
• 24-06-01 : Fixed Call Forwarding
For an extension port, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination
extension port. Available types are:
0 = Fixed Call Forwarding off
1 = Fixed Call Forwarding with Both Ringing (do not use for Voice Mail ports)
2 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Unanswered
3 = Fixed Call Forwarding Immediate
4 = Fixed Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered
• 24-07-01 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise
For each extension, assign the Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise telephone number (up to
24 digits). Be sure to include the trunk access code.

Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
When a call is Fixed Call Forwarded, the display at the destination shows from which
extension the call was routed.
Call Forwarding
User entered Call Forwarding overrides Fixed Call Forwarding.
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
An extension user can forward their calls to an outside telephone number.
Multiple Directory Numbers
Calls to virtual extension numbers follow the Fixed Call Forwarding assignment of their vir-
tual port.

Operation
None

92 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Aspila EX
• Available

• DSL sets can be used.

Description
Off-Premise (OPX) Call Forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site
location. By enabling OPX Call Forwarding, the user can stay in touch by having the system for-
ward their calls while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be any phone
number the user enters, such as a car phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-Premise Call
Forwarding can route the off-site phone number over a specific trunk or through a trunk group,
Automatic Route Selection or Trunk Group Routing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

• Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
• Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1
• Direct Inward Lines 1
• DISA, DID, DDI and tie line calls to the forwarded extension 1
• Transferred calls 1

OPX Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Coverage keys, Multiple Directory Number keys, or
Ring Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22-04
and 22-05).

Off-Premise Call Forward for Door Boxes

Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows Door Box callers to be transferred automatically to the pre-
programmed external party. The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbrevi-
ated Dial area. This feature may be used in case a co-worker is out of the office. All incoming calls
for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number (example: cell phone).
Off-Premise Call Forward for Door Boxes can be transferred to the external party through ISDN
lines only.

Conditions
(A.) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires ISDN, loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.
(B.) The trunk access code and the outside telephone number combined cannot exceed 24 digits.
(C.) Normally, the system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension
316 forwards to 318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318
route to 320. The system does allow a single chain, however, if the second extension in the
chain is forwarded off-premise (*46 + trunk access code + destination telephone number).
(D.) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv-
ing Department Pilot Calls.
(E.) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

1. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (see Programming above).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 93

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
Default Setting
Disabled.

Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding can automatically forward an extensions calls to an outside number.
Call Forward to Abbreviated Dial
Call forward codes can be used to forward to abbreviated dial that will route off premise.
Door Box
Door Boxes must be programmed in order for the calls to be transferred off-premise.
Toll Restriction
The outside number OPX Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by
the forwarded extension’s Toll Restriction.
Voice Response System (VRS)
In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS, callers to an extension forwarded off-premise
hear, “Please hold on, your call is being rerouted.”

Programming
• 11-10-04 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Storing Common Abbrevi-
ated Dialing Numbers
Assign the service code to be used for Common Abbreviated Dialing (853 by default).
• 11-10-18 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Off-Premise Call Forward
by Door Box
Assign the service code to be used for Off-Premise Calling Forwarding by a Door Box (822
by default).
• 14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off-
Premise.
• 15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
For one-touch access to the Call Forwarding Device setup code (713), assign a function key
for Call Forwarding (Device).
For Off-Premise Call Forwarding by a Door Box, assign a function key (54) if required.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-12 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off-
Premise
In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding Off-
Premise at the extension.
• 32-01-03 : Door Box Timers - Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call. When this
timer expires, the caller will hear busy tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and the call will then
be disconnected (0-64800).

94 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial 713.
2. Dial 6 + trunk access code.
Trunk access codes are 9 (ARS/Trunk Group Routing), 804 + Line Group (1-9, 01-99
or 001- 100) or 805 + Line number (e.g., 05 or 005 for line 5.
3. Dial the outside number to which your calls should be forwarded.
4. (System Phone only) Press HOLD.
5. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed 713 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.

To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial 713.
2. Dial 6 + HOLD.
3. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed 713 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes:

These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise by Door Box

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 822.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial 822.
2. Dial the Door Box number (1-8).
3. Dial the Abbreviated Dialing number to which the calls should be forwarded.
4. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up.
Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key flashes.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 95

Call Forwarding, Off-Premise
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 822.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial 822.
2. Dial 0.
3. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up.
Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

96 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial
Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial

Aspila EX
• Available

• DSL sets can be used.

Description
Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site
location. By enabling Call Forwarding to abbreviated dial, the user can stay in touch by having the
system forward their calls while they are away from the office. The forwarding destination can be
any phone number the user enters, such as a car phone, home office, hotel or meeting room. Off-
Premise Call Forwarding will route the off-site phone number over the trunk route set for the abbre-
viated dial bin.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding reroutes the following types of incoming calls:

• Ringing intercom calls from co-worker’s extensions
• Calls routed from the VRS or Voice Mail 1
• Direct Inward Lines 1
• DISA, DID, DDI and tie line calls to the forwarded extension 1
• Transferred calls 1

Call Forwarding does not reroute Call Coverage keys, Multiple Directory Number keys, or Ring
Group calls (i.e., trunk ringing according to Ring Group assignments made in Programs 22-04 and
22-05).

Off-Premise Call Forward for Door Boxes

Off-Premise Call Forwarding allows Door Box callers to be transferred automatically to the pre-
programmed external party. The destination telephone number is stored in the Common Abbrevi-
ated Dial area. This feature may be used in case a co-worker is out of the office. All incoming calls
for their extension will be automatically transferred to their external number (example: cell phone).
Off-Premise Call Forward for Door Boxes can be transferred to the external party through ISDN
lines only.

Conditions
(A.) Call Forwarding Off-Premise requires ISDN, loop start trunks with disconnect supervision or
ground start trunks.
(B.) The system does not allow the chaining of Call Forwards. For example, extension 316 for-
wards to 318, and 318 in turn forwards to 320. Calls to 316 route to 318. Calls to 318 route to
320. The system does allow a single chain, if the second extension in the chain is forwarded
off-premise (848 + 1 + 813 + bin).
(D.) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv-
ing Department Pilot Calls.
(E.) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

1. Off-Premise Call Forwarding can reroute an incoming trunk call only if the outgoing trunk selected has disconnect
supervision enabled (see Programming above).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 97

Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial
Default Setting
Disabled.

Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding can automatically forward an extensions calls to an outside number.
Call Forward, Off Premise
Call forward codes can be used to forward to a specific outside number.
Door Box
Door Boxes must be programmed in order for the calls to be transferred off-premise.
Toll Restriction
The outside number Call Forwarding dials can only be a number normally allowed by the for-
warded extension’s Toll Restriction.
Voice Response System (VRS)
In systems with a DSP daughter board for VRS, callers to an extension forwarded off-premise
hear, “Please hold on, your call is being rerouted.”

Programming
• 11-10-04 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Storing Common Abbrevi-
ated Dialing Numbers
Assign the service code to be used for Common Abbreviated Dialing (853 by default).
• 11-10-18 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Off-Premise Call Forward
by Door Box
Assign the service code to be used for Off-Premise Calling Forwarding by a Door Box (822
by default).
• 14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each trunk that should be able to use Call Forwarding Off-
Premise.
• 15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
For one-touch access to the Call Forwarding setup codes (843, 845, 848), assign a function
key for Call Forwarding.
For Off-Premise Call Forwarding by a Door Box, assign a function key (54) if required.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-12 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding Off-
Premise
In an extensions Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) setting up Call Forwarding Off-
Premise at the extension.
• 32-01-03 : Door Box Timers - Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Disconnect Timer
Define the conversation period for an Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call. When this
timer expires, the caller will hear busy tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and the call will then
be disconnected (0-64800).

98 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial

Operation
To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 848.
OR
Press Call Forward key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 10)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial 848.
2. Dial 1 + 813 +1.
813 is the Abbreviated dial accessc code, can be replaced with the Group Abbreviated
dial access code 814.
3. Dial the bin number to which your calls should be forwarded.
4. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed 848 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes.

To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 848.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 10)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial 848.
2. Dial 0.
3. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up if you dialed 848 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

Off-Premise Call Forwarding for Door Boxes:

These operations are performed at the Door Box Ringing Extension only.

To activate Call Forwarding Off-Premise by Door Box

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 822.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset Dial 822.
2. Dial the Door Box number (1-8).
3. Dial the Abbreviated Dialing number to which the calls should be forwarded.
4. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up.
Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key flashes.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 99

Call Forwarding to Abbreviated Dial
To cancel Call Forwarding Off-Premise by Door Box
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key + Dial 822.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54)
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial 822.
2. Dial 0.
3. Press SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) to hang up.
Your DND or Off-Premise Call Forwarding Programmable Function Key stops flashing.

100 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding with Follow Me
Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
While at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have Call Forwarding with Follow Me redirect their calls to
the co-worker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-worker’s desk longer
than expected. To prevent losing important calls, the employee can activate Call Forwarding with
Follow Me from the co-worker’s phone.

Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroutes calls from the destination extension. To reroute calls
from the initiating (forwarding) extension, use Call Forwarding.

Conditions
(A.) Call Forwarding an extension in a Department Group will prevent that extension from receiv-
ing Department Pilot Calls.
(B.) If a Programmable Function key is not defined for Call Forwarding (10 - 17), the DND key
flashes to indicate that the extension is call forwarded.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for one-touch access to the Call Forwarding (Station) setup code (code
10 - 17).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-01 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Forwarding with Fol-
low Me
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) the setting of Call Forwarding with
Follow Me.

Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding with Follow Me operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 101

Call Forwarding with Follow Me

Operation
To activate Call Forward Follow Me:
1. At a system phone other than your own, press idle CALL key and dial 888.
OR
Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15).
OR
At DSL/SLT other than your own, lift handset and dial 888.
2. Dial 3 + Dial your own extension number (i.e., the source).
3. Dial Call Forwarding Type:
2 = All Calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
4. SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed 888 in step 1.
Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key flashes when Call For-
warding is activated.

To cancel Call Forward Follow Me:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key and dial 888.
OR
Press Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 15).
OR
At DSL/SLT, lift handset and dial 888.
2. Dial 0.
3. SPK (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed 888 in step 1.
Your Call Forwarding (Station) Programmable Function Key goes out.

102 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension. This is
helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that always need to get through.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override (code 37).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-13-04 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forwarding/DND
Override
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to initiate Call For-
warding/DND Override.

Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Forwarding/DND Override operation.

Operation
To override an extension’s Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb:
1. Call the forwarded or DND extension.
2. Press Override key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 37).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 103

Call Pickup Group
Call Pickup Group

Please refer to Group Call Pickup (page 202) for information on this feature.

104 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Redirect
Call Redirect

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Call Redirect allows a system phone user to transfer a call to a pre-defined destination (such as an
operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are
on a call and another rings in to your extension. By pressing the Call Redirect key, the call is trans-
ferred, allowing you to continue with your current call.

This feature works with the following types of calls:

• Normal trunk call
• DID
• DISA
• DIL
• E&M
• ICM

The following types of calls cannot be redirected with the feature:

• ACD
• Transferred
• Department Group (all ring mode)
• Door Box
• Virtual Extension

Conditions
(A.) After pressing the Call Redirect key, the call will not recall the extension.
(B.) The pre-defined destination has to be an extension number or voice mail pilot number.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
• 15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Redirect (code 49 + destination extension number).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-11-01 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Call Redirect
Enable (1) or disable (0) a system phone user’s ability to transfer a call to a pre-defined desti-
nation (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call

Related Features
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 105

Call Redirect

Operation
To redirect a ringing call:
1. With an incoming call ringing your extension, press the Call Redirect key (Program 15-07 or
SC 851: 49 + Destination Extension Number) without lifting the handset or pressing the
CALL keys.
A confirmation tone is heard over the telephone’s speaker.

106 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Timer
Call Timer

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Call Timer lets a system phone user time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps
users that must keep track of their time on the phone. For incoming trunk calls, the Call Timer
begins as soon as the user answers the call. For outgoing trunk calls, the Call Timer starts about 10
seconds after the user dials the last digit.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 20-13-36 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service - Caller Timer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use the
Call Timer.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 21-01-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
The system waits for this timer to expire before starting the Call Timer.

Related Features
Alphanumeric Display
Disabling the trunk name seize display also disables the Call Timer.

Operation
To time your trunk calls:
1. Place trunk call.
The timer starts automatically.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 107

Call Waiting / Camp On
Call Waiting / Camp On

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
With Call Waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (Camp-On) with-
out hanging up. When the user Camps-On, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps
indicating the waiting call. The call goes through when the busy extension becomes free. Call
Waiting helps busy extension users know when they have additional waiting calls. It also lets call-
ers wait in line for a busy extension without being forgotten.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 11-12-47 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer
for SLT
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a call. This code is
normally 894.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Camp-On (code 35). This key is also the Callback key.
• 20-18-06 : Service Tone Timer - Call Waiting Tone Timer
Use this option to set the interval between Call Waiting tones. This timer also sets the interval
between Off Hook Signaling alerts.

Related Features
Callback
If an extension user Camps-On and then hangs up, the system converts the Camp On to a Callback.
Dual Line Appearance/Off Hook Signaling
If an extension busy on a call has Off Hook Signaling, an incoming Intercom calls rings the
idle second line appearance.
Off Hook Signaling
The Off Hook Signaling Enhancements give an extension the ability to block a caller from
dialing 804 to Camp On and/or DID callers from automatically camping on.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Call Waiting/Camp On operation.
Transfer
An extension user may be able to Transfer a call to a busy extension.
Trunk Queuing/Camp-On
Trunk Queuing lets an extension user Camp-On to a trunk.

108 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Call Waiting / Camp On

Operation
To Camp-On to a busy extension:
1. Call busy extension.
2. Dial 850 or Press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).
3. Do not hang up.
To Camp-On to a trunk, see Trunk Queuing.

To cancel a Camp-On request:

1. Hang up.
2. At system phone, press idle CALL key and Dial 870.
OR
At system phone, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

To Split (answer a waiting call) at a single line telephone:

Listen for Camp On beep.
1. Single Line Telephone:
Hookflash and dial 894.
DSL Telephone:
Press HOLD and dial 894.
To repeatedly split between the two calls.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 109

Callback
Callback

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
When an extension user calls a co-worker that doesn’t answer, they can leave a Callback request for
a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to
find it idle.

The system processes Callback requests as follows:

1. Caller at extension A leaves a Callback at extension B.
Caller can place or answer additional calls in the mean time.
2. When extension B becomes idle, the system rings extension A. This is the Callback ring.
3. Once caller A answers the Callback ring, the system rings (formerly busy) extension B.
If caller A doesn’t answer the Callback ring, the system cancels the Callback.
4. As soon as caller B answers, the system sets up an Intercom call between A and B.

Callback Automatic Answer determines how an extension user answers the Callback ring. When
Callback Automatic Answer is enabled, a user answers the Callback ring when they lift the handset.
When Callback Automatic Answer is disabled, the user must press the ringing line appearance to
answer the Callback ring.

Conditions
An extension can leave only one Callback request at a time.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 15-02-11 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Callback Automatic Answer
Enable (1) or disable (0) Callback Automatic Answer.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Callback (code 35). This key is also the Camp-On key.
• 20-01-07 : System Options - Callback Ring Duration Time
Set the duration of the Callback ring (0-64800 seconds).
• 20-01-09 : System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
The system cancels Callback and Trunk Queuing requests after this interval (0-64800 seconds).

Related Features
Call Waiting (Camp-On)
If an extension user initiates a Callback but does not hang up, their extension Camps-On to the
busy extension.
Programmable Function Keys
Function Keys simplify Callback operation.

110 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Callback

Operation
To place a Callback:
1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension.
2. Dial 850 or Press Callback key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).
3. Hang up.
4. Lift handset when busy extension calls you back.
If the unavailable extension was unanswered (not busy), the Callback goes through
after your co-worker uses their phone for the first time.
If you have Callback Automatic Answer, you automatically place a call to the formerly
busy extension when you lift the handset. If you don’t have Callback Automatic Answer,
you must press the ringing line appearance to place the call.

To cancel a Callback:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key and Dial 870.
OR
At system phone, press Camp-On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).
OR
At single line set, lift handset and dial 870.

To test Callback at your single line phone:

1. Lift the handset.
1. Dial 899.
2. Hang up.
3. When the phone rings, lift the handset.
You hear synthesized Music on Hold.
4. Hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 111

Caller ID
Caller ID

Aspila EX
• Available.

Description
Caller ID allows a display system phone to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the
Directory Number or DN) and optional name. The Caller ID information is available as a post-
answer or pre-answer display. Normally, the system provides the Caller ID pre-answer display.
With the post-answer display, the user sees the incoming caller’s number/name after they answer
the call. With the pre-answer display, the user previews the caller’s number before picking up the
ringing line. The pre-answer display is only available if the system has Automatic Handsfree for
incoming line/loop keys disabled. Refer to the table on the following for the available Caller ID
displays.

Second Call Display

While busy on a call, the telephone display can show the identity of an incoming trunk or Intercom
call. For incoming trunk calls, the display will show the Caller ID or the trunk’s name if Caller ID
is not installed. For incoming Intercom calls, the display will show the calling extension’s name.
You can set up the system to present the second call data automatically or allow the user to select
the operation of second calls (with service code 779).

Caller ID supports the telco’s Called Number Identification (CNI) and Called Number Delivery
(CND) service, when available. These services provide the Caller ID information (i.e., messages)
between the first and second ring burst of an incoming call. There are two types of Caller ID mes-
sage formats currently available: Single Message Format and Multiple Message Format. With Sin-
gle Message Format, the telco sends only the caller’s phone number (DN). The DN is either 7 or 10
digits long. In Multiple Message Format, the telco sends the DN and the caller’s name. The DN for
this format is also 7 or 10 digits long, and the name provided consists of up to 15 ASCII characters.

Telephone’s display can show up to 12 Caller ID digits.

Once installed and programmed, Caller ID is enabled for all types of trunk calls, including:
• Ring Group calls
• Calls transferred from another extension
• Calls transferred from the VRS
• Calls transferred from Voice Mail (unscreened)
• Direct Inward Lines (DILs)
Caller ID temporarily stores 16 calls (total of abandoned and unanswered). New calls replace old
calls when the buffer fills.

112 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Caller ID

Caller ID Displays
Abbreviation Description
Absence code Absence Reason Code P displays as PRIVATE
Absence Reason Code O displays as OUT OF AREA
CID-num Caller ID number (Provided by telco)
CID-name Caller ID name (provided by telco)
Trunk name Trunk name provided by phone system (Program 14-01-01)
NN:NN:NN System’s Caller Timer display
HH:MM:SS System Time
YY:MM:DD System Date

Conditions Row Pre-Answer Post-Answer Display When

Display Display Reviewing
With Caller ID name and number 1 CID-num CID-num NN:NN:NN CID-num HH:MM:SS
2 CID-name CID-name CID-name
With Caller ID number 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN CID-num
Without Caller ID name 2 CID-num CID-num HH:MM:SS
With name absence code
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number 1 Trunk name Trunk name CID-name
With Caller ID name NN:NN:NN
With number absence code 2 CID-name CID-name HH:MM:SS
YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN Name Absence Code
Without Caller ID name
2 Name Absence Name Absence Code HH:MM:SS
With number & name absence Code YY:MM:DD
codes
Without Caller ID number 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN Number Absence Code
Without Caller ID name
2 Number Absence Number Absence Code HH:MM:SS
With number absence code
Code YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number 1 Trunk name Trunk name NN:NN:NN Name Absence Code
Without Caller ID name 2 Name Absence Name Absence Code HH:MM:SS
With name absence code
Code YY:MM:DD
Without Caller ID number 1 CID-num CID-num nn:nn:nn Trunk name
Without Caller ID name
2 Ringing NO CALLER INFO HH:MM:SS
Without any absence code YY:MM:DD
Without time and date 1 - - Trunk name
With absence reason
2 - - Absence code
Without time and date 1 - - Trunk name
With absence reason
2 - - NO CALLER INFO

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 113

Caller ID

Description (Cont’d)
Outputting Caller ID Data
The system includes the Caller ID data on the SMDR report. The report provides the incoming call’s
DN in the DIALED NUMBER field. The CLASS field shows PIN (just like all other incoming calls).

Caller ID data can also output to a PC or other type of computer through a CTA Module. This
allows for off-line database lookups. In a customer service department, for example, the computer
could search for a caller’s records and display their account status even before a customer service
representative picked up the phone.

Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail

A Caller ID/ANI trunk can send Remote Log-On Protocol with Caller ID digits to the voice mail.
When a trunk ‘001’ receives the Caller ID as ‘12345’, the protocol becomes ‘***60001*12345*’.

ISDN Calls Display Reason for No Caller ID Information

With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for ISDN calls that do not contain the
Caller ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display will show
“PRIVATE”. If the system is not able to provide Caller ID information because telco information is
not available, then the display will show “No Caller Info”.

Hardware Considerations
Caller ID is provided by the NTCPU. The DSP daughter board, which plugs onto the NTCPU, can
provide additional resources for Caller ID if needed.

Conditions
To have pre-answer Caller ID from the voice mail, the call must be an unscreened transfer.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
• 14-01-20 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Block Outgoing Caller ID
Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID informa-
tion when a user places a call. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system automatically inserts
the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user dialed digits (this
requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block disabled), the system out-
dials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
• 14-01-21 : Caller ID Block Code
Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This code is
automatically inserted before dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to ‘1’.
• 14-01-22 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID to Voice Mail
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to send the Caller ID digits to voice mail.
• 14-02-10 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Caller ID
Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk’s ability to receive Caller ID name/number information. If
this option is set to ‘1’, the system will suppress ringing and lamping for trunk calls for the
first ring in order to receive the Caller ID information.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

114 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Caller ID
• 20-08-15 : Class of Service (Outgoing Call Service) - Block Outgoing Caller ID
Allow (1) or prevent (0) a user’s Class of Service from automatically blocking outgoing
Caller ID information when a call is placed. If allowed (i.e., block enabled), the system auto-
matically inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program 14-01-21) before the user
dialed digits (this requires Program 14-02-10 to be enabled). If prevented (i.e., block dis-
abled), the system outdials the call just as it was dialed by the user.
• 20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/DISA/
DIL/E&M
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) forced second call. When enabled
the user can not turn off second call indication by Service Code 779+0. When disabled the
user can choose to receive/not receive second calls with Service Code 779+1.
• 20-09-02 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Caller ID Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to display
incoming Caller ID name/number information.
• 20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) Automatic Off-Hook Sig-
nal
In order for a display phone to show Caller ID information for a second incoming call, must
be enabled (1).
• 20-19-01 : System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Display Formatting
Determine whether the first 10 digits (0) or last 10 digits (1) should be displayed when Caller
ID exceeds 12 digits.
• 20-19-02 : System Options for Caller ID - Caller ID Wait Timer
Determine how long an incoming CO call should wait for Caller ID information from telco
before the system connects the call.
• 20-19-03 : System Options for Caller ID - Edit Caller ID
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to edit the
stored Caller ID information.
• 80-02-01 : DTMF Tone Setup - Duration
80-02-02 : DTMF Tone Setup - Pause
With Program 14-01-20 set to 1 and Program 14-02-10 set to 1, if the Caller ID block code is
being sent too quickly for the telco to recognize, lengthen the pause and duration time for the
DTMFs.

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
ARS can block outgoing Caller ID information on a call-by-call basis. To do this, insert the
Caller ID block code in the ARS Dial Treatments.
Station Message Detail Recording
Caller ID information outputs on the SMDR report.
Voice Mail
The system can send Caller ID digits to the voice mail if allowed in Program 14-02-10.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 115

Central Office Calls, Answering
Central Office Calls, Answering

Aspila EX
• Available - 192 trunks.

Description
The system provides flexible routing of incoming CO (trunks) calls to meet the exact site require-
ments. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of system extensions. For
additional information on making trunk ring, refer to the Ring Group feature.

Delayed Ringing
Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for trunks. If the trunk is not answered at its
original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group (this ring group applies to DIL or non-
DIL trunks). This could help a secretary that covers calls for their boss. If the boss doesn’t answer
the call, it rings the secretary’s phone after a programmable interval.

Universal Answer
Universal Answer allows an employee to answer a call by going to any system phone and dialing a
unique Universal Answer code. The employee doesn’t have to know the trunk number or dial any
other codes to pick up the ringing trunk. You’ll normally set up Universal Answer along with Uni-
versal Night Answer (see “Night Service”). When a Universal Night Answer call rings the External
Paging, an employee can answer the call from the first available phone. You might also want to use
Universal Answer in a noisy warehouse or machine shop where the volume of normal telephone
ringing is not adequate. After hearing the ringing over the Paging, an employee can then easily pick
up the call from a shop phone. See “Night Service” for more on Universal Night Answer.

The Automatic Answer of Universal Answer Calls option (Program 20-10-07) determines whether
or not the extension has the Auto Answer feature for ringing calls. This option allows a user to sim-
ply lift the handset to answer a ringing call; they no longer need to dial the service code.

Display Reason for Transfer

When incoming DID, DDI, DISA, DIL or ISDN calls are transferred to another extension or ring
group due to a Call Forward or DND setting, the reason for the transfer can be displayed on the
phone receiving the transferred call. The extension user can then recognize why they are receiving
the call. This feature requires a display telephone in order to view the message.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 10-03-03 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line tele-
phones.
• 10-08-01 : Pre-Ringing Setup
Enable (1) or disable (0) pre-ringing for outside calls.
• 14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type

116 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Central Office Calls, Answering
14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk.
• 14-02-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Ring Detect Type
For each trunk, enable delayed ringing (0) or immediate ringing (1).
• 14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
For Universal Answer, assign trunks to trunk groups (1-100) then go to Program 14-06 below
to set up Trunk Group Routing.
• 14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
For Universal Answer, set up trunk routes (1-100) and then go to Program 23-03 below to
assign the trunk routes to extensions. An extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a
call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned route.
• 14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-200). This sets the access options for trunks. Ring Group
programming overrides Access Map programming.
• 15-02-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Trunk Ring Tone
Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the settings
made with either Service Code 820 or Program 15-02-02. Also see Program 22-03.
• 15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-200) to extensions.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
To have outside calls ring specific keys, assign trunks to line keys (codes 1-200). You can
also program function keys as trunk group or loop keys (*02 or *05). For additional loop key
data, in Program 15-13 enter 0 (incoming only), 1 (outgoing only) or 2 (both ways).
• 20-02-09 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
For Universal Answer, assign a Class of Service (1-15) that enables Program to an extension.
• 20-10-07 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Automatic Answer of Universal Calls
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use
Auto-Answer to pick up Universal Answer calls. This allows a user to simply pick up the
handset instead of dialing a service code.
• 20-13-23 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Display the Reason for
Transfer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display
the Reason for Transfer message.
• 22-01-02 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Ring No Answer Alarm
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Incoming Call RNA Alarm. If enabled, the ring cadence will
change for a call that rings longer than the interval set in 22-01-03.
• 22-01-03 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Ring No Answer Alarm Time
Set the Ring No Answer Alarm interval (0-64800 seconds). If a trunk rings a system phone-
system phone longer than this interval, the system changes the ring cadence.
• 22-01-04 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than this interval, it reroutes to the Ring Group set in
Program 22-08.
• 22-03-01 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks. Customize the tones within each Ring Tone Range in 82-
01. Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the set-
tings made with either Service Code 820 or Program 15-02-02.
• 22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extensions, assign extensions to ring groups (1-100). For each extension
in the Ring Group, indicate in Program 22-06 if trunks should ring (1) or not ring (0).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 117

Central Office Calls, Answering
• 22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
To have the trunks ring extensions, assign trunks to a Ring Group.
• 22-06-01 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
Indicate whether the trunks in the Ring Group assigned in 22-04 should ring (1) or not ring
(0).
• 22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
If an incoming trunk call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it
routes to the destination you specify in this option. Determine if the destination should be a
Ring Group (1-100), DSPDB Voice Mail (101) or In-Skin Voice Mail (102).
• 23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
For Universal Answer, assign trunk routes (1-100) set in Program 14-06 to extensions. An
extension user can use Universal Answer to answer a call if the ringing trunk is in its assigned
route.
• 82-01-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Customize the ring tones within each Ring Tone Range. Assign Ring Tone Ranges to trunks
in 22-03. Trunks ring extensions according to the Ring Tone Range selected in 22-03 and the
user settings made with Service Code 820.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering Call Forward/DID/DIL/DISA/Do Not Disturb/ISDN
The Reason for Transfer option should be set for each type of trunk which will use the Reason
for Transfer message.
Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup
Using these features, ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming.
Direct Inward Line
Direct Inward Lines ring an extension directly, without Ring Group or Access Map programming.
Line Preference
An extension user can answer an outside call just by lifting the handset.
Long Conversation Cutoff/Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls
to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Microphone Cutoff
In order to mute the handset transmitter, set up a Microphone Cutoff Programmable Function Key.
Night Service
Use Universal Answer to pick up Universal Night Answer calls.
Programmable Function Keys
Line keys and loop keys simplify answering outside calls.
Selectable Text Messaging
If the Absent text message has been set by the originating extension, the destination extension
will display the assigned text message instead of the Reason for Transfer message.

118 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Central Office Calls, Answering

Operation
To answer an incoming trunk call:
1. Lift handset.
2. At system phone, press flashing line key.
If you don’t have a line or loop key for a trunk call ringing your phone, it rings an idle
CALL key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
You can dial after answering the call. This allows you, for example, to respond to com-
puter-generated incoming calls.
OR
1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (001-200).

To use Universal Answer to answer a call ringing over the Paging system:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
Depending on system programming, this may answer the call and you can skip Step 2.
2. Dial 872.
If you hear error tone, your extension’s Class of Service prevents Universal Answer.

To listen to the incoming trunk ring choices (system phone only):

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 811 + 2.
3. Select the ringing (1-8) and tone range (1-4) you want to check.
4. Go back to step 3 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up.

To change the pitch of your incoming trunk ring (system phonesystem phone only):
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 820 + 2.
3. Select the ringing (1-8).
4. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 119

Central Office Calls, Placing
Central Office Calls, Placing

Aspila EX
• Available - 200 trunks.

Description
The system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This
lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each individual’s needs.
A user can place a call by:
• Pressing Line Keys or “Loop Keys”
• Pressing a Trunk Group (i.e., loop) key
• Pressing a Trunk Group Routing (dial 9) key
• Dialing a code for a specific trunk (805 + the trunk number)
• Dialing a code for a Trunk Group (804 + group number)
• Dialing a code for Trunk Group Routing or ARS (9)
• Dialing an Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (which you must define)

Conditions
(A.) The system provides analogue trunk CO service via COIU PCBs. COIU PCBs can connect to
either loop start or ground start CO lines. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional
details.
(B.) Analogue Trunk (COIU) PCBs do not require circuit type programming.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 10-03-03 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line tele-
phones.
• 11-01-01 : System Numbering
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
• 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 9). If you change this code,
you must also review the settings in 11-01 for the new code selected.
• 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
• 11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Trunk Group Routing/dial 9
keys (code 804).
• 14-01-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk Name
To make identifying calls easier, assign a name to each trunk.
• 14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Assign a CODEC Gain Type to each trunk. This sets the amount of gain (amplification) for

120 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Central Office Calls, Placing
the selected trunk.
• 14-01-07 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls.
• 14-01-10 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls
For each trunk, enable (1) or disable (0) DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.
• 14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-200). This sets the access options for trunks.
• 15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-200) to extensions.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
To simplify placing calls, assign function keys for placing trunk calls: Line keys (1-200) and
Trunk Group/loop keys (code *02 + group).
• 20-02-06 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Preselection Time
Set the preselection interval (0-64800 seconds). When a system phone user preselects a line
key, the system remembers the preselection for this interval.
• 20-02-09 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to extensions.
• 20-08-02 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) trunk calling.
• 21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.
Refer to “Trunk Group Routing” to set up outbound routing.
• 81-01-01 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup
Review the Analogue Trunk Timers for compatibility with the connected telco.

Related Features
Alphanumeric Display/Call Timer
If the trunk name seize display is enabled in programming, Call Timer starts automatically
after the user places a trunk call. Disabling the trunk name seize display also disables the Call
Timer.
Automatic Route Selection
The system can automatically select the correct type of line to use based on the number dialed
and the time.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Handsfree
With Automatic Handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without
first lifting the handset or pressing SPK. Users without Automatic Handsfree can preselect a
line key before lifting the handset or pressing SPK.
Long Conversation Cutoff/Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period. Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls
to hear a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.
Loop Keys
Loop keys simplify placing Central Office Calls.
Microphone Cutoff

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 121

Central Office Calls, Placing
In order to mute the handset transmitter, set up a Microphone Cutoff Programmable Function Key.
The MIC key will only mute the handsfree microphone.
Programmable Function Keys
Line keys and loop keys simplify placing outside calls.
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group
Routing code (9) for trunk calls.
Trunk Groups
Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a specific
trunk group.

Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 804.
3. Dial line group number (1-9 or 001-100 ).
4. Dial number.
OR
1. At system phone, press trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: *02 + group).
Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.
2. Dial number.

To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 9.
If your system has an Alternate Trunk Route Access code, you may dial that instead.
3. Dial number.
OR
1. At system phone, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *05).
Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.
2. Dial number.

122 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Central Office Calls, Placing

Operation (Cont’d)
To place a call over a specific trunk:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 805.
3. Dial line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
4. Dial number.
OR
1. At system phone, press line key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: 001 to 200).
Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.
2. Dial number.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 123

Class of Service
Class of Service

Aspila EX
• Available - 15 Classes of Service.

Description
Class of Service (COS) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The
system allows any number of extensions to share the same Class of Service. An extension can have
a different Class of Service for each of the Night Service modes. This lets you program a different
set of dialing options for daytime operation, nighttime operation and even during lunch breaks. An
extension’s Class of Service can be changed in system programming or via a Service Code (nor-
mally 777).

Conditions
None

Default Setting
• The attendant (port 01/extension 200 and port 02/extension 201) have Class of Service 1 in all
Night Service modes. All other extensions have Class of Service 2 in all Night Service modes.
• See the Charts and Illustrations (page 5) for the default settings of the individual options.

If changing Class of Service via Service Code:

• The password required to change Class of Service via Service Code 777 is 0000 (Program 90-
02-02 = 0000).
• An extension can use Service Code 777 to change another extension’s Class of Service (Pro-
gram 20-13-28 = 1).
• An extension automatically blocks another extension’s attempt to change their Class of Ser-
vice via Service Code 777 (Program 20-13-28 = 0).
• The default Service Code for this option is 777 (Program 11-11-24 = 777).

Programming
• 11-11-24 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Change Extension Class of
Service
If required, use this option to change the Service Code a user dials to change an extension’s
Class of Service.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service to extensions (1-15). Any Class of Service assignments you change
using Service Code 777 (see below) automatically update this program.
• 20-07 through 20-14 : Class of Service Options
Set the options in a Class of Service.

If changing Class of Service via Service Code:

• 20-13-28 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Allow Station COS to be
Changed
Use this option to permit (1) or block (0) another extension from changing this extension’s
Class of Service via Service Code 777.

124 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07

Default
Item Related
Item Input Data
No. Program
COS 1 COS 2-15

01 Manual Night Service Enabled 0- Off 1 0 11-10-01

Enabled/disabled an extension’s ability to use manual Night 1- On
Service Switching

02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone 0- Off 1 0 11-10-02

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to change the Music on 1- On
Hold tone

03 Time Setting 0- Off 1 0 11-10-03

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to set the Time via Ser- 1- On
vice Code 828.

04 Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries 0- Off 1 0 11-10-04

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to store Abbreviated 1- On
Dialing numbers. With this disabled, an extension will display
only the name assigned to the Abbreviated Dialing number -
the telephone number will not be displayed. This could be used
if you wish to prevent Account Codes from being displayed.

05 Set/Cancel Automatic Transfer to Transfer 0- Off 1 0 11-10-06

1- On
06 Charging Cost Display 0- Off 1 0
1- On

07 - Not Used -
08 - Not Used -

09 - Not Used - 1 0 11-10-15

10 Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance 0- Off 1 0 20-13-18

Level) 1- On
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their
Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 (by
default).

11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analogue trunk only) 0- Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk 1- On
Disconnect

12 Trunk port disable 0- Off 1 0 11-10-27

1- On
13 VRS Record 0- Off 1 0
Enables/disables extension’s ability to record, erase and listen 1- On
to VRS messages
14 VRS General Message Listen 0- Off 1 0 11-10-21
Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial 4 or Service Code 1- On
711 and listen to the General Message

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 125

Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Program 20-07

Default
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Program
COS 1 COS 2-15

15 VRS General Message Record 0- Off 1 0 11-10-22

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code 712 1- On
and record, listen to or erase the General Message

16 - Not Used -

17 - Not Used -

18 SMDR printout accumulated extension data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-23

1- On
19 SMDR printout accumulated STG data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-24
1- On

20 SMDR printout accumulated account code data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-25

1- On

Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08

Default
Item Input Related
No. Item Data Program
COS COS 15
01-14

01 Intercom Calls 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable Intercom calling for the extension. 1-On
02 Trunk Calls 0-Off 1 0
Enable/disable outgoing trunk calling for the extension. 1-On

03 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 1 0

1-On

04 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 1 0

1-On

05 Dial Number Preview 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Dial Number Pre- 1-On
view.
06 Toll Restriction Override 0-Off 1 0 21-01-07,
Enables/disables Toll Restricting Override (Service Code 875). 1-On 21-07

07 Repeat Redial 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Repeat Redial. 1-On

08 Toll Restriction Dial Block 0-Off 1 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial 1-On
Block.

126 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-08

Default
Item Item Input Related
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
01-14

09 Hotline/Extension Ringdown 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Ringdown Extension for extensions with this 1-On
COS.

10 Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced Intercom 0-Off 1 0

Ringing 1-On
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to force Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom
calls.

11 Protect for the call mode switching from caller 0-Off 0 0

(Internal Call) 1-On
12 Department Group Step Calling 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Department 1-On
Group Step Calling
13 CLIP 0-Off 1 0
1-On

14 Call Address Information 0-Off 0 0

1-On
15 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0-Off 0 0 14-01-20
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to automatically 1-On 14-01-21
block outgoing Caller ID information when a user places a call.
If this option is on, the system automatically inserts the Caller
ID block code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user’s dialed
digits.
16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number 0-Off 0 0
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display the 1-On
name and number of the extension that dialed 911.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 127

Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service), Program 20-09

Default
Item Input Related
No. Item data Program
COS
01-14 COS 15

01 Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M 0-Off 0 0

1-On
02 Caller ID Display 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables the Caller ID display at an extension. 1-On

03 Sub Address Identification 0-Off 1 0

1-On

04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0-Off 1 0

1-On
05 Setting Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom 0-Off 1 0 11-11-15,
Ringing 1-On 11-11-16
Allows/prevents an extension from enabling Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incoming
Intercom calls

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-10

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Group Call Pickup (Within Group) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an extension’s 1-On
own Pickup Group (Service Code 867)

02 Call Pickup (Another Group) 0-Off 1 0

Group Call Pickup (Another Group) 1-On
Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing outside a group
(Service Code 869)

03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Unscreened Transfer 1-On

04 Group Call Pickup 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to pick up a call ringing into a 1-On
Pickup Group (Service Codes 867 and 868)

05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group 0-Off 1 0

1-On
06 Meet Me Conference and Paging 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Meet Me Conference 1-On
and Paging

128 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-10

07 Automatic Answer of Universal Calls 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Universal Auto Answer 1-On
(no service code required)

08 Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Coverage Keys 0-Off 0 0

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to answer an incom- 1-On
ing call on a Call Coverage Key simply by lifting the handset.

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-11

Default
Item
No. Item Input Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Call Forward Immediately 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Immediate Call For- 1-On
ward.
02 Call Forward When Busy 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forward When 1-On
Busy.

03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forward When 1-On
Unanswered.

04 Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/Disables an extension’s ability to activate Call Forwarding 1-On
with Both Ringing.

05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate Call Forwarding 1-On
with Follow Me.

06 Unscreened Transfer 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Unscreened Transfer. 1-On

07 Transfer Without Holding 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Transfer Without 1-On
Holding.

08 Transfer Information Display 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s incoming Transfer pre-answer dis- 1-On
play.

09 Group Hold Initiate 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Group Hold. 1-On

10 Group Hold Answer 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to pick up a call on Group 1-On
Hold

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 129

Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Answer Service), Program 20-11

Default
Item
No. Item Input Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

11 Automatic On Hook Transfer 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Automatic On Hook 1-On
Transfer

12 Call Forwarding Off-Premise 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to set up Call Forwarding 1-On
Off-Premise for their phone.

13 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to have a call which recalls 1-On
from hold transfer to the operator.

14 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction 0-Off 1 0

1-On

15 VRS Personal Greeting 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code *47 to 1-On
record, listen to or erase the General Message

16 Call Redirect 0-Off 1 0

Enable or disable a system phone user’s ability to transfer a call to a 1-On
pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another
extension) without answering the call.

17 Call transfer setup for each telephone group 0-Off 1 0

1-On

18 No Recall 0-Off 0 0
Allow (0) or prevent (1) answered Transferred calls from recalling 1-On
the originating extension.

19 Normal/Extended Park 0...Normal 0 0

Determine if an extension’s Class of Service should allow either a 1...Extende
normal or extended Park. d

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Long Conversation Alarm 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables the Warning Tone for Long Conversation 1-On
(not for SLTs)

02 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Conversation Cut- 1-On
off for incoming calls.

130 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

03 Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Conversation Cut- 1-On
off for outgoing calls.

04 Call Forwarding/DND Override 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call Forwarding/DND 1-On
Override

05 Automatic Off Hook Signaling (for KST)/Call Waiting (for SLT) 0-Off 1 0
Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive 1-On
off hook signals.

06 Automatic Off Hook Signaling 0-Off 1 0

Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive 1-On
off hook signals.

07 Message Waiting 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to leave Message Waiting 1-On

08 Conference 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a conference or Meet 1-On
Me Conference

09 Privacy Release 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Voice Call Confer- 1-On
ence

10 Barge In Mode 0-Off 0 0

Enables the extension’s Barge In to be speech mode (0) or Monitor 1-On
mode (1).

11 Room Monitor, Initiating Extension 0-Off 0 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to initiate Room Monitor 1-On
12 Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored 0-Off 0 0
Enable/disable an extension’s ability to be monitored 1-On

13 Continued Dialing 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Continued Dialing which 1-On
allows DTMF signal sending while talking on extension.

14 Department Calling 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to call a Department Group. 1-On

15 Barge In, Initiate 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables Barge In at initiating extension. 1-On
16 Barge In, Receive 0-Off 0 0
Blocks/allows Barge In at the receiving extension. 1-On

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 131

Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

17 Barge In Tone/Display 0-Off 0 0

Use this option to enable/disable the Barge In tone. If enabled, callers 1-On
hear an alert tone and their display indicates the Barge In when another
extension barges into their conversation. If disabled, there is no alert
tone or display indication.

18 Programmable Function Key Programming (General Level) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their General func- 1-On
tion keys using Service Code 851 (by default). (Refer to Program 20-
07-10 for Service Code 852.)

19 Selectable Display Messaging 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Selectable Display Mes- 1-On
saging

20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables operator alert when an extension improperly enters an 1-On
Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.

21 Extension Name 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program its name 1-On

22 Called Party Status 0-Off 0 0

Display the detail state of called party 1-On

23 Display the Reason for Transfer 0-Off 0 0

Select whether an extension should display the reason a call is being 1-On
transferred to their extension (Call Forward Busy, Call Forward No
Answer, DND).

24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) a user’s ability to press a line key to barge into 1-On
an outside call. The Barge In feature must be enabled if this option is to
be used.

25 Transmission is cut when made privacy release during trunk to trunk 0-Off 0 0
transfer. 1-On

26 Group Listen 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Group Listen 1-On

27 Busy on seizing virtual extension 0-Off 1 0

1-On

28 Allow COS to be Changed 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability of an extension’s COS to be 1-On
changed via Service Code 777.

29 Paging Display 0-Off 1 0

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to display paging 1-On
information.

132 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Program 20-13

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

30 Background Music 0-Off 1 0

In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) an extension 1-On
from turning Background Music on and off.

31 Connected Line identification (COLP) 0-Off 0 0

1-On

32 Deny Multiple Barge Ins 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to have multiple user’s 1-On
Barge In to their conversation.

33 ACD Supervisor’s Position Enhancement 0-Off 0 0

This option must be enabled in order for the operator to use service 1-On
codes in Program 11-13-10 through 11-13-13.

34 Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block off-hook signals 1-On
manually sent from a co-worker.

35 Block Camp-On 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block callers from 1-On
dialing the service code (assigned in 11-16-05) to Camp On.

36 Call Timer 0-Off 1 0

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an exten- 1-On
sion’s ability to use the Call Timer.

Class of Service Options (DISA/E&M Service), Program 20-14

Default
Item Input
Item
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 First Digit Absorption 0-Off 0 0

For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the 1-On
first incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with
3- and 4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.

02 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection
(ARS).
03 Trunk Group Access 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 814).
04 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to use the system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 133

Class of Service

Class of Service Options (DISA/E&M Service), Program 20-14

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

05 Operator Calling 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to dial 0 for the telephone system operator.

06 Internal Paging 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to use the telephone system’s Internal Paging.

07 External Paging 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to use the telephone system’s External Paging.

08 Direct Trunk Access 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 815).

09 Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller’s ability to use 1-On
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code *26). This option is not
available to DISA callers.
10 Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA 0-Off 0 0
1-On

11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability 1-On
to use the Barge In feature.

Related Features
Refer to specific features for desired Class of Service option.

Night Service
An extension can have a different Class of Service for each Night Service mode: Day 1, Night 1,
Midnight 1, Rest 1, Day 2, Night 2, Midnight 2, or Rest 2.

134 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Class of Service

Operation
To change an extension’s Class of Service (via Service Code 777):
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 777.
3. Dial the extension number you want to change.
You see: MODE1:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
The extension you dial may be set to block your attempt to change their Class of Service.
4. Enter the Day 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE2:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
5. Enter the Night 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE3:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
6. Enter the Midnight 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE4:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
7. Enter the Rest 1 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE5:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
8. Enter the Day 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE6:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
9. Enter the Night 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE7:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
10. Enter the Midnight 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: MODE8:nn
Press HOLD to leave the current value unchanged.
11. Enter the Rest 2 Mode Class of Service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press
HOLD.
You see: Enter Station#-
12. Go to step 3 and enter another extension number.
OR
Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 135

Conference
Conference

Aspila EX
• NTCPU provides 2 blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties
conferenced up to the block’s limit of 32.

Description
Conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With
Conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The
NTCPU provides 2 blocks of 32 Conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number of
internal or external parties conferenced up to the block’s limit of 32. This means that one extension
can Conference up to 31 internal and/or external parties together (the originator would be the 32nd
party reaching the maximum of 32). While this Conference call is active, another user can use the
second block of Conference circuits to make the same type of call.

Each block of Conference circuits can have multiple Conference calls, providing there are Conference
circuits available. It is not restricted to one Conference per block.

Split (From Conference)

Split allows a user to alternate (i.e., switch) between their callers in Conference. This will allow a
dispatcher, for example, to control a telephone meeting between themselves, a customer and a ser-
vice technician. The dispatcher can meet together with all parties, privately set up a service strategy
with the technician and then meet again to set the schedule.

Split cycles through the Conference in the same order in which the Conference was initially set up.
If a user places an outside call, conferences extension 302 followed by extension 303, Split will
cycle from the trunk, to 302 and finally to 303. The Split cycle then repeats.

Barge Into Conference

If a user’s extension has Barge In capability enabled, they can also Barge In on an established Con-
ference. This permits, for example, an attendant or supervisor to join a Conference in an emer-
gency. It also allows a co-worker to leave a conference -- and then rejoin the telephone meeting
when it is convenient to do so.

Transfer Call Into Conference

An extension with Barge In capability can Transfer a call into an existing Conference. This would
allow, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then Transfer them into an existing tele-
phone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate all the parties at the same time and
sequentially add them into the Conference.

Conditions
(A.) Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of
blocks available for ADA Recording, ACD Agent Auto Call Recording, and ACD Supervisor
Monitor.
(B.) An ADA module is required for speech recording.

Default Setting
Enabled.

136 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Conference

Programming
• 10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
Determine if there are conference circuits available, that not all have been assigned as conver-
sation record circuits.
• 11-12-08 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Barge In
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Barge In to a Conference call.
This code is normally 810.
• 11-12-47 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer
for SLT
If required, use this program to change the code users dial to Split while on a Conference call.
This code is normally 894.
• 11-16-02 : Program 11-16 : One-Digit Service Code Setup - Barge In
If required, use this program to define the single digit service code users dial to Barge In to a
Conference call.
• 14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer
Calls
CODEC gain set at 0 dB (14-01-04 = 32) can be used to set the CODEC gain type for multi-
line Conference calls.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Conference (code 07).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Conference
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a Conference.
• 20-13-15 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Initiate
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to Barge In to a call.
• 20-13-16 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Receive
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to receive a Barge In on a
call.
• 20-14-11 : Class of Service Options For DISA/E&M - DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In
Determine if DISA and tie trunk users should have the ability to dial a service code to Barge
In to a Conference call (0=disabled, 1=enabled).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 137

Conference

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Define the outgoing call options for each trunk and user.
Conference, Voice Call
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) / Tie Lines
DISA and tie line users may use the Barge In feature on a Conference call if they know the
service code and are permitted in their DISA/Tie Line Class of Service.
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.
Programmable Function Keys
In order for system phone to have Conference, it must have a Conference function key.
Tandem Trunking
A user can set up an Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Conference and then drop out of the call,
allowing the remaining parties to continue the conversation.

Operation
To establish a Conference:

System Phone
1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2. Press CONF or Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).
3. Dial extension you want to add.
OR
Access outside call
OR
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or dial a trunk/trunk group
code.
You can optionally go back to step 2 to add more parties to your Conference.
4. When called party answers, press CONF or Conference key twice.
If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the sys-
tem’s Conference limit.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 to add more parties.

Single Line Set

1. Establish Intercom or trunk call.
2. Single Line Telephone
Hookflash and dial 826.
DSL Telephone
Press HOLD and dial 826.
3. Dial extension you want to add.
OR

138 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Conference
Access trunk call.
OR
Retrieve call from Park orbit.
4. Single Line Telephone
Hookflash and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
OR
Hookflash twice to set up the Conference.
DSL Telephone
Press HOLD and repeat step 3 to add more parties.
OR
Press HOLD twice to set up the Conference.

If you cannot add additional parties to your Conference, you have exceeded the sys-
tem’s Conference limit.

To exit a Conference without affecting the other parties:

System Phone
1. Hang up.
If you press Hold while on a call with two outside callers, the outside callers hear
Music on Hold.

Single Line Set

1. Hang up.
If you are not permitted to use Tandem Trunking, outside callers may hear Music on
Hold.

To Barge In to Conference Call:

1. Pick up the handset or press SPK and dial the service code (810=default).
If the telephone doesn’t have the proper COS, a warning tone is sent. After the user
hangs up, the system will automatically place a Callback to the extension.
2. Dial the extension number or press a DSS key of a telephone within a Conference call.
When a new call is added to the conference, an intrusion tone is heard by all parties in
the Conference, depending on system programming, and all display system phones show
the joined party. If a Conference is not possible:
- the extension user will hear a warning tone
- the DISA user will be rerouted to the defined ring group
OR
- the tie line user will hear a busy tone.
OR
Not available for DISA or tie line trunks:
1. Dial the extension number of the internal party.
2. Dial the single digit service code.
Instead of the single digit service code, the service code 810 can also be dialed at this
point.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 139

Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release

Aspila EX
• Available. NTCPU provides 2 blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number of internal or
external parties conferenced up to the block’s limit of 32.

Description
Voice Call Conference lets extension user’s in the same work area join in a trunk Conference. To
initiate a Voice Call Conference, an extension user just presses the Voice Call Conference key and
tells their co-workers to join the call. The system releases the privacy on the trunk, and other users
can just press the trunk’s line key to join the call.

Voice Call Conference does not use the telephone system features to announce the call. The person
initiating the Voice Call Conference just announces it “through the air.”

Privacy Mode Toggle Option

The Privacy Mode Toggle option allows an extension user to quickly change an outside call from
the non-private mode to the private mode. This would help a workgroup supervisor, for example,
that needed to quickly monitor any group member’s call. If the supervisor wanted to make a
“secure” call, however, they could quickly switch the line’s mode and be assured that their call
would not be monitored. If the outside call is on a line key, the user just presses the line key to
switch modes. If the call is on a loop key, the user presses their Privacy Release function key
instead.

For systems using the Privacy Mode Toggle option, trunks initially have the privacy released. If
privacy is desired for a trunk, use the toggle option or press the Privacy Release function key to
switch modes.

Conditions
(A.) Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of
blocks available for ADA Recording, ACD Agent Auto Call Recording, and ACD Supervisor
Monitor.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
• 10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
Determine if there are conference circuits available, that not all have been assigned as conver-
sation record circuits.
• 14-01-19 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Privacy Mode Toggle Option
Determine if a trunk should be able to be toggled to a private/non-private line (0=disabled,
1=enabled).
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Voice Call Conference (code 32).
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

140 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release
• 20-13-09 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service), Privacy Release
In an extension’s COS, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Privacy Release
alllowing for a Voice Call Conference. The trunk must be programmed to allow this feature in
Program 14-01-19.
• 31-01-04 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Privacy Release Time
Set the interval users have to join a Voice Call Conference after it is announced. (Note that
this interval is also used for Meet Me Conference.)

Related Features
Conference
Set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office.
Programmable Function Keys
Voice Call Conference requires a Voice Call Conference function key and line keys.
Single Line Telephones
This feature is not available at single line telephones.

Operation
To join a Voice Call Conference (if invited):
1. After Conference request, press indicated line key.

To exit a Voice Call Conference without affecting the other parties:

1. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 141

Continued Dialing
Continued Dialing

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Continued Dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and
then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like Voice Mail, automatic banking
and Other Common Carriers (OCCs).

There are two types of Continued Dialing:

• Continued Dialing for Intercom Calls
Depending on an extension’s Class of Service, a system phone user may be able to dial addi-
tional digits after their Intercom call connects. In systems with Voice Mail, for example, Con-
tinued Dialing lets extension users dial the different options after the Voice Mail answers.
Without Continued Dialing, extension users cannot access these Voice Mail options.

• Continued Dialing for Trunk Calls

Continued Dialing gives a user access to outside services like automatic banking, an outside
Automated Attendant, bulletin boards and Other Common Carriers (OCCs). After the outside
service answers, the user can dial digits for whatever options the services allow. Without
Continued Dialing, the system’s Toll Restriction will cut off the call after a specific number of
dialed digits. See Programming below for additional information.

NOTICE
Continued Dialing may make the system more susceptible to toll fraud.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-13-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use
Continued Dialing for Intercom calls to 2500 type devices.
• 21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to an extension.
• 21-05-03 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction of Local Call
If enabled, users cannot dial a local call longer than the number of digits defined in Program
21-06-03.
• 21-05-04 : Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
Assign Program 21-06-03 entries to each Toll Restriction class.

142 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Continued Dialing

Related Features
Pulse to Tone Conversion
Users can place calls to services over Dial Pulse trunks - and then dial DTMF digits after the
service answers.
Toll Restriction
The ability to use Continued Dialing on trunk calls is set by Toll Restriction programming.

Operation
To use Continued Dialing:
1. Place Intercom or trunk call.
2. Continue dialing after call connects.
Toll Restriction and Class of Service programming may limit Continued Dialing.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 143

Data Communications
Data Communications

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
With the Data Communications, you can use your telephone system to set up a data network. Data
communication networking lets system users share common office resources such as PCs, modems
and printers. Since the phone system handles the network communications, you can eliminate the
expense of separate wiring, network adapters and network driver software.

There are four types of data modules:

• CTA Module (P/N 0890058)
The CTA is a single port data module that installs in a system phone phone for serial (RS-232-
C) communications. Use a CTA to easily add RS-232-C data capabilities to any system phone.
The system allows up to 128 CTA Modules to be used within the system.
• CTU Module (P/N 0890059)
The CTU is also a single port data module that installs in a system phone telephone and pro-
vides a USB port for communication. The system allows up to 128 CTU Modules to be used
within the system. An AC/DC adapter is require for installation of this module.
• APR Module (P/N 0890056)
The APR module is an analogue port adapter with a ringer function. It can transmit disconnect
signal in the form of a momentary open loop to the analogue port (required for voice mail).
Reverse-polarity, Message Wait lamping and Caller ID are NOT supported with this module.
An AC/DC adapter is require for installation.
• APA Module (P/N 0890057)
The APR module is an analogue port adapter without a ringer function which can be used for
outgoing calls (e.g. modems). It can transmit disconnect signal in the form of a momentary
open loop to the analogue port (required for voice mail). Reverse-polarity, Message Wait
lamping and Caller ID are NOT supported with this module.

CTA/CTU Features
• System Phone-Originated Data Call
Place a call to another CTA/CTU by using your telephone dial pad. The data call automati-
cally sets up if the called CTA/CTU answers.
• Terminal-Originated Data Call
Place data calls directly from your PC. You can dial using Hayes compatible dialing commands
(e.g., ATDT) or use the powerful auto-dialing features of your communications software.
• Terminal-Originated Voice Call (Telemarketing Dial)
Use your PC to place an outgoing call, then switch to a voice call after the number dials out.
This is a great feature for telemarketers that have a list of names to call stored in their commu-
nications software. Let the communications software dial the call - then switch it to a voice
call after the stored number dials out.

Default Setting
Disabled.

144 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Data Communications

Programming
• 11-01-01 : System Numbering
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
• 11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
If required, change the Trunk Access Code (normally 9).
• 11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
• 14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-100).
• 14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
Set up an outbound routing table (1-100) for trunk groups assigned in Program 14-05.
• 14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
• 15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a data key (code 66) to each system phone with a data module installed.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

Related Features
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications
CTI applications automate the office with TAPI compatibility and external PC control.
Hotel/Motel, inDepth/inDepth+
These features require the use of a CTA or CTU module.
Prime Line Selection
Do not set up Prime Line Selection for extensions with Telemarketing Dial.
Programmable Function Keys
A system phone with a Data Module must have a data key. Optionally, system phones can
also have Telemarketing Dial keys.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use the Data Communications capabilities of the system. Check
this feature for further programming.
Station Message Detail Recording
The system uses CTA and CTU modules for SMDR and system reports.
TAPI Compatibility
The system has Telephony Programming Applications Interface (TAPI) capability.
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Systems use CTA and CTU modules for the Traffic Management Reports.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 145

Department Calling
Department Calling

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
With Department Calling, an extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed
Department Group by dialing the group’s pilot number. The call would ring the first available
extension in the group. For example, this would let a caller dial the Sales department just by know-
ing the Sales department’s pilot number. The caller would not have to know any of the Sales
department’s extension numbers. The system allows up to 64 Department Calling Groups.

There are two types of routing available with Department Calling: Priority Routing and Circular
Routing. With Priority Routing, an incoming call routes to the highest priority extensions first.
Lower priority extensions ring only if all higher priority extensions are busy. With Circular Rout-
ing, each call rings a new extension. In a Department Group with extensions 310 (Priority 1), 311
(Priority 2) and 312 (Priority 3)
• The first call rings 310.
• The second call rings 311.
• The third call rings 312.
• The fourth call rings 310 and the cycle repeats.

Note: When programming, the high priority extensions have low priority numbers. For example,
priority 1 has a higher priority than priority 10.

Overflow Routing
Department Calling also provides overflow routing for extensions within the group. If a user
directly dials a busy extension within a Department Group, the system can optionally route the call
to the first available group member. The system follows Program 22-15-03 and 22-15-05’s timer
for playing the periodic VRS message.

User Log Out/Log In

An extension user can log out and log in to a Department Calling Group. By logging out, the user
removes their extension from the group. Once logged out, Department Calling bypasses their
extension. When they log back in, Department Calling routes to their extension normally. All users
can dial a code to log in or log out of their Department Calling Group. A system phone can option-
ally have a function key programmed for one-button log in and log out operation.

Enhanced Hunting
Department Calling is enhanced with expanded hunting capabilities. Hunting sets the conditions
under which calls to a Department Group pilot number will cycle through the members of the
group. The hunting choices are:
• Busy (Option 0)
A call to the pilot number will hunt past a busy group member to the first available extension.
• Not answered (Option 1)
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group.
The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. If the Depart-
ment Group has Priority Routing enabled, and the highest priority member is busy, the call
will not route.
• Busy or not answered (Option 2)
A call to the pilot number will cycle through the idle members of a Department Calling group.
The call will continue to cycle until it is answered or the calling party hangs up. Calls into
groups with Priority Routing and Circular Routing route identically.

146 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Department Calling
• Simultaneous ringing (Option 3)
All idle members of the Department Group ring simultaneously. Calls do not cycle between
group members.

If all members of the Department Group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group’s
pilot number will queue for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold up to wait-
ing calls. Once the queue fills, additional callers hear busy tone and cannot queue for an available
member. If a display phone is waiting in queue, the user will see: WAITING (group name). If a
transferred call in queue is an outside call, and the system has DSP daughter board installed for
VRS, the queued caller will hear, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered
when a line becomes free.”

The VRS can also Transfer calls to Department Groups. Refer to “Voice Response System (VRS)”
feature for more information on setting up the VRS.

The system prevents hunting to a Department Group extension if it is:

• Busy on a call
• In Do Not Disturb
• Call Forwarded

Conditions
When a DIL rings to a Department Group, the DIL will not follow overflow programming (Pro-
grams 22-01-04 and 22-08).

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 147

Department Calling

Description (Cont’d)

148 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Department Calling

Description (Cont’d)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 149

Department Calling

Programming
• 11-07-01 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign pilot numbers to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 16-02.
• 15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a Department Calling key so extension users can install or remove themselves from
the Department Calling Group.
• 16-01-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Name
Assign a name to the Extension (Department) Groups you set up in Program 16-02.
• 16-01-02 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Calling Cycle
Set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.e., when a user dials the department pilot
number). The system can ring the highest priority extension available (Priority Routing, 0) or
cycle in circular order through the group (Circular Routing, 1).
• 16-01-03 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Routing When Busy
Set how the system routes an Intercom call to a busy Department Group member. The caller
can hear busy tone (0) or overflow to the first available Department Group member (1). This
option is for Intercom calls to an extension, not a pilot number.
• 16-01-09 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Department Hunting No Answer Time
Set how long a call will ring a Department Group extension before hunting occurs.
• 16-01-10 : Department Group Basic Data Setup - Hunt Type
Set the type of hunting for each Department Group:
0- No queuing
1- Hunting When Busy
2- Hunting When Not Answered
3- Hunting When Busy or No Answer
• 16-02-01 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-64) and set the priority assignment.
• 20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
• 20-13-14 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Department Calling
In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) Department Calling.
• 22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
If you want a trunk to be a DIL to a Department Group, assign Service Type 4 for each Night
Service Mode. Also see 22-07 below.
• 22-07-01 : DIL Assignment
For each trunk assigned Service Type 4 in 22-02 above, assign the DIL destination as the
Department Group pilot number (Department Groups 1-64).

150 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Department Calling

Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Set up hunting as required for ACD.
Department Step Calling
Easily step call to an idle Department Group member if the member called is busy.
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
A virtual extension can be programmed allowing a Call Coverage key to receive multiple
calls which can camp on to the extension - no analogue port is required.
Transfer
An extension user can Transfer a call to a Department Group master number. If unanswered,
the call will recall the transferring extension after the Transfer Recall Time (Program 24-02-
04).
Voice Mail
Voice mail uses one Department Group for voice mail.

Operation
To call a department:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial department’s extension number.
The system routes the call to the first free phone in the department.

To log out of your Department Calling Group:

While you are logged out, Department Calling cannot route calls to your extension.
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 750 + 1.
OR
1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 46).
The key lights while you are logged out.

To log back in to your Department Calling Group:

While you log back in, Department Calling will route calls to your extension.
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 750 + 0.
OR
1. Press Department Calling Log In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 46).
The key goes out when you log back in.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 151

Department Calling

152 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Department Step Calling
Department Step Calling

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
After calling a busy Department Calling Group member, an extension user can have Department
Step Calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and
place another Intercom call if the first extension called is unavailable. Department Step Calling also
allows an extension user to cycle through the members of a Department Group.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•11-16-01 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
If required, use this option to change the Department Step Calling Single Digit Service Code.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key Department Step Calling (code 36).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-12 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Department Step Calling
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use
Department Step Calling.

Related Features
Department Calling
An extension user can call an idle extension within a preprogrammed Department Group by
dialing the group’s pilot number. Department Calling also provides overflow routing for
extensions within the group - which simulates Step Calling.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Department Step Calling operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 153

 Department Step Calling

Operation
To make a Step Call:
You step through Extension Groups set in Program 16-02.
1. Place call to busy Department Group member.
OR
Place call to Department Group pilot number.
2. Press Step Call key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 36).
3. Repeat step 2 to call other Department Group members.

154 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Dial Number Preview
Dial Number Preview

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Dialing Number Preview lets a display system phone user dial and review a number before the sys-
tem dials it out. Dialing Number Preview helps the user avoid dialing errors.

Conditions
An extension user cannot edit the displayed number.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-05 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Dial Number Preview
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial
Number Preview.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
In order to place an outgoing call, an extension user must have outgoing access to a line, loop
or trunk group key.

Operation
To use Dial Number Preview to place a call (system phone only):
1. Do not lift the handset or press a CALL key.
2. To preview any number, press *.
To preview an Abbreviated Dial number, press DIAL.
3. Dial number you want to call.
The number displays.
4. To dial out the displayed trunk number, press a line/loop/trunk group key.
If the previewed number as a trunk access code (e.g., 9), you can press CALL instead.
OR
To dial out the displayed Intercom number, press a CALL key.
OR
To cancel the number without dialing it out, press HOLD.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 155

 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
For an extension with Dial Pad Confirmation Tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they
press a key. This is helpful for Intercom calls and Dial Pulse trunk calls, since these calls provide
no Call Progress tones.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-18-05 : Service Tone Timer - System Phone Confirmation Tone
If required, change the Dial Pad Confirmation Tone frequency and duration.

Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Dial Pad Confirmation Tone does not apply to single line telephones.

156 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Dial Tone Detection
Dial Tone Detection

Aspila EX
• Available

• Allocating NTCPU circuits for Dial Tone Detection is required.

• Tone Detection Setup is available.

• The Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone option is available.

Description
If a trunk has Dial Tone Detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the telco or PBX
when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a line key
or dialing 805 and the trunk’s number), the system will drop the trunk if dial tone does not occur. If
the user access the trunk via a Trunk Group (by dialing a trunk group code or automatically through
a feature like Last Number Redial), the system can drop the trunk or optionally skip to the next
trunk in the group. Refer to the chart under Programming below for more.

Dial Tone Detection is available for the following features:

• Automatic Route Selection
• Abbreviated Dialing
• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Last Number Redial
• Loop Keys (outbound)
• Save Number Dialed
• T1 Trunking (with ANI/DNIS Compatibility)
• Tie Lines
• Trunk Group Routing
• Trunk Groups

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled for manually dialed calls; enabled for automatically dialed calls.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 157

 Dial Tone Detection

Programming

Dial Tone Detection Program Interaction

Result if dial tone
Method 14-02-05 14-02-11 not present . . .

Press a line key 0 0 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)

OR
0 1 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
Dial 805 + Trunk
number 1 0 Trunk drops
1 1 Trunk drops
Dial a Trunk Group 0 0 Trunk hangs (does not disconnect)
code
0 1 Trunk reroutes after timeout
OR
Automatically 1 0 Trunk drops
through a feature
1 1 Trunk reroutes after timeout

•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

If dial tone detection is enabled, be sure to allocate at least one circuit for dial tone detection
(type 0 or 2).
•14-02-05 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed Trunks
Enable(1) or disable (0) dial tone detection for manually dialed trunk calls. This option only
pertains to calls placed using line keys or Direct Trunk Access.
•21-01-05 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Tone Detection Timer
If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the telco to return dial
tone. When this interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this
timer (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Use these programs to set the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection.
•14-02-11 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
If enabled, the system will skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This option pertains to
calls placed using Loop Keys, Abbreviated Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or Save Number
Dialed. It does not pertain to line key or Direct Trunk Access calls.

Related Features
See Description above.

Operation
Dial Tone Detection is automatic if enabled in programming.

158 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)

Aspila EX
• Available - 20 DID Translation Tables can be divided between 2000 entries.

Description
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. DID saves time for
callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a DID call, the outside caller
dials the local exchange (NNX) and additional digits to ring the telephone system extension. For
example, DID number 926-5400 can directly dial extension 400. The caller does not have to rely on
attendant or secretary call screening to complete the call.

Note: Direct Inward Dialing requires DID service from telco.

In addition to direct dialing of system extensions, DID provides:

• DID Dialed Number Translation
• Flexible DID Service Compatibility
• DID Intercept
• DID Camp-On

DID Dialed Number Translation

DID allows different tables for DID number translation. This gives you more flexibility when buying
DID service from telco. If you can’t buy the exact block of numbers you need (e.g., 200-499), use the
translation tables to convert the digits received. For example, a translation table could convert digits 500-
799 to extension numbers 200-499.

The Aspila EX system has 2000 DID Translation Table entries that you can allocate among the 20 DID
Translation Tables. There is one translation made in each entry. For a simple installation, you can put all
2000 entries in the same table. For more flexibility, you can optionally distribute the 2000 entries among
the 20 tables.

In addition to number conversion, each DID Translation Table entry can have a name assigned to it.
When the DID call rings the destination extension, the programmed name displays.

Flexible DID Service Compatibility

You can program the system to be compatible with three and four digit DID service. With four
digit service, the telco sends four digits to the system for translation. With three digit service, the
telco sends three digits to the system for translation. Be sure to program your system for compati-
bility with the provided telco service. For example, if the telco sends four digits, make sure you set
up the translation tables to accept the four digits.

The system is compatible with Dial Pulse (DP) and DTMF DID signaling. DID trunks can be
either wink start or immediate start.

DID Camp-On
DID Camp-On sets what happens to DID calls to busy extensions when you have Busy Intercept
disabled. With DID Camp-On enabled, a call to a busy extension camps-on for the DID Ring No
Answer Time interval. It then diverts to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or
Voice Mail. Without DID Camp-On, the caller to the busy extension just hears busy tone.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 159

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)
DID Routing Through the VRS
DID calls can optionally route through the VRS. The DID caller hears an initial Automated Atten-
dant Greeting explaining their dialing options. If the caller misdials, they can hear a second greet-
ing with additional instructions. For example, the first Automated Attendant Greeting can be,
“Thank you for calling. Please dial the extension number you wish to reach or dial 0 for the opera-
tor.” If the caller inadvertently dials an extension that doesn’t exist, they could hear, “The extension
you dialed is unavailable. Please dial 0 for assistance or dial # to leave a message so we can call
you back.”
You assign Automated Attendant greetings (i.e., VRS Messages) to the numbers in each Transla-
tion Table. This provides you with extensive flexibility when determining which greetings the sys-
tem should play for which dialed numbers. You could, for example, set up 926 5401 through 926
5449 to route to extensions 301- 349, and have 926 5450 route to the automated attendant.

SMDR Includes Dialed Number

The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk’s name (entered in system programming) or the
number the incoming caller dialed (i.e., the dialed DID digits). This gives you the option of analyz-
ing the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial. (This option also applies to an ISDN
trunk as well.)

DID Intercept
DID Intercept automatically reroutes DID calls under certain conditions. There are three types of DID
Intercept:
• Vacant Number Intercept
If a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, Vacant Number Intercept can
reroute the call to the programmed DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail. With-
out Vacant Number Intercept, the caller hears error tone after misdialing.

• Busy Intercept
Busy Intercept determines DID routing when a DID caller dials a busy extension. If Busy
Intercept is enabled, the call immediately routes to the programmed DID Intercept extension
ring group or Voice Mail. If Busy Intercept is disabled, the call follows DID Camp-On pro-
gramming (see below).

• Ring-No-Answer Intercept
Ring-No-Answer Intercept sets the routing options for DID calls that ring unanswered at the
destination extension. With Ring-No-Answer Intercept enabled, the unanswered call reroutes
to the DID Intercept extension ring group or Voice Mail after the DID Ring-No-Answer Time
interval. If Ring-No-Answer Intercept is disabled, the unanswered call rings the destination
until the outside caller hangs up.

DID Intercept Destination for Each DID Number

With this feature the system allows you to program a DID Intercept destination for a DID number
which receives no answer or busy call. The system can be programmed to use a trunk ring group,
the VRS or the voice mail as the programmed destination. Each DID number can have two destina-
tions. The first destination is for an invalid DID number, busy or no answer extension. The second
destination is for a no answer trunk ring group.

This feature works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 1 in Program 22-02. Other types of
trunks may use the DID table, but the new DID intercept feature is not yet supported.

With the DID Intercept for each DID number feature, when the primary destination (Program 22-
11-05) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol is:
1. Busy Intercept = Forward Busy
2. Ring-No-Answer Intercept = Forward RNA

160 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)
When the secondary destination (Program 22-11-06) is set to Voice Mail, the Voice Mail protocol
is based on the first destination's routing. When the incoming call is forwarded to the first destina-
tion by a busy intercept, the Voice Mail protocol will be that it forwards busy calls. When the
incoming call is routed to the first destination by a ring-no-answer intercept, the protocol will be
that it forwards ring-no-answer. The Voice Mail will transfer the calls to the mailbox number
defined in Program 22-11-02.

Note: Any valid DID number must be entered in the DID table (Program 22-11). If a valid DID
number is not entered, there will be no ring destination for any incoming calls to that num-
ber (the calls will not ring any extension in the system).

Conditions
(A.) Analogue DID requires the installation of a 4DIOPU-A1 PCB (provides four DID ports) or
8DIOPU-A1 PCB (provides eight DID ports).
(B.) DID service must be purchased from your local telephone company.
(C.) DID Intercept for each DID number works for DID trunks with a trunk service type 1 in Pro-
gram 22-02. Other types of trunks may use the DID table, but the new DID intercept feature is
not yet supported.
(D.) BRI or PRI DID requires a BRI/PRI PCB.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 161

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)

Programming
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
If the system has DTMF DID trunks, be sure to reserve at least one circuit for analogue trunk
DTMF reception (type 0 or 2). There must be an available receiver for each DTMF DID
trunk.
• Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Put DID trunks in the same trunk group (other than group 1). If you have several types of
DID trunks, put each type in a separate trunk group.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
You can assign line keys for DID trunks (1-200). Without line keys, DID calls ring line
appearance (CALL) keys.
•20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/
DIL/ E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA,
DIL, or tie line caller.
•21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the time-out interval for DID callers that don’t dial. After this interval, the DID call routes
according to Vacant Number Intercept programming.
•22-01-06 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DID Ring-No-Answer Time
Set the DID Ring-No-Answer (RNA) Intercept interval (0-64800 seconds). In systems with
RNA Intercept, the DID call rings the destination extension for this interval and then rings
Intercept Ring Group.
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For each Night Service Mode, enter service type 3 when the trunk should be a DID trunk.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to Ring Groups. Calls ring the extensions according to programming in 22-
06.
•22-09-01 : DID Basic Data Setup - Expected Number of Digits
For each DID Translation Table (1-20), enter the number of digits the table expects to receive
from the CO (8 maximum). For example, for a table used with 3-digit DID service, enter 3.
•22-09-02 : DID Basic Data Setup - Received Vacant Number Operation
Selectively enable (1) or disable (0) Vacant Number Intercept based on each DID Translation
Database (Program 22-11-01 and 22-11-02).
•22-10-01 : DID Translation Table Setup
Assign the start and end range of DID Translation Table entries (1-2000) to each DID Trans-
lation Table (1-20).
•22-11-01 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Received Number
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the digits received by the system
(eight max.).
•22-11-02 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Target Number
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the extension the system dials after
translation (24 digits max.)
•22-11-03 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Dial-In Name
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the name that should show on the
dialed extension’s display when it rings (twelve characters max.)

162 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)
•22-11-04 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Operation Mode
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the condition required to transfer to
the call to the destination defined in 22-11-05 and 22-11-06.
•22-11-05 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 1
22-11-06 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Transfer Destination 2
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the first and second Transfer Destina-
tions if the callers receives a busy or no answer (action defined in 22-11-04).
(Destination Options: 0 = No setting, 1-100 = Incoming Group, 101 = Voice Mail, 102 = In-
Skin Voice Mail, 01-264 = Extension Group, 400 = DID, 401 = DISA, 1000-1999 = Abbrevi-
ated Number (000-999))
If the Transfer Destinations are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred
to the final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
•22-11-07 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Call Waiting
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify whether Call Waiting should be
allowed (0=disable, 1=enable).
•22-11-08 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - Maximum Number of Calls
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the maximum number of DID calls
(0-200).
•22-11-09 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - MOH Source
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), specify the source of music to be used for
DID trunks (0=IC/MOH port, 1=BGM port, 2=ACI port).
•22-11-10 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion - ACI Music Source Port
For each DID Translation Table entry (1-2000), if item 2 is selected in 22-11-09, specify the
port to be used for the source of music heard on DID trunks.
•22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group
For each DID Translation Table, program the DID Intercept destination. The destination can
be a Ring Group (1-100), DSPDB Voice Mail=101, or In-Skin Voice Mail=102. This pro-
gram is used when there is no destination programmed in Program 22-12-05. It is unrelated to
Program 22-12-06.
•22-13-01 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
Assign the DID trunk groups (1-100) to translation tables. If all the DID trunks use the same
type of DID service, you may have only one DID trunk group and one DID Translation Table
(with many entries).
•34-01-02 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup - DID/E&M Incoming Signaling Type
Enter 0 if DID trunk is Dial Pulse (DP). Enter 1 if DID trunk is DTMF.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection to set
the DTMF criteria for DTMF DID calls.
•81-02-01 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
Make sure the DID Trunk Timer settings are compatible with your local telco.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their phone.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
DILs also provide a way for outside callers to dial a system extension, virtual extension or
Department Group directly.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 163

 Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or Direct Dial In (DDI)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA also allows outside callers to dial system extensions directly.
Off Hook Signaling
The Off Hook Signaling provide DID calls with signaling options. Refer to this feature for the
specifics.
Programmable Function Keys
To simplify answering DID calls, assign function keys as line keys for the DID trunks.
Station Message Detail Recording
SMDR can print trunk port names or received dialed number for ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If
enabled, DNIS digits can be printed on the SMDR reports instead of the trunk name.

Operation
DID calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls.

164 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Aspila EX
• Available - 200 trunksand 64 Department Groups.

Description
A Direct Inward Line (DIL) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or Department
Group directly. Since DILs only ring one extension or group (i.e., the DIL destination), employees
always know which calls are for them. For example, a company operator can have a Direct Inward
Line for International Sales Information. When outside callers dial the DIL’s phone number, the
call rings the operator on the International Sales line key. The DIL does not ring other extensions.

DIL Delayed Ringing

Extensions in a Ring Group can have delayed ringing for another extension’s DIL. If the DIL is not
answered at its original destination, it rings the DIL No Answer Ring Group. This could help a
Technical Service department, for example, that covers calls for an Inside Sales department. If the
Inside Sales calls are not answered, they ring into the Technical Service department.

Conditions
(A.) If unanswered, a DIL without delayed ringing rings an extension until the outside party hangs
up.
(B.) If a DIL rings a Department Group and all agents are busy, the system routes the call as follows:
1. The trunk rings the overflow destination assigned in 22-08.
2. If there is no 22-08 assignment, the trunks rings the PC Attendant Console (if installed).
3. If there is 22-08 assignment or PC Attendant, the call rings according to the Ring Group
assignments in 22-04 and 22-05.
4. If none of the destinations in steps 1-3 above are available, the call continues to ring until a
destination becomes free.
(C.) The DIL follows call forwarding programming, even to voice mail.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 165

 Direct Inward Line (DIL)

Programming
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. All extensions should have at least Hold access to the DIL
(entry 3). Without Hold access, transferred DILs and DILs on hold can be answered only
while they are ringing or recalling.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions (1-200).
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
To have the DIL ring a key, program a line key for the DIL trunk.
•20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/
DIL/ E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA,
DIL, or tie line caller.
•22-01-04 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Time
Set the DIL No Answer Time (0-64800 seconds). If DIL Delayed Ringing is set in program
22-08, this option sets the DIL Delayed Ring interval.
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign each DIL Service Type 4. Make an entry for each Night Service mode.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow to the ring group programmed in 22-
08. Set the ringing in Program 22-06 (0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks
ring).
•22-07-01 : DIL Assignment
Set the destination extension port for each DIL - for each Night Service mode. The destination
can be an extension port, virtual extension port, or Department Group.
•22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For each DIL with delayed ringing, enter the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered
DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time. Make an entry for each Night Service
mode (Ring Group (1-100) DSPDB Voice Mail=101, or In-Skin Voice Mail=102).

Related Features
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding reroutes DILs.
Central Office Calls, Answering
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their phone.
Central Office Calls, Placing
You can place DILs in trunk groups to make outgoing DIL calls easier.
Department Calling
A DIL can have an Extension (Department) Group as its destination.
Do Not Disturb
If an DILs destination extension is in DND, an incoming call rings according to Ring Group
programming.
Group Call Pickup
A user can activate Group Call Pickup to intercept a DIL ringing another extension.

166 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward Line (DIL)
Name Storing
Program a name for a DIL. This makes it easier to identify the incoming call.
Private Line
To simulate Private Line operation, create a unique Access Map for the DIL that allows full
access only for the destination. Give all other extensions only Hold access.
Off Hook Signaling
If a system phone’s first channel is busy, a DIL always signals the idle second channel if
available. If the second channel already has a call waiting, DIL waits in line for a channel to
become free. The outside caller hears ringback tone while this occurs.
Programmable Function Keys
If an extension has a line key for a DIL, the call will ring the key. If not, the call rings an
available line appearance. For other extensions, the DIL indicates as busy.
Ring Groups
A DIL will ring its assigned extension without Ring Group programming. A DIL only rings
its assigned extension. It will not ring other extensions in a Ring Group.

Operation
To answer a call on your Direct Inward Line:
1. Lift handset.
2. At system phone, press flashing line key for DIL.
If you don’t have a line key for the DIL, the DIL rings an idle CALL key.
If you have Ringing Line Preference, lifting the handset answers the call.
If you don’t answer the call, it may ring other extensions (i.e., the DIL No Answer Ring
Group).

To place a call on your Direct Inward Line:

1. Lift handset.
2. At system phone, press line key for DIL
OR
Dial 805 and the DIL trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial 804 and the DIL trunk group number (e.g., 05).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Access
3. Dial number.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 167

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Aspila EX
• Available - 15 users, 15 DISA Classes of Service and 200 trunks.

Description
DISA permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This
could help an employee away from the office that wants to directly dial co-workers or use the com-
pany’s trunks for long distance calls. To use DISA, the employee:
• Dials the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk
• Waits for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone
• Dials the 6-digit DISA password (access code)
• Waits for a second unique dial tone
• Accesses a system trunk, uses a selected feature or dials a system extension

DISA calls ring system extensions like other outside calls. If an extension has a line key for the
DISA trunk, the call rings that key. If the extension does not have a line key, the call rings an idle
CALL key.

You can set DISA operation differently for each Night Service mode. For example, a trunk can be a
normal trunk during the day and a DISA trunk at night. You can also set the routing for DISA
trunks when the caller dials a busy or unanswered extension, dials incorrectly or forgets to dial.

DISA Class of Service

DISA Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for DISA callers. This allows you
to control the capabilities of the DISA callers dialing into your system. When a DISA caller first
accesses the system, they must enter a DISA password before proceeding. The system associates
the password entered with a specific user number, which in turn has a Class of Service. If the Class
of Service allows the action (such as making outgoing trunk calls), the call goes through. If the
DISA Class of Service doesn’t allow the action, the system prevents the call. The DISA Class of
Service options are:
• Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
When a DISA caller dials into the system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls.
Any toll charges are incurred by the system. The call follows the system’s Trunk Group
Access or Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled.
• Trunk Group Access
DISA callers may be able to access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the sys-
tem. To access a Trunk Group, the user dials Service Code 804 followed by the Trunk Group
number (e.g., 1). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected
group. Trunk Group Access bypasses the system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access
Maps. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Direct
Trunk Access below.
• Common Abbreviated Dialing
The system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to DISA callers. This
could save the DISA caller time when dialing.
• Operator Calling
A DISA caller may be able to dial 0 for the system’s operator.
• Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to DISA callers. This allows co-workers in
adjacent facilities, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.
• Direct Trunk Access

168 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA callers may be able to select a specific trunk for outgoing calls through the system. To
directly access a trunk, the user dials Service Code 805 followed by the trunk’s number (e.g.,
001). This allows the DISA caller to place an outgoing call over the selected trunk. Direct
Trunk Access bypasses the system’s Trunk Group Routing/ARS/Trunk Access Maps. As with
dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the system. Also see Trunk Group Access
above.
• DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In
The DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In option allows a tie line caller to break into another extension’s
established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the
two parties on the initial call.

DISA Toll Restriction

The digits a DISA caller dials for an outgoing call may be subject to the system’s Toll Restriction.
For example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing a 1-900 service. When an incoming
DISA caller tries to use system trunks to dial 1-900, Toll Restriction will deny the call.

DISA Operating Modes

The DISA Operating Modes determine what happens when a DISA caller forgets to dial, calls a
busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to
a preset Ring Group (called a the DISA Transfer Destination).

Department Calling with Overflow Message

If a DISA caller dials a busy Department Calling Group, the system can periodically play the voice
prompt, “Please hold on. All lines are busy. Your call will be answered when a line becomes free.”
while the caller waits. The interval between the voice prompts is the DISA Overflow Message
Time. When an extension in the Department Group becomes available, the call automatically goes
through. If the Department Calling Group remains busy past the DISA No Answer Time, the DISA
call routes to the overflow destination or disconnects. (What happens to the unanswered call is set
by the DISA Operating Mode). The Overflow Message requires a VRS.

Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls

You can set up the system to provide a warning tone to DISA callers that have been on a call too
long. The warning tone can be just a reminder (which the caller can ignore) or can be followed by a
forced disconnect of the call. When the DISA caller hears the warning tone, they have the option of
dialing a code to continue the conversation or disconnect.

Conditions
(A.) The DISA caller must use a 2500 type (DTMF) telephone. DISA is compatible with calling
devices that meet the DTMF signaling requirements of EIA Specification RS-464. DISA
trunks must be ground start or supervised loop start.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 169

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Programming
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Reserve at least one circuit for DTMF reception (entry 0 or 2).
• Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
•11-01-01 : System Numbering
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
•11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
•14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the CODEC gains (transmit and receive levels 1-63) for DISA trunks.
•14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Setup - Loop Disconnect Supervision
If DISA caller can place outgoing calls through the system (see Program 20-14), enable loop
supervision (1) for the DISA trunk. If DISA caller cannot use the system’s trunks for outgo-
ing calls, enter 0 to disable loop supervision.
•20-01-05 : System Options - DTMF Receiver Active Time
After answering the call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the DISA trunk for this
interval (0- 64800 seconds).
•20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/
DIL/ E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA,
DIL, or tie line caller.
•20-14-01 - 20-14-11 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) the following options for each DISA Class of Service (1-15).
• First Digit Absorption (Item 1)
• Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access (Item 2)
• Trunk Group Access (Item 3)
• Common Abbreviated Dialing (Item 4)
• Operator Calling (Item 5)
• Internal Paging (Item 6)
• External Paging (Item 7)
• Direct Trunk Access (Item 8)
• Forced Trunk Disconnect (Item 9)
• Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA (Item 10)
• DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In (Item 11)
•21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code.
Refer to “Trunk Group Routing” to set up outbound routing.
•22-01-11 : System Options for Incoming Calls - VRS Waiting Message Interval Time
Setup the sending duration time of the Auto - Attendant & Queuing. The message is repeat-
edly sent out within the specified time (0-64800 seconds).
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For DISA operation, set the trunk service type to 02. You can have a different service type for
each Night Service mode.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign the extensions that should receive the overflow. Set the ringing in Program 22-06
(0=trunks don’t ring [just flash line keys], 1=trunks ring).

170 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
•25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA
caller dials incorrectly. The call can either disconnect (0), transfer to an alternate ring group
destination (1-100), or transfer to DSPDB Voice Mail (101) or In-Skin Voice Mail (102).
•25-04-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Set the operating mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA
caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0), transfer to an
alternate ring group destination (1-100), or transfer to DSPDB Voice Mail (101) or In-Skin
Voice Mail (102).
•25-07-01 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Dial Tone Time
After answering the DISA trunk, the system waits this interval (0-64800 seconds) for the
caller to dial the first digit of the password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval, the
system drops the call.
•25-07-02 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA No Answer Time
A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval (0-64800 seconds) before the system sets
the call as a Ring No Answer. After this interval expires, the call follows the programmed
Ring No Answer routing (see Program 25-04 below).
•25-07-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA -DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
Determine the length of time a DISA caller can talk before the Long Conversation tone is
heard (0-64800 seconds).
•25-07-08 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Long Conversation Disconnect
This timer determines how long the system will wait before disconnecting a call after the
Long Conversation tone is heard (0-64800 seconds).
•25-07-09 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Internal Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an Internal Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page contin-
ues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.
•25-07-10 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA External Paging Time
This is the maximum length of an External Page placed by a DISA caller. If the Page contin-
ues longer than this interval (0-64800 seconds), the system terminates the DISA call.
•25-07-13 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA Busy Tone Interval
If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program 25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone
for this interval before disconnecting.
•25-08-01 : DISA User ID Setup
For each DISA user, set the 6-digit password.
•25-09-01 : Class of Service for DISA Users
Assign a DISA Class of Service for each user. The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0. You
cannot use the 20-xx-xx and 42-xx-xx programs to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks (15
users, with one password and DISA Class of Service (1-15) for each user).
•25-10-01 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Use this program to assign the Trunk Group Route (1-100) chosen when a user places a DISA
call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. If the system has
ARS, dialing 9 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which
is determined by the password the caller dials.
•25-11-01 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) for each DISA user
(1-15). The system uses the Toll Restriction Class you enter in Program 21-05. The Toll
Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is
determined by the password the caller dials. You cannot use Program 21-04 to assign Toll
Restriction to DISA trunks.
•25-12-01 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Assign the trunk route that DISA Caller’s access if they dial the Alternate Trunk Route
Access Code. Refer to “Central Office Calls, Placing” for more on setting up Alternate Trunk

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 171

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Route Access.
•25-13-02 : System Option for DISA - Continue Code for DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
Enter a single digit Continue Code for the DISA call to use to immediately disconnect or con-
tinue their outside call.
•25-13-03 : System Option for DISA - Disconnect Code for DISA Trunk-to-Trunk
Enter a single digit Disconnect for the DISA call to use to immediately disconnect or continue
their outside call.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for
DTMF tones for inbound DTMF DISA calls.

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system routes the call via ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a DISA caller dials 9 for an outside call (if allowed), the system uses the routes pro-
grammed for Trunk Group Routing.
Central Office Calls, Answering
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their phone.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) / Direct Inward Line (DIL) / Voice Response System
(VRS)
These features also allow outside callers to directly access system extensions.
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and tie lines.
Voice Response System (VRS)
Department Calling with Overflow Message requires a DSP daughter board for VRS.

172 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Operation
To place a DISA call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone):
1. Dial the telephone number that rings the DISA trunk.
2. Wait for the DISA trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone.
3. Dial the 6-digit DISA password (access code).
4. Wait for a second unique dial tone.
5. Dial an extension (200-499).
OR
Dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or ARS.
OR
Dial Alternate Trunk Route Access Code (if enabled).
OR
Dial 804 + a trunk group number (1-100) for an outside call.
OR
Dial 805 + a trunk number (1-200) for an outside call.
OR
Dial 813 + Common Abbreviated Dialing bin number.
OR
Dial 0 for the operator.
OR
Dial 801 + an Internal Paging Zone number (0, 1-9, 00, 01-64).
OR
Dial 803 + an External Paging Zone number (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial 810 + a busy extension number to barge in to a call.
OR
Dial 828 to set the time + two digits for two digits for hour (24 hour clock, 13=1:00 PM) +
two digits for minutes.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 173

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Aspila EX
• Available

• 32 110-Button DSS consoles maximum

• 256 24-Button DSS Consoles maximum (1 per extension)

Description
The DSS Consoles (110-Button: P/N 0890051 or
0890052; 24-Button: P/N 0890053 or 0890054)
gives a system phone user a Busy Lamp Field (BLF)
and one-button access to extensions, trunks and sys-
tem features. This saves time for users that do a lot
of call processing (e.g., operators or dispatchers).
The DSS Console simplifies:
• Calling extensions and Door Boxes
• Placing, answering and transferring outside
calls
• Making an External or Internal Page
• Switching the Night Service mode
• Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer

The 110 button DSS Console also provides DSS Console Alternate Answer. This lets a system
phone user with a DSS Console quickly reroute their calls to a co-worker. When the user places
their console off-duty (by pressing the ALT. key), their calls route automatically to the pro-
grammed co-worker.

You can also program the DSS Console keys to store Function codes. This provides the DSS Con-
sole user with many of the features available on Programmable Feature Keys.

The maximum number of DSS Consoles allowed is 32. There is no limit on the number of 110-but-
ton DSS consoles per extension, but an extension can have only one 24-button DSS console. An
extension can, however, have both a 24-button DSS and 110-button DSS console(s) installed.

Installation of the Consoles

The 110-button console plugs into an ESIU port and is assigned to a system phone/DSLT in Pro-
gram 30-02. The keys are set in Program 30-03, each key has a function number and optional addi-
tional data. There are 200 keys that can be set per console, keys 1-100 are available when EXT.1 is
selected on the console and keys 101-200 are available when EXT.2 is selected.
The 24-button console plugs into any system phone via one of the adaptor sockets in the base of the
phone, it does not take a port on the system. The keys are set either via Program 15-07 or by service
codes 851/852 from the system phone it is plugged into. Each key has a function number and
optional additional data.

Conditions
(A.) Changing flash patterns for DSS Consoles will also change them for Hotline keys.
(B.) When installing a DSS, the system must auto-detect the console in order for the LEDS to func-

174 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
tion correctly. When connecting the DSS to a extension previously defined with another cir-
cuit type, undefine the circuit type (enter 00 in Program 10-03 for the extension number), then
connect the DSS Console.
(C.) To program the keys on a 24-Button DLS in Program 15-07, use the extension number to
which the DLS is installed and, regardless of the type of system phone connected, start pro-
gramming the DLS keys at key number 25.

Default Setting
• No 110-button DSS Consoles assigned (in Program 30-02).
• All 110-button DSS Console key ranges are DSS/One Touch for extension numbers 200-399.
• Once a 110-button DSS Console is enabled, the console's keys are DSS/One Touch keys (Pro-
gram 30-03).
• Once a 24-button console is attached the keys are Not Defined (Program 15-07).

Programming
•10-03-01 : PCB Setup
The system automatically assigns the terminal type (10) for the port which has a 110-button
DSS console installed.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys to the DSS consoles. When programming a 24-Button DSS key, use the
extension number to which the DSS is installed and, regardless of the type of system phone
connected, start programming the DSS keys at key number 25 (Key 25=DSS key 1).
•20-02-03 : System Options for System Telephones - BLF Control and
20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signal-
ing
These programs set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice Over or DSS Con-
sole key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the following chart, the BLF
LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In conditions 2-4, the BLF
LED is on when one line appearance is busy.

BLF 1 Busy
Program 20-02-03 Program 20-13-06
Status Status
1 1 0 Off No
2 1 1 On Yes
3 0 0 On Yes
4 0 1 On Yes
1
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call

•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
•30-01-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Set the mode of the system’s 110-button DSS Consoles. The entry you make in this option
applies per 110-button DSS Consoles. The available options are Regular (Business) Mode (0),
Hotel Mode (1), and ACD Monitor Mode (2)
•30-02-01 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
Designate the 110-button DSS Console installations (i.e., the extensions that have 110-button
DSS Consoles assigned to them).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 175

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
•30-03-01 : DSS Console Key Assignment
Customize 110-button DSS Console keys to function as DSS keys and Function Code keys.
•30-04-01 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment
If the console should have Alternate Answering, use this program to assign the Alternate
Answering Destination.
•30-05-01 : DSS Console Lamp Table
If required, use this program to customize the DSS Console flash rates.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing
A DSS Console can have line keys for placing and answering calls.
Door Box
The 110-button DSS Console provides one-touch calling and a Busy Lamp Field for Door
Boxes. Refer to the Door Box Feature when programming Door Boxes.
Night Service
The 110-button DSS Console provides one-touch Night Service switching. Refer to the Night
Service feature when programming Night Service options.
One-Touch Calling
Like a One-Touch Key, a user can have DSS Console keys for Direct Station Selection, Trunk
Calling and Function Code access.
Paging, External and Internal
The 110-button DSS Console provides one-touch External and Internal Page zone access.
Refer the External Paging and Internal Paging features when programming Paging.
Programmable Function Keys
You can program the DSS Console keys with function codes to provide the functions of many
of the Programmable Function keys.

176 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Operation
Calling an extension from your DSS Console:
1. (Optional for 110-Button Consoles) Press EXT.1 or EXT.2 to select the range.
2. Press DSS Console key.
If the call voice-announces, you can make it ring by dialing 1.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift handset to speak.

Extension Busy Lamp Field

When the DSS key is... The assigned extension is...

On Busy on a call

Off Idle

Flashing Fast In Do Not Disturb

Placing a trunk call from your 24-Button DSS Console:

1. Press DSS Console key assigned to trunk.
2. Dial outside number.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.

Trunk Busy Lamp Field

When the DSS key is... The assigned trunk is...

On Busy on a call

Off Idle

Flashing slowly Ringing

Answering a trunk call from your DSS Console:

1. Press flashing DSS Console key assigned to trunk.
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to speak.

Calling a Door Box from your 110-button DSS Console:

1. Press DOOR.
2. Press DSS Console key for Door Box you want to call (1-8).
If you don’t have Handsfree, you must lift the handset to talk to the Door Box.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 177

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Operation (Cont’d)

Door Box Busy Lamp Field

When the DSS key is... The assigned Door Box is...

On Busy or ringing in

Off Idle

Transferring a call using your DSS Console:

1. Place or answer call.
If you are on an Intercom call, press HOLD before going to the next step.
2. Press DSS key for extension that will receive transfer.
You cannot Transfer to an extension that is busy or in Do Not Disturb.
3. (Optional) Announce call.
If called party doesn’t want the call, press flashing line or CALL key to retrieve it.
4. Press SPK to hang up.

Making a External Page using your 110-button DSS Console:

1. Press PAGE.
2. Press DSS Console External Page zone key (1-8).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
External Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is... The External Page zone is...

On Busy

Off Idle

Making an Internal Page using your 110-button DSS Console:

1. Press GROUP.
2. Press DSS Console Internal Page zone key (Group key 1-64).
If the zone you want is busy, try again later.
If you don’t have Handsfree, lift the handset to make your announcement.
Internal Page Busy Lamp Field
When the DSS key is... The Internal Page zone is...

On Busy

Off Idle

178 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Operation (Cont’d)
Switching the Night Service mode from your 110-button DSS Console:
1. Press Night Service key (NIGHT, DAY, BREAK or NITE 2).
Night Service Busy Lamp Field
When this key is ON... The system is in the...

DAY Day 1 Mode

NIGHT Night 1 Mode

BREAK Break 1 Mode

NIGHT 2 Night 2 Mode

Activating DSS Console Alternate Answer (110-button DSS only):

1. Press ALT.
You hear a short confirmation tone.
If you hear a long tone, you cannot enable Alternate Answer. Another user has already
enabled your console as their Alternate Answer destination.
Alternate Answer Busy Lamp Field

When the ALT key is... Alternate Answer is...

On Enabled

Off Disabled

Using a DSS Console key as a Programmable Function Key:

You can store Function codes under DSS Console keys.
1. Press DSS Console key for function.
For example, you can Forward your calls by pressing DSS Key + 1 + destination.
Your DSS key must have been previously programmed for the Call Forward feature.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 179

 Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Directed Call Pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This
allows a user to conveniently answer a co-worker’s call from their own telephone. With Directed
Call Pickup, an extension user can pick up:
• Trunk calls (i.e., Ring Group calls)
• Direct Inward Lines
• Transferred trunk calls
• Transferred Intercom calls
• Ringing and voice-announced Intercom calls

Conditions
(A.) Directed Call Pickup does not pick up calls recalling an extension (such as Hold and Transfer recalls)
or calls on Hold.
(B.) An extension can use Directed Call Pickup to intercept calls to which it is denied access in Pro-
grams 14-07 and 15-06.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•20-10-05 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing
their own group.

Related Features
For other features which let you cover a co-worker’s calls, refer to:
• Department Calling
• Group Call Pickup
• Hotline
• Multiple Directory Numbers
• Secretary Call Pickup

Parl
Personal Park also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.
Voice Mail
Voice Mail Park and Page also uses the Directed Call Pickup code.

180 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Directed Call Pickup

Operation
To use Directed Call Pickup to intercept a call to a co-worker’s extension:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line set, lift handset.
2. Dial 715.
3. Dial number of extension whose call you want to intercept.
If more than one call is coming in, the system sets the priority for which call it will answer
first.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 181

 Directory Dialing
Directory Dialing

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Directory Dialing allows a display or Super Display system phone user to select a co-worker or outside
call from a list of names, rather than dialing the phone number. There are four types of Directory Dial-
ing:
• ABBc - Company (Common) Abbreviated Dialing
• ABBg - Department (Group) Abbreviated Dialing
• EXT. - Co-worker’s extensions
• OneT - Personal Abbreviated Dialing (One-Touch Keys)

Conditions
(A.) Directory Dialing sorts directory names in alphabetical order (based on the first four characters of
the name) when the system starts up or reboots. In addition, the system will re-sort extension
names when:
- You change Program 15-01-01 (Extension Numbers and Names).
- Any user dials 800 and changes their extension’s name.
(B.) Directory Dialing follows all the programmed options and conditions for Abbreviated Dialing,
Intercom Calling and One-Touch Calling.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Intercom Interdigit Time
If a user waits longer than this interval between Directory Dialing steps, Directory Dialing auto-
matically cancels.

Related Features
None

182 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Directory Dialing

Operation
To use Directory Dialing from a display system phone:
1. Do not lift handset or press SPK.
2. Press Directory Dialing Soft Key.
3. Press Soft Key for Directory Dialing type:
ABBc = Common Abbreviated Dialing.
ABBg = Group Abbreviated Dialing.
EXT. = Co-worker’s extension numbers.
OneT = Your One-Touch Keys (1-10).
Directory Dialing follows any feature restrictions that your system may have enabled.
For example, if your extension cannot normally use Common Abbreviated Dialing, Direc-
tory Dialing can’t access it either.
4. Dial letter/number range for the party you want to call (e.g., dial 2 for A, B, C or 2).
5. Press the Down Arrow Soft Key to jump to that section.
6. Press Volume s or t to scroll through the list.
If you wait too long between your selections, Directory Dialing automatically cancels.
7. Lift handset or press DIAL, CALL1 or SPK to place the selected call.
If you selected an outside call, the call will route according to your system’s Trunk
Group Routing/ARS setup.

To cancel Directory Dialing:

1. Press CLEAR.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 183

 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call
status signals. This lets users tell the types of calls by listening to the ringing/tones and watching
the keys. It also helps users monitor the progress of their calls. In addition, Distinctive Ringing
lets system phone users customize their Intercom and trunk call ringing. This is helpful for users
that work together closely. For example, if several co- workers set their keysets to ring at different
pitches, the co-workers can always tell which calls are for them.

You can also customize the tones the system uses for splash tone, confirmation tone, trunk ring
tone, Intercom ring tone and Alarm ring tone. Refer to the chart below and the Programming sec-
tion for more details.

Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns

Program Description
80-01 : Service Tone Setup Set the frequency of the system’s splash tone. This is the
tone the system uses, for example, to alert the user of an
incoming voice-announced Intercom call.
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone Set the trunk ring tones, which are the tones a user hears
when a trunk rings an extension.
82-01 : Intercom and Alarm Ring Set the Intercom and External Alarm Sensor ring tones.
Tone
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Set the DSS and Hotline key flash rates for busy, idle,
Setup DND, ACD Agent status, and hotel options.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-02-02 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Trunk Ring Tone
From the range specified in Program 22-03, select the system phone extension’s trunk ring
tone.
•15-02-03 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Extension Ring Tone (Pitch)
Select the extension’s intercom ring tone.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•22-03-01 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
Set the ring tone range (1-4) for each trunk.

184 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
•80-01-01 : Service Tone Setup
Customize the system’s basic tones and system service tones.
•82-01-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Customize the trunk ring tones (i.e., the tones a user hears when a trunk rings an extension). If
desired, change the Intercom and External Alarm Sensor ring tones.
•82-03-01 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
Customize the DSS and Hotline key flash patterns.

Related Features
Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage
Set up ring tones for Multiple Directory Numbers and Call Coverage keys.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephone users cannot listen to or change the pitch of their phone’s incoming ring.

Operation
To listen to the incoming ring choices (system phone only):
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 811.
3. Dial 1 to check ringing for Intercom calls.
OR
Dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls.
4. For Intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1-8).
OR
For trunk calls, select the pitch (1-8) and the tone (1-4) you want to check.
Refer to Table 1-7 for the four Trunk Ring Tone Ranges and the selections within each
range.
5. Go back to step 4 to listen to additional choices or press SPK to hang up.

To change the pitch of your incoming ring (system phone only):

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 820.
3. Dial 1 to change ringing for Intercom calls.
OR
Dial 2 to change ringing for trunk calls.
4. Select the pitch (1-8).
5. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 185

 Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Do Not Disturb blocks incoming calls and Paging announcements. DND permits an extension user to
work by the phone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate DND
while their phone is idle or while on a call. Once activated, incoming trunk calls still flash the line keys.
The user may use the phone in the normal manner for placing and processing calls.

There are five Do Not Disturb options available at each extension:

1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Incoming Call Forwards blocked
0 = Do Not Disturbed canceled

Conditions
If there is no Call Forwarding key (Program 15-07: 10 - 17), the DND key will blink when the extension
is forwarded.

Default Settings
Enabled for all extensions.

Programming
•11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Call Forwarding/DND Override
In order to use the DND Override service code if voice mail is installed, the single digit ser-
vice code (11-16-09) must be deleted or changed as it conflicts with the DND Override code.
•11-16-06 : Single Digit Service Code Setup - DND/Call Forward Override
If a single digit service code is to be used, assign an available code number.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-04 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Call Forward/DND Override
Determine whether or not an extension should be able to override DND (0=denied,
1=allowed).

186 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Do Not Disturb

Related Features
Call Forwarding
If an extension user activates DND option 4, the system prevents other extensions from for-
warding calls to them. If an extension already receiving forwarded calls activates DND
option 4, callers to the forwarded extension hear DND tone.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override
An extension user can override Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb at another extension.
Central Office Calls, Answering
When a call is transferred because of Call Forwarding No Answer, Call Forwarding Busy, or
DND, the Reason for Transfer option can display to the transferred extension why the call is
ringing to their phone.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
DND modes 1-3 will cause calls to follow 22-08 programming even if the extension is forwarded.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Set up DND flash patterns for DSS and Hotline keys.

Operation
To activate or deactivate Do Not Disturb while your extension is idle:

System Phone
1. Do not lift the handset.
2. Press DND key.
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial 847.
3. Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Call Forwards blocked
Single Line Telephone
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 847.
3. Dial the DND option code.
0 = Cancel DND
1 = Incoming trunk calls blocked
2 = Paging, incoming Intercom, Call Forwards and transferred trunk calls blocked
3 = All calls blocked
4 = Call Forwards blocked

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 187

 Door Box
Door Box

Aspila EX
• Available - eight Door Boxes and six Chime Tones.

Description
The Door Box is a self-contained Intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visi-
tor at the door can press the Door Box call button (like a door bell). The Door Box then sends
chime tones to all extensions programmed to receive chimes. To answer the chime, the called
extension user just lifts the handset. This lets the extension user talk to the visitor at the Door Box.
The Door Box is convenient to have at a delivery entrance, for example. It is not necessary to have
company personnel monitor the delivery entrance; they just answer the Door Box chimes instead.
Any number of system extensions can receive Door Box chime tones.

Each Door Box has a pair of normally open relay contacts that can connect to an electric door
strike. Use these contacts to remotely control the entrance door. After answering the Door Box
chimes, a system phone user can press FLASH to activate the Door Box contacts. This in turn
releases the electric strike on the entrance door. The device connected to the Door Box contacts
cannot exceed the contact ratings shown in the table below:

Door Box Relay Contact Specifications

Contact Configuration Normally Open
Maximum Load 500mA@24 VDC
250mA@120 VAC

The system can have up to eight Door Boxes.

Conditions
(A.) Each channel in the 2PGDAD has a jumper which must be set for Door Box operation. Refer
to the system hardware manual for additional details.

Default Setting
Disabled.

188 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Door Box

Programming
•10-03-01 : PCB Setup - Channel 1 Terminal Type
10-03-06 : PCB Setup - Channel 2 Terminal Type
Set the terminal type to “8” for Door Box usage.
•32-01-01 : Door Box Timers - Door Box Answer Time
Set the interval within which a user must answer the Door Box chimes.
•32-01-02 : Door Box Timers - Door Lock Cancel Time
Set the length of time the Door Box strike stays open when the single line user hook flashes or
system phone user presses Flash.
•32-02-01 : Door Box Ring Assignments
Determine which Door Boxes (1-8) should ring which extensions.
•32-03-01 : Door Box Basic Setup - Chime Pattern
Set the chime pattern (0-6) for each Door Box.
•32-03-02 : Door Box Basic Setup - CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
32-03-03 : Door Box Basic Setup - CODEC Receive Gain Setup
Select the CODEC gain types (1-63) each Door Box (1-8).

Related Features
Paging, External
If a 2PGDAD has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
Single Line Telephones, Analogue Single Line Sets
Door Boxes can ring single line phones if allowed in programmed.

Operation
To call a Door Box:
System Phone
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 802.
3. Dial Door Box Number (1-8).
Single Line Telephone
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 802.
3. Dial Door Box Number (1-8).

To activate the Door Box strike:

System Phone
1. While talking to the Door Box, press the Flash key.
Single Line Telephone (Not Available for DSL Phones)
1. While talking to the Door Box, hookflash.

To answer a Door Box chime:

1. Lift handset.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 189

 Dual Line Appearance
Dual Line Appearance

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Each system phone has two line appearance keys (CALL1 and CALL2) for placing and answering
calls. These line appearance keys, assigned to the extension’s number, simplify operations for busy
users. For example, the user can easily process a new call on one appearance with a call in progress
on the other.

Conditions
Normally, both line appearances must be busy to return a busy signal to the caller, however, check
any incoming features for specific interactions.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
None

Related Features
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Set up busy and idle extension flash patterns for DSS and Hotline keys.
Off Hook Signaling
Off Hook Signaling rings an extension’s second line appearance when the first appearance is busy.

Operation
None

190 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Dual OPX/2-OPX
Dual OPX/2-OPX

Refer to the Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets (page 327) for information on this fea-
ture.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 191

 External Alarm Sensors
External Alarm Sensors

Aspila EX
• This is a future item and is not currently available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently available.

192 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Fax Machine Compatibility
Fax Machine Compatibility

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Fax Machine Compatibility lets you integrate a customer-provided fax machine into your telephone
system. You have the following options:
• Transfer to Fax
Transfer to Fax allows an extension user to Transfer their active voice call to a company fax
machine. After the Transfer completes, the user’s outside caller can start their fax machine
and send the fax. This would benefit a salesperson on the road, for example. The salesperson
could call their secretary and give a general report - and then fax detailed figures when the
conversation is over.

• Direct Inward Line to Fax

DILs provide direct routing to fax machines installed as system extensions. Use a DIL for a
“fax only” line for unattended sending and receiving of faxes.

Conditions

None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering (page 116) and Central Office Calls, Placing
(page 120) for trunk programming.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 193

 Fax Machine Compatibility

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing / Central Office Calls, Placing
The fax machine should be programmed with incoming and outgoing access options.
Direct Inward Line
Use DILs to route system trunks directly to fax machines installed as extensions.
External Alarm Sensors
External alarm sensors also use PGDAD PCB sensor circuits.
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Keys provide one-button transfer to fax machines installed as extensions.
Ring Groups
Ring Groups can also be used to direct calls to the fax machine.
Single Line Telephones - Analogue/Digital
Set up incoming and outgoing access for the fax telephone line.
Voice Response System (VRS)
When using a VRS, set up a single digit dialing code which can be used to transfer callers to
the fax machine.
Voice Mail
When using voice mail, you can provide the digit to be dialed to transfer the call to the ana-
logue port which is connected to the fax machine.

Operation
To transfer a call to the fax machine:

System Phone
1. Press HOLD.
You hear Transfer dial tone.
2. Dial fax machine extension number.
If you have Automatic On Hook Transfer and the extension you call is busy, pressing
CALL returns you to the call.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or press
CALL to return to the call.
3. Hang up.
If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press the TRF Soft Key to
Transfer the call.

Single Line Set

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial fax machine extension number.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or
hookflash to return to the call.
3. Hang up.

194 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Flash
Flash

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Flash allows an extension user to access certain CO and PBX features by interrupting trunk loop
current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or
PBX offers. You must set the Flash parameters for compatibility with the connected telco or PBX.

Conditions
The system does not provide a ground flash.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•14-02-03 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Flashing/Grounding
Make sure this item is set for open loop Flash (0).
•14-02-04 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Flash for Timed Flash or Disconnect
For each trunk, indicate if Flash is for Flash (0) or open loop disconnect (1).
•15-02-05 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Transfer Key Operation Mode
If CONF (TRF) key should access Flash, enter 2. Otherwise, enter 0 or 1.
•15-03-04 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Flashing
In a single line telephone’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to hookflash
for system feature access.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•81-01-14 : COIU Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 1
Set the Flash duration (16-4080mS) for analogue trunk (COIU PCB) circuits.
•81-01-15 : COIU Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 2
Set the open loop disconnect duration (16-4080mS) for analogue trunk (COIU PCB) circuits.

Related Features
PBX Compatibility
If the system is behind a PBX, Flash normally gives the extension user access to many PBX
features.
Toll Restriction
The system applies Toll Restriction (if applicable) to the number a user dials after flashing a
trunk.
Voice Mail
If voice mail ports are to flash outside calls, change the Single Line Flash Service Code (11-
12-42). Dialing “#” from voice mail ports lights the Message Waiting lamp.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 195

 Flash

Operation
To flash the trunk you are on:
System Phone and Digital Single Line
1. Press FLASH.

Single Line Set

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 806.

196 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Flexible System Numbering
Flexible System Numbering

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Flexible System Numbering lets you reassign the system’s port-to-extension assignments. This
allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. In addition,
factory technicians can make comprehensive changes to your system’s number plan. You can have
factory technicians:
• Set the number of digits in internal (Intercom) functions. For example, extension numbers can
be up to eight digits long.
• Change your system’s Service Code numbers
• Assign single digit access to selected Service Codes

Talk to your sales representative to find out if this program is available to you.

You can also use Flexible System Numbering to change the system’s Trunk Group Routing code.
Although the default code of 9 is suitable for most applications, you can alter the code if you have to.

For more information on the systems standard numbering, refer to Tables 1-1, 1-2 and 1-5 at the
beginning of this section.

The system provides a completely flexible system numbering plan. Refer to the chart below and the
Programming section for more details.
Flexible System Numbering
Program Description
11-01 : System Numbering Set the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan. The num-
bering plan includes the digits an extension user must dial to
access features and other extensions.
11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9). This is
the code users dial to access Automatic Route Selection or
Trunk Group Routing.
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) Customize the Service Codes.
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Hotel)
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup Assign the Single Digit Service Codes. these are the post-dial-
ing codes a user can dial after placing an Intercom call to a co-
worker.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 197

 Flexible System Numbering
Conditions
(A.) Programming follows a telephone’s extension number, not the port number in most cases. If
you relocate a phone, you may need to change additional programming.
(B.) If the extension numbering plan is changed from ‘2xx’ to ‘1xx’, and you would like to consec-
utively press two DSS keys without toggling the hookswitch, Program 11-16-05 must be
removed. If not, pressing the second DSS key will actually change voice/ringing call to the
first extension.
(C.) Since making changes in Program 11-01 does not automatically make any other changes in
any other program, changing the number plan after the system is in operation may cause prob-
lems in the following programs:
11-01 Type 2 (Extension Number) 11-01 Type 1 (Service Codes)
11-02 11-08 15-12 30-03 11-10 11-13 15-14 2902
11-04 11-17 16-01-01 11-11 11-14 21-11 2905
11-06 15-01-01 15-14 11-12 11-15 30-03
11-07 15-07 21-11

(D.) Any feature which requires dialing a code or extension number can be affected.

Default Setting
Extensions are numbered consecutively (Program 11-02 and 11-04) from:
• 200 (port 001) to 499 (port 299)

Refer to Table 6, “System Number Plan/Capacities,” on page 41 for the system’s default number-
ing plan.

Programming
•11-01-01 : System Numbering
Customize the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan.
•11-02-01 : Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to extension ports. The telephone’s programming identity follows
the port number - not the extension number.
•11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
Assign the single-digit trunk access code (normally 9) for ARS/Trunk Group Routing.
•11-10-01 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-11-01 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-12-01 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13-01 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14-01 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-15-01 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Hotel)
Customize the Service Codes.
•11-16-01 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
Assign the Single Digit (post-dialing) Service Codes.

198 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Flexible System Numbering

Related Features
None

Operation
Refer to Tables 1-6 at the beginning of this section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 199

 Forced Trunk Disconnect
Forced Trunk Disconnect

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Forced Trunk Disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension’s
active outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced Trunk Disconnect
lets a user access a busy trunk in an emergency, when no other trunks are available. Maintenance
technicians can also use Forced Trunk Disconnect to release a trunk on which there is no conversa-
tion. This can happen if a trunk does not properly disconnect when the outside party hangs up.

CAUTION
Forced Trunk Disconnect abruptly terminates the active call on the line. Only use this
feature in an emergency and when no other lines are available.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
COS1 = Enabled.
COS 2 - 15 = Disabled.

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-07-11 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Forced Trunk Disconnect
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Forced Trunk
Disconnect.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
A user can use Forced Trunk Disconnect only for trunks to which it would normally have
access.

200 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Forced Trunk Disconnect

Operation
To disconnect a busy trunk:
System Phone
1. Press line key for trunk.
OR
Dial trunk access code (805 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-200.
2. Dial 724.
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the trunk.
You can now place a call on the free trunk.
3. Press line key for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.
OR
Dial the trunk access code (805 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

Single Line Telephone

1. Dial trunk access code (805 + trunk number).
You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001-200.
2. Dial 724.
You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line.
3. Hookflash.
You can now place a call on the free line.
4. Dial the trunk access code (805 + trunk number) for the trunk disconnected in Step 2.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 201

 Group Call Pickup
Group Call Pickup

Aspila EX
• Available - 64 Call Pickup Groups.

Description
Group Call Pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing an extension in a Pickup
Group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other’s calls. The
user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a code or pressing a programmed Group Call Pickup
key. If several extensions within the group are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup inter-
cepts the call based on the extension’s priority within the Pickup Group.

With Group Call Pickup, a user can intercept the following types of calls:
• A call ringing the user’s own pickup group
• A call ringing another pickup group when the user knows the group number
• A call ringing another pickup group when the user doesn’t know the group number

Conditions
A Call Pickup Group cannot have an associated name.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign Group Call Pickup keys:
Code 24 for an extension’s own Pickup Group and ring group calls (Service Code 867)
Code 25 for a phone ringing in another Pickup Group (Service Code 869)
- used when the caller doesn’t know the group number
Code 26 (+ group) for a phone ringing in another specific Pickup Group (Service Code 868)
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service to an extension (1-15).
•20-10-01 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup Within Group
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up
calls ringing their pickup group (Service Code 867).
•20-10-02 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup from Another
Group
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up
calls ringing telephones that are not in their pickup group (Service Code 869).
•20-10-03 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup for Specific Group
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up
calls ringing a specific group (Service Code 868).
•20-10-04 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Group Call Pickup
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use
Group Call Pickup.

202 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Group Call Pickup

Programming (Cont’d)
•20-10-05 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Directed Call Pickup for Own Group
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing
their own group.
•23-02-01 : Call Pickup Groups
Assign extensions to Pickup Groups. Also, use this option to assign an extension’s priority
within a Pickup Group (Call Pickup Groups 1-9 or 01-64, Priority Number 1-999).

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Users can pickup of calls regardless of their access map programming.
Directed Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup provides another way of answering a co-worker’s call.
Hold / Park
Group Call Pickup can not be used to answer calls recalling from Hold or Park.
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Group Call Pickup keys can not be used to answer calls ringing Multiple Directory Number or
Call Coverage keys.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Group Call Pickup operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 203

 Group Call Pickup

Operation
To answer a call ringing another phone in your Pickup Group:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. (System Phone only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 24).
OR
Dial 856 or 867.
Service Code 867 can pick up any call in the group, plus any Ring Group calls. Service
Code 856 cannot pick up Ring Group calls.

To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you don’t know the
group number:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. (System Phone only) Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 25).
OR
Dial 869.

To answer a call ringing a phone in another Pickup Group when you know the
group number:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. (System Phone only)
Press Group Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 26 + group).
OR
Dial 868 and the group number (1-9 or 01-64).

204 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Group Listen
Group Listen

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Group Listen permits a system phone user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice
broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the system phone user’s co-workers listen to the
conversation. Group Listen turns off the system phone’s Handsfree microphone so the caller does
not pick the coworker’s voices during a Group Listen.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-26 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Group Listen
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to activate Group Listen.

Related Features
Headset Operation
An extension in the headset mode cannot use Group Listen.
Single Line Telephones
Group Listen is not available to single line telephones.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 205

 Group Listen

Operation
To initiate Group Listen:
1. Place or answer call using the handset.
2. Press SPK twice (but do not hang up).
SPK flashes slowly.
You can talk to the caller through your handset. Your co-workers hear your caller’s
voice over your phone’s speaker.
When you press SPK once, you turn your Speakerphone on and your handset off.
The second press turns on Group Listen.

To Talk Handsfree after initiating Group Listen:

1. Hang up.

To cancel Group Listen (without hanging up your call):

1. Do not hang up.
2. Press flashing SPK.
You can talk to your caller over your handset. Your co-workers can no longer hear
your caller’s voice.

206 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Handsfree and Monitor
Handsfree and Monitor

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Handsfree allows a system phone or digital single line user to process calls using the speaker and
microphone in the telephone (instead of the handset). Handsfree is a convenience for workers who
don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. For example, a terminal operator could continue to
enter data with both hands while talking on the phone.

The system provides three variations of Handsfree operation:

Handsfree User can place and answer calls by pressing SPK instead
of using the handset.
Automatic Handsfree User can press a line or line appearance key without first
lifting the handset or pressing SPK. An extension can
have Automatic Handsfree for just outgoing calls or both
outgoing calls and incoming line/loop key calls. Auto-
matic Handsfree can also be used with the Call Coverage
or Park features. Normally, extensions without speaker-
phones should have Automatic Handsfree for outgoing
calls only.
Monitor User can place a call without lifting the handset, but
must lift the handset to speak.

Conditions
(A.) Telephones without Full Duplex Speakerphone modules (IP1WW-HF) are half-duplex which
may cause the speaker to turn off (clip) during conversations.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 207

 Handsfree and Monitor

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office Calls, Placing
Extensions should be programmed for incoming and outgoing access, ringing, etc.
Handsfree Answerback
Answer Intercom calls without lifting the handset - just speak toward the phone.
Microphone Cutoff
For privacy, mute the phones microphone while on a call.
Single Line Telephones
Handsfree and Monitor are not available to single line telephones.
Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection affects how incoming and outgoing calls are handled and thus deter-
mines what happens when the user presses the SPK key.

Operation
To talk Handsfree:
1. Press SPK, CALL key or line key.
2. Place call.
3. Speak toward phone when called party answers.

To change a handset call into a Handsfree call:

1. Press SPK.
2. Press SPK to hang up.

To change a Handsfree call into a handset call:

1. Lift handset.

208 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user (system phone or digital single line) to respond to
a voice-announced Intercom call by speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like
Handsfree, this is a convenience for workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset.

Conditions
Handsfree Answerback is not available at a analogue single line telephone.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-
announce.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-10 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Switching from Handsfree
Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle
between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls
(dial 1 or Service Code 812).
•20-09-05 : Class of Service Options (Incoing Call Service) - Setting Handsfree Answerback/
Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set
Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823)
for incoming Intercom calls.

Related Features
Handsfree and Monitor
A system phone user can process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone
(instead of the handset).
Microphone Cutoff
With Microphone Cutoff enabled, Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single
beep (instead of two).
Single Line Telephones
Incoming Intercom calls always ring single line telephones.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 209

 Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Operation
To enable Handsfree Answerback for your incoming Intercom calls:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 821.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
This disables Forced Intercom Ringing.

To enable Forced Intercom Ringing for your incoming Intercom calls:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 823.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
This disables Handsfree Answerback.

To change the way your Intercom call signals the extension you are calling:
1. Dial 1.
If ringing, your call voice-announces. If voice-announced, your call starts to ring the
destination. This option is also available at single line telephones.

210 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Headset Operation
Headset Operation

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
A system phone user can utilize a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using
Handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, Headset Opera-
tion provides privacy not available from Handsfree.

An extension in the headset mode has two options for when it appears busy to incoming callers.
The headset extension can be:
• Busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is busy (i.e., Off-Hook Signal-
ing prevented)
OR
• Busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy (i.e., Off Hook Sig-
naling allowed)

As the headset plugs into a separate jack on the bottom of the phone, the handset can still be con-
nected to the phone. This provides you with the option to use the handset, headset or the speaker-
phone for calls.

Conditions
(A.) While in the headset mode, the Headset function key becomes a release (disconnect) key and
no dial tone is heard from the speaker.
(B.) While in the headset mode, the hook switch is not functional.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Headset operation (code 05).
•20-02-05 : System Options for System Telephones - Headset Busy Mode
Set the conditions under which a headset extension is busy to incoming callers:
• The Headset extension is busy to incoming callers when only one extension appearance is
busy (0).
OR
• Headset extension is busy to incoming callers only when both extension appearances are busy
(1).
•20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing
Determine whether intercom calls should ring or voice-announce extensions (0=voice,
1=ring).
•41-14-04 : ACD Options - Automatic Answer in Headset Mode
With ACD, enable (1) or disable (0) a user’s ability to automatically answer calls as they ring
in while in headset mode.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 211

 Headset Operation

Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
An extension with a headset can still receive voice-announced Intercom calls and respond Hands-
free.
Programmable Function Keys
A Headset Function key is required to answer or place a call in headset mode.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use the Headset feature.

Operation
To enable the headset:
1. Plug in the headset into the headset jack on the back of the phone.
2. Program a Headset key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 05).
You hear a confirmation beep.

To use the headset:

The Headset key lights when you’re on a call. To disconnect, press the Headset key
again.
You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice-announced Intercom calls
with the headset plugged in. The headset only activates when the Headset key is pressed.
• Answer a ringing call by pressing the Headset key.
OR
• Press the Headset key and then a line key to make a trunk call.
OR
• Press the Headset key to get Intercom dial tone
OR
• If on a call, press the Headset key to hang up.

212 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Hold
Hold

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on Hold hears silence
or Music on Hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on Hold,
the extension user may process calls or use a system feature. Calls left on Hold too long recall the
extension that placed them on Hold. There are four types of Hold:
• System Hold
An outside call a user places on Hold flashes the line key (if programmed) at all other keysets.
Any system phone user with the flashing line key can pick up the call.
• Exclusive Hold
When a user places a call on Exclusive Hold, only that user can pick up the call from Hold.
The trunk appears busy to all other keysets that have a key for the trunk. Exclusive hold is
important if a user doesn’t want a co-worker picking up their call on Hold.
• Group Hold
If a user places a call on Group Hold, another user in the Department Group can dial a code to
pick up the call. This lets members of a department easily pick up each other’s calls.
• Intercom Hold
A user can place an Intercom call on Hold. The Intercom call on Hold does not indicate at any
other extension.

Hold Recall to Operator

Hold Recall to Operator enhances how the system handles calls that have been left on hold too
long. With Hold Recall to Operator:
• A trunk call recalls the extension that placed it on Hold after the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall
time.
• The recalling trunk will ring the extension that placed it on Hold for the Hold/Exclusive Hold
Recall Callback Time.
• After the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time, the trunk call will ring the operator.

Hold Recall to Operator applies to trunk calls placed on System Hold, Exclusive Hold and Group
Hold. It does not apply to Intercom calls.

Conditions
The called extension must lift the handset or press the SPK key before the call can be placed on
hold.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 213

 Hold

Programming
•14-01-16 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Forced Release of Held Call
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Release of Held Call.
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-200). This sets the access options for trunks on Hold.
•15-02-06 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Hold Key Operating Mode
Set the function of the extension’s HOLD key: System (0), Exclusive (1), or Park (2) Hold.
•15-02-07 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Automatic Hold for CO Line
Determine whether an extension will use Automatic Hold for CO calls (0) or if the call should
disconnect (1).
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps (1-200) to extensions.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Exclusive Hold (code 45). If an extension has its fixed Hold key
reassigned (in Program 15-02-06), assign a function key for System Hold (code 44).
•16-02-01 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign extensions to Department Groups (1-64).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-11-09 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Group Hold Initiate
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate
Group Hold (Service Code 832).
•20-11-10 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Group Hold Answer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to pick up a
call placed on Group Hold (Service Code 862).
•20-11-13 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Hold Recall to Operator
Enable (1) or disable (0) Hold Recall to Operator. If enabled, a call recalling an extension
longer than the Hold/Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time will recall the operator (normally
200). If disabled, the call will continually recall the extension that placed it on Hold.
•20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension
Assign an operator’s extension number if Hold Recall to Operator will be used.
•24-01-01 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Hold recalls the extension that placed
it on Hold after this interval.
•24-01-02 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an
extension for this interval.
•24-01-03 : System Options for Hold - Exclusive Hold Recall Time
Set the Exclusive Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A call on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this interval.
•24-01-04 : System Options for Hold - Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time
Set the Hold Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). A trunk recalling from Hold rings an extension
for this interval. If still unanswered, the call changes to System Hold.
•24-01-05 : System Options for Hold - Forced Release of Held Calls Interval
Set the Forced Release of Held Calls interval (0-64800 seconds). If enabled in Program 14-
01-16, the system disconnects a call if on Hold longer than this interval.

214 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Hold

Related Features
Music on Hold
Callers on Hold hear Music on Hold, if programmed.
Programmable Function Keys
An extension can have function keys for System Hold and Exclusive Hold.
Single Line Telephones
Analogue single line telephones can only use Exclusive Hold and Group Hold. Digital single
line phones can use System Hold as well.

Operation
System Hold

To place an outside call on System Hold (System Phone and DSL only):
1. Press HOLD.
A line/loop/CALL key flashes slowly while on Hold; flashes fast when recalling.
OR
1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (001-200).

To pick up an outside call on System Hold:

System Phone
1. Press flashing line/loop/CALL key.
OR
1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (001-200).

Digital Single Line Telephone

1. Press HOLD.
OR
1. If you know the specific line number, dial 772 + Line number (001-200).

Exclusive Hold

To place an outside call on Exclusive Hold:

System Phone
1. Press Exclusive Hold key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 45).
A line/loop/CALL key flashes slowly while on Hold, flashes fast when recalling.

To pick up an outside call on Exclusive Hold:

System Phone
1. Press flashing line/loop/CALL key.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 215

 Hold

Operation (Cont’d)
Group Hold

To place a call on Hold so anyone in your extension group can pick it up:
System Phone
1. Press HOLD.
2. Dial 832.
3. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 832.
3. Hang up.

To pick up a call on Group Hold:

System Phone
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 862.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 862.

Intercom Hold

To place an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press HOLD.
The CALL key flashes.
2. Press SPK to hang up.

To pick up an Intercom call on Intercom Hold:

1. Press SPK.
2. Press flashing CALL key.

216 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Hotel/Motel
Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The system can provide comprehensive hotel/motel services in addition to the features normally
available to business users. Hotel/Motel features include:

• Do Not Disturb
A guest can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for their room telephone. In addition, a hotel/
motel employee with a system phone can enable and disable Do Not Disturb for a specific
room telephone.

• Message Waiting
A hotel/motel employee with a system phone can send a Message Waiting to a room tele-
phone. The message lamp on the room telephone flashes until the guest answers the Message
Waiting.

• Room Telephone Status

To better manage room usage, an employee with a system phone can change the status of a
room telephone, including:
• Room Available
• Room Occupied
• Room Ready to be Cleaned

• Room to Room Call Restriction

To control inter-room guest calling, a hotel/motel employee with a system phone can enable
and disable room- to-room calling.

• Room Status with Printout

An employee’s DSS Console can indicate the status of the hotel/motel rooms. Optionally, a
printer connected to a CTA Module can print out room status reports:
• Room Status (occupied, available, ready and to be cleaned)
• Room Telephone Call and Toll Restriction Information
• Do Not Disturb and Clean Up Extension List
• Message Waiting Report
• Wake-up Call No-Answer Report

• Single Digit Extension Access

To simplify guest calling, room telephones can have single digit access to selected extensions.
For example, this allows guests to dial 1 for the front desk, 2 for house cleaning etc.
• Toll Restriction Changing
An employee can change the Toll Restriction for a guest’s telephone. For example, the recep-
tionist can enable long distance calling for each room telephone as the guests check in.
• Wake-up Call
A guest can set or cancel a wake-up call request. A hotel/motel employee with a system phone
can also set or cancel a wake-up call for a room telephone.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 217

 Hotel/Motel

Description (Cont’d)
For additional information on Hotel/Motel features, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

Conditions
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

Default Setting
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

Programming
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

Related Features
Room Monitor
Room Monitor allows both system phone users and single line telephone users to monitor the activ-
ity at another extension.

For additional information, refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

Operation
Refer to the Hotel/Motel User Guide (P/N TBD).

218 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Hotline
Hotline

Aspila EX
• Available- 512 Internal Hotline extensions.

Description
Hotline gives a system phone user one-button calling and Transfer to another extension (the Hot-
line partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The Hotline partners can call or
Transfer calls to each other just by pressing a single key.

In addition, the Hotline key shows the status of the partner’s extension

When the key is . . . The extension is . . .

Off Idle
On Busy or ringing
Fast Flash DND - All calls (option 3) or
Intercom calls (option 2)
Double Wink On ACD Agent logged onto the
group
Wink Off ACD Agent logged off

Conditions
An extension user cannot use Hotline to pick up a call ringing their partner’s extension.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Hotline (code 01 + partner’s extension number).
•20-02-03 : System Options for System Telephones - BLF Control and
20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signal-
ing
Programs 20-02-03 and 20-13-06 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice
Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the follow-
ing chart, the BLF LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In condi-
tions 2-4, the BLF LED is on when one line appearance is busy.

BLF 1 Busy
Program 20-13-06 Program 20-02-03
Status Status
1 1 0 Off No
2 1 1 On Yes
3 0 0 On Yes
4 0 1 On Yes

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 219

 Hotline
1
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.

Programming (Cont’d)
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service to an extension (1-15).

Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
The Hotline key blinks to indicate the ACD agent’s status.
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Set up flash patterns for DSS and Hotline keys.
Do Not Disturb
Hotline does not override Do Not Disturb.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Hotline always follows the Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing mode set at the
called extension. The Hotline caller can override the setting, if desired.
Hotline, External
External Hotline will automatically dial a telephone number or Common Abbreviated Dialing
number when the handset is lifted.
Off Hook Signaling
If the partner’s extension is busy, Hotline does not automatically activate Off Hook Signaling.
Programmable Function Keys
A Hotline is a uniquely programmed function key.

Operation
To place a call to your Hotline partner:
1. Press Hotline key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 01 + partner’s extension number)
You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.

To transfer your outside call to your Hotline partner:

1. Press Hotline key.
2. Announce call and hang up.
OR
Hang up to have the call wait at your Hotline partner unannounced.
If unanswered, the call recalls like a regular transferred call.

To answer a call from your Hotline partner:

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.
OR
1. If your telephone rings, lift handset.

220 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Hotline, External
Hotline, External

Refer to the Ringdown Extension, Internal/External (page 309) for information on this
feature.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 221

 InDepth
InDepth

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The inDepth programs are Windows-based Management Information Systems that work in con-
junction with the built in Aspila EX ACD. These ACD/MIS systems enhance the system ACD with
real time statistics and reports on ACD group traffic patterns and usage. The inDepth programs are
an extensive set of user-configurable Real Time Windows and Reporter subsystems.

• Real Time Status Window

This window displays ACD agent status, state
and connection state.

• Real Time Statistics Window

The statistics window provides a visual perfor-
mance summary for lines, agents and ACD
Groups.

• Call Queue and Wait Time Windows

These windows show the number of calls in
queue, the longest wait time, as well as the
number of calls answered and abandoned.

• Wallboard Template
Use the wallboard template display to motivate and inform ACD agents through a dynamic
display of real time statistics and messages.

• Reporter
ACD administrators can create fully-configurable reports for display and printing.

222 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 InDepth

Description (Cont’d)

Hardware, Software and System Requirements

• A seperate PC is required to run the inDepth program.
• A LAN connection is also required at the PC.

For more information, refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Conditions
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Default Setting
InDepth/inDepth+ not installed.

Programming
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Related Features
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Operation
Refer to the inDepth/inDepth+ Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 223

 Intercom
Intercom

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions. This provides the system with complete
internal calling capability.

Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing

Handsfree Answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced Intercom call by
speaking toward the phone, without lifting the handset. Like Handsfree, this is a convenience for
workers who don’t have a free hand to pick up the handset. Refer to Handsfree Answerback/
Forced Intercom Ringing (page 209) for more.

Conditions
Preventing ICM calls does not affect dialing other service codes, including Emergency calls.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
For Intercom . . .
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-01 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Intercom Calls
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to place
Intercom calls.
•20-17-01 : Operator’s Extension
Assign the operator’s extension.
•20-18-01 : Service Tone Timer - Extension Dial Tone Time
Set the Extension Dial Tone Time (0-64800 seconds). After getting Intercom dial tone, a sys-
tem phone user has this interval to dial the first digit of the Intercom call.
•21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Intercom Interdigit Time
Set the Intercom Interdigit Time (0-64800 seconds). When placing Intercom calls, users must
dial each digit within this interval.
•82-01-01 : Incoming Ring Tone - Intercom Ring Tone
Customize the Intercom ring tone.

224 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Intercom
For Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing . . .
•20-02-12 : System Options for System Telephones - Forced Intercom Ringing
Enable (1) or disable (0) Forced Intercom Ringing. If disabled (0), Intercom calls voice-
announce.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-10 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Switching from Handsfree
Answerback to Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to toggle
between Handsfree Answerback and Forced Intercom Ringing for outgoing Intercom calls
(dial 1 or Service Code 812).
•20-09-05 : Class of Service Options (Incoing Call Service) - Setting Handsfree Answerback/
Forced Intercom Ringing
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to set
Handsfree Answerback (Service Code 821) and Forced Intercom Ringing (Service Code 823)
for incoming Intercom calls.

Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Intercom calls can ring or be voice-announced at the called extension.
Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Intercom Abandoned Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension.
Line Preference
Ringing Line Preference can automatically answer ringing Intercom or trunk calls when the
user lifts the handset.
Name Storing
An extension can have a name assigned that identifies the extension to callers.

Operation
To place an Intercom call:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial extension number (or 0 for your operator).
Your call may voice-announce or ring the called extension. Dial 1 to change the way
your call alerts the called extension.
If the extension you call is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension
without hanging up.

To answer an Intercom call:

1. If you hear two beeps, speak toward phone.
Your telephone picks up your voice.
OR
If your telephone rings, lift handset.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 225

 Intercom

Operation (Cont’d)
To check your extension’s data (System Phone Only):
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press CALL1.
You display shows your telephone’s extension number, port number and extension/
Department Group.
3. Press CLEAR to return the normal time/date display.

To change how Intercom calls ring your extension:

1. Press the CALL key or lift the handset for DSL phones.
2. Dial 823 to have calls ring your extension
OR
3. Dial 821 to have calls voice announce to your extension.

226 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Intercom Abandoned Call Display

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Intercom Abandoned Call Display shows a display system phone user a list of Intercom calls
placed to them that they did not answer. This is a convenience if a user has to temporarily leave
their desk. When they return, they can display the list to find out who called while they were out.

Conditions
Intercom Abandon Call Display remembers the last five Intercom calls to an extension.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Related Features
Intercom
Intercom gives extension users access to other extensions.

Operation
To display the list of Intercom calls you did not answer.
1. Press CHECK.
2. Press CALL2.
Repeatedly press CALL2 until no more calls display.
3. Press CLEAR to return to the normal Time and Date display.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 227

 ISDN Compatibility
ISDN Compatibility

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
SMDR Includes Dialed Number
The SMDR report can optionally print the trunk’s name (entered in system programming) or the
number the incoming caller dialed (i.e., the ISDN DDI digits). This gives you the option of analyz-
ing the SMDR report based on the number your callers dial.
When using the SMDR reports for ISDN, all incoming BRI calls will be displayed under the
CLASS column as “IVIN”.

Display Shows Why Caller ID is Not Available

With Caller ID enabled, the system will provide information for ISDN calls that do not contain the
Caller ID information. If the Caller ID information is restricted, the telephone display will show
“PRIVATE”. If the system is not able to provide Caller ID information because the telco informa-
tion is not available, then the display will show “OUT OF AREA”.

Calling Party Number Notification

The system can provide calling party number notification for outgoing ISDN calls. When a call is
made on an ISDN line by an extension, the system will send the identification for the extension
placing the call, if it’s programmed. If there is no Extension Calling Number assigned, the system
will send the calling number for the ISDN trunk. If both the extension and trunk information is pro-
grammed, the extension information will be sent as it takes priority.

When the option for calling party subaddress is on, the extension number will be sent as the subad-
dress information. Both the calling party number and calling party subaddress are sent in a SETUP
message as the calling party information element and a calling party subaddress information element.

Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

The system is compatible with ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) services.
PRI capability requires the installation of PRI Interface PCBs (0891009). The T1/PRI Interface PCB
uses a single slot.

When installed, the PRI Interface PCB uses the first block of 32 consecutive trunks. For example, if you
have an 8COIU PCB installed for trunks 1-8, the PRI Interface PCB will automatically use trunks 9-40.
If you have 8COIU PCBs installed for trunks 1-8 and 17-24, the PRI PCB will use trunks 25-56. The
PRI Interface cannot use trunks 9-16 (even if available) since they are not part of a consecutive block of
32 trunks.

Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

Your system also provides compatibility with ISDN Basic Rate (BRI) services, including:
• Point-to-Point BRI Terminal Connection (no daisy-chaining)
• Multipoint BRI Terminal Connection (daisy-chaining)
• S-Bus (allows BRI PCB's to be used as either a trunk or station interface)

BRI services require the installation of BRI Interface PCBs (2BRIU P/N 0891006, 4BRIU P/N
0891007, 8BRIU, P/N 0891008). Each 2BRI Interface PCB has two BRI circuits. The 4BRI Inter-
face PCB has four BRI circuits, while the 8BRI has eight BRI circuits. The BRI Interface PCBs
use a single universal slot.

228 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 ISDN Compatibility
Conditions
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N TBD) and ISDN-PRI Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Default Setting
None

Programming
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N TBD) and ISDN-PRI Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Related Features
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N TBD) and ISDN-PRI Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Operation
Refer to the ISDN-BRI Manual (P/N TBD) and ISDN-PRI Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 229

 Labelmaker
Labelmaker

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The Aspila EX Labelmaker provides template software and preprinted, precut forms for producing
custom system phone labels. Use the software and forms to make unique system phone labels for
each extension which can include key functions, Hotline names or your own company’s imprinted
logo.

The Aspila EX Labelmaker requires:

• A Windows-compatible sheet fed printer (e.g., laser or ink jet)
• Microsoft Windows 3.1 or higher

Conditions
None

Default Setting
None

Programming
None

Related Features
None

Operation
None

230 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Last Number Redial
Last Number Redial

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Last Number Redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For example,
a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits.

Last Number Redial saves in system memory the last 24 digits a user dials. The number can be any
combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the call
was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the ini-
tial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.

Redial List
The system allows display telephones to have a Redial List. Up to 10 dialed numbers (both external
and internal destinations) are automatically stored in the Redial List. The user can display and
select one of the stored numbers and then redial it. If more than 10 destination numbers are dialed,
the oldest number is automatically erased to make room for the new number.

Conditions
Redial List requires the use of a display telephone. Non-display and single line phones can not use
this feature.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•11-12-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Last Number Dial
Assign a service code (816) to use Last Number Dial.
•11-12-17 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Clear Last Number Dialing Data
Assign a service code (876) to clear the Last Number Dial.
•15-02-13 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Redial List Mode
Select the type of numbers that will be stored in the Redial List - Internal and External num-
bers (0) or External only (1).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
When using Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user preselects.
Repeat Redial
The system can periodically redial an unanswered trunk call.
Save
A user can save the number of an outgoing call to be accessed at a later time.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 231

 Last Number Redial

Operation
To redial your last call:
1. Without lifting the handset, press LND.
The last dialed number is displayed.
2. To redial the last number, press #.
OR
Search for the desired number from the Redial List by pressing the LND or VOLUME s or
VOLUME t keys.
3. Lift the handset or press SPK to place the call.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call
and dials the last number dialed.
OR
1. At system phone, press idle line key (optional).
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call.
2. Press LND.
OR
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
OR
At DSL, press FTR and REDIAL.
2. Dial 816.
The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call
and dials the last number dialed.

To check the number saved for Last Number Redial:

1. Press LND.
The stored number displays for six seconds. The stored number dials out if you:
- Lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CALL key, or
- Press SPK
2. Press CLEAR.

To erase the stored number:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 876.

232 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Line Preference
Line Preference

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Line Preference determines how a system phone user places and answers calls. There are two types
of Line Preference: Incoming Line Preference and Outgoing Line Preference.

Incoming Line Preference

Incoming Line Preference establishes how a system phone user answers calls. When a call rings the
system phone, lifting the handset answers either the ringing call (for Ringing Line Preference) or
seizes an idle line (for Idle Line Preference). The idle line can provide either Intercom or trunk
dial tone (see Outgoing Line Preference below). Ringing Line Preference helps users whose pri-
mary function is to answer calls (such as a receptionist). Idle Line Preference is an aid to users
whose primary function is to place calls (such as a telemarketer).

Outgoing Line Preference

Outgoing Line Preference sets how a system phone user places calls. If a system phone has Outgo-
ing Intercom Line Preference, the user hears Intercom dial tone when they lift the handset. If a sys-
tem phone has Outgoing Trunk Line Preference, the user hears trunk dial tone when they lift the
handset. Outgoing Line Preference also determines what happens at extensions with Idle Line
Preference. The user hears either trunk (“dial 9”) or Intercom dial tone.

Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines

With Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, an extension user can automatically answer trunk calls
that ring other extensions (not their own). This would help a user that has to answer calls for co-
workers that are away from their desks. When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer
the ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming. The extension user’s own ringing
calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker’s extensions.

Conditions
If a system phone extension has more than one call ringing its line keys, Ringing Line Preference
answers the calls on a first-in first-answered basis.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 233

 Line Preference

Programming
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
For Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunks to trunk groups. This is part of Trunk
Group Routing programming.
•14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
For Auto Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, program the Trunk Group Routing table. Auto
Answer uses this table to determine the answer sequence for ringing calls.
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, set up the Trunk
Access Maps (1-200).
•15-01-02 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Outgoing Trunk Line Preference
Enable (1) or disable (0) Outgoing Trunk Line Preference for extensions.
•15-02-09 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Intercom Calls
Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for Intercom calls. See the table below for
interaction.
•15-02-10 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls
Enable Idle (0) or Ringing (1) Line Preference for trunk calls. See the table below for interaction.

Program
Ringing Ringing
15-02-09 15-02-10 Intercom Trunk
(Intercom (Trunk Call Call
Lifting the handset
Preference) Preference)
0 0 X X Seizes idle line appearance.

0 0 X - Seizes idle line appearance.

0 0 - X Seizes idle line appearance.

0 1 X X If Program 22-01-01 is 1, answers ring-

ing trunk.
If Program 22-01-01 is 0, seizes idle
line appearance.
0 1 X - If Program 22-01-01 is 1, seizes idle
line appearance.
If program 22-01-01 is 0, seizes line
appearance,
0 1 - X Answers ringing trunk.

1 0 X X Seizes idle line appearance.

1 0 X - Answers ringing line appearance.

1 0 - X Seizes idle line appearance.

1 1 X X If Program 22-01-01 is 1, answers

ringing trunk.
Intercom call then rings second line
appearance. If Program 22-01-01 is
0, answers Ring line appearance.
1 1 X - Answers ringing Intercom call
(Line appearance).
1 1 - X Answers ringing trunks.

Note: Program 22-01-01 sets Intercom (0) or trunk (1) call priority.

234 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Line Preference
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
For Outgoing Line Preference and Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines, assign trunk Access
Maps to extensions.
•20-10-07 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Automatic Answer of Universal Calls
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Universal Auto Answer for non-ringing
lines.
•22-01-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Priority
Determine if ringing Intercom calls (0) or ringing trunk calls (1) should have answer priority.
See the table below for interaction.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to ring groups (1-100). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for
trunks that do not ring an extension.
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to ring groups (1-100). Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines only works for
trunks that do not ring an extension.
•23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
For each extension, select the route that it will use for Auto-Answer for Non-Ringing Lines.
The routes correspond to the Trunk Group Routing table set in Program 14-06.

Related Features
Direct Inward Line
DILs do not affect Incoming Line Preference operation.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Trunk Group Routing
If an extension gets trunk dial tone when the user lifts the handset, the system uses the “dial 9”
routing to select the trunk.

Operation
To answer a ringing call if your phone has Ringing Line Preference:
1. Refer to the chart on the previous page.

To place a call if your phone has Outgoing Line Preference:

1. Refer to the chart on the previous page.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 235

 Long Conversation Cutoff
Long Conversation Cutoff

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
For incoming and outgoing central office calls, each trunk can be programmed to disconnect after a
defined length of time. The timer begins when the trunk is seized and disconnects the call after the
timer expires.

When used with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature, the system can provide a warn-
ing tone on outgoing trunks calls before the call is disconnected. This tone is not available to ana-
logue single line telephone users nor is it available for incoming calls.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•14-01-14 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Long Conversation Cutoff
Enable (1) or disable (0) a trunk’s ability to disconnect incoming and outgoing central office
calls automatically.
•14-01-15 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut Off
Enable (1) or disable (0) the Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
•20-13-02 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Cutoff
(Incoming)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff
for incoming calls.
•20-13-03 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Cutoff
(Outgoing)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s class of service from using Long Conversation Cutoff
for outgoing calls.
•20-21-03 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming
Calls
Enter the time the system will wait before disconnecting incoming trunks (0-64800 seconds).
•20-21-04 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing
Calls
Enter the time the system will wait before disconnecting outgoing trunks (0-64800 seconds).

236 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Long Conversation Cutoff

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering/Central Office Calls, Placing
Long Conversation Cutoff can disconnect incoming and outgoing CO calls after a set time
period.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)/Tie Lines
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and tie lines.
Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Using the Warning Tone for Long Conversation feature allows users on outgoing calls to hear
a warning tone prior to the call disconnecting.

Operation
Feature is automatic once programmed.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 237

 Loop Keys
Loop Keys

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Loop keys are uniquely programmed function keys that simplify placing and answering trunk calls.
There are three types of loop keys: Incoming Only, Outgoing Only and Both Ways.

• Incoming Only Loop Keys

Incoming Only loop keys are for answering trunk calls. An extension can have an incoming
loop key for a specific trunk group (fixed) or a “catch all” loop key for any trunk group
(switched). Fixed loop keys allow an extension user to tell the type of call by the ringing key.
Switched loop keys are ideal for an extension with a large number of feature keys. In addition,
switched loop keys are a destination for any trunk not on a line key or fixed loop key. Without
a switched loop key, calls not appearing on a line key or fixed loop key will ring only the
CALL key. Incoming Only loop keys also receive Transferred trunk calls.

• Outgoing Only Loop Keys

Outgoing Only loop keys are for placing trunk calls. An extension can have outgoing loop
keys for a specific trunk group or for ARS access. When a user presses the loop key, they get
dial tone from the first available trunk in the group (or from ARS if programmed). Outgoing
Only loop keys help ensure that an extension will always have a key available for placing
calls.

• Both Ways Loop Keys

Both Ways loop keys combine the functions of both Incoming Only and Outgoing Only loop
keys. Both Ways loop keys work well for extension users that handle a moderate amount of
calls and don’t separate keys for incoming and outgoing calls. Both Ways loop keys also
receive Transferred trunk calls.

An extension can have many loop keys - of any type. You can program an operator, for example,
with four loop keys for incoming calls and four for outgoing calls.

Once a loop key call is set up, the user can handle it like any other trunk call. For example, the user
can place the call on Hold, Transfer it to a co-worker or send it to a Park Orbit.

An incoming call will ring the first available loop key, beginning with the lowest numbered key. If
keys 1-3 are loop keys, for example, the first incoming call rings key 1. If key 1 is busy, the next
call rings key 2. If keys 1 and 2 are busy, the next call rings key 3. If all three keys are busy, addi-
tional incoming calls queue for the first available key. The telephone display will show “WAITING
- LOOP KEY” if the user presses a loop key when there are additional calls waiting.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

238 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Loop Keys

Programming
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-100). In general, loop keys access trunks within specific
trunk groups.
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Set up the Trunk Access Maps. For example, if an extension’s loop key is for incoming and
outgoing, make sure the Trunk Access Map allows incoming and outgoing access. Also see
Program 15-06 below.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Also see Program 14-07 above.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Program function keys as trunk group/loop keys (*02 or *05). For additional data, in Program
15-13 enter 0 (incoming only), 1 (outgoing only) or 2 (both ways).
•15-13-01 : Loop Keys
For each loop key on an extension, program options for Data 1 and Data 2 (see the chart below).
Data 1 Data 2
Outgoing Options Incoming Options
0 Assigns the loop key for ARS 0 Assigns the loop key to all trunk groups
access
1-100 Assigns the loop key to the trunk 1-100 Assigns the loop key to the trunk group
group specified specified
•20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level), Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
If an extension should be able to use Programmable Functions Keys to program a loop key,
enable this option in the user’s Class of Service (1-15).
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to Ring Groups (1-100). An incoming loop key will ring only for those
trunks programmed to ring. Also see Program 22-05.
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to Ring Groups (1-100). An incoming loop key will ring only for those trunks
programmed to ring. Also see Program 22-04 above.

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) / Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office
Calls, Placing
Program incoming and outgoing access and routing options.
Off Hook Signaling
If enabled, a user hears Call Waiting beeps if additional calls are waiting behind a loop key.
Programmable Function Keys
If you have a line and loop key for the same trunk, the line key has precedence. An incoming
call rings the line key, not the loop key. When you press the loop key for an outgoing call, the
line key lights.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring telephones according to their Ring Group assignments (Programs 22-04 and 22-05).
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) / Direct Inward Line (DIL) / Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) / Tie Lines

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 239

 Loop Keys
Transferred DID, DIL, DISA and tie line calls do not require ring group programming.

Operation
To place a call on a loop key:
1. Press outgoing or both ways loop key.
You hear dial tone and the key lights green.
2. Dial number.

To answer a call on a loop key:

Listen for ringing a look for a flashing loop key.
1. Press loop key.
The key lights green and you connect to the call.
If there are additional calls waiting to be answered, your display shows:
WAITING - LOOP KEY

To program a loop key:

1. Press the SPK key.
2. Dial 852.
3. Press the key you want to program as a loop key.
4. Dial *05.
5. Dial the loop key type:
• 0 = Incoming only
• 1 = Outgoing only
• 2 = Both ways (incoming and outgoing)
6. Dial the loop key routing option for incoming, outgoing, or incoming and outgoing calls:
• 000 = Trunk Group Routing or ARS (if installed)
• 001-200 = Trunk Groups
If you selected option 2 in step 5 above, enter the incoming Trunk Group followed by
the outgoing Trunk Group.
7. Press SPK to hang up.

240 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference

Aspila EX
• NTCPU provides 2 blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number of internal or external
parties conferenced up to the block’s limit of 32.

Description
With Meet Me Conference, an extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up
to 32 other internal or external parties. Each party joins the Conference by dialing a Meet Me Con-
ference code. Meet Me Conference lets extension users have a telephone meeting -- without leav-
ing the office.

Conditions
(A.) Each block assigned in Program 10-07 for Conversation Recording reduces the number of
blocks available for Conference, Recording, ACD Agent Auto Call Recording, and ACD
Supervisor Monitor.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
Note: For additional programming for Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging Internal fea-
tures.
•10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of avail-
able Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Conference (code 07), External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone),
External All Call Paging (code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) and Meet Me Con-
ference/Paging Pickup (code 23).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a
Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page.
•31-01-04 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Privacy Release Time
Set the Privacy Release Time (0-64800 seconds). Once the user initiates Meet Me Confer-
ence, the system waits this interval for the Paged party to join the conversation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 241

 Meet Me Conference

Related Features
Conference
An extension user can also use other types of Conferences to join callers together.
Meet Me Paging
An extension user can have a telephone meeting with a co-worker on a Page zone.
Programmable Function Keys
Meet Me Conference requires a Conference key. In addition, Internal and External Paging
keys simplify Meet Me Conference operation.

Operation
Meet Me External Conference

To make a Meet Me External Conference:

System Phone
1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).
2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call)
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
OR
Press Page key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Single Line Telephone

1. Single Line Telephone:
While on a call, hookflash and dial 826.
DSL Telephone:
While on a call, press HOLD and dial 826.
2. Dial 803 and the External Paging zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When co-worker answers your page:
Single Line Telephone:
Press the hookflash twice.
DSL Telephone:
Press HOLD twice.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

242 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Meet Me Conference

Operation (Cont’d)
To join a Meet Me External Conference:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 865.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone code (0-8).
You connect to the other parties.

Meet Me Internal Conference:

To make a Meet Me Internal Conference:

System Phone
1. While on a call, press Conference key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 07).
2. Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-64).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When co-worker answers your page, press the Conference key twice.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Single Line Telephone

1. Single LineTelephone:
While on a call, hookflash and dial 826.
DSL Telephone:
While on a call, press HOLD and dial 826.
2. Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-64).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
4. When co-worker answers your page:
Single Line Telephone:
Press the hookflash twice.
DSL Telephone:
Press HOLD twice.
5. Repeat steps 1-4 for each co-worker you want to add.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 243

 Meet Me Conference

Operation (Cont’d)
To join a Meet Me Internal Conference:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your exten-
sion is in the zone called.

244 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Meet Me Paging allows an extension user to Page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a
Page zone. The Paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-
workers meet on the zone, no one else can hear the conversation, join in or make an announcement
using that zone. Meet Me Paging is a good way to talk to a co-worker when their location is
unknown. If the co-worker can hear the Page, they can join in the conversation.

Conditions
(A.) External paging requires a 2PGDAD unit be installed in the system if more than one zone is
required. There is one zone available on the NTCPU.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging
Internal features.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging
(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) or Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup
(code 23).
•20-06-01: Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a
Meet Me Conference or Meet Me Page.

Related Features
Meet Me Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside
parties.
Meet Me Paging Transfer
With Meet Me Paging Transfer, a user can page a co-worker and have the call automatically
transfer when the co-worker answers the page.
Paging, Internal / Paging, External
An extension’s access to internal and external page zones affects the Meet Me Paging feature.
Programmable Function Keys
Internal and External Paging keys simplify Meet Me Paging operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 245

 Meet Me Paging

Operation
Meet Me External Page

To make a Meet Me External Page:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
OR
1. At system phone, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone &
20).
2. Announce the zone.

To join a Meet Me External Page:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 865.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-8).
You connect to the other party.

246 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Internal Page

To make a Meet Me Internal Page:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 801 and dial the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9, 00-32 or 00-64).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the zone.
OR
1. At system phone, press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone &
20).
2. Announce the zone.

To join a Meet Me Internal Page:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your exten-
sion is in the zone called.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 247

 Meet Me Paging Transfer
Meet Me Paging Transfer

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
If a user wants to Transfer a call to a co-worker but they don’t know where the co-worker is, they
can use Meet Me Paging Transfer. With Meet Me Paging Transfer, the user can Page the co-worker
and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the Page. Since Meet Me
Paging Transfer works with both Internal and External Paging, a call can be quickly extended to a
co-worker anywhere in the facility.

Conditions
(A.) External paging requires a 2PGDAD unit be installed in the system if more than one zone is
required. There is one zone available on the NTCPU.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
Note: For additional programming information on Paging, refer to the Paging External and Paging
Internal features.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Zone Paging (code 19 + zone), External All Call Paging
(code 20), Internal Zone Paging (code 21 + zone) and Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup
(code 23).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-10-06 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Meet Me Conference and Paging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate a
Meet Me Paging Transfer.

248 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Meet Me Paging Transfer

Related Features
Meet Me Conference
An extension user can set up a Conference with their current call and up to 31 other inside
parties.
Meet Me Paging
An extension user can Page a co-worker and meet with them on a Page zone.
Paging, External
With External Paging, an extension user can broadcast an announcement over Paging equip-
ment connected to external Paging zones.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other keysets.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Meet Me Paging Transfer operation.

Operation
Meet Me External Paging Transfer

To make a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, while on a call, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.
2. Press the External Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone & 20).
OR
Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-8 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the call.
4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.

To join a Meet Me External Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 865.
3. Dial the announced External Paging Zone (0-8).
You connect to the Paging party.
4. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 249

 Meet Me Paging Transfer

Operation (Cont’d)
Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer

To make a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, while on a call, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, while on a call, hookflash.
2. Press Internal Paging Zone key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 20 + zone).
OR
Dial 801 and the Internal Paging Zone code (0-9 or 00-64).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-8) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Announce the call.
4. When Paged party answers, hang up to Transfer the call to them.
The answering party connects to the trunk call when you hang up.

To join a Meet Me Internal Paging Transfer:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 863 (if your extension is in the zone called).
OR
Dial 864 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called).
OR
Press the Meet Me Conference/Paging Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 23) if your exten-
sion is in the zone called.
3. Stay on the line.
After the Paging party hangs up, you connect to the transferred call.

250 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Memo Dial
Memo Dial

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
While on an outside call, Memo Dial lets a display system phone user store an important number
for easy redialing later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial
Directory Assistance and ask for a client’s telephone number. When Directory Assistance plays
back the requested number, the caller can use Memo Dial to jot the number down in the telephone’s
memory. They can quickly call the Memo Dial number after hanging up.

When a user enters a Memo Dial number, the dialed digits do not output over the trunk. Dialing
Memo Dial digits does not interfere with a call in progress.

Conditions
When Memo Dial calls out, it outdials the entire stored number. Memo Dial does not automatically
strip out trunk or PBX access codes if entered as part of the stored number.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Memo Dial (code 31).

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
A user’s outgoing dialing options affect how a Memo Dial call is placed.
Last Number Redial
Quickly redial the last outside number dialed.
Save Number Dialed
Save the last outside number dialed.
Single Line Telephones
Memo Dial is not available at single line telephones.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 251

 Memo Dial

Operation
To store a number while you are on a call:
1. While on a call, press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).
2. Dial number you want to store.
3. Press Memo Dial key again and continue with conversation.

To call a stored Memo Dial number:

1. Do not lift the handset.
2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).
3. Press idle CALL key.
The stored number dials out only if you store a trunk access code before the number.
OR
Press line key.
The stored number dials out.

To check to see the stored Memo Dial number:

1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).
The stored number displays.

To cancel (erase) a stored Memo Dial number:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Press Memo Dial key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 31).

252 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Message Waiting
Message Waiting

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
An extension user can leave a Message Waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension
requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing MW lamp at the called extension and a steadily
lit MW lamp on the calling extension. Answering the Message Waiting automatically calls the
extension which left the indication. Message Waiting ensures that a user will not have to recall an
unanswered extension. It also ensures that a user will not miss calls when their extension is busy or
unattended. Additionally, Message Waiting lets extension users:
• View and selectively answer messages left at their extension (display system phone only)
• Cancel all messages left at their extension
• Cancel messages they left at other extensions

An extension user can leave Messages Waiting at any number of extensions. Also, any number of
extensions can leave a Message Waiting at the same extension. A periodic VRS announcement may
remind users that they have Messages Waiting.

Message Waiting Available for Single Line Telephones

This feature provides message waiting indications to single line telephones without message wait-
ing lamps. The system provides 3 additional methods of indicating a message waiting on a single
line telephone with or without a message waiting lamp. These methods are:
1. Special dial tone
2. Intermittent ringing
3. VRS announcement

Note the following items for this feature:

• This feature can apply to any analogue single line telephone.
• Since it's possible that a user will pick up the handset and dial without listening for dial tone,
the system is able to detect dialing during a VRS message and special dial tone.
• All of the message waiting indication methods may be active at any SLT.
• Options are available based on a station’s class of service.
• A DSP daughter board must be installed for VRS messages.
• There is a programmable delay from the time a SLT goes off-hook until the VRS message
begins. The default is set to 1 second.
• The time between intermittent rings is programmable. The default time is 1800 seconds (30
minutes). If this timer is set to ‘0’, then the system rings once.
• These signaling methods are available to all analogue single line telephones, whether con-
nected to an 8SLIU card, single line adaptor, APR or APA adaptors.
• If both the Message Wait dial tone and VRS message are active, the user will hear the VRS
message first then hear the Message Wait dial tone. If the special dial tone is not set, then the
user will hear regular dial tone. Note: The regular dial tone may be different based on the
phone's status (call forward, DND, etc.).
• The Message Wait dial tone will be a system tone and can be changed in Program 80-01.
• The VRS announcement does not work when telephones have the following features set:
1. Outgoing Trunk Line Preference
2. Hot Line (Internal)
3. Hot Line (External)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 253

 Message Waiting
Conditions
(A.) Reminder messages require a DSP daughter board for VRS messages.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Message Waiting (code 38).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-07 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Message Waiting
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to leave
Messages Waiting.
•24-02-05 : System Options for Transfer - Message Wait Ring Interval Timer
For SLTs without message waiting lamps, this timer determines the amount of time between
intermittent ringing. If this timer is set to '0' then the system rings once.
•80-01-01 : Service Tone Setup - Message Wait Dial Tone
If the default tone is not acceptable for the Message Wait Dial Tone, a new tone can be assigned.

Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
When a user responds to a Message Waiting, the system does not cancel the Message Waiting
indication if the called party uses Handsfree Answerback. The system cancels the indication
only if the called party lifts the handset or presses SPK.
Hotel/Motel
With the Hotel/Motel set up, an employee with a system phone can send a Message Waiting
to a room telephone if allowed in system programming.
Programmable Function Key
A Message Waiting key simplifies this feature’s operation.
Single Line Telephones
The intermittent ringing or stutter dial tone options may be used to indicate voice mail mes-
sages for single line sests which do not have a Message Waiting lamp.
Voice Response System
Reminder messages require a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System (VRS).
Voice Mail
Telephone-to-telephone Message Waiting works when the voice mail is installed.
The MW LED may be used to indicate voice mail messages if there is no extension number
assigned to the voice mail key in system programming.

Operation
To leave a Message Waiting:
1. Call busy or unanswered extension.

254 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Message Waiting
2. Press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38)
3. Hang up.
With system phone phones, the MW LED lights.

To answer a Message Waiting:

When you have a message, your MW LED flashes fast for keysets.
1. At a system phone, press idle CALL key and dial 841.
OR
Press Message Waiting key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 38).
OR
At single line telephones, lift the handset and dial 841.
If the called extension doesn’t answer, dial 0 or press your Message Waiting key to
automatically leave them a message.
Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have new messages in your
“Voice Mail” mailbox or a new “General Message”. Go to “To check your messages” below.

To cancel all your Messages Waiting:

This includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other exten-
sion have left for you.
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 873.
3. Hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 255

 Message Waiting

Operation (Cont’d)
To cancel the Messages Waiting you have left at a specific extension:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 871.
3. Dial number of extension you don’t want to have your messages.
4. Hang up.

To check your messages:

1. Press CHECK
2. Dial 841.
You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.
If you see. . . You have. . .

VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail

n MESSAGE mailbox
CHECK MESSAGE A General message in Voice Mail that has
VRS GENERAL MESSAGE not been heard.
CHECK MESSAGE Message Waiting requests left at your
(name) phone by your co-workers.

3. Press VOL s or VOL t to scroll through your display.

4. When you find the message you want to answer, press CALL1. You’ll either:
• Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.
• Listen to the new General Message.
• Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.

Single Line Telephones Without Message Waiting Lamps:

With VRS message only:
1. Lift handset.
2. After programmed delay, the extension user hears the VRS message 'You have a message'.
3. Listen for dial tone.

With special dial tone only:

1. Lift handset.
The system provides the special Message Wait dial tone immediately.

With VRS and special dial tone:

1. Lift handset.
2. After the programmed delay, the extension user hears the VRS message "You have a message".
The system provides the special Message Wait dial tone immediately.

256 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Microphone Cutoff
Microphone Cutoff

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Microphone Cutoff lets a system phone user turn off their phone’s handsfree or handset micro-
phone at any time. When activated, Microphone Mute prevents the caller from hearing conversa-
tions in the user’s work area. The user may turn off the microphone while their telephone is idle,
busy on a call or ringing. The microphone stays off until the user turns it back on.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled (using MIC key).

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
If an extension needs handset microphone cutoff, program a Handset Transmission Cutoff key
(code 40). To program a Mic Cutoff key, use code 02 as the entry. The Mic Cutoff key will
mute conversation on a handsfree call, while the Handset Transmission Cutoff key will mute
the handset transmission on a non-handsfree call.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.

Related Features
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Microphone Cutoff does not operate if the user calls another extension and the called exten-
sion responds without lifting the handset or pressing SPK. With Microphone Cutoff enabled,
Handsfree Answerback callers to an extension hear a single beep (instead of two).
Programmable Function Keys
Handset Microphone Cutoff requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Microphone Cutoff.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 257

 Microphone Cutoff

Operation
To mute your telephone’s handset or Handsfree microphone while on a call:
1. Press MIC.
This only turns off the Handsfree microphone.
OR
Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 40).
This turns off both the handset and Handsfree microphone.

To turn your telephone’s microphone back on:

1. Press MIC.
Use MIC only if you pressed it initially to turn off your Handsfree microphone.
OR
Press Microphone Cutoff key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 40).
Use the Microphone Cutoff key only if you pressed it initially to turn off your handset
or Handsfree microphone.

258 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Aspila EX
• Available - Virtual ports 1-256.

Description
Multiple Directory Numbers let a system phone have more than one extension number. Calls can
route to the system phone’s installed number or to the system phone’s “virtual extension” Multiple
Directory Number key. This helps users identify incoming calls. For example, an extension
installed at 304 (Sales) could have a virtual extension for 460 (Service). Calls to 304 ring the
extension normally. Calls to 460 ring the Multiple Directory Number key. This lets the user at
extension 304 differentiate Sales calls from Service calls.

Call Coverage
A system phone can have Multiple Directory Number keys set up as Call Coverage keys for co-
worker’s extensions. The Call Coverage key lights when the co-worker’s extension is busy and
flashes slowly when the co-worker has an incoming call. The Call Coverage key can ring immedi-
ately when a call comes into the covered extension, ring after a delay or not ring at all. In addition,
the system phone user can press the Call Coverage key to intercept their co-worker’s incoming call.
The user can also go off hook and press the Call Coverage key to call the covered extension.

If the covered extension is busy and they receive a second call, the covering extension’s Call Cov-
erage key will flash. The user just presses the flashing key to pick up the call.

The Call Coverage keys follow the extension’s Do Not Disturb and Off-Hook Signaling program-
ming. These keys do not, however, indicate the lamping for extensions in DND. If this is required,
a Hotline key can be used instead.

Place and Receive Calls on Call Coverage/Multiple Directory Number Keys

Multiple Directory Number keys/Call Coverage keys can be used three separate ways, depending
on how the key is defined in Program 15-02-21.

• a DSS key to the extension and for receiving incoming calls

• answering incoming calls with the ability to place outgoing ICM or CO calls
OR
• just for receiving incoming calls

A system phone can have Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage keys for many different
extensions and virtual extensions. In addition, co-workers can share the same Multiple Directory
Numbers. For example, everyone in the Service Department could have a key for the Sales Depart-
ment’s virtual extension.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 259

 Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Description (Cont’d)
Auto Off-Hook Answer and Ringing Line Preference for Call Coverage Keys
An extension’s Call Coverage Keys can be programmed to allow the user to simply pick up the
handset to answer a ringing call. So as not to interfere with ringing trunk or Intercom calls, the sys-
tem automatically assigns Call Coverage Key ringing with the lowest answering priority. If multi-
ple Call Coverage Keys are ringing, answering priority is set first by the assigned ring pattern and
then by the key position.

Virtual Extension vs. Ring Groups

As the system does not allow voice mail calls to ring Ring Groups, a virtual extension can be cre-
ated which will allow you to direct calls to more than one extension. When you program a Call
Coverage Key for that extension to ring, the next call can then be answered.

This could allow a voice mail caller to dial the virtual extension and have all the extensions with the
same virtual extension key ring. The system can be programmed as follows:
• Program 11-04, 15-01-01: Assign a virtual extension number and name (example: virtual port
1, extension 5400, Sales).
• Program 15-07: Assign a Call Coverage key (*03) to an extension for the virtual extension
number assigned.

The end user can then simply transfer the call to the virtual extension number (example: 5400). To
allow calls to be queued at the virtual you must place the virtual within a Department Group and
have the user transfer calls to the pilot number, the call is in placed in a queue and will be answered
in turn as soon as the extension is available.

Conditions
(A.) More than one extension can share the same Multiple Directory Number.
(B.) An extension can have more than one Multiple Directory Number (limited only by the number
of available function keys).

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•11-04-01 : Virtual Extension Numbering
Assign extension numbers to virtual extensions (virtual extension ports=1-256).
•15-01-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Extension Name
Assign names to virtual extensions.
•15-02-21 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup, Virtual Extension Access Mode
Determine whether an extension’s Virtual Extension/Call Coverage Key should be used as a
DSS key to the extension and for receiving calls (0), answering incoming calls and ability to
place outgoing ICM or CO calls (1), or just receiving incoming calls (2).
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Multiple Directory Numbers (code *03 + extension number).
•15-08-01 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
Assign a ring tone (0-4) to each extension port and virtual extension port assigned to a Multi-
ple Directory Number key. If ringing is enabled for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings
with the tone set in this program. Each port can have one of four different rings.

260 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
•15-09-01 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number function keys to either ring
(1) or not ring (0).
•15-10-01 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
Set the priority (1-4) for the Multiple Directory Number Ring Tones set in Program 15-08.
When Multiple Directory Number calls ring an extension simultaneously, the tone with the
highest priority (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys just flash.
•15-11-01 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
Individually program an extension’s Multiple Directory Number keys for Delayed Ringing
(1) or Immediate Ringing (0). Also see Program 20-04-03 above.
•20-04-03 : System Options forVirtual Extensions - Call Coverage Delay Interval
Multiple Directory Number/Call Coverage Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see Program 15-11
below) ring the covering extension after this interval.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a COS to each extension (1-15).
•20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
Determine whether an extension’s Class of Service allows a user to set up a Call Coverage
key using service code 852 (Enable=1, Disable=0).
•20-10-08 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) - Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Cov-
erage Keys
Determine whether an extension’s Call Coverage Key should be automatically answered
when the handset is lifted (0=disabled, 1=enabled). With multiple ringing calls, Programs 15-
08, 15-10 and 23-04 determine which call is answered first.
•23-04-01 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
When an extension has a virtual extension assigned to a Programmable Function Key, this
program determines the priority (1-4) for a Ring Group (1-64) for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If “00” is selected for the Ring Group, when the
user lifts the handset, the user will answer a ringing call from any group.

Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
Extensions can have Call Coverage Keys for ACD Groups. Refer to Multiple Directory Num-
bers / Call Coverage for ACD Groups in the ACD Manual (P/N TBD) for the specifics.
Class of Service
Class of Service options apply to Multiple Extension Appearances.
Department Calling
Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Department Calling Groups.
Do Not Disturb / Off-Hook Signaling
A Call Coverage Key follows DND and Off-Hook Signaling programming for an extension.
Group Call Pickup
Multiple Extension Appearances can be in Call Pickup Groups.
Line Preference
An extension user can answer an outside call on a Call Coverage Key just by lifting the hand-
set.
Programmable Function Keys
This feature requires uniquely programmed function keys.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 261

 Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Operation
To answer a call ringing a Multiple Directory Number:
1. Press flashing Multiple Directory Number key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *03 + ext.).

To place a call to a Multiple Directory Number (including a Call Coverage key):

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial Multiple Directory Number number or press Multiple Directory Number key.

To place a call from a Multiple Directory Number (including a Call Coverage key):
1. Press the Multiple Directory Number key.
ICM dial tone is heard.
2. Place an intercom call or dial a trunk access code to seize an outside line and place your call.

To set up a Call Coverage Key:

1. Press idle CALL key or SPK key.
2. Dial 852.
3. Press the programmable key you want to program.
The previously programmed entry displays.
4. Dial *03.
5. Dial the number of the extension you want to cover.
6. Press HOLD once for Immediate Ring
To set for Delayed Ring, skip to Step 8.
7. Dial the Mode number(s) in which the key will be used.
1=Day 1
2=Night 1
3=Midnight 1
4=Rest 1
5=Day 2
6=Night 2
7=Midnight 2
8=Rest 2
8. Press HOLD to set up Delayed Ring
OR
Skip to Step 10.
9. Dial the Mode number(s) in which the key will be used.
1=Day 1
2=Night 1
3=Midnight 1
4=Rest 1
5=Day 2
6=Night 2
7=Midnight 2
8=Rest 2
10. Press SPK to hang up.

262 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Music on Hold
Music on Hold

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Music on Hold (MOH) sends music to calls on Hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know
that their call is waiting, not forgotten. Without Music on Hold, the system provides silence to these
types of calls. The Music on Hold source can be internal (synthesized) or from a customer-provided
music source (i.e., tape deck, receiver, etc.). The customer-provided source can connect to a PGDAD
module analogue port or to a connector on the CPRU PCB.

Note: In accordance with copyright law, a license may be required if radio, television broadcasts or
music other than material not in the public domain are transmitted through the Music on Hold
feature of telecommunications systems. NEC Infrontia hereby disclaims any liability arising out
of the failure to obtain such a license.

Conditions
None.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•10-04-01 : Music on Hold Setup - Music on Hold Source Selection
Determine whether the system should use internal (0) or external (1) music source.
•10-04-02 : Music on Hold Setup - Music Selection for Internal Source
Set the Music on Hold selection. The options are 0 (silence), 1-2 (synthesized music selections).
•10-04-03 : Music on Hold Setup - Audio Gain Setup
Set the Music on Hold audio gain (1-64).
•10-21-01 : NTCPU Hardware Setup - External Source Control Switch Selection
Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control (0=external MOH
source, 1=BGM source, 2=external speaker, 3=general purpose relay).
•14-08-01 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
For each trunk, set the Music on Hold source (0=Internal synthesized MOH, 1=Customer-pro-
vided source connected to BGM port, 2=Customer-provided source connected to ACI port).
•14-08-02 : Music on Hold Source Port Number
If the MOH type is “2” in 14-08-01, for each trunk enter the ACI source port number (0 – 96).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-07-02 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Changing the Music on Hold
Tone
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to change
the Music on Hold tone (Service Code 881).
•33-01-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
If ACI software port is designated for MOH in 14-08-01, set port’s function to 1 (input).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 263

 Music on Hold
Note: When connecting your music source to an PGDAD analogue port, additional ACI program-
ming is required. Refer to the “Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)” feature for the
specifics on setting up a PGDAD Module.

Related Features
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot change the Music on Hold tone.

Operation
To change the Music on Hold tone:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 881.
3. Dial Music on Hold tone code:
00 No Tone
01 General
02 Holiday
4. Press SPK to hang up.

264 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Name Storing
Name Storing

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a sys-
tem phone’s display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it eas-
ier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer to a directory when processing calls. A name
can be up to 12 digits long, consisting of alphanumeric characters, punctuation marks and spaces.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•14-01-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk Name
Program names for system trunks.
•15-01-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Extension Name
Program number for system extensions.
•15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
Assign an Extension Name Change key (55) to extensions:
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-09-02 : Class of Service Options (Incoing Call Service) - Trunk Name Display, Incoming
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the displaying of a trunk’s name/
number when the trunk is ringing.
•20-13-21 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Extension Name
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program
their name.

Related Features
Directory Dialing
Super Display Telephones use extension names for Directory Dialing.
Single Line Telephones
Single line extensions cannot program names.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 265

 Name Storing

Operation
To program an extension’s name:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 800
OR
Press Extension Name Change key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 55).
3. Enter the extension number to be named.
4. Enter name (see below).
Your name can be up to 12 digits maximum.
5. Press HOLD.
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
be up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed - ex: STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor
and to the right.
6. Press SPK to hang up.

266 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Night Service
Night Service

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Night Service lets system users activate one of the Night Service modes. Night Service redirects
calls to their night mode destination, as determined by Assigned and Universal Night Answer pro-
gramming. The system allows Night Service to be enabled for each Night Service group (01-32),
allowing each group to determine when their calls should switch modes. A user typically activates
Night Service after normal working hours, when most employees are unavailable to answer calls.
The system also provides external contacts to enable Night Service.

There are eight Night Service modes:

• Day 1 / Day 2 Modes - for normal working hours
• Night 1 / Night 2 Modes - after hours (usually evening)
• Midnight 1 / Midnight 2 Modes - late at night to early in the morning
• Rest 1 / Rest 2 Modes - interval usually used for lunch

Assigned Night Answer (ANA)

With Assigned Night Answer, Night Service has calls ring extensions directly. Assigned Night
Answer provides an answering point for Night Service calls. For certain applications, this may be
more appropriate than Universal Night Answer. For example, you could program trunks to ring the
security station telephone during off hours.

Universal Night Answer (UNA)

Universal Night Answer makes incoming calls ring over the External Paging speakers. With UNA,
an employee can go to a telephone and press the flashing line key or use “Universal Answer” to
pick up the call. For more on setting up Universal Answer, turn to the “Central Office Calls,
Answering” feature.

You may also be able to use Transfer to UNA. An extension user can Transfer their call to UNA
(i.e., External Paging at night). Once transferred, the call will ring the External Paging speakers like
any other UNA call and can be picked up at any extension. You can also set up Transfer to UNA
through the VRS. This lets outside callers, answered by the VRS, dial a code to have their call ring
External Paging.

Automatic Night Service

The system will allow or deny Automatic Night Service based on the extension’s class of service pro-
gramming. If allowed, the calls will then route according to the service patterns programmed.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 267

 Night Service
Conditions
(A.) The NTCPU PCB has connections for a Night Mode switch. During installation, you connect
a mechanical switch to these contacts to provide an additional method of Night Mode switch-
ing. Refer to the system hardware manual for additional details.
(B.) The following programs are affected by Night Mode:

15-06 22-05 25-04 34-02

15-09 22-07 25-05 34-03
15-11 22-08 25-08 34-04
20-06 22-12 25-09
21-02 22-13 25-10
21-04 23-03 25-11
21-12 25-02 25-12
21-15 25-03 31-05

(C.) Almost all features are affected by Night Mode except for the following:
• Dial Tone Detection
• External Alarm Sensors
• Flexible System Numbering
• Labelmaker
• Pulse to Tone conversion
• SMDR
• Volume Control

Default Setting
System is always in the Day Mode.

Programming
•10-05-01 : General Purpose Relay Setup
Define which relay circuits (5-8) on the 2PGDAD adapter are used for General Purpose
Relays.
•10-21-01 : NTCPU Hardware Setup, External Source Control Switch Selection
Specify the function of the relay switch for the external tone source control (0=External MOH
source, 1=BGM source, 2=External Speaker, 3=General Purpose Relay).
•11-10-01 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Day / Night Mode Switching
Customize the service code (818) to be used for day/night mode switching.
•11-12-50 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - General Purpose Relay
Define the service code to be used for turning the general purpose relay on and off
(default=880).
•11-15-09 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Hotel) - Transfer to Trunk Ring Group
Code
Enter the service code a user should dial when transferring a call to the Night Answer ring
group (defined in Program 22-05). This also allows the transferred call to ring over the Exter-
nal Paging (Program 31-05) so that any employee can answer the call. If unanswered, the call
can overflow to the destination defined in Program 22-08.
•12-01-01 : Night Mode Function Setup - Manual Night Service Enable
Allow (1) or prevent (0) Department Group extension members from activating Night Ser-
vice.

268 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Night Service
•12-01-02 : Night Mode Function Setup - Automatic Night Service Enabled
Enable (1) or disable (0) Automatic Night Service for the system. Make sure to set the Service
Patterns in 12-02, 12-03, and 12-04.
•12-01-03 : Night Mode Function Setup - Night Mode Switch Operating Mode
Set the function of the NTCPU Night Service Mode switch (Not Used = 0, Day 1 Mode = 1,
Night 1 Mode = 2, Midnight 1 Mode = 3, Rest 1 Mode = 4, Day 2 Mode = 5, Night 2 Mode =
6, Midnight 2 Mode = 7, Rest 2 Mode = 8).
•12-02-01 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Configure the Automatic Night Service patterns. Pattern 1 should begin at 00:00 (midnight).
Make sure to include the mode information for each time period as the system assigns the Day
Mode (0) to all time periods not assigned to modes 1-3.
•12-03-01 : Weekly Night Service Switching
Assign one of the five Automatic Night Service patterns programmed in 12-02 to each day of the
week.
•12-04-01 : Holiday Night Service Switching
Assign on of the five Automatic Night Service patterns to holidays.
•12-05-01 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01-32) for each extension.
•12-06-01 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
Assign a Day/Night Mode Group (01-32) for each trunk port (1-200).
•12-07-01 : Text Data for Night Mode
Create an original text message which will be displayed on an LCD of system phone tele-
phone in each Night Mode.
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
To allow for UNA answering, set up the Trunk Access Maps (1-200). For UNA, extension
must have incoming access to trunk ringing the External Paging speakers.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
For UNA answering, assign Trunk Access Maps (1-200) to extensions. Make one entry for
each Night Service mode.
•15-07-01 : Programmable Function Keys
Assign Night Service function keys (09) to extensions and set the key for the proper mode
(Day, Night, Rest, etc.). Assign trunks to function keys (code *01 + 001-200). If required,
define a function key for a system phone to use the general purpose relay (51).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-07-01 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Manual Night Mode Switching
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to manually
switch the Night Mode (Service Code 818).
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extension during the different Night Service modes (for ANA), assign
extensions to Ring Groups (1-100). For each extension in the Ring Group, indicate in Pro-
gram 22-06 if trunk should ring (1) or not ring (0).
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
To have trunks ring extensions for ANA, assign trunks to Ring Groups. You make a different
entry for each Night Service mode.
•22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
If a Universal Answer call rings longer than the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04), it
routes to the Ring Group specified in this option (Ring Group (1-100), DSPDB Voice Mail
(101) or In-Skin Voice Mail (102)).
•31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer
For each Night Service Mode, assign which trunks should ring which External Paging Zones.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 269

 Night Service

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering and Placing/Ring Groups
There are separate Access Map and Ring Group programming entries for each Night Service
mode (Day 1, Night 1, Midnight 1, Rest 1, Day 2, Night 2, Midnight 2, Rest 2). Also, “Uni-
versal Answer” allows an extension user to pick up a UNA call.
Paging, External
With Universal Night Answer, outside calls can ring External Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify activating Night Service.
Voice Response System (VRS)
Using the service code defined in Program 11-15-09, a caller listening to the VRS message
can have the ability to transfer their call and have it ring the external page. The code the caller
would dial is defined in Program 25-06-02.

Operation
To activate Night Service by dialing codes:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 818.
3. Dial Night Service code:
1 Day 1 mode
2 Night 1 mode
3 Midnight 1 mode
4 Rest 1 mode
5 Day 2 mode
6 Night 2 mode
7 Midnight 2 mode
8 Rest 2 mode
4. Press SPK to hang up.

To activate Night Service by using programmable keys:

1. Press Night Service key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 09) + Mode code number (below).
1 Day 1 mode
2 Night 1 mode
3 Midnight 1 mode
4 Rest 1 mode
5 Day 2 mode
6 Night 2 mode
7 Midnight 2 mode
8 Rest 2 mode

To transfer a call to the Universal Answer External Page zones:

1. Place the CO call on hold and dial the Transfer to Trunk Ring Group code.
You will hear a confirmation tone.
2. Hang up.
The call rings over the External Paging, enabling anyone to answer the call.

270 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Off Hook Signaling
Off Hook Signaling

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
When a user calls an extension busy on a call, they can send an off hook signal through the handset
and through the telephone’s speaker indicating they are trying to get through. The signal is an off
hook ringing over the idle (second) line appearance. Off Hook Signaling helps important callers get
through, without waiting in line for the called extension to become free. The system provides the
following Off Hook Signaling options:
• Called Extension Block
The called extension’s Class of Service may block incoming Off Hook Signaling attempts.
This is beneficial to users that don’t want interruptions while on a call.
• Automatic Signaling
Calling a busy extension automatically initiates Off Hook Signaling. This option is useful to
receptionists, operators and others that must quickly process calls. This is set in the called
extension’s Class of Service.
• Manual Signaling
After reaching a busy extension, manual signaling gives the caller the choice of using Off
Hook Signaling or activating other features. Extension’s without automatic signaling have
manual signaling. The usesr can dial a service code or press a Programmable Function Key to
send Off Hook Signaling to the called phone.
• Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode
The Off Hook Signal can be muted ringing, no off hook ringing, a single beep in the handset,
a beep in the speaker, or a beep in the handset - based on the caller’s programming.
• Off Hook Ringing
Use this option to enable or disable an extension’s Off Hook Signaling for incoming calls
(DID, trunk). If enabled, Off Hook Signaling occurs normally. If disabled, calls queue behind
the extension’s busy line appearance and the user gets no Off Hook Signaling indication. The
second line appearance stays idle. The caller hears ringback tone while their call waits. This is
set in the called extension’s Class of Service.
• DID Call Waiting
An extension can optionally have DID calls camp on with Off Hook/Call Wait signaling,
without Off Hook/Call Wait signaling or no signaling. This is set in the called extension’s
Class of Service.
• Block Manual Off Hook Signals
This Class of Service option enables/disables a busy extension’s ability to block off hook sig-
nals manually sent from a co-worker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial the service
code (assigned in 11-16-04) at busy or busy/ring to signal the extension. If enabled (blocked),
nothing happens when the caller dials the service code (assigned in 11-16-04) to off hook sig-
nal.
• Block Camp On
If an extension has Block Camp On enabled, callers to the extension cannot dial the service
code (assigned in 11-16-05) to Camp On after hearing busy or busy/ring. If the extension has
Block Camp On disabled, callers are not prevented from dialing the service code (assigned in
11-16-05) to Camp on after hearing busy or busy/ring. This is set in the called extension’s
Class of Service.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 271

 Off Hook Signaling
Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled

Programming
•11-12-03 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - Override (Off Hook Signaling)
Assign a service code (809 by default) to be used for Off Hook Signaling Override.
•11-16-04 : Single Digit Service Code Setup - Intercom Off Hook Signaling
Assign a one-digit service code to be used for Off Hook Signaling.
•15-02-12 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Off Hook Ringing
For each extension, set Off Hook Ringing type: 0 (muted), 1 (none) or 2 (one beep in the
handset, 3 (beep in speaker), 4 (beep in handset).
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Off Hook Signaling (code 33).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-05 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Off Hook Signaling Receive
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to receive
Off Hook Signaling.
•20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signaling
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to automat-
ically send Off Hook Signals while busy on a handset call.
•20-18-06 : Service Tone Timer - Call Waiting Tone Timer
Use this timer to set the interval between Off Hook Signaling alerts.

Related Features
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
An extension user cannot Camp On to a busy extension or leave a Callback if Off Hook Sig-
naling has already gone through. Off Hook Signaling allows an extension to block a caller’s
ability to dial the service code (assigned in 11-16-05) to Camp On.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Refer to the DID feature for interaction between Off Hook Signaling and other DID pro-
grammed options.
Handsfree and Monitor
You cannot send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a Handsfree (Speakerphone) call.
The called extension’s idle CALL key flashes fast, with no ringing.
Hotline/Reverse Voice Over
The setting of Program 20-13-06 affects the BLF display for Hotline and Reverse Voice Over.
Refer to these features for additional information.
Intercom
You cannot send Off Hook Signals to an extension that is already receiving a voice announcement.

272 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Off Hook Signaling
One-Touch Calling
An extension user can store the Off Hook Signaling Service Code (809) under a One-Touch
Key to provide quick Off Hook Signaling access.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify sending Off Hook Signals.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only send Off Hook Signals.

Operation
To send Off Hook Signals to an extension busy on a call:
Your extension may send Off Hook Signals automatically.
1. Press Off Hook Signaling key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 33).
You hear ringback.
To have your call voice-announce, dial 1.

To have Off Hook Signals ring your extension:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 893.
To answer the signal, you must first hang up your current call or place it on Hold.

To have Off Hook Signals voice-announce at your extension:

You can only receive voice-announce while you are busy on a handset call.
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 892.
If your extension has Handsfree, you can respond to an off-hook voice announcement
by using Handsfree Answerback. If your extension doesn’t have Handsfree, you must first
place your initial call on Hold before responding.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 273

 One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
One-Touch Calling gives a system phone user one button access to extensions, trunks and selected
system features. This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and features they use
most often. Instead of dialing a series of codes, the user need only press the One-Touch Key. An
extension user can have One-Touch Keys programmed for:
• Direct Station Selection - one button access to extensions
• Personal Speed Dial - one button access to stored numbers (up to 24 digits long)
• Abbreviated Dialing - one button access to stored Abbreviated Dialing numbers
• Trunk Calling - one button access to trunks or trunk groups
• Service Codes - one button access to specific Service Codes

An extension user can chain dial with One-Touch Keys. For example, a user can store the number for a
company’s Automated Attendant in key 1 and employee extension numbers in keys 2-5. The user
presses key 1 to call the company, then one of keys 2-5 to ring the employee to which they want to
speak.

An extension user or system administrator can optionally store a Flash command under a One-Touch
Key. This is helpful for One-Touch Keys used as Personal Speed Dial bins. The stored Flash may be
helpful to access features of the connected telco, PBX or Centrex.

One-Touch Calling is the first level of operation of One-Touch Keys. In other words, One-Touch
Calling occurs when the user just presses the key. There is a second level of One-Touch Key oper-
ation called One-Touch Serial Calling. The user accesses these functions by first pressing the Serial
Operation key. Refer to the One-Touch Serial Operation feature.

Conditions
One-Touch Keys do not provide a Busy Lamp Field (BLF).

274 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 One-Touch Calling
Default Setting
One-Touch Keys have no assigned functions.

Programming
•15-14-01 : Programmble One-Touch Keys
Set the functions of an extension’s One-Touch Keys. An extension user can also program
their One-Touch Keys.

Note: When programming a feature within a One-Touch Key, refer to the feature’s description for
additional programming options.

Related Features
One-Touch Serial Operation
An extension user can use One-Touch Keys to store a series of operations.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys can also give an extension user one-touch access to selected system features.
Transfer
When transferring a call, an extension user can press a One-Touch Key instead of dialing the
extension number.

Operation
When entering names in the procedures below, refer to this chart. Names can
be up to 12 digits long.
Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same
key are needed - ex: STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor
and to the right.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 275

 One-Touch Calling
Direct Station Selection

To program a One-Touch Key for Direct Station Selection (extension) calling:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial extension number you want assigned to that key.
4. Press HOLD.
5. Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6. Press HOLD.
7. Press SPK to hang up.

Personal Speed Dial

To program a One-Touch Key for Personal Speed Dial:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial general trunk access code (9).
OR
Dial Specific Trunk Service Code (805) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial Trunk Group Service Code (804) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
4. Dial number you want to store.
The total of the digits stored in steps 3 and 4 cannot exceed 24. To store a Flash com-
mand, press the FLASH key.
5. Press HOLD.
6. Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
7. Press HOLD.
8. Press SPK to hang up.
To enter a pause, press MIC.

To program a One-Touch Key for Personal Speed Dial (if your phone doesn’t have
One-Touch keys):
Use this procedure for Digital Single Line (DSL) sets and analogue single line (SLT)
sets.
1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 855.
3. Dial the Personal Abbreviated Dialing bin (0-9).
Bins 1-9 correspond to One-Touch keys 1-9; bin 0 corresponds to One-Touch key 10.
4. Dial the number you want to store and press HOLD twice.
To store a Flash (with a system phone phone only), press the FLASH key.
5. (DSL or SLT) Hang up.

To dial the stored number:

1. Call (or lift handset).

276 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 One-Touch Calling
2. Dial 761 + bin number (0-9).

Abbreviated Dialing

To program a One-Touch Key for Abbreviated Dialing:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial 813 to store a Common Abbreviated Dialing number.
OR
Dial 814 to store a Group Abbreviated Dialing number.
4. Dial Abbreviated Dialing number storage code (e.g., 001).
5. Press HOLD.
6. Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
7. Press HOLD.
8. Press SPK to hang up.

Central Office Calls, Placing (Trunk Calling)

To program a One-Touch Key for trunk calling:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial general trunk access code (9).
OR
Dial Specific Trunk Service Code (805) plus the trunk number (e.g., 005).
OR
Dial Trunk Group Service Code (804) plus the trunk group number (e.g., 1).
4. Press HOLD.
5. Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6. Press HOLD.
7. Press SPK to hang up.

Service Codes

To assign a Service Code to a One-Touch Key:

This lets you make your own set of one-touch feature keys.
1. Press idle CALL key and dial 855.
2. Press One-Touch Key you want to program.
3. Dial Service Code you want stored.
For example, if you want a One-Touch Key to automatically clear your Last Number
Redial, enter 876.
4. Press HOLD.
5. Enter the name associated with the key you are programming.
6. Press HOLD.
7. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 277

 One-Touch Calling
Using One-Touch Keys

To use a One-Touch Key:

1. Press One-Touch Key.

Chaining One-Touch Keys

To chain One-Touch Keys:

1. Press first One-Touch Key.
Let the stored function dial out.
2. Press another One-Touch Key.
The stored digits dial out.

Checking One-Touch Keys

To check the function of a One-Touch Key:

1. Press CHECK.
2. Press One-Touch Key.
The stored function displays.
Repeat this step to check additional keys. If you cannot see the entire number stored,
dial *.
3. Press CLEAR.

278 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Paging, External
Paging, External

Aspila EX
• Available - 8 External Paging zones

Description
With External Paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to
external Paging zones. When a user pages on of these external zones, the system broadcasts the
announcement over the speakers. Like Internal Paging, External Paging allows a user to locate
another employee or make an announcement without calling each extension individually.

The system allows up to nine External Paging zones. There is one zone (#1) on the NTCPU. All
other zones (#1-8) requires a port on a 2PGDAD module, with a maximum of two external paging
circuits per module. You must have four 2PGDAD modules to get the eight external zones. In addi-
tion, each external zone has an associated relay contact. When a user pages to a zone, the corre-
sponding contact activates (closes). This provides for Paging amplifier control. Refer to the system
hardware manual for additional details.

Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding
external zone. For example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at
the same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1-9 and All Call. Refer to Paging,
Internal (page 282) for more on setting up Combined Paging. In addition, you can program a
Function Key as a Combined Paging key. Using the External Page Function Key, when an All Call
External Page Function Key is programmed, it will include both the external zones and the assigned
internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no extensions in a page group, the
announcement will be made on the external zones only.

Remove Paging Information from Display Phones

A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from
showing incoming paging information. This allows the system to save processor time and speed up
system operation.

Conditions
(A.) For more than one external page zone (as provided on the NTCPU), External Paging requires
2PGDAD modules and customer-provided Paging equipment.
(B.) With Combined Paging, the system will allow a page over just the external page zone if the
internal zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group.

Default Setting
No External Paging defined.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 279

 Paging, External

Programming
•10-21-01 : NTCPU Hardware Setup - External Source Control Switch Selection
Specify the function of the relay switch for external tone source control (0=external MOH
source, 1=BGM source, 2=external speaker, 3=general purpose relay).
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for External Paging zones (19 + zone) and External All Call Page (20). If
required, define a function key for a system phone to use the general purpose relay (50).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-29 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Paging Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display
incoming internal paging information on their display.
•31-01-02 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Page Announcement Duration
Set the maximum allowable duration for a Paging announcement.
•31-04-01 : External Paging Zone Group
Assign each External Paging Zone (1-9) to an External Paging Group (1-8) used for accessing the
zone.
•31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer
Assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each External Paging zone. For each trunk port,
you make a separate entry for each External Paging zone (1-9).
•31-06-01 : External Speaker Control
Assign options for each External Paging Zone (1-9): Splash Tone Before Page (Item 1),
Splash Tone After Page (Item 2).
•31-06-04 : External Speaker Control - CODEC Transmit Gain Setup
31-06-05 : External Speaker Control - CODEC Receive Gain Setup
Select the CODEC gain types (1-32) for each External Page (1-9).
•31-08-01 : BGM on External Paging
Assign the Background Music option for each External Paging Zone (1-9). If enabled (1), the
system will play Background Music over the zone when it is idle.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
A trunk port may be used for a talkback external page with the use of proper external paging
equipment (ex: Valcom).
Door Box
If a 2PGDAD module has a Door Box connected, you cannot use that port for External Paging.
Night Service (Universal Night Answer)
To have outside calls ring External Paging Zones at night, refer to the Night Service feature and
Program 31-05.
Paging, Internal
Internal Paging broadcasts announcements to extensions in programmed Internal Paging Zones.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify External Paging operation.

280 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Paging, External

Operation
To Page into an external zone:
1. Press External Paging key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 19 + zone for External Paging zones or 20
for External All Call Paging).
2. Make Announcement.
OR
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 803 and the External Paging Zone code (1-9 or 0 for All Call).
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-9 (for Internal/External Zones 1-9) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page.
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the
page may be announced as an External Page only.
3. Make Announcement.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 281

 Paging, Internal
Paging, Internal

Aspila EX
• Available - 64 Internal Paging Groups (Zones).

Description
Internal Paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other system phone users. When a
user makes a Zone Paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the
zone dialed. With All Call Paging, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions programmed
to receive All Call Paging. An extension can be a member of only one Internal Paging Zone. Like
External Paging, Internal Paging allows a user to locate another employee or make an announce-
ment without calling each extension individually.

Combined Paging
Use Combined Paging when you want to simultaneously Page into an internal and corresponding
external zone. For example, you can Page your company’s warehouse and outside loading dock at
the same time. Combined Paging is available for Paging zones 1-9 and All Call. Optionally, you
can change the Combined Paging assignments. For example, you can associate External Paging
Zone 1 with Internal Paging Zone 4. You can be able to program a Function Key as a Combined
Paging key. When an All Call External Page Function Key is programmed, it will include both the
external zones and the assigned internal zone(s). If the internal page zone is busy or there are no
extensions in a page group, the announcement will be made on the external zones only.

Remove Paging Information from Display Phones

A Class of Service option is available in system programming to prevent display telephones from
showing incoming internal paging information. This allows the system to save processor time and
speed up system operation.

Conditions
(A.) Internal Paging does not require a 2PGDAD module.
(B.) You can assign any number of extensions to an Internal or All Call Paging Zone.
(C.) A system must have at least one extension port idle in order to make an Internal Page. If no
extension port is idle, the extension performing the Page will hear a busy signal.
(D.) With Combined Paging, the system allows a page over just the external page zone if the inter-
nal zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Internal Paging Zones (code 21 + page zone) and Internal All Call
Paging (code 22) (Internal Page Zones 0, 1-9, 00, 01-64.)
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-29 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Paging Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display
incoming internal paging information on their display.

282 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Paging, Internal
•31-01-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - All Call Paging Zone Name
Assign a name to the All Call Internal Paging Zone. The name shows on the display of the
telephone making the announcement.
•31-01-02 : System Options for Internal/External Paging - Page Announcement Duration
Set the maximum allowable duration (0-64800 seconds) for a Paging announcement.
•31-02-01 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal Paging Group Number
Assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An extension must be assigned to a 2-digit zone
in order to access any of the 2-digit zones (Internal Page Zones 0, 1-9, 00, 01-64).
•31-02-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal All Call Paging Receiving
Allow (1) or prevent (0) All Call Internal Paging for each extension. If allowed, extension
can make and receive All Call Internal Paging announcements. If prevented, extension can
only make All Call Internal Paging announcements.
•31-03-01 : Internal Paging Group Settings - Internal Paging Group Name
Program names for the Internal Paging Zones.
•31-03-02 : Internal Paging Group Settings - Internal Paging Tone
For each Internal Paging Zone, have normal (0), muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert
tones. If enabled (0 or 1), extensions hear two beeps before Paging announcements. If dis-
abled, the extensions hear the announcement without the beeps. Muted tones can occur only if
the extension user sets the telephone volume control switch to medium or high (Internal Page
Zones 0, 1-9, 00, 01-64).
•31-07-01 : Combined Paging Assignments
For each External Paging Zone (1-9 and 0 for All Call), assign a corresponding Internal Zone
for Combined Paging.

Related Features
Meet Me Paging / Meet Me Paging Transfer
Preventing access to internal page also prevents these features.
Paging, External
An extension user can broadcast an announcement over an External Paging Zone.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Internal Paging operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 283

 Paging, Internal

Operation
To make an Internal Page announcement:
System Phone
1. Press the zone’s Internal Paging key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 21 + 1-9 or 01-64 for zones, 22
for All Call).
OR
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-64).
Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.
OR
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-9 (for Internal/External Zones 1-9) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
Display indicates the Combined Paging as an External Page.
If the Internal Page Zone is busy or if there are no extensions in a page group, the
page will be announced as an External Page only.
3. Make announcement.
4. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset.
2. Dial 801 and the Paging Zone number (0-9 or 00-64).
Dialing 0 or 00 calls All Call Internal Paging.
Dial 751 and the Combined Paging Zone code 1-8 (for Internal/External Zones 1-9) or 0 (for
Internal/External All Call).
3. Make announcement.
4. Hang up.

284 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Paging, Privacy Release
Paging, Privacy Release

Please refer to Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release (page 140) for information on this
feature.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 285

 Park
Park

Aspila EX
• Available - 64 System Park orbits.

Description
Park places a call in a waiting state (called a Park Orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up.
There are two types of Park: System and Personal. Use System Park when you want to have the call
wait in a system orbit. Personal Park allows a user to Park a call at their extension so a co-worker can
pick it up. After parking a call in orbit, a user can Page the person receiving the call and hang up. The
paged party dials a code or presses a programmed Park key to pick up the call. With Park, it is not
necessary to locate a person to handle their calls. A call parked for too long will recall the extension
that initially parked it., however the call remains in the park orbit until it’s answered. There are 64
Park Orbits (1-64) available for use.

Enhanced Dial Buffering

The system can optionally provide additional dial buffering. In certain high traffic sites, (e.g., with
a high volume of dialed paging and parking), standard dial buffering can occasionally lose digits
that a user dials. By enabling enhanced buffering, an additional level of buffering occurs which
helps ensure that the system processes all digits a user dials.

Splitting Between Parked Calls

A system phone user can retrieve two calls from Park Orbit (for which they don’t have line appear-
ances) and easily split (alternate) between them. The split operation brings the calls to the user’s
telephone and frees up the Park Orbits.

Extended Park
An extension’s Class of Service determines whether it will use the normal Park Orbit Recall time or
the Extended Park Orbit Recall time. The timers are set up in system programming. When an exten-
sion with Extended Park Recall Class of Service option parks a call, it recalls after the Extended
Park Orbit Recall time. When an extension with the Normal Park Orbit Recall Class of Service
option parks a call, it recalls after the normal Park Orbit Recall time, however the call remains in the
park orbit until it’s answered.

Conditions
(A.) An extension can park a call in any Park Orbit. However, an extension can only pick up a
call Parked by a member of its own Park group (see Program 24-03).
(B.) When a DSL user parks a call, they must wait the Interdigit Time (normally 10 seconds)
before trying to retrieve it.
(C.) If an extension is not allowed access to trunks in the Access Maps (Programs 14-07 and 15-
06), calls in Park and on Hold can be blocked.

Default Setting
Enabled.

286 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Park

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a keys as a Park Orbit key (code *04 plus Park orbit number [01-64]).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
•20-11-19 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Normal/Extended Park
Determine whether an extension’s Class of Service should allow normal or extended Park
(0=normal, 1=extended).
•24-01-02 : System Options for Hold - Hold Recall Callback Time
A call left parked too long recalls the extension that initially parked it for this interval.
•24-01-06 : System Options for Hold - Park Hold Time
Set the Park Hold Time (0-64800 seconds). A call left parked longer than this interval will
recall the extension that initially parked it.
•24-01-07 : System Options for Hold - Extended Park Hold Time
Set the Extended Park Hold Time (0-64800 seconds). A call left parked longer than this inter-
val will recall the extension that initially parked it.
•24-03-01 : Park Group
Assign an extension to a Park Group (01-64). An extension can only pick up a call Parked by
a member of its own Park Group.

Related Features
Hold
A user can place a call in a temporary waiting state without putting it in orbit.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Park operation.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 287

 Park

Operation
To Park a call in a system orbit:
You can Park Intercom or trunk calls.
1. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).
The Park key LED lights.
If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
2. Use Paging to announce call.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
OR
1. At system phone or DSL, press HOLD.
OR
At a single line telephone, hookflash.
OR
At a DSL single line telephone, press FTR + PARK and then enter the orbit number (skip step
2 with this option).
2. Dial 831 and the Park orbit (1-64).
If you hear busy tone, the orbit is busy. Try another orbit.
3. Use Paging to announce call.
4. Press SPK to hang up.
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.
Note: The parked call recalls after the Park Hold Time (Program 24-01-06). The call
rings the extension to which it recalled for the Hold Recall Callback Time (Program 24-
01-02). The call then goes on Hold for the Park Hold Time - then recalls again for the
Hold Recall Callback Time. The call continues to cycle between Hold and recall until the
extension user answers the call or the outside party hangs up.

To pick up a parked call:

1. Lift handset.
2. Press Park key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit).
OR
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
OR
At a DSL single line telephone, press FTR + PARK and then enter the orbit number (skip step
2.
2. Dial 861 and the Park orbit (1-64).

288 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Park

Operation (Cont’d)
To park a call at your extension:
1. Do not hang up.
2. Press HOLD and dial 773.
At a SLT, hookflash instead of pressing HOLD.
3. Page your co-worker to pick up the call.
4. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
If not picked up, the call will recall to you.

To pick up a call parked at an extension (yours or a co-worker’s):

1. If parked at your extension:
Press idle CALL key and dial 773.
At an SLT/DSL, skip pressing CALL.
OR
If parked at a co-worker’s extension
Press idle CALL key dial 815 plus the co-worker’s extension number.
At an SLT/DSL, skip pressing CALL.

To split between two parked calls (System Phone Only):

You must have Park Orbit keys for the parked in calls. In addition, your system phone
cannot have line keys defined for the parked calls.
1. Press CALL1.
2. Press Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *04 + orbit) to retrieve first parked call.
Call1 lights steadily. This moves the first parked call to your phone.
3. Press HOLD and press SPK.
CALL1 flashes.
4. Press another Park Orbit key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: *04 + orbit) to retrieve the second
parked call.
CALL2 lights steadily. This moves the second parked call to your phone.
5. To switch between the two parked calls, press HOLD then the flashing CALL key.
You can only split between two active calls. To retrieve and split with a new call, you
must first hang up one of the initial calls.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 289

 PBX Compatibility
PBX Compatibility

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
You can connect your phone system trunks to Centrex/PBX lines, rather than to telco trunk circuits.
This makes the trunk inputs into the system Single Line type compatible Centrex/PBX extensions,
rather than telco circuits. PBX Compatibility lets the system be a node (i.e., satellite) in a larger
private telephone network. To place outside calls when the system is behind a PBX, phone system
users must first dial the PBX’s trunk access code (usually 9).

The system provides the following PBX Compatibility options:

• PBX Trunk Access Code Screening
The system can monitor the numbers users dial and screen for PBX trunk access codes. The
system can screen for up to 4 groups of trunk access codes. The codes can be one or two dig-
its long, consisting of the digits 0-9, # and *. (You use Line Key 1 as a wild card entry.)

• PBX Trunk Toll Restriction

The system can provide the Toll Restriction for the PBX trunk, or restriction can be handled
solely by the connected PBX. If the phone system provides the restriction, it restricts the dig-
its dialed after the PBX access code.

• PBX Call Restriction

When the phone system does the Toll Restriction, it can further restrict users from dialing PBX
extensions. In this case, the only valid numbers are those dialed after the PBX trunk access code.
The only PBX facility phone system users can access are the PBX’s outside trunks.

• Automatic Pause
The system automatically pauses when it sees a PBX trunk access code during manual dial-
ing, Abbreviated Dialing, Last Number Redial, Repeat Redial and Save Number Dialed. This
gives the connected PBX time to set up its trunk circuits.

Conditions
When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code. Otherwise, after the
*, the trunk would stop sending digits to the central office.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•14-01-08 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Toll Restriction
For each PBX trunk port, enable (0) or disable (1) Toll Restriction.
•14-02-01 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Signaling Type (DP/DTMF),
14-02-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Ring Detect Type and
14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
Set these options for compatibility with the connected PBX.
•14-04-01 : Behind PBX Setup - Behind PBX
For each PBX trunk port, enter 1. You make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

290 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 PBX Compatibility
•21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class
Assign a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each extension.
•21-05-12 : Toll Restriction Class - PBX Call Restriction
For each Toll Restriction Class, enter 1 to restrict calls on the PBX trunk to outside calls only.
Enter 0 to allow users to dial PBX extensions.
•21-06-08 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - PBX Access Code
Enter the system PBX access codes. The system can have up to 4 groups of codes. A code
can be one or two digits long. Valid entries are 0-9, # and *. Use Line Key 1 as a “don’t care”
digit. If using Account Codes, do not use the * within the PBX Access Code.
•81-01-14 : COIU Initial Data Setup - Hookflash 1
If the CONF key is set for transfer (in Program15-02-05), use this program to set the duration
of the flash that occurs when a user presses the CONF key.

Related Features
Account Codes
When using Account Codes, do not use an asterisk within a PBX access code. Otherwise,
after the *, the trunk would stop sending digits to the central office.
Abbreviated Dialing
• The system automatically pauses after it finds a PBX access code in an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
• If Abbreviated Dialing routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert a PBX
access code. It outdials the digits just as they are stored.
Central Office Calls, Answering/ Ring Groups
Users answer incoming calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks. All of the relevant access
and Ring Group programming applies. Refer to these features for more details.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Except for dialing the PBX access code, users place calls on PBX trunks just like other trunks.
All of the relevant access programming applies. Refer to the Central Office Calls Placing fea-
ture for more details.
Direct Inward Lines
You can have DILs route from the connected PBX. Users can access these trunks for outgo-
ing PBX calls. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
Direct Inward System Access
You can program incoming DISA trunks to be outgoing PBX trunks. All PBX Compatibility
restrictions and programming apply.
Flash
Flash may allow access to certain PBX features - like Transfer. Make sure you program Flash
for compatibility with the connected PBX
Pulse to Tone Conversion
The system does not provide automatic Pulse to Tone Conversion after outdialing the PBX
trunk access code.
Toll Restriction
PBX trunks can follow normal system Toll Restriction.
Trunk Groups and Trunk Group Routing
• Users can get outbound access to PBX trunks through Trunk Groups and/or Trunk Group
Routing. All PBX Compatibility restrictions and programming apply.
• If the system routes a call to a PBX trunk, it does not automatically insert the PBX access code.
It outdials the call just as the user dialed it.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 291

 PBX Compatibility

Operation
To place a call over a PBX trunk:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key and dial 804.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 804.
2. Dial PBX trunk group number (1-9, 01-32 or 001-100).
3. Dial PBX access code and number
OR
1. (System Phone only) Press PBX trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *02 + group).
2. Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key and dial 9.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset and dial 9.
2. Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, Lift handset.
2. Dial 805.
3. Dial PBX trunk number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
4. Dial PBX access code and number.
OR
1. Press PBX trunk key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 1 to 200).
2. Dial PBX access code and number.

Note: In all cases above, Toll Restriction may prevent your call.

292 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Prime Line Selection
Prime Line Selection

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Prime Line Selection allows an extension user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by just
lifting the handset. The user does not have to first press keys or dial codes. This simplifies handling
calls on a frequently used trunk.

Prime Line Selection has the following two modes of operation:

• Outgoing Prime Line Preference

Lifting the handset seizes the Prime Line. Outgoing Prime Line Preference would help a
telemarketer who always needs a free line to call prospective clients. The telemarketer just
lifts the handset and the Prime Line is always available. (Outgoing Prime Line Preference
may be affected by Incoming Prime Line Preference -- see Programming below.)

• Incoming Prime Line Preference

When the Prime Line rings the extension, lifting the handset answers the call. Incoming
Prime Line Preference could benefit the Service Department dispatcher who must quickly
answer customer’s service calls and then dispatch repair technicians. The dispatcher would
have the assurance than whenever a customer calls in, the dispatcher just lifts the handset get
their call. (Incoming Prime Line Preference can optionally seize an idle line appearance -- see
Programming below.)

Conditions
The 900i cordless telephone does not support Prime Line Preference.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 293

 Prime Line Selection

Programming
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Assign Prime Line to a separate trunk group for outgoing Prime Line selection. (Also see 14-06
and 21-02.)
•14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
Set up outbound route for trunk group that contains the Prime Line. (Also see 14-05 and 21-02.)
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
For outgoing Prime Line selection, assign each Prime Line trunk to a different Access Map and
deny outbound access to all trunks except the Prime Line trunk (1-200).
•15-01-02 : Basic Extension Data Setup - Outgoing Trunk Line Preference
Enter 1 for this option so extension user seizes Prime Line when they lift the handset.
•15-02-10 : System Telephone Basic Data Setup - Ringing Line Preference for Trunk Calls
Enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to seize idle line
appearance.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Set assignment so extension(s) can have access to Prime Line. Deny outbound access to
extensions that should not have Prime Line.
•21-02-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Assign extension(s) to a Prime Line route (1-100) for outgoing Prime Line access.
•22-01-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls - Incoming Call Priority
Set incoming Prime Line preference. Enter 1 to answer ringing Prime Line; enter 0 to answer
ringing Intercom call.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extension(s) to a ring group (1-100) that consists of a Prime Line.
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign a Prime Line to a ring group (1-100).

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line.
Direct Inward Lines/Direct Inward System Access
DILs and DISA calls also ring extensions directly, even if not allowed in ring group programming.
Line Preference
Prime Line Selection directly interacts with Line Preference.
Voice Mail
If the DSPBDVoice Mail is installed, calls can be directed to the Voice Mail Auto Attendant
ring group (101).

294 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Prime Line Selection

Operation
To place a call on your Prime Line:
1. Lift handset.
You hear dial tone on your Prime Line.

To answer a call on your Prime Line:

1. Lift handset.
Depending on your Line Preference programming, you’ll either answer the Prime
Line or get dial tone on the idle line appearance.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 295

 Private Line
Private Line

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
A Private Line is a trunk reserved for a system phone for placing and answering calls. A user with
a Private Line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their
own trunk for placing calls that is not available to others in the system.
• Incoming only
The system phone has a Private Line only for incoming calls. The user cannot place calls on
the Private Line.

• Outgoing only
The system phone has a Private Line only for outgoing calls. The Private Line does not ring
for incoming calls.

• Both ways
The system phone has a Private Line for both incoming and outgoing calls.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Assign Private Line to the Private Line Access Map (1-200) (see Program 15-06 below). Use
option 5 for Incoming, option 7 for Both Ways and option 4 for Outgoing. In all other Access
Maps, give option 3 to the Private Line.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign extension to have Private Line to an unused “Private Line” Access Map.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Make sure extension has a line key (e.g., 012) for the Private Line.
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Set the Trunk Service Type to 4 if routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail or 0 if not
routing to voice mail.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extension to Private Line’s ring group. Set the ringing in Program 22-06 - use option
1 for Incoming or Both Ways Private Lines. Use option 0 for Outgoing Private Lines. Do not
assign any other extensions to the Private Line ring group.
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign Private Line to an unused “Private Line” ring group (1-100) (i.e., a ring group just for
the Private Line).
•22-07-01 : DIL Assignment
If routing unanswered Private Lines to voice mail, assign DILs to the extensions.

296 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Private Line

Related Features
Call Forwarding
Private Lines do not follow Call Forwarding.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls also affect a Prime Line.
Line Preference
An extension user can have Line Preference options applied to their Private Line.
Prime Line Selection
A Private Line can also be a Prime Line.
Programmable Function Keys
You should always program a line key for each Private Line.
Single Line Telephones
Private Lines are not available on single line telephones.
Toll Restriction
Private Lines follow normal Toll Restriction.
Transfer
An extension user can Transfer their Private Line. Since other users have hold access (see
Programming), the destination can answer the transferred Private Line and place it on Hold.
Voice Mail
If the DSPDBVoice Mail is installed, calls can be directed to the Voice Mail Auto Attendant
ring group (101).

Operation
To place a call on your Private Line:
1. Press Private Line key.
2. Dial number.

To answer a call on your Private Line:

1. Press Private Line key or lift the handset.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 297

 Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Each system phone and digital single line phone has Programmable Function Keys. Programmable
Function Keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can custom-
ize the function of a system phone’s programmable keys from your administration telephone, or the
extension user can do it themselves. Depending on your telephone, you can have either 2, 12 or 24
Programmable Function Keys.

Refer to Tables 4 and 5 for the Programmable Function Key functions.

Conditions
(A.) When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be programmed with a
function using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key
programmed by dialing 852 + *04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be pro-
grammed as a Voice Over key by dialing 851 + 48.
(B.) Using Program 92-01 to copy a system phone’s Programmable Function Keys will copy all
the keys whether they exist on the phone to which the programming is being copied. This may
cause confusion when trying to define a key which is already defined but which doesn’t exist
on the phone (will display as “DUPLICATE DATA”). It is recommend to either clear these
non-existent keys or to only copy from an extension which has the same or fewer number of
keys than the extension to which the programming is being copied.
(C.) When using Program 15-07-01 to program 24-Button DLS Console keys, use the extension
number to which the DLS is installed and, regardless of the type of system phone connected,
start programming the DLS keys at key number 25. Service codes 851 and 852 can also be
used to program these keys.

Default Setting
The first 12 keys on a telephone are line keys (e.g., key 1 = line 001). The remaining keys are
unassigned.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign the functions of a system phone’s Programmable Function Keys. Refer to Tables 4 and
5 at the beginning of this manual.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.
•20-07-10 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Programmable Function Key
Programming (Appearance Level)
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to program
their own function keys.

Note: When programming a feature as a Programmable Function Key, refer to the feature’s
description for additional programming options.

298 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Programmable Function Keys

Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing/One-Touch Calling
Abbreviated Dialing and One-Touch Calling also offer quick access to calls and features.
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
Programming a 110-button console requires separate programming. Refer to this feature for
more details.

Operation
To change the function of a General Function programmable key:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 851.
3. Press the key you want to program.
4. Enter the 2-digit key function, any additional information needed for the key and press HOLD.
Available functions are 00-99 (refer to chart) and line keys 001-200.
To undefine a key, enter 00.

To change the function of an Appearance Function programmable key:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 852.
3. Press the key you want to program.
4. Enter the 3-digit key function and any additional information needed for the key.
Available functions are *00-*99 (refer to chart) and line keys 001-200.
To undefine a key, enter 000.
When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be programmed
with a function using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a
Park Key programmed by dialing 852 + *04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it
can be programmed as a Voice Over key by dialing 851 + 48.

To check the function of a programmable key:

1. Press CHECK.
2. Press the programmable key.
The programmed function displays.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 299

 Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pulse to Tone Conversion

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
An extension can use Pulse to Tone Conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to Tone Conversion lets a user
change their extension’s dialing mode while placing a call. For systems in a Dial Pulse area, this
permits users to access dial-up services from their Dial Pulse line. The user can, for example:
• Place a call to a tele-banking system over a DP trunk.
• Depending on programming:
Manually implement Pulse to Tone Conversion
OR
Wait 10 seconds.
• Dial the tele-banking security code and desired number. The system dials the digits after the
conversion as DTMF.

Conditions
Pulse to Tone Conversion is only valid for Dial Pulse trunks (Program14-02-01, options 0 or 1).

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•14-02-07 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - DP to DTMF Conversion Options
For each trunk, set the type of DP to DTMF Conversion required: automatic (0), automatic
and manual (1), or manual (2).

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed. Check or pro-
gram these options as needed.

Operation
To convert your phone’s dialing to tone after placing your call on a pulse line:
1. Place call over pulse line.
2. Dial # to switch the DP trunk to DTMF dialing.

300 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Repeat Redial
Repeat Redial

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
If a system phone user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have Repeat Redial
try it again later on. The user doesn’t continually have to try the number again -- hoping it will go
through. Repeat Redial automatically retries it until the called party answers (the number of retries
is based on system programming).

Conditions
Lifting the handset will cancel Repeat Redial.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Repeat Redial (code 29).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-07 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Repeat Redial
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use
Repeat Redial.
•21-08-01 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Redial Count
Set how many times Repeat Redial will automatically repeat if the call does not go through.
•21-08-02 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Redial Interval Time
Set the interval between Repeat Redial attempts (0-64800 seconds).
•21-08-03 : Repeat Dial Setup - Repeat Dial Calling Timer
Set how long the system waits (0-64800 seconds) for the called party to answer after a Repeat
Redial. If the called party doesn’t answer within this interval, the system hangs up and tries
again (after the Repeat Redial Interval Time). For unanswered calls, the total time between
retries in the sum of Items 21-08-02 and 21-08-03.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 301

 Repeat Redial

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the Repeat Redial call.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed. Check or pro-
gram these options as needed.
Last Number Redial/Save Number Dialed
An extension user can quickly redial their last call.
Networking
Repeat Redial may only work across a network when the call is made by ARS.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Repeat Redial.

Operation
To use Repeat Redial (if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy):
1. Place trunk call.
Listen for busy tone or ring-no-answer.
2. Press DIAL + LND.
OR
Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 29).
Your Repeat Redial key flashes while you wait for the system to redial.
3. Press SPK to hang up.
The system periodically redials the call.
4. Lift handset when called party answers.

To cancel Repeat Redial:

1. Press DIAL.
2. Press LND.
OR
1. Press Repeat Redial Key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 29).

See also Last Number Redial.

302 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Reverse Voice Over
Reverse Voice Over

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
While on a handset call, Reverse Voice Over lets a busy system phone user make a private Intercom call
to an idle co-worker. The idle co-worker can be at a system phone or single line set. The busy user just
presses and holds down a programmed Reverse Voice Over key to make a private call to a specified co-
worker. The initial caller cannot hear the Reverse Voice Over conversation. The private Intercom call
continues until the Reverse Voice Over caller releases the key again. The initial call can be an outside
call or an Intercom call.

Reverse Voice Over could help a sales-person, for example, when placing a call to an important client.
The sales-person can talk with the client and give special instructions to a secretary - without interrupt-
ing the initial call.

When the system phone is idle, the Reverse Voice Over key functions the same as a Hotline key. A sys-
tem phone’s Reverse Voice Over key also shows at a glance the status of the associated extension:

When the key is. . . The associated extension is. . .

Off Idle
Slow Flash Busy or call ringing
Fast Flash In Do Not Disturb

Note: When the system phone is idle, the Reverse Voice Over provides one button calling to the associ-
ated extension (like a Hotline key). An extension user cannot, however, use the Reverse Voice Over key
to Transfer calls.

Conditions
(A.) An extension can have Reverse Voice Over keys for more than one extension (limited only by
the number of available function keys).

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Reverse Voice Over (code 47 + dest. ext.).
•20-02-03 : System Options for System Telephones - BLF Control and
20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signal-
ing
Programs 20-02-03 and 20-13-06 set the conditions under which a Hotline, Reverse Voice
Over or DSS Console key indicates that an extension is busy. With condition 1 in the follow-
ing chart, the BLF LED is on only when both extension line appearances are busy. In condi-
tions 2-4, the BLF LED is on when one line appearance is busy.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 303

 Reverse Voice Over

Programming (Cont’d)

BLF1 Busy
Program 20-02-03 Program 20-13-06 Status Status
1 1 0 Off No
2 1 1 On Yes
3 0 0 On Yes
4 0 1 On Yes
1
BLF is on for extension receiving a voice announced Intercom call.

•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions

Assign a COS to each extension (1-15).

Related Features
Do Not Disturb
A Reverse Voice Over placed to an extension always rings, regardless of how Handsfree
Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing is set at the destination.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
Reverse Voice Over follows Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing programming.
Hotline
Like Reverse Voice Over, Hotline also provides one-button calling to coworkers.
Intercom
Other programmed options can affect how the Intercom feature works. Program these options
as needed.
One-Touch Calling
One-Touch Calling provides one button access to co-workers, but without the Busy Lamp
Field provided by Reverse Voice Over.
Programmable Function Keys
Reverse Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Reverse Voice Over is not available at single line telephones.
Voice Over
If an extension user places a Reverse Voice Over to a busy destination extension, the system
sets up a Voice Over. The Voice Over continues as long as the initiating extension holds down
the Reverse Voice Over key.

304 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Reverse Voice Over

Operation
WHEN YOU’RE ON A CALL . . .

To place a Reverse Voice Over call:

1. Press and hold your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 47 + dest. ext.).
Your Reverse Voice Over key lights steadily (green) and you can talk with the pro-
grammed Reverse Voice Over destination.

To return to your initial caller:

1. Release the Reverse Voice Over key.
If the co-worker you call hangs up, you return to the initial call automatically.

WHEN YOUR PHONE IS IDLE . . .

To place a call to your Reverse Voice Over destination:

1. Press your Reverse Voice Over key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 47 + dest. ext.).
You can optionally lift handset after this step for privacy.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 305

 Ring Groups
Ring Groups

Aspila EX
• Available - 100 Ring Groups.

Description
Ring Groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extension’s only if Ring
Group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension:
• Assign the trunk and the extension to the same Ring Group
• In the extension’s Ring Group programming, assign ringing for the trunk.

Any number of extensions and trunks can be in a specific group. The system allows Ring Groups=1-
100.
If an extension has a line key for the trunk, Ring Group calls ring the line key. If the extension
doesn’t have a line key, the trunk rings the line appearance key. If an extension has a key for a
trunk that is not in its ring group, the trunk follows Access Map programming.

Conditions
DIL trunks disregard ring group programming until DIL overflow.

Default Setting
All trunks are in Ring Group 1, the first 16 extensions ring for trunk calls and all other extensions
only flash.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys as line keys (codes 1-200).
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to ring groups (1-100).
•22-05-01 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
Assign trunks to ring groups (1-100).
•22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For DIL Delayed Ringing, assign the DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings
this group after the DIL No Answer Time (Program 22-01-04) expires. DIL Delayed Ringing
can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring Group (1-100) or DSPDB Voice Mail (101) or
In-Skin Voice Mail (102).
•22-12-01 : DID Intercept Ring Group
For each DID Translation Table, assign the destination for DID Intercept. The destination can
be a Ring Group (1-100), DSPDB voice mail (101), In-Skin Voice Mail (102). For each table,
make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.
•25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Set the transfer destination for each DISA and Automated Attendant (OPA) trunk. The destination
can be a Ring Group or Voice Mail. Make a separate entry for each Night Service mode. The sys-
tem allows Ring Groups=1-100, DSPDB Voice Mail=101 or In-Skin Voice Mail=102.

Note: For incoming calls, Ring Group programming (22-04/22-05) overrides Access Map
programming (14-07/15-06).

306 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Ring Groups
Use the charts below to program the following example:
For this extension . . .1
301 Trunk 1 rings Trunk 2 flashes Trunk 3 flashes
302 Trunk 1 flashes Trunk 2 rings Trunk 3 flashes
303 Trunk 1 flashes Trunk 2 flashes Trunk 3 rings

1
Trunks ring the same in the day as at night.
Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Ring Group1> 1 2 3
Trunk 1 X - -
Trunk 2 - X -
Trunk 3 - - X
X = Trunk assigned to indicated Ring Group
1
Make the same 22-05 entry for all Night Service modes.

Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Ring Group > 1 2 3

Ext. 301 1 01 01
Ext. 302 01 1 01
Ext. 303 01 01 1
1 = Extension rings
0 = Extension doesn’t ring
1
To allow extension user to answer flashing line, be sure to give
extension incoming access to the trunk in Programs 14-07 and 15-06.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 307

 Ring Groups

Related Features
Automatic Call Distribution
Ring Groups can be used to route trunks to ACD groups.
Automatic Route Selection
When ACD is enabled, Ring Groups are programmed to ring into ACD Groups for each of the
eight Work Periods.
Direct Inward Dial (DID) / Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DID, DISA overflow options can be to a Ring Group.
Direct Inward Line (DIL)
DILs ring extensions without being in a Ring Group.
Night Service
Ring Group programming can be different for each Night Service mode.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify answering incoming calls.
Transfer
Transferring calls to a Ring Group using a service code forwards the call to the group defined
in Program 22-05.

Operation
Refer to Central Office Calls, Answering.

308 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External
Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Aspila EX
• Available - 512 extensions/virtual extensions and 512 Hotline assignments.

Description
With a Ringdown Extension, a user can call another extension, outside number, or Abbreviated Dialing
number by just lifting the handset. The call automatically goes through - there is no need for the user to
dial digits or press additional keys. Ringdown Extensions are frequently used for lobby phones, where
the caller just lifts the handset to get the information desk or off-site Reservation Desk.

After the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown occurs after a programmable interval.
Depending on the setting of this interval, the extension user may be able to place other calls before the
ringdown goes through.

The system allows each extension in the system to have a Ringdown Extension. All extensions can share
the same dialing number, if desired.

Conditions
(A.) Ringdown extension has no effect on an extension’s current (active) call.
(B.) The Ringdown Extension user must lift the handset for ringdown to work.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-08-09 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Hotline/Extension Ringdown
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) ringdown. If disabled in Class of
Service, the settings in Program 21-11 below have no effect.
•21-01-09 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Ringdown Extension Timer
After the user lifts the handset, the extension automatically calls the ringdown destination
after this interval (0-64800 seconds). A setting of ‘0’ will immediately ring the programmed
extension. Any other setting will delay the ringdown the number of seconds programmed.
•21-11-01 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignments
Program the ringdown (Hotline) source and destination (target) number, up to 24 digits (512
Hotline assignments). Remember to include the trunk access code (usually 9) in front of he
number when dialing outside numbers. When programming Common Abbreviated Dialing
numbers as the destination, the entry should be “853+bin number”.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 309

 Ringdown Extension, Internal/External

Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
Ringdown Extension can use Abbreviated Dialing numbers (and follow their trunk routing) as
the destination number.
Call Forwarding
Ringdown Extension follows Call Forwarding. For example, the ringdown destination can
forward their calls. When the Ringdown Extension user lifts the handset, ringdown automati-
cally calls the extension to which calls are forwarded.
Call Waiting/Camp On, Callback and Off Hook Signaling
If the Ringdown Extension user hears busy tone when they lift the handset, they can Camp On
to the destination, leave a Callback or activate Off Hook Signaling.
Do Not Disturb
The ringdown destination user can activate Do Not Disturb. When the Ringdown Extension
user lifts the handset, they hear DND. If enabled, the Ringdown Extension user can override
the destination’s DND.
Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ringing
If the destination extension has Handsfree Answerback enabled, the call will voice-announce.
If the destination extension has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, the call will ring.
Multiple Directory Numbers/Call Coverage Keys
A Multiple Directory Number key can be a ringdown destination. This would allow a ‘front
door’ key to be programmed on every extension.

Operation
To place a call if your extension has ringdown programmed:
1. Lift handset.
If you want to place a trunk call, press a line key before lifting the handset.
Depending on the setting of your ringdown timer, you may be able to dial an Intercom
call before your ringdown goes through.
If the destination has Handsfree Answerback enabled, your call will voice announce.
If the destination has Forced Intercom Ringing enabled, your call will ring.

To bypass ringdown (if enabled for your system phone):

1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press CALL.
3. Place Intercom or trunk call.

To answer a call if you are another extension’s ringdown destination:

1. Speak toward phone to answer incoming voice-announcement.
OR
Lift handset to answer ringing Intercom call.

310 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Room Monitor
Room Monitor

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Room Monitor lets an extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the
receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it’s left unattended. To use Room Mon-
itor, the initiating extension and the receiving extension must activate it.

When using keysets for monitoring, an extension user can only Monitor one extension at a time.
However, many extensions can Monitor the same extension at the same time.

With single line phones, multiple SLTs can be programmed to be monitored by the same SLT.
However, only one SLT can monitor another SLT at a time.

Room Monitor for Single Lines

This option enables you to monitor the room status through your single line telephone. This can be
used with the Hotel/Motel feature as well. Between keysets, the monitored room status is picked up
by the phone’s microphone and the activity is heard through the speaker of the monitoring system
phone. Between single line phones, a user goes off hook on the monitored phone and, from another
single line phone, dials a service code and the extension number. The activity of the area where the
monitored phone is placed can then be heard at the monitoring phone. This service is available until
the handset of the monitored telephone is placed on hook.

CAUTION

The use of monitoring, recording, or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor, retrieve, or

record telephone conversation or other sound activities, may be illegal in certain circum-
stances. Legal advice should be sought prior to implementing any practice that monitors or
records any telephone conversation. Some form of notification to all parties to a telephone
conversation may be required, such as using a beep tone or other notification methods or
requiring the consent of all parties to the telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or
recording the telephone conversation.

Conditions
(A.) Room Monitor is for listening only. It does not allow for conversation between the monitoring
and monitored extensions.
(B.) An extension user cannot monitor an Attendant.
(C.) A system phone user cannot monitor a single line phone and a single line phone cannot moni-
tor a system phone.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 311

 Room Monitor

Programming
•11-14-01 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) - Hotel Room Monitor
Customize the service code (770 by default) to be used for Room Monitor.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Room Monitor key (code 39) for both the extension being moni-
tored and the extension initiating Room Monitor.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-11 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Room Monitor, Initiating
Extension
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to initiate
Room Monitor.
•20-13-12 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Room Monitor, Extension
Being Monitored
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to be monitored.
•42-03-12 : Class of Service Options (Hotel) - SLT Room Monitor
Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line telephone’s ability to use Room Monitor.

Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Room Monitor requires uniquely programmed function keys.

Operation
You must activate Room Monitor at the extension initiating the monitor and at the
extension you want to monitor. You can only listen to one extension at a time.

Keysets:

To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):

1. Do not lift handset or press SPK.
2. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 39).
3. Dial number of extension you want to monitor.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):

1. Go to the extension you want to monitor.
2. Do not lift handset or press SPK.
3. Press Room Monitor key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 39).
4. Dial the number of the extension you are at.
For example, if you are at extension 306, dial 306.
You can place and answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Press Room Monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension.

312 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Room Monitor
Single Line Telephones:

To activate Room Monitor (at the extension to be monitored):

1. Go to the extension you want to monitor.
2. Lift handset at the phone to be monitored.
3. Dial 770.
4. Dial 1.
5. Dial number of extension number which will be monitoring the phone.
6. Place the handset on the desk, placing the handset’s transmitter towards the room.
You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To activate Room Monitor (at the initiating extension):

1. Lift handset at the phone which will be monitoring another phone.
2. Dial 770.
3. Dial 2.
4. Dial number of extension number which will be monitored.
You cannot place or answer other calls while Room Monitor is active.

To cancel Room Monitor (at either extension):

1. Hang up the handsets for both the monitored and the monitoring phones.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 313

 Save Number Dialed
Save Number Dialed

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Save Number Dialed permits an extension user to save their last outside number and easily redial it
later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually
dialing the digits. The system retains the saved number until the user stores a new one in its place.

Save Number Dialed saves in system memory a dialed number up to 24 digits. The number can be
any combination of digits 0-9, # and *. The system remembers the digits regardless of whether the
call was answered, unanswered or busy. The system normally uses the same trunk group as for the
initial call. However, the extension user can preselect a specific trunk if desired.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key as a Save key (code 30).

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
For systems with Automatic Route Selection, ARS selects the trunk for the call unless the user pre-
selects.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed. Check or pro-
gram these options as needed.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Last Number Redial
An extension user can quickly redial the last number placed.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Save Number Dialed operation.
Repeat Redial
The system can automatically retry a trunk call that was unanswered or busy.

314 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Save Number Dialed

Operation
To save the outside number you just dialed (up to 24 digits):
Use this feature before hanging up.
System Phone
1. Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 815.

To redial a saved number:

System Phone
1. (Optional) Press line key.
This selects a specific trunk for the call.
2. Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).
The stored number dials out.
OR
1. Press idle CALL key
2. Dial 815.
OR
Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).
Save Number Dialed automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your origi-
nal call.
The stored number dials out.

Single Line Telephone

1. Hookflash.
2. Dial 815.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 315

 Save Number Dialed

Operation (Cont’d)
To check to see the number you have saved:
1. Press Save Number Dialed key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 30).
The stored number displays for ten seconds.
The stored number dials out if you:
- Lift the handset,
- Press an idle line key,
- Press an idle CALL key, or
- Press SPK
2. Press CLEAR.

To clear your saved number:

System Phone
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 885.
3. Press SPK to hang up.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset and dial 885.
2. Hang up.

316 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Secretary Call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have Secretary
Call, both co-workers must have keysets with Secretary Call buzzer keys. When a user presses their
buzzer key, the system alerts the called extension by sending a splash tone and flashing the called
extension’s buzzer key. The called user can respond by placing an Intercom call to the calling party.
The called extension’s buzzer key continues to flash until either user cancels the Secretary Call. A
secretary could use this feature, for example, to get a message through to the boss in an important
meeting. After being alerted, the boss could call the secretary when it’s most convenient.

An extension can have Secretary Call keys for any number of extensions, limited only by the avail-
able number of programmable keys.

Conditions
(A.) Secretary Call is not available to single line telephone users.
(B.) Secretary Call does not set up an Intercom call.
(C.) When assigning Secretary Call, a user enters the associated extension numbers, not port numbers.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call buzzer (code 42 + Hold + the destination extension
number). Both co-workers must have buzzer keys for each other.

Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Secretary Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Secretary Call.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 317

 Secretary Call (Buzzer)

Operation
To buzz your secretary or boss:
1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press buzzer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 41 + sec. ext.).
Your boss or secretary hears ringing.
Your buzzer key lights steadily.
Your boss’s or secretary’s buzzer key flashes fast.

To check to see who left you a Secretary Call:

1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press CHECK.
3. Press flashing Secretary Call key.
4. Press CLEAR.

To answer your Secretary Call indication:

1. Place an Intercom call to the extension that called you.

To cancel a Secretary Call you left at another extension:

1. Press your lit Secretary Call key.

To cancel a Secretary Call left at your extension:

1. Do not lift handset.
2. Press flashing Secretary Call key.

318 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Secretary Call Pickup
Secretary Call Pickup

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Secretary Call Pickup lets a system phone user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to them-
selves. By pressing a Secretary Call Pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-worker’s phone ring
or voice-announce theirs instead. Secretary Call Pickup is a simplified type of Call Forward with Follow
Me for employees that work closely together. This feature could be helpful to customer service repre-
sentatives that must frequently cover each other’s clients. When a representative leaves their desk, an
associate could press the Secretary Call Pickup key to intercept all their calls.

An extension can have Secretary Call Pickup keys for any number of extensions, limited only by
the available number of programmable keys.

Conditions
Secretary Call Pickup is not available to single line telephone users.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for Secretary Call Pickup (42 + boss ext). Unlike Secretary Call, you do
not have to program a corresponding key at the source and destination extensions.

Related Features
Call Forwarding with Follow Me
An extension user can also have Call Forwarding with Follow Me reroute a co-worker’s calls
to themselves.
Programmable Function Keys
Secretary Call pickup requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Secretary Call (Buzzer)
Co-workers can alert each other without disturbing their work.
Single Line Telephones
A system phone can have a Secretary Call Pickup key for a single line telephone.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 319

 Secretary Call Pickup

Operation
To activate Secretary Call Pickup:
1. Press your Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).
Your Secretary Call Pickup key lights and the Boss’s telephone display shows “BOSS
FWD>>”.
Calls intended for covered extension ring your phone instead.

To cancel Secretary Call Pickup:

1. Press your lit Secretary Call Pickup key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).

To check a key’s Secretary Call Pickup assignment:

1. Press CHECK.
2. Press your Secretary Call Coverage key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 42 + boss ext.).
3. Press CLEAR.

320 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Selectable Display Messaging
Selectable Display Messaging

Aspila EX
• Available - up to 50 telephones are able to use Selectable Display Messaging at one time.

Description
An extension user can select a preprogrammed Selectable Display Message for their extension.
Display system phone callers see the selected message when they call the user’s extension. Select-
able Display Messaging provides personalized messaging. For example, an extension user could
select the message “GONE FOR THE DAY”. Any display system phone user calling the extension
would see the message. Other than displaying the message, the system puts the call through nor-
mally. See table below for a list of the standard messages.

An extension user can add digits for date, time or phone number after messages 1-8 and 10 (up to
24 characters). For example, an extension user could select the message “ON VACATION
UNTIL” and then enter the date. Callers see the original message followed by the appended date.
They would then be able to tell when the user was coming back from vacation. The system allows
for a maximum of 50 phones using the Selectable Display Messaging feature at the same time.

The default messages are:

No. Message Change “#” to...

1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:## Time (when meeting done)
2 MEETING ROOM - ######## Room Name or extension
3 COME BACK ##:## Time (when returning)
4 PLEASE CALL ########### 11 digits (phone number)
5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:## Time (when returning)
6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:## Time (when returning)
7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/## Date (when returning)
8 BUSINESS TRIP ########## 10 digits (where reached)
9 GONE FOR THE DAY
10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/## Date (when returning)
11-20 MESSAGE 11-20

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 321

 Selectable Display Messaging

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Call Forwarding (Device) (code 17) or Text Message (code 18). The Call
Forwarding Device key allows the user to select a message each time they activate the feature,
while the Text Message key automatically selects the message used when programming the key.
•20-02-07 : System Options for System Telephones - Time and Date Display Mode
Set the System Time and Date display mode. The time that displays in Selectable Display
Messages follows this setting.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-19 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Selectable Display Messaging
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use
Selectable Display Messaging.
•20-16-01 : Selectable Display Messages
Program the Selectable Display Messages (1-20). Refer to the chart below for character entry.

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } > <
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-s, 7.
8 Enter characters T-V, t-v, 8.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & <space> ( )
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?

# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the

same key are needed - ex: STA)
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor
and to the right.

Related Features
Do Not Disturb
The DND key blinks when an extension is forwarded and it does not have Programmable
Function Key programmed for 16 or 17.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Selectable Display Messaging operation.

322 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Selectable Display Messaging

Operation
To select a message:
1. Press idle CALL key + dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).
OR
Press idle CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + enter digits to
append, if needed + SPK to hang up.
2. Dial 3 + Message number (01-20).
Use VOL s or VOL t to scroll through the messages.
3. (Optional for messages 1-8 and 10)
Dial the digits you want to append to the message.
You can append messages 1-8 and 10 with digits (e.g., the time when you will be back).
You enter the time in 24-hour format, but it displays in 12-hour format.
4. Press SPK to hang up.

To cancel a message:
1. Press idle CALL key + dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forward (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 17).
OR
Press idle CALL key + press Text Message key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 18) + SPK to hang
up.
2. Dial 3.
3. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 323

 Selectable Ring Tones
Selectable Ring Tones

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
An extension user can change the way calls ring their phone. Selectable Ring Tones allows an
extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a crowded work area
where several phones are close together. Because their phone has a characteristic ring, the user
always can tell when it’s their phone ringing.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled

Programming
None

Related Features
Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
This feature can be used to change the default ring tones.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot use Selectable Ring Tones.

324 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Selectable Ring Tones

Operation
To change your extension’s incoming ring tones:
1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 820.
3. Dial 1 to set Intercom ring; 2 to set trunk ring.
4. Dial code for the desired ring pattern (1-8).
5. Press SPK to hang up.

To listen to the incoming ring choices:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 811.
3. Dial 1 to listen to Intercom ring; 2 to listen to trunk ring.
For trunk ring, enter the tone to which you want to listen.
4. For Intercom Ring:
Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear (1-8).
OR
For Trunk Ring:
Dial code for the ring pattern you want to hear (1-8) and then dial the tone for the ring pattern
(1-4).
5. Press SPK to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 325

 Serial Call
Serial Call

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension.
Serial Calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a Customer Service Representative
(CSR) has a client on the phone who needs technical advice. The CSR wants to send the call to Tech
Service, but needs to advise the client of certain costs when Tech Service is done. Rather than transfer-
ring the call back and forth, the CSR can use Serial Call to Technical Service and announce, “I have a
caller on the phone. I need to talk to them again. Just hang up when you’re done and I’ll get them back.”

Conditions
The transferring extension can remain off-hook to auto-receive the callback or hang up and it will
ring back to them.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a programmable key as a Serial Call key (code 43).

Related Features
Programmable Function Keys
Serial Call requires a uniquely programmed function key.
Single Line Telephones
Serial Call is not available to single line telephones.
Transfer
An extension user can extend (send) a call to a co-worker.

Operation
To place a Serial Call to a co-worker:
1. Place or answer a call.
2. Press HOLD.
3. Dial co-worker’s extension number.
Co-worker must lift handset to respond to your announcement.
4. Press Serial Call key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 43) but do not hang up.
When your co-worker hangs up the call, the system makes an automatic live transfer
back to your extension.

326 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets
Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets

Aspila EX
• Available - 256 single line telephones maximum.

Description
The system is compatible with Dial Pulse and DTMF analogue single line telephones (SLTs). You
can install single line telephones as On-Premise or Off-Premise extensions. Single line telephone
users can dial codes to access many of the features available to system phone users. With Single
Line Telephones, you can have your system simulate PBX type operation.

When installing single line telephones, you must have:

• A port on an SLIU PCB for each single line telephone installed.
• (If you have DTMF telephones) At least one block reserved on the NTCPU for analogue
extension DTMF reception.

Conditions
(A.) Dial Pulse single line telephones cannot access any features that require the user to dial # or *.

Default Setting
• Single Line Telephones function as soon as they are installed and properly programmed.

Programming
•10-03-01 : PCB Setup
Program all on-premise type single line telephones with circuit type 2.
•10-03-03 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Assign transmit and receive levels for single line telephones.
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
If the system has DTMF single line extensions, allocate at least one circuit for analogue exten-
sion DTMF reception (entry 0 or 1).
• Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
•15-03-01 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - SLT Signaling Type
Enter 0 if single line phone is dial pulse. Enter 1 if single line telephone is DTMF.
•15-03-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Enter 0 for normal single line telephones. Enter 1 if a Voice Mail port (refer to “Voice Mail”
for more).
•20-03-02 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - Ignore Received DP Dial on DTMF
SLT Port
Use this option to define whether the system should receive dial pulse and DTMF signals (0)
or ignore dial pulse and only accept DTMF signals (1).
•20-13-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
Set option to ‘0’ to prevent dual DTMF tones when using Continued Dialing.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 327

 Single Line Telephones, Analogue Sets
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for the
DTMF tones received at a single line telephone.
•82-04-01 : SLIU Initial Data Setup
Set various timing parameters for the analogue station PCBs. The entries you make in this
program affect all SLIU PCBs installed.

Related Features
Single line telephone users have access to the following features:
Abbreviated Dialing Department Step Calling Message Waiting
Account Codes Directed Call Pickup Night Service
Alarm Do Not Disturb Off Hook Signaling
Automatic Route Selection Door Box Paging
Barge In Flash PBX Compatibility
Call Forwarding Forced Trunk Disconnect Pulse to Tone Conversion
Call Forwarding with Follow Me Group Call Pickup Ringdown Extension
Call Forwarding/DND Override Hold Save Number Dialed
Call Waiting/Camp On with Split Intercom Selectable Display Messages
Callback Handsfree Answerback/Forced Toll Restriction
Intercom Ringing
Central Office Calls, Answering Last Number Redial Transfer
Central Office Calls, Placing Line Preference Trunk Queuing and Camp On
Conference Meet Me Conference Voice Mail
Department Calling Meet Me Paging Voice Over
Meet Me Paging Transfer Warning Tone for Long
Conversation

Data Communications
APA and APR modules can be used with system phones to provide an analogue port.

Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.

Operation
Refer to the individual features listed in the Related Features chart above.

328 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Single Line Telephones - Digital
Single Line Telephones - Digital

Aspila EX
• Available- 256 Digital Single Line telephones maximum

Description
The digital single line telephone (DSL) can be installed as On-Premise extensions. Digital single
line telephone users can dial codes to access the features available to system phone users. They also
have two Function Keys that can be programmed the same as for a system phone.
The DSL has a CALL1 and CALL2 key to allow multiple call handling.
The telephone has an integral wall mount bracket supplied.
Each digital single line telephone installed must have a port on an ESIU PCB.

Conditions
• The digital single line telephone does not have a CONF or MSG key that is found on all other
system phones. For these features the user must dial the equivalent service code (Conference
is HOLD+826 and Message Waiting is 841).
• The digital single line telephone can not have any modules installed.
• The digital single line telephone does not have a seperate socket for headset connection.
• The digital single line telephone does not have any One Touch keys.

Default Setting
• Digital Single Line Telephones function after they are installed and properly programmed.

Programming
•10-03-03 : PCB Setup, For ESIU Unit - Type
10-03-01 : PCB Setup, For ESIU Unit - Type = 1 (TEL)
The type is assigned automatically when the DSL is connected for the first time extensions.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to extensions.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 329

 Single Line Telephones - Digital

Related Features
Digital single line telephone users have access to the same features as a system phone.

Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.

Operation
Refer to the individual features.

330 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Soft Keys
Soft Keys

Aspila EX
• Available

Description

Each display system telephone provides interactive soft keys for intuitive feature access. It is no
longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone’s advanced features because
the function of the soft keys change as the user processes calls. For example, just press a soft key to
Page, Park a call, leave a message or Camp On to a busy co-worker.

Conditions
If a feature is restricted by an extension’s Class of Service, though the Soft Key menu will still dis-
play the option, the user can not set the feature.

Default Setting
Display shows time/date/extension/Soft Key menu information.

Programming
None

Related Features
Volume Controls
The feature must be active to change the volume (ex: phone must be ringing, page being
heard, etc.). Pressing the volume keys when the phone is idle will adjust the LCD display con-
trast.

Refer to the individual features for additional descriptive, programming and operational information.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 331

 Station Message Detail Recording
Station Message Detail Recording

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) provides a record of the system’s trunk calls. Typi-
cally, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or SMDR data collection device.
SMDR allows you to monitor the usage at each extension and trunk. This makes charge-back and
traffic management easier.

SMDR provides the following options:

• Abandoned Call Reporting
The SMDR report includes calls that rang into the system but were unanswered (i.e., aban-
doned). SMDR can include all abandoned calls or only those abandoned calls that rang longer
than the specified duration. The Abandoned Call Report helps you keep track of lost business.

• Blocked Call Reporting

When Toll Restriction blocks a call, you can have SMDR print the blocked call information.
Or, you can have SMDR exclude these types of calls. With Blocked Call Reporting, you can
better customize Toll Restriction for the site’s application.

• Customized Date Format

The SMDR header can show the report date in one of three formats: American, European or
Japanese. Set the format for your preference.

• Transferred Call Tracking

SMDR shows each extension’s share of a transferred call. If an outside call is transferred
among four extensions, SMDR shows how long each of the callers stayed on the call.

• Data Call Tracking

Data Call Tracking can log the system’s internal data calls. Since SMDR normally logs exter-
nal (trunk) data calls, Data Call Tracking lets you get a complete picture of data terminal
activity.

• Digit Counting
With Digit Counting, SMDR can selectively keep track of toll calls. For example, if the digit
count is nine, SMDR won’t include toll calls within the home area code. Digit Counting per-
mits SMDR to include only the types of calls you want to monitor.

• Digit Masking
Digit Masking lets you “X” out portions of the number dialed on the SMDR report. A digit
mask of seven, for example, masks out all exchange codes (NNXs) and local addresses. Digit
Masking makes it easier to keep track of calling patterns, without having to interpret each
individual number. You can also use Digit Masking to block out access and security codes.

• Duration Monitoring
SMDR can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval you
specify. If you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of
only significant usage, use a longer duration.

• Extension Exclusion

332 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Station Message Detail Recording
You can selectively exclude extensions from the SMDR report. This ensures privacy for high-
profile callers. For example, the company attorney negotiating a merger may not want his
calls to show up on an in-house report.

• PBX Call Reporting

If you system is behind a PBX, you can have SMDR monitor all traffic into the PBX or just
calls placed over PBX trunks. The SMDR record can include all PBX calls (including calls to
PBX extensions) or just calls that include the PBX trunk access code.

• Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication

The system is compatible with both serial and USB SMDR devices. This gives you many
SMDR output options. For example, you can output the SMDR report to a high speed printer
or send it to disk through a PC’s serial or USB port.

• Trunk Exclusion
Use Trunk Exclusion to exclude certain trunks not subject to per-call charges (like WATS
lines) from the SMDR report. This makes call accounting easier, since you review only those
calls with variable costs.

• Usage Summaries
SMDR can automatically print daily, weekly and monthly call activity summaries. Each sum-
mary includes the total number of regular trunk calls and ISDN trunk calls, and the costs for
each type. The daily report prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sun-
day night at midnight. The monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.

• Extension Name or Number

The SMDR report can include an extension’s name or extension number. Choose the method
that makes it easier for you to track call usage.

Sample SMDR Report

09/01/97 PAGE 001

CLASS TIME LINE DURA- STATION DIALLED No./CLI ACCOUNT
TION
POT 10:44 LINE 001 00:00:30 STA 324 12039265400 8841
POT 10:46 LINE 001 00:00:45 STA 324 18874521 0
POT 10:47 LINE 001 00:00:29 STA 318 12039265441 0
PIN 10:48 LINE 002 00:01:39 NO ANSWER
ALB 10:50 02 00:01:40
POT 10:55 LINE 002 00:00:00 STA 324 0
ALB 10:56 02 00:00:23
BRD 10:56 LINE 002 00:00:00 STA 324 0
ALB 10:56 02 00:00:09
BRD 10:56 LINE 002 00:00:00 STA 324 120366541233 0
ALB 10:56 02 00:00:09
BRD 10:56 LINE 002 00:00:00 STA 324 181477445236 0
ALB 10:56 02 00:00:08

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 333

 Station Message Detail Recording

Description (Cont’d)
Definitions
Call Record Number SMDR record number (consecutive)
CLASS Type of call (see Class Definitions below)
TIME Time call placed or answered. (For Transferred calls, shows time
user picked up Transfer.)
LINE Trunk number used for call
DURATION How long call lasted. (For Transferred calls, shows how long user
was on call after answering the Transfer.)
STATION Extension number of call “owner” (i.e., extension that first placed
or answered call) (For Transferred calls, there can be more than one
owner - depending on how many extensions shared the call.)
DIALLED No./CLI For outgoing calls, the number dialed or, for incoming calls, the
Caller ID information
COST For system with ARS, indicates the call cost
OR
ACCOUNT Account Code number entered by extension user
Class Definitions
POT Outgoing trunk call
POTA Outgoing trunk call placed using Toll Restriction Override
PIN Incoming trunk calls
ALB All lines in group are busy (group number follows TIME field)
BRD Call blocked due to Toll Restriction
PTRS Transferred call
IVIN ISDN trunk call

334 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Station Message Detail Recording

Description (Cont’d)
SMDR Report Format

Character Position Field Definition

Header Line 1
1-62 Spaces
63-70 MM/DD/YYYY
71 Space
72-75 PAGE
76 Space
77-79 Report page number (e.g., 001)
CR & LF Carriage return and line feed
Header Line 2
1-5 CLASS
6 Space
7-10 TIME
11-14 Spaces
15-18 LINE
19-22 Spaces
23-30 DURATION
31-32 Spaces
33-39 STATION
40-42 Spaces
43-48 DIALED
49 Space
50-56 No./CLI
57-63 Spaces
64-74 ACCOUNT
CR & LF Carriage return and line feed
LF Line feed
SMDR Record
1-4 Call type (e.g., POT for outgoing)
5 Space
6-10 Time in 24 hour clock (HH:MM)
11 Space
12-21 LINE, space, line number (e.g., LINE 001)
22 Space
23-30 Call Duration (HH:MM:SS)

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 335

 Station Message Detail Recording

SMDR Report Format

Character Position Field Definition

31 Space
32-41 Station number (STA, space, nnnn) or name
42 Space
43-62 Number dialed (20 digits maximum)
63 Space
64-79 Account number or NO ANSWER

Summary Reports

OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR DAY OF nn/nn/nn

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:0

TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

OUTGOING CALL/COST
SUMMARY FOR WEEK ENDING nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:49
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

OUTGOING CALL/COST SUMMARY

FOR MONTH ENDING nn/nn/nn
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS:49
TOTAL NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS:0
NO. OF OUTGOING PSTN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0
NO. OF OUTGOING ISDN CALLS COSTED:0 COST:0

Conditions
(A.) The SMDR report does not include voice Intercom calls.
(B.) The SMDR call buffer stores calls. The buffer stores calls when the SMDR device is unavail-
able. When the buffer fills, each new call is not recorded. The alarm display telephone
assigned in Program 90-11-01 (normally extension 301) shows “SMDR Buffer Full,” indicat-
ing that the buffer is full. To clear the buffer, the SMDR information must be printed out.
When not using SMDR, make sure Program 90-13-01=0 or Program 90-11-01=0 otherwise
the SMDR alarm will display to the extension in Program 90-11-01 or to the operator’s exten-
sion.
(C.) When SMDR reports are enabled using the same port as the Traffic Management Reporting
feature (example: 147), the SMDR block the Traffic Management reports. Unplugging the
cable and plugging in back in again will allow Traffic Management reports to print.
(D.) SMDR requires a connection to the NTCPU via a COM port or USB connection. The system
can also use a connection to the system via a CTA/CTU module. Once you designate a CTA
or CTU for SMDR, you cannot use that extension for placing and answering other data calls.
SMDR and the Traffic Management Reports should not use the same CTA/CTU.

336 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Station Message Detail Recording
Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•10-21-02 : NTCPU Hardware Setup - Baud Rate for COM Port
If the SMDR connection is made using the COM port on the NTCPU, define the baud rate
(0=4800, 1=9600, 2=19200, 3=38400).
•14-01-06 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - SMDR Print Out
For each trunk, enter 0 if trunk’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 1 if trunk’s calls
should not appear on SMDR report.
•15-01-03 : Basic Extension Data Setup - SMDR Printout
For each extension, enter 1 if extension’s calls should appear on SMDR report. Enter 0 if
extension’s calls should not appear on SMDR report.
•35-01-01 : SMDR Options - Output Port Type
Specify the type of connection used for SMDR (0=No setting, 1=COM(NTCPU), 2=USB
(NTCPU), 4=CTA/CTU). The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02.
•35-01-02 : SMDR Options - Output Destination Number
Specify the SMDR printer output port (CTA/CTU port number).
•35-01-04 : SMDR Options - Omit (Mask) Digits
Enter the number of digits (1-24) you want SMDR to block (i.e., “X” out). Enter 0 not to
block any digits.
•35-01-05 : SMDR Options - Minimum Number of SMDR Digits
Enter the minimum number of digits a user must dial (1-24) before the system includes a call
on the SMDR report. Enter 0 to include all outgoing calls, regardless of the number of digits
dialed.
•35-01-06 : SMDR Options - Minimum Call Duration
Enter the minimum duration of a call (1-65535) that will print on the SMDR report. Enter 0
to have calls of any duration print.
•35-01-07 : SMDR Options - Minimum Ringing Time
Enter how long an unanswered call must ring (1-65535) before SMDR logs it as “No
Answer). Enter 0 to allow all “No Answer” calls to print.
•35-02-01 : SMDR Output Options - Toll Restricted Call
Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to include calls blocked by Toll Restriction. Enter 0 to
exclude blocked calls.
•35-02-02 : SMDR Output Options - PBX Calls
If system is behind a PBX, enter 1 to have SMDR include all calls to the PBX. Enter 0 to
have SMDR include only calls dialed using PBX trunk access code.
•35-02-03 : SMDR Output Options - Display Trunk Name or Number
Select whether the system should display the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR
reports. If this option is set to “1”, Program 35-02-14 must be set to “0”.
•35-02-04 : SMDR Output Options - Daily Summary
35-02-05 : Weekly Summary and
35-02-06 : Monthly Summary
Enter 1 to enable a summary report. Enter 0 to disable a summary report. The daily report
prints every day at midnight. The weekly report prints every Sunday night at midnight. The
monthly report prints at midnight on the last day of the month.
•35-02-08 : SMDR Output Options - Incoming Calls
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include incoming calls. Enter 1 if you want the
SMDR report to exclude incoming calls.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 337

 Station Message Detail Recording
•35-02-09 : SMDR Output Options - Print Name or Number
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to include the extension’s name. Enter 1 if you want the
SMDR report to include the extension’s number.
•35-02-14 : SMDR Output Options - Date
Determine whether the date should be displayed on SMDR reports (0=not displayed, 1=dis-
played). This option must be set to “0” if the trunk name is set to be displayed in Program
35-02-03.
•35-02-16 : SMDR Output Options - Print Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number
Enter 0 if you want the SMDR report to print the trunk port name (as assigned in Program 14-
01-01). Enter 1 if you want the SMDR report to print the received dialed number. For DID
trunks, if the received number is not defined in Program 22-11-01, then no number will be
printed.
•80-05-01 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
Set the date format for SMDR (0=American, 1=Japanese or 2=European).
•90-12-01 : System Alarm Output - Output Port Type
Indicate the type of connection used for the SMDR (0-No setting, 1-COM port (NTCPU), 2-
USB port (NTCPU), 4-CTA/CTU).
•90-12-02 : System Alarm Output - Destination Extension Number
If the output port type (90-12-01) is set to CTA, enter the extension number with the CTA
connection.
•90-13-01 : System Information Output - Output Port Type
Indicate the type of connection used for the SMDR (0-No setting, 1-COM port (NTCPU), 2-
USB port (NTCPU), 4-CTA/CTU).
•90-13-02 : System Information Output - Destination Extension Number
If the output port type (90-13-01) is set to CTA, enter the extension number with the CTA
connection.

Related Features
PBX Compatibility
To use the PBX Call Reporting option, program system for behind PBX operation.
Traffic Management Report (TMS)
Traffic Management Reports and SMDR should not use the same DCI port.

Operation
Once installed and programmed, SMDR operation is automatic.

338 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)

Aspila EX
• NTCPU provides 2 blocks of 32 conference circuits, allowing each block to have any number of internal or external parties
conferenced up to the block’s limit of 32.

Description
Tandem Trunking allows an extension user to join two or more outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk
Conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, leaving the trunks in an Unsupervised
Conference. The extension user that established the Conference is not part of the conversation. The
Conference continues until either outside party hangs up. In addition, the extension user that set up
the Conference can end the tandem call at any time.

The number of Conference calls is limited by the number of Conference circuits in the system. Due
to this fact, the maximum number of Conference calls cannot exceed the limits defined in the above
table.

Tandem Trunking could help an office manager, for example, put two outside sales people in touch.
The office manager could:
• Answer a call from one salesperson
• Place a call to the second salesperson
• Set up the trunk-to-trunk Conference
• Drop out of the call
The office manager could terminate the Conference at any time.

There are two methods for Enhanced Tandem Trunking:

• Method A - Set Up Without Transfer Key
An extension user can set up Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) by using the
CONF key. This option uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem call.
• Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang Up
This method allows an extension user to easily set up an Unsupervised Conference with a call
they have placed on Hold. It uses a uniquely programmed Transfer key to set up a tandem
call.
Conditions
(A.) Tandem Trunking requires analogue loop start trunks with disconnect supervision, ground
start trunks or ISDN trunks.
(B.) The maximum number of trunk-to-trunk conferences allowed is determined by the Conference
feature setup. See Programming below.
Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 339

 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)

Programming
Tandem Trunking Method A - Tandem Trunking from Conference
•10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of avail-
able Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.
•14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
•14-01-05 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
•14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Supervision
For each trunk that should be able to participate in a tandem call, enter 1.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
(Optional) Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Conference
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a
Conference.
•20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode
In an extension’s Class of Service, set whether an extension should be able to Barge In to a
call and talk (1) or just monitor the call (0).
•20-11-14 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Disable (0) the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction option.

Tandem Trunking Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang up

•10-07-01 : Conversation Record Circuits
The number of circuits assigned as Conversation Record circuits limits the number of avail-
able Conference circuits. Make sure there are circuits available for Conference.
•14-01-04 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
•14-01-05 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive Gain Level for Conference and Transfer Calls
Select the CODEC gain type used by the trunk when it is part of an Unsupervised Conference.
•14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Disconnect Supervision
For each trunk, enter 1 to enable loop supervision.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Transfer (code 06).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-07-11 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Forced Trunk Disconnect
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 to enable Forced Trunk Disconnect. This allows the
extension to disconnect an Unsupervised Conference in progress (initially set up using Method B).
•20-13-08 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Conference
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to initiate a
Conference.
•20-13-10 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Barge In Mode
In an extension’s Class of Service, set whether an extension should be able to Barge In to a
call and talk (1) or just monitor the call (0).

340 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference)
•20-11-14 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Disable (0) the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Restriction option.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering / Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for incoming and outgoing calls can affect how calls are handled.
Check or program these options as needed.
Conference, Voice Call
Set up a Conference with a co-worker in your immediate work area.
Meet Me Conference
Meet Me Conference lets an extension user set up a Conference via Paging.
Meet Me Paging
Meet Me Paging lets an extension user set up a two-party meeting via Paging.

Operation
Method A - Tandem Trunking from Conference

To set up a Tandem Call:

1. Place or answer first trunk call.
2. Press CONF key.
3. Place or answer second trunk call.
4. To add more calls to the tandem call, repeat from Step 2.
or to set up the tandem call, press CONF key twice.
This sets up a Conference between you and both outside parties.
5. Press Transfer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 06).

To end the Tandem Call:

1. Press either flashing line key.
The line keys light steadily (green). You can listen (i.e., monitor) to the call or rejoin
the conversation, based on the setting in Program 20-13-10.
2. Press SPK or Hang up.
If Program 20-13-10 is set to “0”, the Conference ends and the line keys go out.
If Program 20-13-10 is set to “1”, to disconnect the Conference, you must use Forced
Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press the line key + 724).

Method B - Tandem Trunking on Hang up

To set up a Tandem Call:

1. Place or answer first trunk call.
2. Press HOLD to place the first trunk call on Hold.
3. Place or answer second trunk call.
4. Press Transfer key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 06) or hang up.
This sets up an Unsupervised Conference with both outside parties.
The line keys for the trunks light steadily (red).
To disconnect the Conference, use Forced Trunk Disconnect (i.e., Press line key + 724).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 341

 Tie Lines
Tie Lines

Aspila EX
• Available.

Description
Tie lines directly link a local telephone system with one or more remote systems. The link is inde-
pendent of the telco’s switched network. When a local system user seizes a tie line, they hear Inter-
com dial tone from the remote system. The user may then be able to:
• Dial extensions in the remote system
• Use the remote system’s trunks for outgoing calls
• Access Common Abbreviated Dialing bins in the remote system
• Use the remote system’s Internal and External Paging

The system provides connection for 2-wire (four lead, tip/ring) or 4-wire (eight lead, tip/ring/tip 1/
ring 1) type tie line circuits.

Tie Line Class of Service

Tie Line Class of Service provides features and dialing restrictions for incoming tie lines. This
allows you to control the capabilities of callers dialing into your system. The tie line Class of Ser-
vice options are:

• First Digit Absorption

A tie line can ignore (absorb) the first digit received, which helps when setting up a tie line
network. For example, your system can have tie lines to two other systems with the same
extension numbering plan. Use the first digit to differentiate between the systems. Tie line
callers can dial 3200-3456 for the first system’s extensions and 4200-4456 for the second sys-
tem’s extensions. The receiving system ignores the first digit and routes calls correctly to the
extension dialed (i.e., 4301 is received as 301).

• Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access

When a tie line user calls the remote system, they may be able to dial 9 and place outside calls
through the remote system. Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system. The call follows
the remote system’s Trunk Group Access or Automatic Route Selection - whichever is enabled

• Trunk Group Access

Tie line callers may be able to access trunk groups in the remote system by dialing Program-
mable Function Key *02 and the trunk group number. This allows the callers to select a spe-
cific trunk group for an outgoing call. Trunk Group Access bypasses the remote system’s
Trunk Group Routing/ARS. As with dial 9 access, any toll charges are incurred by the remote
system.

• Common Abbreviated Dialing

The remote system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing bins may be available to tie line callers. Use
this capability to set up centralized Abbreviated Dialing control - or just save time when dialing.

342 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Tie Lines

Description (Cont’d)
• Operator Calling
A tie line caller may be able to dial 0 for the remote system’s operator.

• Paging
Internal and External Paging may be available to tie line callers. This allows co-workers in adja-
cent facilities connected by tie lines, for example, to broadcast announcements to each other.

• Direct Trunk Access

This option allows tie line callers to directly access a trunk for an outside call by dialing 805
and the trunk’s number. Like Trunk Group Access, this bypasses the remote system’s Trunk
Group Routing/ARS. Any toll charges are incurred by the remote system.

• Forced Trunk Disconnect

The Forced Trunk Disconnect option allows a tie line caller to disconnect (release) another
extension’s active outside call. The tie line caller can then place a call on the released trunk.
Tie line callers should use Forced Trunk Disconnect only in an emergency, when no other
trunks are available.

• DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In

The DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In option allows a tie line caller to break into another extension’s
established call. This sets up a three-way conversation between the intruding party and the
two parties on the initial call.

Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction

You can selectively deny incoming tie lines access to your system’s outgoing trunk groups. Incom-
ing tie line callers could be able to access your outgoing WATS lines, for example, but not your
DDD trunks. The system allows you to set up a restriction matrix for each of your incoming tie
lines - for each of your outgoing trunk groups.

Tie Line Toll Restriction Class

Incoming tie lines can have a Toll Restriction Class and be subject to the system’s toll restriction.
For example, Toll Restriction can prevent users from dialing 1-900 calls. When an incoming tie
line caller tries to use system trunks to dial a 1-900 service, Toll Restriction will deny the call.

Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility

You can individually program tie lines for Dial Pulse (DP) or DTMF incoming or outgoing signal-
ing. Outgoing tie lines can be either wink start or immediate start.

Wink Start Mode Does Not Require a DTMF Receiver

E&M trunks in wink start mode do not require a DTMF receiver for dial tone detection. It is
detected with the wink. This frees the DTMF receivers for other use.

Conditions
(A.) Tie lines require the installation of a 4TLIU-A1 PCB. Each PCB provides four tie line ports.
(B.) Tie line service must be purchased from your local telephone company.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 343

 Tie Lines

Programming
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
If the system has DTMF tie lines, be sure to reserve at least one circuit for analogue trunk
DTMF reception (type 0 or 2).
• Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
•14-01-02 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
14-01-03 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for each trunk as
required.
•14-01-13 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Loop Disconnect Supervision
Enable (1) loop supervision for each tie line that should be able to place outgoing calls.
•14-02-01 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Signaling Type (DP/DTMF)
Set the outgoing signaling type for the tie trunk. The options are 0 (DP 10 pps), 1 (DP 20 pps)
and 2 (DTMF). To set incoming signaling, refer to Program 34-01-02.
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Program tie lines of similar type into the same trunk group (1-100). The system uses trunk
groups for outgoing access to tie lines (i.e., Service Code 804 + group). Also see Program 34-
05.
•14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
When a tie line user dials 9, the system uses the routes defined in this program (1-100). Also
see Program 34-03. (If the system has ARS, the tie line user accesses ARS when they dial 9.)
•20-01-01 : System Options - DTMF Receiver Active Time
After answering the tie line call, the system attaches a DTMF receiver to the tie line for this
interval (0- 64800 seconds).
•20-09-01 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) - Second Call for DID/ DISA/
DIL/ E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to receive a second call from a DID, DISA,
DIL, or tie line caller.
•20-14-01 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
Enable (1) or disable (0) the following options for each tie line Class of Service (1-15):
• First Digit Absorption (Item 1)
• Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access (Item 2)
• Direct Trunk Access (Item 3)
• Common Abbreviated Dialing (Item 4)
• Operator Calling (Item 5)
• Internal Paging (Item 6)
• External Paging (Item 7)
• Direct Trunk Access (Item 8)
• Forced Trunk Disconnect (Item 9)
• Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA (Item 10)
• DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In (Item 11)
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For each Night Service mode, enter service type 5 when the trunk should be a tie trunk.
•34-01-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup - DID/E&M Start Signaling
Enter 0 for 2nd dial tone, 1 for wink, 2 for immediate, or 3 for delay start signaling. To set
outgoing signaling, refer to Program 14-02-01.
•34-02-01 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
Assign the tie line’s Class of Service (1-15). Use Program 20-14 to set the tie line Class of

344 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Tie Lines
Service options. You cannot use Programs 20-06 thru 20-17 to assign Class of Service to tie
lines.
•34-03-01 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Use this program to assign the trunk group route (1-100) chosen when a user seizes a tie line
and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in program 14-06. If the system has ARS, dialing 9
accesses ARS.
•34-04-01 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
If the system uses Toll Restriction, enter a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) for each tie line. The
system uses the class you enter in Program 21-05. You cannot use Program 21-04 to assign
Toll Restriction to tie lines.
•34-05-01 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
This program lets you build a restriction matrix for trunk calls placed over a tie line. For each
tie line trunk group (1-100), enable (0) or disable (1) outgoing access to each CO trunk group.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
If required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for tie
line calls.
•81-03-01 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup
Make sure the Tie Line Timer settings are compatible with your local telco.

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection/Trunk Group Routing
In a system with ARS enabled:
When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system routes the call via ARS.
In a system with ARS disabled:
When a tie line user dials 9 for an outside call, the system uses the routes programmed for
Trunk Group Routing.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Depending on programming, you can seize a tie line by:
• Pressing a line key
• Pressing a One-Touch Key
• Dialing a trunk group code
• Dial codes which directly accessing a specific tie line
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Long Conversation Cutoff
Long conversation cutoff is controlled separately for DISA and tie lines.
Networking
The Networking feature can use tie lines to connect the different networking nodes.
Toll Restriction
Incoming tie line calls can have a Toll Restriction class and can be subject to the system’s toll
restriction.
Trunk Groups
To simplify placing calls over your tie lines, you can put the tie lines in a trunk group.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 345

 Tie Lines

Operation
To place a call over a tie line group:
1. Press idle CALL key and dial 804.
2. Dial tie line group number (1-100 ).
3. Dial number.
OR
1. Press tie line group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *02 + group).
2. Dial number.

To place a tie line call using Trunk Group Routing:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 9.
2. Dial number.

To place a call over a specific tie line:

1. Press idle CALL key and dial 805.
2. Dial tie line number (e.g., 005 for line 5).
3. Dial number.
OR
1. Press tie line key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *01 + 1-200).
2. Dial number.

To Barge In after calling a busy extension:

The call must be set up for about 10 seconds before you can Barge In.
Listen for busy/ring or busy tone.
1. Call busy extension using tie line trunk.
2. Press Barge In key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 34).

After calling the remote system, you may be able to:

• Dial 9 to place an outside call through the remote system.
• Dial Service Code 805 + a trunk number to place outside calls over a specific trunk.
• Use the remote system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing.
• Call the remote system’s operator.
• Use the remote system’s Internal and/or External Paging.

346 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Time and Date
Time and Date

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The system uses Time and Date for:
• Central Office Calls (Access Maps) • Ring Groups
• Class of Service (Class) • Station Message Detail Recording
• Direct Inward Lines • System Reports
• Display Telephones • Toll Restriction (Class)
• Fax Machine Compatibility • Trunk Group Routing
• Night Service (Automatic) • Voice Response System
• Programmable Trunk Parameters

Conditions
The system retains the Time and Date after a power failure or system reset.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•10-01-01 : Time and Date
Set the system Time and Date from your administrator’s telephone.
•20-02-07 : System Options for System Telephones - Time and Date Display Mode
Select the display mode (type 1-8) for Time and Date (i.e., Time and Date format).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-07-03 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - Time and Date
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to set the
Time and Date.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 347

 Time and Date

Related Features
Class of Service
Changing the time may change the current COS service depending on the COS mode setup.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones cannot set the Time and Date.

Operation
The date must be set in system programming (10-01).

To set the system Time:

1. Press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 828.
3. Dial two digits for the hour (24 hour clock, 13 = 1:00 PM).
4. Dial two digits for the minutes (00-60).
5. Press SPK to hang up.

348 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction

Aspila EX
• Available - 15 Toll Restriction Classes and 512 extensions.

Description
Toll Restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place
only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies Toll
Restriction according to an extension’s Toll Restriction Class. The system allows for up to 15 Toll
Restriction Classes.

Toll Restriction offers the following capabilities:

• Common Permit Code Table
Use the Common Permit Code Table when you have numbers you want all Toll Restriction
Classes to dial. To let all users dial 911, for example, put 911 in the Common Permit Code
Table. The Common Permit Code Table overrides the Restrict Code and Common Restrict
Code Tables. The system provides 10 tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 dig-
its max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).

• Common Restrict Code Table

The Common Restrict Code Table lets you globally restrict certain numbers for all Toll
Restriction Classes. To prevent all users from dialing directory assistance (411), for example,
put 411 in the Common Restrict Code Table. Be sure you don’t allow the codes you want to
restrict in the Permit Code Table or the Common Permit Code Table. The system provides 10
tables, with 10 entries in each table. Each code is 4 digits max., using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as
a wild card).

• Restrict Code Table

When you want Toll Restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the
Restrict Code Table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the Restrict Code
Table. (If the same Toll Restriction Class has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the sys-
tem restricts calls that you enter only in the Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables
are not restricted.) The system provides 4 tables, with 60 entries (restricted codes) in each
table. A restricted code is 12 digits maximum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).
• Permit Code Table
The Permit Code Table lets you set up Toll Restriction so that users can dial only selected
(permitted) telephone numbers. Use this table when you want to restrict most calls. To allow
all users to dial only area code 203, for example, enter 1203 in the Permit Code Table. 1 +
203 + NNX + nnnn are the only numbers users can dial. (If the same Toll Restriction Class
has both Permit and Restrict Code Tables, the system restricts calls that you enter only in the
Restrict Code Table. Calls entered in both tables are not restricted.) The system provides 4
tables, with 60 entries (permitted codes) in each table. A permitted code is 12 digits maxi-
mum, using 0-9, #, * and FLASH (as a wild card).
• International Call Restriction
International Call Restriction lets you limit the international calls an extension user may dial.
You can build a restrict table to prevent only certain calls, or you can build a permit table to
allow only certain calls. To allow most international calls, use the International Call Restrict
Table. To prevent most international calls, use the International Call Allow Table. The sys-
tem provides 10 International Call Restrict tables with up to 4 digits in each table entry and 20
International Call Allow tables, with up to 6 digits in each table entry. Valid entries are 0-9,
#,* and FLASH (for a wild card).

• Toll Restriction for Abbreviated Dialing

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 349

 Toll Restriction
Abbreviated Dialing can bypass or follow Toll Restriction. If you allow many users to pro-
gram Abbreviated Dialing, consider Toll Restricting the numbers they dial. If only adminis-
trators can program Abbreviated Dialing, Toll Restriction may not be necessary. You can
separately restrict Group and Common Abbreviated Dialing.

• Call Digit Counting

Use Call Digit Counting to limit the number of digits local callers can dial. You can use this
option to prevent users from accessing local dial-up services. For example, set the Maximum
Number of Digits in Local Calls to 7 to limit local callers to dialing the exchange code (NNX)
and local address (nnnn) only. The system provides 4 tables in which you can make entries
for this option. The range is 4-30 digits.

• Toll Call Digit Counting

With Toll Call Digit Counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can
dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up services.
You can make four entries (4-30 digits).

• Toll Free Trunks

Certain trunks can be completely unrestricted, such as the company president’s Private Line.
Users can place calls on Toll Free Trunks anytime -- to anywhere, without inadvertently being
toll restricted.

• PBX Call Restriction

Toll Restriction programming lets you enable/disable PBX Call Restriction and enter PBX
access codes. You only need to do this if your system is behind a PBX and you have trunks
programmed for behind PBX operation. Refer to PBX Compatibility feature for the specifics.

Conditions
(A.) If a Toll Restriction Class has the same entries in both a permit and restriction table, the sys-
tem does not restrict the call.
(B.) Toll Call Digit counting may prevent users from taking advantage of long distance automated
services like ACD and automated Technical Service.
(C.) Toll Restriction is applied when accessing ARS.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•14-01-08 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Toll Restriction
For each trunk, enter 0 to enable Toll Restriction; enter 1 to disable Toll Restriction.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
For each extension, assign a Class of Service (1-15).
•20-08-02 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Trunk Calls
For each Class of Service, decide whether to enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to
place an outgoing trunk call.
•20-13-20 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Account Code/Toll Restriction
Operator Alert
When toll restriction is violated, determine if the operator should be notified. (0=disable,
1=enable)

350 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Toll Restriction
•21-04-01 : Toll Restriction Class
For each extension, assign a Toll Restriction Class for reach Night Service mode.
•21-05-01 : Toll Restriction Class - International Call Restriction Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call
Restrict Table (Program 21-06-01).
•21-05-02 : Toll Restriction Class - International Call Permit Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the International Call Per-
mit Table (Program 21-06-02).
•21-05-03 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction of Local Call
Enable (1) or disable (0) toll restriction for local calls.
•21-05-04 : Toll Restriction Class - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignments
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable (1) the dialing limit for calls.
When enabling, select from entries 1-4 in Program 21-06-03.
•21-05-05 : Toll Restriction Class - Common Permit Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Permit Code
Table (Program 21-06-04).
•21-05-06 : Toll Restriction Class - Common Restrict Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) the Common Restrict Code
Table (Program 21-06-05).
•21-05-07 : Toll Restriction Class - Permit Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Permit Code Table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 21-06-06.
•21-05-08 : Toll Restriction Class - Restrict Code Table
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, disable (0) or enable the Restrict Code Table. When
enabling, select from tables 1-4 in Program 21-06-07.
•21-05-09 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Common Abbreviated Dialing
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Com-
mon Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
•21-05-10 : Toll Restriction Class - Restriction for Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbers
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Toll Restriction for Group
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.
•21-05-11 : Toll Restriction Class - Intercom Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) Intercom Call Restriction. If
enabled, extensions cannot place or receive Intercom calls.
•21-05-12 : Toll Restriction Class - PBX Call Restriction
For the Toll Restriction Class you select, enable (1) or disable (0) PBX Call Restriction. Refer
to the PBX Compatibility Feature.
•21-06-01 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Restrict Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to restrict.
•21-06-02 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - International Call Permit Table
Enter the international dialing codes you want to permit.
•21-06-03 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Maximum Number of Digits Table Assignment
Select the maximum number of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each table (4-30).
•21-06-04 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Common Permit Code Table.
•21-06-05 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Common Restrict Table
Program codes into the Common Restrict Code Table.
•21-06-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Permit Code Table
Program codes into the Permit Code Tables.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 351

 Toll Restriction
•21-06-07 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - Restrict Code Table
Program codes into the Restrict Code Tables.
•21-06-08 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup - PBX Access Codes
The system allows up to 4 tables for PBX access codes. Refer to the PBX Compatibility fea-
ture for the specifics.

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Placing
The system will allow or deny outgoing access to trunks depending on Toll Restriction.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) / Tie Lines
When using DISA or tie lines, additional programming is required for Toll Restriction (DISA,
see Program 25-10; tie lines, see Program 34-04).
Toll Restriction, Dial Block
A user can temporarily block their extension’s Toll Restriction access, preventing unwanted
calls from being placed on their phone while they are away from their desk.
Toll Restriction Override
A user can temporarily override an extension’s Toll Restriction.

Operation
To place a trunk call if your system is Toll Restricted:
1. Place call normally.
If your Toll Restriction Class does not allow the number you dial, your call will be cut
off.

352 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Toll Restriction, Dial Block
Toll Restriction, Dial Block

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Toll Restriction Dial Block lets a user temporarily block an extension’s Toll Restriction. This helps
a user block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are away from their
desk. A user would need to enter a 4-digit personal code to enable/disable this feature.

Dial Block can also be set by the system administrator. If Dial Block has already been set by an
extension user, the supervisor can not release it. Additionally, if Dial Block has been set by the
supervisor, and extension user can not release it.

Important: This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an
assigned extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a
supervisor if they know the Dial Block password.

Conditions
(A.) If the system is reset by a cold start, the Dial Block feature is cleared.
(B.) This feature is not available for ISDN S-Bus extensions.
(C.) Both Programs 21-09-01 and 21-10 can be set at the same time. The system gives priority to
the setting in Program 21-10.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•11-10-17 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) - Dial Block by Supervisor
Assign a service code (101 by default) to be used by the supervisor to set Dial Block for
another extension.
•11-11-33 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Dial Block
Assign a service code (100 by default) to be used for Dial Block.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a COS to each extension (1-15).
•20-08-01 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial Block.
•21-09-01 : Dial Block Setup - Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block
Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service (1-15) when the Dial Block feature is used.
•21-09-02 : Dial Block Setup - Supervisor Password
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to enable or disable Dial Block for
other extensions.
•21-10-01 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extension
Assign the Toll Restriction class (1-15) to be used by an extension when the Dial Block fea-
ture is enabled. If this data is “0”, Toll Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.
•90-19-01 : Dial Block Release
Enter the extension number to be released from the Dial Block restriction. This program can
be used when a password is forgotten by the user.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 353

 Toll Restriction, Dial Block

Related Features
Toll Restriction
Dial Block can temporarily block an extension’s Toll Restriction setting.

Operation
To set Dial Block:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 700.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial 1.
A confirmation tone is heard.
5. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

To release Dial Block:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 700.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial 0.
A confirmation tone is heard.
5. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

To set Dial Block from another extension:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 701.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial the extension number to be blocked.
5. Dial 1.
A confirmation tone is heard.
6. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

354 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Toll Restriction, Dial Block
To release Dial Block from another extension:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 701.
3. Dial the 4-digit Dial Block code.
4. Dial the extension number to be released from Dial Block.
5. Dial 0.
A confirmation tone is heard.
6. Press SPK or replace the handset to hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 355

 Toll Restriction Override
Toll Restriction Override

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Toll Restriction Override lets a user temporarily bypass an extension’s Toll Restriction. This helps
a user that must place an important call that Toll Restriction normally prevents. For example, you
could set up Toll Restriction to block 900 calls and then provide a Toll Restriction Override code to
your attendant and executives. When the attendant or executive needs to place a 900 call, they just:
• Press CALL1 and dial their override code.
• Press a line key or dial a trunk access code (e.g., 9 or 805 002).
• Place the 900 call without restriction.

You can assign a different Toll Restriction Override code to each extension. Or, extensions can
share the same override code.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•11-11-36 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) - Walking Toll Restriction
Assign a service code (763) for Toll Restriction Override.
•20-08-06 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) - Toll Restriction Override
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the ability to use Toll Restriction
Override.
•21-01-07 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Toll Restriction Override Time
Set the Toll Restriction Override Time (0-64800 seconds). After dialing the Toll Restriction
Override codes, the system removes Toll Restriction for this interval.
•21-14-01 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - User ID
Enter the Toll Restriction Override User ID codes (6 digits) into tables. Up to 500 different
override codes can be entered.
•21-14-02 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup - Walking Toll Restriction Class Num-
ber
Enter the Walking Toll Restriction Class of Service (1-15) to be used for each table number
assigned in 21-14-01.
•35-02-06 through 35-02-11 : SMDR Output Options
Assign the output condition for the printer or PC. If the data is set to “1” (output), the symbol
of the call will print as “POTW” and the password table number will be printed as “W/
@@@” (@@ equals the 3 digit table number) in the Account Code area.

356 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Toll Restriction Override

Related Features
Station Message Detail Recording
In the Class heading in the SMDR report, POTW indicates that the call was placed using Toll
Restriction Override.
Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction Override temporarily overrides an extension’s Toll Restriction.
Voice Response System (VRS)
If the system has VRS, users hear, “Your call cannot go through. Please call the operator”
when they dial a number that Toll Restriction prevents.

Operation
To temporarily override a restricted extension’s Toll Restriction:
You can override restriction for only one call at a time.
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 763.
3. Dial the 6-digit Toll Restriction Override code. If you wait too long before going to the next step,
you may have to repeat the procedure. You’ll hear error tone if you dial your code incorrectly.
4. Press idle line key or dial trunk access code.
5. Dial number without restriction.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 357

 Transfer
Transfer

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Transfer permits an extension user to send (i.e., extend) an active Intercom or outside call to any
other extension in the system. With Transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the
desired co-worker. A call a user transfers automatically recalls if not picked up at the destination
extension. This assures that users do not lose or inadvertently abandon their transfers. While a
transferred call is ringing an extension the system can optionally play ringback tone or Music on
Hold to the caller.

The system allows the following types of transfers:

• Screened Transfer
The transferring user announces the call to the destination before hanging up
• Unscreened Transfer
The transferring party extends the call without an announcement.
• Extension (Department) Groups Transfer
The Transferring party sends the call to a Department instead of an extension.
• Transfer Without Holding
A user presses a busy line key and waits for the call to complete. The system automatically
sends them the call when the internal caller hangs up.

Automatic On-Hook Transfer Operation

With Automatic On-Hook Transfer, a Transfer goes through as soon as the transferring user hangs
up. For example, extension 304 can answer a trunk, press HOLD, dial 305 and hang up. The system
extends the call to extension 305. Without Automatic On-Hook Transfer, the call would stay on
Hold at extension 304 when the user hangs up. To extend the call, the user at extension 304 would
have to press CONF or a Transfer function key before hanging up.

Each method has advantages. Automatic On-Hook Transfer makes transferring calls easier. However,
users have to be more aware of how they handle their calls on Hold. Without Automatic On-Hook
Transfer, extending a call becomes a two-step operation - but separate from placing calls on Hold.

Prevent Recall of Transferred Call

The Class of Service program has an option that will allow you to prevent a Transferred call from
recalling the originating extension if the call is not answered.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

358 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Transfer

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Extension users may want a function keys programmed for Transfer (code 06).
•20-02-01 : System Options for System Telephones - Retrieve the Line After Transfer
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to answer a call after it’s been transferred, but
before it’s answered.
•20-03-01 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode
For a busy single line telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call:
• 0 = Press and release hookswitch to pick up waiting call
• 1 = Press and release hookswitch and dial Service Code 894 to answer waiting call
•20-03-02 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - MOH or Ringback on Transferred
Calls
24-02-02 : System Options for Transfer - MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
Use these options to enable (0) or disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred
caller hears Music on Hold while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a
transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. For this
option to work with voice mail, the transferred call must be an unscreened transfer.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to extensions.
•20-11-06 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Unscreened Transfer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use
Unscreened Transfer.
•20-11-07 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Without Holding
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use
Transfer Without Holding.
•20-11-08 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Display
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s incoming Transfer
pre-answer display.
•20-11-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Automatic On Hook Transfer
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to use
Automatic On Hook Transfer. If enabled, user must press HOLD and dial the extension num-
ber to Transfer the call. If disabled, a user must have a Transfer Programmable Function Key.
To transfer the call, the user would press HOLD, dial the extension number, then press the
Tranfer Programmable Function key to complete the transfer.
•20-11-18 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - No Recall
If an extension should not receive recalls of unanswered Transferred calls, disable this option
(0=allow recalls, 1=prevent recalls).
•24-02-01 : System Options for Transfer - Busy Transfer
Prevent (0) or allow (1) extensions to transfer calls to busy extensions. If disabled, calls trans-
ferred to busy extensions recall immediately.
•24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
If activated at an extension, Delayed Call Forwarding occurs after this interval (0-64800 sec-
onds). This also sets how long a Transferred call waits at an extension forwarded to Voice
Mail before routing to the called extension’s mailbox.
•24-02-04 : System Options for Transfer - Transfer Recall Time
Set the Transfer Recall Time (0-64800 seconds). An unanswered transferred call recalls to
the extension that initially transferred it after this interval. This interval also sets how long a
transferred call camps-on to a busy extension.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 359

 Transfer

Related Features
Caller ID
Unscreened Transfers from voice mail will show pre-answer Caller ID information.
Call Forwarding
With Transfer to Busy Extensions enabled (Program 24-02-01=1), Call Forwarding with Both
Ringing offers a unique option. A transferred call will wait for either the forwarding or desti-
nation extension to become free. The call goes through to whichever extension becomes avail-
able first. If neither extension becomes free within the Transfer Recall Time, the call recalls
the transferring extension.
Meet Me Paging Transfer
Page a co-worker and have the call automatically Transfer when the co-worker answers the
Page.
One-Touch Calling
When transferring, an extension user can press a One-Touch Key instead of dialing the exten-
sion number.
Serial Call
Serial Call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring
extension.

Operation
Transferring Trunk Calls
To Transfer a trunk call to a co-worker’s extension:
1. At system phone or DSL, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
You hear Transfer dial tone.
2. Dial co-worker’s extension number.
If the extension is busy or doesn’t answer, you can dial another extension number or
press the line key to return to the call. In addition, you may be able to hang up and have
the call Camp-On.
SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred
and the single line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing 815
and the extension number to which it had been transferred.
3. Announce call and hang up.
If you don’t have Automatic On Hook Transfer, you must press CONF (TRF) or your
Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
If your co-worker doesn’t want the call, press the flashing line key to return to the call.
SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred
and the single line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing 815
and the extension number to which it had been transferred.
If you don’t want to screen the call, hang up without making an announcement.

To answer a call transferred to your extension:

1. Lift the handset when a co-worker announces the call.

360 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Transfer

Operation (Cont’d)
Transferring Without Holding
To Transfer without holding (system phone only):
1. Lift handset.
2. Press busy line key.
3. When original caller hangs up, you are connected.

Transferring Intercom Calls

To Transfer your Intercom call:
1. At system phone, press HOLD.
OR
At single line telephone, hookflash.
2. Dial extension to receive your call.
If the extension is busy, doesn’t answer or does not want the call, you can dial another
extension number or press the lit CALL key to return to the call. In addition, you may be
able to hang up and have the call Camp-On.
SLT users can retrieve the call by pressing hookflash. If a call has been transferred
and the sibgle line user has hung up the handset, the call be can retrieved by dialing 815
and the extension number to which it had been transferred.
3. Announce your call and hang up.
With Automatic On Hook Transfer
When you hang up, the cal is automatically transferred.
Without Automatic On Hook Transfer
You must press your Transfer Programmable Function Key to Transfer the call.
If your co-worker just speaks toward their phone to answer, the Intercom call being
transferred disconnects when you hang up.
To Transfer the call unscreened, press your Transfer Programmable Function Key
and hang up without making an announcement.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 361

 Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing

Aspila EX
• Available- 100 trunk groups and 100 routes.

Description
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group Rout-
ing code (9) for trunk calls. Trunk Group Routing routes calls in the order specified by system pro-
gramming. If a user dials 9 and all trunks in the first group are busy, the system may route the call
to another group.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled. All trunks are in Group 1.

Programming
•11-01-01 : System Numbering
Set up a Service Code for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
•11-09-01 : Trunk Access Code
If required, change the single-digit Trunk Access Code (normally 9). If you change this code,
you must also review the settings in 11-01 for the new code selected.
•11-09-02 : Trunk Access Code - Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
Assign the Service Code set up in 11-01 for Alternate Trunk Route Access.
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-100).

362 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Trunk Group Routing

Programming (Cont’d)
•14-06-01 : Trunk Group Routing
Set up an outbound routing table (1-100) for trunk groups assigned in Program 14-05.
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Access Map programming may limit Trunk Group Routing options.
•15-07 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Trunk Group Routing access (code *02 + trunk group 001-100).
•21-02-01 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
Assign the routes set in Program 14-06 to extensions.
•21-15-01 : Alternate Trunk Route for Extensions
Designate the trunk route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code
assigned in Program 11-09-02. Trunk Group Routing is set up in Program 14-06.
•23-03-01 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
Assign trunk routes set in Program 14-06 to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ring-
ing the paging system is in an extension’s assigned route, the user can dial the Universal
Answer code (872) to pick up the call. This program also allows an extension user to automat-
ically answer trunk calls ringing other extensions, based on Trunk Group Routing program-
ming (defined in Program 14-06). (Trunk Group Routing=1-100)
•25-10-01 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Assign the Trunk Group Route chosen when a user places a DISA call into the system and
dials 9. The Trunk Group Routing is defined in Program 14-06. If the system has ARS, dialing
9 accesses ARS. The route chosen is based on the DISA Class of Service, which is determined
by the password the caller dials.
•25-12-01 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
Define the trunk route selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code
assigned in Program 11-09-02. The route selected is based on the DISA caller’s Class of Ser-
vice, which is in turn determined by the password the caller dial. Program 14-06 is used to set
up the Trunk Group Routing.
•34-03-01 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
Use this program to assign the Trunk Group Route (1-100) chosen when a user seizes a tie
line and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program 14-06. If the system has ARS, dialing 9
accesses ARS.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 363

 Trunk Group Routing

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Dialing 9 activates ARS, overriding trunk group routing.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Instead of using Trunk Group Routing, an extension user can place a trunk call by:
• Pressing a line key
• Dialing a trunk service code
• Pressing a trunk group key (refer to the Trunk Group feature)
• Dialing a trunk group service code (refer to the Trunk Group feature).
Data Communications / Direct Inward System Access (DISA) / Tie Lines
DISA (Program 25-10) and tie lines (Program 34-03) have separate Trunk Group Routing
programs.
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Programmable Function Keys
Programmable Function Keys simplify placing calls using Trunk Group Routing.
Ringing Line Preference
The system uses Trunk Group Routing programming (Program 14-06) when setting up Ring-
ing Line Preference.
Trunk Groups
Use trunk group programming to set the order in which users access trunks within a specific
trunk group.

Operation
To place a call using Trunk Group Routing:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 9.
3. Dial number.
OR
1. At system phone, press Trunk Group Routing key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *05).
Also see the “Loop Keys” feature.
2. Dial number.

364 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Trunk Groups
Trunk Groups

Aspila EX
• Available - 100 trunk groups.

Description
Trunk Groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. With Trunk Groups,
users can have loop (rotary) keys for trunk calls. Incoming trunk group calls ring these loop keys.
For outgoing calls, the user presses a loop key to access the first available trunk within the group.
You set the access order in trunk group programming. The system allows up to 100 trunk groups.

Loop keys give an extension user more available function keys, since the user doesn’t need a sepa-
rate line key for each trunk. The user only needs one loop key for each trunk group. This simplifies
placing and answering calls.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
All trunks are in group 1.

Programming
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Allocate the circuits on the NTCPU or DSPDB PCBs for either DTMF receiving or dial tone
detection.
•14-02-11 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup - Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone
Use this option to enable/disable the system’s ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not
detected. This pertains to calls using Loop Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial, or
Save number Dialed (0=disabled, 1=enabled). It does not pertain to line keys or Direct Trunk
Access calls.
•14-05-01 : Trunk Groups
Assign trunks to trunk groups (1-100).
•14-07-01 : Trunk Access Map Setup
Assign trunks to Access Maps (1-200).
•15-06-01 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
Assign Access Maps (1-200) to extensions.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign function keys for trunk group access (code *02 + group) or loop keys (code *05 +
0=incoming, 1=outgoing, 2=both + trunk group (001-100). If loop keys are used, assign the
loop key to a trunk group in Program 15-13.
•20-02-02 : System Options for System Telephones - Trunk Loop Access Key Operating Mode
Set the operating mode of the extension’s trunk group keys (Incoming and Outgoing Access =
0, Outgoing Access =1, Incoming Access = 2).
•21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Dial Tone Detection Timer
If dial tone detection is enabled, the system will wait this interval for the telco to return dial
tone. When the interval expires, the system assumes dial tone is not present. To disable this
timer (and have the system wait continuously), enter 0.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 365

 Trunk Groups

Related Features
Abbreviated Dialing
Unless a user preselects a trunk, Trunk Group programming selects the trunk Abbreviated
Dialing users for trunk calls.
Automatic Route Selection
If a user dials a number that is not programmed in ARS, the system can route the call to a
trunk group.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Instead of using Trunk Groups, an extension user can place a trunk call by:
• Pressing a line key
• Dialing a trunk access code
• Dialing a Trunk Group Routing code (9) - refer to the Trunk Group Routing feature
Dial Tone Detection
Refer to this feature for the specifics on how the system handles Dial Tone Detection.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
All DID trunks of the same type should be placed in the same trunk group. These trunk groups
must then be assigned to a DID Translation Table.
Loop Keys
Program a function key as a Loop Key to allow an extension user to answer incoming trunks
within a trunk group.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify placing and answering trunk group calls.
Ring Groups
Trunks ring extensions according to Ring Group programming.
Tie Lines
To simply placing calls over your tie lines, you can put the tie lines in a trunk group.
Trunk Group Routing
Trunk Group Routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the Trunk Group
Routing code (9) for trunk calls.

366 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Trunk Groups

Operation
To place a call over a trunk group:
1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 804.
3. Dial trunk group number (1-9 or 001-100 ).
4. Dial number.
OR
1. Press trunk group key (PGM 15-07 or SC 852: *02 + group)
2. Dial number.

To answer an incoming trunk group call:

1. Lift handset.
2. Press flashing trunk group key.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 367

 Trunk Queuing/Camp On
Trunk Queuing/Camp On

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Trunk Queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on hook for a busy trunk or trunk
group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available.
The user does not have to manually retry the trunk later. Trunk Queuing lets the caller know when
the call can go through. If the extension user does not answer the Trunk Queuing ring, the system
cancels the queue request.

With Trunk Camp On, an extension user can queue (wait in line) off hook for a busy trunk or trunk
group to become free. The caller connects to the trunk when the trunk becomes free. As with Trunk
Queuing, the user does not have to manually retry the trunk later.

Any number of extensions may simultaneously queue or Camp On for the same trunk or trunk
group. When a trunk becomes free, the system connects the extensions in the order that the requests
were left.

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Trunk Queuing and Trunk Camp On (code 35).
•20-01-08 : System Options - Trunk Queuing Callback Time
Set the Trunk Queuing Callback Time (0-64800 seconds). Trunk Queuing Callback rings an
extension for this interval.
•20-01-09 : System Options - Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time
Set the Callback/Trunk Queuing Cancel Time (0-64800 seconds). The system cancels an
extension’s Callback or Trunk Queuing request after this interval.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-11-07 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - Transfer Without Holding
Disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Transfer Without Holding.

368 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Trunk Queuing/Camp On

Related Features
Automatic Route Selection
With Automatic Route Selection, Trunk Queuing automatically queues for the least costly
route.
Call Waiting/Camp On and Callback
A user can Camp On or leave a Callback request for an extension.
Central Office Calls, Placing
Other programmed options for outgoing calls can affect how a call is placed. Check or pro-
gram these options as needed (ex: access, line/loop keys, etc.).
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify Trunk Queuing operation.

Operation
To queue for a busy trunk:
1. Try to access busy trunk.
2. Press Trunk Queuing/Camp On key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 35).
3. Hang up to leave a Trunk Queuing request.
OR
Wait off hook to Camp On to the trunk.

To answer when Trunk Queuing calls you back:

1. Lift handset.

To cancel a Trunk Queueing/Camp On request:

1. At system phone, press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 870.
3. At system phone, press SPK to hang up.
OR
At single line telephone, hang up.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 369

 Universal Answer
Universal Answer

Please refer to Central Office Calls, Answering (page 116) for information on this
feature.

370 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Mail
Voice Mail

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The system is fully compatible with NEC Infrontia’s analogue Voice Mail with Automated Atten-
dant Systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive Voice Mail and Auto-
mated Attendant features. Voice Mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate
written messages and telephone tag. This frees a company’s busy receptionists and secretaries for
more productive work.

Automated Attendant automatically answers the system’s incoming calls. After listening to a cus-
tomized message, an outside caller can dial a system extension or use Voice Mail.

Integrated Voice Mail enhances the telephone system with the following features:
• Call Forwarding to Voice Mail
An extension user can forward their calls to Voice Mail. Once forwarded, calls to the exten-
sion connect to that extension’s mailbox. The caller can leave a message in the mailbox
instead of calling back later. Forwarding can occur for all calls immediately, for unanswered
calls or only when the extension is busy. When a user transfers a call to an extension for-
warded to Voice Mail, the call waits for the Delayed Call Forwarding time before routing to
the called extension’s mailbox. This gives the transferring party the option of retrieving the
call instead of having it go directly to the mailbox.
• Leaving a Message
Voice Mail lets a system phone extension user easily leave a message at an extension that is
unanswered, busy or in Do Not Disturb. The caller just presses their Voice Mail key to leave a
message in the called extension’s mailbox. There is no need to call back later. A VRS
announcement can periodically remind users that they messages waiting to which they have
not responded.
• Transferring to Voice Mail
By using Transfer to Voice Mail, a system phone extension user can Transfer a call to the
user’s own or a co- worker’s mailbox. After the Transfer goes through, the caller can leave a
message in the mailbox.
• Conversation Record
While on a call, an extension user can have Voice Mail record the conversation. The system
phone user just presses the Voice Mail Record key; the ESL user dials a code. Once recorded,
the Voice Messaging System stores the conversation as a new message in the user’s mailbox.
After calling their mailbox, a user can save, edit or delete the recorded conversation.
• Personal Answering Machine Emulation
A system phone user can have their idle extension emulate a personal answering machine. This
lets Voice Mail screen their calls, just like their answering machine at home. If activated, the
extension’s incoming calls route to the user’s subscriber mailbox. Once the mailbox answers,
the user hears two alert tones followed by the caller’s incoming message. The system phone user
can then:
- Let the call go through to their mailbox
- Intercept the call before it goes to their mailbox
- Reject the call before it goes to their mailbox
• Voice Mail Overflow
If Voice Mail automatically answers trunks, Voice Mail Overflow can reroute those trunks to
other extensions when all Voice Mail ports do not answer or, with certain software, are busy.
During periods of high traffic, this prevents the outside calls from ringing Voice Mail for an
inordinate amount of time. There are two types of Voice Mail Overflow: Immediate and

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 371

 Voice Mail
Delayed. With immediate overflow, calls immediately reroute to other extensions when all
Voice Mail ports do not answer or, with certain software, are busy. With delayed overflow,
calls reroute after a preset interval. Without any type of overflow, the outside calls ring Voice
Mail until a port becomes available or the outside caller hangs up.
• Voice Mail Caller ID
Voice Mail can use Caller ID information to identify the outside caller that left a message in a
user’s mailbox.

Voice Mail Queuing

When accessing the voice mail, the system provides a voice mail queue. If all the voice mail ports
are busy, any calls trying to get to the voice mail will be placed in queue. As the voice mail ports
become available, the calls will be connected to the voice mail in the order in which they were
received.

As the Voice Mail Queue follows Department Hunting programming, the queue can hold a maxi-
mum of 10 calls. If the queue is full or if the voice mail ports are not assigned to a Department
Group, the calls will be handled as though there were no voice mail queuing feature enabled. The
calls will either access voice mail if a port is available or they will receive a busy signal.

The Voice Mail Queuing feature does not work with the Conversation Record feature.

Conditions
(A.) The periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for Voice Response System
(VRS).
(B.) Ring Group calls do not follow extension call forwarding to voice mail.

Default Setting
Disabled.

372 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Mail

Programming
•10-09-01 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
Assign at least one circuit for DTMF reception (type 0 or 1).
Use the following as a guide when allocating DTMF receivers:
- In light traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every 10 devices that use them.
- In heavy traffic sites, allocate one DTMF receiver for every five devices that use them.
•11-07-01 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
Assign a Department Group pilot number for the Voice Mail (8 digits max). The extensions
are assigned to the group in Program 16-02-01.
•15-03-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup - Terminal Type
Set all SLIU ports used for Voice Mail as type 1.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a Voice Mail key to an extension. You must enter the Voice Mail key code (code 77) fol-
lowed by:
- Your own extension number if you are setting up your own Voice Mail key.
- A virtual extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for a virtual extension.
- A co-worker’s extension number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an installed
extension.
- An uninstalled extension’s number if you are setting up a Message Center key for an unin-
stalled extension.
(Optional) Assign a Voice Mail Record key to an extension (code 69).
(Optional) Assign a Personal Answering Machine Emulation key (code 16).
•16-02-01 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
Put all the Voice Mail extensions in an extension group. This allows DILs to Voice Mail to
ring other Voice Mail extensions when the DIL’s assigned port is busy. Assign up to Voice
Mail extensions to an Extension (Department) Group. Only one Voice Mail group is allowed
per system.
•20-02-09 : System Options for System Telephones - Disconnect Supervision
Enable (1) disconnect supervision for the system.
•20-03-01 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - SLT Call Waiting Answer Mode
Enter 1 for this option to enable Conversation Record (Service Code 754) at SLT sets.
•20-03-02 : System Options for Single Line Telephones - SLT MOH or Ringback on Trans-
ferred Calls
24-02-02 : System Options for Transfer - MOH or Ringback on Transferred Calls
Use this option to enable (0) or disable (1) MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a transferred
caller hears Music on Hold while their call rings the destination extension. If disabled (1), a
transferred caller hears ringback while their call rings the destination extension. For this
option to work with voice mail, the transferred call must be an unscreened transfer.
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Continued Dialing
Enable Continued Dialing (1) for all extensions that will dial Voice Mail features.
•22-01-04 : System Options for Incoming Calls - DIL No Answer Recall Time
If setting up Delayed Voice Mail Overflow, enter a timer value greater than 0. Overflow will
occur after this interval (provided the other related programming is correct). If setting up
Immediate Voice Mail Overflow, enter 0.
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
Assign Service Type 4 to each trunk you want to ring into Voice Mail as a Direct Inward Line
(DIL).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 373

 Voice Mail
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
To enable Voice Mail Overflow, assign selected extensions to a Ring Group that will ring for
unanswered DILs to Voice Mail ports. In Program 22-06, enter 1 to enable overflow ringing.
•22-07-01 : DIL Assignment
Assign a Voice Mail port as the DIL destination for each trunk that should directly ring into
Voice Mail. If all Voice Mail ports are in the same unique Extension (Department) Group (see
Program 16-02 below), the DIL will ring another Voice Mail port if its assigned port is busy.
•22-08-01 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
For Voice Mail Overflow, enter the Ring Group that unanswered DILs to Voice Mail will ring
after the DIL Call Waiting time (Program 22-01-04).
•24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set the interval a transferred call waits at a forwarded extension before routing to the called
extension’s mailbox.
•40-03-01 : Message Recording Setup - Voice Mail Recording Time
Set the amount of time the voice mail can record a message (1-10 minutes).
•40-03-02 : Message Recording Setup - Guidance Message
Select a guidance message in case recording is not allowed (0=fixed, 1=answer message mailbox).
•40-03-03 : Message Recording Setup - Response Message
Determine if a response message is automatically sent out when busy (0=disable, 1=enable).
•40-07-01 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail
Specify the language to be used for the voice mail (default=1, English). Although the system
allows this option to be changed in programming, the language will only change if the
DSPDB has the firmware which provides the newly selected language.
•45-01-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Voice Mail Department Group Number
Assign which Extension (Department) Group number (0-64) is to be assigned as the voice
mail group. An entry of ‘0’ means there is no voice mail installed.
•45-01-02 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Voice Mail Master Name
Enter the Voice Mail master name up to 12 characters.
•45-01-03 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Voice Mail Screening
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to process the Call Screening commands (1 +
extension number) sent from the Voice Mail. You should normally enable this option to allow
for Voice Mail Call Screening. Disable this option if your system has been modified so that
extensions begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.). Also see the Flexible System Number-
ing feature.
•45-01-04 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Park and Page
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to process the Voice Mail’s Park and Page (*)
commands. You should normally enable this option.
•45-01-05 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Message Wait
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to process the Voice Mail’s Message Wait (#)
commands. You should normally enable this option. If enabled, be sure that the programmed
Message Notification strings don’t contain the code 805 for trunk access.
•45-01-06 : Voice Mail Integration Options, Record Alert Tone Interval Time
This timer sets the interval (0-64800 seconds) between Voice Mail Conversation Record
alerts.
•80-03-01 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-04-01 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Use these programs to set the criteria for DTMF dial, ringback and busy tones.

374 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Mail

Related Features
Call Forwarding, Fixed
Fixed Call Forwarding can be used to transfer a user’s unanswered calls to their voice mail.
Call Forwarding does not have to be programmed manually by every user.
Caller ID
Caller ID information will be passed from the Voice Mail to an extension for pre-answer dis-
play on an unscreened transfer from Voice Mail.
Data Communications
With APA/APR modules installed, make sure to setup up other required programming.
Direct Inward Line
To have the Voice Mail Automated Attendant answer a trunk, program the trunk as a DIL to a
Voice Mail port.
Message Waiting
Message Waiting functions normally with Voice Mail installed.
One-Touch Calling
An extension can have a One-Touch Key for the Voice Mail Master Number.
Programmable Function Keys
Function keys simplify calling the Voice Mail system.
Voice Response System (VRS)
The periodic reminder message requires a DSP daughter board for VRS.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 375

 Voice Mail

Operation
CALLING YOUR MAILBOX

To call your mailbox:

With a system phone, our Voice Mail key flashes green and your Message Center keys
flash red when they have messages waiting. If you don’t have a Voice Mail key, your MW
LED flashes instead. For DSL phones, the FTR key flashes.
System Phone
1. Press your Voice Mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 77).
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial the Voice Mail Master Number. After Voice Mail Answers, dial
your mailbox number.
Your mailbox number is normally the same as your extension number. You may
optionally dial a co-worker’s mailbox - or use this procedure to call your mailbox from a
co-worker’s phone.
OR
Press idle CALL key and dial 717.
2. If requested by Voice Mail, enter your security code.
Ask your Voice Mail system administrator for your security code.
Normally, your MW LED goes out (if applicable). If it continues to flash, you have
unanswered “Message Waiting” requests or a new “General Message”. Go to “To check
your messages” below.

Single Line Telephone

1. Lift handset and dial 717.
If you are at a co-worker’s phone, you can dial the Voice Mail master number and
your mailbox number instead. You can also use this procedure from your own phone to
call a co-worker’s mailbox.
2. If requested by Voice Mail, enter your security code.

LEAVING A MESSAGE (System Phone Only)

To leave a message in the mailbox of an unanswered extension: The extension you
call can be busy, in DND or unanswered.
1. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 77)
The Voice Mail system will prompt you to leave a message.

376 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Mail
FORWARDING CALLS TO YOUR MAILBOX

To activate or cancel Call Forwarding:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial 888.
OR
Press your Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 16).
2. Dial Call Forwarding condition:
2 = Busy or not answered
4 = Immediate
6 = Not answered
0 = Cancel
3. Dial Voice Mail master number or press Voice Mail key.
4. Dial Call Forwarding type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
5. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed 888 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station) key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.

TRANSFERRING CALLS TO A MAILBOX

To Transfer your active call to a mailbox:

System Phone
1. Press HOLD.
2. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 77).
3. Dial number of mailbox to receive Transfer.
This number can be your mailbox number or a co-worker’s mailbox number.
OR
Press DSS Console or One Touch key for extension who’s mailbox will receive the Transfer.
If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits
before routing the called user’s mailbox. This gives you the option of retrieving the call
instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail.
4. Hang up.
Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.
OR
1. Dial extension number or press a DSS Console key for extension who’s mailbox will receive
the Transfer.
2. Press Voice Mail key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 77).
3. Hang up.
Voice Mail will prompt your caller to leave a message in the mailbox you selected.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 377

 Voice Mail
Single Line Telephone
1. Single Line Telephone:
Hookflash.
DSL Telephone:
HOLD.
2. Dial Voice Mail master number followed by destination mailbox.
If the Transfer destination is an extension forwarded to Voice Mail, the call waits
before routing the called user’s mailbox. This gives you the option of retrieving the call
instead of having it picked up by Voice Mail.
3. Hang up.

RECORDING YOUR CALL (System Phone Only)

To record your active call in your mailbox:

Single Line Telephone

1. Single Line Telephone:
Hookflash.
DSL Telephone:
HOLD.
2. Dial 754.
The system automatically reconnects you to your call.
To stop recording, hookflash twice. You can restart and stop recording as required.

PERSONAL ANSWERING MACHINE EMULATION (System Phone Only)

To enable or cancel Personal Answering Machine Emulation:
1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial 888.
OR
Press your Call Forward (Station) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: code 16).
2. Dial 1 and the Call Forwarding type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
3. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT) if you dialed 888 in step 1.
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Station) key flashes when Call Forwarding is activated.

378 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Mail
When Personal Answering Machine Emulation broadcasts your caller’s message,
you can:
Your telephone must be idle (not on a call).
1. Do nothing.
The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox. The broadcast stops
when your caller hangs up.
OR
1. (Optional) Lift the handset.
2. Press the flashing CALL key to intercept the call.
You connect to the caller. The system records the first part of the message in your
mailbox. The line key changes from red to green.
OR
1. (Optional) Lift the handset.
2. Press a line key or idle CALL key for a new call.
The message is recorded in your mailbox.
OR
1. (If you have Automatic Handsfree) Press a line key or idle CALL key for a new call.
The message is recorded in your mailbox.
OR
1. Press SPK to cut off the message broadcast and send the call to your mailbox.
Voice Mail records the entire message in your mailbox.

CHECKING YOUR MESSAGES (System Phone Only)

To check your messages:

1. Press CHECK
2. Dial 841.
You can have any combination of the message types in the table below on your phone.
If you see. . . You have. . .

VOICE MESSAGE New messages in your Voice Mail mailbox

n MESSAGES
CHECK MESSAGE VRS Not listened to the current General Message
GENERAL MESSAGE
CHECK MESSAGE Message Waiting requests left at your phone by
(name) your co-workers

3. Press VOL s or VOL t to scroll through your display.

4. When you find the message you want to answer, press CALL1. You’ll either:
- Go to your Voice Mail mailbox.
- Listen to the new General Message.
- Automatically call the extension that left you a Message Waiting.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 379

 Voice Over
Voice Over

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Voice Over lets a user interrupt a system phone extension user busy on another call. With Voice
Over, the busy system phone extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the inter-
rupting party. The system phone extension user can respond to the interrupting party without being
heard by the original caller. If desired, the system phone extension user can easily switch between
their original caller and the interrupting co-worker. The original caller and the interrupting party
can never hear each other’s conversation.

Voice Over could help a lawyer, for example, waiting for an urgent call. While on a call with
another client, the lawyer’s paralegal could announce the urgent call as soon as it comes in. The
lawyer could then give the paralegal instructions how to handle the situation - all without the origi-
nal client hearing the conversation.

Either a system phone or single line user can initiate a Voice Over, but only a system phone user
can receive a Voice Over.

To enable Voice Over, a system phone should have a function key programmed for Voice Over. In
addition to one- touch Voice Over operation, the key shows the Voice Over status as follows:

When the key is . . . You are . . .

Off Not using Voice Over

Flashing Listening to the interrupting party

On Responding to the interrupting

party

Conditions
(A.) While active, Voice Over uses a Conference circuit on a NTCPU. Refer to the Conference fea-
ture for Conference circuit programming.
(B.) Voice Over can interrupt a trunk call only if the trunk has been set up for at least six seconds.

Default Setting
Disabled.

380 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Over

Programming
•10-03-03 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Transmit CODEC Gain Type
10-03-04 : PCB Setup, For SLIU Unit - Receive CODEC Gain Type
Customize the transmit and receive levels of the CODEC Gain Types for single line tele-
phones.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
Assign a function key for Voice Over (code 48).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-06 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Automatic Off Hook Signaling
In an extension’s Class of Service, enter 1 if you want callers to a busy extension to hear
Voice Over (busy/ring) tone. Enter 0 if you want callers to hear busy tone. (The caller must
then dial the service code (assigned in Program 11-16-04) to hear Voice/Over tone.
•21-01-03 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
Program how long an extension must wait before using the Voice Over feature can be used on
a call (this timer waits until this timer expires before putting a call in a talk state). This timer
also affects Barge In.

Related Features
Conference
An extension user cannot Voice Over to another extension user in a Conference.
Off Hook Signaling
When a user calls an extension busy on a call, they can send an off hook signal indicating they
are trying to get through.
Programmable Function Keys
Answering a Voice Over requires a uniquely programmed Voice Over key.
Single Line Telephones
Single line telephones can only initiate Voice Over.
Transfer
If you place a call on Hold and then Voice Over to a busy extension, the call on Hold will not
Transfer to the busy party when you end the Voice Over.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 381

 Voice Over

Operation
To initiate a Voice Over to a busy extension:
If you hear busy instead, you may be able to dial 7 and hear Voice Over (busy/ring)
tone.
1. Press Voice Over key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 48)
OR
Dial 890.
You hear an alert tone and the Voice Over key flashes. You can talk to the called party
after the alert tone ends.
In order to use Service Code 890 for Voice Over, Program 11-16-08 (Voice Mail Ser-
vice Code) must be undefined.

To respond to a Voice Over alert tone to your extension:

You can only respond if you have a Voice Over key.
1. Press and hold flashing Voice Over key.
The Voice Over key lights steadily (green) and you can talk to the interrupting party.
You cannot respond by dialing the Voice Over Service Code.

To return to your original call:

1. Release Voice Over key.
Your Voice Over key flashes when you are talking to your original call.
To switch between your original call and the interrupting party, just keep pressing the
Voice Over key.

382 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Response System (VRS)
Voice Response System (VRS)

Aspila EX
• Available - 16 Channels

Description
The DSP daughter board provides the option for Voice Response System (VRS) which gives the
system voice recording and playback capability. This enhances the system with:
• VRS Messages - are 48 system messages used for the General Message, Automated Atten-
dant greetings and the 900 Preamble
• General Message - provides a prerecorded message to which any user can listen
• Personal Greeting - lets an extension user record a message and forward their calls. Callers
to the extension hear the recorded message and are then redirected.
• Park and Page - parks a call at an extension and automatically pages the user to pick it up
• Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance) - answers incoming calls, plays a greeting to
the caller and then lets the caller directly dial a system extension
• Transfer to the VRS - Any extension user can Transfer their outside call to the VRS.
• Voice Prompting Messages - plays call and feature status messages to users
• 900 Preamble - alerts callers using 900 lines of the cost and features of the “pay-per-call” service
• Time, Date and Station Number Check - lets a system phone extension user quickly hear a
recording for the time, date, or the extension’s number.

VRS Messages
The VRS allows you to record up to 48 VRS messages. You allocate these messages for Automated
Attendant greetings, the General Message and the 900 Preamble message.The maximum duration
of any one VRS message is not programmable. VRS messages are stored permanently in the event
of a power failure.

Any on-premise extension, DISA or DID caller can listen, record and erase VRS Messages (unless
restricted in programming). DISA and DID callers use the same procedures as on-premise users,
except that they must additionally enter a VRS password.

General Message
A General Message is a prerecorded message available to all callers. A General Message typically
contains important company information that all employees should hear. To hear the General Mes-
sage, an employee can go to any system phone and press 4 (for General Message). You can restrict
the ability to record the General Message in an extension’s Class of Service. This allows you to
give recording capability to the System Administrator or Communications Manager, for example,
but not any employee.The MW LED at each telephone flashes when a new General Message is
recorded. Once the extension user listens to the message, the MW LED goes out.

Personal Greeting
Personal Greeting allows an extension user to record a message and forward their calls. Callers to
the extension hear the recorded message and are then forwarded to the new destination. With Per-
sonal Greeting, an extension user can add a personal touch to their Call Forwards. For example, a
user can record:
“Hi. This is John Smith. I’ll be out of the office today. In my absence, Mary Jones can answer all
your questions. Please hold on for Mary.”

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 383

 Voice Response System (VRS)
After they record their Personal Greeting, the extension user chooses the condition that will activate
Personal Greeting. Personal Greeting will activate for:
• Calls to the extension when it is busy or not answered
• All calls immediately
• Calls to the extension that are unanswered

The extension user then selects the destination for their calls. The choices are:
• A co-worker’s extension
• Personal Greeting only (without forwarding)
• The extension user’s own subscriber mailbox (if Voice Mail (DSP) is installed)
• Off-Premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing
In addition, the user can have Personal Greeting activate automatically for all calls, just CO (trunk)
calls or just Intercom calls. When the user implements Personal Greeting for all calls, the system
plays the greeting and reroutes:
• Calls transferred from the Automated Attendant (OPA)
• DISA calls ringing the extension
• DID calls ringing the extension
• Direct Inward Lines (DILs) ringing the extension
• Intercom calls

With Personal Greeting for only CO (trunk) calls, the system reroutes all of the calls listed above
except Intercom calls.

Personal Greetings are stored permanantly. If there is a commercial power failure or if the system
resets, any recorded Personal Greetings are kept.

Unique Personal Greeting Conditions

If a call comes into the extension when there are no VRS ports available to play the Per-
sonal Greeting, the system forwards the call without playing the recorded message to
the caller.
If an extension has Personal Greeting (RNA) enabled, Intercom calls that voice
announce are not subject to Personal Greeting rerouting.
Personal Greeting does not reroute normal Ring Group calls. Calls transferred from a
co-worker or Voice Mail route to the forwarding destination without listening to the
Personal Greeting.

Park and Page

When an extension user is away from their phone, Park and Page can let them know when they
have a call waiting to be answered. To enable Park and Page, the user records a Personal Greeting
along with an additional Paging announcement. Park and Page will then answer an incoming call
and play the Personal Greeting to the caller. The caller then listens to Music on Hold (if available)
while the system broadcasts the prerecorded Paging announcement. When the extension user hears
the Page, they can go to any telephone and use Directed Call Pickup to intercept the call.

For example, John Smith could record a Personal Greeting that says:
“Hello, this is John Smith. I am away from my phone right now but please hold on while I am auto-
matically paged.”

The prerecorded Paging announcement could say:

“John Smith, you have a call waiting on your line.”

384 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Response System (VRS)
The incoming caller hears the first message and listens to Music on Hold while the system broad-
casts the second message. John Smith could then walk to any phone and pick up his call. If John
doesn’t pick up the call, the Page periodically repeats.

Park and Page follows the rules for Personal Greeting for All Calls, immediately rerouted. This
means that Park and Page will activate for ringing Intercom calls, DID calls and DISA calls. It will
also activate for calls transferred from the Automated Attendant. Additionally, calls from the Auto-
mated Attendant follow Automatic Overflow routing if not picked up. Park and Page will activate
for transferred outside calls but not play the Personal Greeting to the caller. If a call comes in when
the specified Page zone is busy, the system broadcasts the announcement when the zone becomes
free.

Automated Attendant (Operator Assistance)

Automated Attendant automatically answers outside calls, plays a prerecorded greeting and then
lets the outside callers directly dial system extensions, Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail.
Automated Attendant provides immediate answering and routing of outside calls without the need
for an operator or dispatcher. Automated Attendant provides:
• Single Digit Dialing
Single Digit Dialing allows Automated Attendant callers to dial extensions, Department Call-
ing Groups, and Voice Mail by pressing a single digit. For example, your Automated Atten-
dant can greet calls with, “Thank you for calling. To place an order, dial 1. To check on an
existing order, dial 2. To speak with an operator, dial 0.” You can set up single digit dialing
for each VRS Message programmed to answer outside calls via the Automated Attendant.
This allows you to set up day/night/holiday greetings or unique greetings for each incoming
trunk. (Keep in mind that, with a default system, if you assign destinations to digits 3, 4 and 5,
outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.)

• Simultaneous Call Answering

With VRS installed, the Automated Attendant can answer up to 16 calls simultaneously.

• Flexible Routing
The outside caller can directly dial any system extension, Department Calling Group or Voice
Mail. If the caller dials a busy extension, Automated Attendant allows them to dial another
extension or wait for the busy extension to become free.

• Automatic Overflow
Automatic Overflow can automatically redirect a call if it can’t go through. This can happen if
all VRS ports are busy, if the called extension doesn’t answer, or if the caller misdials or waits
too long to dial. (This would occur if the caller is using a dial pulse telephone.) When the call
overflows, it rings a designated Ring Group or the Voice Mail system.

• Programmable Automated Attendant Greetings

You can record a different greeting for each trunk answered by the Automated Attendant. The
greetings can be different in the day, at night or on holidays or weekends. You can also have a
special greeting if the caller misdials. You record the greetings just the way you want. For
example, “Dial the three-digit extension number you wish to reach, dial 500 for Sales or dial
600 for Customer Service.” When assigning and recording Automated Attendant greetings,
you can choose among the 48 VRS messages.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 385

 Voice Response System (VRS)
Transfer to the VRS
Any extension user can Transfer their outside call to the VRS. This lets their caller take
advantage of the Automated Attendant’s extensive routing capabilities. To Transfer the call,
the user simply places the call on Hold, dials the unique VRS service code (set up in system
programming) and hangs up.

Voice Prompting Messages

The VRS feature provides the system with Voice Prompting Messages. These Voice Prompting
Messages tell the extension user the status or progress of their call. For example, if a user calls
extension 300 when it is busy, they hear, “Station 300 is busy. For Callback, dial 2.”

900 Preamble
If the system has trunks that are part of a 900 (caller paid) service, the VRS can automatically play
a prerecorded message when a user answers the call. This prerecorded message should describe the
900 service features and cost. The 900 Preamble ensures that the caller is always aware that they
have accessed a 900 “pay- per-call” service. A system user cannot converse with the caller until the
preamble message ends. If the caller hangs up before the message completes, they are not charged
for the call. If the caller waits for the message to end, they can talk to a system user and call charg-
ing begins. The system will answer as many 900 calls as there are available VRS ports. If a 900
calls comes in when all VRS ports are busy, the call will not appear on an extension until a VRS
port is available.

You can also use the 900 Preamble message to set up an Auto-Answer with Greeting application.
When a receptionist answers a call, the VRS can play a preamble message such as, “Welcome to
ABC Company. How can I help you?” When the caller replies, the receptionist answers, “One
moment please,” and quickly extends the call to the desired party. This ensures that all incoming
calls are answered quickly, courteously and consistently.

Time, Date and Station Number Check

If the system has a DSP daughter board installed for VRS, any system phone user can find out the
time, date or the extension’s number while their phone is idle (on hook). The time and date check
saves the user time since they don’t have to look for a clock or calendar. Hearing the extension
number conveniently identifies non-display keysets. To find out their extension number, the user
presses 6 (for Number). To listen to the time and date, the user presses 8 (for Time).

Conditions
(A.) Park and Page announcements will only repeat once.
(B.) VAU Record time is fixed at 2 minutes and it cannot be change.

Default Setting
Disabled.

Programming
•11-12-54 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) - VRS Routing
Define the service code a user should dial when transferring a call to the VRS.
•15-07-01 : Programming Function Keys
For one-button access to the Call Forwarding (device) setup code (713), assign a Call For-
warding (Device) key (code 17).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class of Service (1-15) to extensions.

386 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Response System (VRS)
•20-07-13 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS Record
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to record,
erase and listen to VRS messages.
•20-07-14 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS General Message Listen
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial 4 or
Service Code 711 and listen to their General Message.
•20-07-15 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) - VRS General Message Record
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial Ser-
vice Code 712 and record, listen to and erase the General Message.
•20-11-15 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) - VRS Personal Greeting
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to dial Service
Code 713 7 to record, listen to or erase a Personal Greeting. This option also affects Park and Page.
•21-01-02 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Intercom Interdigit Time
Automated Attendant callers must dial digits within this interval. If the caller doesn’t, they
hear busy tone and must hang up and dial again.
•22-02-01 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS
Automated Attendant.
•22-04-01 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
Assign extensions to the Ring Group programmed in 25-03 and 25-04 that should receive the
rerouted calls.
•24-02-03 : System Options for Transfer - Delayed Call Forwarding Time
Set how long a telephone with Personal Greeting options 2 or 6 enabled will ring before the
call reroutes to the programmed destination.
•25-02-01 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message
For each Night Service mode, enter 1 if trunk should be automatically answered by VRS.
•25-03-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
Set the destination that Automated Attendant (OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an
incorrect extension number. This also sets the options for DISA calls. The system allows Ring
Groups=1-100, DSPDB Voice Mail=101, In-Skin Voice Mail=102 or Disconnect=0.
•25-04-01 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
Set the destination that Automated Attendant (OPA) calls ring if the OPA caller dials an
extension that doesn’t answer or is busy. This also sets the options for DISA calls. The system
allows Ring Groups=1-100, DSPDB Voice Mail=101, In-Skin Voice Mail=102 or Discon-
nect=0.
•25-05-01 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment
For each trunk that will be answered by the VRS, enter the VRS message (1-16) the outside
caller hears if they dial incorrectly after answer. If you enter 0, the call reroutes according to
Program 25-03 and Program 25-04. Make one entry for each Night Service mode.
•25-06-02 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
Set up single digit dialing for Automated Attendant callers. For each VRS Message pro-
grammed to answer outside calls, specify
• The digit the Automated Attendant caller dials (1-12, where 10=0, 11=* and 12=#). (Keep in
mind that if you assign destinations to digits 3 and 4, outside callers will not be able to dial sys-
tem extensions.)
• The destination reached (four digits maximum) when the caller dials the single digit code.
•25-07-02 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DID/DISA No Answer Time
If an Automated Attendant caller dials an extension that doesn’t answer, the call will wait this
interval before rerouting to the Ring Group specified in Program 25-03 and 25-04. This set-
ting also affects unanswered DISA calls.
•25-13-01 : System Option for DISA - VRS Password
Enter the password DISA callers must dial before the system will allow them to record, listen

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 387

 Voice Response System (VRS)
to or erase VRS messages.
•31-02-01 : Internal Paging Group Assignment - Internal Paging Group Number
When using Park and Page, assign extensions to Internal Paging Zones. An extension must be
assigned to a 2-digit zone in order to access any of the 2-digit zones (Internal Page Zones 0, 1-
9, 00, 01-64).
•31-04-01 : External Paging Zone Group
When using Park and Page, assign each External Paging Zone (1-9) to an External Paging Group
(1-8) used for accessing the zone.
•31-07-01 : Combined Paging Assignments
When using Park and Page, aor each External Paging Zone (1-9 and 0 for All Call), assign a
corresponding Internal Zone for Combined Paging.
•40-08-01 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes
Select the language to be used for the mailboxes (default=1, English). Although the system
allows this option to be changed in programming, the language will only change if the
DSPDB has the firmware which provides the newly selected language.
•40-10-01 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VAU Fixed Message
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to play the fixed VRS messages (such as “You
have a message.”).
•40-10-02 : Voice Announcement Service Option - General Message Number
Enter the number of the VRS message you want to use for the General Message (01-48). The
message you select should not be used as a VRS message.
•40-10-03 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS No Answer Destination
When all VRS ports are busy, incoming DILs and DISA calls wait for the VRS No-Answer
Time (Program 40-10-04) and then ring the VRS No Answer Destination Ring Group.
•40-10-04 : Voice Announcement Service Option - VRS No-Answer Time
If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call
to the extension will wait this interval for a VRS port to become free. If a VRS port is still not
available, the call will ring the VRS No Answer Destination set in Program 40-10-03.
•40-10-05 : Voice Announcement Service Option - Park and Page Repeat Timer
If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the Paging announcement repeats.
•40-11-01 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment
For each trunk that should have the 900 Preamble option, enter the number of the VRS mes-
sage (1-48) that is your recorded preamble message. Enter 0 for no preamble.

Related Features
Voice Maiil
Park and Page and Personal Greeting can also be programmed in the VRS.

388 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Response System (VRS)

Operation
VRS MESSAGES

To record a VRS message:

1. Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 716.
3. Dial 7 (Record).
4. Dial the VRS message number you want to record (01-48).
5. When you hear, “Please start recording” followed by a beep, record your message.
Normally, your message cannot exceed 16 seconds. If you hear, “Recording finished,”
you have exceeded the allowed message length.
6. Press # to end recording
OR
Hang up to save the message.

To listen to a previously recorded VRS message:

1. Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 716.
3. Dial 5 (Listen).
4. Dial the VRS message number to which you want to listen (01-48).
You’ll hear the previously recorded message. If you hear a beep instead, there is no
previous message recorded.
5. Press # to hear the message again.
OR
To hear another message, press 5 and then enter the message number (01-48).
OR
Hang up.

To erase a previously recorded VRS message:

1. Press idle CALL key.
OR
At a single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 716.
3. Dial 3 (Erase).
4. Dial the number of the VRS message you want to erase (01-48).
5. Press HOLD (system phone only) to cancel the procedure without erasing (and return to step
3).
OR
Hang up to erase the message.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 389

 Voice Response System (VRS)
To record, listen to or erase a VRS message if you call in using DISA:
1. Place call to the system.
2. After the system answers, dial the DISA password (normally 000000).
3. Dial 716 and the VRS password.
4. Dial the function you want.
7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
5. Dial the message number (01-48), record the message and press # to end recording.
If you dialed 7 to record, you can dial # to listen to the message you just recorded.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial 5 and the message number to hear it again or if
you want to Record, listen to or erase another message, go back to step 4.

GENERAL MESSAGE

To listen to the General Message:

System Phone Only
Your MW LED flashes when there is a new General Message. A voice message period-
ically reminds you.
1. Do not lift the handset or press CALL.
2. Dial 4 (General).
OR
1. At lift the handset and dial 711.
You will hear the General Message.
Normally, your MW LED goes out. If it continues to flash, you have unanswered
“Message Waiting” requests or new messages in your “Voice Mail” mailbox.

To record, listen to or erase the General Message:

1. Press idle CALL key.
OR
At single line telephone, lift handset.
2. Dial 712.
3. Dial the function you want.
7 = Record
5 = Listen
3 = Erase
If you dialed 7 to record, press # to end the recording.
If you dialed 5 to listen, you can dial 5 to listen to the message again.
To Record the General Message again, go back to step 1.
If you dialed 3 to erase the General Message, you must go to step 4 (hang up). To
cancel without erasing on a system phone, press HOLD instead and go back to step 1.
4. Hang up when you are done.

390 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Voice Response System (VRS)
PERSONAL GREETING

To enable a Personal Greeting:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forwarding (Device) key (PGM 15-07 or SC 851: 54).
2. Dial 7 + When you hear, “Please start recording,” record your Personal Greeting.
If you already have Personal Greeting or Park and Page set up, you can dial:
7 to re-record
5 to listen (then # to listen again)
3 to erase (then optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
3. Dial # + Personal Greeting condition:
2 = Busy or not answered
4 = Immediate
6 = Not answered
4. Dial the destination to receive your calls. The destination can be:
- A co-worker’s extension
- Your Voice Mailbox (by dialing the Voice Mail master number)
- Off-premise via Common Abbreviated Dialing (by entering 813 + bin)
- Greeting without forwarding so caller hears busy (by entering your extension number)
You cannot forward to a Department Group pilot number.
5. Dial Personal Greeting type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
4 = Intercom calls only
6. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when
Call Forwarding is activated.

To cancel your Personal Greeting:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2. Dial 713 7 + 3.
3. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).

PARK AND PAGE

To have the system Page you when you have a call:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT) and dial 713.
OR
Press Call Forwarding (Device) key (PGM15-07 or SC 851: 17).
2. Dial 7 + When you hear, “Please start recording,” record you Personal Greeting.
If you already have Park and Page or Personal Greeting set up, you can dial:
7 to re-record
5 to listen (then # again to listen again)
3 to erase (the optionally HOLD to cancel the erase)
3. Dial #7.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 391

 Voice Response System (VRS)
4. When you hear, “Please start recording,” record your Page.
5. Dial # + Dial the Page Zone that should broadcast your announcement.
For example, for Internal Zone 1 dial 801 + 1. Or, for Combined Paging Zone 1 dial
751 + 1.
6. Dial Park and Page type:
2 = All calls
3 = Outside calls only
7. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).
Your DND or Call Forwarding (Device) Programmable Function Key flashes when
Call Forwarding is activated.

To pick up your Park and Page:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2. Dial 815 + your extension number.

To cancel your Park and Page:

1. Press idle CALL key (or lift handset at DSL/SLT).
2. Dial 713 73.
3. Press SPK to hang up (or hang up at DSL/SLT).

TIME, DATE AND STATION NUMBER CHECK

To check the extension number of any system phone:

1. Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 6 for extension Number.

To check the system time and date from any system phone extension:
1. Do not lift the handset or press idle CALL key.
2. Dial 8 for Time and date.

900 PREAMBLE

To answer a 900 Preamble call:

1. Answer the ringing call.
The line key turns solid red as the system plays the preamble to the caller.
2. When you hear two beeps and the line key turns green, converse with the caller.

392 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Volume Controls
Volume Controls

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
Each system phone user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone, Paging, Back-
ground Music, Handsfree and your handset. Keysets consolidate all adjustments into the volume
buttons. Pressing the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN will adjust the volume level for which-
ever feature is active (outside call, ICM, ICM ringing, paging, etc.). Pressing these keys when the
phone is idle will adjust the contrast level of the telephone’s display. The users should set the vol-
umes for their most comfortable levels.

Conditions
The contrast is not adjustable when the
phone has background music enabled or
if it is a super display telephone.

Default Setting
Enabled.

Programming
None

Related Features
None

Operation
To adjust the volume of incoming ringing and splash tone:
1. If the phone is idle, dial 829. If the phone is ringing, skip to Step 2.
2. Press VOLUME s or VOLUME t.

To adjust the volume of incoming Paging announcements, Handsfree, the handset

or Background Music:
1. Press VOLUME s or VOLUME t.
The feature must be active to change the volume. Pressing the volume keys when the
phone is idle will adjust the display’s contrast.

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 393

 Warning Tone For Long Conversation
Warning Tone For Long Conversation

Aspila EX
• Available

Description
The system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller warning them that they have been on the
call too long. The tones are just a reminder -- the user can disregard the tones and continue talking
if they choose. The outside caller does not hear the warning tones. In addition, warning tones do
not occur for Intercom calls and most incoming trunk calls. DISA trunks can also have warning
tones. Warning tones are not available to analogue single line telephone (SLT) users.

There are two types of warning tones: Alarm Tone 1 and Alarm Tone 2. Alarm Tone 1 is the first
set of tones that occur after the user initially places a trunk call. Alarm Tone 2 broadcasts periodi-
cally after Alarm Tone 1 as a continued reminder. Each alarm tone consists of three short beeps.

Warning Tone for DISA Callers

For DISA callers, with this feature enabled, the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA
call places an outgoing call and either the inter-digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered.

With this feature enabled, the warning tone timer begins when an incoming DISA call places an
outgoing call and either the inter-digit timer expires or the outgoing call is answered.

If an outside call is transferred to forwarded off-premise using an outside trunk, the warning tone
timer begins immediately. This will occur only if either trunk involved in the call is programmed
for this feature (Program 14-01-17). When transferring a trunk call off-premise, Program 14-01-13
must be enabled (set to ‘1’).

Conditions
None

Default Setting
Disabled.

394 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Warning Tone For Long Conversation

Programming
•14-01-17 : Basic Trunk Data Setup - Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for Long Conversation
Alarm
Determine whether DISA callers should hear the Warning Tone for Long Conversations
(0=disabled, 1=enabled).
•20-06-01 : Class of Service for Extensions
Assign a Class Of Service (1-15) to an extension.
•20-13-01 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) - Long Conversation Alarm
In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) Warning Tone for Long
Conversation.
•20-21-01 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Alarm 1
After a user places a trunk call, the system sends the first warning tone to their extension after
this interval (0-64800 seconds).
•20-21-02 : System Options for Long Conversation - Long Conversation Alarm 2
After hearing the first warning tone, the system sends additional warning tones after this inter-
val (0- 64800 seconds). The warning tones continue, spaced by this interval, until the user
hangs up.
•21-01-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls - Trunk Interdigit Time (External)
Determine the length of time the system should wait before starting the Warning Tone Timer.
•25-07-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time
Determine the length of time the system should wait before the Warning Tone is heard by
DISA callers (0-64800 seconds). If an outside call is transferred or forwarded off-premise
using an outside trunk, this timer starts immediately. This will occur if either trunk involved
in the call is programmed for the Warning Tone (Program 14-01-17).
•25-07-08 : System Timers for DID/DISA - DISA Long Conversation Disconnect
Determine how long after the Warning Tone is heard the system will wait before disconnect-
ing DISA calls - unless the Continue code is entered (Program 25-13-02).
•25-13-02 : System Option for DISA - Continue Code for DISA Trunk to Trunk
25-13-03 : System Option for DISA - Disconnect Code for DISA Trunk to Trunk
With the Warning Tone for Long Conversation enabled for DISA callers, enter a one-digit
Continue and one-digit Disconnect code that the DISA caller can dial to continue or discon-
nect their call. (0-9, * or # are accepted entries).

Aspila EX Software Manual Features 395

 Warning Tone For Long Conversation

Related Features
Central Office Calls, Answering
Warning Tone for Long Conversation does not occur for incoming trunk calls.
Central Office Calls, Placing / Toll Restriction
Warning Tone for Long Conversation occurs for all outgoing trunk calls, regardless of how
they are placed or other outgoing restrictions.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Warning Tone for Long Conversation can be enabled for DISA calls.
Intercom
Warning Tone for Long Conversation does not occur for Intercom calls.
Long Conversation Cutoff
Warning Tone for Long Conversation can be used with the Long Conversation Cutoff feature
for outgoing calls.
Single Line Telephones
Warning tones are not available to single line telephone (SLT) users.

Operation
Warning Tone for Long Conversation is automatic if programmed.

Warning Tone for Long Conversation for DISA Callers:

1. A DISA caller dials into the system and places a call.
2. Once the Warning Tone is heard,
To continue the call, the DISA caller presses the programmed Continue Code.
OR
To disconnect the call, the DISA caller presses the programmed Disconnect Code.

396 Features Aspila EX Software Manual

 Programming

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 405

406 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual
 Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Section 2 - Programming

Before Reading This Section

This section provides you with detailed information about the system programs. By changing a pro-
gram, you change the way the feature associated with that program works. In this section, you find
out about each program, the features that the program affects and how to enter the program data
into system memory.

Do not start customizing your system without first reading Section 1, Features.

When you want to customize a feature, find it in Section 1 and learn about it. (If you have trouble
finding the feature, try cross-referencing it in the Index at the back of this book.) Section 1 will tell
you what programs you have to change to get the operation you want. Then, look the program up in
this section if you have any questions about how to enter the data.

How to Use This Section

This section lists each program in numerical order. For example, Program 10-01 is at the beginning
of the section and Program 92-01 is at the end. The information on each program is subdivided into
the following headings:

Description describes what the program options control. The Default Settings for each program are
also included. When you first install the system, it uses the Default Setting for all programs. Along
with the Description are the Conditions which describe any limits or special considerations that
may apply to the program.

The reverse type (white on black) just beneath the Description heading is the program’s access
level. You can only use the program if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program
requires. Refer to How to Enter the Programming Mode (page 408) for a list of the system’s
access levels and passwords.

Feature Cross Reference provides you with a table of all the features affected by the program.
You’ll want to keep the referenced features in mind when you change a program. Customizing a
feature may have an effect on another feature that you didn’t intend.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 407

Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming
Telephone Programming Instructions shows you how to enter the program’s data into system
memory. For example:
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15-07-01
15-07-01 TEL200
KY01 = *01
¬ ®
tells you to enter the programming mode, dial 150701 from the telephone dial pad. After you do,
you’ll see the message “15-07-01 TEL200” on the first line of the telephone display. This indicates
the program number (15-07), item number (01), and that the options are being set for extension
200. The second row of the display “KY01 = *01” indicates that Key 01 is being programmed with
the entry of *01. The third row allows you to move the cursor to the left or right, depending on
which arrow is pressed. To learn how to enter the programming mode, see How to Enter the Pro-
gramming Mode below.

How to Enter the Programming Mode

Depending on the mode of programming, the system may allow more than one person in the pro-
gramming mode at one time. With telephone programming, two people can program simulta-
neously. Using the PC Program, only one person is allowed in programming. With the Web
Program, up to four people can be programming the system at once. If the same program number is
being defined simultaneously, the last changes made to the program will be accepted.

To enter the programming mode:

1. Go to any working display telephone.
In a newly installed system, use extension 200 (port 1).
2. Do not lift the handset.
3. Press CALL1.
4. #*#*
Password
5. Dial the system password + HOLD.
Refer to the following table for the default system passwords. To change the pass-
words, use Program 90-02.

Password Level Programs at this Level

12345678 2 (IN) All programs in this section not listed below for SA and SB

0000 3 (SA) 10-01, 10-02, 10-12, 10-13, 10-14, 10-15, 10-16, 10-17, 10-18,
10-22, 12-02, 12-03, 12-04, 15-01, 15-07, 15-09, 15-10, 15-11,
20-16, 21-07, 21-14, 22-04, 22-11, 25-08, 30-03, 32-02, 40-02,
41-02, 41-03, 41-04, 41-05, 41-06, 41-07, 41-08, 41-09, 41-10,
41-11, 41-12, 41-13, 41-14, 41-15, 41-16, 41-17, 41-18, 90-03,
90-04, 90-06, 90-07, 90-18, 90-19

9999 4 (SB) 13-04, 13-05, 13-06

408 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

How to Exit the Programming Mode

To exit the programming mode:
When you are done programming, you must be out of a program’s options to exit (pressing the
MSG key will exit the program’s option).

1. Press MSG key to exit the program’s options, if needed.

Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2
2. Press SPK. You see, "Saving System Data" if changes to were to the system’s programming.
3. The display shows "Complete Data Save" when completed and will exit the phone to an idle
mode.
To save a customer’s database, a blank PC-ATA card is required. Insert the card into
the NTCPU and, using Program 90-03, save the software to the PC-ATA card. (Program
90-04 is used to reload the customer data if necessary.) Note that a PC-ATA card can only
hold one customer database. Each database to be saved will require its own separate
card.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 409

Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Using Keys to Move Around in the Programs

Once you enter the programming mode, use the keys in the following chart to enter data, edit data
and move around in the menus.
Keys for Entering Data

Use this key... When you want to . . .

0-9, * and # Enter data into a program.
HOLD Complete the programming step you just made (like pressing Enter on a PC
keyboard). When a program entry displays, press HOLD to bypass the entry
without changing it.
CONF Delete the entry to the left (like pressing Backspace on a PC keyboard).
MSG Exit one step at a time from the program window currently being viewed.

For example, if you’re programming item 5 in 15-03, pressing MSG will

allow you to enter a new option in program 15-03. Pressing MSG again will
allow you to select a new program in the 15- series. Pressing MSG a third
time will allow you to enter a new program beginning with ‘1’. Pressing
MSG one last time will bring you to the beginning program display, allow-
ing you to enter any program number.
FLASH Switch extension, line, etc. being programmed by pressing FLASH. The
cursor moves up to the top row of the display. Pressing FLASH again moves
the cursor back to the middle row.
LINE KEYS Use pre-programmed settings to help with the program entry. These settings
vary between programs from LINE 1 = 0 (off) and LINE 2 = 1 (on) to preset
values for timers where LINE 1 = 5, LINE 2 = 10, LINE 3 = 15, etc.

For programs with this option, the line key which currently matches the pro-
grammed setting will light steady.

The display may also indicate Soft Keys which will allow you to select the
values as well (-1 and +1 will step through these pre-programmed settings.)
LINE KEY 1 Program a pause into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 2 Program a recall/flash into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
LINE KEY 3 Program a @ into an Abbreviated Dialing bin.
VOL UP Scroll backward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 200 to
201, 203, etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).

If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before
scrolling forward.
VOL DOWN Scroll forward through a list of entry numbers (e.g., from extension 200 to
201, 203, etc.) or through entries in a table (e.g., Common Permit Table).

If you enter data and then press this key, the system accepts the data before
scrolling backward

410 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Programming Names and Text Messages

Several programs (e.g., Program 20-16: Selectable Display Messages) require you to enter text.
Use the following chart when entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key
once for the first character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key
“2” three times. Press the key six times display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or use
the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-p, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
8 Enter characters T-V, q-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex:
STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 411

Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Using Soft Keys For Programming

Each Aspila EX display telephone provides interactive soft keys for intuitive feature access. The
options for these keys will automatically change depending on where you are in the system pro-
gramming. Simply press the Soft Key located below the option you wish and the display will
change accordingly.

_
Program Mode
Base Service OP1 OP2

Pressing the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN will scroll between the menus.
_
Program Mode
Hard Mtnance

What the Soft Key Display Prompts Mean

When using a display phone in programming mode, you will see various Soft Key options dis-
played. These keys will allow you to easily select, scan, or move through the programs.

Soft key Display Prompts

If you press this Soft Key . . . The system will. . .

back Go back one step in the program display.

You can press VOLUME p or VOLUME q to

scroll forwards or backwards through a list of Pro-
grams.
­ Scroll down through the available programs.
¯ Scroll up through the available programs.
select Select the currently displayed program.
¬ Move the cursor to the left.
® Move the cursor to the right.
-1 Move back through the available program options.
+1 Move forward through the available program options.

412 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

System Number Plan/Capacities - Aspila EX Comparisons

Table 7: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

System
Classes of Service 15
Toll Restriction Classes 15
Verifiable Account Code Table 2000
Day/Night Mode Numbers 8
Day/Night Service Patterns 32
Analogue Caller ID Detector 64
Dial Tone Detector 64
DTMF Receiver
Trunk

Trunk Port Number 1 1-200

Trunk Ports (Total) 200

• Analogue Trunks 200
• BRI Trunk Ports 200 (100 2B+D circuits)
• PRI Trunk Ports 192 (6 30+2D circuits)

• E&M Analogue Trunk Ports 64

• DID Analogue Trunk Ports 120
BRUI Logical Ports T-Bus: 1-200
S-Bus: 1-256
COIU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports 0-200
DIOPU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports LD Trunk: 0-200
OPX: 0-25
PRIU Logical Ports T-Bus: 1-200
S-Bus: 1-256
TLIU:
• Physical Ports 01-08
• Logical Ports 0-200
VOIPU:
• Physical Ports 01-32
• Logical Ports 0-200
Trunk Group Numbers 1-100
Trunk Access Maps 1-200

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 413

Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Table 7: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

Trunk Routes 1-100

Ring Groups 1-100
DID Translation Tables 20
DID Translation Table Entries 2000
Tie Line Classes of Service 15
Tie Line Toll Restriction Classes 15
DISA
• Classes of Service 15
• Users 1-15
Extension

Telephone Extension Port Numbers1 1-512

• System Phones & IP Phones (1-512)
• Single Line Phones/Analogue Devices (1-512)

Extension Ports (Total)

• System Phones & Single Line Phones/Analogue Devices 256
• IP System Phones 256
ESIU
• Physical Ports 01-16
• Logical Ports
-2DCI Adapter 1-32
-PGD for Tone Ringer 1-8
-PGD for Doorbox 1-8
-PGD for Analogue I/F 1-96
-PGD for ACI 1-96
-APR for B2 Mode 193-256
SLIU
• Physical Ports 01-16
• Logical Ports 0-256

Telephone Extension Number Range 200-499

Virtual Extension Ports 256

Virtual Extension Port Numbers 001-256

Virtual Extension Number Range Undefined

Operator Access Number 0

Operator Extension 1
DSS Consoles Numbers 8
DSS Consoles, Maximum Installed 32
Door Box Numbers 1-8
Ringdown Assignments 512

414 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Table 7: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

Voice Mail Master Numbers 200-499

Abbreviated Dialing
Abbreviated Dialing Groups 64
Abbreviated Dialing Bins 0-1999
ACD
ACD Group 64
ACD Agent Extensions 512
Automated Attendant
VRS Message Numbers 1-48
Conference
Conference Circuits 64 - maximum
(32 Parties Per Conference)
Data Communication Interfaces
APR Software Port Numbers 193-256
APA, APR, CTA or CTA Modules 192
Module Extension Number Range 200-499
Department and Pickup Groups
Department (Extension) Group Numbers 1-64
Department (Extension) Group Number Range 200-499
Call Pickup Group Numbers 1-64
Hotline
Internal Hotline 512
External Hotline 512
Paging and Park
Internal Page Group Numbers 0, 1-9 or 01-64
External Page Group Numbers 0, 1-8
External Speakers 9
• NTCPU (1)
• PGD Adapter (1-8)
Park Group Numbers 1-64
Park Orbits 1-64

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 415

Introduction to Programming
Before You Start Programming

Table 7: System Number Plan/Capacities

System Type: Aspila EX

SMDR
SMDR Ports 1-8
VRS
VRS (on DSP Daughter Board) 1
Voice Mail
Voice Mail (DSPDB) Mailboxes 1-300
Voice Mail Channels 1-16
VoIP
RAS Unicast Ports 0-65535
Call Signaling Ports 0-65535
NGT Signal Receive Ports 0-65535
DRS Ports 0-65535
RTP Ports 0-65535
RTCP Ports 0-65535
H.245 Ports 0-65535
DSP Resources 01-32
H.323 Alias Addresses 1-6
Passwords
User Password for setting Toll Restriction Override and Changing Class of 0000
Service using a service code
Programming Passwords
Level 2 (IN) 12345678
Level 3 (SA) 0000
Level 4 (SB) 9999
Programming Password Users 8
Footnotes
1
Count toward total number of allowed hardware ports (512).
Extension numbers can be up to 8 digits long. See Flexible System Numbering.

416 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date
Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-01 : Time and Date to change the system Time and Date through system pro-
gramming. Extension users can also dial Service Code 828 to change the Time if allowed by an
extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Item Item Input data Default Description
No.

01 Year 00-99 No setting Enter two digits for year (00-99).

02 Month 01-12 No setting Enter two digits (01-12) for the month.

03 Day 01-31 No setting Enter two digits (01-31) for the day.

04 Week 1-7 No setting Enter digit for the day of the week
(Sun-Sat) (1=Sunday, 7=Saturday).

05 Hour 00-23 No setting Enter two digits for the hour (00-23).

06 Minute 00-59 No setting Enter two digits for the minute (00-59).

07 Second 00-59 No setting Enter two digits for the second (00-59).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Time and Date

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 417

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-01 : Time and Date

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-01 (Time and Date):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 01
10-01-01
Year
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

418 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup
10-02 : Location Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-02 : Location Setup to define the location of the installed system. Used for caller
ID editing.

Input Data
Item Item Input data Default Description
No.

01 Country Code Dial (up to 4 digits) No Setting Enter the country code.

02 International Dial (up to 4 digits) 00 Enter the international access code.

Access Code

03 Other Area Dial (up to 2 digits) 0 Enter the other area access code
Access Code
04 Area Code Dial (up to 6 digits) - Enter the local area code.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 419

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-02 : Location Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-02 (Location Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 02
10-02-01
Country_Code
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

420 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-03 : PCB Setup to setup and confirm the Basic Configuration data for each PCB.
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to ‘0’ and then plug the new device in to
have the system automatically define it, alternatively redefine the type manually.
Program 10-03 allows the editing of installed units (PCB’s), you can not edit the settings if the slot
is unused, install the PCB first then edit the settings.

Note: The items highlighted in grey are read only and cannot be changed.

Input Data

For ESIU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-16

B-Channel 1

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Terminal Type 0- Not set 0

1- Keyset/DSLT
2- SLT Adapter
3- -- Not used --
4- -- Not used --
5- -- Not used --
6- PGD (Paging)
7- PGD (Tone Ringer)
8- PGD (Doorbox)
9- PGD (ACI)
10- DSS Console
11- -- Not used --

02 Logical Port Number 0: Not set 0

1: Keyset
2: SLT Adapter
3: Not used
4: Not used
5: 2DCI Adapter 1 - 32
6: PGD (Paging)
7: PGD (for Tone Ringer) 1-8
8: PGD (for Door Box) 1-8
9: PGD (for Analogue I/F) 1-96
10: DSS
11: Not used

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 421

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup

03 Additional Data This option is reserved for future use. 0

3: Not used
4: Not used
01-16 (port number) A port number is automatically set as
the order which the terminal started.

04 Optional Installed Unit 1 0- none 0

1- APR Module
2- APA Module
3- ADA Module
4- CTA Module
5- CTU Module

05 Optional Installed Unit 2 0- none 0

1- APR Module
2- APA Module
3- ADA Module
4- CTA Module
5- CTU Module

B-Channel 2

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

06 Terminal Type 0- Not set 0

1- -- Not used --
2- -- Not used --
3- -- Not used --
4- -- Not used --
5- -- Not used --
6- PGD (Paging)
7- PGD (Tone Ringer)
8- PGD (Door Box)
9- PGD (ACI)
10- -- Not used --
11- -- Not used --
12- APR

07 Logical Port Number 0: Not set 0

6: PGD (Paging)
7: PGD (for Tone Ringer) 1-8
8: PGD (for Door Box) 1-8
9: PGD (for ACI) 1-96
12:APR (for B2 mode) 193-256

422 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup
For SLIU Unit
Physical Port Number 01-16

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Logical Port Number 0-256 0

02 Not used

03 Transmit Gain Level (S-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

04 Receive Gain Level (R-Level) 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

For COIU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-08

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Logical Port Number 0-200 0

For TLIU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-08

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Logical Port Number 0-200 0

02 2/4Wire 0- 2Wire 1
1- 4Wire

For DIOPU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-08

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 LD/OPX assignment 0- LD Trunk 0

1- OPX Trunk

02 Logical Port Number 0: For LD Trunk 0-200 0

1: For OPX 0-256

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 423

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup
For BRIU Unit
ISDN Line Number 01-08

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 ISDN Line Mode 0- Not set 1

1- Trunk mode
2- S-Bus
3- NW mode (Leased Line)
4- NW mode (Interconnected Line)
5- NW Mode (Interconnected Line, Fixed layer 1=NT)
6- S-Point (Leased Line)

02 Logical Port Number 0: Net set 0

(see Note 1) 1: For Trunk mode (1-200)
2: For S-Bus (1-256)

03 Connection Type 0- P-MP 0

1- P-P

04 Layer 3 Timer Type (see Note 2) 1-5 1

05 - Not Currently Used - 0- disable 1

CLIP Information Announcement 1- enable
06 Connection Bus Mode (S-point only) 0- Extended Passive Bus 0
1- Short Passive Bus

07 S-point DID digits 0-4 0

08 Dial sending Mode 0- Enblock sending 1

1- Overlap sending

09 Dial Information Element 0- Keypad Facility 1

(Only for Overlap Sending Mode) 1- Called Party Number

10 Master/Slave System (NW mode only) 0- Slave System 0

1- Master System

11 Networking System Number (NW 0-50 0

mode only)

12 - Not Currently Used - 0

13 - Not Currently Used - 0

14 Service Protocol for S-Point 0- Keypad Facility 0
1- Specified Protocol for Aspila EX System

Note 1. The start port number of a BRI line is displayed. Two logic ports are automatically
assigned to a BRI line.
Note 2. Each timer value of Layer3 are set up for every type of Program 81-06 (Trunk mode)
and Program 82-06 (S-Bus).

424 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup
For PRIU Unit

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 ISDN Line Mode 0- Not set 1

1- Trunk mode
2- S-Bus mode
3- NW mode (Leased Line)
4- NW mode (Interconnected Line)
5- NW Mode (Interconnected Line, Fixed Layer 1=NT)
6- S-Point (Leased Line)

02 Logical Port Number 1: for Trunk mode 1-200 0

(see Note 1) 2: for S-Bus 1-256
03 CRC Multi-frame(CRC4) 0- off 0
(Only E1[30B+D] Mode) 1- on

04 Layer 3 Timer Type 1-5 1

05 - Not Currently Used - 0- disable 1

CLIP Information Announcement 1- enable

06 Length of a cable 0- 0 40m 0

1- 40 81m
2- 81 122m
3- 122 162m
4- 162 200m
07 S-point DID digits 0-4 0

08 Dial Sending Mode 0- Enblock Sending 1

1- Overlap Sending

09 Dial Information Element 0- Keypad Facility 1

(Only for Overlap Sending Mode) 1- Called Party Number

10 Master/Slave System (NW mode only) 0- Slave System 0

1- Master System

11 Networking System Number (NW 0-50 0

mode only)

12 short / long-haul 0- short-haul 0

1- long-haul

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 425

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

13 Loss-Of-Signal detection limit In short-haul mode 0

0- 0.91V
1- 0.74V
2- 0.59V
3- 0.42V
4- 0.32V
5- 0.21V
6- 0.16V
7- 0.10V

In long-haul mode
0- 1.70V
1- 0.84V
2- 0.84V
3- 0.45V
4- 0.45V
5- 0.20V
6- 0.10V
7- not defined

14 Service Protocol for S-Point 0- Keypad Facility 0

1- Specified Protocol for Aspila EX System

Note 1. The start port number of a PRI line is displayed. Thirty logic ports are automatically
assigned to a PRI line.
Note 2. Each timer value of Layer3 are set up for every type of Program 81-06 (Trunk mode)
and Program 82-06 (S-Bus).

For VOIPU Unit

Physical Port Number 01-32

Item
Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk Logical Port Number 0-200 0

426 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup
For T1 Unit (North America Only)
Physical Port Number 01-32

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Logical Port Number 0-200 0

02 Frame Type Setup 01- D4 (12 Multi Frame) 01

02- ESF (24 Multi Frame)
03 Zero Code Suppression Setup 01- B8ZS 01
ZCS_B8ZS 02- AMI/ZCS

04 DTI<->CSU Distance Setup 01= 0 feet – 133 feet 01

02= 133 feet – 266 feet
03= 266 feet – 399feet
04= 399 feet – 533 feet
05= 533 feet – 655 feet

05 T1 Clock Source Master/Slave 01- Slave 01

02- Master

Conditions
When changing a defined terminal type, first set the type to ‘0’ and then plug the new device in to
have the system automatically define it or redefine the type manually.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 427

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-03 : PCB Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-03 (PCB Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 03
10-02-01 Slot No 1
ESIport01 CH1 1 :TEL |1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-02-nn Slot No 1
nnnnn
back ­ ¯ select
4. Select a slot number to be programmed by pressing the VOLUMEq or VOLUME q keys.
Or, press FLASH once to select the slot number or press FLASH twice to select a port num-
ber. Enter the slot or port number.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

428 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music on Hold Setup
10-04 : Music on Hold Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-04 : Music on Hold Setup to set the Music on Hold selection. For MOH, the sys-
tem can provide silence to callers on Hold or one of eleven synthesized selections.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Music on Hold 0- Internal source 0 The Music on Hold (MOH)

Source Selection 1- External source source can be internal (synthe-
sized) or from a customer-pro-
vided music source.
The customer-provided source
can connect to a 2PGDAD or
the connector on the NTCPU.
Trunk MOH and Extension
MOH music source use the
same Music on Hold source.

02 Music Selection 0- Silence (no sound) 1 Select the music which will be
for Internal 1- Selection 1 heard by users on hold.
Source 2- Selection 2

03 Audio Gain Setup 1-63 (-15.5 +15.5dB) 32 (0dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Music on Hold

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 429

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-04 : Music on Hold Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-04 (Music on Hold Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 04
10-04-01
Hold_Tone_Set 0:Internal
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

430 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup to define which Relay circuits (5-8) on
2PGDAD Adapter are used for General Purpose Relay.

Input Data

- INDEX-1 -
General Purpose Relay No. 1-8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Slot No Slot No: 0-16 0-0-0

Physical Port of ESIU ESIU Port: 0-16
Sensor circuit No Relay No: 0, 5-8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Music on Hold

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 431

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-05 : General Purpose Relay Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-05 (General Purpose Relay Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 05
10-06-01 Relay No1
Slot No =-
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

432 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup
10-06 : ISDN BRI Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
This program is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 433

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits
10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits to select the number of Conference circuits
to be used for Conversation Recording.

Note: Even if this program is set to ‘0’, the telephone conversation recording function can be used.
In this case, 64 (32 x 2) circuits will be shared by conference recording and conversation
recording. The number of the conference circuits occupied by a conversation recording is
two.

Input Data
The number of Conversation Recording Default

0-16 0
0:not set, 2 to 32 conference circuits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• Conference

434 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-07 : Conversation Record Circuits

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-07 (Conversation Record Circuits):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 07
10-07-01
No.of Record 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 435

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup to enable or disable pre-ringing for trunk calls. This sets
how a trunk initially rings a telephone. With pre-ringing, a burst of ringing occurs as soon as the
trunk’s LED flashes. The call then continues ringing with the normal ring cadence cycle. Without
pre-ringing, the call starts ringing only when the normal ring cadence cycle occurs. This may cause
a ring delay, depending on when call detection occurs in reference to the ring cycle.

Input Data
Input Data Default

0: disable 1
1: enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

436 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-08 : Pre-Ringing Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-08 (Pre-Ringing Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 08
10-08-01
Pre-ringing 1:Yes
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 437

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup to allocate the circuits on the NTCPU
PCBs for either DTMF receiving or dial tone detection. The NTCPU PCB has 16 circuits initially.
With additional DSPDBs installed, the system can provide a total of 64 circuits (32 + 32). These are
used as follows:
• Extension DTMF receiver for SLT
• Trunk DTMF receiver for analogue trunks, dial tone & busy tone detec-
tion
for analogue trunks

Input Data
Circuit/Resource Number 01-64

Input Data Default Setting

0- Common use Circuit/Resource 01-08: 1 (Extension only)

1- Extension only Circuit/Resource 09-32: 2 (Trunk only)
2- Trunk only Circuit/Resource 33-64: 0 (Common use)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Tie Lines

438 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-09 : DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-09 (DTMF and Dial Tone Circuit Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 09
10-09-01 Rsouce1
DTMF/DT_Detect1:Intercom
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
4. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 439

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup
10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup to setup the IP Address, Subnet-Mask, and Default
Gateway addresses.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Conditions
No.

01 IP Address 1.0.0.1126.255.255.254 172.16.0.10

128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

02 Subnet 128.0.0.0 192.0.0.0 224.0.0.0 255.255.0.0 The setting of Sub-

Mask 240.0.0.0 248.0.0.0 252.0.0.0 net-Mask is mistaken
254.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.128.0.0 when all Host Address
255.192.0.0 255.224.0.0 255.248.0.0 are 0.
255.252.0.0 255.254.0.0 255.255.0.0
255.255.128.0 255.255.192.0 255.255.224.0 If the network section
255.255.248.0 255.255.252.0 255.255.254.0 is:
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.128 255.255.255.192 0,
255.255.255.224 255.255.255.240 255.255.255.248 127
255.255.255.252 255.255.255.254 255.255.255.255 128.0
191.255
192.0.0
223.255.255
The setting of Sub-
net-Mask is mistaken.

03 Default 1.0.0.1126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 IP Address for Router

Gateway 128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

04 Time Zone -12 thru +12 Hours +9 Hours

05 NIC 0: Auto Detect 0 NIC Auto Negotiate

1: 100Mbps, Full Duplex
2: 100Mbps, Half Duplex
3: 10Mbps, Full Duplex
4: 10Mbps, Half Duplex

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

440 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-12 : NTCPU Network Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-12 (NTCPU Network Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 12
10-12-01
IP_Add 172.16 .0 .10
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-12-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 441

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup to setup the DHCP Server built into the NTCPU.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 DHCP Server Mode 0:Disabled 0 Enable or disable the use of the

1:Enabled built-in DHCP Server.

02 Lease time Days 0-255 0 day Lease Time of the IP address to

a client.

Hour 0-23 0 hour

Minutes 1-59 30 minutes

03 Not used

04 Number of networks 0:Single 0 The number of networks to

1:Divide same network manage.
With a single network,select
Single.
When dividing and managing
the same network as multiple
networks, select Divide.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

442 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-13 : In-DHCP Server Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-13 (In-DHCP Server Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 13
10-13-01
DCHP-Serv_Mode0:Off
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-13-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 443

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-14 : Managed Network Setup to set up the range of the IP address which the
DHCP Server leases to a client.

Input Data

Item Input Data Default Description Related

Program

Scope 1 Minimum: 172.16.0.100 The range of the IP address to lease. 10-13-04

1.0.0.1126.255.255.254 When “Maximum” has not been entered, the
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254 maximum value equals the minimum value.
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254 When Single is selected in 10-13-04, only
one scope range can be entered.
Maximum: 172.16.5.254 When Divide Same Network is selected in
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254 10-13-04, a maximum of ten scope ranges
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254 can be entered.
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 2 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 3 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 4 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

444 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup

Item Input Data Default Description Related

Program

Scope 5 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04

1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 6 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 7 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 8 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Scope 9 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 445

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-14 : Managed Network Setup

Item Input Data Default Description Related

Program

Scope 10 Minimum: 0.0.0.0 10-13-04

1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254
Maximum: 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-14 (Managed Network Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 14
10-14-01 Scope1
Min 172.16 .0 .100
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the scope number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

446 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-15 : Client Information Setup to set up the client information when the DHCP
server needs to assign a fixed IP address to clients.

Input Data
Item Input Data Default Description

Client 1 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 The IP address should be assigned

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF out of the scope range set up in
Program 10-14.
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 2 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 3 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 4 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 447

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup

Item Input Data Default Description

Client 5 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 6 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 7 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 8 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 9 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Client 10 MAC: 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

448 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-15 : Client Information Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-15 (Client Information Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 15
10-15-01 Client1
MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-15-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the client number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 449

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-16 : Option Information Setup to set up the option given from the DHCP server
to each client.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Router Code number 0-255 3 (Fixed)

IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

02 DNS Code number 0-255 6 (Fixed)

Server
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

03 TFTP Code number 0-255 66 (Fixed)

Server
IP address 0.0.0.0
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

04 DRS Code number 0-255 161 (Fixed)

IP address 172.16.0.10
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

05 MGC Code number 0-255 129 (Fixed)

IP address 172.16.0.10
1.0.0.1126.255.255.254
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254

Conditions
None

450 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-16 : Option Information Setup

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-16 (Option Information Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 16
10-16-01
Router_Code_No3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-16-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 451

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup to define the H.323 Gatekeeper.

Input Data
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

01 Gatekeeper 0:No GK 0 An external gatekeeper uses

mode 1:Automatic propriety set up.
2:Manual
No GK: A gatekeeper is not
used
Automatic: A gatekeeper is
searched and assigned
Manual: A gatekeeper's IP
address is assigned.

02 Gatekeeper IP address 0.0.0.0 Unicast IP address of the This item is

IP address 1.0.0.1126.255.255.254 External GK. effective only
128.1.0.1191.254.255.254 when Program
192.0.1.1223.255.254.254 10-17-01 is set
to Manual (2).

03 Not used

04 Preferred Character line (Max 124) No setup When registering with an This item is
Gatekeeper external gatekeeper using effective only
gatekeeper search, two or when Program
more GRQ(p) may be 10-17-01 is set
assigned. to Automatic
In this case, if this ID is set up, (1).
it will register with a gate-
keeper with this ID.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

452 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-17 : H.323 Gatekeeper Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-17 (H.323 Gatekeeper Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 17
10-17-01
GK_Mode 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-17-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 453

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup to set up the Alias Address registered into the
External Gatekeeper.

Input Data
The number of alias 1-6

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.

01 Alias Address Maximum 12 digits No setup Define the Alias Address of the Aspila
EX system registered into the External
Gatekeeper.
At this time, it is only the telephone
number which can be registered as an
Alias Address. In the future, other types
of addresses will be available.

02 Type of Alias 0:E164 0 Define the type of Alias Address regis-

Address tered into the external gatekeeper.
Currently the only type is E.164. How-
ever, in the future, other types will also
be available.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

454 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-18 : H.323 Alias Address Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-18 (H.323 alia Address Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 18
10-18-01 Alias 1
Alias_Add
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-18-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 455

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-19 : VoIPU DSP Resource Selection
10-19 : VoIPU DSP Resource Selection

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-19 : VoIPU DSP Resource Selection to specify the operating mode of the DSP
resource on the VoIPU PCB.

Input Data

SLOT Number 01-16

DSP resource number Input Data Default

01-32 0: common use - for both IP extensions and trunks 0

1: IP extension only
2: IP trunk only

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

456 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-19 : VoIPU DSP Resource Selection

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-19 (VoIPU DSP Resource Selection):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 19
10-19-01 Slot No 1
DSP01_Oper.Mode0:ICM/TRK
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-19-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 457

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment to define the TCP port/address/etc. for
communicating to external equipment.

Input Data
Type of external equipment 1- CTI Server
2- ACD MIS
3- - Reserve -
4- - Reserve -
5- - Reserve -

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 TCP Port 0-65535 0

02 Not used

03 Keep alive time 1-255 (Sec) 30

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

458 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-20 : LAN Setup for External Equipment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-20 (LAN Setup for External Equipment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 20
10-20-01 Ex-Device1
TCP_Port 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-20-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the device number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 459

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-21 : NTCPU Hardware Setup
10-21 : NTCPU Hardware Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-21 : NTCPU Hardware Setup to set up various hardware, such as the baud rate
of COM port and the switch for control on NTCPU.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 External Source Con- 0- External MOH source 0 Specify the function of the
trol Switch Selection 1- BGM source relay switch for external tone
on NTCPU 2- External Speaker source control.
3- General Purpose Relay

02 Baud rate for COM 0- 4800 2 Define the baud rate of the
Port 1- 9600 COM port within the
2- 19200 NTCPU.
3- 38400

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

460 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-21 : NTCPU Hardware Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-02 (Location Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 02
10-21-01
NTCPU_Control 0:Hold
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-21-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 461

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU
10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU to set up the data required to start the
APSU unit (server) from a key telephone.

Input Data
SLOT Number 01-16

Item Item Input Data Default Description Related

No. Program

01 Server MAC 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 Set up MAC address 11-15-06

Address FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF for the APSU unit
(server).

02 Broadcast 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Set up the Broad-

address 255.255.255.255 cast address for the
APSU unit (server).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

462 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-22 : Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-22 (Setting the Wake On LAN for APSU):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 22
10-22-01 Slot No 1
S.V_MAC00-00-00-00-00-0
0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-22-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 463

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection
10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection to define the IP address of another system,
call control port number and alias address for Aspila EX system inter-connection. This program is
activated when Program 10-17-01 and 10-18 are registered. Up to 50 systems can be registered.

Input Data

Index 1
System Number 01-50

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 System Interconnection 0…No 0

1…Yes

02 IP address 1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0 Activated

128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254 when
192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254 10-23-01=1

03 Call Control Port 1-65535 1720 Activated

when
10-23-01=1

04 Alias Address Max 12 addresses Activated-

when
10-23-01=1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

464 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-23 : H.323 System Interconnection

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-23 (H.323 System Interconnection):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 23
10-23-01 System No.1
Networking_Set 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-23-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 465

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup to set the options for daylight savings.

Input Data
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 Daylight Savings Mode 0- Off 0

1- On

02 Time for Daylight Savings 0000-23599 0200

03 Start of Month (Summer 1-12 4
Time)

04 Start of Week 0- Last Week 1

1-5

05 Start of Week Day 1-7 (Sun=1, Mon=2, etc.) 1

06 End of Month 1-12 10

07 End of Week 0- Last Week 0

1-5

08 End of Week Day 1-7 (Sun=1, Mon=2, etc.) 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Time and Date

466 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-24 : Daylight Savings Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-24 (Daylight Savings Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-24-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
3. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 467

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup
10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-25 : H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup to set the gateway preefix registered to the
outside gatekeeper.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Related
No. Program

01 Gateway Prefix 0=Disabled, 1=Enabled 0

02 Gateway Prefix 10-24-01

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-25 (H.323 Gateway Prefix Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 25
10-25-01
Prefix Reg. 0:Disable
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-25-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
4. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

468 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup
10-26 : IP System Operation Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-26 : IP System Operation Setup to set the operation mode of the IP system.

Input Data
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 IP 0 = Peer-to-Peer 1
1 = Peer-to-Peer

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-26 (IP System Operation Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 26
10-26-01
Peer to Peer 1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-26-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
4. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 469

Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-27 : IP System ID
10-27 : IP System ID

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 10-27 : IP System ID to set the IP address of the IP system.

Input Data
System ID 01-50

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 IP Address 1.0.0.1_126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.1.0.1 _191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1 _223.255.254.254
02 Call Procedure Port 1-65535 1730

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

470 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 10 : System Configuration Setup
10-27 : IP System ID

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 10-27 (IP System ID):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 27
10-27-01 SysID1
IP Add 0 .0 .0 .0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-27-nn
nnnnn
¬ -1 +1 ®
4. Select a circuit/resource number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 471

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-01 : System Numbering to set the system’s internal (Intercom) numbering plan.
The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension
user must dial to access other extensions and features, such as service codes and trunk codes. If the
default numbering plan does not meet the site requirements, use this program to tailor the system
numbering to the site.

CAUTION
Improperly programming this option can adversely affect system operation. Make
sure you thoroughly understand the default numbering plan before proceeding. If you
must change the standard numbering, use the chart for System Numbering
(page 474) to keep careful and accurate records of your changes.

Before changing your numbering plan, use the PC Program or Web PC Program to
make a backup copy of your system’s data.

Changing the numbering plan consists of three steps:

1. Enter the digits you want to change.
2. Specify the length of the code you select to change.
3. Assign a function to the code selected.

Step 1: Enter the digit(p) you want to change

You can make either single or two digit entries. In the Dialed Number column in the System
Numbering (page 474) table, the nX rows (e.g., 1X) are for single digit codes. The remaining
rows (e.g., 11, 12, etc.) are for two digit codes.
l Entering a single digit affects all the Dialed Number entries beginning with that digit. For
example, entering 6 affects all number plan entries beginning with 6. The entries you
make in step 2 and step 3 below affect the entire range of numbers beginning with 6. (For
example, if you enter 3 in step 2 the entries affected would be 600-699. If you enter 4 in
step 2 below, the entries affected would be 6000-6999.)
l Entering two digits lets you define codes based on the first two digits a user dials. For
example, entering 60 allows you to define the function of all codes beginning with 60. In
the default program, only * and # use two-digit codes. All the other codes are single digit.
If you enter a two digit code between 0 and 9, be sure to make separate entries for all the
other two digit codes within the range as well. This is because in the default program all
the two digit codes between 0 and 9 are undefined.

472 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

Description (Cont’d)
Step 2: Specify the length of the code you want to change
After you specify a single or two digit code, you must tell the system how many digits com-
prise the code. This is the Number of Digits Required column in the System Numbering
(page 474) table. In the default program, all codes from 100-999 are three digits long. Codes
beginning with 0 are one digit long. Codes beginning with * are 3 digits long and codes begin-
ning with # are 4 digits long.

Step 3: Assign a function to the code selected

After entering a code and specifying its length, you must assign its function. This is the Dial
Type column in the System Numbering (page 474) table. The choices are:

Dial Types Dial Type Description Related Program

0 - Not Used -

1 Service Code 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Registration)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for HOTEL)
11-15 : Service Code Setup (Special access)

2 Extension Number 11-02 : Extension Numbers

11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbers
11-06 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Extension Numbers
11-07 : Department Calling Group Numbers
11-08 : 2PGDAD (ACI) Group Pilot Numbers
3 Trunk Access Code 11-09 : Trunk Access Code.

4 Special Trunk Access 11-09 : Trunk Access Code.

5 Operator Access 20-17 : Operator’s Extension

6 ARS/F-Route Access 44-xx
l Changing the Dial Type for a range of codes can have a dramatic affect on how your sys-
tem operates. Assume, for example, the site is a hotel that has room numbers from
100-399. In order to make extension numbers correspond to room numbers, you should:
- In Program 11-02, reassign extension numbers on each floor from 100 to 399.
(Other applications might also require you to change entries in
Program 11-10 through 11-16.)

Default
See the following tables.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 473

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New

1X 3 1
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
17 0 0
18 0 0
19 0 0
10 0 0
1* 0 0
1# 0 0

2X 3 2
21 0 0
22 0 0
23 0 0
24 0 0
25 0 0
26 0 0
27 0 0
28 0 0
29 0 0
20 0 0
2* 0 0
2# 0 0

474 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New
3X 3 2
31 0 0
32 0 0
33 0 0
34 0 0
35 0 0
36 0 0
37 0 0
38 0 0
39 0 0
30 0 0
3* 0 0
3# 0 0

4X 3 2
41 0 0
42 0 0
43 0 0
44 0 0
45 0 0
46 0 0
47 0 0
48 0 0
49 0 0
40 0 0
4* 0 0
4# 0 0

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 475

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New
5X 3 2
51 0 0
52 0 0
53 0 0
54 0 0
55 0 0
56 0 0
57 0 0
58 0 0
59 0 0
50 0 0
5* 0 0
5# 0 0

6X 3 2
61 0 0
62 0 0
63 0 0
64 0 0
65 0 0
66 0 0
67 0 0
68 0 0
69 0 0
60 0 0
6* 0 0
6# 0 0

476 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New

7X 3 1
71 0 0
72 0 0
73 0 0
74 0 0
75 0 0
76 0 0
77 0 0
78 0 0
79 0 0
70 0 0
7* 0 0
7# 0 0

8X 3 1
81 0 0
82 0 0
83 0 0
84 0 0
85 0 0
86 0 0
87 0 0
88 0 0
89 0 0
80 0 0
8* 0 0
8# 0 0

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 477

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New

9X 3 3
91 0 0
92 0 0
93 0 0
94 0 0
95 0 0
96 0 0
97 0 0
98 0 0
99 0 0
90 0 0
9* 0 0
9# 0 0

0X 1 5
01 0 0
02 0 0
03 0 0
04 0 0
05 0 0
06 0 0
07 0 0
08 0 0
09 0 0
00 0 0
0* 0 0
0# 0 0

478 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering

System Numbering

Dial Types: 1=Service Code, 2=Extension Number, 3=Trunk Access,

4=Special Trunk Access, 5=Operator Access, 6=Flexible Routing,
0=Not Used

Dialed Number of Digits Required Dial Type

Number Default New Default New
*X 4 1
*1 0 0
*2 0 0
*3 0 0
*4 0 0
*5 0 0
*6 0 0
*7 0 0
*8 0 0
*9 0 0
*0 0 0
** 0 0
*# 0 0

#X 4 1
#1 0 0
#2 0 0
#3 0 0
#4 0 0
#5 0 0
#6 0 0
#7 0 0
#8 0 0
#9 0 0
#0 0 0
#* 0 0
## 0 0

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 479

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-01 : System Numbering
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Flexible System Numbering

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-01 (System Numbering):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 01
11-01-01 Dial 1
1x Digit 3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the dial number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

480 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-02 : Extension Numbering to set the extension number. The extension number
can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(p) of the number should be assigned in Pro-
gram 11-01. This lets an employee move to a new location (port) and retain the same extension
number.

Input Data
Extension Port Number 001-512

Extension Number Description

Dial (Up to 8 digits) • Set up extension numbers for Key Telephones, Single Line Telephones
(Including 1SLIA, APR), and IP Telephones.
• Extension number assignments cannot be duplicated,

Default
Extension Port Number Extension Number

1 200

: :

299 499

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling
• Flexible System Numbering
• Intercom

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 481

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-02 : Extension Numbering

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-02 (Extension Numbering):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 02
11-02-01 Extn Port1
Extension_No. 200
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-02-nn Extn Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the extension port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

482 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The
extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(p) of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01.

Input Data
Virtual Extension Port Number 001-256

Virtual Extension Number Description

Dial (Up to 8 digits) Set up Virtual Extension Numbers.

The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 11-02, 11-06,
11-07 and 11-08.

Default
Virtual Extension Numbers 1-256 : No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Flexible System Numbering
• Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 483

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-04 : Virtual Extension Numbering

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-04 (Virtual Extension Numbering):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 04
11-04-01 V-Port 1
Virtual_Ext_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-04-nn V-Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the virtual port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

484 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering to define the virtual extension numbers. The
extension number can be up to eight digits long. The first/second digit(p) of the number should be
assigned in Program 11-01.

Input Data
ACI Port Number 01-96

ACI Extension Description Related Program

Number

Dial (Up to 8 digits) The extension number cannot be dupli- • 10-03 : Basic Configuration
cated in Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-07 and for Each PCBs
11-08.

Default
ACI Port Numbers 1-96 have no extension number set.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)
• Flexible System Numbering

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 485

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-06 : ACI Extension Numbering

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-06 (ACI Extension Numbering):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 06
11-06-01 ACI Port1
ACI_Ext_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-06-nn ACI Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

486 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers to assign pilot numbers to each Depart-
ment Group set up in Program 16-02. The pilot number is the number users dial for Department
Calling and Department Step Calling. The pilot number can be up to eight digits long. The first/
second digit(p) of the number should be assigned in Program 11-01 as type 2.

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01-64

Extension Group Description Related Program

Pilot Number

Dial Use this program to assign department group • 16-01 : Department (Extension)
(Up to 8 digits) pilot numbers. Group Basic Data Setup
The number set up by Program 11-02 (Extension • 16-02 : Department Group
Numbering) cannot be used. Assignment for Extensions
The extension number cannot be duplicated in • 16-03 : Secondary Department
Programs 11-02, 11-04, 11-06 and 11-08. Group

Default
Group Numbers 01-64: No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling
• Department Step Calling

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 487

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-07 : Department Group Pilot Numbers

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-07 (Department Group Pilot Numbers):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 07
11-07-01 TEL Group1
Pilot_Call_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-07-nn TEL Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

488 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number to assign the pilot number to the ACI Groups set
in Program 33-02. The pilot number can be up to four digits long. The first/second digit(p) of the
number should be assigned in Program 11-01 as type 2.

Input Data
ACI Group Number 01-16

ACI Group Pilot

Number Description Related Program

Dial The extension number cannot be duplicated in Programs 33-07

(Up to 8 digits) 11-02, 11-04, 11-06 and 11-07.

Default
Group Numbers (01-16) have no pilot numbers defined.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 489

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-08 : ACI Group Pilot Number

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-08 (ACI Group Pilot Number):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 08
11-08-01 ACI Group1
ACI_Pilot_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-08-nn ACI Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACI group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

490 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code
11-09 : Trunk Access Code

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-09 : Trunk Access Code to assign the trunk access code (normally 9). The trunk
access code can be set from 1 to 8 digits which is defined to type 3 and 4 in Program 11-01. This is
the code extension users dial to access Automatic Route Selection. The Individual Trunk Access
Code is used when Trunk Group Routing is desired for an outgoing line.

Caution
The digit 9 is defined in Program 11-01 as Dial Type 3 with the Number of Digits
Required set to 1. If you change the trunk access code in Program 11-09, you must
make the corresponding changes in Program 11-01.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description Related Program
No.

01 Trunk Dial 9 Use this program to • 11-01 : System Numbering

Access (Up to 4 digits) assign the trunk access • 14-01 : Trunk Basic Data Setup
Code code (normally 9). This • 14-05 : Trunk Group
is the code extension • 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
users dial to access Auto-
matic Route Selection.

02 Alternate Dial No setting Use this program to • 11-01 : System Numbering

Trunk (Up to 4 digits) define additional trunk • 14-01 : Trunk Basic Data Setup
Route access codes. • 14-05 : Trunk Group
Access When a user dials the • 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Code Alternate Trunk Route • 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for
Access Code, the system Extensions
routes their call to the • 21-15 : Alternate Trunk Group
Alternate Trunk Route. Routing for Extensions

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection
• Central Office Calls, Placing
• Trunk Group Routing

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 491

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-09 : Trunk Access Code

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-09 (Trunk Access Code):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 09
11-09-01
Trunk_Access_Code0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

492 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator) to customize the Service
Codes for the System Administrator. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-11
through 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-27)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry. For example, dialing 724 (item 26) allows users to force a trunk line
to disconnect.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Terminals Default New Related
No. Program

01 Day / Night Mode Switching KTS, SLT 818 12-xx

20-07-01
02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone KTS 881 10-04

03 Setting the System Time KTS 828

04 Storing Common Abbreviated Dialing Numbers KTS 853

05 Storing Group Abbreviated Dialing Numbers KTS 854

06 Setting the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk Line KTS 833

07 Canceling the Automatic Transfer for Each Trunk KTS 834

Line

08 Setting the Destination for Automatic Trunk Transfer KTS 835

09 Charging Cost Display by Supervisor 771

10 Not Used - - - -

11 Entry of Credit for Toll Restriction 774

12 Night Mode Switching for Other Group KTS 718 12-xx

20-07-01

13 Not Used - - - -

14 Not Used - - - -
15 Not Used - - - -

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 493

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default New Program

16 Leaving Message Waiting KTS 726 11-11-09

17 Dial Block by Supervisor KTS 701 90-19

18 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box KTS 822 13-05

19 Not Used - - -

20 VRS - Record/Erase Message KTS 716 20-07-13

21 VRS - General Message Playback KTS 711 20-07-14

22 VRS - Record or Erase General Message KTS 712 20-07-15

23 SMDR - Extension Accumulated Printout Code KTS 721 20-07-18

24 SMDR - Group Accumulated Printout Code KTS 722 20-07-19

25 Account Code Accumulated Printout Code KTS 723 20-07-20

26 Forced Trunk Disconnect KTS, SLT 724 20-07-11

27 Trunk Port Disable KTS 745 20-07-12

28 Not Used - - - -

29 Not Used - - - -

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

494 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-10 : Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-10 (Service Code Setup (for System Administrator)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 10
11-10-01
NT-Mode_Switch *01
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-10-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 495

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation) to customize the Service
Codes which are used for registration and setup. You can customize additional Service Codes in Pro-
grams 11-10, and 11-12 through 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-38)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry. For example, dialing 825 (item 18) allows users to turn on or turn
off Background Music.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Terminals Default New Related
No. Program

01 Call Forward - Immediate KTS, SLT 848

02 Call Forward - Busy KTS, SLT 843

03 Call Forward - No Answer KTS, SLT 845

04 Call Forward - Busy/No Answer KTS, SLT 844

05 Call Forward - Both Ring KTS, SLT 842

06 Call Forwarding - Select Option KTS, SLT 888

07 Call Forwarding - Follow-Me KTS, SLT 846

08 Do Not Disturb KTS, SLT 847

09 Answer Message Waiting KTS, SLT 841 11-10-16

10 Cancel All Messages Waiting KTS, SLT 873

11 Cancel Message Waiting KTS, SLT 871

12 Alarm Clock KTS, SLT 827 20-01-06

13 Display Language Selection KTS 778 15-02

14 Text Message Setting KTS 836

15 Enable Handsfree Incoming Intercom Calls KTS 821 20-09-05

20-02-12

496 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default New Program

16 Force Ringing of Incoming Intercom Calls KTS 823 20-09-05

20-02-12
17 Programmable Function Key Programming (Dialing KTS 851 15-07
851 Service Code) 11-11-38

18 BGM On/Off KTS 825

19 Key Touch Tone On/Off KTS 824

20 Change Incoming CO and ICM Ring Tones KTS 820 15-02

21 Check Incoming Ring Tones KTS 811

22 Extension Name Programming KTS 800 15-01

23 Second Call for DID/DISA/DIL KTS 799

24 Change Extension Class of Service KTS 177 20-13-28

Allows an extension user to change the COS of
another extension. Must be allowed in Program
20-13-28.
25 Automatic Transfer Setup for Each Extension Group KTS, SLT 702 20-11-17
24-05

26 Automatic Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension KTS, SLT 703

Group

27 Destination of Automatic Transfer Each Extension KTS 704 20-11-17

Group 24-05

28 Delayed Transfer for Every Extension Group KTS, SLT 705 20-11-17
24-05
24-02-08

29 Delayed Transfer Cancellation for Each Extension KTS, SLT 706 20-11-17
Group

30 DND Setup for Each Extension Group KTS, SLT 707

31 DND Cancellation for Each Extension Group KTS, SLT 708

32 Not Used - - - -

33 Dial Block KTS, SLT 700

34 Temporary Toll Restriction Override KTS, SLT 875 21-07

35 Pilot Group Withdrawing KTS, SLT 750

36 Toll Restriction Override KTS, SLT 763 21-14

37 Adjusting Ring Volume KTS 829

38 Programmable Function Key Programming (Dialing KTS 852 15-07

852 Service Code) 11-11-17

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 497

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-11 : Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default New Program

39 One Touch Dial Number Entry KTS 855

40 Off-Premise Call Forwarding KTS, SLT 713

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-11 (Service Code Setup (for Setup/Entry Operation)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 11
11-11-01
Call_Forward-Imm901
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-11-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

498 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access) to customize the Service Codes
which are used for service access. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10,
11-11, and 11-13 through 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-48)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry. For example, dialing 805 (code 05) will cancel a previously set
Camp-On.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Terminals Default New Related
No. Program

01 Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb Override KTS, SLT 807 11-16-09

Activating Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override.
This code is only available if you disable the voice
mail Single Digit dialing code in Program 11-16-09.

02 Conference KTS, SLT 826

03 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) KTS, SLT 809

04 Set Camp-On KTS, SLT 850

05 Cancel Camp-On KTS, SLT 870

06 Switching of Voice Call and Signal Call KTS, SLT 812

07 Step Call KTS, SLT 808

08 Barge-In KTS, SLT 810

09 Change to STG All Ring KTS, SLT 780 16-02

10 Common/Extension Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT 813

11 Group Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT 814

12 Last Number Dial KTS, SLT 816

13 Saved Number Dial KTS, SLT 815

14 Trunk Group Access KTS, SLT 804

15 Specified Trunk Access KTS, SLT 805

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 499

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default New Program

16 Trunk Access Via Networking KTS 866

17 Clear Last Number Dialing Data KTS, SLT 876

18 Clear Saved Number Dialing Data KTS, SLT 885

19 Internal Group Paging KTS, SLT 801 31-01-01

20 External Paging KTS, SLT 803

21 Meet Me Answer to Specified Internal Paging Group KTS, SLT 864

22 Meet Me Answer to External Paging KTS, SLT 865

23 Meet Me Answer in Same Paging Group KTS, SLT 863

24 Paging Combine KTS, SLT 751 31-07

25 Direct Call Pickup - Own Group KTS, SLT 856

26 Call Pickup for Specified Group KTS, SLT 868

27 Call Pickup KTS, SLT 867

28 Call Pickup for Another Group KTS, SLT 869

29 Direct Extension Call Pickup KTS, SLT 815

30 Specified Trunk Answer KTS, SLT 772

31 Park KTS, SLT 831 24-03

32 Answer for Park KTS, SLT 861 24-03

33 Group Hold KTS, SLT 832

34 Answer for Group Hold KTS, SLT 862

35 Extension Park KTS, SLT 773

36 Door Box Access KTS, SLT 802

37 Common Canceling Service Code KTS, SLT 720

38 Not Used - 883 - -

39 VRS Access KTS, SLT 884

40 Personal Abbreviated Dialing KTS, SLT 761

41 Voice Over KTS 890 11-16-08

42 Flash on Trunk lines SLT 806

43 Universal Answer SLT 872 14-05
14-06

44 Callback Test for SLT SLT 899

500 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Item Related
No. Item Terminals Default New Program

45 Enabled On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 849 15-03-07

46 Answer On Hook When Holding (SLT) SLT 859 15-03-08

47 Call Waiting Answer / Split Answer for SLT SLT 894 11-12-03
Splitting (switching) between calls

48 Account Code SLT 891

49 Not Used - - - -

50 General Purpose Relay KST 880

51 Call Own Mailbox 717

52 Live Monitoring (VRS) 725

53 Live Recording at SLT SLT 754

54 VRS Routing for ANI/DNIS 882

Setting Up ANI/DNIS Routing to the VRS Auto-
mated Attendant. Using the Transfer feature, this also
allows a call to be transferred to the VRS.
56 E911 Alarm Shut Off No Setting - -
Enter the Service Code that an extension user can dial
to shut off the E911 Alarm Ring.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 501

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-12 : Service Code Setup (for Service Access)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-12 (Service Code Setup (for Service Access)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 12
11-12-01
Bypass_Call 801
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-12-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

502 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD) to customize the Service Codes which are used
with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in
Programs 11-10 through 11-12 and 11-14 through 11-16. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-09)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Terminals Default New
No.

01 ACD Log In / Log Out (for KTS) KTS, SLT 839

02 ACD Log Out (for SLT) SLT 755

03 Set ACD Temporary Release (for SLT) SLT 756

04 Cancel ACD Temporary Release (for SLT) SLT 757

05 Set ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 758

06 Cancel ACD Off Duty (for SLT) SLT 759

07 ACD Conversation Recording (for SLT) SLT 760

08 ACD AIC Login KTS No setting

09 ACD AIC Logout KTS No setting

10 ACD Agent Login by Supervisor KTS 767

11 ACD Agent Logout by Supervisor KTS 768

12 Change Agent ACD Group by Supervisor KTS 769

13 Agent Change Own ACD Group KTS 775

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 503

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-13 : Service Code Setup (for ACD)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-13 (Service Code Setup (for ACD)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 13
11-13-01
KT_ACD_LogIn/Out
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-13-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

504 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel) to customize the Service Codes which are
used with the Hotel/Motel feature. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10
through 11-13, 11-15 and 11-16. The Service Codes can only be used at telephones registered as
hotel terminals in Program 42-02. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-17)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Terminals Default

01 Set DND for Own Extension KTS, SLT 727

02 Cancel DND for Own Extension KTS, SLT 728

03 Set DND for Other Extension KTS, SLT 729

04 Cancel DND for Other Extension KTS, SLT 730

05 Set Wake Up Call for Own Extension KTS, SLT 731

06 Cancel Wake Up Call for Own Extension KTS, SLT 732

07 Set Wake Up Call for Other Extension KTS, SLT 733

08 Cancel Wake Up Call for Other Extension KTS, SLT 734

09 Set Room to Room Call Restriction KTS, SLT 735

10 Cancel Room to Room Call Restriction (Hotel) KTS, SLT 736

11 Change Toll Restriction Class for Other Extension KTS, SLT 737

12 Check-In KTS, SLT 738

13 Check-Out KTS, SLT 739

14 Room Status Change for Own Extension KTS, SLT 740

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 505

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-14 : Service Code Setup (for Hotel)

Item
No. Item Terminals Default

15 Room Status Change for Other Extension KTS, SLT 741

16 Room Status Output KTS, SLT 742

17 Hotel Room Monitor KTS, SLT 770

18 Hotel PMS Toll Restriction Set KTS 766

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-14 (Service Code Setup (for Hotel)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 14
11-14-01
DND Own-Ext.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-14-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

506 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access) to customize the
special access Service Codes which are used by the administrator in the Hotel/Motel feature. You can
customize additional Service Codes in Programs 11-10 through 11-14 and 11-16. The following chart
shows:
• The number of each code (01-07)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry.
• Programs that may be affected with the changing the code.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Terminals Default New Related
No. Program

01 Remote Maintenance 830

02 ACD Access in Dial-In Conversion Table 860 22-04

22-11

03 Backup Data Save KTS #*#9

04 Not Used

05 System Programming Mode, Log-On KTS #*#* 11-01

06 Wake on LAN to APSU Unit KTS No Setting 10-22

07 Recording Destination in Dial-In Conversion Table No Setting

08 Network Message Lamp Control 866

09 Transfer to Trunk Ring Group Code No Setting

Allows a call to be transferred to the Universal Night
Answer External Paging zones.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 507

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-15 : Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Special Access)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-15 (Service Code Setup, Administrative (for Hotel)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 15
11-15-01
Remote_Mainte #*01
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-15-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

508 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup to customize the one-digit Service Codes
used when a busy or ring back signal is heard. You can customize additional Service Codes in Programs
11-10 through 11-15. The following chart shows:
• The number of each code (01-10)
• The function of the Service Code.
• What type of telephones can use the Service Code
• The code’s default entry. For example, dialing 1 (code 03) when calling an extension will
switch the call from either a voice or signal call (depending on how it’s currently defined).
• Programs that may be affected by changing these codes.

If you change a Service Code, be sure to record your entry in the “New” column.

Input Data
Item Item Default New Related
No. Program

01 Step Call No Setting

02 Barge In No Setting

03 Switching of Voice/Signal Call 1

04 Intercom Off Hook Signaling No Setting

05 Camp-On No Setting

06 DND/Call Forward Override No Setting

07 Message Waiting No Setting

08 Voice Over No Setting

09 Access to Voice Mail No Setting

10 STG All Ring Mode No Setting 16-01-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 509

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-16 : Single Digit Service Code Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-16 (Single Digit Service Code Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 16
11-16-01
Step Call
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-16-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

510 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 11 : System Numbering
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 11-17 - ACD Group Pilot Number to assign the ACD Master Number for each
ACD Group. This is the number users dial to transfer calls to the ACD Group.

Input Data
ACD Group Number 01-64

ACD Group Pilot Number

Dial (Up to 8 digits)

Default
No ACD Group Pilot Numbers assigned to any ACD Group (1-64).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 511

Program 11 : System Numbering
11-17 : ACD Group Pilot Number

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 11-17 (ACD Group Pilot Number):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 11 17
11-17-01 ACD Group1
ACD-G_Pilot_No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
11-17-nn ACD Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

512 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup
Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup to set up the Night Mode options. Refer to the
following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description Related
No. Program

01 Manual Night Service 0-off 1 Allows/prevents users from activating 11-10-01

Enable 1-on Night Service by dialing a service
code.

02 Automatic Night Service 0-off 1 According to a preset schedule, enable 12-02

1-on or disable Automatic Night Service 12-03
for the system. 12-04

03 Night Mode Switch 0-disable 0 Use this option to set the operation
Operating Mode 1-8 mode of the NTCPU Night Service
(Sensor switch on (operation mode) mode switch sensors (external Night
NTCPU only) Mode Selector Switch). The Night
Service mode affects trunk inbound
and outbound routing.

Note: Even if the operation mode is changed manually, the operation mode changes according to
the schedule set up.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 513

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-01 : Night Mode Function Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-01 (Night Mode Function Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 01
12-01-01
Manual_NT-Mode1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

514 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns to define the daily pattern of the auto
night switch setting. Each Night Mode Group has 10 patterns. These patterns are used in Programs
12-03 and 12-04. The daily pattern consists of 20 timer settings.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32

Time Pattern Number 01-10

Set Time Number 01-20

Timer Number Start Time End Time Operation Mode

01-20 0000-2359 0000-2359 1-8

Example:
Time Pattern 1
0:00 9:00 12:00 13:00 17:00 18:00 22:00 0:00
Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 1 Mode 4 Mode 2 Mode 3
(midnight) (day) (rest) (day) (rest) (night) (midnight)

To make the above schedule, it is necessary to set the data as follows:

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 09:00 Mode 3 (midnight)

Time setting 02: 09:00 to 12:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 03: 12:00 to 13:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 04: 13:00 to 17:00 Mode 1 (day)
Time setting 05: 17:00 to 18:00 Mode 4 (rest)
Time setting 06: 18:00 to 22:00 Mode 2 (night)
Time setting 07: 22:00 to 00:00 Mode 3 (midnight)

Time Pattern 2
0:00 0:00
Mode 2
(night)

Time setting 01: 00:00 to 00:00 Mode 2 (night)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 515

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns
Default
All groups, all patterns : 00:00 to 00:00 = Mode 1
Time Pattern 1
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0800 2
02 0800 1700 1
03 1700 0000 2
04 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 2
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 2
02 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Time Pattern 3
Set Time Number Start Time End Time Mode
01 0000 0000 1
: : : :
20 0000 0000 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

516 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-02 : Automatic Night Service Patterns

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-02 (Automatic Night Service Patterns):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 02
12-02-01
PTTN 01-01 STRT=00:00
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 517

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching to define a weekly schedule of
night-switch settings.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32

Day of the week Time Schedule Pattern Number

01=Sunday 0-10

02=Monday

03=Tuesday

04=Wednesday

05=Thursday

06=Friday

07=Saturday

Default
Day of the week Time Schedule Pattern Number

01=Sunday 2

02=Monday 1

03=Tuesday 1

04=Wednesday 1

05=Thursday 1

06=Friday 1

07=Saturday 2

Conditions
None

518 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-03 : Weekly Night Service Switching

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-03 (Weekly Night Serv ice Switching):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
3. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
4. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 519

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching to define a yearly schedule of holiday
night-switch settings. This schedule is used for setting of special days which the company is
expected to be closed, such as national holiday.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32

Days and Months Time Pattern Number

0101- 1231 0-32

(ex: 0101 = Jan. 1, 1231 = Dec. 31) (0: no setting

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

520 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-04 : Holiday Night Service Switching

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-04 (Holiday Night Service Switching):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 04
12-04-01
Date01/01 =PTTN0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 521

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions to a assign Day/Night
Mode Group for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 Digits

Night Mode Service Group Number Default

01-32 1

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

522 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-05 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-05 (Night Mode Group Assignment for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 05
12-05-01 TEL200
Night Mode Group 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 523

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks to assign a Day/Night Mode
Group for each trunk port.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1-200

Night Mode Service Group Number Default

01-32 1

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

524 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-06 : Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-06 (Night Mode Group Assignment for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 06
12-06-01 Trk Port 1
Night Mode Group 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-06-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 525

Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode to make an original text message which is dis-
played on an LCD of keyset telephone in each Night Mode.

Input Data
Night Mode Service Group Number 01-32

Day/Night Mode 1-8

Text Message

Maximum 12 characters (alphabetic or numeric)

Default
No setting for modes 1-8

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service

526 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 12 : Night Mode Setup
12-07 : Text Data for Night Mode

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 12-07 (Text Data for Night Mode):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 12 07
12-07-01 Mode Group1
Mode1 Text=
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
12-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 527

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup
Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup to define the Abbreviated Dialing
functions.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Related Program
No.

01 Abbreviated Dialing Auto Outgoing 0- Trunk outgoing mode 0 13-05

Call Mode 1- Extension outgoing mode
02 Not Used -

03 Number of Common Abbreviated 0-2000 1000 13-04

Dialing Bins 0: No Common Abbrevi-
ated Dialing
100 bins per 1 unit

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing

528 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-01 : Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 13-01 (Abbreviated Dialing Function Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 13 01
13-01-01
Abb.Dial 0:Trunk OTG
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
13-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 529

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins
13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins to define the range of bin numbers to be
used by each Abbreviated Dialing group (refer to Program 13-03).

Input Data
Abbreviated Dialing Start Address of Abbreviated End Address of Abbreviated
Group Number Dialing Bin Dialing Bin

01-64 0-1990 0, 9 - 1999

Default
No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing

530 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-02 : Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 13-02 (Group Abbreviated Dialing Bins):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 13 02
13-02-01 Abb Group 1
Group Start Area 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
13-02-nn Abb Group nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Abbreviated Dialing group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 531

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions
13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions to assign Abbre-
viated Dialing Group for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Group Number Default Value

1-64 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing

532 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-03 : Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 13-03 (Abbreviated Dialing Group Assignment for
Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 13 03
13-03-01 TEL200
Group 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
13-03-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the extension number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 533

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name
13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name

Level: Aspila EX
SB • Available.

Description
Use Program 13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name to store Abbreviated Dialing data
into the Abbreviated Dialing areas. This program is also used to define the names assigned to the
Abbreviated Dialing numbers.

Input Data
Abbreviated Dialing Bin Number 0-1999

Item Item Input Data Default Related Program

No.

01 Abbreviated Dialing Data 1-9, 0, *, #, No Setting

Pause (Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key 2),
@ for Additional Digit for ISDN
Functionality (Press line key 3)

(max. 24 digits)

02 Name Max. 12 Characters No Setting

03 Transfer Mode 0…Not defined 0

1…Internal dial
2… Incoming Ring Group (IRG)

Destination Number If Transfer mode are; No Setting

1:Internal Dial Mode
1-9, 0, *, #, P,R,@
(Max 24 Characters)
2:IRG
0-100 (IRG Number)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing

534 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-04 : Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 13-04 (Abbreviated Dialing Number and Name):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 13 04
13-04-01 Abb Area0
Dial =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
13-02-nn Abb Area0
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Abbreviated Dialing group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 535

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group
13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group

Level: Aspila EX
SB • Available.

Description
Use Program 13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group to define the trunk group to be seized
for each Abbreviated Dialing number (refer to Program 13-05).

If this program has an entry of ‘0’ (no setting), then seizing a line follows the trunk access group
routing of the caller’s extension (refer to Program 14-06). This setting is only available in External
Abbreviated Dialing Mode (Program 13-01-01).

Input Data
Abbreviated Dialing Bin Number 0-1999

Trunk Group Number

0-100

Default
No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Abbreviated Dialing

536 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-05 : Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 13-05 (Abbreviated Dialing Trunk Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 13 05
13-05-01 ABB Area0
TRK GP Number 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
13-05-nn ABB Areannn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Abbreviated Dialing Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 537

Program 13 : Abbreviated Dialing
13-06 :
13-06 :

Level: Aspila EX
SB • Available.

Description
Not Used

538 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup
Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each trunk port. Refer
to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Trunk Name Up to 12 characters

Set the names for trunks. The trunk name
displays at display keysets for incoming
and outgoing calls.

02 Transmit CODEC Gain Type 1~63 26

Use this option to select the CODEC gain (-15.5 - +15.5dB in (-3dB)
for the trunk. The option sets the amount .5dB intervals)
of gain (signal amplification) for the trunk
you are programming.

03 Receive CODEC Gain Type 1~63 26

Use this option to select the CODEC gain (-15.5 - +15.5dB in (-3dB)
for the trunk. The option sets the amount .5dB intervals)
of gain (signal amplification) for the trunk
you are programming.

04 Transmit Gain Level for Conference 1~63 26

and Transfer Calls (-15.5 - +15.5dB in (-3dB)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain .5dB intervals)
type used by the trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.
05 Receive Gain Level for Conference and 1~63 26
Transfer Calls (-15.5 - +15.5dB in (-3dB)
Use this option to select the CODEC gain .5dB intervals)
type used by the trunk when it is part of an
Unsupervised Conference.

06 SMDR Print Out 0- No print out 0

Use this option to have the system 1- Prints out
include/exclude the trunk you are pro-
gramming form the SMDR printout. See
Program 35-01 and 35-02 for SMDR
printout options.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 539

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

07 Outgoing Calls 0- prevented 1

Use this option to allow/prevent outgoing 1- allowed
calls on the trunk you are programming.

08 Toll Restriction 0- Restriction disable 1 21-04

Use this option to enable/disabled Toll 1- Restriction enable 21-05
Restriction for the trunk. If enabled, the 21-06
trunk follows Toll Restriction program-
ming (ex: Programs 21-05, 21-06). If dis-
abled, the trunk is a toll free line.

09 Private line 0- Private line disable 0

1- Private line enable

10 DTMF Tones for Outgoing Calls 0- disable 1

Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) 1- enable
DTMF tones for outgoing trunk calls.
11 Account code required 0- disable 1
1- enable

12 - Not Used - 1

13 Loop Disconnect Supervision 0- disable 0

Use this option to enable (1) or disable (0) 1- enable
loop supervision for the trunk. This option
is required for Call Forwarding
Off-Premise and Tandem Trunking only.

14 Long Conversation Cutoff 0- disable 0 20-21-03

Use this option to enable or disable the 1- enable 20-21-04
Long Conversation Cutoff feature for
each trunk.

15 Long Conversation Alarm Before Cut 0- disable 0

Off 1- enable
Use this option to enable or disable the
Long Conversation Alarm for each trunk.
16 Forced Release of Held Call 0- disable 0 24-01-05
Use this option to enable/disable forced 1- enable
release for calls on Hold. If enabled, the
system disconnects a call if it is on Hold
longer than a programmed interval (Pro-
gram 24-01-05). If disabled, forced dis-
connection does not occur. Program
24-01-01 also affects this option.

17 Trunk to Trunk Warning Tone for 0- disable 0

Long Conversation Alarm 1- enable
Use this option to enable or disable the
Warning Tone for Long Conversation fea-
ture for DISA callers.

540 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

18 Warning Beep Tone Signaling 0- disable 0

1- enable

19 Privacy Mode Toggle Option 0- disable 0

Use this option to enable or disable a 1- enable
trunk’s ability to be switched from private
to non-private mode by pressing the line
key or Privacy Release function key.

20 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0- Allow 0

Allow (1) or prevent (0) the system from 1- Block
automatically blocking outgoing Caller ID
information when a user places a call. If
allowed (i.e. block, enabled), the system
automatically inserts the Caller ID block
code (defined in 14-01-21) before the user
dialed digits.

21 Caller ID Block Code Dial (up to 8 digits) -

Enter the code, up to 8 digits, that should
be used as the Caller ID Block Code. This
code is automatically inserted before
dialed digits if Program 14-01-20 is set to
‘1’.

22 Caller ID to Voice Mail 0- disable 0

Enable or disable the system’s ability to 1- enable
send the Caller ID digits (Remote Log-On
Protocol) to voice mail.

Default
Trunk Port Number Name

001 LINE 001

002 LINE 002

: :
200 LINE 200

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to features in above chart.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 541

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-01 : Basic Trunk Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-01 (Basic Trunk Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 01
14-01-01 Trunk1
TRK Name = LINE 001
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-01-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

542 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup
14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup to set the basic options for each analogue
trunk port. Refer to the chart below for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Signaling Type (DP/DTMF) 0- Dial Pulse (10 PPS) 2

This option sets the signaling type for the trunk. 1- Dial Pulse (20 PPS)
2- DTMF

02 Ring Detect Type 0- Normal/delayed 0

This option sets Extended Ring Detect or Immediate 1- Immediately ringing
Ring Defect for the trunk.

03 Flash Types 0- Open Loop Flash 0

This option to select the flash type (open loop flash 1- Ground
or ground). Always set this option for open loop
flash.

04 Flash For Timed Flash or Disconnect 0- Timed flash 0 81-01-14

This option lets you use Flash for Timed Flash (Pro- 1- Disconnect 81-01-15
gram 81-01-14) or Disconnect (Program 81-01-15).
(A user implements Flash by pressing the FLASH
key while on a trunk call.)

05 Dial Tone Detection for Directly Accessed 0- DTD not used 1 21-01-04
Trunks 1- DTD used
Use this option enable/disable dial tone detection
for directly accessed trunks. If disabled, the system
outdials on the trunks without monitoring for dial
tone.

06 Pause at 1st digit after line seize in manual dial 0- No Pause 1 21-01-06
mode 1- Pause

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 543

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

07 DP to DTMF Conversion Options 0 - Automatic 2 21-01-03

Determine how a user can convert a Dial Pulse (DP) 1 - Automatic and Manual
call to a DTMF call. For each trunk, set the type of 2 - Manual
DP to DTMF conversion required. There are three
conversion options: Automatic (0), Automatic and
Manual (1), or Manual (2).
Automatic:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the
extension user waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit.
Automatic and Manual:
DP to DTMF conversion occurs automatically if the
extension user waits more than 10 seconds before
dialing the next digit. In addition, the user can dial #
to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dialing.
Manual:
User can dial # to switch a DP trunk to DTMF dial-
ing

08 Answering condition 0- Polarity reversing 0 21-01-03

1- Polarity reversing
or timer

09 Busy Tone Detection 0- disable 0

1- enable

10 Caller ID 0- disable 0
Enable or disable a trunk’s ability to receive Caller 1- enable
ID information.

11 Next Trunk in Rotary if No Dial Tone 0- disable 0

Use this option to enable/disable the system’s abil- 1- enable
ity to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected.
This option pertains to calls placed using Loop
Keys, Speed Dial, ARS, Last Number Redial or
Save Number dialed. It does not pertain to line key
or Direct Trunk Access calls.
12 Detect Network Disconnect Signal 0- disable 0
1- enable

13 Trunk-to-Trunk Limitation 0- disable 0

1- enable

14 Loop Start/Ground Start 0=Loop Start 0

1=Ground Start

Conditions
None

544 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-02 : Analogue Trunk Data Setup

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-02 (Analogue Trunk Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 02
14-02-01 Trunk1
DP/DTMF 2:PB
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-02-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 545

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-04 : Behind PBX Setup to indicate if the trunk is installed behind a PBX. There
is one item for each of the Night Service Modes:

Input Data

Trunk port number 1-200

Day/Night
Mode Type of Connection Default Related Program

1-8 0- Stand alone 0 22-02

1- Behind PBX

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

546 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-04 : Behind PBX Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-04 (Behind PBX Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 04
14-04-01 Trunk1
Mode1 LN-Type=0:Trunk
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-04-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 547

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group
14-05 : Trunk Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-05 : Trunk Groups to assign trunks to Trunk Groups. You can also assign the
outbound priority for trunks within the group. When users dial up the trunk group, they seize the
trunks in the order you specify in the outbound priority entry.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Trunk Group Number Order Number

0-100 1-200

Default
Trunk Port Group Priority

1 1 1

: : :

200 1 200

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Trunk Groups

548 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-05 : Trunk Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-05 (Trunk Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 05
14-05-01 Trunk1
Group No. 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-05-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 549

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-06 : Trunk Group Routing to set up an outbound routing table for the trunk
groups you assigned in Program 14-05. When users dial 9, the system routes their calls in the order
(priority) you specify. For example, if a user dials 9 and all calls in the first group are busy, the sys-
tem may route the call to another group. Trunk Access Map programming (Programs 14-07) may
limit this option. The system contains 100 routing tables for trunk access. Each table has four prior-
ity orders for trunk access.

Example for setting:

With less than 4 trunk groups,

Route number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk group 2
For the above setting, if all the lines in trunk group 1 are busy, the system searches for an
idle line in trunk group 2.

With more than 4 trunk groups,

Route number 1 : Order 1 – Trunk group 1
: Order 2 – Trunk group 2
: Order 3 – Trunk group 3
: Order 4 – 1002 (Jump to Route number 2)
Route number 2 : Order 1 – Trunk group 4
: Order 2 – Trunk group 5
For the above setting, if all the lines in the trunk group 1, 2 and 3 are busy, the system
searches for an idle line in trunk group 4 and 5.

Input Data
Route Table Number 1-100

Priority Order
Number Input Data Related Program

1-4 0- not specify 14-01-07

001-100 : (Trunk Group Number) 14-05
101-150 : (100 + Network System Number) 15-01-02
1001-1100 : (1000 + Route Table Number) 21-02

550 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-06 : Trunk Group Routing
Default
Route 1, Order Number 1 = 1 (Trunk Group 1), Order Numbers 2, 3, 4 = 0 (not specified)
All Other Routes (2-100) and Order Numbers (1-4) = 0 (not specified)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-06 (Trunk Group Routing):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 06
14-06-01 Route TBL1
Order1 Data1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-06-nn Route TBLnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Group Routing Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 551

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup to set up the Trunk Access Maps. This sets an
extension’s access options for trunks. For example, an extension can only place outgoing calls on
trunks to which it has outgoing access. There are 200 Access Maps with all 200 trunk ports pro-
grammed in Map 1 with full access.

An extension can use one of the maps you set up in this program. Use Program 15-06 to assign
Trunk Access Maps to extensions. Each trunk can have one of eight access options for each Access
Map.

Input Data
Access Map Number 1-200

Trunk Port Number Input Data

001-200 0- No access
1- Outgoing access only
2- Incoming access only
3- Access only when trunk on Hold
4- Outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold
5- Incoming access and access when trunk on Hold
6- Incoming and Outgoing access
7- Incoming access, outgoing access and access when trunk on Hold

Default
• Access Map 1 = Trunk Ports 1-200 assigned with option ‘7’ access (incoming and outgoing
access and access when trunk is on Hold).
• Access Maps 2-200 - Trunk Ports 1-200 assigned with option ‘0’ access (no access).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

552 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-07 : Trunk Access Map Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-07 (Trunk Access Map Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 07
14-07-01 Acess Map1
TRK_ 001=7:OTG/INC/Hold
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-07-nn Access Mapnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Access Map number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 553

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks to define a trunk’s Music on Hold
source as either the ACI or COI port.

Note: If ACI is selected as the source in Item 1, the port number for the source must be selected in
Item 2.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 MOH Type 0- Internal synthesized MOH 0

Select a trunk’s 1- A customer-provided source connected to BGM port.
Music on Hold 2- A customer-provided source connected to ACI port.
source.
02 Source Port If the MOH Type is “2”, the source port number is 0 – 96. 0
Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Music on Hold

554 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-08 : Music on Hold Source for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-08 (Music on Hold Source for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 08
14-08-01 Trunk1
MOH Type 0:Internal
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-08-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 555

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks to set the Conversation
Recording destination for each trunk.

Note: If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12
will be followed.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Recording Destination Extension Number Max. 8 digits No setting

02 Automatic Recording 0- off 0

1- on

03 Recording Contents Storing Method 0- specifies by dialing 0

1- own mailbox

04 Automatic Recording for Outgoing Call 0- off 0

1- on

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

556 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-09 : Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-09 (Conversation Recording Destination for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 09
14-09-01 Trunk1
Rec.Distn.Ext
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-09-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 557

Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-10 : Power Failure Telephone for Trunks
14-10 : Power Failure Telephone for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Not Available in USA.

Description
Use Program 14-10 : Power Failure Telephone for Trunks to set up the outside trunk port which
will be used if a power failure occurs. The extension number of the telephone linked to outside line
at the time of a power failure is also deteremined.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Extension Number Default

Dial (Up to 8 digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

558 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 14 : Trunk Basic Setup
14-10 : Power Failure Telephone for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 14-10 (Power Failure Telephone for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 14 10
14-10-01 Trunk1
PF Telephone
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
14-10-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 559

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup
Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup to define the basic settings for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Extension Name Up to 12 Characters 200 - EXT 200

Set the extension/virtual extension |
name. 499 - EXT 499

02 Outgoing Trunk Line Preference 0- Off 0 14-06

Use this option to set the extension’s 1- On 21-02
outgoing Trunk Line Preference. If
enabled, the extension user get trunk
dial tone when they lift the handset.
The user hears trunk dial tone only if
allowed by Trunk Access Map pro-
gramming (Programs 14-07 and
15-06). Refer to the Line Preference
feature for more details.

03 SMDR Printout 0- Do not print on SMDR report 1

Use this option to include or exclude 1- Include on SMDR report
the extension you are programming in
the SMDR report.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

560 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-01 : Basic Extension Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-01 (Basic Extension Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 01
15-01-01 TEL200
Ext.Name = EXT 200
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-01-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 561

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various keyset options.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Display Language Selection 0- Japanese 1

1- English
(To select options 8-10, press 2- German
either 8 or CALL2, then press line 3- French
keys 1-3. Key 1 is option 8, Key 2 4- Italian
is option 9, and Key 3 is option 5- Spanish
10.) 6- Dutch
7- Portugal
8- Norwegian
9- Danish
10- Swedish
02 Trunk Ring Tone 1- High 2 22-03
Use this option to set the tone 2- Mid range
(pitch) of the incoming trunk ring 3- Low
for the extension port you are pro- 4- Ring Tone 1
gramming. 5- Ring Tone 2
6- Ring Tone 3
7- Ring Tone 4
8- Ring Tone 5

03 Extension Ring Tone (Pitch) 1- High 8

Use this option to set the tone 2- Mid range
(pitch) of the incoming extension 3- Low
call ring for the extension port 4- Ring Tone 1
you are programming. Also see 5- Ring Tone 2
program 15-08. 6- Ring Tone 3
7- Ring Tone 4
8- Ring Tone 5

562 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

04 Abbreviated Dialing DIAL Key 0- Common and individual 0

Control Abbreviated Dialing
Use this option to control the 1- Group Abbreviated Dialing
function of the extension’s DIAL
key when used with Abbreviated
Dialing. The DIAL key can
access either the Common or
Group Abbreviated Dialing num-
bers.

05 Transfer Key Operation Mode 0- Transfer 0

Use this option to set the operat- 1- Series call
ing mode of the extension’s 2- Flash
CONF (TRF) key. The keys can
be for Call Transfer, Serial Call-
ing or Flash. When selecting the
Flash option (selection 2), refer
also to Program 81-01-14.
06 Hold Key Operating Mode 0- Normal Hold 0
Use this option to set the function 1- Exclusive Hold
of the keyset Hold key. The Hold 2- Park
key can activate normal Hold,
Exclusive Hold or Park.

07 Automatic Hold for CO Lines 0- Enable (Hold) 1

1- Disable (Disconnect)

08 Pre-select / One-touch Key 0- Pre-select 1

1- One-touch

09 Ringing Line Preference for 0- off 1

Intercom Calls 1- on
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference
for Intercom calls.

10 Ringing Line Preference for 0- off 1

Trunk Calls 1- on
Use this option to select between
Idle and Ringing Line Preference
for trunk calls.
11 Callback Automatic Answer 0- off 1
Use this option to enable or dis- 1- on
able automatic answer for Call-
back. If enabled, extension
automatically answers Callback
ring when user lifts the handset. If
disabled, use must press line
appearance key to answer Call-
back.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 563

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

12 Off Hook Ringing 0- Muted Off Hook Ringing 0

Use this option to set the keyset’s 1- No Off Hook Ringing
off hook signaling. Off hook sig- 2- Not Used
naling occurs when a keyset user 3- Beep in Speaker
receives a second call while busy 4- Beep in Handset
on a handset call. To enable/dis-
able Off Hook Signaling for an
extension’s Class of Service, use
Program 20-13-06.

13 Redial List Mode 0- Extension/Trunk Mode 1

Select whether the Redial List 1- Trunk Mode
feature should store internal and
external numbers (0), or only
external numbers (1).
14 Sending Sub-address for Virtual 0- Disable 0
Extension call 1- Enable

15 Storage of Caller-ID for answered 0- Disable 1

call 1- Enable

16 Handsfree Operation 0- Disable 1

1- Enable

18 Power-saving mode 0- Normal mode 1

1- Power-saving mode

19 CTA Data Communication Mode 0- CTI mode 0 15-02-20

1- non-procedural mode

20 Baud rate for CTA Port 0- 4800 2 15-02-19

1- 9600
2- 19200

21 Virtual Extension Access Mode 0- DSS (Inbound/Outbound) 2

(when idle Virtual Extension 1- Outgoing
key pressed) 2- Ignore Key (Inbound)
Determine whether an extension’s
Virtual Extension/Call Coverage
Key should be for placing and
receiving calls (0), or just receiv-
ing incoming calls (2).

564 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-02 : Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Incoming Signal Frequency Pattern Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation

External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 1) High 1100 1400 16Hz

Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz
External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 2) High 1100 1400 8Hz
Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz
External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 3) High 1100 1100 Envelope
Middle 660 660 Envelope
Low 520 520 Envelope
External Incoming Signal Frequency (Pattern 4) High 1100 1100 No modulation
Middle 660 660 No modulation
Low 520 520 No modulation
Internal Incoming Signal Frequency High 1100 1400 8Hz
Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to above chart.

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-02 (Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 02
15-02-01 TEL200
Language 1:English
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 565

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup to set up various single line tele-
phone options.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 SLT Signaling Type 0- DP 0

Use this option to tell the system the type of 1- DTMF
dialing the connected telephone uses.

02 Loop current (Not Used) 0- 20mA 0

1- 35mA

03 Terminal Type 0- Normal 0

Enter 1 for this option to allow a single line port 1- Special
to receive DTMF tones after the initial call
setup. Enter 0 to have the port ignore DTMF
tones after the initial call setup. For Voice Mail,
always enter 1 (e.g., receive DTMF tones).

04 Flashing 0- Disable 1
Enables/disables Flash for single line (500/2500 1- Enable
type) telephones.

05 External Reverse 0- Disable 0

1- Enable
06 Extension Reverse 0- Disable 0
1- Enable

07 Enabled on hook when holding (SLT) 0- Disable 1

1- Enable

08 Answer on hook when holding (SLT) 0- Disable 1 11-12-46

1- Enable

09 Extension Number Display 0- Disable 0

1- Enable

566 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Single Line Telephone, Analogue
• Single Line Telephone, Digital

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 567

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-03 : Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-03 (Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 03
15-03-01 TEL200
SLT Type 0:DP
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-03-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

568 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup
15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup to set up the basic settings for an IP
Phone.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item Item Input Data Default Description Related

No. Program

01 Terminal 0: NGT -
Type 1: H.323
2: SIP
3: MEGACO

02 NGT fixed MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-00 The MAC Address of a ter- 15-05-01
port 00-00-00-00-00-00 to minal which registers
assignment FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF extension number.

03 Default URL URL address No setting The default URL address 15-05-01
address for Smart Phone

04 H. 323 fixed Up to 48 Character Length No setting The alias address of H.323 15-05-01
port terminal is set up.
assignment Each alias address must be
unique in the system.

05-11 For viewing only - These items should not be changed.

05 H.323 Ter- 1=Standard H.323 Ter-

minal Type minal
2=Net Meeting

06 NGT Ter- 1=IP70

minal Type 2=IP80
3=Smart Phone

07 Using IP 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255

Address

08 H.323 RAS 0-65535

Port

09 H.323 Call 0-65535

Procedure
Port

10 NGT Voice 0-65535

Path Port

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 569

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

11 NGT Call
Procedure
Port

12 System Type 0=No other system 0 For system interconnection

1=Aspila EX
13 IP Address 1.0.0.1-126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0
of Other Sys- 128.1.0.1-191.255.255.254
tem 192.0.1.1-223.255.255.254
14 Call Control 1-65535 1720
Port of Other
System
15 CODEC 0-Type 1 0
Type 1-Type 2
2-Type 3
3-Type 4
4-Type 5

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

570 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-05 : IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-05 (IP Phone Terminal Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 05
15-05-01 TEL200
IP-Phone Type 0:NGT
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-05-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 571

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions to define the trunk access map for each
extension. An extension can only place outgoing calls on trunks to which it has outgoing access.
Use Program 14-07 to define the available 200 access maps.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Mode 1-8

Day/Night Mode Trunk Access Map No. Default Related Program

1-8 1-200 1 14-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

572 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-06 : Trunk Access Map for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-06 (Trunk Access Map for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 06
15-06-01 TEL200
Mode1 Acc-Map 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-06-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 573

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-07 : Programmable Function Keys to set the functions of an extension’s Pro-
grammable Function Key.

For certain functions, you can append data to the key’s basic function. For example, the function 26
appended by data 1 makes a Group Call Pickup key for Pickup Group 1. You can also program
Function Keys using Service Codes.

In order to clear any previously programmed key, press the CLEAR key to erase any displayed
code.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Line Key
Number Function Number Additional data

1-48 0-99 (General Function Level) (Service Code 851 by default) Refer to the function number
* 00-* 99 (Appearance Function Level) (Service Code 852 by default) list.

Default
Programmable keys 1-12 are line keys (key 1 = line 1, key 2 = line 2, etc.). All other programmable
keys are undefined.

574 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
Function Number List

[1] General Function Level (00 – 99) (Service Code 851)

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

01 DSS / One-Touch Extension number or any num- Red On: extension busy
bers (Up to 24 digits) Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward

02 Microphone Key (ON/OFF) Red On: Mic On

Off: Mic Off
03 DND Key Red On: DND

04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM On

Off: BGM Off
05 Headset Red On: Under headset operation

06 Transfer Key None

07 Conference Key Red On: Under conference operation

08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink (Red): New call log

Red On: Call log
Off: No call log

09 Operation Mode Switch Mode number (1 – 8) Red On: On mode

10 Call Forward - Immediate Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

11 Call Forward - Busy Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

12 Call Forward - No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

13 Call Forward - Busy/No Answer Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

14 Call Forward – Both Ring Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

15 Follow Me Rapid Blink (Red): Setting state

Slow Blink (Red): Set-ed state
16 Call Forward to Station Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state
Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

17 Call Foward to Device Slow Blink (Red): Forwarding state

Rapid Blink (Red): Forwarded state

18 Text Message Setup Message Numbers (01-20) Red On: Feature active by Function
Key

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 575

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

19 External Group Paging External Paging Number Red On: Active

(1-8)
20 External All Call Paging Red On: Active

21 Internal Group Paging Internal Paging Number Red On: Active

(01-64)
22 Internal All Call Paging None

23 Meet-Me Answer to Internal None

Paging
24 Call Pickup None

25 Call Pickup for Another Group None

26 Call Pickup for Specified Group Call Pickup Group Number None
27 Abbreviated Dial – Abbreviated dial number None
Common/Private (Common / Private)

28 Abbreviated Dial - Group Abbreviated dial number None

(Group)

29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink (Red): Under a repeat

dial

30 Saved Number Redial None

31 Memo Dial None

32 Meet – Me Conference None

33 Override (Off-Hook Signaling) None

34 Break - In None

35 Camp On Red On: Under camp-on or

reservation

36 Step Call None

37 DND / FWD Override Call None

38 Message Waiting None

39 Room Monitoring Rapid Blink (Red): Under monitored
Slow Blink (Red): Under monitoring

40 Handset Transmission Cutoff Red On: Transmission cut-off

41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission side
Rapid Blink (Red): Receiver side

42 Boss – Secretary Call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary mode

576 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

43 Series Call None

44 Common Hold None

45 Exclusive None

46 Department Group Log Out Red On: Logged Out

47 Reverse Voice Over Extension Number Red On: extension busy

Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink (Red): DND or Call
Forward
48 Voice Over Calling party - Slow Blink (Red):
Under a call, Under a response
Called party - Slow Blink (Red): Under
a call, Under a response

49 Call Redirect Extension Number or Voice None

Mail Number

50 Account Code None

51 General Purpose Relay Relay No (0, 1-8) Red On: Relay On

52 Incoming Call Queuing Setup Incoming Group Number Red On: Under setting

53 Queuing Message Starting Red On: Active

54 External Call Forward by Door Red On: Active
Box

55 Extension Name Edit None

56 Department Incoming Call -
Automatic Transfer

57 Department Incoming Call -

Delayed

58 Department Incoming Call - Extension Group Number

Immediate (01 – 64)

59 Department Incoming Call - Extension Group Number

Delay (01 – 64)

60 Department Incoming Call - Extension Group Number

DND (01 – 64)

63 Outgoing Call Without Caller Red On: Active

ID (ISDN)

64 Key Pad Facility Red On: Active

65 Not Used

66 CTI Red On: CTI active

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 577

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

67 Mail Box Extension Number or Depart- Rapid Blink (Green): New message
ment Group Number received
Red On: Listening to messages.

68 Voice Mail Service 0- Skip 2-In case of monitor mode

1- Back Skip Slow Blink (Red): Monitor setting -
2- Monitor Automatic
Red On: Monitor setting - Manual

69 Conversation Recording Service 0- Conversation recording 0- In case of conversation recording

1- Delete, Re-recording Rapid Blink (Red): Under recording
2- Delete (No Destination)
Red On: Under recording
(Appointed destination)

70 Automated Attendant for Extension Number or None

Extension Department Group Number
71 Message Change for Voice Extension Number or None
Attendant Department Group Number

72 Keypad Facility Key

73 Keypad Hold Key

74 Keypad Retrieve Key

75 Keypad Conference Key

76 Toll Restriction in Credit

77 Voice Mail (In-Skin) Extension Numer or Pilot Num- Red On: Access to Voice Mail
ber Rapid Blink (Green): New Message

78 Conversation Recording Rapid Blink (Red): Recording

(In-Skin)

79 Automated Attendant (In-Skin) Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Set Up for All Calls
Number Slow Blink (Red): Set Up for Busy/No
Answer Calls

578 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys
[2] Appearance Function Level (*00 - *99) (Service Code 852)

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

*00 Not Used

*01 Trunk Key Trunk Number (001-200)

*02 Trunk Group/Loop Key Trunk Group Number

(001-100)

*03 Virtual Extension Key Extension Number or Depart-

ment Group Number

*04 Park Key Park Number (01 – 64)

*05 Loop Keys • 0=Incoming + Trunk Group

Number (001-100)
• 1=Outgoing + Trunk Group
Number (001-100)
• 2=Both + Trunk Group
Number (001-100)

*06 Trunk Access Via Networking Network System Number

(01-50)
*10 ACD Log – In / Log – Out Red On: Under log-on
Off: Under log-off

*11 ACD Conversation Recording Red On: Under recording

Slow Blink (Red): Pause

*12 ACD Emergency Call Emergency call

Red On: Under monitor, Override,
Standby
*13 ACD Off Duty Mode Red On: Under off duty
Slow Blink (Red): Under reservation

*14 ACD Start / End Red On: ACD operation end

*15 ACD Monitor Mode Red On: Under monitor

*16 ACD Standby Mode Red On: Standby

*17 ACD Work Time Mode Red On: Under work time
Slow Blink (Red): Under reservation

*18 ACD overflow Control ACD Group Number Red On: Enable
Slow Blink (Red): Disable

Conditions
When a key is programmed using service code 852, that key cannot be programmed with a function
using the 851 code until the key is undefined (000). For example with a Park Key programmed by
dialing 852 + *04 must be undefined by dialing 000 before it can be programmed as a Voice Over
key by dialing 851 + 48.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 579

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-07 : Programmable Function Keys

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to chart above.

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-07 (Programmable Function Keys):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 07
15-07-01 TEL200
KY01 = *01
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-07-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

580 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup to assign a ring tone range
(0-4) to incoming virtual extensions assigned to a Virtual Extension key (Program 15-07). If you
enable ringing for the key in Program 15-09, the key rings with the tone you set in this program.
Also see Program 22-03. The chart below shows the available tones.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Incoming Ring Pattern Default Description

0- Tone pattern 1 0: Tone pattern 1 When an extension or a virtual extension is

1- Tone pattern 2 assigned to the function key on the key telephone,
2- Tone pattern 3 select the ring tone when receiving a call on that
3- Tone pattern 4 key.
4- Incoming extension ring tone

Incoming Signal
Frequency Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz

Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz

Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Pattern 3 High 1100 1100 Envelope

Middle 660 660 Envelope
Low 520 520 Envelope
Pattern 4 High 1100 1100 No modulation
Middle 660 660 No modulation
Low 520 520 No modulation
Internal Incoming Signal High 1100 1400 8Hz
Frequency Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 581

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-08 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-08 (Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 08
15-08-01 TEL200
V’Tual_Ext_Rng0:Pattern1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-08-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

582 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment to assign the ringing options for an
extension’s Virtual Extension Key or Virtual Extension Group Answer Key which is defined in
Program 15-07. You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.

Assign extension numbers and names to virtual extension ports in Program 15-01. Program Virtual
Extension keys in Program 15-07 (code *03).

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Key Number 01-48

Day/Night Mode Ringing Default

1-8 0- No ringing 0
1- Ring

Conditions
Program the Multiple Directory Number function keys NOT to ring before removing the key from
a keyset’s programming.

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 583

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-09 : Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-09 (Virtual Extension Ring Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 09
15-09-01 TEL200
KY01 Mode1 =0:No
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-09-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

584 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup to set the priority
(1-4) for the Virtual Extension Ring Tones set in Program 15-08. When Virtual Extension calls ring
an extension simultaneously, the tone with the highest order number (e.g., 1) rings. The other keys
just flash.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Order Data Description Related

Program

1-4 0- Tone pattern 1 In the case of that two or more virtual exten- 15-08
1- Tone pattern 2 sions are set on a function key on the keyset,
2- Tone pattern 3 and the tone pattern by which the sound of
3- Tone pattern 4 each extension differs, the priority of ring
4- Incoming extension ring tone sound is set up.

Default
By default, Virtual Extension ring tones have the following order.

Ring Tone
Order (Set in Program 15-08)

1 0
2 1
3 2
4 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 585

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-10 : Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-10 (Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order
Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 10
15-10-01 TEL200
Order1 0:Pattern1
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-10-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

586 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment to assign the delayed ringing
options for an extension’s Virtual Extension or Virtual Extension Group Answer keys (defined in
Program 15-09). You make an assignment for each Night Service Mode.

Assign extension numbers (Program 11-04) and names (Program 15-01) to virtual extension ports.
Program Multiple Directory Number (virtual extension) keys in Program 15-07 (code *03).

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Key Number 01-48

Day/Night Mode Ringing Default Related Program

1-8 0- Immediate Ring 0 20-04-03

1- DelayedRing

Conditions
Program the Multiple Directory Number keys NOT to ring before removing the key from a keyset’s
programming.

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 587

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-11 : Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-11 (Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 11
15-11-01 TEL200
KY01 Mode1 =0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-11-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

588 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions to set the Conversa-
tion Recording destination for each extension.

Note: If both Programs 14-09 and 15-12 define a destination, the destination in Program 15-12
will be followed.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item
Number Item Input Data Default Description

01 Recording Destination Max. 8 digits No setting

Extension Number

02 Automatic Recording for 0- Disable 0 When an incoming trunk call is

Incoming Calls 1- Enable answered, this determines whether
or not conversation recording is
started automatically.

03 Recording Contents 0- Specified 0

Storing Method 1- Own box

04 Automatic Recording for 0- Disable 0 If another party response is

Outgoing Calls 1- Enable checked by reversed polarity or
digit time out, this determines
whether or not the conversation
recording is started automatically.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 589

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-12 : Conversation Recording Destination for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-12 (Conversation Recording Destination for
Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 12
15-12-01 TEL200
Rec.Destin.Ext
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-12-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

590 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-13 : Loop Keys
15-13 : Loop Keys

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-13 : Loop Keys to assign the Loop Key data for each keyset telephone. Loop
Keys can be incoming, outgoing or both ways. Outgoing Loop Keys use the Data 1 options. Incom-
ing Loop Keys use the Data 2 option. Both Way Loop Keys use both the Data 1 and Data 2 options.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Key Number 01-48

Item
Number Item Input Data

01 Data 1 (Outgoing) Option 0-100

(0- Assigns the Loop Key for ARS, 1-100- Assigns
the Loop Key to the trunk group specified)
02 Data 2 (Incoming) Option 0-100
(0- Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups, 1-100-
Assigns the Loop key to the trunk group specified)

Default
Programmable Function Key No. - 01-32
Data 1 (Outgoing) Option - 0 (Assigns the Loop Key for ARS)
Data 2 (Incoming) Options - 0 (Assigns the Loop Key to all trunk groups)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Loop Key

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 591

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-13 : Loop Keys

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-13 (Loop Keys):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 13
15-13-01 TEL200
OUTGOING KY01 = 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-12-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

592 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 15-14 : Programmble One-Touch Keys to define the One-Touch key data for each
keyset telephone.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Key Number 01-10

Dial Data Name

1-0, *, #, Pause, Hookflash, Up to 12 Digits

@ (Code for Answer-Wait)
Up to 24 digits

Default
No entries for any extension.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• One-Touch Keys

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 593

Program 15 : Extension Basic Setup
15-14 : Programmable One-Touch Keys

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 15-14 (Programmable One-Touch Keys):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 15 14
15-14-01 TEL200
KY01 Dial=
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
15-14-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

594 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup
Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup to set the function mode for each
department group.

Input Data
Department Group Number 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Department Name Max. 12 characters No setting 11-07

02 Department Calling 0- Priority Routing 0 16-02

Cycle 1- Circular Routing
Use this option to set
the call routing for
Department Calling.
Routing can be either
circular (cycles to all
phones in group) or pri-
ority (cycles to highest
priority extensions
first).

03 Department Routing 0- Normal (Intercom caller to busy department 0 16-02

When Busy member hears busy)
Use this option to set 1- Circular (Intercom callers to busy department
how the system routes member routes to idle member)
an Intercom call to a
busy Department
Group member. Inter-
com callers to the
extension can either
hear busy or route to
the first available
department number.
This only occurs for
calls to the extension
directly, not the depart-
ment number.
04 Hunting Mode 0- A last extension is called and hunting is stopped. 0
1- Circular

05 Extension Group All 0- Manual 0 11-16-10

Ring Mode Operation 1- Automatic

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 595

Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

06 STG withdraw mode 0- Disable (Camp On) 0

1- Enable (Overflow Mode)

07 Call Recall Restriction 0- Disable(Recall) 0

for STG 1- Enable (non-Recall)

08 Maximum Queuing 0-32 (0 : No limitation) 0

Number of Extension
Group Call

09 Department Hunting 0-64800 15

No Answer Time
Set how long a call will
ring a Department
group extension before
hunting occurs.

10 Hunt Type 0- No queuing 0

Set the type of hunting 1- Hunting When Busy
for each Extension 2- Hunting When Not Answered
(Department) Group: 3- Hunting When Busy or No Answer

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

596 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-01 : Department Group Basic Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 16-01 (Department Group Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 16 01
16-01-01 TEL Group1
Dept.Name =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
16-01-nn TEL Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Department Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 597

Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions to set the Department
Groups. The system uses these groups for Department Calling. Assign pilot numbers to Department
Groups you set up in Program 16-01. This lets system users place calls to the departments. Also use
this program to set the priority of each extension within each Department Group. When a call
comes into the group, it may ring the extensions in order of their priority.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Group Priority Default Description Related

Number Program

1-64 1-999 1 – xxx Set up the Department Group called by the pilot number 11-07
(See Note and the extension priority when a group is called.
Below) Call Pickup Groups are set up in 23-02.

Note: The initial value of a priority becomes the ports numerical order assigned in Program 11-02
and 11-04.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

598 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-02 : Department Group Assignment for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 16-02 (Department Group Assignment for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 16 02
16-02-01 TEL200
Extension Group1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
16-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 599

Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group
16-03 : Secondary Department Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 16-03 : Secondary Department Group to set a second Department Group for
extensions. Up to 16 extensions can be assigned per a Department Group.

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01-64

Secondary Extension Priority

Extension Number Order Description
Number

1-16 Max. 8 digits 0-999 This program is set up when using telephone into two or
more groups.

Default
All extension groups : No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Calling

600 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 16 : Department Group Setup
16-03 : Secondary Department Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 16-03 (Secondary Department Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 16 03
16-03-01 Pilot Extn1
2ND_Group 01=
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
16-03-nn Pilot Extnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Pilot extension number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 601

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options
Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-01 : System Options to set various system options.

Input Data
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

01 Operator Access 0- Step 0 Use this program to set up priority of a 20-17

Mode 1- Circular call when calling an operator telephone.

02 Text Message Mode 0- Call mode 1 Use this program to select the mode 11-11-14
1- Absent mode when calling the telephone which set up 15-07-08
(Busy tone) the text message.

03 DSP Sender Resource 0- Conference 0

Selection 1- Caller ID
2 - MFC

04 - Not Used -

05 DTMF Receive 0-64800 10 For OPXs, analogue telephones and cer- 25-07-01
Active Time tain analogue trunks (like DISA), the
system attaches a DTMF receiver to the
port for this interval. The system
releases the receiver after the interval
expires.

06 Alarm Duration 0-64800 30 This interval sets the duration of the

alarm signal.

07 Callback Ring Dura- 0-64800 15 Callback rings an extension for this 11-12-05
tion Time interval. 15-07-35

08 Trunk Queuing Call- 0-64800 15 Trunk Queuing callback rings an exten- 11-12-05
back Time sion for this interval. 15-07-35

09 Callback/Trunk 0-64800 64800 The system cancels an extension’s Call- 11-12-05

Queuing Cancel Time back or TrunkQueueing request after 15-07-35
this interval.
10 Trunk Guard Timer 0-64800 1 - Not Used -

Forced Account Code 0-64800 3 Future Item - Not Yet Available

Inter-digit Time

E911 Alarm Ring 0-64800 0 Future Item - Not Yet Available

Timer (0: 60 Sec.)

602 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-01 : System Options

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

Network Outgoing 0-64800 30 Future Item - Not Yet Available

Inter-Digit ARS
Timer

Detection time for 0-64800 10 Future Item - Not Yet Available

Network disconnect
signal

Guard time after no 0-64800 30 Future Item - Not Yet Available

disconnect signal

MFC Signal Informa- 0-64800 15 Future Item - Not Yet Available

tion timer for R2-DID

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

Refer to above chart.

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-01 (System Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 01
20-01-01
Operator_Access0:Step
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 603

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones
20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones to set various system options
for Multi-Line Telephones.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Trunk Loop Key Operation Mode 0- Indicate the Using Loop Trunk 0
1- Not indicated
Mode 0 : Keep 1 : Extinction
Lamp

Incoming: 300 IPM Red blink

Talking: Green Light- Extinction

ing (on Talk- (LED off)
ing TEL)
Holding: 60 IPM Extinction
Green blink (LED off)
(on holding
TEL)

02 Trunk Loop Access Key Operating 0- Outgoing / Incoming 0

Mode 1- Outgoing
Use this option to set the operating mode 2- Incoming
of the extension’s trunk group keys. The
keys can be for incoming access, outgo-
ing access or both.

03 BLF Control 0- Idle / Busy (ON/OFF) 1

Set the conditions under which a Hot- 1- Busy / Idle (ON/OFF)
line, Reverse Voice Over or DSS Con-
sole key indicates that an extension is
busy. Refer to the Reverse Voice Over
feature for more information.

04 Retrieve the Line After Transfer 0- Not Holding 1

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s 1- Holding
ability to answer a call after it’s been
transferred, but before it’s answered.

05 Headset Busy Mode 0=Headset busy with one CALL key busy 0
Set the conditions under which a headset 1=Headset busy with both CALL keys busy
extension is busy to incoming callers.

604 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

06 Preselection Time 0-64800 seconds 5

When a keyset user preselects a line key,
the system remembers the preselection
for this interval.

07 Time and Date Display Mode 1-8 3

Set how the Time and Date appear on Type 1: (12 hour) 10 MAR TUE 3:15PM
display telephones. There are eight dis- Type 2: (12 hour) 3:15PM MAR 10 TUE
play modes. Type 3: (12 hour) 3-10 TUE 3:15 PM
Type 4: (12 hour) 3:15PM TUE 10 MAR
Type 5: (24 hour) 10 MAR TUE 15:15
Type 6: (24 hour) 15:15 MAR 10 TUE
Type 7: (24 hour) 3-10 TUE 15:15
Type 8: (24 hour) 15:15 TUE 10 MAR

08 LCD Display Holding Time 0-64800 seconds 5

09 Disconnect Supervision 0- Disable 0

Use this option to enable or disable dis- 1- Enable
connect supervision for the system
trunks.

10 Time Before Shifting to Power-Saving 0- Power-Saving Mode Off 0

Mode 1- 1 minutes
2- 2 minutes
3- 4 minutes
4- 8 minutes
5- 16 minutes
6- 32 minutes
7- 64 minutes

11 Default Setting of Microphone of Key 0- off 1

Telephone 1- on

12 Forced Intercom Ringing 0- Disable (Voice) 0

Use this option to enable or disable 1- Enable (Ring)
Forced Intercom Ringing. If enabled,
incoming Intercom calls normally ring.
If disabled, Intercom calls
voice-announce.

13 - Not Used -

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 605

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-02 : System Options for Multi-Line Telephones

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-02 (System Options for Multi-Line Telephones):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 02
20-02-01
TRK-GP_Key_OP 0:Display
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

606 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones to set up various options for
Single Line Telephones.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Description Default Related
No. Program

01 SLT Call Waiting 0 = Hook Flash For a busy single line (500/ 0 11-12-47
Answer Mode 1 = Hook Flash + Service 2500 type) telephone, set the
code (894) mode used to answer a
camped-on trunk call.
For ESL sets, enabling this
option (1) allows the user to
dial Service Code 754 for
Voice Mail Conversation
Record.

02 Ignore Received DP 0 = Do Not Ignore Use this option to define 0 15-03-01

Dial on DTMF SLT 1 = Ignore whether the system should
Port receive dial pulse and DTMF
signals (0) or ignore dial
pulse and only accept DTMF
signals (1).

03 SLT DTMF Dial to 0 = Receive all dialed • Type 0 : The system 0 20-03-04
Trunk Lines data, before sending. keeps the digits dialed by
1 = Direct through out the SLT on a trunk in a
buffer. After all the digits
have been received, the
system sends all the dig-
its to the trunk. If the
time space between dig-
its is longer than the
timer in Item 4, the sys-
tem considers all digits
received.
• Type 1 : The system
passes the received dig-
its from the SLT to the
trunk immediately. If the
SLT has a Last Number
Dial key without a pause,
this key may not be able
to use the Last number
dialing key with the Type
1 setting.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 607

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-03 : System Options for Single Line Telephones

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Description Default Program

04 Trunk call dial sending 0-64800 3

start time by SLT

05 SLT Operation Mode 0 - Normal Mode

1 - Extended Mode1
2 - Extended Mode2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Single Line Telephones, Analogue
• Single Line Telephones, Digital

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-03 (System Options for Single Line Telephones):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 03
20-03-01
Call_Wait_Ans 0:Hooking
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

608 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-04 : System Options forVirtual Extensions to set up various system options for
Virtual Extensions.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 The virtual extension operation mode 0- Release virtual extension after answered 1
when answered incoming call incoming call
1- Holding a virtual extension after
answered incoming call

02 - Not Available - -

03 Call Coverage Delay Interval 0-64800 (Sec.) 10

Multiple Directory Number/Call Cover-
age Keys set for Delayed Ringing (see
Program 15-11) ring the covering exten-
sion after this interval.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Number / Call Coverage

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 609

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-04 : System Options for Virtual Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-04 (System Options for Virtual Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 04
20-04-01
V-Ext.Answer 1:Keep
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

610 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-05 : Charging Cost Service
20-05 : Charging Cost Service

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-05 : Charging Cost Service to define the system options for the Charging Cost
Service feature.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

04 Setting of Charge Cost per Unit 0-65535 0

06 Advice of Charge for Telephone Display 0 - No decimal point 1

1 - Decimal point's character is period
2 - Decimal point's character is comma

07 Advice of Charge for SMDR 0 - No decimal point 1

1 - Decimal point's character is period
2 - Decimal point's character is comma

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 611

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-05 : Charging Cost Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-05 (Charging Cost Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 05
20-05-04
Charge Cost 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

612 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions to assign a Class of Service to an extension.
There are15 Classes of Service that can be assigned. To specify the options in each Class of Ser-
vice, refer to Programs 20-07 through 20-13. You make eight entries for Program 20-06, one for
each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Mode Class of Service for Extensions

1-8 1-15

Default
• Extension numbers 200 and 201 are set as Class 1.
• All other extension numbers are set as Class 2.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 613

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-06 : Class of Service for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-06 (Class of Service for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 06
20-06-01 TEL200
Mode1 Class_No.1
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-06-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

614 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level) to define the administrator
service availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS Program
COS 1
2-15

01 Manual Night Service Enabled 0- Off 1 0 11-10-01

Enabled/disabled an extension’s ability to use manual Night 1- On
Service Switching
02 Changing the Music on Hold Tone 0- Off 1 0 11-10-02
Enable/disable an extension’s ability to change the Music on 1- On
Hold tone

03 Time Setting 0- Off 1 0 11-10-03

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to set the Time via 1- On
Service Code 828.

04 Storing Abbreviated Dialing Entries 0- Off 1 0 11-10-04

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to store Abbreviated 1- On
Dialing numbers. With this disabled, an extension will dis-
play only the name assigned to the Abbreviated Dialing num-
ber - the telephone number will not be displayed. This could
be used if you wish to prevent Account Codes from being
displayed.

05 Set/Cancel Automatic Transfer to Transfer 0- Off 1 0 11-10-06

1- On

06 Charging Cost Display 0- Off 1 0

1- On

06 - Not Used -

07 - Not Used -
08 - Not Used -

09 - Not Used -

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 615

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)

Default
Item Item Input Related
No. Data COS Program
COS 1
2-15

10 Programmable Function Key Programming (Appearance 0- Off 1 0 20-13-18

Level) 1- On
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their
Appearance function keys using Service Code 852 (by
default).
11 Forced Trunk Disconnect (analogue trunk only) 0- Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Forced Trunk 1- On
Disconnect

12 Trunk port disable 0- Off 1 0 11-10-27

1- On

13 VRS Record 0- Off 1 0

Enables/disables extension’s ability to record, erase and lis- 1- On
ten to VRS messages

14 VRS General Message Listen 0- Off 1 0 11-10-21

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial 4 or Service Code 1- On
711 and listen to the General Message

15 VRS General Message Record 0- Off 1 0 11-10-22

Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code 712 1- On
and record, listen to or erase the General Message

16 - Not Used -

17 - Not Used -

18 SMDR printout accumulated extension data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-23

1- On

19 SMDR printout accumulated STG data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-24

1- On

20 SMDR printout accumulated account code data 0- Off 1 0 11-10-25

1- On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

616 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-07 : Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-07 (Class of Service Options (Administrator Level)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 07
20-07-01 FCTN Cls1
NT_Service_SW 1:On
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-07-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 617

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service) to define the outgoing
call feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
01-14

01 Intercom Calls 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable Intercom calling for the extension. 1-On

02 Trunk Calls 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable outgoing trunk calling for the extension. 1-On

03 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 1 0

1-On

04 Group Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 1 0

1-On

05 Dial Number Preview 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Dial Number 1-On
Preview.

06 Toll Restriction Override 0-Off 1 0 21-01-07,

Enables/disables Toll Restricting Override (Service Code 1-On 21-07
875).

07 Repeat Redial 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Repeat 1-On
Redial.

08 Toll Restriction Dial Block 0-Off 1 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to use Dial 1-On
Block.

09 Hotline/Extension Ringdown 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Ringdown Extension for extensions 1-On
with this COS.

618 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)

Default
Item Item Input Related
No. Data COS Program
COS 15
01-14

10 Switching from Handsfree Answerback to Forced 0-Off 1 0

Intercom Ringing 1-On
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to force Hands-
free Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for outgo-
ing Intercom calls.
11 Protect for the call mode switching from caller 0-Off 0 0
(Internal Call) 1-On

12 Department Group Step Calling 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Department 1-On
Group Step Calling

13 CLIP 0-Off 1 0
1-On

14 Call Address Information 0-Off 0 0

1-On
15 Block Outgoing Caller ID 0-Off 0 0 14-01-20
Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to automati- 1-On 14-01-21
cally block outgoing Caller ID information when a user
places a call. If this option is on, the system automatically
inserts the Caller ID block code (defined in Program
14-01-21) before the user’s dialed digits.
16 Display E911 Dialed Extension Name and Number 0-Off 0 0
Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to display 1-On
the name and number of the extension that dialed 911.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 619

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-08 : Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-08 (Class of Service Options (Outgoing Call Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 08
20-08-01 FCTN Cls1
Intercom_Call 1:On
¬ ®
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-08-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

620 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service) to define the incoming
call feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Input Related
Item
No. data COS Program
COS 15
01-14

01 Second Call for DID/ DISA/ DIL/ E&M 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables the extension’s ability to receive a sec- 1-On
ond call from a DID, DISA, DIL, or tie line caller.
Note: With this option set to ‘1’, the destination extension
must be busy in order for a second DNIS caller to ring
through. If the destination extension does not have a line or
loop key available for the second call and a previous call is
ringing the extension but has not yet been answered, the sec-
ond caller will hear busy regardless of this program’s setting.

02 Caller ID Display 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables the Caller ID display at an extension. 1-On

03 Sub Address Identification 0-Off 1 0

1-On

04 Notification for Incoming Call List existence 0-Off 1 0

1-On

05 Setting Handsfree Answerback or Forced Intercom 0-Off 1 0 11-11-15,

Ringing 1-On 11-11-16
Allows/prevents an extension from enabling Handsfree
Answerback or Forced Intercom Ringing for their incom-
ing Intercom calls

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 621

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-09 : Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-09 (Class of Service Options (Incoming Call Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 09
20-09-01 FCTN Cls1
2nd_Call_DDI-Ovrride0:Of
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-09-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

622 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service) to define the answer feature
availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Group Call Pickup (Within Group) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing an 1-On
extension’s own Pickup Group as well as ring group
calls (Service Code 867).

02 Group Call Pickup (Another Group) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for calls ringing 1-On
outside a group (Service Code 869).

03 Group Call Pickup for Specific Group 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Group Call Pickup for a specific 1-On
group using service code 868.

04 Group Call Pickup 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to pick up a call 1-On
ringing into a Pickup Group (Service Codes 867 and
856).

05 Directed Call Pickup for Own Group 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables Directed Call Pickup for calls ringing 1-On
an extension’s own Pickup Group (Service Code 856).

06 Meet Me Conference and Paging 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Meet Me 1-On
Conference and Paging.

07 Automatic Answer of Universal Calls 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Universal 1-On
Auto Answer (no service code required).

08 Auto Off-Hook Answer for Call Coverage Keys 0-Off 0 0

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to 1-On
answer an incoming call on a Call Coverage Key sim-
ply by lifting the handset.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 623

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-10 : Class of Service Options (Answer Service)
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-10 (Class of Service Options (Answer Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 10
20-10-01 FCTN Cls1
Call_Pickup 1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-10-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

624 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service) to define the Hold and
Transfer feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input Data
No.
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Call Forward Immediate 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate Call 1-On
Forwarding Immediate.
02 Call Forward When Busy 0-Off 0 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call For- 1-On
ward When Busy.

03 Call Forwarding When Unanswered 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call For- 1-On
ward When Unanswered.

04 Call Forwarding (Both Ringing) 0-Off 1 0

Enables/Disables an extension’s ability to activate Call 1-On
Forwarding with Both Ringing.

05 Call Forwarding with Follow Me 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate Call 1-On
Forwarding with Follow Me.

06 Unscreened Transfer 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Unscreened 1-On
Transfer.
07 Transfer Without Holding 0-Off 0 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Transfer 1-On
Without Holding.

08 Transfer Information Display 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s incoming Transfer 1-On
pre-answer display.

09 Group Hold Initiate 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Group 1-On
Hold.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 625

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)

Default
Item
No. Item Input Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

10 Group Hold Answer 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to pick up a call 1-On
on Group Hold

11 Automatic On Hook Transfer 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Automatic 1-On
On Hook Transfer

12 Call Forwarding Off-Premise 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to set up Call For- 1-On
warding Off-Premise for their phone.

13 Operator Transfer After Hold Callback 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to have a call 1-On
which recalls from hold transfer to the operator.

14 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Restriction 0-Off 1 0

Disable (0) or enable (1) the Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer 1-On
Restriction option. If enabled, trunk-to-trunk transfer is
not possible.
15 VRS Personal Greeting 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables extension’s ability to dial Service Code 1-On
713 7 to record, listen to or erase the Personal Greeting
Message

16 Call Redirect 0-Off 1 0

Enable or disable a keyset user’s ability to transfer a call 1-On
to a pre-defined destination (such as an operator, voice
mail, or another extension) without answering the call.

17 Call transfer setup for each telephone group 0-Off 1 0

1-On
18 No Recall 0-Off 0 0
Allow (0) or prevent (1) answered Transferred calls from 1-On
recalling the originating extension.
19 Normal/Extended Park 0...Normal 0 0
Determine if an extension’s Class of Service should allow 1...Extended
either a normal or extended Park.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

626 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-11 : Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-11 (Class of Service Options (Hold/Transfer Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 11
20-11-01 FCTN Cls1
Call_Forward 1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-11-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 627

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service) to define the Charging
Cost feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input Data
No.
COS 01-14 COS 15

02 Advice of Charge (ISDN-AOC) 0-Off 1 0

1-On

03 Cost Display (For TTU) 0-Off 1 0

1-On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

628 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-12 : Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-12 (Class of Service Options (Charging Cost Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 12
20-12-01 FCTN Cls1

back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-12-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the HOLD or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 629

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service) to define the supple-
mentary feature availability for each extension’s Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Long Conversation Alarm 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables the Warning Tone for Long Conversation 1-On
(not for SLTs)
02 Long Conversation Cutoff (Incoming) 0-Off 0 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Con- 1-On
versation Cutoff for incoming calls.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff (Outgoing) 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Long Con- 1-On
versation Cutoff for outgoing calls.

04 Call Forwarding/DND Override 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Call For- 1-On
warding/DND Override

05 Intercom Off Hook Signaling 0-Off 1 0

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to receive 1-On
off hook signals.

06 Automatic Off Hook Signaling 0-Off 1 0

Allows a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically 1-On
(1) receive off hook signals.
07 Message Waiting 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to leave Message 1-On
Waiting

08 Conference 0-Off 1 0
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a confer- 1-On
ence or Meet Me Conference

09 Privacy Release 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to initiate a Voice 1-On
Call Conference

630 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

10 Barge In Mode 0-Off 0 0

Enables the extension’s Barge In to be speech mode (0) or 1-On
Monitor mode (1).

11 Room Monitor, Initiating Extension 0-Off 0 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to initiate Room 1-On
Monitor

12 Room Monitor, Extension Being Monitored 0-Off 0 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to be monitored 1-On

13 Continued Dialing 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to use Continued 1-On
Dialing which allows DTMF signal sending while talking
on extension.

14 Department Calling 0-Off 1 0

Enable/disable an extension’s ability to call a Department 1-On
Group.

15 Barge In, Initiate 0-Off 0 0

Enables/disables Barge In at initiating extension. 1-On

16 Barge In, Receive 0-Off 0 0

Blocks/allows Barge In at the receiving extension. 1-On

17 Barge In Tone/Display 0-Off 0 0

Use this option to enable/disable the Barge In tone. If 1-On
enabled, callers hear an alert tone and their display indi-
cates the Barge In when another extension barges into their
conversation. If disabled, there is no alert tone or display
indication.

18 Programmable Function Key Programming (General 0-Off 1 0

Level) 1-On
Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program their
General function keys using Service Code 851 (by
default). (Refer to Program 20-07-10 for Service Code
852.)

19 Selectable Display Messaging 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Selectable 1-On
Display Messaging

20 Account Code/Toll Restriction Operator Alert 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables operator alert when an extension improp- 1-On
erly enters an Account Code or violates Toll Restriction.

21 Extension Name 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to program its name 1-On

22 Called Party Status 0-Off 0 0

Display the detail state of called party 1-On

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 631

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

23 Display the Reason for Transfer 0-Off 0 0

Select whether an extension should display the reason a 1-On
call is being transferred to their extension (Call Forward
Busy, Call Forward No Answer, DND).

24 Privacy Release by Pressing Line Key 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) a user’s ability to press a line key 1-On
to barge into an outside call. The Barge In feature must be
enabled if this option is to be used.

25 Transmission is cut when made privacy release during 0-Off 0 0

trunk to trunk transfer. 1-On

26 Group Listen 0-Off 1 0

Enables/disables an extension’s ability to use Group Listen 1-On

27 Busy on seizing virtual extension 0-Off 1 0

1-On

28 Allow COS to be Changed 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the ability of an extension’s COS 1-On
to be changed via Service Code 177.

29 Paging Display 0-Off 1 0

Enables (1) or disables (0) an extension’s ability to display 1-On
paging information.

30 Background Music 0-Off 1 0

In an extension’s Class of Service, allow (1) or prevent (0) 1-On
an extension from turning Background Music on and off.

31 Connected Line identification (COLP) 0-Off 0 0

1-On

32 Deny Multiple Barge Ins 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) the extension’s ability to have 1-On
multiple user’s Barge In to their conversation.

33 ACD Supervisor’s Position Enhancement 0-Off 0 0

This option must be enabled in order for the operator to use 1-On
service codes in Program 11-13-10 through 11-13-13.

34 Block Manual Off-Hook Signaling 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block 1-On
off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker.

35 Block Camp-On 0-Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) an extension’s ability to block 1-On
callers from dialing 2 to Camp On.

36 Call Timer 0-Off 1 0

In an extension’s Class of Service, enable (1) or disable (0) 1-On
an extension’s ability to use the Call Timer.

632 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-13 : Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-13 (Class of Service Options (Supplementary Service)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 13
20-13-01 FCTN Cls1
Long_Conv.Alarm 1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-13-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 633

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M to enable/disable DISA and tie
line Class of Service options. You assign a DISA Class of Service to DISA users in Program 25-09.
Assign tie line Classes of Service in 34-02. Up to 15 DISA/E&M Classes of Service can be defined.

Note: Analogue trunk-to-analogue trunk and ISDN trunk-to-ISDN trunk calls are supported by
this program. However, analogue trunk-to-ISDN trunk and ISDN trunk-to-analogue trunk
calls are NOT supported by this program.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 First Digit Absorption 0-Off 0 0

For tie lines, enable or disable the ability to absorb (ignore) the first 1-On
incoming digit. Use this to make the tie trunk compatible with 3- and
4-digit tie line service. This option does not apply to DISA.
02 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
dial 9 for Trunk Group Routing or Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
03 Trunk Group Access 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
access trunk groups for outside calls (Service Code 814).
04 Common Abbreviated Dialing 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
use the system’s Common Abbreviated Dialing.
05 Operator Calling 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
dial 0 for the telephone system operator.
06 Internal Paging 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
use the telephone system’s Internal Paging.
07 External Paging 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
use the telephone system’s External Paging.
08 Direct Trunk Access 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
use Direct Trunk Access (Service Code 815).

634 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-14 : Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
COS 01-14 COS 15

09 Forced Trunk Disconnect <Not for ISDN T-point> 0-Off 0 0

This option enables or disables a tie trunk caller’s ability to use 1-On
Forced Trunk Disconnect (Service Code *26). This option is not
available to DISA callers.
10 Call Forward Setting by Remote Via DISA 0-Off 0 0
1-On
11 DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In 0-Off 0 0
This option enables or disables a DISA or tie trunk caller’s ability to 1-On
use the Barge In feature.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Tie Lines

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-14 (Class of Service Options for DISA/E&M):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 14
20-14-01 FCTN Cls1
Del._1digit_Dial O:Of
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-14-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 635

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup to define the ringing cycles for each ring type.

Input Data
Item
No. Incoming Signal Type Ringing Cycle Default

01 Normal incoming call on Trunk 1-13 3

02 PBX,CES incoming call 8

03 Internal incoming call 8

04 DID/DISA 3

05 DID 3

06 Dial-In in the E&M tie line 8

07 Door Box ringing for SLT 2

08 Virtual Extension Ring 8

09 Call-back 4

10 Alarm for SLT 5

11 VRS Waiting Message Incoming Call 6

Number Ringing Cycle

1 On

2 On:2.0 / Off:4.0

3 On:1.0 / Off:2.0

4 On:0.5 / Off:0.5
5 On:0.25 / Off:0.25

6 On:0.5 / Off:0.5 / On:0.5 / Off:1.5

7 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:5.25

8 On:0.375 / Off:0.25 / On:0.375 / Off:2.0

9 On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:0.125 / On:0.25 / Off:2.0

10 On:1.0 / Off:4.0

636 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-15 : Ring Cycle Setup

Number Ringing Cycle

11 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:4.25

12 On:1.0 / Off:3.0
13 On:0.25 / Off:0.25 / On:0.25 / Off:2.25

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-15 (Ring Cycle Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 15
20-15-01
TRK_INC_Ring_Cycle 3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-15-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 637

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-16 : Selectable Display Messages to enter the Selectable Display Messages.
There are 20 alphanumeric messages, up to 29 characters long. Use the following chart when pro-
gramming messages.

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-p, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
8 Enter characters T-V, q-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex:
STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

638 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages
Input Data
Selectable Display Message Number 01-20

Text data

24 characters

Default
Number Message

1 IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##

2 MEETING ROOM - ########

3 COME BACK ##:##

4 PLEASE CALL ###########

5 BUSY CALL AFTER ##:##

6 OUT FOR LUNCH BACK ##:##

7 BUSINESS TRIP BACK ##/##

8 BUSINESS TRIP ##########

9 GONE FOR THE DAY

10 ON VACATION UNTIL ##/##

11 MESSAGE 11

12 MESSAGE 12

13 MESSAGE 13

14 MESSAGE 14

15 MESSAGE 15

16 MESSAGE 16
17 MESSAGE 17

18 MESSAGE 18

19 MESSAGE 19

20 MESSAGE 20

Conditions
Time value "## : ##" must be followed by two spaces.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 639

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-16 : Selectable Display Messages

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Display Messages

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-16 (Selectable Display Messages):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 16
20-16-01 Text Message1
IN MEETING UNTIL ##:##
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-16-nn Text Messagenn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the text message number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

640 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator’s Extension
20-17 : Operator’s Extension

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-17 : Operator’s Extension to designate an operator. When an extension user dials
“0” or “9” (defined by Program 11-01 Type 5), calls go to the operator selected in this program.

If you don’t assign an extension in Program 90-11-01, system alarms appear on the extension
assigned in this option.

Input Data
Operator Number 1-8

Item Item Input Data Default Related

No. Program

01 Operator’s Extension Up to 8 digits No setting 11-01

Number

02 Operator Console 0- Normal key set 0

1- Special Operator Console

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Intercom

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 641

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-17 : Operator’s Extension

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-17 (Operator’s Extension):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 17
20-17-01 Operator1
Operator_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-17-nn Operatorn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the operator number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

642 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers
20-18 : Service Tone Timers

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-18 : Service Tone Timer to set the values for the system service tone timers.
Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description Related
No. Program

01 Extension Dial Tone 0-64800 120 After getting Intercom dial

Time tone, a keyset user has this
interval to dial the first digit of
the Intercom call.

02 Busy tone timer 0-64800 15

03 Congestion tone 0-64800 10 A Busy Tone when system

resources run short. (such as
DTMF receiver resources)

04 Call Waiting Tone 0-64800 10 This option sets the interval

Timer between Call Waiting tones.
This timer also sets the inter-
val between Off Hook Signal-
ing alerts.

05 Keyset Confirmation 0-64800 10

Tone

06 Interval of call wait- 0-64800 10

ing tone

07 Intrusion Tone 0-64800 0 After a call is interrupted

Repeat Time (such as Barge In, Voice Mail
Conversation Recording,
Voice Over, etc), the system
repeats the Intrusion Tone
after this interval. Normally,
you should enter 0 to disable
this interval.

08 Conference Tone 0-64800 0

Interval

09 Warning Beep Tone 0-64800 60 14-01-18

Signaling Interval

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 643

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-18 : Service Tone Timers

Feature Cross Reference

• Distinctive Ringing, Tones, and Flash Patterns

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-18 (Service Tone Timers):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 18
20-18-01
Ext.DT_Time 1240 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-18-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

644 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-19 : System Options for Caller ID to define the system options for the Caller ID
feature.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Caller ID Displaying Format if Displaying Digits 0- First 10 digits 0

are more than 12 digits. 1- Last 10 digits
02 Caller ID Wait Timer 0-30 5
When an incoming CO call is received, the sys-
tem starts the timer. It will wait the programmed
time for Caller ID information from telco before
connecting the CO call.

03 Caller ID Edit Mode 0- off 0

Edit Caller ID Enables/disables an extension’s 1- on
ability to edit the stored Caller ID information

04 Wait Facility IE Timer 0-64800 10

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 645

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-19 : System Options for Caller ID

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-19 (System Options for Caller ID):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 19
20-19-01
Caller-ID Format 0:Upper
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-19-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

646 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data
20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-20 : Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data to define the messages which will
be displayed when no Caller ID information is received.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Private Call 24 Alphanumeric UNAVAILABLE INFO

Characters

02 Call from Out of Service Area 24 Alphanumeric OUT-OF-STATE

Characters

03 Call Information with Error 24 Alphanumeric NO CALL INFO

Characters

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Caller ID

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-20 (Message Setup for Non-Caller ID Data):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 20
20-20-01
Private Call PRIVATE
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-20-nn

¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 647

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation to define the system options for
the Long Conversation feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Long Conversation Alarm 1 0-64800 170

The warning tone for long toll calls sounds
after this interval.

02 Long Conversation Alarm 2 0-64800 180

After the initial long toll call warning tone,
additional warning tones sound after this
interval.

03 Long Conversation Cutoff for Incoming 0-64800 0

Call
This timer determines how long the system
will wait before disconnecting an incoming
call.

04 Long Conversation Cutoff for Outgoing 0-64800 0

Call
This timer determines how long the system
will wait before disconnecting an outgoing
call.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Long Conversation Cutoff

648 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-21 : System Options for Long Conversation

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-21 (System Options for Long Conversation):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 21
20-21-01
Long_Conv.Al1 170 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-21-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 649

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI
20-23 : System Options for CTI

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-23 : System Options for CTI to define the system options for the CTI feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Delayed ring timer for CTI 0-64800 30

02 ALERT reply time (CTI) 0-64800 8

03 Trunk Virtual Bridge - TSP Driver 0 - Disable 1
Enable or disable the system’s ability to send 1 - Enablet
trunk or virtual extension information to the TSP
driver.

04 The timer which waits for an off-hook for SLT 0-64800 30

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Applications

650 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-23 : System Options for CTI

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-23 (System Options for CTI Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 23
20-23-01
CTI_Serv.Ans. 30 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-23-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 651

Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
20-25 : ISDN Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 20-25 : ISDN Options to define the ISDN system options.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Send the Release Message After Subscriber 0 = Service On 0

Hangs Up 1 = Service Off
02 Progress Indicate Information Element Detect 0 = Service On 0
1 = Service Off

03 Bearer Capability Select from SLT Outgoing 0 = 3.1KHz 0

Audio
1 = Speech

04 Send DT Until User Dials the First Digit 0 = Service On 0

(Overlap Sending Mode) 1 = Service Off
With Overlap Sending Mode, if the network
side stops dial tone when CLI is included in the
SETUP message, the system sends dial tone
until the user dials the first digit instead of the
network.

05 T305 Timer Start Afteer Sending Disconnect 0 = Service On 0

Message 1 = Service Off

06 Call Proceeding Send Mode 0 = Service On 0

1 = Service Off
07 Busy Tone Mode Set When Disconnect Mes- 0 = Busy Tone 0
sage Received from NT (net-
work side)
08 Use of Low Layer Compatibility (LLC) 0 = Use 0
1 = Not Used

09 Use of High Layer Compatibility (HLC) Send- 0 = Use 0

ing 1 = Not Used

10 S-Point Terminal Seizes Analogue Trunk 0 = Disable 0

1 = Enable

11 Automatic Changing System Clock When 0 = Disable 0

Date/Time Information Element Received 1 = Enable

12 Incoming Calls Forwarded Out Automatically 0 = Disable 0

Return Connect Message When Outgoing Call 1 = Enable
Receives Alerting Message

652 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 20 : System Option Setup
20-25 : ISDN Options
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 20-25 (ISDN Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 20 25
20-25-01
Send Release Msg :Off.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
20-25-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 653

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls
Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls to set the system options for Outgoing
Call Service.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Related Program
No.

01 Seizure Trunk Line Mode 0- Priority route 0 14-05

1- Circular route 14-06
02 Intercom Interdigit Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 10
When placing Intercom calls, extension users
must dial each digit within this interval.

03 Trunk Interdigit Time (External) 0-64800 (Sec.) 10 14-02-08

The system waits for this timer to expire
before placing the call in a talk state (Call
Timer starts after timer expires, Voice Over
and Barge-In are not allowed until after timer
expires).

04 Researched time for DTD circuit 0-64800 (Sec.) 5 14-02-05

05 Dial Tone Detection Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 3

If dial tone detection is enabled, the system
will wait this interval for the Telco to return
dial tone. When the interval expires, the sys-
tem assumes dial tone is not present. To dis-
able this timer (and have the system wait
continuously), enter 0.

06 Dial pause at first digit 0-64800 (Sec.) 1

07 Toll Restriction Override Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 10 20-08-06

After dialing the Toll Restriction Override 21-07
codes, the system removes Toll Restriction
from the extension for this interval.

08 Preset dial display hold time 0-64800 (Sec.) 10

09 Ringdown Extension Timer 0-64800 (Sec.) 5 20-08-09

A Ringdown extension automatically calls its 21-11
programmed destination after this interval.

10 Dial Digits for Toll Restriction Path control 0-24 0

11 Inter-Digit Time for Toll Restriction Path 0-60 0
control

654 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-01 : System Options for Outgoing Calls

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Related Program

12 Dial 911 Routing Without Trunk Access 0 = Trunk Access Code 1

If enabled (1), an extension user can dial 911 Required
without first dialing a trunk access code or 1 = Trunk Access Code
pressing a line key. If disabled (0), an exten- Not Required
sion user must dial a trunk access code (e.g.,
9) or press a line key before dialing 911.

13 Alarm Ring Timer (E911) 0-64800 (Sec.) 0

Use this option to sset the duration of the
E911 Alarm Ring Time. If set for 0, the E911
Alarm rings for 60 seconds and then stops.

14 Forced Account Code Inter-digit Timer 0-64800 (Sec.) 3

The system waits this interval for a user to
enter a Forced Account code.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-01 (System Options for Outgoing Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 01
21-01-01
TRK_Routing 0:Prior
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 655

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions to assign Program 14-06 routes to
extensions.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Mode Route table Default Related Program

number

1-8 0-100 1 14-06

(0-No setting) 14-01-07

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

656 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-02 : Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-02 (Trunk Group Routing for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 02
21-02-01 TEL200
Mode1 =T.G.R. 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 657

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks to set the Trunk Route Table for Auto-
matic External Call Forward. The Route Table is set in Program 14-06.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode Route Table Number Default Related Program

1-8 0-100 1 14-06

(0 - No setting) 14-07-01

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Trunk Group Routing

658 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-03 : Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-03 (Trunk Group Routing for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 03
21-03-01 Trunk1
Mode1 =T.G.R. 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-03-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 659

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-04 : Toll Restriction Class to assign a Toll Restriction class to an extension. The
details of Toll Restriction are defined in Program 21-05 and 21-06.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Mode Restriction Default Related Program

Class

1-9 1-15 2 14-01-08

9: (power failure mode) 21-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

660 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-04 : Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-04 (Toll Restriction Class for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 04
21-04-01 TEL200
Mode1 =T/R_Class 2
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-04-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 661

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-05 : Toll Restriction Class to set the system’s Toll Restriction classes (1-15).

Input Data
Toll Restriction Class Number 1-15

Item Item Input Data Description Related

No. Program

01 International call restric- 0...Unassigned This option assigns/unassigns the International 21-06-01
tion table 1...Assigned Call Restrict Table for the Toll Restriction
Class you are programming. Enter International
Call Restrict Table data in Program 21-06-01.

02 International call permit 0...Unassigned This option assigns/unassigns the International 21-06-02
code table 1...Assigned Call Permit Table for the Toll Restriction Class
you are programming. Enter International Call
Permit Table data in Program 21-06-02.

03 Restriction of Local Call 0... Disable This option enables/disables restriction for local
1... Enabled calls.

04 Maximum Number of 1-4: Table Select the table (defined in 21-06-03) to be used 21-06-03
Digits Table Assignment 0: Disable to determine the maximum number of digits
allowed for outgoing calls.

05 Common permit code 0: Unassigned It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-04 21-06-04
table 1: Assigned is referred to, or not referred to.

06 Common restriction table 0: Unassigned It chooses whether the table set up by 21-06-05 21-06-05
1: Assigned is referred to, or not referred to.

07 Permit code table 1-4: Table Set the tables 1-4 when referring to the table set 21-06-06
0: Disable up by 21-06-06.

08 Restriction table 1-4: Table Set the tables 1-4 when referring to the table set 21-06-07
0: Disable up by 21-06-07.

09 Restriction for common 0... Does not Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restric-
abbreviated dials restrict tion for Common Abbreviated Dialing num-
1... Following bers. If enabled, Common Abbreviated Dialing
restriction check numbers have the same restrictions as manually
dialed numbers.

662 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Description Program

10 Restriction for group 0... Does not Use this option to enable/disable Toll Restric-
abbreviated dials restrict tion for Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers. If
1... Following enabled, Group Abbreviated Dialing numbers
restriction check have the same restrictions as manually dialed
numbers.
11 Intercom Call Restriction 0...Disable It chooses whether ICM incoming call is
1...Enable restricted.

12 PBX Call Restriction 0...Disable Use this option to set how the system Toll
1...Enable Restricts calls over PBX trunks. If you enable
PBX Toll Restriction, the system begins Toll
Restriction after the PBX access code. The user
cannot dial a PBX extension. If you disable
PBX Toll Restriction, the system only restricts
calls that contain the PBX access code. The sys-
tem does not restrict calls to PBX extensions.
Refer to the PBX compatibility feature. Make
sure Program 21-05-04 (Maximum Number of
Digits Table Assignment) allows for PBX Toll
Call Dialing (normally 12 digits).

13 Restriction of tie calls 0...Disable It chooses whether the toll restriction of the dial 34-08
1...Enable set up by 34-08 is enabled or disabled.

Default

Item No

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

Class No. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Class No. 2 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Class No. 3 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Class No. 4 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Class No. 5 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

Class No. 6 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Class No. 7 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

Class No. 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

: : : : : : : : : : : : : :
Class No. 15 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 663

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-05 : Toll Restriction Class

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-05 (Toll Restriction Class):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 05
21-05-01 Deny TBL1
Int’_Call_Rest.TB0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-05-nn Deny TBLnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Deny Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

664 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup to set the system’s Toll Restriction data.
Dial 1-9, 0, *, # can be entered in each table.

Input Data
Item Item Table Input Data Default Description
No.

01 International call 1-10 Dial Table 1-10 = This option lets you program the Restrict
restriction table (Up to 4 digits) No Setting Table for international calls. The system
has 10 International Call Restrict Tables.
Each entry can be up to four digits long.

02 International call 1-20 Dial No Setting This option lets you program the Permit
permit code table (Up to 6 digits) Table for international calls. The system
has 20 International Call Permit Table.
Each entry can be up to six digits long,
using.

03 Maximum num- 1-4 4-30 Tables 1 - 4 This option selects the maximum number
ber digits table = 30 of digits allowed in outgoing calls for each
assignment table.

04 Common permit 1-10 Dial Table 1 = 911 This option lets you program the Common
code table (Up to 4 digits) Table 2 = 1800 Permit Code Table. This table contains up
Table 3 = 1888 to 10 codes you commonly allow users to
Tables 4 - 10 = dial.
No Setting
05 Common 1-10 Dial Table 1 = 900 This option lets you program the Common
restriction table (Up to 12 digits) Table 2 = 1900 Restrict Code Table. This table contains up
Table 3 = 976 to 10 codes you commonly prevent users
Tables 4 - 10 from dialing.
= No Setting

06 Permit code table 1-4 Dial Table 1 - 4 = This option lets you program the Permit
(table) (Up to 12 digits) No Setting Code Tables. If the system has Toll
1-60 Restriction enabled, users can dial num-
(Entry) bers only if permitted by these tables and
the Common Permit Table (21-06-04).
There are four Permit Code Tables, with
up to 200 entries in each table. The system
permits calls exactly as you enter the code.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 665

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup

Item
No. Item Table Input Data Default Description

07 Restriction table 1-4 Dial Table 1 - 4 = This option lets you program the Restrict
(table) (Up to 12 digits) No Setting Code Tables. If the system has Toll
1-60 Restriction enabled, users cannot dial num-
(Entry) bers listed in these tables. There are four
Restrict Code Tables, with up to 200
entries in each table. The system restricts
calls exactly as you enter the code.

08 PBX Access 1-4 Dial Table 1 - 4 = Use this option to enter the PBX Access
Code (Up to 2 digits) No Setting Code. When the system is behind a PBX,
this is the code users dial to access a PBX
trunk. Toll Restriction begins after the
PBX access code. For PBX trunks (Pro-
gram 14-04) the system only Toll Restricts
calls that contain the access code. Always
program this option when the system is
behind a PBX, even if you don’t want to
use Toll Restriction. PBX Access Codes
can be up to 2 digits, using 0-9, #, * and
LINE KEY 1 (don’t care). When using
Account Codes, do not use an asterisk
within a PBX access code. Otherwise, after
the *, the trunk would stop sending digits
to the central office. Entries 1-4 corre-
spond to the 4 PBX Access Codes. Each
code can have up to 2 digits.

09 Specific dial out- 1-20 Dial No Setting

going code (Up to 8 digits)
10 Outgoing Call 1-20 Dial No Setting
Code Setup (Up to 4 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

666 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-06 : Toll Restriction Table Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-06 (Toll Restriction Table Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 06
21-06-01 Int’l TBL 1
IDD_Dial_Rest. TB 001
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-06-nn Int’l TBL nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the International Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 667

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-07 - Toll Restriction Override Password Setup to assign Toll Restriction Over-
ride codes to extension ports. Each code must be four digits long, using any combination of 0-9, #
and *. Each extension can have a separate code, or many extensions can share the same override
code.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Password Default Related Program

4 digits fixed No setting 21-01-07

20-08-06

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction Override

668 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-07 : Toll Restriction Override Password Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-07 (Toll Restriction Override Password Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 07
21-07-01 TEL200
T/R_Override_ID 1237
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-07-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 669

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup to define the automatic Repeat Dial data.

Input Data
Item Input Related
No. Item Data Default Program

01 Repeat Redial Count 0-255 3

Set how many times a Repeat Redial will automatically
repeat if the call does not go through.
02 Repeat Redial Interval Time 0-64800 60
This timer sets the interval between Repeat Redial
attempts.
03 Repeat Dial Calling Timer 0-64800 30
After dialing the trunk call, Repeat Redial maintains the
call after this interval. After this interval, the system ter-
minates the call, waits the Repeat Redial Time (Timer 02)
and tries again.

04 Time for Send Busy Tone for ISDN Trunk 0-64800 0

Set the timer (sec) to send out Busy Tone with an ISDN
line, when called party is in busy.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

670 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-08 : Repeat Dial Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-08 (Repeat Dial Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 08
21-08-01
Repeat_Times 3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 671

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-09 : Dial Block Setup to defines the Dial Blocking Toll Restriction Class and
Dial Block Password to be used by the Supervisor extension.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Toll Restriction Class With Dial Block 1-15 15

Assign a Toll Restriction Class of Service when the Dial
Block feature is used.
02 Supervisor Password 0-9, *, # (4-digit fixed) No setting
Assign a 4-digit password to be used by the supervisor to
enable or disable Dial Block for other extensions.

Conditions
This function works by password and Class of Service control (the supervisor is not an assigned
extension). If Dial Block is available for all Classes of Service, everyone may become a supervisor
if they know the Dial Block password.

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

672 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-09 : Dial Block Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-09 (Dial Block Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 09
21-09-01
D-Block_Rest. 15
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 673

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions to define the Toll Restriction
Class to each extension when the extension is set for Dial Block Restriction. If this data is “0”, Toll
Restriction Class follows Program 21-09-01.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digit

Toll Restriction Class Default

0,1-15 (0:No Setting) 0 (No Setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

674 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-10 : Dial Block Restriction Class Per Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-10 (Dial Block Restriction Blass Per Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 10
21-10-01 TEL200
D-Block_Class 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-10-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 675

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment to define the Hotline destina-
tion number for each extension number.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Hotline destination number Default Related Program

0, *, #, Pause, Hooking, @ (Code to wait for a response) No setting 20-08-09

(Max. 24 digits) 21-01-09

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Ringdown Extension

676 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-11 : Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-11 (Extension Ringdown (Hotline) Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 11
21-11-01 TEL200
Hotline_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-11-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 677

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-12 - ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks to assign Calling Party
Numbers for each trunk (maximum 16 digits per entry). When a call is made by an extension which
does not have an Extension Calling Number assigned (Program 21-13), the system sends the calling
number for the ISDN trunk defined in 21-12.

Note: If the Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends
the data in Program 21-13.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Calling Party Number Data Default

1-0, *, # (Max. 16 digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

678 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-12 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-12 (ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunks):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 12
21-12-01 Trunk1
CLIP_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-12-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 679

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-13 - ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions to assign each exten-
sion a Calling Party Number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber
number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extension which does not have an Exten-
sion Calling Number assigned (Program 21-12), the system sends the calling number for the ISDN
trunk defined in Program 21-13.

Note: If a Calling Party Number is assigned in both Programs 21-12 and 21-13, the system sends
the data in Program 21-13.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Calling Party Number Data Default

1-0, *, # (Max. 16 digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibiility

680 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-13 : ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-13 (ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 13
21-13-01 TEL200
CLIP_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-13-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 681

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup to assign the password and Toll
Restriction Class for Walking Toll Restriction. Each code is six digits long, using any combination
of 0-9, # and *.

Input Data
ID Table Number 1-500

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 User ID Dial (6 digits) No setting

02 Walking Toll Restriction Class 1-15 1

Number

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

682 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-14 : Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-14 (Walking Toll Restriction Password Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 14
21-14-01 Table1
User_Password
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-14-nn Tablennn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ID Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 683

Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Route for Extensions to designate the alternate
trunk access route accessed when a user dials the Alternate Trunk Route Access Code. Refer to
Program 11-09-02 - Alternate Trunk Access Code when setting up alternate trunk codes. Turn to
Program 14-06 - Trunk Group Routing to set up the trunk routes. When entering data for this
option, enter the route number or 0 to prevent routing.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Mode Route table number Default

1-8 0-100 0
(0: no setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

684 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 21 : Outgoing Call Setup
21-15 : Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 21-15 (Individual Trunk Group Routing for Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 21 15
21-15-01 TEL200
Mode1 -T.G.R. 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
21-15-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 685

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls
Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls to define the system options for incom-
ing calls.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description Related
No. Program

01 Incoming Call 0 = Intercom Call 1 Use this option to determine if Intercom

Priority Priority calls or trunk calls have answer priority
1 = Trunk Call when both are ringing simultaneously.
Priority

02 Incoming Call 0 = Disable 0 If enabled, an incoming call that rings 22-01-03

Ring No Answer 1 = Enable longer than the Ring No Answer Alarm 22-01-04
Alarm interval (22-01-03), will change to a
unique ring cadence to indicate that the
call has been ringing too long. If dis-
abled, this will not occur.

03 Ring No Answer 0-64800 (Sec.) 60 If a trunk rings a key telephone longer 22-01-02
Alarm Time than this interval, the system changes the
ring cadence. This indicates to the user
that the call has been ringing too long.

04 DIL No Answer 0-64800 (Sec.) 0 A DIL that rings its programmed destina-
Recall Time tion longer than this interval diverts to the
DIL No Answer Ring Group (set in Pro-
gram 22-08).

05 - Not Used

06 DID 0-64800 (Sec.) 20 In systems with DID Ring-No-Answer 22-12

Ring-No-Answer Intercept, this interval sets the
Time Ring-No-Answer time. This interval is
how long a DID call rings the destination
extension before rerouting to the inter-
cept ring group.

07 DID Incoming 0-64800 (Sec.) 20

Ring Group no
answer timer

08 DID Pilot Call No 0-64800 (Sec.) 60

answer timer

09 DID to Trunk to 0-64800 (Sec.) 20

Trunk no answer
timer

686 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-01 : System Options for Incoming Calls

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

10 VRS Waiting 0- Enable always 0 This program set up the operation mode 22-14
Message Opera- 1- Change by man- for Auto Attendant and Queuing Mes- 22-15
tion ual operation sage. 22-08
22-04
22-01-04
20-15-11
15-07

11 VRS Waiting 0-64800 (Sec.) 20 Setup the sending duration time of the 22-14-06
Message Interval Auto - Attendant & Queuing. 22-15-06
Time The message is repeatedly sent out within
the specified time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-01 (System Options for Incoming Call Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 01
22-01-01
INC_Priority 1:Trunk
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 687

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup to assign the incoming trunk type for each
trunk. There is one item for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Day/Night Incoming Type Default Description Related

Mode Program

1-8 0- Normal 0 Use this option to set the feature 14-04

1- VRS (Second dial tone if no VRS installed) type for the trunk you are pro-
2- DISA gramming.
3- DID
4- DIL
5- E&M Tie line
6- Delayed DID
7- ANI/DNIS

Conditions
(A.) When connecting to T1 trunks, after changing Program 22-02-01 to match the telco’s con-
nected T1 service type, the T1 cable or the T1 PCB must be unplugged and then reconnected
in order for the T1 PCB to sync.

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

688 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-02 : Incoming Call Trunk Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-02 (Incoming Service Type Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 02
22-02-01
Mode1 =0:Normal
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 689

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range to select the ring tone range for the trunk. The
trunk uses a ring tone within the range selected when it rings an extension. There are four ring tones
available). Customize the Trunk Ring Tones in Program 82-01.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Related
Ring Tone Pattern Default Description Program

0-3 0 Use this program to select the ring tone range 15-02
(Ring Tone pattern 1-4) for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone within
the range selected when it rings an extension.
There are four ring tones available.

Incoming Signal Type Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation

Frequency Pattern

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz

Middle 660 760 16Hz
Low 520 660 16Hz

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz

Middle 660 760 8Hz
Low 520 660 8Hz

Pattern 3 High 1100 1100 Envelope

Middle 660 660 Envelope
Low 520 520 Envelope

Pattern 4 High 1100 1100 No modulation

Middle 660 660 No modulation
Low 520 520 No modulation

Conditions
None

690 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-03 : Trunk Ring Tone Range

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-03 (Trunk Ring Tone Range):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 03
22-03-01 Trunk1
TRK_Ring_Tone 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-03-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 691

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment to assign extensions to Ring
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring Group programming. Use Program 22-05 to assign
trunks to Ring Groups. IRG can have up to 32 extension numbers assigned.

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1-100

Incoming Ring Extension Related

Group No. Number Description Program

01-32 Max. 8 digits Use this program to assign extensions to Ring 22-02
Groups. Calls ring extensions according to Ring 22-05
Group programming. 22-06

Default
Extension 200 rings for incoming Ring Group 1 calls. All other extensions do not ring for incoming
Ring Group 1 calls.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Ring Groups

692 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-04 : Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-04 (Incoming Extension Ring Group Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 04
22-04-01 INC Group1
IRG 01=200
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-04-nn INC Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 693

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment to assign trunks to incoming
Ring Groups.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Incoming Group Default Description Related

Mode Number Program

1-8 0 (No setting) 1 Use this program to assign Normal 22-04

1-100 (Incoming Group) Ring Trunks (22-02) to Incoming 22-06
101 (DSPDB Voice Ring Groups (22-04).
Mail)
102 (In-Skin Voice Mail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Ring Groups

694 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-05 : Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-05 (Incoming Trunk Ring Group Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 05
22-05-01 Trunk1
Mode1 =1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-05-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 695

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode to define whether or not an extension should
ring for the Normal Incoming Ring Mode.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Incoming Group Number Default Related Program

Mode

1-8 0- No Ring 1 22-04

1- Ring 22-05

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering

696 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-06 : Normal Incoming Ring Mode

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-06 (Normal Incoming Ring Mode):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 06
22-06-01 TEL200
Mode1 =1:Ring On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-06-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 697

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment
22-07 : DIL Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-07 : DIL Assignment to assign the destination extension or Department Calling
Group for each DIL Incoming trunk. A DIL rings an extension directly, without any other Access
Map or Ring Group programming. If an extension has a line key, the DIL rings the line key. If the
extension does not have a line key, the DIL rings loop keys (if programmed) or one of the CALL
keys (CALL keys will always ring). Use Program 22-02 to designate a trunk as a DIL). You can
make eight DIL assignments, one for each Night Service mode:

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night
Mode Number of Transferring Destination Default

1-8 Extension number (Max. 8 digits) No setting

Pilot number

Conditions
Program 22-02 must be set to ‘4’ for the trunk.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Line (DIL)

698 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-07 : DIL Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-07 (DIL Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 07
22-07-01 Trunk1
Mode1 =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-07-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 699

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
For DIL Delayed Ringing, use Program 22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination to assign the
DIL No Answer Ring Group. An unanswered DIL rings this group after the DIL No Answer Time
expires (Program 22-01-04). DIL Delayed Ringing can also reroute outside calls ringing a Ring
Group.

You make eight assignments, one for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default

1-8 0 (No setting) 1

1-100 (Incoming Group)
101 (DSPDB Voice Mail)
102 (In-Skin Voice Mail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Line (DIL)
• Ring Group

700 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-08 : DIL/IRG No Answer Destination

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-08 (DIL/IRG No Answer Destination):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 08
22-08-01 Trunk1
Mode1 =1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-08-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 701

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of Dial-In incoming calls
for each trunk group.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 1-100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Expected Number of Digits 1-8 4

Enter the number of digits the table
expects to receive from the telco. Use
this program to make the system com-
patible with three- and four-digit DID
service.

02 Received Vacant Number Operation 0- Disconnect 0

Use this option to enable or disable 1- Transfer (Program 22-12)
Vacant Number Intercept.

03 Sub-addressing Mode 0- Extension number specify 0

1- DID Conversion Table

04 DID Receiving Mode for ISDN 0…Enbloc receiving 0

1…Overlap receiving
05 Local Code Digits 0-15 (0 : No Local code) 0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

06 Local Code Dial (Max. 16 digits) No setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)

07 Pilot Code Dial (1 digit : 0-9) No setting

(Only Overlap Receiving Mode)
08 T302 Time-out Operation 0…Disconnect 0
(Only Overlap Receiving Mode) 1…Transfer (Program 22-12)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

702 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-09 : DID Basic Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-09 (DID Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 09
22-09-01 Trk Group 1
DDI_Rcv.Digit 4digit
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-09-nn Trk Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 703

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup to specify the size of the DID Translation
Tables. There are 2000 Translation Table entries that you can allocate among 20 Translation
Tables.

Conditions
None

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01-20

Item Input data

1st Area Setup (Start Address) 0-2000

(0: No setting)
1st Area Setup (End Address)

2nd Area Setup (Start Address)

2nd Area Setup (End Address)

Default
Conversion Table Area 1st 2nd

Start Table End Table Start Table End Table

1 1 100 0 0

2 101 200 0 0

3 201 300 0 0
4 301 400 0 0

: : : : :

20 0 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

704 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-10 : DID Translation Table Setup
• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-10 (DID Translation Trable Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 10
22-10-01 Conv Area1
No.1_Start_Add1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-10-nn Conv Areann
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 705

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-11 : DID Translation Table Number Conversion to specify for each Transla-
tion Table entry (2000):
• The digits received by the system (eight max.)
• The extension the system dials after translation (24 digits max.)
• The name that should show on the dialed extension’s display when it rings (twelve characters
max.)
• The Transfer Target-1 and 2
If the Transfer Targets are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to
the final transfer destination (Program 22-10).
• Operation mode

Use the following chart when entering and editing text for names. Press the key once for the first
character, twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press “2” three times.
Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-p, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
8 Enter characters T-V, q-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

706 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex:
STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data
Conversion Table Number 1-2000

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Received Number Max. 8 digits No setting

02 Target Number Max. 24 digits No setting

03 DID Name Max. 12 characters No setting

04 Transfer Operation Mode 0- No transfer 0

1- Busy
2- No answer
3- Busy / No answer

05 Transfer Destination Number -1 0: No setting 0

1-100: Incoming Group
06 Transfer Destination Number -2 101: DSPDB Voice Mail 0
102: In-Skin Voice Mail
201-264: Extension Group
400: DID
401: DISA
1000-1999: Abbreviated
Number (000-999)

07 Call Waiting 0: Disable 0

1: Enable

08 Maximum Number of DID Calls 0-200 (0: no limit) 0

09 Music on Hold Source 0: IC/MOH Port 0

1: BGM Port
2: ACI Port

10 ACI Music Source Port When a sound source type is 2 0

in above : (0-96)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 707

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-11 : DID Translation Number Conversion
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-11 (DID Translation Number Conversion):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 11
22-11-01 Conv TBL 1
Received_Dial
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-11-nn ConvTBLnnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Conversation Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

708 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
For each DID Translation Table, use Program 22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group to define the
first destination group for DID calls.

Depending on the entry in Program 22-09 and 22-11, the incoming calls will route to the first desti-
nation group by the following:
• Vacant number intercept (vacant number means that there is no phone connected, no station
card installed, or the extension number is not defined in Program 11-02)
• Busy intercept
• Ring-no-answer intercept

If the destination is '0', the calls will be forwarded to the trunk ring group defined in Program 22-11
based on the table assigned to the DID trunk.

Note: If Program 22-09-05 and 22-09-06 are set, the priority of transferring will be in this order:
Program 22-09-05 + Program 22-09-06 + Program 22-12

Input Data
Conversion Table Area Number 01-20

Day/Night Mode Incoming Group Number Default

1-8 0 (no setting) 1

1-100 (incoming group)
101 (DSPDB voice mail)
102 (In-Skin voice mail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 709

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-12 : DID Intercept Ring Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-12 (DID Intercept Ring Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 12
22-12-01 Conv Area1
Mode1 =1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-12-nn Conv Areann
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Conversion Table Area number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

710 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment to assign the DID
Trunk Groups to DID Translation Tables. DID trunks should be in their own group. If you have
more than one type of DID trunk, put each type in a separate Trunk Group. For each Trunk Group,
you make a Translation Table entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 1-100

Day/Night Mode Conversion Table Area Default

Number

1-8 0-20 1
(0: No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 711

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-13 : DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-13 (DID Trunk Group to Translation Table Assign-
ment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 13
22-13-01 Trk Group 1
Mode1 =1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-13-nn Trk Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

712 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG
22-14 : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-14 : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG to define for each incoming ring
group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Waiting Message.

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1-100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 1st waiting message start timing 0-64800 0

02 1st waiting message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)

03 1st waiting message sending count 0-255 0

04 2nd waiting message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)

05 2nd waiting message sending count 0-255 0

06 Tone kind at Message interval 0- Ring Back Tone 0

1- MOH Tone
2- BGM Source

07 Disconnect time after the end of VRS 0-64800 60

Waiting Message

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 713

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-14 : VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-14 (VRS Waiting Delayed Message for IRG):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 14
22-14-01 INC Group1
MSG1_Str.Time 0 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-14-nn INC Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

714 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group
22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group to define for each Depart-
ment (Extension) Group the timers, VRS message number and tone kind for VRS Waiting Mes-
sage.

Input Data
Extension Group Number 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 1st waiting message start timing 0-64800 0

02 1st waiting message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)
03 1st waiting message sending count 0-255 0

04 2nd waiting message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)

05 2nd waiting message sending count 0-255 0

06 Tone kind at Message interval 0- Ring Back Tone 0

1- MOH Tone
2- BGM Source

07 Disconnect time after the end of VRS 0-64800 60

Waiting Message

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Department Group

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 715

Program 22 : Incoming Call Setup
22-15 : VRS Waiting Message for Department Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 22-15 (VRS Waiting Message for Department Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 22 15
22-15-01 Extn Group1
MSG1_Str.Time 0 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
22-15-nn Extn Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

716 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-01 : System Options for Group Call Pickup
Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-01 : System Options for Group Call Pickup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Not Available.

Description
Not currently available.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 717

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 23-02 : Call Pickup Groups to assign extensions to Call Pickup Groups. This pro-
gram also lets you assign an extension’s Call Pickup Group priority. If two extensions in a group
are ringing at the same time, Group Call Pickup intercepts the highest priority extension first.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Group Related
Number Priority Default Description Program

1-64 1-999 1 – xxx Use this program to assign extensions to 11-12-26

Call Pickup Groups other than the exten- 11-12-27
sion group set up by a Program 16-02. 11-12-28
15-07-24
15-07-25
15-07-26

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Group Call Pickup

718 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-02 : Call Pickup Groups

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 23-02 (Call Pickup Groups):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 23 02
23-02-01 TEL200
Call_Pickup_GP1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
23-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 719

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer to assign trunk routes 1-100 (set in Pro-
gram 14-06) to extensions for Universal Answer. If the call ringing the paging system is in an
extension’s assigned route, the user can dial the Universal Answer code (843) to pick up the call.

You can also use this program to let an extension user automatically answer trunk calls that ring
other extensions (not their own). When the user lifts the handset, they automatically answer the
ringing calls based on Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in Program 14-06). The exten-
sion user’s own ringing calls, however, always have priority over calls ringing other co-worker’s
extensions. Refer to the Line Preference feature for more information.

You make one entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Day/Night Route Table Default Description Related

Mode Number Program

1-8 0-100 0 Use this program to let an extension user auto- 14-06
matically answer trunk calls that ring other exten-
sions. When the user lifts the handset, they
automatically answer the ringing calls based on
Trunk Group Routing programming (defined in
Program 14-06).

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Line Preference
• Night Service

720 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-03 : Universal Answer/Auto Answer

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 23-03 (Universal Answer/Auto Answer):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 23 03
23-03-01 TEL200
Mode1 Route=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
23-03-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 721

Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions to set the off-hook auto-
matic response priority for calls ringing virtual extension keys on a telephone.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Extension Related
Priority Group Default Description Program
Number

1-4 00-64 00 When an extension has a virtual extension assigned 16-02

(00=Don’t to a Programmable Function Key, this program 20-10-08
care) determines the priority for automatically answering
the ringing calls when the handset is lifted. If “00”
is selected, when the user lifts the handset, the user
will answer a ringing call from any group.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage

722 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 23 : Answer Features Setup
23-04 : Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 23-04 (Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 23 04
23-04-01 TEL200
Order1 STG_Group =0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
23-04-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 723

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold
Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-01 : System Options for Hold to define the system options for the Hold feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default Related Program

01 Hold Recall Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 90

A call on Hold recalls the extension that
placed it on Hold after this interval. This
timer works with the Hold Recall Callback
Timer (Item 2).

02 Hold Recall Callback Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 30

A trunk recalling from Hold or Park rings an
extension for this interval. This timer works
with timer 01 (Hold Recall Time) or timer 06
and 07 (Park Recall Time). After this inter-
val, the system invokes the Hold recall time
again. Cycling between timer 01 and 02 and
06 and 07 continues until a user answers the
call.

03 Exclusive Hold Recall Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 90

A call left on Exclusive Hold recalls the
extension that placed it on Hold after this
interval.
04 Exclusive Hold Recall Callback Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 30
An Exclusive Hold Recall rings an extension
for this interval. If not picked up, the call
goes back on System Hold.

05 Forced Release of Held Call 0-64800 (Sec.) 1800 14-01-16

Depending on the setting of Program
14-01-16, the system disconnects calls on
Hold longer than this interval.

06 Park Hold Time - Normal 0-64800 (Sec.) 90 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this interval
recalls the extension that initially parked it.

07 Park Hold Time - Extended 0-64800 (Sec.) 300 20-11-19

A call left parked longer than this interval
recalls the extension that initially parked it.

Conditions
None

724 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-01 : System Options for Hold

Feature Cross Reference

• Hold
• Park

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-01 (System Options for Hold):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 01
24-01-01
Hold_Recall 90 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 725

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
24-02 : System Options for Transfer

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-02 : System Options for Transfer to define the system options for Transfer feature.

Input Data
Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

01 Busy Transfer 0- Disable 0

Use this option to prevent or allow 1- Enable
extensions to Transfer calls to busy
extensions.

02 MOH or Ringback on Transferred 0- Hold Tone 0 20-03-02

Calls 1- Ring Back Tone
Use this option to enable or disable
MOH on Transfer. If enabled (0), a
transferred caller hears MOH while
their call rings the destination exten-
sion. If disabled (1), a transferred caller
hears ringback while their call rings the
destination extension.

03 Delayed Call Forwarding Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 10

If activated at an extension, Delayed
Call Forwarding occurs after this inter-
val. This also sets how long a Trans-
ferred call waits at an extension
forwarded to Voice Mail before routing
to the called extension’s mailbox.

04 Transfer Recall Time 0-64800 (Sec.) 30

An unanswered transferred call recalls
to the extension that initially trans-
ferred it after this interval.
05 Message Wait Ring Interval Timer 0-64800 (Sec.) 30
For SLTs without message waiting
lamps, this timer determines the
amount of time between intermittent
ringing. If this timer is set to '0' then the
system rings once.
07 Forced release for Trunk-to-Trunk 0-64800 (Sec.) 1800
Transfer

08 Delayed transfer timer for all extension 0-64800 (Sec.) 10 11-11-28

groups 11-11-29
15-07-59

726 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-02 : System Options for Transfer
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Transfer

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-02 (System Options for Transfer):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 02
24-02-01
Busy_Ext.TRFR 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 727

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group
24-03 : Park Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-03 : Park Group to assign an extension to a Park Group. The system allows a
total of 64 Park Groups. An extension can only pick up a call parked in orbit by an extension in its
own group.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Park Group Related

Number Default Description Program

1-64 1 Assign an extension to a Park Group. The system 15-07-01

allows a total of 64 Park Groups.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Park

728 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-03 : Park Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-03 (Park Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 03
24-03-01 TEL200
Park_Hold_Group 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-03-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 729

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup to assign the Abbre-
viated Dialing number bin which should be used as the destination of the Automatic
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/ Abbreviated
Night Dial Area Default Description Related
Program
Mode Number

1-8 0-1999 1999 The destination of telephone number of the 11-10-08

Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer uses the number 13-04
registered into the Abbreviated Dial. Use 24-05
this program to setup the Abbreviated Dial
area.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Transfer

730 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-04 : Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-04 (Automatic Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer Target Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 04
24-04-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Abb.D_Area=1999
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-04-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 731

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup to assign the Abbreviated Dial-
ing bin which is used as the destination of the extension for the Department Group.

Input Data
Department Group Number 01-64

Day/Night Abbreviated Related

Mode Dial Area Default Description Program
Number

1-8 0-1999 1999 The Abbreviated Dialing area is used as 11-11-27

the registration place for the destination 13-04
of the transferred telephone number at 24-04
the time of the extension group transfer
use.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Transfer

732 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-05 : Department Group Transfer Target Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-05 (Department Group Transfer Target Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 05
24-05-01 Extn Group1
Mode1 Abb.D_Area=1999
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-05-nn Extn Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 733

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
For each extension/virtual extension port, use Program 24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding to assign
the Fixed Call Forwarding Type (0-4) and the destination extension/virtual extension. The follow-
ing chart shows the Fixed Call Forwarding types:

Fixed Call Description

Forwarding Type

0 Fixed Call Forwarding disabled

1 Fixed Call Forwarding with both extensions
ringing
2 Fixed Call Forwarding when unanswered
3 Fixed Call Forwarding immediate
4 Fixed Call Forwarding when busy or
unanswered

The Fixed Call Forwarding destination can be an on- or off-premise extension or a Voice Mail
extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Transferred
Substitute call receipt type Telephone Default Description
Number

0- No setting Max. 8 digits 0 Set the type of substitute call receipt

1- Call Forwarding with both ringing and specify the extension number
2- Call Forwarding when unanswered transferred on originated telephone.
3- Fixed Call Forwarding immediate
4- Call Forwarding when busy or unanswered

Conditions
Do not use Fixed Call Forwarding Type 1 (Both Ringing) with Voice Mail ports.

Feature Cross Reference

• Call Forwarding, Fixed

734 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-06 : Fixed Call Forwarding

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-06 (Fixed Call Forwarding):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 06
24-06-01 TEL200
Fix_C/F_Type0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-06-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 735

Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise
24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off Premise to assign the Fixed Call Forwarding
Off-Premise telephone number for each extension/virtual extension. The off-premise destination
can be up to 24 digits long, using 0-9, *, # and P (pause). Be sure to include the trunk access code
(e.g., 9) in the number.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Off-Premise Destination Number Default

1-9, 0, *, #, No setting
Pause (Press line key 1),
Recall/Flash (Press line key 2),
@ (Press line key 3)

(max. 24 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

736 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 24 : Hold/Transfer Setup
24-07 : Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 24-07 (Fixed Call Forwarding Off-Premise):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 24 07
24-07-01 TEL200
Dial =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
24-07-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 737

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-01 : DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup
Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-01 : DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-01 : DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup to define the basic setting of each DID/
DISA line.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Item No. Item Input Data Default Related

Program

01 DID/DISA Dial-In Mode 0- Extension number/Service code 0 22-11

specify
1- Use dial conversion table

02 DISA User ID 0- off 0 25-08

1- on

03 DID/DISA Transfer Alarm 0- Normal 0

1- Alarm

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

738 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-01 : DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-01 (DID/DISA Line Basic Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 01
25-01-01 Trk Port 1
Dial-In_Mode 0:Intercom
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-01-nn Trk Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 739

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message to assign the VRS message number to be
used as the Automated Attendant Error Message for each trunk which is assigned as a DID / DISA.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Kind of Talkie Additional data Default

Mode

1-8 0- No Message In case of 1: 0

1- VRS 01-48 (VRS message number)
2- ACI In case of 2:
3- SLT 01-16 (ACI group number)
In case of 3:
01-64 (Extension group number)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

740 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-02 : DID/DISA VRS Error Message

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-02 (DID/DISA Talkie):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 02
25-02-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Talkie=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-02-nn Trk Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 741

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-03 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing
25-03 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-03 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing to set what hap-
pens to a call when the DISA caller dials incorrectly or waits too long to dial. The call can either
disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination (a ring group or voice mail). When setting the
DISA and DID Operating Mode, you make an entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Incoming Group Number Default Related Program

Mode

1-8 0 (Disconnect) 0 22-04

1-100 (Incoming Group)
101 (DSPDB Voice Mail)
102 (In-Skin Voice Mail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

742 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-03 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-03 (DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With Incorrect Dialing):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 03
25-03-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Target_IRG=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-03-nn Trk Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 743

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-04 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy
25-04 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-04 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy to set the operat-
ing mode of each DISA trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the DISA caller calls a busy
or unanswered extension. The call can either disconnect (0) or Transfer to an alternate destination
(a ring group or voice mail). When setting the DISA and DID Operating Mode, you make an entry
for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Incoming Group Number Default Related Program

Mode

1-8 0 (Disconnect) 0 22-04

1-100 (Incoming Ring Group)
101 (DSPDB Voice Mail)
102 (In-Skin Voice Mail)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

744 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-04 : DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-04 (DID/DISA Transfer Ring Group With No Answer/Busy):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 04
25-04-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Target_IRG=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-04-nn Trk Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 745

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-05 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment
25-05 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-05 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment to assign the VRS message number
to be used as the Automated Attendant error message. For each DID/DISA trunk that the VRS will
answer, enter the VRS message (1-48) the outside caller hears if they dial incorrectly. If you enter 0
(i.e., no error message), the call reroutes according to Program 25-03 and 25-04.

For each trunk, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode VRS Message Number Default

1-8 0-48 (0: no setting) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

746 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-05 : DID/DISA Error Message Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-05 (DID/DISA Error Message Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 05
25-05-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Error_MSG=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-05-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 747

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-06 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup
25-06 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-06 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup to set up single digit dialing
through the VRS. This gives VRS callers single key access to extensions, the company operator,
Department Calling Groups and Voice Mail. For each VRS message set to answer outside calls (see
Program 25-04 and 25-05), you specify:

• The digit the VRS caller dials (0-9, *, #). (Keep in mind that if you assign destinations to dig-
its , outside callers will not be able to dial system extensions.
• The destination reached (eight digits max.) when the caller dials the specified digit.

The destination can be an extension, a Department Calling pilot number or the Voice Mail master
number. A one-digit code can be assigned for each Automated Attendant message.

Example:
Message Number=01, Destination=2, Next Message Number=0, Dial=399
In this example, when “2” is dialed by an outside caller, the system transfers the call to “399”. This
means that ext 200-299 cannot receive calls from DID / DISA users during/after VRS Message 01.

Input Data
Attendant message number 01-48

Received dial 1-9,0,*,#

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Next Attendant message number 0-48 (0: no setting) 0

02 Destination number Up to 8 digits No setting

Conditions
Outside caller may not be able to dial individual extensions or lines if the same first digit is defined
here.

Feature Cross Reference

l Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
l Voice Response System (VRS)

748 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-06 : DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-06 (DID/DISA One-Digit Code Attendant Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 06
25-06-01 Guidance1
Rcv’d 1 MSG 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-06-nn Guidancenn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Guidance/Attendant Message number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 749

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA
25-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA to set the value for the system timers which
affect DID and DISA. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option, its range and
default setting.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Related
No. Program

01 DISA Dial Tone Time 0-64800 10 25-04

After answering a DISA trunk, the system waits this
interval for the caller to dial the first digit of the DISA
password. If the caller fails to dial within this interval,
the system drops the call.

02 DID/DISA No Answer Time 0-64800 30 25-04

A DISA caller can ring an extension for this interval
before the system sets the call as a Ring No Answer.
After this interval expires, the call follows the pro-
grammed Ring No Answer routing (set in Program
25-03 and 25-04).

03 Disconnect after DID/DISA re-transfer to IRG 0-64800 60

04 Calling Time to Automatic answering Telephone set 0-64800 10

05 Duration time for Guidance Message by Automatic 0-64800 10
answering telephone set

06 Duration time for Guidance Message by ACI Talkie 0-64800 10

07 DISA Conversation Warning Tone Time 0-64800 180
Determine the length of time a DISA caller can talk
before the Long Conversation tone is heard.
08 DISA Long Conversation Disconnect 0-64800 10
This timer determines how long the system will wait
before disconnecting a call after the Long Conversa-
tion tone is heard.

09 DISA Internal Paging Time 0-64800 30

This is the maximum length of an Internal Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this interval, the system terminates the DISA
call.

750 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-07 : System Timers for DID/DISA

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Program

10 DISA External Paging Time 0-64800 30

This is the maximum length of an External Page
placed by a DISA caller. If the Page continues longer
than this interval, the system terminates the DISA
call.
11 DID/DISA Answer Delay Timer 0-64800 0

13 DID/DISA Busy Tone Interval 0-64800 5

If a DISA caller dials a busy extension (and Program
25-04 = 0), the system plays busy tone for this inter-
val before disconnecting.

14 Delayed DID Answer Timer 0-64800 10

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-07 (System Timers for DID/DISA):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 07
25-07-01
DISA_Dial_Tone10 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 751

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup
25-08 : DISA User ID Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-08 : DISA User ID Setup to set the 6-digit DISA password for each user. There
are 15 users each with one 6-digit password.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1-15

Password Default

Dial (Six digits fixed) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-08 (DISA User ID Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 08
25-08-01 DISA User1
DISA_User_ID
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-08-nn DISA Usernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

752 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users to set the DISA Class of Service for each
user. When a DISA caller enters a password (defined in Program 25-08), the system identifies the
user and associates the appropriate DISA Class of Service with the call. Assign the DISA Class of
Service options in Program 20-14. When programming DISA Class of Service, you make one entry
for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1-15

Day/Night Mode Function Class Default

1-8 1-15 1

Conditions
(A.) The DISA Class of Service cannot be 0.
(B.) You cannot use Program 20-06 to assign Class of Service to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 753

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-09 : Class of Service for DISA Users

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-09 (Class of Service for DISA Users):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 09
25-09-01 DISA User1
Mode1 DISA_Class 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-09-nn DISA Usernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

754 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA to assign the Trunk Group route chosen
when a user places a DISA call into the system and dials 9. Set Trunk Group Routing in Program
14-06. Enable or disable the DISA caller’s ability to dial 9 in Program 20-14-02. You assign a route
to each DISA Class of Service (1-15). The system assigns a DISA Class of Service to a call based
on the password the DISA caller dials.

When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1-15

Day/Night Mode Route Table Number Default

1-8 0-100 1
(0- no setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 755

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-10 : Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-10 (Trunk Group Routing for DISA):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 10
25-10-01 DISA User1
Mode1 DISA_Route No.1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-10-nn DISA Usernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

756 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
For systems that use Toll Restriction, use Program 25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class to assign
a Toll Restriction Class (1-15) to each DISA user (1-15). The system uses the Toll Restriction
Class you enter in Program 21-05 and 21-06. The Toll Restriction Class assigned to a DISA call is
based on the DISA Class of Service and user, which is determined by the password the caller dials.

When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data

DISA User Number 1-15

Day/Night
Mode Toll Restriction Class Default

1-8 1-15 2

Conditions
You cannot use Program 21-05 to assign Toll Restriction to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Toll Restriction

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 757

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-11 : DISA Toll Restriction Class

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-11 (DISA Toll Restriction Class):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 11
25-11-01 DISA User1
Mode1 DISA_T/R_Class2
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-11-nn DISA Usernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

758 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA to define the trunk route
selected when a DISA caller dials the Alternate Trunk Access Code. The route selected is based on
the DISA caller’s Class of Service, which is in turn determined by the password the caller dials.
When programming, you make a separate entry for each Night Service Mode.

Use Program 11-09-02 to set the Alternate Trunk Access Code. Use Program 14-06 to set trunk
routes.

Input Data
DISA User Number 1-15

Day/Night Mode Route Table Number Default

1-8 0-100 1
(0- no setting)

Conditions
You cannot use Program 21-15 to assign alternate trunk routing to DISA trunks.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Trunk Group Routing

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 759

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-12 : Alternate Trunk Group Routing for DISA

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-12 (Individual Trunk Group Routing for DISA):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 12
25-12-01 DISA User1
Mode1 DISA_Route_No.1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-12-nn DISA Usernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DISA User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

760 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA
25-13 : System Option for DISA

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 25-13 : System Option for DISA to enter the password DISA callers must dial
before the system will allow them to record, listen to and or erase the VRS messages. This program
also is used to define additional DISA call options.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 VRS Password 1-9, 0, *, # No setting

Enter the password DISA callers must dial before 6 digits fixed
the system will allow them to record, listen to
and or erase the VAU messages.

02 Continue Code for DISA Trunk to Trunk 1-9, 0, *, #

Program the Continue code. This code is used 1 digit
with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation
for DISA callers. This allows the user to press the
programmed code to continue the conversation
the call. If the Continue code is entered, this
resets the timer in Program 25-07-07.

03 Disconnect Code for DISA Trunk to Trunk 1-9, 0, *, #

Program the Disconnect code. This code is used 1 digit
with the Warning Tone for Long Conversation
for DISA callers. This allows the user to press the
programmed code to disconnect the call. If the
Disconnect code is entered, the call is discon-
nected immediately.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
• Voice Response System (VRS)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 761

Program 25 : DID/DISA Setup
25-13 : System Option for DISA

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 25-13 (System Option for DISA):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 25 13
25-13-01
VRS_MSG_Access_ID
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
25-13-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

762 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service
Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service to define the system options for Auto-
matic Route Selection (ARS).

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ARS Service 0 = Disable 0

Enable or disable ARS.

02 Network Outgoing Inter-Digit ARS 0-64800 (msec.) 30

Timer
With Networking, this timer replaces
20-03-04 when determining if all network
protocol digits have been received. If ARS is
enabled at Site B, this timer can be pro-
grammed for 5 (500 msec) at Site A. If ARS
is disabled and Site B is using F-Route for
outbound dialing, this timer should be pro-
grammed for 30 (3 seconds) at Site A.

03 ARS Misdialed Number Handling 0 = Route to Trunk 1

If a user dials a number not programmed in Group 1
ARS, this option determines if the system 1 = Play Warning
should route over turnk group 1 or play error Tone to Dialer
tone.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

l Automatic Route Selection

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 763

Program 26 : ARS Service
26-01 : Automatic Route Selection Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 26-01 (Automatic Route Selection Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 26 01
26-01-01
ARS Service 0:Off
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
26-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

764 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 26 : ARS Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS to set pre-transaction tables for selecting
Automatic Route Selection (ARS).
• Service Type 1 (Route to Trunk Group Number) - the number routes to a trunk group.
• Service Type 2 (F-Route Selected) - The number is controlled by the F-Route table.

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1-200

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Dial Dial Digits (16 dig- No Setting

its maximum)
02 Service Type 0 = No ARS 0
1 = Route to Trunk
Group
2 = Select F-Route
Access

03 Service Number In Service Type 1: 0

Select Trunk
Group Number
(0-100, 0=no
route)

In Service Type 2:
F-Route Time
Schedule Not Used
= 0-500 (F-Route
Table Number).
Refer to Program
44-05.

F-Route Tie
Schedule Used =
0-500 (F-Route
Selection Num-
ber). Refer to Pro-
gram 44-04.
04 ARS Class of Service 0-16 10

05 Dial Treatment 0-15 0

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 765

Program 26 : ARS Service
26-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

l Automatic Route Selection

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 26-02 (Dial Analysis Table for ARS):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 26 02
26-02-01 Analysis Tbl1
Dial
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
26-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

766 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 26 : ARS Service
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments to assign the 15 Dial Treatments for automatic ARS
Dialing translation. Assign Dial Treatments to Service Numbers (Trunk Groups) in Program 26-02.
The ARS Dial Treatment options are:

• 3 - Delete the NPA if dialed as part of the initial call.

• 2 - Delete the leading digit if dialed as part of the initial call.
• 1 - Add a leading 1 if not dialed as part of the intitial call.
• INPA - Insert the NPA specified by NPA.
• DNN - Outdial the NN number of digits or execute the code that follows. For example,
D041234 out-dials 124. Valid entries are 0-9, #, *, Wnn (wait nn seconds) and P (pause). Each
digits code counts as a digit. So for example, if a P was added for a pause, the entry would
look like: D05P1234. This Dial Treatment can only be added from telephone programming.
• Wnn - Wait nn seconds.
• P - Pause in analogue trunk.
• R - Redial the initially dialed number, including any modifications
• E - End of Dial Treatment. All Dial Treatments must end with the E code.
• X - When ARS is enabled, X must be entered in the Dial Treatment in order for the sysstem to
output the extension number of the call’s originator to the black box for the E911 feature.

Input Data
Dial Treatment Table Number 1-15

Item No. Input Data Default

01 24 characters maximum No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

l Automatic Route Selection

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 767

Program 26 : ARS Service
26-03 : ARS Dial Treatments

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 26-03 (ARS Dial Treatments):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 26 03
26-03-01 ARS Treatment1

back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
26-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

768 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 26 : ARS Service
26-04 : ARS Class of Service
26-04 : ARS Class of Service

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 26-04 : ARS Class of Service to set an extension’s ARS Class of Service. Auto-
matic Route Selection uses ARS Class of Service when determining how to route an extension’s
calls.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item No. Day/Night Mode Class Default

01 1-8 0-16 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

l Automatic Route Selection

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 26-04 (ARS Class of Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 26 04
26-04-01 TEL200
Mode1:COS 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
26-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 769

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode
Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode to set the mode of the system’s DSS Con-
soles. The entry you make in this option applies to all the system’s DSS Consoles. The available
options are:
• Regular (Business) Mode (0)
• Hotel Mode (1)
• ACD Monitor Mode (2)

Input Data
DSS Console Number 01-32

DSS Operation Mode Default

0- Business mode 0
1- Hotel mode
2- ACD monitor mode

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

l Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console
l Hotel/Motel

770 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-01 : DSS Console Operating Mode

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 30-01 (DSS Console Operating Mode):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 30 01
30-01-01
Operation_Mode0:Business
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
30-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 771

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify which extensions have
DSS Consoles connected.
• You can have up to 32 different extensions with DSS Consoles. A single extension can have
up to 32 110-Button DSS Consoles (32 is the maximum allowed per system).
• Each extension in the system can have one 24-Button DLS Console (256 maximum). An
extension can have a 24-Button DLS Console in addition to 110-Button DSS Consoles.

When programming, each extension/DSS Console(p) combination is called a Console Number.

There are 32 Console Numbers (1-32). You assign Console Numbers to extensions. When entering
data, you normally make the assignment for Console Number 1 first.

Input Data
110-Button DSS Console Number 01-32

The extension number for Key Telephone connected with the Default
DSS console

(Up to 8 digits) No setting

Conditions
24-button DSS consoles cannot be daisy-chained.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

772 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-02 : DSS Console Extension Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 30-02 (DSS Console Extension Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 30 02
30-02-01 DSS1
Ext.Number
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
30-02-nn DSSnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 773

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignments to customize the key assignments for
110-Button DSS Consoles. A DSS Console key can have any function up to four digits long (e.g.,
extension number or Service Code).

To prevent lamping problems when reassigning DSS Console keys, it is recommended that you
clear an extension's programmed key before reassigning it (Enter key to be cleared + FLASH key
[If using Web or PC Programming, delete the key assignments and upload the change to the system
before proceeding]). Without clearing an extension's key first, your DSS Console may not show the
correct lamping, although the DSS function will work correctly.

If you are programming the system from the extension to which the DSS Console is connected,
either by phone or using the Web or PC Program, you may need to unplug the DSS and plug it back
in to reset the console's lamping.

Input Data
Index 1
DSS Console Number 01-32

Index 2
Key Number Function number Additional data

01-60 (Model A) 0-99 (General functional level) Refer to functional number list
001-200 (Model C) * 00-* 99 (Appearance functional level)

Function Number List

[1] General functional level (00 – 99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

01 DSS / One-touch Extension number or any Red On: extension busy

numbers (Up to 24 digits) Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink Red: DND or Call Forward

02 Microphone Key (ON/ Red On: Mic On

OFF) Off: Mic Off

03 DND Key Red On: DND

04 BGM (ON/OFF) Red On: BGM ON

Off: BGM OFF

05 Headset Red On: Under headset operation

06 Transfer Key None

774 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

07 Conference Key Red On: Under conference operation

08 Incoming Call Log Rapid Blink Red: New call log

Red On: Call log
Off: No call log

09 Operation mode switch Mode number (1 – 8) Red On: On mode

10 Call Forward - Immedi- Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state
ate Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

11 Call Forward - Busy Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state

Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

12 Call Forward - No Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state

answer Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state
13 Call forward - Busy or Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state
No Answer Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

14 Call Forward – Both ring Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state

Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

15 Follow me Rapid Blink Red: Setting state

Slow Blink Red: Set-ed state

16 Call Forward to Station Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state

Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

17 Call Forward to Device Slow Blink Red: Forwarding state

Rapid Blink Red: Forwarded state

18 Text message setup Message Numbers (01 – 20) Red On: Under setting

19 External Group External Paging Number Red On: Active

Paging (1 – 8)
20 All Call Paging Red On: Active

21 Internal Group Internal Paging Number Red On: Active

Paging (01 – 64)
22 Internal all call None
paging

23 Meet-me answer to inter- None

nal paging

24 Call Pickup None

25 Call Pickup for another None

group

26 Call Pickup for specified Call Pickup Group Number None

group

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 775

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

27 Abbreviated dial – com- Abbreviated dial number None

mon/Private (Common / Private)
28 Abbreviated dial - group Abbreviated dial number None
(Group)

29 Repeat Redial Rapid Blink Red: Under a repeat dial

30 Saved Number Redial None

31 Memo dial None

32 Meet – me conference None

33 Override (Off-hook sig- None
naling)

34 Break - in None
35 Camp on Red On: Under camp-on or reservation

36 Step call None

37 DND / FWD Override None

call

38 Message Waiting None

39 Room monitoring Rapid Blink Red: Under monitored

Slow Blink Red: Under monitoring

40 Handset transmission cut Red On: Transmission cut - off

- off

41 Buzzer Extension Number Red On: Transmission side

Rapid Blink Red: Receiver side

42 Boss – Secretary call Extension Number Red On: Boss – Secretary mode

43 Series call None

44 Common Hold None

45 Exclusive None

46 Department Group With- Red On: Withdrawing

drawing

47 Reverse voice over Extension Number Red On: extension busy

Off: extension idle
Rapid Blink Red: DND or Call Forward

48 Voice over Calling party - Slow Blink Red: Under a call,

Under a response
Called party - Slow Blink Red: Under a call,
Under a response

776 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

49 Call redirection Extension Number or Voice None

Mail Number
50 Account code None

51 General Purpose Relay Red On: Relay On

52 Incoming call queuing Incoming Group Number Red On: Under setting
setup

53 Queuing Message Start- Red On: Active

ing
54 External Call Forward by Red On: Active
Door Box

55 Extension name edit None

58 Department Incoming Extension Group Number
Call - Immediate (01 – 64)

59 Department Incoming Extension Group Number

Call - Delay (01 – 64)

60 Department Incoming Extension Group Number

Call - DND (01 – 64)

61 ID Input None

63 Outgoing Call without Red On: Active

CLIP (ISDN)

64 Key pad facility Red On: Active

65 Transfer During Conver-

sation (ISDN)

66 CTI Red On: CTI active

67 Mail Box Extension Number or Rapid Blink Red: New message received
Department Group Number Red On: There are messages.
Slow Blink Red: The message store regulation is
under setup.

68 Voice Mail Service 0- Skip 2-In case of monitor mode

1- Back Skip Slow Blink Red: Monitor setting - Automatic
2- Monitor Red On: Monitor setting - Manual

69 Conversation recording 0- Conversation recording 0- In case of conversation recording

service 1- Delete, Re-recording Rapid Blink Red: Under recording (No Destina-
2- Delete tion)
Red On: Under recording (Appointed destina-
tion)
70 Automated attendant for Extension Number or None
extension Department Group Number

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 777

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Function
Number Function Additional Data LED Indication

71 Message change for Extension Number or None

Voice attendant Department Group Number

72 Keypad Facility Key

73 Keypad Hold Key

74 Keypad Retrieve Key

75 Keypad Conference Key

76 Toll Restriction in Credit Extension Number

77 Voice Mail (In-Skin Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Access to voice mail
Voice Mail) Number Rapid Blink Red: Existing new message

78 Conversation Recording Rapid Blink Red: Recording

(In-Skin Voice Mail)

79 Automated Attednant Extension Number or Pilot Red On: Setup - All calls
(In-Skin Voice Mail) Number Rapid Blink Red: Setup - No Answer calls
Slow Blink Red: Setup - Busy calls
Wink Red: Busy/No answer calls

[2] Appearance functional level (*00 - *99)

Function
Function Additional Data LED Indication
Number

*01 Trunk Key Trunk Number

(001 – 200)

*02 Loop Key Trunk Group Number

(001 – 100)

*03 Virtual Extension Extension Number or

Key Department Group Number

*04 Park Key Park Number (01 – 64)

*06 Trunk Access for
Networked System

Default
The DSS keys 01-60 of all DSS consoles = DSS/One touch key 100-159.

Conditions
None

778 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-03 : DSS Console Key Assignment

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 30-03 (DSS Console Key Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 30 03
30-03-01 DSS1
KY01 = 01
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
30-03-nn DSSnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 779

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment
30-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 32-04 : Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment to identify the alternate
DSS console extension use when in off-duty mode (by pressing ALT key on the DSS console).

Input Data
DSS Console Number 01-32

Alternate DSS Number Default

0-32 (0 = Not Specified) 0

Conditions
24-button DSS consoles cannot be daisy-chained.

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 30-04 (Alternate DSS Console Extension Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 30 04
30-04-01 DSS1
TRANSFER DSS NO 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
30-04-nn DSSnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

780 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 32-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table to idefines the LED patterns for functions on
each DSS console.

Input Data
Item No. Item Lamp Pattern Data Default

01 Idle Extension 0-7 0 (Off)

02 Busy Extension 0-7 7 (On)

03 DND Extension 0-7 3 (RW)

04 ACD Agent Busy 0-7 7 (On)

05 Out of Schedule (ACD DSS) 0-7 0 (Off)

06 ACD Agent Log Out (ACD DSS) 0-7 5 (IL)

07 ACD Agent Log In (ACD DSS) 0-7 4 (IR)

08 ACD Agent Emergency (ACD DSS) 0-7 6 (IW)

09 Hotel Status Code 1 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 7 (On)

10 Hotel Status Code 2 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 1 (FL)

11 Hotel Status Code 3 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 2 (WK)

12 Hotel Status Code 4 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 3 (RW)

13 Hotel Status Code 5 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 5 (IL)

14 Hotel Status Code 6 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 3 (RW)

15 Hotel Status Code 7 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 6 (IW)

16 Hotel Status Code 8 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 4 (IR)

17 Hotel Status Code 9 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 3 (RW)

18 Hotel Status Code 0 (Hotel DSS) 0-7 0 (Off)

19 Hotel Status Code * (Hotel DSS) 0-7 4 (IR)

20 Hotel Status Code # (Hotel DSS) 0-7 5 (IL)

21 - Not Used -

50

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 781

Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table

Conditions
24-button DSS consoles cannot be daisy-chained.

782 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 30 : DSS/DLS Console Setup
30-05 : DSS Console Lamp Table

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 30-02 (DSS Console Extension Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 30 02
30-02-01 DSS1
Ext.Number
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
30-02-nn DSSnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the DSS number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 783

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging
Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging to define the system options
for Internal/External Paging.

The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character,
twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key “2” three times. Press the
key six times display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-p, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
8 Enter characters T-V, q-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.

784 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex:
STA). Pressing # again = Space.
CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description Related
No. Program

01 All Call Paging Zone Up to 12 Assign a name to each All Call Internal 11-12-19
Name Characters Paging zone. The system shows the names 31-02-02
you program on the telephone displays.

02 Page Announcement 0-64800 (Sec.) 1200 This timer sets the maximum length of
Duration Page announcements.

03 Paging answer wait- 0-64800 (Sec.) 90 Paging answering operation will become
ing timer invalid if the time set up here passes.

04 Privacy Release 0-64800 (Sec.) 90 Once the user initiates a Meet Me Confer-
Time ence or Voice Call Conference, the system
waits this interval for the Paged party to
join the call.

Default
Item 01 : Internal All Call Paging Name - “All Group”

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 785

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-01 : System Options for Internal/External Paging

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-01 (System Options for Internal/External Paging):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 01
31-01-01
All_PG_Name=ALL GROUP
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

786 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment to assign extensions to Internal Paging
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The setting in this program also determines if the Internal Page Group
can receive Internal All Call Paging. The system can have up to 64 paging groups. An extension
can be in only one Internal Paging Group.

Input Data
Extension Number Max. 8 digits

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Internal Paging Group Number 0-64 0

Assign extensions to Internal Paging (0: no setting)
Groups (i.e., Page Zones). The system
allows up to 64 Internal Paging Groups.
An extension can be in only one Inter-
nal Paging Group.

02 Internal All Call Paging Receiving 0- off 0

Allow or prevent All Call Internal Pag- 1- on
ing for each extension. If allowed,
extension can place and receive All Call
Internal Paging announcements. If pre-
vented, extension can only make (not
receive) All Call Internal Paging
announcements.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, Internal

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 787

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-02 : Internal Paging Group Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-02 (Internal Paging Group Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 02
31-02-01 TEL200
INT_PG_GP_No. 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

788 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings to assign names to Internal Paging Groups
(i.e., Page Zones) and to define the splash tone for Internal Paging.

The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. Use the following chart when
entering and editing text. When using the keypad digits, press the key once for the first character,
twice for the second character, etc. For example, to enter a C, press key “2” three times. Press the
key six times display the lower case letter.

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .
1 Enter characters:
1 @ [ ¥ ] ^ _ ‘ { | } ¬ ®
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
2 Enter characters A-C, a-c, 2. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
3 Enter characters D-F, a-f, 3. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
4 Enter characters G-I, g-i, 4. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
5 Enter characters J-L, j-l, 5. After selecting your entry, press the next letter or
use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
6 Enter characters M-O, m-o, 6. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
7 Enter characters P-S, p-p, 7. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
8 Enter characters T-V, q-v, 8. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
9 Enter characters W-Z, w-z, 9. After selecting your entry, press the next letter
or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
0 Enter characters:
0 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( )
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
* Enter characters:
* + , - . / : ; < = > ?
Press repeatedly to scroll through the list. After selecting your entry, press the
next letter or use the left scroll or right scroll Soft Key to move the cursor.
# # = Accepts an entry (only required if two letters on the same key are needed - ex:
STA). Pressing # again = Space.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 789

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings

Key for Entering Names

Use this keypad digit . . . When you want to. . .

CONF Clear the character entry one character at a time.
FLASH Clear all the entries from the point of the flashing cursor and to the right.

Input data
Internal Paging Group Number 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Internal Paging Up to 12 Characters Assign names to Internal Paging Groups (i.e.,

Group Name Page Zones). The system shows the names
you program on the telephone displays.

02 Internal Paging 0- Ordinary volume 0 Allow an extension to have normal (0),

Splash Tone 1- Mute muted (1) or no (2) Internal Paging alert
2- No tone beeps before a Paging announcement.

Default
Item 01 : Internal Paging Group Name
Extension Paging
Group Name

01 Group 1

02 Group 2

: :

64 Group 64

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, Internal

790 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-03 : Internal Paging Group Settings

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-03 (Internal Paging Group Settings):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 10 03
10-03-01 Paging 1
PG_GP_Name =GROUP 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
10-03-nn Paging nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Internal Paging Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 791

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-04 : External Paging Zone Group to assign each External Paging zone to an
External Paging group. Users call the External Paging group when broadcasting announcements to
the external zone. When programming, the zones on the PGD adapter are numbers 1-8. The
NTCPU’s zone is number 9.

To simplify programming and troubleshooting, always make the External Paging Zone Group
the same number as the External Paging zone (i.e., 1 = 1, 2 = 2, etc.).

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1-9

Paging Group Number Default

0-8 (0: no setting) Speaker 1 (PGDAD) : 1 (Group 1)

Speaker 2 (PGDAD) : 2 (Group 2)
Speaker 3 (PGDAD) : 3 (Group 3)
Speaker 4 (PGDAD) : 4 (Group 4)
Speaker 5 (PGDAD) : 5 (Group 5)
Speaker 6 (PGDAD) : 6 (Group 6)
Speaker 7 (PGDAD) : 7 (Group 7)
Speaker 8 (PGDAD) : 8 (Group 8)
Speaker 9 (NTCPU) : 1 (Group 1)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External

792 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-04 : External Paging Zone Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-04 (External Paging Zone Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 04
31-04-01 SPK 1
Paging_Zone_GP1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-04-nn SPK n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 793

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer
31-05 : Universal Night Answer

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-05 : Universal Night Answer to assign Universal Night Answer ringing to each
External Paging zone. For each trunk port (1-200), you make a separate entry for each External
Paging zone (1-9). When programming, the zones on the PGD adapter are numbers 1-8. The
NTCPU’s zone is number 9. For UNA ringing, you make a separate entry for each Night Service
mode.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

External Speaker Number 1-9

Day/Night Mode Input data Default

1-8 0- No Ringing 0
1- Ringing

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Night Service
• Paging, External

794 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-05 : Universal Night Answer

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-05 (Universal Night Answer):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 05
31-05-01 Trunk1
SPK 1Mod1 =0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-05-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 795

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control
31-06 : External Speaker Control

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-06 : External Speaker Control to define the settings for the external speaker
using an amplifier.

Input Data

External Speaker Number 1-9

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Broadcast Splash Tone Before 0- No tone 2

Paging 1- Splash tone
Use this option to enabled or 2- Chime tone
disable splash tone before Pag-
ing over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a
splash tone before the External
Paging announcement.

02 Broadcast Splash Tone After 0- No tone 2

Paging 1- Splash tone
Use this option to enabled or 2- Chime tone
disable splash tone after Paging
over an external zone. If
enabled, the system broadcasts a
splash tone at the end of an
External Paging announcement.
03 Speech path 0- Both way 1
1- One way (PGD -> SPK)

04 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1-63 32

(-15.5 …+15.5dB)

05 CODEC Transmit Gain Setup 1-63 32

(-15.5 …+15.5dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External

796 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-06 : External Speaker Control

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-06 (External Speaker Control):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 06
31-06-01 SPK 1
PG_Start_Tone 2:Chime
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-06-nn SPK n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 797

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments to assign an External Paging Zone (0-8) to
an Internal Paging Zone (0-64) for Combined Paging. When an extension user makes a Combined
Page, they simultaneously broadcast into both the External and Internal Zone.

Input Data
External Paging Group Number 0-8 (0: All external paging)

Internal paging group Number Default

0-64 1
(0: All internal paging)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Paging, External
• Paging, Internal

798 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-07 : Combined Paging Assignments

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-07 (Combined Paging Assignments):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 07
31-07-01 PG Group 1
Internal_PG-GP_No. 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-07-nn PG Group n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Page Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 799

Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging
31-08 : BGM on External Paging

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 31-08 : BGM on External Paging to set the Background Music option for each
External Paging zone. If enabled, the system will play Background Music over the zone when it is
idle.

When programming, the zones on the PGD adapter are numbers 1-8. The NTCPU’s zone is number
9.

Input Data
External Speaker Number 1-9

Input Data Description Default

0- Disable Use this option to allow or 0

1- Enable prevent the External Paging
zone you select from broad-
casting Background Music
when it is idle.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Background Music
• Paging, External

800 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 31 : Trunk Basic Setup
31-08 : BGM on External Paging

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 31-08 (BGM on External Paging):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 31 08
31-08-01 SPK 1
BGM 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
31-08-nn SPK n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the External Speaker number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 801

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers
Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 32-01 : Door Box Timers to assign the timers used for the Door Box.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Door Box Answer Time 0-64800 30

A keyset user must answer Door Box chimes
within this interval.

02 Door Lock Cancel Time 0-64800 10

When a single line (2500 type) telephone user
hook flashes or a keyset user presses the FLASH
key while talking to a Door Box, the strike stays
open for this interval.

03 Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box Dis- 0-64800 60

connect Timer
Define the conversation period for an
Off-Premise Call Forward by Door Box call.
When this timer expires, the caller will hear busy
tone for 3 seconds (fixed timer) and the call will
then be disconnected.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

802 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-01 : Door Box Timers

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 32-01 (Door Box Timers):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 32 01
32-01-01
DH_Ans. Time 30 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
32-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 803

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignments to assign the extension which will ring when a
caller presses the associated Door Box’s call button.

Input Data
Door Box Number 1-8

Day/Night Mode 1-8

Door Box Ring Group Number Extension Number Default

01-32 Max. 8 digits No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

804 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-02 : Door Box Ring Assignment

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 32-02 (Door Box Ring Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 32 02
32-02-01 DOOR 1
Mode1 TEL 01=
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
32-02-nn DOOR n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Door Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 805

Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup to select the chime pattern and gain level for each
Door Box. There are six distinctive chime patterns. The chime tones are defined in Program 80-01.

Input Data
Door Box Number 1-8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Chime Pattern 0- No ringing tone Door Box 1- 1

1- Door Box ring 1 Door Box 2- 2
2- Door Box ring 2 Door Box 3- 3
3- Door Box ring 3 Door Box 4- 4
4- Door Box ring 4 Door Box 5- 5
5- Door Box ring 5 Door Box 6- 6
6- Door Box ring 6 Door Box 7- 1
Door Box 8- 1

02 CODEC Transmit Gain 1-63: (-15.5 …+15.5dB) 32

Setup
(PGD to Door Box)

03 CODEC Receive Gain 1-63: (-15.5 …+15.5dB) 32

Setup
(Door Box to PGD)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Door Box

806 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 32 : Door Box and Sensor Setup
32-03 : Door Box Basic Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 32-03 (Door Box Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 32 03
32-03-01 DOOR 1
Chime_Pattern 1:Ring1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
32-03-nn DOOR n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Door Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 807

Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup
Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup to set the function of each software port on an Ana-
logue Communications Interface. Each ACI software port can have only one function (input, output
or none).

Input Data
ACI Port Number 01-96

ACI Type. Default

0- No Setting 2
1- Input
2- Input/Output

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

808 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup
33-01 : ACI Port Type Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 33-01 (ACI Port Type Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 33 01
33-01-01 ACI Port1
ACI_Type 2:In/Out
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
33-01-nn ACI Portnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 809

Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group to assign ACI ports (1-192) to Depart-
ment Groups. There are 16 ACI Department Groups. An ACI port can only be in one group.

Also use this program to set the ACI port’s priority. When a call comes into the ACI Department
Group, it connects to the ACI port in order of their priority. A higher priority port (e.g., 1) receives
calls before a lower priority port (e.g., 6).

Input Data
ACI Port Number 01-96

Group Number Priority

1-16 1-96

Default
ACI Port Group Order

01 1 1

02 1 1

: : :

96 1 96

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Analogue Communications Interface (ACI)

810 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 33 : DCI and ACI Setup
33-02 : ACI Department Calling Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 33-02 (ACI Department Calling Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 33 02
33-02-01 ACI Port1
ACI_Group 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
33-02-nn ACI Portnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACI port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 811

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup
Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup to defines the basic settings for each E&M tie
line.

Input Data

Trunk port number 1-200

Item Related
No. Item Input Data Default Description Program

01 DID/E&M Start Signaling 0- 2nd dial tone 1 Set the start signaling mode for 22-02
1- Wink DID and tie trunks. DID and tie
2- Immediate trunks can use either immediate
3- Delay start or wink start signaling.

02 DID/E&M Incoming Sig- 0- Dial Pulse 0 For DID and tie trunks, use this 10-09
naling Type 1- PB (DTMF) option to set the trunk’s signal-
ing type (Dial Pulse or DTMF)
03 E&M Dial-In Mode 0- Extension num- 0 22-11
ber specify
1- Use conver-
sion table

04 E&M Line Dial tone 0- Disable 1

1- Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

812 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-01 : E&M Tie Line Basic Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-01 (E&M Tie Line Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 01
34-01-01 Trk Port 1
Signal_Type 1:Wink
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-01-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 813

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service to assign a Class of Service to a tie line
(there are 15 tie line Classes of Service). The Class of Service options are defined in Program
20-14. For each tie line, you make a separate entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk port number 1-200

Day/Night Mode Class Default Related Program

1-8 1-15 1 20-14

Conditions
You cannot use Program 20-06 to assign Class of Service to tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

814 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-02 : E&M Tie Line Class of Service

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-02 (E&M Tie Line Class of Service):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 02
34-02-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Class_No. 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-02-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 815

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines to assign the trunk group route
1-100) chosen when a user seizes a tie line and dials 9. (Set Trunk Group Routing in Program
14-07.) If the system has Automatic Route Selection, dialing 9 accesses ARS. You make a separate
entry for each tie line - for each Night Service Mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode Route table number Default

1-8 0-100 1
(0- setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

816 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-03 : Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-03 (Trunk Group Routing for E&M Tie Lines):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 03
34-03-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 Route_Table1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-03-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 817

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class to enter a Toll Restriction Class for
each tie line. There are 15 Toll Restriction Classes which are defined in Programs 21-05 and 21-06.
For each tie line, you make a separate Toll Restriction Class entry for each Night Service mode.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode Toll Restriction Class Default Related Program

1-8 1-15 2 21-05

14-01-08

Conditions
You cannot use Program 20-06 to assign Toll Restriction to tie lines.

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

818 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-04 : E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-04 (E&M Tie Line Toll Restriction Class):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 04
34-04-01 Trk Port 1
Mode1 T/R_Class_No.2
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-04-nn Trk Port nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 819

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction to build a restriction matrix for outgo-
ing trunk calls placed from an inbound trunk (e.g., dialed from a tie line). For each inbound trunk
group, enable or disable access to each CO trunk group.

Input Data
Incoming trunk group Number 001-100

Outgoing trunk group Number Input Data

1-100 0- Enable
1- Disable

Default
Incoming Trunk Groups
Outgoing Trunk
Groups
1 2 3 4 ----- 97 98 99 100

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1

2 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

4 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

:
:
:

97 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

98 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

99 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Conditions
None

820 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-05 : Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-05 (Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 05
34-05-01 INC Group 1
O.T.G. 001 1:No-Tande
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Incoming Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 821

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line
34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line to set digits that the system should
add or delete for tie lines.

• Delete Digit
Some tie line networks pass the location number and extension number to the remote side.
This program allows the system to ignore such numbers for a call.

If individual extensions do not want to receive an incoming call, you could delete all of the
digits including the extension number.

• Add Digit
If a tie line network requires additional digits to reroute the call to a location, the digits for the
location can be added to the received digits.

Input Data
Incoming trunk group Number 001-100

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Delete Digit 0-255 (255 : delete all digits) 0

02 Additional Dial Digits Up to 4 digits No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

822 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-06 : Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-06 (Add / Delete Digit for E&M Tie Line):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 06
34-06-01 INC Group 1
Delete_Digit 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-06-nn INC Group nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Incoming Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 823

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer to define the system service tone timers.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 ODT/SRT Mark method 0-64800 3

02 ODT/SRT Wink start method 0-64800 0

03 1st digit Pause (LDT) 0-64800 3

04 Leased Line Guard (LDT) 0-64800 0

05 Trunk answer detect timer for E&M / E1 0-64800 30

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

824 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-07 : E&M Tie Line Timer

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-07 (E&M Tie Line Timer):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 07
34-07-01
1st Digit_M/O 3 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 825

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-08 : Toll Restirction Data for E&M Tie Lines to define the toll restriction data
for E&M tie lines. This data should be defined if Toll Tie Line Restriction is enabled in Program
21-05-13.

Input Data
Class of Service 01-15

Table No. Dial Data Default Related Program

01-20 Up to 10 digits No setting 21-05-13

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

826 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-08 : Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-08 (Toll Restriction Data for E&M Tie Lines):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 08
34-08-01 Deny TBL1
Dial_Data 01
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-08-nn Deny TBLnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Deny Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 827

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options to define theANI//DNIS service option setup
for E&M Class of Service.

Input Data
Class of Service 01-15

Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 01-14 COS 15

01 Receive Format 0 = Adress 0 0 34-09-02

Use this option to specify the format of the 1 = *ANI*
ANI/DNIS data reeceived from the telco. 2 = *DNIS*
Make sure your entry is compatible with the 3=
service the telco provides. (The character * *ANI*Address*
indicates a deliminter.) 4 = *ANI*DNIS*
5 = *DNIS*ANI*
(* = Delimiter
Code)

02 Delimiter Dial Code 1-9, 0, *, # * * 34-09-01

This option defines the character telco uses
as a delimiter (see entries 1-9 in Item 1
above). Valid entries are 0-9, #, and *.

03 Route Setup of Receive Dial 0 = Fixed Route 0 0 34-09-04

This option specifies the source of the data (Item 08) 34-09-08
the system uses to route incoming ANI/ 1 = Routes on
DNIS calls. Received DNIS or
Address Data
2 = Routes on
Received ANI
Data

04 Route Table Setup of Target Dial 0 = ABB Table 0 0 13-04

The option sets how the system uses the (Program 13-03) 22-11
route data (gather in Item 3) to route incom- 1 = DID Table 34-09-05
ing ANI/DNIS calls). (Program 22-11)

05 ANI/DNIS Display as Target Dial Name 0 = Display Off 1 0 13-04

Use this option to set if ANI data should 1 = Display On 20-09-02
appear on telephone displays as part of 22-11-03
Caller ID display. 23-09-04

828 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options

Default
Item Related
Name Input Data
No. Program
COS 01-14 COS 15

06 Routing ABB Table Setup Start = 0, Start = 1000 Start = 0 13-04

Use this option to define which part of the 100-1900 End = 1199 End = 0
ABB Table set up in Program 13-04 the sys- End = 0, 99-1999
tem will use for ANI/DNIS Caller ID
look-ups and ANI/DNIS routing.
This is required if Items 4 and 5 above are 1
(Caller ID on). When you specify a starting
and end address, the system uses the part of
the table for look-ups.
When you specify a starting address and
length, the system uses that part of the table
for routing. If the incoming ANI/DNIS num-
ber data matches the Number entry in the
table, the system routes according to the
associated Name data. That data can be an
extension, Department Group pilot number,
the voice mail master number or a trunk ring
group.
07 Routing on ANI/DNIS Error 0 = Play busy tone 1 0 25-03
This option lets you determine how the sys- to caller
tem will handle an ANI/DNIS call if a data 1 = Route the
error is detected in the incoming data string. caller to the ring
group specified in
Program 25-03

08 Routing When Destination Busy or No 0 = Play busy or 0 0 25-04

Answer ringback tone to
This option lets you determine how the sys- caller
tem will handle an ANI/DNIS call if destina- 1 = Route the
tion is busy or does not answer. caller to the ring
group specified in
Program 25-04
09 Calling Number Address Length 1-8 7 7 34-09-01
When Item 1=0 (ANI/DNIS receive format
is address), use this option to specify the
address length. The choises are from 1 to 8
digits in length.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 829

Program 34 : Tie Line Setup
34-09 : ANI/DNIS Service Options

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 34-09 (ANI/DNIS Service Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 34 09
34-09-01 FCTN Cls1
Format 0:Address
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
34-09-nn FCTN Cls1
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

830 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options
Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-01 : SMDR Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
options for each of the 8 SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of each option,
its range and default setting.

Input Data
SMDR Port Number 1-8

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0- No setting 0

This option specifies the type of connection 1- COM(NTCPU)
used for SMDR. The baud rate for the COM 2- USB (NTCPU)
port should be set in Program 10-21-02. 3- -- Reserve –
4- CTA/CTU

02 Output Destination Number Up to 8 digit No setting

This option specifies the SMDR printer output
port (CTA/CTU port number).

03 Header Language English 0

Specify the language in which the SMDR German
header should be printed. French
Italian
Spanish

04 Omit Digits 0-24 (0: Not applied) 0

The number of digits entered in this option do
not print on the SMDR report. For example, if
the entry is 10, the first 10 digits a user dials do
not appear on the SMDR report.
05 Min. Digits 0-24 (0: Not applied) 0
Outgoing calls must be at least this number of
digits for inclusion in the SMDR report.

06 Min. Call Duration 0-65535 seconds 0

The duration of a call must be at least this (0: All)
interval to be included on the SMDR report.
07 Min. Ring Time 0-65535 seconds 0
A call must ring for at least this interval to be (0: All)
included on the SMDR report.

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 831

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-01 : SMDR Options

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-01 (SMDR Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 01
35-01-01 SMDR Port1
Output_Type 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-01-nn SMDR Portn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the SMDR port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

832 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options
35-02 : SMDR Output Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-02 : SMDR Output Options to set the SMDR (Station Message Detail Record-
ing) output options for each of the 8 SMDR ports. Refer to the following chart for a description of
each option, its range and default setting.

Input Data
SMDR Port Number 1-8

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Toll Restricted Call 0=Not Displayed 1

SMDR can include or exclude calls blocked 1=Displayed
by Toll Restriction.
02 PBX Calls 0=Not Displayed 1
When the system is behind a PBX, SMDR can 1=Displayed
include all calls or just calls dialed using the
PBX trunk access code.

03 Trunk Number or Name 0=Name 1

Select whether the system should display the 1=Number
trunk name (0) or the number (1) on SMDR
reports. If this option is set to “1”, Program
35-02-14 must be set to “0”.

04 Summary (Daily) 0=Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1=Displayed
provide a daily summary (at midnight every
night).

05 Summary (Weekly) 0=Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1=Displayed
provide a weekly summary (every Saturday at
midnight).

06 Summary (Monthly) 0=Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) to have the SMDR report 1=Displayed
provide a monthly summary (at midnight on
the last day of the month).

07 Toll Charge Cost 0=Not Displayed 1

Set this option to (1) have the SMDR report 1=Displayed
include toll charges.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 833

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

08 Incoming Call 0=Not Displayed 1

Enable this option (1) to have the SMDR 1=Displayed
report include incoming calls. If you disable
this option (0), incoming calls will not print.

09 Extension Number or Name 0=Name 1

Set this option (1) to have the SMDR report 1=Number
include extension numbers. Set this option (0)
to have the SMDR report include extension
names.

10 ALB Output 0=Not Displayed 0

1=Displayed
11 Walking Toll Restriction Table Number 0=Not Displayed 1
1=Displayed

12 DID Table Name Output 0=Not Displayed 0

1=Displayed

13 CLI Output When DID to Trunk 0=Not Displayed

1=Displayed
14 Date 0=Not Displayed 0
Determine whether the date should be dis- 1=Displayed
played on SMDR reports. This option must be
set to “0” if the trunk name is set to be dis-
played in Program 35-02-03.

15 CLI / DID Number Switching 0=CLI 0

1=DID calling number
16 Trunk Name or Received Dialed Number 0=Trunk port name 0
Determine how the SMDR should print 1=Received dialed
incoming calls on ANI/DNIS or DID trunks. If number
set to (1), ANI/DNIS trunks can print DNIS
digits. If set to (0) trunk names are printed
instead.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

834 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-02 : SMDR Output Options

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-02 (SMDR Output Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 02
35-02-01 SMDR Port1
T/R Call 1:Display
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-02-nn SMDR Portn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the SMDR port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 835

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group to assign the SMDR port for
each trunk group.

Input Data
Trunk Group Number 1-100

SMDR Port No Default

1-8 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording
• Trunk Group Routing

836 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-03 : SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-03 (SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 03
35-03-01 TRK Group 1
SMDR Port 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-03-nn TRK Group nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Trunk Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 837

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups
35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-04 : SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups to assign the SMDR
port for each Department Group.

Input Data
Department Group Number 01-64

SMDR Port No Default

1-8 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-04 (SMDR Port Assignment for Department Groups):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 04
35-04-01 Extn Group1
SMDR Port 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-04-nn Extn Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Extension Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

838 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-01 : Account Code Setup to set various Account Code options for an extension’s
Class of Service. Assign a Class of Service to extensions in Program 20-06.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Account Code Mode 0- Account Codes disabled 0

Use this option to select the 1- Account Codes optional
Account Code Mode (0-3). 2- Account Codes required but not verified
3- Account Codes required and verified

02 Forced Account Code Toll 0- Account Codes for toll and local calls 0
Call Setup 1- Account Codes just for toll calls
Use this option enable
Account Codes for all calls or
just toll calls (for mode 2 or 3
in Item 01 above).
03 Account Codes for Incom- 0- Account Codes for incoming calls disabled 0
ing Calls 1- Account Codes for incoming calls enabled
Use this option to allow users
to enter Account Codes for
incoming calls. If disabled,
any codes entered dial out on
the connected trunk.

04 Hiding Account Codes 0- Account Codes displayed 0

Use this option to either hide 1- Account Codes hidden
or show the Account codes on
a telephone’s display.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Account Codes

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 839

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-05 : Account Code Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-05 (Account Code Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 05
35-05-01 FCTN Cls1
Account_Code 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-05-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

840 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 35-06 : Verified Account Code Table to enter Account Codes into the Verified
Account Code list. You can enter up to 2000 codes from 3-16 digits long, using the characters 0-9
or #. Use the FLASH key to enter a wild card. For example, the entry FLASH234 means the user
can enter 0234-9234.

Input Data
Verified Account Code Bin Number 1-2000

Verified Account Code Default

1-9, 0, #, @ (@ = Wild card) No setting

(Up to 16 digits)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Account Codes

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 841

Program 35 : SMDR and Account Code Setup
35-06 : Verified Account Code Table

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 35-06 (Verified Account Code Table):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 35 06
35-06-01 Table1
Verified_A-Code
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
35-06-nn Tablennnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Verified Account Code Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

842 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup
Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup to define the basic operation of Voice Mail
(DSPDB).

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 Exclusive Channel for Voice Mail 0-16 0 Specify the number of channels of
DSPDB which voice mail occupies.
02 Time Stamp 0- Disable 1
1- Enable

03 Conversation Recording Mode for 0- Not Continued 1 Use this program to set up whether after
After Transfer 1- Continue Hold Transfer continues recording,
when recording conversation.

04 Automated Attendant (Voice Mail) 0- Disable 1

for No Existing Extension 1- Enable

05 Maintenance Time 0000 - 2359 0000 Specify time to maintain for DSPDB
(0000 = no setting) record media.
06 Automatically Erase Message 0-180 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 843

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-01 : Voice Mail Basic Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-01 (Voice Mail Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 01
40-01-01
VM_Channel 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

844 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-02 : Mailbox Setup
40-02 : Mailbox Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-02 : Mailbox Setup to define the mailbox of the Voice Mail (DSPDB).

There are a maximum of 300 mailboxes in the DSPDB. Use this program to set the box number and
password linked to the extension number (or pilot number) for each mailbox.

Input Data
DSPDB Message Box Number 01-300

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.

01 Mailbox Number Dial (Up to 8 digits) No set- A mailbox number should use the same
ting number of an extension.
02 Mailbox Password Dial (4 digits) No set- If not required, leave this option empty.
ting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 845

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-02 : Mailbox Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-02 (Mailbox Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 02
40-02-01 Message Box1
Mail_Box_No.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-02-nn Message Boxnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Message Box number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

846 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-03 : Message Recording Setup
40-03 : Message Recording Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-03 : Message Recording Setup to define the auto-answering operation of the
Voice Mail (DSPDB).

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Voice Mail Recording Time 1 to 10 minutes 1

02 A guidance message in case record- 0 – Fixed Guidance Message 0

ing is not allowed. 1 – Answer Message of Mailbox

03 A response message is automatically 0 - Disable 0

sent out when busy. 1 - Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 847

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-03 : Message Recording Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-03 (Message Recording Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 03
40-03-01
Recording_Time1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

848 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-04 : Live Recording Setup
40-04 : Live Recording Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-04 : Live Recording Setup to define the conversation recording operation of the
Voice Mail (DSPDB).

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 The operation mode when des- 0 – Temporary Mailbox 1

tination is not defined 1 – Callback operation

02 Temporary Mailbox Number 0 - 300 0 Set up the temporary mailbox

number.

03 Live Recording Display 0 - Enable 1 Enables or disables the sys-

1 - Disablee tem’s ability to display the
recording feature active

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 849

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-04 : Live Recording Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-04 (Live Recording Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 04
40-04-01
After_Rec.Mode 1:CallBk
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

850 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-05 : Call Information Setup
40-05 : Call Information Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-05 : Call Information Setup to define the incoming notice of the Voice Mail
(DSPDB).

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Maximum number of outgoing call simultaneously 0 - 16 1

02 Trunk Route Number 0 - 100 1

03 ISDN Calling Party Number 1-0, *, # (max. 6 digits) No setting

04 Call interval for intercom call 1 - 30 minutes 10

05 Call interval for external call 1 - 30 minutes 10

06 Maximum number of intercom call 1 - 100 3

07 Maximum number of external call 1 - 100 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 851

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-05 : Call Information Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-05 (Call Information Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 05
40-05-01
Max.OTG Call 1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

852 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup to define the outside lines to
use the automated attendant recording operation of the Voice Mail (DSPDB).

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 1-200

Day/Night Mode 1-8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Operation Mode 0 – Automated Attendant 0

1 – Not Used
02 Guidance Message Number 0 – 48 0

03 Message Box Number For Leaving a 0 – 300 0

Message

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 853

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-06 : Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-06 (Voice Mail Automated Attendant Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 06
40-06-01 Trunk1
Mode1 OPR-Mode 0:AA
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-06-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

854 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail to specify the lan-
guage to be used for the voice mail.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 0 – Japanese 1

for Voice Mail 1 – English
Although the system allows this option to 2 - German
be changed in programming, the lan- 3 - Portuguese
guage will only change if the DSPDB has 4 - Netherlands
the firmware which provides the newly 5 - British
selected language. 6 - Chinese
7 - Not Used
8 - Not Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 855

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-07 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Voice Mail

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-07 (Voice Prompt Language Assignment for System):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 07
40-07-01
SYS_Lang :Japanese |1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

856 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes to select the language
to be used for the mailboxes.

Input Data

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Voice Prompt Language Assignment 0 – Japanese 1

for Mailboxes 1 – English
Although the system allows this option to 2 - German
be changed in programming, the lan- 3 - Portuguese
guage will only change if the DSPDB has 4 - Netherlands
the firmware which provides the newly 5 - British
selected language. 6 - Chinese
7 - Not Used
8 - Not Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 857

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-08 : Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-08 (Voice Prompt Language Assignment for Mailboxes):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 08
40-08-01
MAIL_Lang : Japanese |1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

858 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup
40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 40-09 : Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup to define the broadcast group
of a Voice Mail (DSPDB) mailbox.

Input Data
Multiple Address Group Number 1-10

Destination Box Number Box number Default

1-100 Dial (Up to 8 digits) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-09 (Voice Mail Multiple Address Group Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 09
40-09-01 GP-Page GP 1
Destin001 BoxNo.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-09-nn GP-Page GP nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 859

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
In Program 40-10 : Voice Announcement Serv ice Option define the system options for the
Voice Announcement feature.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 VRS Fixed Message 0 = Not Used 1

Enable (1) or disable (0) the system’s ability to play the fixed 1 = Used
VRS messages (such as “You have a message.”).

02 General Message Number 0-48 (0=No General 0

This item assigns the VAU message number to be used as the Message Service)
General Message.

03 VRS No Answer Destination 0-100 (Incoming Ring 0 (No Setting)

This item assigns the transferred Ring Group when the VRS is Group Number)
unanswered after Call Forwarding with Personal Greeting
Message.

04 VRS No Answer Time 0-64800 0

If an extension has Personal Greeting enabled and all VRS
ports are busy, a DIL or DISA call to the extension will wait
this interval for a VRS port to become free.

05 Park and Page Repeat Timer 0-64800 0

If a Park and Page is not picked up within this interval, the
Paging announcement repeats.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Response System (VRS)

860 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-10 : Voice Announcement Service Option

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-10 (Voice Announcement Service Option):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 10
40-10-01
VAU Fixed Msg 1:Use
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-10-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 861

Program 40 : Voice Mail Setup
40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment
40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
In Program 40-11 : Pre-Amble Message Assignment to assign the VAU message number to be
used as the Pre-amble Message for each trunk. When the extension user answers the incoming call,
the assigned VAU message will be sent to the outside caller.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

Day/Night Mode VAU Message Number Default

1-8 0-48 (0=No Service) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Response System (VRS)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 40-11 (Pre-Amble Message Assignment):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 40 11
40-11-01 Trunk1
Mode1 Preamble MSG 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
40-11-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

862 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for ACD
Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-01 : System Options for ACD

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
In Program 41-01 : System Options for ACD define the system options for the ACD feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default Description
01 System Supervisory Extension Up to 8 digits No setting
02 Login ID Code Digit 0-20 0 Define the digit of Login ID.
(0 : No Login ID)
03 ACD MIS Connection Ports 0- No setting 0
1- -- Reserve --
2- -- Reserve --
3- LAN (NTCPU)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-01 (System Options for ACD):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 10
41-01-01
Supervisor_Ext
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 863

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
In Program 41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments, for each ACD extension number, assign
an ACD Group (1-64). An ACD Group number is assigned to each Work Period number (1-8).

The assigned extension will work as an ACD agent extension in the following cases;
• The trunk belonging to an ACD group receives an incoming call while an ACD agent is
logged in.
• An extension calls or transfers a call to an ACD group using the ACD group pilot number.
• An incoming call is received with a DID/DISA number which is assigned as an ACD pilot
number.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

ACD Work Period Mode

Number ACD Group No Default

1-8 0-64 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

864 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-02 : ACD Group and Agent Assignments

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-02 (ACD Group and Agent Assignments):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 02
41-02-01 TEL301
Mode1 Group 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 865

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
In Program 41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignments for ACD Group, for each incoming
trunk group set up in Program 14-05, designate into which ACD Group (1-64) the trunks should
ring for each of the eight Work Periods. Also use this program to assign an Incoming Trunk Ring
Group as priority or normal. Use Program 41-05 and 41-06 to set up the Work Schedules and Work
Periods for trunks. Use Program 41-07 to assign the Work Schedules to the days of the week.

Input Data
Incoming Ring Group Number 1-100

ACD Work Period Mode Number 1-8

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ACD Group Number 0-64 0

02 Night Announcement Service 0- No 0

1- Yes

03 Priority Data 0, 1-7 0

(0 = No priority)
(1 = Highest priority)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• Ring Groups

866 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-03 : Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-03 (Incoming Ring Group Assignment for ACD Group):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 03
41-03-01 INC Group1
Mode1 Group 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-03-nn INC Groupnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Incoming Ring Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 867

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
For each ACD Group (1-64), use Program 41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor to assign the group’s
supervisor extension port and operating mode. Operating modes are:
• 0 = Supervisor’s extension does not receive ACD Group calls.
• 1 = Supervisor’s extension receives ACD Group overflow calls only.
• 2 = Supervisor’s extension receives ACD Group calls just like all other agents.

An ACD Group can have only one supervisor. In addition, an extension can be a supervisor for
only one ACD Group.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Group Supervisor Extension Extension Number (Up to 8 digits) No setting

02 Operation Type 0- Not receive any ACD incoming calls 0

1- Receive ACD incoming calls in case of
overflow
2- Receive ACD incoming calls all the time

Conditions
If you assign an extension as a ACD Group Supervisor in this program, you cannot program the
same extension as a System Supervisor in Program 41-01-01.

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

868 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-04 : ACD Group Supervisor

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-04 (ACD Group Supervisor):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 04
41-04-01 ACD Group1
GP_Supervisor
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-04-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 869

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for ACD
Agents and Groups. For each ACD Work Schedule (1-4), designate the start and stop times for each
of the eight Work Periods. Once you set up the schedules in this program, assign them to days of
the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same program used by the Trunk Work Schedules.)

ACD extensions can log in only during their work period. ACD extensions will receive the follow-
ing types of calls when they are logged in;
l ACD Call on a Trunk
If the incoming ring group is assigned in the operating time (Program 41-03 and 41-06).
• ACD Pilot Number Call
Any time if ACD extensions are available.

Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern 1-4

Work Period Mode

Number Start Time End Time Default

1-8 0000-2359 0000-2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

870 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-05 : ACD Agent Work Schedules

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-05 (ACD Agent Work Schedules):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 05
41-05-01 Time Pttn 1
Mode1 Start_Time=00:00
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-05-nn Time Pttn n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 871

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules to set up the Work Schedules for trunks. For each
Work Schedule (1-4), designate the start and stop times for each of the eight Work Periods. Once
you set up the schedules, assign them to days of the week in Program 41-07. (This is the same pro-
gram used by the ACD Agent Work Schedules.)

Input Data
ACD Work Schedule Time Pattern Number 1-4

Work Period Mode Start Time End Time Default

Number

1-8 0000-2359 0000-2359 (Start) 0000

(End) 0000

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

872 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-06 : Trunk Work Schedules

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-06 (Trunk Work Schedules):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 06
41-06-01 Time Pttn 1
Mode1 Start_Time=00:00
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-06-nn Time Pttn n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 873

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup to assign the four Work Schedules (1-4) to
days of the week. The assignments you make in this program apply to both the ACD Agent Work
Schedules (Program 41-05) and the Trunk Work Schedules (Program 41-06).

Input Data
Day Number Time Pattern Default

1 : Sunday 0-4 0
(0 : No ACD)

2 : Monday
3 : Tuesday

4 : Wednesday

5 : Thursday

6 : Friday

7 : Saturday

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

874 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-07 : ACD Weekly Schedule Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-07 (ACD Weekly Schedule Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 07
41-07-01
Sunday =Pattn0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 875

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
For each ACD Group (1-64), use Program 41-08 : ACD Overflow Options to assign the overflow
mode (0-9), destination and announcement message types. Delay announcement functions are not
available for ACD pilot number call. Each ACD Group can have unique overflow options. The
table below outlines the entry options.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Overflow 0- No overflow 0
Operation Mode 1- Overflow with No Announcement
2- No Overflow with First Announcement Only
3- No Overflow with First & Second Announcements
4- Overflow with First Announcement Only
5- Overflow with First & Second Announcement
6- -- Not used --
7- -- Not used --
8- No Overflow with Second Announcement Only
9- Overflow with Second Announcement Only

02 ACD Overflow 0-66 (0 : No setting) 0

Destination 65: Overflow Table (Program 41-09)
66: Voice Mail Integration (In-Skin Voice Mail)

03 Delay 0- ACI 0
Announcement 1- VRS (DSPDB)
Source Type 2- Voice Mail Integration (In-Skin Voice Mail)

04 ACD Overflow 0-64800 (Sec.) 30

Transfer Time

Conditions
Delay announcement functions are not available for ACD pilot number call.

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

876 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-08 : ACD Overflow Options

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-08 (ACD Overflow Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 08
41-08-01 ACD Group1
O-Flow_Mode 0:None |1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-08-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 877

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting to define the ACD group to which a call will
be transferred when overflow occurs.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Priority Order Transfer ACD Group Number With Overflow Default

Number

1-7 0-65 0
(0: No setting, 65: In-Skin Voice Mail Integration)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

878 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-09 : ACD Overflow Table Setting

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-09 (ACD Overflow Table Setting):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 09
41-09-01 ACD Group1
Order1 ACD_Group 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-09-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 879

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-10 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement
41-10 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-10 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement to define the PGDAD
port number to be used for the delay announcement.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as
PGDAD in Program 41-08.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 1st Delay Announcement PGDAD Port Number 0-96 0

(0: No setting)

02 2nd Delay Announcement PGDAD Port Number 0-96 0

(0: No setting)

03 1st Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0-64800 4

04 2nd Delay Announcement Connection Timer 0-64800 60

05 Delay Announcement sending duration 0-64800 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

880 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-10 : PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-10 (PGDAD Port Assignment for Delay Announcement):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 10
41-10-01 ACD Group1
No.1 ACI_Port 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-10-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 881

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-11 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement
41-11 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-11 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement to assign the VRS mes-
sage number to be used as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Delay Announcement Messages.
Turn to Program 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options.

This program is activated when the delay announcement source and options are assigned as VRS in
Program 41-08.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Delay Message Start Time 0-64800 0

02 1st Delay Message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0-255 0

04 2nd Delay Message Number 0-49 0

(0: No message,
49: Fixed message)

05 2nd Waiting Message Sending Count 0-255 0

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0- Ring Back Tone 0

1- MOH Tone
2- BGM Source

07 Disconnect Time After the End of VRS Delay Message 0-64800 60

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

882 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-11 : VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-11 (VRS Message Number for Delay Announcement):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 11
41-11-01 ACD Group1
Delay_Msg_Strt0 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-11-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 883

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-12 : Night Announcement Setup to define the night announce voice resource
and sending time for each ACD group. Night announcement availability depends on the setting in
Program 41-03-02. The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.

Input Data
ACD Group Number 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 Night Announcement Source Type 0- ACI 0

1- VRS (DSPDB)

02 Night Announcement ACI Port Number 0-96 (0: No setting) 0

03 ACD Night Announce Sending Time 0-64800 30

Conditions
The night announcement function is not available for ACD pilot number call.

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

884 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-12 : Night Announcement Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-12 (Night Announcement Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 12
41-12-01 ACD Group1
NT Source 0:ACI
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-12-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 885

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement to define the VRS mes-
sage number to be used as the night announcement. This program is activated when the night
announcement source is assigned as VRS in Program 41-12.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 VRS Message Number 0-48 (0: No message) 0

02 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0- Ring Back Tone 0

1- MOH Tone
2- BGM Source

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

886 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-13 : VRS Message Number for Night Announcement

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-13 (VRS Message Number for Night Announcement):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 13
41-13-01 ACD Group1
VRS Msg No 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-13-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 887

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-14 : ACD Options
41-14 : ACD Options

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-14 : ACD Options to set various options for ACD Groups. When you set an
option for an ACD Group, the setting is in force (if applicable) for all agents within the group. The
chart below shows each of the ACD options, they entries available, and the default entry.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 EMG call operation mode 0- Call to system supervisory extension when group 0
supervisory extension is busy.
1- Not call to system supervisory extension when group
supervisory extension is busy.

02 Wrap up mode 0- After wrap up mode key is pressed. 0

1- After call is finished automatically.
03 ACD Priority for overflow calls 0- Own group priority 0
(*1) 1- Priority order by Program 41-03-03

04 Automatic Answer in Headset 0- off 0

Mode 1- on

05 -- Not used --

06 Transfer to ACD extension while 0- Transfer to ACD extension 0

2nd delay announcement 1- Not transfer to ACD extension

07 Automatic off duty for SLT 0- No change to off duty mode 0

1- Change to off duty mode automatically
08 ACD off duty mode 0- Can not receive internal call 0
1- Can receive internal call

09 Automatic Wrap up end time 0-64800 (Sec.) 0

10 Supervising ACD Answer to 0-64800 (Sec.) 10
incoming call

11 Cancel Head-Set Ear Piece 0-64800 (Sec.) 0

Ringing (for KST)

12 Start Head-Set Ear Piece Ringing 0-64800 (Sec.) 0

(for SLT)

888 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-14 : ACD Options
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-14 (ACD Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 14
41-14-01 ACD Group1
EMG Call Mode 0:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-14-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 889

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information to assign the options for “Audible Indica-
tion” for Log Out / Off Duty mode for each ACD group.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 The number of calls in ACD Queue to activate 0-200 0

Alarm information (0: No Alarm)

02 The interval time of Alarm information 0-64800 (Sec.) 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

890 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-15 : ACD Queue Alarm Information

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-15 (ACD Queue Alarm Information):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 15
41-15-01 ACD Group1
ACD Alarm 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-15-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 891

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow to define the value of the ACD threshold call
overflow and the mode for each ACD group.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Number of Calls in Queue 0-200 0

Define the maximum num- (0: No limitation)
ber of calls allowed in the
ACD queue before overflow
occurs.

02 Operation Mode for ACD 0- The longest waiting call is transferred 0

Queue 1- The last waiting call is transferred
Define how the system 2- Send Busy Tone
should handle calls when the
number of calls in queue
exceeds the threshold.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

892 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-16 : ACD Threshold Overflow

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-16 (ACD Threshold Overflow):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 16
41-16-01 ACD Group1
Queue Limit 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-16-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 893

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup
41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-17 : ACD Login Mode Setup to define the ACD login mode for each extension.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Login Mode Default

0- Normal Login Mode 0

1- AIC Login Mode

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-17 (ACD Login Mode Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 17
41-17-01 TEL200
Login Mode 0:Normal
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-17-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

894 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup to define the ACD Agent Identity Code
Table.

Input Data
AIC Table No 001-512

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 ACD Agent Identity Code Up to 4 digits No setting

02 Default ACD Group Number 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

03 ACD Group Number in Mode 1 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

04 ACD Group Number in Mode 2 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

05 ACD Group Number in Mode 3 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

06 ACD Group Number in Mode 4 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

07 ACD Group Number in Mode 5 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

08 ACD Group Number in Mode 6 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

09 ACD Group Number in Mode 7 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

10 ACD Group Number in Mode 8 0-64 0

(0 : No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 895

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-18 : ACD Agent Identity Code Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-18 (ACD Agent Identity Code Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 18
41-18-01 AIC TBL 1
AIC Code
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-18-nn AIC TBL nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Agent Identity Code (AIC) number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or
the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

896 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-19 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement
41-19 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 41-19 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement to assign voice mail ACD
Announcement Mailboxes as the message source for the 1st and 2nd Announcement Messages.
This option is only applicable to ACD Overflow Modes 1, 4, 6 and 9 (source 0/type2). Refer to Pro-
gram 41-08 for more on setting up the ACD overflow options.

Input Data
ACD Group No 01-64

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Delay Message Start Timer 0-64800 0

02 Mailbox Number for 1st Announcement Message Dial (Up to 8 digits) No Setting

03 1st Delay Message Sending Count 0-255 0

04 Mailbox Number for 2nd Announcement Message Dial (Up to 8 digits) No Setting

05 2nd Delay Message Sending Count 0-255 0

06 Tone Kind at Message Interval 0- Ring Back Tone 0

1- MOH Tone
2- BGM Source

07 ACD Forced Disconnect Time After 2nd Announce- 0-64800 60

ment

08 Delayed Message Interval Time 0-64800 20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
• Voice Response Service (VRS)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 897

Program 41 : ACD Setup
41-19 : VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 41-19 (VRS Box Number for Delay Announcement):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 41 19
41-19-01 ACD Group1
Delay_Msg_Strt0 Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
41-19-nn ACD Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ACD Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

898 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel
Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel to assign the system options for Hotel/
Motel Service.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Answering Message Mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel 0- MOH 0

Mode) 1- VRS Message
2- VRS Message + Time

02 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0-48 0

VRS Message for Wake Up Calls. You’ll need to make an (0: No setting)
entry for this program if you have selected option 2 or 3 in
Item 1 above.

03 Wake Up Call No Answer 0- No transfer 0

1- Transfer to the Operator

04 Setup message mode for Wake Up Call (Hotel Mode) 0 - Only Confirmation Tone 0
1 - VRS Message
2 - Time Information and VRS

05 Wake Up Call Message Assignment 0-48 - VRS Message Number -

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 899

Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-01 : System Options for Hotel/Motel

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 42-01 (System Options for Hotel/Motel):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 42 01
42-01-01
Answer Message0:Hold-
Tone
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
42-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

900 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup to define the basic operation of the Hotel/
Motel extensions.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Hotel Mode 0- Normal 0

If you want an extension to operate in the 1- Hotel
Hotel/Motel mode, 1. If you want the tele-
phone to operate in the business mode, enter 0.

02 Toll Restriction Class When Check In 1-15 1

Assign an extension’s Toll Restriction Class
when it is checked in. The system has 15
Toll Restriction Classes (1-15). The entry
you make in this option affects the telephone
in all Night Service modes. (Refer to Pro-
grams 21-05 and 21-06 to set up the Toll
Restriction dialing options.) When the
extension is checked out, it uses the Toll
Restriction Class set in Program 21-04.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 901

Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 42-02 (Hotel/Motel Telephone Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 42 02
42-02-01 TEL200
Hotel Mode 0:Normal
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
42-02-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

902 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel) to set the Hotel/Motel Class of Service
(COS) options. Assign Class of Service to extensions in Program 42-02 : Hotel/Motel Telephone
Setup. There are 15 Classes of Service. Refer to the following chart for a description of each COS
option, its range and default setting. For additional Class of Service options, refer to Programs
20-06 - 20-14.

Input Data
Class of Service Number 01-15

Default
Item Item Input
No. Data
Class 01 Class 02-15

01 Check-In Operation 0- Off 0 0

1- On

02 Check-Out Operation 0- Off 0 0

1- On

03 Room Status Output 0- Off 0 0

1- On
04 DND Setting for Other Extension 0- Off 0 0
1- On

05 Wake up Call Setting for Other Extension 0- Off 0 0

1- On

06 Room Status Change for Other Extension 0- Off 0 0

1- On
07 Restriction Class Changing for Other Extension 0- Off 0 0
1- On

08 Room to Room Call Restriction 0- Off 0 0

1- On

09 DND Setting for Own Extension 0- Off 0 0

1- On

10 Wake Up Call Setting for Own Extension 0- Off 0 0

1- On

11 Room Status Change for Own Extension 0- Off 0 0

1- On

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 903

Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-03 : Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)

Default
Item Input
No. Item Data
Class 01 Class 02-15

12 SLT Room Monitor 0- Off 0 0

Enable (1) or disable (0) a single line telephone’s 1- On
ability to use Room Monitor.

13 PMS Restriction Level 0- Off 0 0

1- On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Class of Service
• Hotel/Motel

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 42-03 (Class of Service Options (Hotel/Motel)):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 42 03
42-03-01 FCTN Cls1
Check-in 1:On
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
42-03-nn FCTN Clsnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Class of Service number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

904 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 42-04 :Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes to set up the Hotel Mode one-digit
service codes which are assigned in 42-02-01. For each Department Calling Group (1-64), you
enter the destination for each single digit code (1-9, 0, *., #). The destination can be any code up to
four digits long, such as an extension number or access code.

Input Data
Department (Extension) Group Number 01-64

Received dial Destination number Default

1-9,0,*,# Up to 8 digits No setting

Conditions
The one-digit codes you assign in this program wait until the Interdigit timer expires before executing.

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 905

Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-04 : Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 42-04 (Hotel Mode One-Digit Service Codes):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 42 04
42-04-01 TEL Group1
1digit Accs 1=
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
42-04-nn TEL Groupnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Department/Telephone Group number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH
or the VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

906 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer to set the DCI/CTA port to output the Hotel
Data (Check-Out sheet, Room Status etc...) and the output options for the Hotel/Motel feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0- No setting 0

1- CTA

02 Output Destination Number Up to 8 digit No setting

(Extension number which CTA/CTU is
equipped.)

03 Wake Up Call No Answer Data 0- Not output 0

1- Output

04 Check-Out Sheet 0- Not output 0

1- Output

Conditions
Room Status Reports require a DCI/CTA and a compatible printer. Refer to Data Communications
Interface (DCI) in the feature section for information.

Feature Cross Reference

• Hotel/Motel

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 907

Program 42 : Hotel Setup
42-05 : Hotel Room Status Printer

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 42-05 (Hotel Room Status Printer):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 42 05
42-05-01
Output Port Type 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
42-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

908 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route
Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-01 : System Options for ARS/F-Route to define the system options for the
ARS/F-Route feature.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ARS/F-Route Time Schedule 0- Not Used 0

1- Used

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-01 (System Options for ARS/F-Route):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 01
44-01-01
F-Route_Mode 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 909

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the Pre-Transaction
Table for selecting ARS/F-Route.

• Service Type 1 (Extension number)

The number goes to an extension after deleting the front digit(p).

Additional data
Assign the digit(p) to be deleted on top of the number for extension number usage. There
must be at least one digit deleted.

• Service Type 2 (ARS/F-Route select)

The number is controlled by ARS/F-Route table.

Additional data
Assign the ARS/F-Route table number for Program 44-05. (If the ARS/F-Route Time sched-
ule is not used.) Assign the ARS/F-Route selection number for Program 44-04. (If the ARS/
F-Route Time schedule is used.)

• Service Type 3 (Dial Extension Analyze Table select)

The total length of the number exceeds more than 5 digits.

Additional data
Assign the referring Dial Extension Analyze Table number for Program 44-03.

Input Data
Dial Analysis Table Number 1-120

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Dial Up to 8 digits No setting

02 Service Type 0- No setting 0

1- Select extension call
2- Select “ARS/F-Route Table”
3- Select “Dial Extension Analyze Table”

910 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-02 : Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access

Item No. Item Input Data Default

03 Additional Data • 1- 0-255 (Delete Digit) 0

(255 : delete all digit)
• 2- [Program 44-01 : 0]
0-500 (ARS/F-Route table Number)
(0 : No setting) <Refer to Program 44-05>
[Program 44-01 : 1]
0-500 (ARS/F-Route select table Number)
(0 : No setting) <Refer to Program 44-04>
• 3- 0-4 (Dial Extension Analyze Table Number)
(0 : No setting) <Refer to Program 44-03>

04 Dial Tone Simulation 0- off 0

1- on

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-02 (Dial Analysis Table for ARS/F-Route Access):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 02
44-02-01 Analyze TBL1
Dial
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-02-nn Analyze TBLnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Analyze Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 911

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-03 : Dial Analyze Extension Table
44-03 : Dial Analyze Extension Table

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-03 : Dial Analyze Extension Table to set the dial extension analyze table.

Input Data
Extension Table Area Number 1-4

Dial Analysis Table Number 1-252

Dial Analysis Table Number : 1-250

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Dial Up to 24 digits No setting

02 ARS/F-Route [Program 44-01 : 0] 0

Select Table Num- 0-500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) <Program 44-05>
ber [Program 44-01 : 1]
0-500 (ARS/F-Route select table Number) <Program 44-04>

Dial Analysis Table Number : 251

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

03 ARS/F-Route [Program 44-01 : 0] 0

Select table Num- 0-500 (ARS/F-Route Table Number) <Program 44-05>
ber [Program 44-01 : 1]
0-500 (ARS/F-Route select table Number) <Program
44-04>

912 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-03 : Dial Analyze Extension Table
Dial Analysis Table Number : 252

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

04 Next Table Area Number 0-4 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-03 (Dial Analyze Extension Table):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 03
44-03-01 Exp-Table 1
001:Dial =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-03-nn Exp-Table n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Extension Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOL-
UME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 913

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule
44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-04 : ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule to assign each ARS/F-Route
Selection number to an ARS/F-Route table number for each ARS/F-Route time mode. There are 8
time modes for ARS/F-Route Access.

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Selection Number 1-500

ARS/F-Route Time Mode ARS/F-Route Table Number Default

1-8 0-500 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-04 (ARS/F-Route Selection for Time Schedule):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 04
44-04-01 Select No 1
F-Route Mode1=0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-04-nn Select No nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ARS/F-Route Selection number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

914 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table to set the ARS/F-Route table. There are 4 kinds of
order. If the higher priority trunk groups are busy, the next order group will be used. If a lower pri-
ority route is selected, the caller may be notified with a beep tone.

Input Data
ARS/F-Route Table Number 1-500

Priority Number 1-4

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Trunk Group Number 0-100, 255 0

(0 : No setting)
(255 : Extension Call)
02 Delete Digits 0-255 0
(255 : Delete all)

03 Additional Dial Number 0-1000 0

04 Beep Tone 0- off 0

1- on

05 Gain Table Number for Internal Calls 0-500 0

(0: No setting)
06 Gain Table Number for Tandem Connections 0-500 0
(0: No setting)

07 ARS Class of Service 0-16 0

08 Dial Treatment 0-15 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 915

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-05 : ARS/F-Route Table

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-05 (ARS/F-Route Table):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 05
44-05-01 F-route TBL1
PRI1:TRK GP =0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-05-nn F-route TBLnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the ARS/F-Route Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

916 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-06 : Additional Dial Table
44-06 : Additional Dial Table

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-06 : Additional Dial Table to set the additional dial table to add prior to the
dialed ARS/F-Route number.

Input Data
Additional Dial Table Number 1-1000

Additional Dial Default

Up to 24 digits (1-9, 0, *, #, Pause) No setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-06 (Additional Dial Table):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 06
4-06-01 Add TBL1
Dial =
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-06-nn Add TBLnnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Additional Dial Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 917

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access to set the PAD table. If an extension
dials ARS/F-Route number;
• The Extension Dial Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
• The Extension Dial Gain Table follows “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings.

If the incoming call is transferred to another line using ARS/F-Route;

• The Tandem Gain Table is activated, which is assigned in Program 44-05.
• The Tandem Gain Table follows the “Incoming transmit” and “Incoming receive” settings for
incoming line, and “Outgoing transmit” and “Outgoing receive” settings for the outgoing line.

Note: For the ARS/F-Route call (in the above case), CODEC gain in Program 14-01-02 and
14-01-03 are not activated.

Input Data
Gain Table Number 1-500

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Incoming Transmit 1-63 32

(-15.5 …+15.5dB)

02 Incoming Receive 1-63 32

(-15.5 …+15.5dB)

03 Outgoing Transmit 1-63 32

(-15.5 …+15.5dB)
04 Outgoing Receive 1-63 32
(-15.5 …+15.5dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

918 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-07 : Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-07 (Gain Table for ARS/F-Route Access):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 07
44-07-01 Gain TBL 1
INC Transmit 32
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-07-nn Gain TBL nnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Gain Table number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 919

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define the daily pattern of the ARS/
F-Route feature. ARS/F-Route has 10 time patterns. These patterns are used in Program 44-09 and
44-10. The daily pattern consists of 20 time settings.

Input Data
Schedule Pattern Number 01-10

Time Number Start Time End Time Mode

01-20 0000-2359 0000-2359 1-8

Default
All Schedule Pattern : 0:00 – 0:00, Mode 1

Example:

Pattern 1

0:00 8:00 18:00 22:00 0:00

Mode 3 Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3

Time Number01 : 00:00 – 08:00 Mode 3

Time Number02 : 08:00 – 18:00 Mode 1
Time Number03 : 18:00 – 22:00 Mode 2
Time Number04 : 22:00 – 00:00 Mode 3

Pattern 2

0:00 0:00
Mode 2

Time Number 01 : 0:00 – 0:00 Mode 2

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

920 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-08 : Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-08 (Time Schedule for ARS/F-Route):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 08
44-08-01 Time Pttn 1
T-Zone01:Start =00:00
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-08-nn Time Pttn nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Time Pattern number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 921

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a weekly schedule for using
ARS/F-Route.

Input Data
Day Number Schedule Pattern Number Default

1 : Sunday 1-10 Pattern 1

2 : Monday 1-10 Pattern 1

3 : Tuesday 1-10 Pattern 1

4 : Wednesday 1-10 Pattern 1

5 : Thursday 1-10 Pattern 1

6 : Friday 1-10 Pattern 1

7 : Saturday 1-10 Pattern 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

922 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-09 : Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-09 (Weekly Schedule for ARS/F-Route):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 09
44-09-01
Sunday Pattern=1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 923

Program 44 : ARS/F-Route Setup
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route
44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 44-10 : Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route to define a yearly schedule for ARS/
F-Route. This schedule is used for setting special days such as national holidays.

Input Data
Date Schedule Pattern Number Default

0101- 1231 0-10 No Setting

(0 : No setting)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)/F-Route

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 44-10 (Holiday Schedule for ARS/F-Route):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 44 10
44-10-01
Date01/01 =PTTN_0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
44-10-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

924 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 45-01 :Voice Mail Integration Options to customize certain voice mail integration
options.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Voice Mail Department Group Number 0 - 64 (0=no voice mail) 0

Assign which Extension (Department)
Group number is to be assigned as the
voice mail group.

02 Voice Mail Master Name Up to 12 Characters Voice Mail

Enter the Voice Mail master name.

03 Voice Mail Screening 0 = Off 1

Enable/disable the system’s ability to pro- 1 = On
cess the Call Screening commands (1 +
extension number) sent from the Voice
Mail. You should normally enable this
option to allow for Voice Mail Call
Screening. Disable this option if your sys-
tem has been modified so that extensions
begin with the digit 1 (e.g., 101, 102, etc.).
Also see the Flexible System Numbering
feature.
04 Park and Page 0 = Off 1
Enable/disable the system’s ability to pro- 1 = On
cess the Voice Mail’s Park and Page (*)
commands. You should normally enable
this option.

05 Message Wait 0 = Off 1

Enable/disable the system’s ability to pro- 1 = On
cess the Voice Mail’s Message Wait (#)
commands. You should normally enable
this option. If enabled, be sure that the
programmed Message Notification strings
don’t contain the code 805 for trunk
access.

06 Record Alert Tone Interval Time 0-64800 seconds 0

This timer sets the interval between voice
Mail Conversation Record alerts

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 925

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-01 : Voice Mail Integration Options
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 45-01 (Voice Mail Integration Options):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 45 01
45-01-01
STG No. of VM 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
45-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

926 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-02 : NSL Option Setup
45-02 : NSL Option Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 45-02 : NSL Option Setup to customize the NSL options for Voice Mail integra-
tion.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Send DTMF Tone or 6KD Message 0 = Sending DTMF Tone 0

to SLT-VM Port
1 = Sending 6KD Message
to Serial Port

02 Forced Send Dial Tone 0 = Normal 0

1 = Forced

03 Send 5IA Message 0 = Off 0

1 = On

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 927

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-02 : NSL Option Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 45-02 (NSL Option Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 45 02
45-02-01
DTMF/6KD Msg. 0:DTMF
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
45-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

928 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-03 : NSL Timer Setup
45-03 : NSL Timer Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 45-03 : NSL Timer Setup to customize the NSL timers for Voice Mail integration.

Input Data

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Retry Timer 0-64800 4

02 Polling Interval 0-64800 20

03 1LS (Link Start Message) Interval 0-64800 20

04 Wait for 1LS Time 0-64800 30

05 Wait for 2ET Time 0-64800 60

06 Restart LVP Check Interval 0-64800 30

07 Wait for 1LR Time 0-64800 20

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Voice Mail

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 929

Program 45 : Voice Mail Integration
45-03 : NSL Timer Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 45-03 (NSL Timer Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 45 03
45-03-01
Retry Timer 4
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
45-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

930 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 80-01 : Service Tone Setup to define up to 64 Service Tones. Each service tone is
defined by the combination of 32 Basic Tones.

Input Data
Service Tone Number 01-64

Item No. Item Input Data

1 Repeat count 0-255 (0 is endless)

Unit Number 1-8

Item No. Item Input Data

2 Basic Tone No 1-33 (0=No Tone, 33=Default Time Slot)

3 Duration count 1-255 (100-25500ms)

4 Gain level (dB) 1-63 (- 15.5…+15.5)

Table-1A : Basic Tone

Basic Level Basic
Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)
Tone No. (dB) Tone No.

1 400 - 13 17 520 / 650 -13 / -19

2 520 -13 18 650 / 780 -13 / -19

3 580 -13 19 780 / 1040 -13 / -19

4 660 -13 20 1040 -13

5 700 -13 21 - reserve - -

6 800 -13 22 - reserve - -

7 880 -13 23 - reserve - -

8 1050 -13 24 - reserve - -

9 350 / 440 -16 / -16 25 - reserve - -

10 440 / 480 -16 / -16 26 - reserve - -

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 931

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Basic Level Basic

Tone No. Frequency (Hz) (dB) Tone No. Frequency (Hz) Level (dB)

11 480 / 620 -21 / -21 27 - reserve - -

12 440 -16 28 - reserve - -

13 - reserve - - 29 - reserve - -

14 520 / 650 -19 / -13 30 - reserve - -

15 650 / 780 -19 / -13 31 - reserve - -

16 780 / 1040 -19 / -13 32 - reserve - -

Default
Service Basic
Tone Service tone Repeat Unit Tone Duration Gain Level
No. Count Count No. (dB)

1 No tone 0 1 0 10 32 (0dB)

2 Internal dial tone 0 1 9 10 32 (0dB)

3 Special dial tone 0 1 9 10 32 (0dB)

4 Internal Recall dial tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)

5 Trunk dial tone 0 1 9 10 32 (0dB)

6 Busy tone 0 2 0 5 20 (-6dB)

10 5 20 (-6dB)

7 DND busy tone 0 2 0 2 32 (0dB)

1 2 32 (0dB)

8 B-busy tone 0 2 0 5 44 (+6dB)

11 5 44 (+6dB)

9 Internal Reorder Tone 0 2 11 3 20 (-6dB)

0 2 20 (-6dB)

10 Internal Interrupt Tone 0 2 0 2 32 (0dB)

9 3 32 (0dB)

11 Internal Confirmation tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)
12 Internal hold tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

13 External hold tone 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

14 Ring-back tone 0 2 10 10 20 (-6dB)

0 30 20 (-6dB)

932 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Service Basic
Tone Service tone Repeat Unit Tone Duration Gain Level
No. Count Count No. (dB)

15 Override tone 1 1 12 5 32 (0dB)

16 Lock-out tone 0 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)
17 Clock alarm tone 0 4 6 1 32 (0dB)
0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)
0 7 32 (0dB)

18 BGM 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

19 Door Box chime 1 3 6 4 2 38 (+3dB)

4 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 38 (+3dB)
2 4 26 (-3dB)
2 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

20 Door Box chime 2 3 6 7 2 38 (+3dB)

7 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 38 (+3dB)
5 4 26 (-3dB)
5 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

21 Door Box chime 3 3 6 8 2 38 (+3dB)

8 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 38 (+3dB)
6 4 26 (-3dB)
6 6 14 (-9dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)

22 Door Box chime 4 3 6 4 1 38 (+3dB)

4 1 26 (-3dB)
2 2 38 (+3dB)
2 2 26 (-3dB)
2 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

23 Door Box chime 5 3 6 7 1 38 (+3dB)

7 1 26 (-3dB)
5 2 38 (+3dB)
5 2 26 (-3dB)
5 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

24 Door Box chime 6 3 6 8 1 38 (+3dB)

8 1 26 (-3dB)
6 2 38 (+3dB)
6 2 26 (-3dB)
6 3 14 (-9dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 933

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Service Basic
Tone Service tone Repeat Unit Tone Duration Gain Level
No. Count Count No. (dB)

25 Service set tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)

26 Service clear tone 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

9 1 32 (0dB)

27 Talk-back tone 2 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)
28 Speaker monitor tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)

29 Door relay tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

30 Door Box call tone 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)
31 Paging tone 2 2 0 1 32 (0dB)
6 1 32 (0dB)

32 Splash tone 1 1 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

33 Splash tone 2 2 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

34 Splash tone 3 3 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

6 1 32 (0dB)

35 1 sec signal tone 1 1 6 10 32 (0dB)

36 Sensor alarm tone 1 0 2 7 2 32 (0dB)
0 2 32 (0dB)

37 Sensor alarm tone 2 0 2 7 5 32 (0dB)

0 5 32 (0dB)

38 Sensor alarm tone 3 0 2 7 7 32 (0dB)

0 7 32 (0dB)

39 Sensor alarm tone 4 0 2 7 10 32 (0dB)

0 10 32 (0dB)

40 Internal call waiting tone 1 1 12 2 32 (0dB)

41 Intrusion tone 1 1 12 5 32 (0dB)

42 Conference tone 0 6 0 5 32 (0dB)

11 5 20 (-6dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
11 5 20 (-6dB)
10 10 20 (-6dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)

934 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Service Basic
Tone Service tone Repeat Unit Tone Duration Gain Level
No. Count Count No. (dB)

43 Intrusion tone 2 0 6 0 5 32 (0dB)

11 5 20 (-6dB)
0 5 32 (0dB)
11 5 20 (-6dB)
10 10 20 (-6dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)
44 External dial tone 0 1 9 1 26 (-3dB)
1 26 (-3dB)

45 External Ring Back tone 0 2 10 10 32 (0dB)

0 30 32 (0dB)

46 External Busy tone 0 2 0 5 32 (0dB)

10 5 32 (0dB)
47 Number unobtainable tone 0 1 11 0 32 (0dB)

48 VM message indication tone 0 2 0 1 32 (0dB)

8 1 32 (0dB)

49 -- Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

: : 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

54 -- Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

55 Generate tone for TAPI2.1 0 1 3 0 32 (0dB)

56 Warning Beep Tone Signal- 1 1 2 8 32 (0dB)

ing

57 Headset Ear Piece Ringing 0 5 0 2 32 (0dB)

Tone 2 1 32 (0dB)
0 1 32 (0dB)
2 1 32 (0dB)
0 20 32 (0dB)

58 Opening Chime Tone 1 8 2 2 32 (0dB)

2 2 26 (-3dB)
14 2 32 (0dB)
14 2 26 (-3dB)
15 2 32 (0dB)
15 2 26 (-3dB)
16 6 32 (0dB)
16 4 26 (-3dB)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 935

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup

Service Basic
Tone Service tone Repeat Unit Tone Duration Gain Level
No. Count Count No. (dB)

59 Ending Chime Tone 1 8 20 2 32 (0dB)

20 2 26 (-3dB)
19 2 32 (0dB)
19 2 26 (-3dB)
18 2 32 (0dB)
18 2 26 (-3dB)
17 6 32 (0dB)
17 4 26 (-3dB)

60 Splash Tone 1 (Mute) 1 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)

6 1 8 (-12dB)

61 Splash Tone 2 (Mute) 2 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)

6 1 8 (-12dB)
62 Splash Tone 3 (Mute) 3 2 0 1 8 (-12dB)
6 1 8 (-12dB)

63 -- Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

64 -- Not Used -- 0 0 0 0 32 (0dB)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 80-01 (Service Tone Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 80 01
80-01-01 Svc Tone1
Repeat Count 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
80-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Service Tone to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.

936 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-01 : Service Tone Setup
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 937

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup to define the duration (on time) and pause (off time) for
DTMF dialing. This option affects all trunk line calls system wide. You make separate entries for
duration and pause. It is also possible to adjust the level of both high and low frequency tone.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

1 Duration 1-255 5 (100 ms)

2 Pause 1-255 5 (100 ms)

3 Tone Level (Low) (dB) 1-97 (-45.0 … +3) 69 (-11dB)

4 Tone Level (High) 1-97 (-45.0 … +3) 65 (-13dB)

Duration

Pause

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

938 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-02 : DTMF Tone Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 80-02 (DTMF Tone Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 80 02
80-02-01
Duration Time 5
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
80-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 939

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup to define the various levels and timers for the
DTMF Tone Receiver

Input Data
DTMF Tone Receiver Type No 1- DTMF Receiver for Extension
2- DTMF Receive for Trunk
3- - Reserve -
4- - Reserve -
5- - Reserve -

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Detect Level 0- 0dBm…-30dBm

1- -15dBm…-45dBm
2- -30dBm…-55dBm

02 Start delay time 0-255 (0.25ms-64ms)

03 Min. detect level 0-15

detect level 0 : –15dBm(0) to –30dBm(15)
detect level 1 : –30dBm(0) to –45dBm(15)
detect level 2 : –40dBm(0) to –55dBm(15)

04 Max. detect level 0-15

detect level 0 : 0dBm(0) to –15dBm(15)
detect level 1 : –15dBm(0) to –30dBm(15)
detect level 2 : –30dBm(0) to –45dBm(15)
05 Forward twist level 0-9 (1dB…10dB)

06 Backward twist level 0-9 (1dB…10dB)

07 ON detect time 1-255 (15+15ms…3825ms)

08 OFF detect time 1-255 (15+15ms…3825ms)

940 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-03 : DTMF Tone Receiver Setup
Default
Item Item Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 Type 4 Type 5
No.

01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0
02 Start delay time 0 0 0 0 0

03 Min. detect 10(-25dBm) 15(-30dBm) 10(-25dBm) 10(-25dBm) 10(-25dBm)

level
04 Max. detect 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm) 2 (-2dBm)
level

05 Forward twist 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm) 5 (6dBm)

level

06 Backward twist 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm) 0 (1dBm)

level
07 ON detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

08 OFF detect time 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms) 1 (30ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 80-03 (DTMF Tone Receiver Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 80 03
80-03-01 PB Receiver 1
Detect level 0:0/-30
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
80-03-nn PB Receiver 1
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 941

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup to define the various levels and timers
for the Call Progress Tone Detector

Input Data
Tone Detector Type No 1- Dial Tone for Trunk
2- Busy Tone for Trunk
3- Ring Back Tone for Trunk
4- - Reserve -
5- - Reserve -

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Detect Level 1- 0dBm…-30dBm

2- -15dBm…-45dBm
3- -30dBm…-55dBm

02 Min. detect level 0-15

detect level 0 : –15dBm(0) to –30dBm(15)
detect level 1 : –30dBm(0) to –45dBm(15)
detect level 2 : –40dBm(0) to –55dBm(15)

03 S/N ratio 0-4 (0dB…-20dB)

04 No tone time 1-255 (30+30-7650ms)

(0: No detection)

05 Pulse Count 1-255

06 ON min. time 1-255 (30+30-7650ms)

07 ON max. time 0-255 (30+30-7650ms)

(0: No detection)

08 OFF min. time 1-255 (30+30-7650ms)

09 OFF max. time 1-255 (30+30-7650ms)

(0: No detection)

10 -- Reserve -- 0-8

11 -- Reserve -- 0-8

942 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup
Default
Item Item Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5
No. (DT) (BT) (RBT)

01 Detect Level 0 0 0 0 0
(0..-30dBm) (0..-30dBm) (0..-30dBm)

02 Min. detect 15 15 15 0 0
level (-30dBm) (-30dBm) (-30dBm)
03 S/N ratio 4 4 4 0 0
(-20dB) (-20dB) (-20dB)

04 No tone time 132 132 132 0 0

(3990ms) (3990ms) (3990ms)

05 Pulse Count 1 1 1 0 0

06 ON min. time 63 12 25 0 0
(1500ms) (390ms) (780ms)

07 ON max. time 0 20 40 0 0
(Not detect) (630ms) (1230ms)

08 OFF min. time 1 12 52 0 0

(60ms) (390ms) (1590ms)

09 OFF max. time 1 20 80 0 0

(60ms) (630ms) (2430ms)

10 -- Reserve -- 1 1 1 0 0

11 -- Reserve -- 0 0 0 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Selectable Ring Tones

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 943

Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-04 : Call Progress Tone Detector Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 80-04 (Call Progress Tone Detector Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 80 04
80-04-01 Tone Rcv1
Detect level 0:0/-30
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
80-04-nn Tone Rcv1
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

944 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 80 : Basic Hardware Setup for System
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports
80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 80-05 : Date Format for SMDR and System Reports to define the date format
when printing out the SMDR, alarm report, system information report, etc.

Input Data
Date Format Default

0- American Format (Month / Date / Year) 2

1- Japanese Format (Year / Month / Date)
2- European Format (Date/Month/Year)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Station Message Detail Recording
• Time and Date

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 80-05 (Date Format for SMDR and System Reports):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 80 05
80-05-01
Date Format 1:Japan
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
80-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 945

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup
Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for COIU PCBs.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Companding method type 0- u-law 0 (u-law)

1- A-law
02 loop current detection time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 75 (600ms)
03 clear signal (open loop) detection time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 90 (720ms)
04 ringing signal detection minimum time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 13 (104ms)
05 single ringing detection minimum time 0-255 (0,8-2040mS) 82 (656ms)
06 double ringing detection minimum off time 0-255 (0,8-2040mS) 13 (104ms)
07 double ringing detection maximum off time 0-255 (0,8-2040mS) 50 (400ms)
08 ringing signal not detection minimum 1-255 (8-2040mS) 88 (704ms)
09 Abandoned Call Detection Timer 1-255 (64-16320mS) 94 (6016ms)
10 continuous ringing minimum time 0-255 (0,8-2040mS) 38 (304ms)
11 continuous ringing maximum time 0-255 (0,8-2040mS) 88 (704ms)
12 ac impedance timer 1-255 (64-16320mS) 4 (256ms)
13 grounding time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 9 (36ms)
14 Flash (Hooking 1) 1-255 (16-4080mS) 50 (800ms)
This sets the flash (Hooking 1) duration for analogue trunk calls. See
Program 14-02-04.
15 Flash (Hooking 2) 1-255 (16-4080mS) 156 (2496ms)
This sets the flash (Hooking 2) duration for analogue trunk calls. See
Program 14-02-04.
16 pause time 1-255 (16-4080mS) 47 (752ms)
17 PFT idle detection time 1-255 (64-16320mS) 47 (3008ms)
18 - Not Used - 1-255 (8-2040mS) 6 (48ms)
19 - Not Used - 1-255 (64-16320mS) 47 (3008ms)
20 loop reverse detect minimum time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 13 (104ms)
21 loop reverse detect maximum time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 107 (856ms)

946 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-01 : COIU Initial Data Setup

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

22 loop disconnect detect minimum time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 50 (400ms)

23 loop disconnect detect maximum time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 80 (640ms)
24 on hook normal detect time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 3 (24ms)
25 on hook reverse detect time 1-255 (8-2040mS) 2 (16ms)
26 on hook disconnect detect time 1-255 (16-4080mS) 188 (3008ms)
27 pulse dial break time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 8 (32ms)
28 pulse dial make time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 4 (16ms)
29 inter-digit time (10pps) 1-255 (32-8160mS) 19 (608ms)
30 pulse dial break time (20pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 4 (16ms)
31 pulse dial make time (20pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 2 (8ms)
32 inter-digit time (20pps) 1-255 (32-8160mS) 16 (512ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-01 (COIU Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 01
81-01-01
Encoding Type 0: U-LAW
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 947

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the DIOPU
cards.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Companding method type 0- u-law 0 (u-law)

1- A-law
02 Answer Signal Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 6 (24ms)
03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 7 (700ms)
04 Ringing Signal Detection Min. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 10 (80ms)
05 Hook Flash Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 25 (200ms)
06 Pause Time 1-255 (1-255 Seconds) 94 (94 Sec)
07 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 20 (160ms)
08 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 3 (300ms)
09 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 48 (4800ms)
10 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 13 (104ms)
11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 31 (248ms)
12 Receive DP Make Min. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 5 (20ms)
13 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 50 (200ms)
14 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 5 (20ms)
15 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 50 (200ms)
16 Receive DP Inter-Digit Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 6 (48ms)
17 Loop Off Guard Time 0-255 (0,100-25500mS) 20 (2000ms)
18 DP Break Time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 16 (64ms)
19 DP Make Time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 8 (32ms)
20 DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps) 1-255 (100-25500mS) 38 (3800ms)
21 DP Break Time (0pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 8 (32ms)
22 DP Make Time (20pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 4 (16ms)
23 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) 1-255 (100-25500mS) 29 (2900ms)

948 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-02 : DIOPU Initial Data Setup
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Placing

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-02 (DIOPU Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 02
81-02-01
Encoding Type 0: U-Law
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 949

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup
81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the E&M tie
line PCB.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Companding method type 0- u-law 0 (u-law)

1- A-law
02 Answer Signal Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 6 (60ms)
03 Clear Signal (Open Loop) Detection Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 7 (700ms)
04 Ringing Signal Detection Min. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 10 (100ms)
05 Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 7 (700ms)
06 Hook Flash Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 20 (200ms)
07 Pause Time 1-255 (1-255Sec) 50 (3000ms)
08 WINK/DELAY Duration Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 20 (200ms)
09 Incoming-WINK/DELAY Send Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 3 (300ms)
10 Seizure-WINK/DELAY Receive Max. Time 1-255 (100-25500mS) 48 (4800ms)
11 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Min. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 13 (130ms)
12 Receive WINK/DELAY Duration Max. Time 1-255 (8-20240mS) 31 (310ms)
13 Receive DP Make Min. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 5 (10ms)
14 Receive DP Make Max. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 50 (100ms)
15 Receive DP Break Min. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 5 (10ms)
16 Receive DP Break Max. Time 1-255 (4-1020mS) 50 (100ms)
17 Pause Time After WINK/DELAY Receive 1-255 (8-20240mS) 13 (104ms)
18 Loop Off Guard Time 0-255 (0,100-25500mS) 20 (2000ms)
19 DP Break Time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 32 (64ms)
20 DP Make Time (10pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 16 (32ms)
21 DP Inter-Digit Time (10pps) 1-255 (100-25500mS) 19 (608ms)
22 DP Break Time (0pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 16 (32ms)
23 DP Make Time (20pps) 1-255 (4-1020mS) 8 (16ms)
24 DP Inter-Digit Time (20pps) 1-255 (100-25500mS) 16 (512ms)

950 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-03 : 4TLIU Initial Data Setup
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Tie Lines

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-03 (4TLIU Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 03
81-03-01
Encoding Type 0: U-Law
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 951

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-04 : ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the various basic
options for layer 1 of ISDN BRI.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Wait Time for Physical Activation (Timer 3) 1-255 (200-5100ms) 100 (20 sec.)

02 Detection Time for Physical Deactivation 1-255 (200-5100ms) 5 (1 sec.)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-04 (ISDN BRI Layer 1 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 04
81-04-01
L1 Connection 100
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

952 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the vari-
ous basic options for layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default
No.

01 Timer T200 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1sec.)

02 Timer T201 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1sec.)

03 Timer T202 1-255 (100-25500ms) 20 (2sec.)

04 Timer T203 1-255 (100-25500ms) 200 (20sec.)

05 N200 1-255 3

06 N201 1-65535 (Byte) 260

07 N202 1-255 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 953

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-05 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (T-Point) Initial Data
Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 05
81-05-01
Timer T200 10
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

954 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup to define the various
basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI.

Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1-5

Item No. Item Input Data Default

1 T301 0,180-254(sec) 180(sec)

2 T302 1-254(sec) 15(sec)
3 T303 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
4 T304 0-254(sec) 30(sec)
5 T305 1-254(sec) 30(sec)
6 T306 0-254(sec) 30(sec)
7 T307 1-254(sec) 180(sec)
8 T308 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
9 T309 1-254(sec) 90(sec)
10 T310 0-180(sec) 180(sec)
11 T312 1-254(sec) 6(sec)
12 T313 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
13 T314 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
14 T316 (T317+1)-254(sec) 120(sec)
15 T317 1-(T316-1) 60(sec)
16 T318 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
17 T319 1-254(sec) 4(sec)
18 T320 1-254(sec) 30(sec)
19 T321 1-254(sec) 30(sec)
20 T322 1-254(sec) 4(sec)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 955

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-06 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (T-Point) Timer Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 06
81-06-01 L3 Timer1
T301 180Sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-06-nn L3 Timernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Layer 3 Timer number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

956 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports to define the CODEC
(QSLAC) Filter for each analogue trunk port.

Input Data
Trunk Port Number 001-200

CODEC Filter Type Default

0- No Filter 2
1- 0dB Loss
2- 4dB Loss
3- 8dB Loss
4- Specified Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Central Office Calls, Answering
• Central Office Calls, Placing

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 957

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Trunk Ports

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-07 (CODEC FilterSetup for Analogue Trunk Ports):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 07
81-07-01 Trunk1
CODEC Filter 2:4dB Loss
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-07-nn Trunknnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the trunk number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

958 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup to define the various basic timers for each T1 trunk
type.

Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1-5

Item No. Item Input Data Default

1 Loop - Answer Signal Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)

2 Ground - Answer Signal Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)
3 DID - Answer Signal Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)
4 E&M - Answer Signal Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)
5 OPX - Answer Signal Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)
6 Loop - Clear Signal Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
7 Ground - Clear Signal Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
8 DID - Clear Signal Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
9 E&M - Clear Signal Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
10 OPX - Clear Signal Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
11 Loop - Ringing Signal Detection Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 10 (80msec)
12 Ground - Ringing Signal Detection Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 10 (80msec)
13 DID - Ringing Signal Detection Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 10 (80msec)
14 E&M - Ringing Signal Detection Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 10 (80msec)
15 OPX - Ringing Signal Detection Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 10 (80msec)
16 Loop - Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 50 (3200msec)
17 Ground - Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 50 (3200msec)
18 DID - Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 50 (3200msec)
19 E&M - Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 50 (3200msec)
20 OPX - Ringing Signal Stop Detection Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 50 (3200msec)
21 Loop - Loop Current Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 40 (200msec)
22 Ground - Loop Current Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 40 (200msec)
23 DID - Loop Current Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 40 (200msec)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 959

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup

Item No. Item Input Data Default

24 E&M - Loop Current Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 40 (200msec)

25 OPX - Loop Current Detection Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 40 (200msec)
26 All - DP Break Send Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 15 (60msec)
27 All - DP Make Send Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 10 (40msec)
28 All - DP Inter-digit Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 7 (700msec)
29 Loop - Hookflash Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
30 Ground - Hookflash Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
31 DID - Hookflash Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
32 E&M - Hookflash Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
33 OPX - Hookflash Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
34 All - Pause Send Time 1-255 (100sec - 25500sec) 3 (700sec)
35 DID - Wink Send Duration Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 25 (200msec)
36 DID - Delay Send Duration Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 25 (200msec)
37 DID - Incoming Wink Send Duration Time 1-255 (1100msec - 25500msec) 3 (300msec)
38 E&M - Wink Send Duration Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 25 (200msec)
39 E&M - Delay Send Duration Time 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 25 (200msec)
40 DID - Incoming Wink Send Duration Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 3 (300msec)
41 DID - Time Out Seizure-Wink/Delay Reeceive Maxi- 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 48 (4800msec)
mum Time
42 DID - Wink Signal, Receive Wink Duration Mini- 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 12 (96msec)
mum Time
43 DID - Wink Signal, Receive Wink Duration Maxi- 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 45 (360msec)
mum Time
44 E&M - Time Out Seizure-Wink/Delay Reeceive 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 48 (4800msec)
Maximum Time
45 E&M - Wink Signal, Receive Wink Duration Mini- 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 12 (96msec)
mum Time
46 DID - Wink Signal, Receive Wink Duration Maxi- 1-250 (8msec - 2040msec) 45 (360msec)
mum Time
47 All - Receive DP Make Minimum Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 3 (12msec)
48 All - Receive DP Make Maximum Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 19 (76msec)
49 All - Receive DP Break Minimum Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 3 (12msec)
50 All - Receive DP Break Maximum Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 25 (100msec)
51 All - Receive DP Inter-digit Minimum Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 125 (500msec)
52 E&M - Receive Hookflash Duration Minimum Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 3 (300msec)
53 E&M - Receive Hookflash Duration Maximum Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)

960 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup

Item No. Item Input Data Default

54 OPX - Receive Hookflash Duration Minimum Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 3 (300msec)
55 OPX - Receive Hookflash Duration Maximum Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
56 Loop - Loop Off Guard Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
57 Ground - Loop Off Guard Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
58 DID - Loop Off Guard Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
59 E&M - Loop Off Guard Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
60 OPX - Loop Off Guard Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
61 OPX - Double Ringing Send Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
62 OPX - Double Between Ringing Send Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 5 (500msec)
63 OPX - Double Ringing Send Time 2 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 25 (2500msec)
64 OPX - Double Between Ringing Send Time 2 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 30 (3000msec)
65 OPX - Single Ringing Send Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 10 (1000msec)
66 OPX - Single Between Ringing Send Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
67 Loop - Guard Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
68 Ground - Guard Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
69 DID - Guard Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
70 E&M - Guard Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
71 OPX - Guard Time 1 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 9 (900msec)
72 All - Guard Time 2 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 3 (12msec)
73 All - Dial Sending Complete time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 20 (2000msec)
74 All - On-Hook Bit Send Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 40 (4000msec)
75 Loop - Open Loop Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
76 Ground - Open Loop Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
77 DID - Open Loop Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
78 E&M - Open Loop Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
79 OPX - Open Loop Time 1-255 (100msec - 25500msec) 6 (600msec)
80 Loop - Close Loop Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 13 (52msec)
81 DID - Close Loop Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 13 (52msec)
82 Ground Loop - Close Loop Time 1-250 (4msec - 1020msec) 13 (52msec)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 961

Program 81 : Basic Hardware Setup for Trunk
81-08 : T1 Trunk Timer Setup
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• T1 Trunking

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 81-08 (T1 Trunk Timer Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 81 08
81-08-01
Ans Sig Detect LOOP 15
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
81-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

962 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone to set the incoming ring tones, which are the tones a
user hears when a call rings an extension. These tones are grouped into four ring tone Ranges (1-4),
also called patterns, that consist of a combination of frequencies. (You assign a specific Range to
trunks in Program 22-03 and to extensions in Program 15-02.) Within each Range there are three
frequency Types: High, Middle and Low. (Service Code 820 allows users to choose the Type for
their incoming calls.) Each Type in turn consists of two frequencies and the modulation “played”
simultaneously to make up the tone. These frequencies are determined by their Frequency Number
selected in Items 1 and 2 (see below). In this program, you assign the two Frequency Numbers and
Modulation for each Type, for each of the four Ranges. The chart below shows the default Fre-
quency Numbers for each Type in each Range.

Input Data
Incoming Ringing Tone Number 1- Pattern 1 (Trunk Incoming)
2- Pattern 2 (Trunk Incoming)
3- Pattern 3 (Trunk Incoming)
4- Pattern 4 (Trunk Incoming)
5- Intercom Incoming Pattern

Ringing Tone Type Number 1- High

2- Mid
3- Low

Item
No. Item Input Data

01 Frequency 1 1- 520Hz
2- 540Hz
02 Frequency 2 3- 660Hz
4- 760Hz
5- 1100Hz
6- 1400Hz
7- 2000Hz

03 Modulation 0- No modulation
1- 8Hz modulation
2- 16Hz modulation
3- envelope

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 963

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone
Default
Incoming Ringing Tone Frequency 1 Frequency 2 Modulation
Tone Number Type

Pattern 1 High 1100 1400 16Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 16Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 16Hz Modulation

Pattern 2 High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Pattern 3 High 1100 1100 envelope

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 660 envelope
Low 520 520 envelope

Pattern 4 High 1100 1100 No modulation

(Trunk Incoming) Mid 660 660 No modulation
Low 520 520 No modulation

Intercom Incoming Pat- High 1100 1400 8Hz Modulation

tern Mid 660 760 8Hz Modulation
Low 520 660 8Hz Modulation

Alarm Sensor Pattern High 760 760 envelope

Mid 760 760 envelope
Low 760 760 envelope

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Distinctive Ringing Tones and Flash Patterns
• Selectable Ring Tones

964 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-01 : Incoming Ring Tone

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-01 (Incoming Ring Tone):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 01
82-01-01 INC Freq 1
INC-Rng1 Freq1:5:1100Hz
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 965

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup
82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup to set the six LED types for each state
of the functions. A key telephone can show eight LED patterns (including On and Off). This pro-
gram defines the LED patterns on each function for a key telephone.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Incoming Call from Trunk/Extension 0-7 3

Voice Call
Camp On / Callback
Follow Me (Source side)
Monitor (Destination side)
Call Forward (Destination side)
Message Waiting (Destination side)

02 Hold by other extension 1

Normal Hold
Follow Me (Destination side)
Monitor (Source side)
Call Forward (Source side)

03 Exclusive Hold 5
Message Waiting (Source side)

04 Incoming Call on Trunk Key 4

Callback to Trunk Key

05 I-use of Trunk Key, Call Key, ICM Key 7

06 -- Not used -- 0

LED Pattern 0 : [OFF]

On
Off

LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

966 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-02 : Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup
LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)]
On
Off

LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 7 : [ON]

On
Off

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-02 (Key Telephone LED Pattern Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 02
82-02-01
LED01 3:Pattern3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 967

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup to define the LED patterns for special
functions on a DSS console.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 ACD Log In 0-7 1

02 ACD Log Out 0-7 4

03 ACD Emergency Call 0-7 3

LED Pattern 0 : [OFF]

On
Off

LED Pattern 1 : [FL: On(500ms)/Off(500ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 2 : [WK: On(250ms)/Off(250ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 3 : [RW: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 4 : [IR: On(125ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(625ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 5 : [IL: On(875ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 6 : [IW: On(625ms)/Off(125ms)/On(125ms)/Off(125ms)]

On
Off

LED Pattern 7 : [ON]

On
Off

968 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-03 : DSS Console LED Pattern Setup
Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-03 (DSS Console LED Pattern Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 03
82-03-01
ACD Log-In 1:Pattern1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 969

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup
82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup to define the various basic timers for the ASTU
PCB.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Companding method type 0- u-law 0 (u-law)

1- A-law

02 Ringing frequency 0- 25Hz 2 (16Hz)

1- 20Hz
2- 16Hz

03 Minimum break time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 2 (10ms)

04 Maximum break time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 20 (100ms)

05 Minimum make time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 2 (10ms)

06 Maximum make time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 20 (100ms)

07 Minimum hook flash time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 21 (105ms)

08 Maximum hook flash time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 200 (1000ms)

09 Minimum ground flash time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 21 (105ms)

10 Minimum off-hook time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 21 (105ms)

11 No detection time after off-hook 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 60 (300ms)

12 No detection time after pulse dial detection 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 70 (350ms)

13 Loop disconnect time, Reversal time 1-255 (10ms-2550ms) 60 (600ms)

14 Ring, Message wait period time 1-255 (5ms-1275ms) 150 (750ms)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

970 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-04 : SLIU Initial Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-04 (SLIU Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 04
82-04-01
Encoding Type 0: U-Law
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 971

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup to define the vari-
ous basic options for the layer 2 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Timer T200 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1 sec.)

02 Timer T201 1-255 (100-25500ms) 10 (1 sec.)

03 Timer T202 1-255 (100-25500ms) 20 (2 sec.)

04 Timer T203 1-255 (100-25500ms) 100 (10 sec.)

05 N200 1-255 3

06 N201 1-65535 (Byte) 260

07 N202 1-255 3

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

972 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-05 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-05 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 2 (S-Point) Initial Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 05
82-05-01
Timer T200 10
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-05-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 973

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup to define the various
basic timers for layer 3 of ISDN BRI/PRI S-Point.

Input Data
Layer 3 Timer Type Number 1-5

Item No. Item Input Data Default

1 T301 0,180-254 (sec) 180 (sec)

2 T302 1-254 (sec) 10 (sec)
3 T303 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
4 T304 0-254 (sec) 20 (sec)
5 T305 1-254 (sec) 30 (sec)
6 T306 0-254 (sec) 30 (sec)
7 T307 1-254 (sec) 180 (sec)
8 T308 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
9 T309 1-254 (sec) 90 (sec)
10 T310 0-180 (sec) 30 (sec)
11 T312 1-254 (sec) 6 (sec)
12 T313 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
13 T314 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
14 T316 (T317+1)-254 (sec) 120 (sec)
15 T317 1-(T316-1) 60 (sec)
16 T318 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
17 T319 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)
18 T320 1-254 (sec) 30 (sec)
19 T321 1-254 (sec) 30 (sec)
20 T322 1-254 (sec) 4 (sec)

Conditions
None

974 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-06 : ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup

Feature Cross Reference

• ISDN Compatibility

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-06 (ISDN BRI & PRI Layer 3 (S-Point) Timer Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 06
82-06-01 L3 Timer1
T301 180
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-06-nn L3 Timernn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Layer 3 Timer number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 975

Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports to define the CODEC
(QSLAC) Filter for each analogue extension port.

Input Data
Extension Port Number 001-256

CODEC Filter Type Default

0- No filter 1
1- 0dB Loss
2- 4dB Loss
3- 8dB Loss
4- Specified Data

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

976 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 82 : Basic Hardware Setup for Extension
82-07 : CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 82-07 (CODEC Filter Setup for Analogue Station Ports):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 82 07
82-07-01 Extn Port1
CODEC Filter 1:00dB Loss
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
82-07-nn Extn Portnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the extension port number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME
p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 977

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-01 : CS Data Setup
Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-01 : CS Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

978 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-02 : Air Clock Data Setup
83-02 : Air Clock Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 979

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-03 : Frame Offset Value
83-03 : Frame Offset Value

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

980 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-04 : Frequency Number Between PS and PS
83-04 : Frequency Number Between PS and PS

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 981

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-05 : CS Area Information
83-05 : CS Area Information

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

982 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-06 : CS Area Number Information
83-06 : CS Area Number Information

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 983

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-07 : CS DL2 Information Setup
83-07 : CS DL2 Information Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

984 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-08 : CS Additional ID Mode
83-08 : CS Additional ID Mode

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 985

Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-09 : CS Additional ID Setup
83-09 : CS Additional ID Setup

Level: Aspila EX
MF • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

986 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 83 : Basic Hardware Setup for Traveler
83-10 : Virtual Master CSID Setup
83-10 : Virtual Master CSID Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Not Available.

Description
This is a future item and is not currently used.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 987

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup
Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup to define the data of H.323.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 -- Not Used --

02 Number of G711 Audio Frame 2: 20 ms 3 Maximum number of G711 Audio

3: 30 ms Frame
03 G711 Silence Detection Mode 0:Disable 0 Define whether the silence detection
1:Enable enables on G711 or not

04 G711 type 0:A-law 1 Set the type of G711

1:þu-law (A-law orþu-law)

05 G729 Audio Frame 1: 10 ms 3 Maximum number of G729 Audio

2: 20 ms Frame
3: 30 ms
4: 40 ms
5: 50 ms
6: 60 ms
7: 70 ms
8: 80 ms
06 G.729 VAD Mode 0:Disable 0
1:Enable

07 G.729 Jitter Buffer Minimum 0-500 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.729 Jitter
Buffer

08 G.729 Jitter Buffer Type 0-500 ms 60 Set the average value of G.729 Jitter
Buffer

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Maximum 0-500 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.729 Jitter
Buffer

10 -- Not Used --

11 Number of G723 Audio Frame 1: 30 msec 1 Maximum number of G723 Audio

2: 60 msec Frame

12 G.723 VAD Mode 0:Disable 0

1:Enable

13 Maximum value of Jitter Delay 0-65535 msec 60 msec Maximum value of Jitter Delay for
audio delay

988 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

14 -- Not Used --

15 Jitter Buffer Mode 1: static 1 Set the mode of Jitter Buffer

2: adaptive during
silence
3: adaptive immediately
16 G.711 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~145 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.711 Jitter
Buffer

17 G.711 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~145 ms 60 Set the average value of G.711 Jitter
Buffer

18 G.711 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~145 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.711 Jitter
Buffer

19 G.723 Jitter Buffer (min.) 0~500 ms 30 Set the minimum value of G.723 Jitter
Buffer

20 G.723 Jitter Buffer (typ) 0~500 ms 60 Set the average value of G.723 Jitter
Buffer

21 G.723 Jitter Buffer (max) 0~500 ms 120 Set the maximum value of G.723 Jitter
Buffer

22 VAD threshold 0-30 20 Threshold of silence detection

(-20db~+10db) Change value based –30
Become invalid item if item 03 is set
0:-20db (-50dbm) to Disable
1:-19db (-49dbm)
:
20 : 0db
(-30dbm)
:
29: 9dbm
(-21dbm)
30:10dbm
(-20dbm)
23 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000 Noise level of silence
(-5000 - -7000dbm)

5000 : -5000dbm
:
7000 : -7000dbm
24 Echo canceler mode 0: Disable 1 Use Echo canceler or not
1: Enable

25 Echo canceler tail size 1: 8 ms 2 Become invalid item if item 24 is set

2: 16 ms to Disable
3: 32mS

26 Echo canceler nlp mode 0: Disable 0 Non-linear processing mode

1: Enable

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 989

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

27 Echo canceler nlp noise 40-70 (-40~-70) 70 Become invalid item if item 26 is set
to Disable
40 : -40 dbm
:
70 : -70 dbm
28 Echo canceler cng cfg 0: adaptive 0 Become invalid item if item 26 is set
1: fixed to Disable

29 Echo canceler 4w det 0: Disable 0

1: Enable

30 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

31 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

32 -- Not Used --

33 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711 PT 0 The option selected here determines

1:G723 PT what other options are applied from
2:G729 PT this program.

34 Band Control Mode 0:Off 0

1:On
35 Max Bandwidth 0-65535kbps 0

36 Fax Max Rate 0: V.27ter, 2400 bps 5

1: V.27ter, 4800 bps
2: V.29, 7200 bps
3: V.29, 9600 bps
4: V17, 12000 bps
5: V.17, 14400 bps

37 Fax Playout FIFO Nominal 0-600 ms 300 ms

Delay
38 Fax Packet Size 20-48 bytes 20

990 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

39 Fax modem Transmit Level 0 - -13dBm -6

40 Fax Modem CD Threshold 0: -26dBm 1

1: -33dBm
2: -43dBm

41 Fax no Activity Timeout Dura- 10-32000 sec 30

tion

42 Override Encapsulation Method 0: Open Channel 1 T.38/TRP UDP

Defined Packet Encap- Voice-Fax
sulation Close-Reopen
1: T.38 UDP
2: T.38/TRP UDP
43 High Speed Data Packet Rate 10-80 ms 60

44 Low Speed Data Redundancy 0-8 0

45 High Speed Data Redundancy 0-2 0

46 TCF Handling Method 1: TCF is Locally Gen- 1 For H.323 negotiation
erated and Checked
2: TCF is Sent Over the
Network

47 Maximum Low Speed Data 1-65535 1

Packetization

48 Transmit Network Timeout 10-32000 sec 150 sec

49 Eflag Start Timer 0-65535 2600 ms

50 Eflag Stop Timer 0-65535 2300 ms

51 Fax Relay: Scan Line Fix Up 0: Disable 1

Feature 1: Enable

52 Fax Relay: Eflags for First DIS 0: Disable 1

1: Enable
53 Fax Relay: FOP Protocol 0: Disable 1
Enhancement 1: Enable

54 Fax Relay: NSF Override 0: Disable 0

1: Enable

55 T30: ECM 0: Disable 1

1: Enable

56 T30: MR Page compression 0: Disable 1

1: Enable

57 NSF Country Code 0-65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

58 NSF Vendor Code 65535 Blank Fax Relay - NSF Override Disable

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 991

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-01 : CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

59 Fax Relay Function 0:Disable 0

1:Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-01 (CODEC Information Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 01
84-01-01
RAS Ucast Port20001
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

992 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup
84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup to define the data of H.225 and
H.245.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 H.225 Alerting Timer 0-255 sec 180 sec

02 H.225 Setup Acknowledge Timer 0-255 sec 9 sec

03 H.225 Setup Timer 0-255 sec 4 sec

04 H.225 Info Ack Timer 0-255 sec 9 sec

05 H.225 Call Proceeding Timer 0-255 sec 10 sec

06 -- Not Used --

07 H.245 Master Slave Determination Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

08 H.245 Master Slave Determination Retry 0-255 sec 3 sec

Count

09 H.245 Capability Exchange Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

10 H.245 Logical Channel Establishment 0-255 sec 50 sec Unidirectional or bi-directional logi-
Timer cal channel establishment timer

11 H.245 Mode Request Procedures Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

12 H.245 Close Logical Channel Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

13 H.245 Round Trip Delay Timer 0-255 sec 50 sec

14 H.245 Maintenance Loop 0-255 sec 50 sec

15 RAS GRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

16 GRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

17 RAS RRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

18 RRQ Retry Count 0-255 3

19 RAS URQ Timer 0-255 sec 3

20 URQ Retry Count 0-255 1

21 RAS ARQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 993

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

22 ARQ Retry Count 0-255 2

23 RAS BRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

24 BRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

25 RAS IRR Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

26 IRR Retry Count 0-255 2

27 RAS DRQ Timer 0-255 sec 8 sec

28 DRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

29 RAS LRQ Timer 0-255 sec 5 sec

30 LRQ Retry Count 0-255 2

31 RAS RAI Timer 0-255 sec 3 sec

32 RAI Retry Count 0-255 2

33 Call Signaling Port Number 0-65535 1730 It is control port for IP Telephone

34 - Not Used -

35 Fast Start 0: Disable 1

36 RAS 0-65535 20001

37 Terminal Type 0-255 60 H.245 Terminal Type

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

994 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-02 : H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-02 (H.225, H.245 Information Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 02
84-02-01
H225 Alert Time 180sec.
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-02-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 995

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-03 : NGT Information Basic Setup
84-03 : NGT Information Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-03 : NGT Information Basic Setup to define the details of NGT.

Input Data
Terminal Type 1:Dterm IP
2:Smart Phone
3:Bandle IP Phone

Note: Only items 04 and 05 will be used.

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 NGT Signal receive port Num- 0-65535 3001

ber

02 DRS port Number 0-65535 3000

03 - Not Used -

04 - Not Used -

05 - Not Used -

06 Area 0: Japan 0
1: USA
2: Australia
3: EU
4: Asia
5: Other Country
07 Type of Service Mode 1:Invalid 1
2:IP Precedence
3:Diffserve
08 Type of service 0x00-0xff C0 This data will be sent to NGT
Terminal when NGT Terminal is
registered.
09 Start Port 1-512 1

996 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-03 : NGT Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

10 Local 0: 0
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-03 (NGT Information Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 03
84-03-01
NGT_Recv_Port
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 997

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-04 : VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup
84-04 : VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-04 : VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup to define whether or not the
DHCP Server on the VoIPU PCB is used.

Input Data
Item Input Data Default Description

DHCP Server Mode 0:Disable 0 Define whether or not the DHCP Server is used.
1:Enable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-04 (VoIPU PCB DHCP Server Mode Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 04
84-04-01
DHCP Serv.Mode0:Off
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

998 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-05 : VoIPU IP Address Setup
84-05 : VoIPU IP Address Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-05 : VoIPU IP Address Setup to define the IP Address of the VoIPU PCB.

Input Data
SLOT Number 01-16

Item Input Data Default Description Related Program

IP 1.0.0.1–126.255.255.254 173.16.0.20 Set IP Address of VoIPU 84-04

Address 128.1.0.1–191.254255.254 PCB. This become invalid data
192.0.1.1–223.255.254.254 IP Address will be increased if Program 84-04 is set to
in accordance with number 0:Disable.
of slot.
LAN 0: Auto Detect 0 NIC Auto Negotiation
1: 100 Mbps, Full Duplex
2: 100 Mbps, Half Duplex
3: 10 Mbps, Full Duplex
4: 10 Mbps, Half Duplex

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 999

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-05 : VoIPU IP Address Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-05 (VoIPU IP Address Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 05
84-05-01 Slot1
IP Add 172.16 .0 .20
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-05-nn Slotnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1000 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-06 : VoIPU Setup
84-06 : VoIPU Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-06 : VoIPU Setup to setup the details of VoIPU PCB.

Input Data
SLOT Number 01-16

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.

01 RTP Port Number 0-65535 10020

02 RTCP Port Number RTP Port Number + 1 10021 It has to be RTP Port Number + 1.
03 H.245 Port Number 0-65535 10100

04 Fractlost threshold 0-4294967295 ms 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.
05 pktsLost threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.

06 Ext HighSeq threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.

07 jitter threshold 0-4294967295 sec 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.
08 lastSR threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.

09 delayLSR threshold 0-4294967295 0 The data will be sent to the NTCPU if the
value exceeds the defined value.

10 DTMF behavior 0 : DTMF Relay disabled 0

1 : In-Band DTMF relay,
do NOT report to Host
processor
2 : Out of Band DTMF
relay, do not pass tones as
voice

11 0-65535 4000

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1001

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-06 : VoIPU Setup

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-06 (VoIPU Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 06
84-06-01 Slot1
RTP Port No. 10020
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-06-nn Slotnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1002 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-07 : F/W Download Setup
84-07 : F/W Download Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-07 : F/W Download Setup to setup the download data for the IP phone.

Input Data
Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Server Mode 0: TFTP 0

1: FTP

02 File Server 1.0.0.1-126.255.255.254 0.0.0.0

128.1.0.1-191.254.255.254
192.0.1.1-223.255.254.254

03 Log-in Name 20 Characters Max. No Setting

04 Password 20 Characters Max. No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1003

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-07 : F/W Download Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-07 (F/W Download Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 07
84-07-01
Server Mode 0:TFTP
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-07-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1004 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-08 : F/W Name Setup
84-08 : F/W Name Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-08 : F/W Name Setup to setup the firmware name of the IP phone for download.

Input Data
Terminal Type 1: ITR-16DK-1D
2: IP-RD
3: IP-R
4: ITR-32D-1D
5: IP1WW_IP_Adapter
6: ITR-LC-1
7: IP1NA-24TIXH
8: IP1WW-24TIXH

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.

01 Firmware Directory 64 Characters Maximum No Setting

02 Firmware File Name 30 Characters Maximum No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1005

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-08 : F/W Name Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-08 (F/W Download Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 08
84-08-01
FirmWare Dir -
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1006 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-09 : VLAN Setup
84-09 : VLAN Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-09 : VLAN Setup to setup the VLAN data.

Input Data

Item
No. Item Input Data Default

01 VLAN 0 = Disable 0
1= Enable

02 VLAN ID 1 - 4094 1
03 Priority 0-7 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-09 (VLAN Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 09
84-09-01
VLAN Mode 0:Off
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1007

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-10 : ToS Setup
84-10 : ToS Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-10 : ToS Setup to setup the ToS data.

Input Data
Protocol Type 1: Default
2: DRS
3: Protims
4: Voice Control
5: H.323
6: TRP_RTCP
7: SIP (2003_2)

Item Item Input Data Default Description

No.

01 ToS Mode 0 = Disable 0

1 = IP Precedence
2: Diffserv

02 Priority, IP Precedence 0-7 0 01 ToS, 1:IP Precedence

03 Low Delay 0-1 0 01 ToS, 1:IP Precedence

04 Wide Band 0-1 0 01 ToS, 1:IP Precedence

05 High Reliability 0-1 0 01 ToS, 1:IP Precedence

06 Low Cost 0-1 0 01 ToS, 1:IP Precedence

07 Priority (Diff.) 0-63 0 01 ToS, 2:Diffserv

Conditions
None

1008 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-10 : ToS Setup

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-10 (ToS Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 10
84-10-01 Protocol Type1
ToS Mode 0:Invalid
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-10-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Protocol type to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1009

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup
84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup to setup the firmware name of
the IP phone for download.

Input Data
Type 1
2
3
4
5

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 G711 Audio Frame 3 3

02 G711 VAD Mode 0...Disable 0

1...Enable

03 G711 Type 0...A-law 1

1...u-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~145 ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Type 0~145 ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~145 ms 120

07 G.729 Audio Frame 3-8 3

08 G.729 VAD Mode 0…Disable 0

1…Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500 ms 30

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer Type 0~500 ms 60

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500 ms 120

12 G.723 Audio Frame 1-2 1

13 G.723 VAD Mode 0…Disable 0

1…Enable

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500 ms 30

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Type 0~500 ms 60

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500 ms 120

1010 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1: static 1

2: adaptive during
silence
3: adaptive immed

18 VAD Threshold 0-30 (19db~+10db, 20

Adaptec threshold)
0: Adaptec threshold
1:-19db(-49dbm)
:
20 : 0db (-30dbm)
:
29: 9dbm(-21dbm)
30:10dbm(-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 (-5000 7000

thru -7000dbm)

5000:-5000dbm
:
7000:-7000dbm

20 Echo Canceler Mode 0: Disable 1

1: Enable

21 Echo Canceler Tail Size 1: 8 ms 2 84-11-21 - Disable

2: 16 ms
3: 32mS

22 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0: Disable 0 Non-linear processing mode

1: Enable

23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise 40-70 (-40~-70) 70 84-11-22 - Disable

40 : -40 dbm
:
70 : -70 dbm

24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG 0: adaptive 0 84-11-22 - Disable

1: fixed

25 Echo Canceler 4w Det 0: Disable 0

1: Enable

26 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1011

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-11 : Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

27 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

28 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711_PT 0

1:G723_PT
2:G729_PT

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-11 (Dterm IP CODEC Information Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 11
84-11-01 Type1
G711 Audio Frame 3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-11-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the type number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1012 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup
84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup to setup the CODEC
information of H.323 phones.

Input Data
Item Item Input Data Default Description
No.

01 G711 Audio Frame 2,3 3

02 G711 VAD Mode 0...Disable 0

1...Enable

03 G711 Type 0...A-law 1

1...m-law

04 G.711 Jitter Buffer Min 0~145 ms 30

05 G.711 Jitter Buffer Type 0~145 ms 60

06 G.711 Jitter Buffer Max 0~145 ms 120

07 G.729 Audio Frame 23-8 3

08 G.729 VAD Mode 0…Disable 0

1…Enable

09 G.729 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500 ms 30

10 G.729 Jitter Buffer Type 0~500 ms 60

11 G.729 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500 ms 120

12 G.723 Audio Frame 1-2 1

13 G.723 VAD Mode 0…Disable 0

1…Enable

14 G.723 Jitter Buffer Min 0~500 ms 30

15 G.723 Jitter Buffer Type 0~500 ms 60

16 G.723 Jitter Buffer Max 0~500 ms 120

17 Jitter Buffer Mode 1: static 1

2: adaptive during
silence
3: adaptive immed

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1013

Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

18 VAD Threshold 0-30 (19db~+10db, 20

Adaptec threshold)
0: Adaptec threshold
1:-19db(-49dbm)
:
20 : 0db (-30dbm)
:
29: 9dbm(-21dbm)
30:10dbm(-20dbm)

19 Idle Noise Level 5000-7000 7000

(-5000_-7000dbm)

5000:-5000dbm
:
7000:-7000dbm

20 Echo Canceler Mode 0: Disable 1

1: Enable

21 Echo Canceler Tail Size 1: 8 ms 2 84-12-20 - Disable

2: 16 ms
3: 32mS

22 Echo Canceler NLP Mode 0: Disable 0 Non-linear processing mode

1: Enable

23 Echo Canceler NLP Noise 40-70 (-40~-70) 70 84-12-22 - Disable

40 : -40 dbm
:
70 : -70 dbm

24 Echo Canceler CNG CFG 0: adaptive 0 84-12-22 - Disable

1: fixed

25 Echo Canceler 4w Det 0: Disable 0

1: Enable

26 TX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

1014 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 84 : Hardware Setup for VoIP
84-12 : H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

27 RX Gain 0-28 (-14~+14) 14

0 : -14 dbm
1 : -13 dbm
:
14 : 0 dbm
:
27 : 13 dbm
28 : 14 dbm

28 Audio Capability Priority 0:G711_PT 0

1:G723_PT
2:G729_PT

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 84-12 (H.323 Phone CODEC Information Basic Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 84 12
84-12-01
G711 Audio Frame 3
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
84-12-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1015

Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-01 : SHUBU LAN Setup
Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-01 : SHUBU LAN Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 85-01 : SHUBU LAN Setup to define the LAN setup for each slot.

Input Data
Hub Slot 1-16

Hub Port 0-8

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Link Speed/Duplex 0 = Enable 0

1 = Disable

02 Link Speed 0 = 10Mbps 1 85-01-01 - Disable

1 = 100Mbps

03 Half Duplex/Hull Duplex 0 = Half 1 85-01-01 - Disable

1 = Full
04 0 = MDIX 2
1 = MDI
2 = Auto
05 Back Pressure 0 = Disable 0 Half Duplex - Back Pressure
1 = Enable

06 802.3x 0 = Enable 0 Full Duplex - 802.3x

1 = Disable

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Networking

1016 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-01 : SHUBU LAN Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 85-01 (SHUBU LAN Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 85 01
85-01-01 Slot No 1
Port1 AutoNego 0:Enable
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
85-01-nn Slot No n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1017

Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-02 : VLAN Setup
85-02 : VLAN Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 85-02 : VLAN Setup to define the VLAN setup for each SHUBU PCB.

Input Data
Hub Slot 1-16

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 VLAN Mode 0 = Enable 0

1 = Disable

02 Port 1 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

03 Port 2 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

04 Port 3 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

05 Port 4 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

06 Port 5 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

07 Port 6 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

08 Port 7 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

09 Port 8 VLAN ID 1 - 4095 1

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Networking

1018 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-02 : VLAN Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 85-02 (VLAN Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 85 02
85-02-01 Slot No 1
Tag VLAN Mode 0:Dis-
able back ­ ¯
select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
85-02-nn Slot No n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1019

Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-03 : Priority Setup
85-03 : Priority Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 85-03 : Piority Setup to set the priority of packet management for each SHUBU
PCB.

Input Data
Hub Slot 1-16

Hub Port 0-8

Item Item Input Data Default

No.

01 Priority 0 = Disable 0
2 = Low
3 = High

02 RX High 0-7 1

03 TX High 0-7 7
04 TX Low 0-7 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Networking

1020 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-03 : Priority Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 85-03 (Priority Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 85 03
85-03-01 Slot No 1
Port1 Default 0:Disable
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
85-03-nn Slot No n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1021

Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup
85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup to define the port mirroring setup for each SHUBU
PCB.

Input Data
Hub Slot 1-16

Item
No. Item Input Data Default Description

01 Port 0 = Enable 0
1 = Disable

02 Source Port 0-7 0

03 Target Port 0-7 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Networking

1022 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 85 : SHUBU LAN
85-04 : Port Mirroring Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 85-04 (Port Mirroring Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 85 04
85-04-01 Slot No 1
Port Mirroring 0:Disable
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
85-04-nn Slot No n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the slot number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1023

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date
Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-01 : Installation Date

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-01 : Installation Date to define the installation date of system.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Year 00-99 00 (No Setting)

02 Month 01-12 00 (No Setting

03 Day 01-31 00 (No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-01 (Installation Date):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 01
90-01-01
Install Year 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1024 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Setting the Programming Password
90-02 : Setting the Programming Password

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-02 : Setting the Programming Password to set the system passwords. For pass-
word entry purposes, the system allows 8 users to be defined. Each user can have a:
• Unique alphanumeric name (up to 10 alphanumeric characters long.
• Password entry of up to 8 digits (using 0-9, # and *)
• Password level

The “IN” level password is used by the “System Installer” for system programming purposes. The
“SA” or “SB” level password cannot access the “IN” level programs. The reverse type (white on
black) just beneath the Description heading is the program’s access level. You can only use the pro-
gram if your access level meets or exceeds the level the program requires. (“SA” level password
can access to “SA” or “SB” programs, and “SB” level password can access to “SB” programs
only.)

!! Caution !!
It is NOT recommended to change this data unnecessarily. If the digits are changed and then forgot-
ten, there may be no normal way to enter the program mode again.

Input Data
User Number 1-8

Item No. Item Input Data

01 User Name Max. 10 characters

02 Password Up to 8 digits

03 User level 0- Prohibited user

1- MF (Manufacturer level - for NEC use only)
2- IN (Installer level)
3- SA (System administrator level 1)
4- SB (System administrator level 2)

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1025

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Setting the Programming Password
Default
User No. User Name Password Level Level Description

1 NEC-I - 1 (MF) Blocked User (Manufac-

turer programming access
only)

2 Aspila EX 12345678 2 (IN) Installer Level - Access to

all programs this manual

3 CUSTOMER1 0000 3 (SA) System Administrator

Level 1 - Restricted access

4 CUSTOMER2 9999 4 (SB) System Administrator

Level 2 - More restricted
access
5 -- Not Used -- -- Not Used -- -

6 -- Not Used -- -- Not Used -- -

7 -- Not Used -- -- Not Used -- -

8 -- Not Used -- -- Not Used -- -

Conditions
More than one extension can be in the programming mode.

Feature Cross Reference

None

1026 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-02 : Setting the Programming Password

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-02 (Setting the Programming Password):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 02
90-02-01 User1
User name -NEC-I
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-02-nn Usern
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the User number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1027

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-03 : Save Data
90-03 : Save Data

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-03 : Save Data to save the programmed data on the SRAM and Flash ROM to
the Removable Compact Flash Memory. This program should be used after changing the pro-
grammed data.

Input Data
[Save?] : Dial 1 and TRFR (Press only TRFR key for cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-03 (Save Data):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 03
90-03-01
Data Save YES:1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-03-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1028 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-04 : Load Data
90-04 : Load Data

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-04 : Load Data to load the system data from the inserted Compact Flash Mem-
ory to the SRAM and Flash ROM in the system.

Input Data
[Load?] : Dial 1 and TRFR (Press only TRFR key for cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-04 (Load Data):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 04
90-04-01
Data Load YES:1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-04-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1029

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-05 : Slot Control
90-05 : Slot Control

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-05 : Slot Control to close (turn off) or delete (uninstall) circuit boards (slots
1-16).

Delete allows you to completely uninstall the PCB. You might want to do this if you want to
remove a PCB and plug it into a different slot - and still retain the port assignments. If a different
type of interface card is being installed into a slot previously used (example; changing from a
ATRU to DSTU PCB), the slot should be deleted (option 1) first before installing the new interface
card.

Reset allows you to send a reset code.

Input Data
Menu Number 1- Delete
2- Reset

Slot Number

1-16

Conditions
When you delete or reset a PCB, you must first remove it from its slot then run Program 90-05.
When reusing the slot for another PCB, you must plug the PCB in or reset the system before the
system will use the slot again.

Feature Cross Reference

None

1030 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-05 : Slot Control

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-05 (Slot Control):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 05
90-05-01 Menu 1
Slot Number
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-05-nn Menu n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1031

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-06 : Trunk Control
90-06 : Trunk Control

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-06 : Trunk Control is used for the trunk maintenance. Busy Out lets you block a
PCB from placing outgoing calls (just like placing the PCB switch down). Once busied out, none of
the ports on the PCB can be used for new calls. Existing calls, however, are not torn down.

Input Data
Menu Number 0- Set Busy Out
1- Reset/Release Busy Out

Trunk Port Number

1-200

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

1032 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-06 : Trunk Control

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-06 (Trunk Control):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 06
90-06-01 Menu 1
TRK Port
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-06-nn Menu n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1033

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-07 : Extension Control
90-07 : Extension Control

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-07 : Extension Control is used for the extension maintenance.

Input Data
Menu Number 1- Hardware Reset
2- Software Reset

Extension Number

Up to 8 digits

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-07 (Extension Control):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 07
90-07-01 Menu 1
Ext number
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-07-nn Menu n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Menu number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1034 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-08 : System Reset
90-08 : System Reset

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-08 : System Reset is used to perform a system reset.

Input Data
[Reset?] : Dial 1 and HOLD (Press only HOLD key for cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-08 (System Reset):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 08
90-08-01
SYS-Reset YES:1
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-08-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1035

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time to define the time the system will automati-
cally reset.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Month 00-12 (Note 1) 00

02 Day 00-31 (Note 2) 00

03 Hour 00-23 00

04 Minute 00-59 00

Note 1. If the Month is set to “00” and Day has been set, the system will automatically be reset
every month of defined day.
Note 2. If the Day is set to “00” and the Time (Hour and Minute) has been set, the system will
automatically be reset every day of defined time.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

1036 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-09 : Automatic System Reset Time

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-09 (Automatic System Reset Time):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 09
90-09-01
SysReset Month0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-09-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1037

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup
90-10 : System Alarm Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-10 : System Alarm Setup to assign a status to system alarms. You can designate
an alarm as Major or Minor. This program also assigns whether or not the alarm is displayed to a
key telephone and whether or not the alarm information is reported to the pre-defined destination.

Input Data
Alarm Number 001-100

Item No. Item Input Data

01 Alarm Type 0- Not set

1- Major Alarm
2- Minor Alarm

02 Report 0- Not report (No auto-dial)

1- Report (auto-dial)

Default
Is Used To
Alarm Type Report Note Action
Advise of . . .

1 2 (MIN) 0 Board Initialization Initialization failure or the Remove and reinstall the PCB.
Error PCB is defective. If RECover message is received
in the alarm report, the PCB is
good. If not, replace with a new
PCB.

2 2 (MIN) 0 Board Initial Test PCB initial test failure or the Remove and reinstall the PCB.
Error PCB is defective. If RECover message is received
in the alarm report, the PCB is
good. If not, replace with a new
PCB.

3 2 (MIN) 0 Board Installation PCB was unplugged without Check the PCB installation.
Error using the proper procedure.

4 2 (MIN) 0 Communication Error PCB communication failure Remove and reinstall the PCB.
Between Board and has occurred. If RECover message is received
NTCPU in the alarm report, the PCB is
good. If not, replace with a new
PCB.

1038 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup

Is Used To
Alarm Type Report Note Advise of . . . Action

5 0 0 Download Error Download may have failed After unblocking the PCB, if
because the PCB is blocked RECover message is received
(disabled) or the sub-pro- in the alarm report, it is cor-
gram does not exist on the rected. If not, then replace the
system flash card. system flash card.
6 0 0 -- Not Used --

7 1 (MAJ) 0 Power Failure System power supply may Check the system AC switch,
be defective or commercial fuse and AC outlet. If still faulty,
power is off. replace the power supply.

8 1 (MAJ) 0 RAM Backup Battery RAM backup battery on the Check the battery connector. If
Error CPRU PCB is unplugged or it is connected correctly, then
defective. replace the battery.

9 0 0 Blocking (No default Failure may have occurred Check the terminal wiring and
setting) because: reconnect properly. Then
• Terminal blocking unplug and plug in the PCB. If
detected. RECover message is received
• Terminal is unplugged. in the alarm report, it is correct.
• Wire is disconnected. If not, replace the PCB and/or
• DSTU card is defective. terminal.

10 0 0 ISDN

11 0 0 CTI

12 0 0 ACD

13 0 0 -- Not Used --

: : : :

30 2 (MIN) 0 SMDR Buffer Full The SMDR buffer is full. Check the printer for the
SMDR.

31 0 0
: : : :

35 0 0 CS Blocking

36 0 0 CS Error Information 1

37 0 0 CS Transmission Error

38 0 0 CSIU Dch Error

39 0 0 CSIU Transmission
Error

40 0 0 CS Error Information 2

41 0 0

: : :

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1039

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-10 : System Alarm Setup

Is Used To
Alarm Type Report Note Advise of . . . Action

50 0 0

51 0 0
52 0 0 VM/HD

53 0 0

: : :
100 0 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-10 (System Alarm Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 10
90-10-01 Alarm No1
Alarm Type 2:MIN-alrm
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-10-nn Alarm Nonn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Alarm number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p or
VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1040 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-11 : System Alarm Report
90-11 : System Alarm Report

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-11 : System Alarm Report to define the details of the system alarm report.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 System Alarm Display Telephone Extension Number No setting

Assign the display keyset port that should (Up to 8 digits)
receive system alarms.

02 Report Method 0- No report 0

1- Auto-Call to outside

03 Destination for Report Telephone Number No setting

Define the Remote Service Center telephone (Up to 24 digits)
number. This is the number the system dials
for Automatic Fault Reporting. The number
can be up to 24 digits long, using the charac-
ters 0-9, # and *.

04 Used a Trunk Group for Report 0-100 0

Define the trunk group used when placing
calls to the Service Center for Automatic
Fault Reporting.

05 Reported Customer ID Customer ID No setting

Define the site identification data sent to the (Up to 16 digits)
Service Center when automatically report-
ing a fault. The data can consist of alphanu-
meric characters up to 16 digits long.

06 SMTP Host Name Up to 255 Characters No setting

07 SMTP Host Port Number 0-65535 25

08 To Address Up to 255 Characters No setting

09 Reply Address Up to 255 Characters No setting

10 From Address Up to 255 Characters No setting

11 DNS Primary Address 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

12 DNS Secondary Address 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255 0.0.0.0

13 Customer Name Up to 255 Characteers No setting

Conditions
None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1041

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-11 : System Alarm Report

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-11 (System Alarm Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 11
90-11-01
Alarm Disp TEL
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-11-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1042 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-12 : System Alarm Output
90-12 : System Alarm Output

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-12 : System Alarm Output to set the options for the alarm report. This program
has 6 separate menu options. Define the output port to be used as the output for system alarm report
and set the system alarm options. The system can have up to 50 reports.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0- No setting 0

Indicate the type of connection used 1- COM port (NTCPU)
for the System Alarms. The baud 2- USB port (NTCPU)
rate for the COM port should be set 3- -- Reserve –
in Program 10-21-02. 4- CTA/CTU

02 Destination Extension Number Extension Number No setting

If the output port type (item 1) is set (Up to 8 digits)
to CTA, enter the extension number
with the CTA connection.

03 Output All Alarm Reports Print All? (Yes : 1) -

04 Printout New Alarm Reports Print New? (Yes: 1) -

05 Clear All Alarm Reports All Clear? (Yes : 1) -

06 Output Mode 0- Manual 0

1- Auto

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1043

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-12 : System Alarm Output

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-12 (System Alarm Output):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 12
90-12-01
Output Type 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-12-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1044 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-13 : System Information Output
90-13 : System Information Output

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-13 : System Information Output to define the output port to be used as the sys-
tem information output. The baud rate for the COM port should be set in Program 10-21-02.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output Port Type 0- No setting 0

Indicate the type of connection 1- COM port (NTCPU)
used for the SMDR. 2- USB port (NTCPU)
3- -- Reserve –
4- CTA/CTU

02 Destination Extension Number Extension Number No setting

If the output port type (item 1) is (Up to 8 digits)
set to CTA, enter the extension
number with the CTA connection.

03 Output Command Dial 1 and press HOLD -

Dialing 1 from this program sends (Press only HOLD key for cancel)
the system report to the connected
device.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1045

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-13 : System Information Output

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-13 (System Information Output):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 13
90-13-01
Output Type 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-13-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1046 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-16 : Main Software Information
90-16 : Main Software Information

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-16 : Main Software Information to display the main software information on
the NTCPU. This information can also be viewed outside of system programming by pressing
CHECK and then the HOLD key on any display keyset.

Input Data
Item No. Item Data Component

01 Version Number 01.00~99.99 ASCII Code (5 Byte)

02 Software Release Date May 22 2002 17:53:46 ASCII Code (20 Byte)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-16 (Main Software Information):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 16
90-16-01
Version No 00.18
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-16-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1047

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-17 : Firmware Information
90-17 : Firmware Information

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-17 : Firmware Information to display the firmware information on the NTCPU
and other PCBs.

Input Data
Item No. Item Data Component

01 DSP Firmware Version Number 00.00.00.00_15.15.15.15 BCD Code (2 Byte)

02 DSP Firmware Version Number 00.00.00.00_15.15.15.15 BCD Code (2 Byte)

03 ESI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

04 SLI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

05 COI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

06 BRI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

07 PRI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

08 CSIU Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

09 CS Firmware Version Number 00.00_FF.FF BCD Code (1 Byte)

10 TLI Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

11 DIOP Firmware Version Number 00.00_15.15 BCD Code (1 Byte)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

1048 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-17 : Firmware Information

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-17 (Firmware Information):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 17
90-17-01
DSPDB Ver. 02.08.01.04
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-17-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1049

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-18 : Password Initialization for Japanese Character Telephone
90-18 : Password Initialization for Japanese Character Telephone

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
This program is not used.

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

1050 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-19 : Dial Block Release
90-19 : Dial Block Release

Level: Aspila EX
SA • Available.

Description
When the extension number is entered in Program 90-19 : Dial Block Release, the extension will
be released from the Dial Block restriction.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Input Data

[Release?] : Dial 1 and press TRFR

(Press only TRFR key for cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Toll Restriction

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-19 (Dial Block Release):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 19
90-19-01 TEL301
CLR Dial Block
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-19-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1051

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup to define the details of the traffic report.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Call Traffic Output 0- Not measured 0

1- Measure
02 All Line Busy Output 0- No sum 0
1- Sum up

03 All Line Busy Output 0- Not detected 0

1-256
(Report when the data is reached to
the defined value)

04 DTMF Receiver Busy Output 0

05 Dial Tone Detector Busy Output 0

06 Caller ID Receiver Busy Output 0

07 Voice Mail Channel All Busy Output 0

08 ACD Operator All Busy Output 0

09 Attendant Channel All Busy Output 0

10 Base Station All Busy Output 0

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Traffic Management Reporting (TMS)

1052 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-20 : Traffic Report Data Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-20 (Traffic Report Data Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 20
90-20-01
Call Traffic 0:No
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-20-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1053

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-21 : Traffic Report Output
90-21 : Traffic Report Output

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-21 : Traffic Report Output to define the output port to be used as the traffic
report output.

Input Data
Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Output port type 0- No setting 0

1- COM port (NTCPU)
2- USB port (NTCPU)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• Traffic Management Reporting (TMS)

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-21 (Traffic Report Output):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 21
90-21-01
Output_Port 0:None
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-21-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1054 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information
90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-22 : NGT Terminal Version information to define the hardware and firmware
version of the NGT terminal.

Input Data
Terminal Type 1:Dterm IP
2:Smart Phone
3:Bandle IP Phone
4:ITR-32D-1D
5:IP1WW_IP_Adapter
6:ITR-LC-1
7:IP1NA-24TIXH
8:IP1WW-24TIXH

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Hardware Version 00~FF 00

02 Firmware Version 00.00~FF.FF 00.00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1055

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-22 : NGT Terminal Version Information

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-22 (NGT Terminal Version Information):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 22
90-22-01 Tel kind 1
Hardware Ver. 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-22-nn Tel kind n
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Telephone Type/Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1056 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones
90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-23 : Deleting Registration of IP Telephones to delete the registered IP tele-
phone from the system.

Input Data
Extension Number Up to 8 digits

Input Data

[Delete?] : Dial 1 and press TRFR

(Press only TRFR key for cancel)

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

• VoIP

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-23 (Deleting Registration of IP Telephones):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 23
90-23-01 TEL200
Del.IP-Phone
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-23-nn TELnnn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the telephone number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the VOLUME p
or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1057

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup to set up when the alarm
report will print..

Input Data
Notification Number 1-12

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 Month 00-12 (0=disabled) 00

02 Day 00-31 00

03 Hour 00-23 00

04 Minute 00-59 00

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

1058 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-24 : System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-24 (System Alarm Report Notification Time Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 24
90-24-01 Noti1
Month 0
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-24-nn Notin
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Telephone Type/Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1059

Program 90 : Maintenance Program
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup
90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 90-25 : System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup to define the mail address to receive
the system alarm report CC Mail setup.

Input Data
CC Number 1-5

Item No. Item Input Data Default

01 CC Mail Address Up to 255 Characters No Setting

Conditions
None

Feature Cross Reference

None

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 90-25 (System Alarm Report CC Mail Setup):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 90 25
90-25-01 CC No1
Address
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
90-25-nn CC Non
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Select the Telephone Type/Kind number to be programmed by pressing the FLASH or the
VOLUME p or VOLUME q keys.
5. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
6. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1060 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program

Level: Aspila EX
IN • Available.

Description
Use Program 92-01 : Copy Program to copy the data for one program to another keyset, port,
group, etc. Refer to the following charts to see which programs which can be copied.

Input Data
Program Number XX-XX

Item Item Input Data

No.

01 Source Number • In case of Trunk Base :

Enter the extension, trunk, group, etc. Trunk Port Number 1-200
from which the data will be copied. • In case of Trunk Group Base :
Trunk Group Number 1-100
• In case of Extension Base :
Extension Number (up to 8 digits)
• In case of Department Group Base :
Department Group Number 1-64
• In case of DSS :
DSS Console Number 1-32
Destination Number (From)
Enter the first extension, trunk, group,
etc. number to which the information is
to be copied.

Destination Number (To)

Enter the last extension, trunk, group,
etc. number to which the information is
to be copied. If the information is only
be copied to one extension, trunk,
group, etc., enter the information
entered in the Destination Number
(From) entry.

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1061

Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program
Note: Copy Program is applicable only for the following programs.

Trunk Port Base

Program No. Program Name Note

14-01 Trunk Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Trunk Name (Item 01).

14-02 Analogue Trunk Data Setup

14-04 Behind PBX Setup

14-08 Music on Hold Source for Trunks

14-09 Conversation Recording Destination for Trunk

21-03 Trunk Group Routing for Trunks

21-12 ISDN Calling Party Number Setup for Trunk

22-02 Incoming Service Type Setup

22-03 Trunk Ring Tone Setup

22-05 IRG Assignment for Normal Ring Trunk

22-08 Second IRG Setup for unanswered DIL / IRG

31-05 Incoming Ring Tone Audible on External
Speaker

Trunk Group Base

Program No. Program Name Note

35-03 SMDR Port Assignment for Trunk Group

Extension Base

Program No. Program Name Note

15-01 Extension Basic Data Setup (include Virtual Copy all data except extension name (item 01).
Extension)

15-02 Multi-Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-03 Single Line Telephone Basic Data Setup

15-04 PHS Terminal Basic Data Setup Copy Item 11, 12 and 13.

15-06 Trunk Access Map for Extension

15-07 Programmable Function Key

15-08 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Setup

15-09 Virtual Extension Ring Assignment

1062 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program

15-10 Incoming Virtual Extension Ring Tone Order

Setup
15-11 Virtual Extension Delayed Ring Assignment

15-12 Conversation Recording Destination for Exten-

sion

20-06 Class of Service for Extension

21-02 Trunk Group Routing for Extensions

21-04 Toll Restriction Class for Extensions

21-11 Hotline Assignment

23-03 Ringing Line Preference

23-04 Ringing Line Preference for Virtual Extensions

24-03 Park Group Assignment

31-02 Internal Paging Group Assignment

Department Group Base

Program No. Program Name Note

16-01 Department (Extension) Group Basic Data Setup Copy all data except Group Name (Item 01).

35-04 SMDR Port Assignment for Department Group

DSS Console Base

Program No. Program Name Note

30-01 DSS Console Operation Mode

30-03 DSS Key Assignment

Conditions
Using this program to copy a keyset’s Programmable Function Keys will copy all the keys whether
they exist on the phone to which the programming is being copied. This may cause confusion when
trying to define a key which is already defined but which doesn’t exist on the phone (will display as
“DUPLICATE DATA”). It is recommend to either clear these non-existent keys or to only copy
from an extension which has the same or fewer number of keys than the extension to which the pro-
gramming is being copied.

Feature Cross Reference

None

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1063

Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program

Telephone Programming Instructions

To enter data for Program 92-01 (Copy Program):
1. Enter the programming mode.
2. 92 01
92-01-01
Copy Function
back ­ ¯ select
3. Enter the number of the item you want to program.
92-01-nn
nnnnn
¬ ®
4. Enter data for the item you selected + HOLD.
5. Enter data for the next item in the program.
OR
Press MSG once to enter a new item number.
OR
Press MSG until you’ve exited that series’s programming section.

1064 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program

- For Your Notes -

Aspila EX Software Manual Programming 1065

Program 92 : Copy Program
92-01 : Copy Program

1066 Programming Aspila EX Software Manual

 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX
DXE Program Number Equivalent 0114-17 81-01-09
0114-12 81-01-16
DXE Aspila EX 0115 82-04
0116-01/08 80-04
0001 90-03
0116-11 80-04
0002 90-04
0119/0120 32-03-03
0003 10-01-01
31-06-04
10-01-02
31-06-05
10-01-03
32-03-02
10-01-04
0120 32-03-03
10-01-05
0122 81-04
10-01-06
0124 81-05
10-01-07
0126 81-06
0005 10-03-01
82-06
0006 90-05
0130 35-01-03
0007 90-13-01
80-05
90-13-02
0132 81-02
90-13-03
0133 81-03
0008 90-12-01
0136 10-03-01
90-12-02
10-03-02
90-12-03
10-03-03
90-12-04
0140 20-25
90-12-05
0150 90-15
90-12-06
0201 90-02
0010 90-10-01
0202 90-02
90-10-02
0203 21-14-01
0011 90-11-01
21-14-02
0012 90-11-03
0302-01 10-04-02
0013 90-11-04
0303 10-09
0014 90-11-05
0306 10-08
0015 90-20-01
0309 30-01
90-20-02
0312 20-05-06
90-20-03
20-05-07
90-20-04
0316 20-02-09
90-20-05
0401-01 12-01-01
90-20-06
0401-02 12-01-02
90-20-07
0401-03 22-01-02
90-20-08
0401-04 15-02-07
90-20-09
0401-05 20-13-17
90-20-10
0401-06 15-02-08
90-21-01
0401-07 20-02-11
0101 80-02-01
0401-08 22-01-01
80-02-02
0401-09 20-02-01
0103 20-02-07
0401-10 20-02-12
0104 14-02-07
0401-12 15-02-09
0105 82-02
0401-13 15-02-10
0106 82-03
0401-14 15-02-11
0107 80-01
0401-15 15-02-04
0108 80-01
0401-17 21-01-01
0111/0112 82-01-01
0401-18 20-03-01
82-01-02
0401-19 24-02-01
82-01-03
0401-20 20-02-03
0113-04 20-15-09
0401-21 20-02-04
0113-05 20-15-10
0401-22 20-02-05
0114 81-01
0401-24 40-01-03

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

0401-25 20-03-02 0405-21 20-18-05
0401-26 40-01-04 0405-22 24-01-01
0401-28 20-03-02 0405-23 20-01-06
0401-29 20-03-03 0405-24 20-21-01
0401-31 20-01-03 0405-25 20-21-02
40-10-01 0405-26 20-01-08
0401-32 20-01-02 0405-27 24-01-02
0402-01 20-02-02 0405-28 20-18-01
0402-02 15-02-05 0405-29 20-01-09
0402-03 12-01-03 0405-30 21-01-03
0402-04 15-02-06 0405-31 22-01-06
0402-05 42-01-01 0405-32 20-01-10
0402-07 20-03-05 0405-33 20-02-08
0402-08 21-01-12 0405-34 25-07-01
0402-09 20-01-01 0405-35 25-07-02
0403 20-16 0405-36 21-08-02
0404-01 35-01-04 0405-37 21-08-03
0404-02 35-01-05 0405-38 21-01-07
0404-04 35-01-06 0405-39 21-01-08
0404-05 35-01-07 0405-40 24-01-05
0404-06-01 35-01-01 0405-43 25-07-03
0404-06-02 35-01-02 0405-50 20-03-04
0404-06-03 35-01-03 0405-52 41-19-07
0404-06-04 35-01-04 0405-53 25-07-04
0404-06-05 35-01-05 0405-54 25-07-05
0404-06-06 35-01-06 0405-55 25-07-06
0404-06-07 35-01-07 0405-59 32-01-02
0404-06-08 35-01-08 0405-60 21-01-05
0404-06-09 35-01-09 0405-61 20-18-07
0404-06-10 35-01-10 0405-62 22-01-04
0404-06-11 35-01-11 0405-63 40-10-04
0404-06-12 35-01-12 0405-64 40-10-05
0404-06-13 35-01-13 0405-66 24-01-06
0404-06-14 35-01-14 0405-67 24-01-07
0404-06-15 35-01-15 0405-72 20-18-08
0404-06-16 35-01-16 0405-73 25-07-07
0405-01 24-02-03 0405-74 25-07-08
0405-02 24-01-03 0405-75 25-07-09
0405-03 24-01-04 0405-76 22-07-10
0405-04 20-18-06 0405-77 20-21-03
0405-05 24-02-04 0405-78 20-21-04
0405-06 20-01-07 0405-79 25-07-11
0405-07 22-01-03 0405-80 16-01-09
0405-08 20-18-02 0406-01 15-03-04
0405-09 31-01-04 0406-02 20-07-01
0405-10 21-01-02 0406-03 20-13-01
0405-12 21-01-04 0406-04 20-13-04
0405-13 21-01-06 0406-05 20-13-05
0405-14 32-01-01 0406-06 20-13-06
0405-15 20-02-06 0406-08 20-10-01
0405-16 21-01-09 0406-09 20-10-02
0405-17 20-01-05 0406-10 20-10-03
0405-18 31-01-02 0406-11 20-11-06
0405-19 20-18-03 0406-14 20-10-06
0405-20 20-18-04 0406-15 20-13-07

1070 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

0406-16 20-13-08 0406-93 15-03-07
0406-17 20-13-09 0406-94 15-03-08
0406-18 20-07-04 0406-96 20-07-13
0406-19 20-08-03 0406-97 20-07-14
0406-20 20-08-04 0406-98 20-07-15
0406-21 20-08-12 0406-99 20-11-15
0406-23 20-11-04 0406-102 20-07-18
0406-26 20-11-05 0406-103 20-07-19
0406-29 20-09-01 0406-104 20-07-20
0406-30 20-11-01 0406-105 20-13-26
0406-31 20-11-02 0406-107 20-13-02
0406-32 20-11-03 0406-108 20-13-03
0406-33 20-08-06 0406-109 42-03-04
0406-34 20-11-07 0406-110 42-03-05
0406-35 20-11-09 0406-111 42-03-08
0406-36 20-11-10 0406-112 42-03-07
0406-41 20-08-09 0406-113 15-04-13
0406-42 20-11-08 42-03-01
0406-43 20-11-14 0406-114 42-03-02
0406-44 20-13-10 0406-115 42-03-11
0406-45 20-07-02 0406-116 42-03-06
0406-46 20-13-36 0406-117 42-03-03
0406-50 20-08-05 0406-118 42-03-09
0406-53 20-13-30 0406-119 42-03-10
0406-54 20-13-11 0406-120 20-07-11
0406-55 20-13-12 0406-121 20-08-08
0406-57 20-13-13 0406-122 20-07-12
0406-58 20-13-31 0406-123 20-09-02
0406-60 42-03-12 0406-124 20-19-03
0406-61 20-08-01 0406-126 20-10-07
0406-62 20-08-02 0406-127 20-08-11
0406-63 20-10-04 0406-128 20-11-12
0406-64 20-13-14 0407 35-05-01
0406-65 20-13-15 0408-01 20-15-01
0406-66 20-13-16 0408-02 20-15-02
0406-68 20-09-05 0408-03 20-15-03
0406-69 20-07-10 0408-04 20-15-04
20-13-18 0408-05 20-15-05
0406-71 20-07-03 0408-06 20-15-06
0406-72 20-08-10 0408-07 20-15-07
0406-74 20-08-07 0408-08 20-15-08
0406-75 20-13-19 0410-01 16-01-02
0406-76 20-11-11 0410-02 16-01-03
0406-79 20-11-12 0410-03 16-01-04
0406-80 20-09-02 45-01-01
0406-81 20-12-02 0410-04 16-01-10
0406-82 20-12-03 16-01-05
0406-83 20-09-03 0410-05 16-01-06
0406-84 20-13-20 0410-06 16-01-07
0406-85 20-13-21 0411 20-05-04
0406-87 20-09-04 0412-01 20-14-01
0406-88 20-13-22 0412-02 20-14-02
0406-89 20-13-23 0412-03 20-14-03
0406-91 20-11-13 0412-04 20-14-04
0406-92 20-10-05 0412-05 20-14-05

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

0412-06 20-14-06 0511-05 11-10-01
0412-07 20-14-07 0511-06 11-11-14
0412-08 20-14-08 0511-07 11-11-08
0412-09 20-14-09 0511-08 11-12-26
0412-10 20-14-10 0511-09 11-11-07
0412-13 20-14-11 0511-10 11-11-09
0413-01 42-05-01 0511-11 11-11-10
42-05-02 0511-12 11-11-11
0413-02 42-05-03 0511-13 11-12-12
0413-03 42-05-04 0511-14 11-12-02
0414-01 41-12-03 0511-15 11-12-03
0414-03 25-07-13 0511-16 11-12-27
0414-04 22-01-11 0511-17 11-12-28
0414-05 20-04-03 0511-18 11-12-36
0414-07 25-07-14 0511-19 11-12-20
0414-08 20-01-13 0511-20 11-12-04
0414-08 20-01 0511-21 11-12-05
0414-09 22-01-08 0511-22 11-11-12
0414-10 20-19-02 0511-23 11-12-10
0414-11 20-01-14 0511-24 11-12-11
0414-12 34-07-05 0511-25 11-12-13
0414-13 20-14-11 0511-26 11-12-19
0414-16 20-01-xx 0511-27 11-11-39
0414-17 20-01-xx 0511-28 11-12-14
0414-18 22-01-07 0511-32 11-11-15
0414-19 20-23-01 0511-33 11-11-16
0414-21 20-18-09 0511-34 11-12-42
0414-22 32-01-03 0511-36 11-11-17
0414-23 22-01-09 0511-37 11-15-05
0414-25 24-02-05 0511-39 11-10-03
0414-26 26-01-02 0511-40 11-12-06
0416-01 45-01-03 0511-41 11-11-34
0416-02 45-01-04 0511-44 11-12-21
0416-03 45-01-05 0511-45 11-12-22
0418 20-25 0511-46 11-12-23
0419 20-07-06 0511-52 11-11-18
0420-01 21-01-12 0511-53 11-11-19
0421 16-01-08 0511-54 11-12-17
0422 35-01-03 0511-55 11-12-31
0423-01 20-11-16 0511-56 11-12-32
0423-02 15-02-13 0511-57 11-12-33
0423-03 42-03-13 0511-58 11-12-34
0501 11-01 0511-59 11-11-20
0502 11-02 0511-60 11-12-07
11-04 0511-61 11-12-08
15-01-01 0511-62 11-11-03
0504 11-06 0511-63 11-11-02
0506 11-07 0511-67 11-12-15
16-01-01 0511-68 11-10-04
0508 11-08 0511-69 11-10-05
0510 11-09-01 0511-71 11-10-18
0511-01 11-10-02 0511-73 11-13-01
0511-02 11-12-01 0511-77 11-12-44
0511-03 11-11-05 0511-78 11-12-18
11-11-06 0511-79 11-11-22

1072 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

0511-80 11-11-21 0514-40 11-11-35
0511-85 11-11-01 0514-41 11-12-24
0511-86 11-12-48 0514-42 11-11-40
0511-90 11-15-01 0514-44 11-12-53
0511-91 11-10-19 0514-45 11-13-02
0511-92 11-15-02 0514-46 11-13-03
0511-94 11-12-43 0514-47 11-13-04
0511-95 11-12-25 0514-48 11-13-05
0511-96 11-12-45 0514-49 11-13-06
0511-97 11-12-46 0514-50 11-13-07
0511-98 11-12-47 0514-51 11-12-40
0511-99 11-12-16 0514-53 11-11-36
0512-01 11-16-01 0514-56 11-14-17
0512-02 11-16-02 0514-57 11-13-10
0512-03 11-16-03 0514-58 11-10-09
0512-04 11-16-04 0514-59 11-10-17
0512-05 11-16-05 0514-60 11-12-09
0512-06 11-16-06 0514-61 11-12-30
0512-07 11-16-07 0514-62 11-12-35
0512-08 11-16-08 0514-63 11-10-11
0512-09 11-16-09 0514-64 11-14-18
0512-10 11-16-10 0514-67 11-11-13
0514-01 11-10-21 0514-68 11-11-23
0514-02 11-10-22 0514-69 11-13-08
0514-03 11-11-40 0514-70 11-13-09
0514-04 25-13-04 0516 45-01-01
0514-05 11-12-29 45-01-02
0514-06 11-10-20 11-07
0514-07 11-12-51 0517-01 25-13-02
0514-09 11-12-41 0517-02 25-13-03
0514-10 11-12-37 0518 11-09-02
0514-11 11-10-23 0519 42-04
0514-12 11-10-24 0520 11-17
0514-13 11-10-25 0601 13-01-03
0514-14 11-10-26 0602 13-02
0514-15 11-12-52 0603 13-04
0514-16 11-10-16 0604 13-05
0514-17 11-14-01 0701-01 21-05-01
0514-18 11-14-02 0701-02 21-05-02
0514-19 11-14-03 0701-04 21-05-04
0514-20 11-14-04 0701-05 21-05-05
0514-21 11-14-05 0701-06 21-05-06
0514-22 11-14-06 0701-07 21-05-09
0514-23 11-14-07 0701-08 21-05-10
0514-24 11-14-08 0701-09 21-05-11
0514-25 11-14-09 0701-10 21-05-12
0514-26 11-14-10 0701-11 21-05-07
0514-27 11-14-11 0701-12 21-05-08
0514-28 11-14-12 0702-01 21-06-01
0514-29 11-14-13 0702-02 21-06-02
0514-30 11-14-14 0702-03 21-05-04
0514-31 11-14-15 0702-04 21-05-04
0514-32 11-14-16 0702-05 21-06-06
0514-34 11-11-33 0702-06 21-06-07
0514-35 11-10-27 0702-07 21-06-04

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

0702-08 21-06-05 0921-05 14-02-10
0702-09 21-06-08 0921-06 14-01-19
0703 21-09-01 14-01-12
0705 21-09-02 0921-07 14-01-17
90-19 0921-09 14-02-13
0706 21-01-10 0921-10 14-02-09
21-01-11 0921-12 14-01-15
0801 12-02 0921-13 14-01-18
0802 12-03 0922 21-15
0803 12-04 0924 21-12
0901-01 14-02-01 0925 12-12
0901-02 14-02-02 21-03
0901-03 14-01-02 1001 15-02
14-01-03 15-03
0901-05 14-02-03 1002 35-04
0901-06 14-02-04 1003 16-02
0901-07/10 14-04 1004 21-04
0901-11 14-02-05 1005 20-06
0901-12 14-02-06 1006 15-07
0901-13 14-01-06 1007 15-14
0901-14/17 22-02 1008-01 15-01-03
0901-18 14-01-07 1008-03 15-01-02
0901-19 14-01-08 1008-05 15-02-12
0901-20 14-01-16 1012 23-02
0901-21 14-01-09 1013 21-11
0901-23 14-01-04 1014 24-03
0901-23 14-01-05 1015 23-03
0901-24 14-02-08 1016 15-09
0901-27 34-01-02 1018 15-08
0901-29 14-01-10 1019 15-10
0901-31 14-01-13 1020 15-12-01
0901-32 14-01 15-12-02
0901-33/36 22-02 15-12-03
0901-37/40 14-04 1021 42-02-01
0902 22-03 1022 42-02-02
0903 14-01-01 1023 13-03
0904 35-03 1024 21-11
0905 14-05 1025 21-07
0906 14-06 21-14-01
0907 21-02 21-14-02
0909 22-04 1026 15-13
0910 22-05 1027 24-06
0911 14-07 1031 12-13
0912 15-06 1034 15-02-01
0914 14-08-01 1035 16-03
14-08-02 1036 21-10
14-09-01 1101 30-02
14-09-02 1103 30-03
14-09-03 1104 30-04
0917 22-07 1105 20-17-01
0919 22-08 1107 20-17-02
0921-01 14-01-14 1108 30-05
0921-02 25-01-03 1301 33-01
0921-03 14-02-11 1303 33-02
0921-04 14-01-11 1401-24 40-01-03

1074 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX DXE Aspila EX

1401-26 40-01-04 1812 25-11
1403-03 40-04-02 1813 25-12
1403-04 40-04-01 1814 22-12
1403-05 40-01-02 22-11-05
1403-07 40-04-03 1815 22-11-06
1404-04 40-03-01 1816-01 22-09-04
1405-01 40-05-01 1816-02 22-09-05
1405-02 40-05-02 1816-03 22-09-06
1405-03 40-05-04 1816-04 22-09-07
1405-04 40-05-05 1816-05 22-09-08
1405-06 40-05-06 1901 41-02
1405-07 40-05-07 1902 41-03-01
1407 40-02-01 41-03-02
40-02-02 41-03-03
1411-01 40-06-01 1903 41-01-01
1411-02 40-06-02 1904-01 41-04-01
1411-03 40-06-03 1904-02 41-04-02
1413 40-09 1905 41-07
1417 40-01-05 1906 41-05
1419 40-01-06 1907 41-06
1420 40-07-01 1908-01 41-08-01
1421 40-08-01 1908-02 41-08-02
1502 32-02 1908-03 41-10-01
1503 32-03-01 41-11-01
1601 31-02-01 1908-04 41-08-03
1602 31-03-01 1908-05 41-10-02
1604 31-06 1909 41-12-01
31-08 41-12-02
1605 31-05 1910 41-01-02
1606 31-04 1912 41-14-01/08
1607 31-03-02 1924 41-09
1608 31-02-02 1925 41-11-02/06
1609 31-01-01 41-19-02
1610 31-07 41-19-04
1801 25-08 1926 41-09
25-09 41-13-01
1802 25-03 41-13-02
25-04 1927 41-14-09
1803 25-03 1928 41-15-01
25-04 41-15-02
1804 25-02 1929-01 41-14-10
1805 22-10 1929-02 41-08-04
1806 22-11-01 1929-03 41-10-03
22-11-02 41-11-01
22-11-03 1929-04 41-10-04
1807 22-09-01 1929-05 41-10-05
1808 22-13 1929-06 41-12-03
1809 22-12 1929-07 41-14-11
22-13 1929-08 41-14-12
1810-01 22-09-02 1930-01 41-16-01
1810-02 22-11-04 1930-02 41-16-02
1810-03 22-11-04 1931 41-17
1810-04 22-11-07 1932 41-18-01/10
1810-05 22-11-08 1939-01 41-16-01
1811 25-10 2001 92-01

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

DXE Aspila EX
2203 40-10-02
2204 40-10-03
2207 40-11
2208 25-13-01
2209 25-05
2210 25-06-02
2211 42-01-02
2213-01 22-14-01
2213-02 22-14-03
2213-03 2214-05
2213-04 22-14-02
2213-05 22-14-04
2213-06 22-14-06
2214-01 22-15-01
2214-02 22-15-03
2214-03 2215-05
2214-04 22-15-02
2214-05 22-15-04
2214-06 22-15-06
2301 34-01-01
2302 34-02
2304 34-03
2305 34-05
2306 34-04
2307 34-06
2308 44-02-01/04
2309 44-04
2310 44-03-01/04
2314 44-05-01/06
2315 44-06
2316 44-07-01/04
2404 20-20-01/03
2406-01 20-19-03
2406-02 10-02-02
2406-03 10-02-03
2406-04 10-02-03
10-02-04
2407-02 20-19-01
2407-04 15-02-15
2602 10-03-04
3001-01 35-05-01
3001-02 35-05-02
3001-03 35-05-03
3001-04 35-05-04
3002 35-06

1076 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

Aspila
DXE Description
DXE Function Key Equivalent EX
1025 39 Room Monitoring
Function keys are set either in system programming or by the 1026 40 Handset Transmission Cut Off
user. 1031 41 Secretary (Buzzer) Call
On the DXE the system program number is 1006, the 1032 42 Secretary Call Pickup
equivalent on the Aspila EX is program 15-07. 1035 43 Series Call
The Service Code to set the function keys is 851 on the DXE, 1043 44 Common Hold
there are two equivalent service codes on the Aspila EX, 851 1044 45 Exclusive Hold
and 852. Service code 851 is used for any 2 digit function 1074 46 Department Group Withdraw
codes (00-99), service code 852 is used for any 3 digit 47 Reverse Voice Over
function codes (*01-*99) 1057 48 Voice Over
1094 49 Redirect
Aspila 50 Account Code
DXE Description 51 General Purpose Relay
EX
52 Auto Answer with Delay Mes-
0000 00 Key not defined sage Setup
1058 01 DSS 1082 53 Auto Answer with Delay Mes-
02 MIC sage Start
03 DND 1087 54 Exteranl Call Forward by Door-
04 BGM phone Setup
05 Headset 1088 55 Extension Name Change
1077 06 Transfer 56 Not used
1016 07 Conference 57 Not used
1085 08 Incoming Call list 58 Not used
(Check missed calls) 59 Not used
1039-1042 09 Day mode change 60 Not used
1055 10 Call Forward Immediate 61 Not used
1002 11 Call Forward Busy 62 Not used
1003 12 Call Forward No Answer 1024 63 CLIR Calling Line ID Restriction
13 Call Forward Busy/No Answer 64 Not used
1000 14 Call Forward Dual ring 65 Not used
1001 15 Call Forward Follow Me 1029 66 CTI Communication
16 Call Forward to Station 67 Mail Box
17 Call Forward to Device 68 Voice Mail Service
1027 18 Text Message 69 Recording Service
1004 19 External Zone Page 70 Auto Attendant
1005 20 External All Page 71 Change Attendant Message
1006 21 Internal Zone Page 1096 72 Keypad Facility
22 Internal All Page 1097 73 Keypad Hold
1010 23 Meet Me Page Answer 1098 74 Keypad Retrieve
1007 24 Call Pickup for Own Group 1099 75 Keypad Conference
1008 25 Call Pickup for Any Group 1054 76 Toll Restriction in Credit
1009 26 Call Pickup for Specified Group 1059 77 Voice Mail Box
1037 27 Common Abbreviated Dial 1060 78 Voice Mail Recording
1038 28 Group Abbreviated Dial 1071 79 Voice Mail Auto Attendant
1075 29 Repeat Dial 80 Not used
1014 30 Saved Number Dial : :
1015 31 Memo Dial 99 Not used
1017 32 Privacy Release
1018 33 Call Waiting 0000 000 Key Not Defined
1019 34 Barge In (Break in) 1-192 *01 Line Key (trunk port)
1020 35 Camp On, Callback 1012 *02 Trunk Group
1021 36 Department Step Call 1036 *03 Virtual Extension (Call Cover-
1022 37 DND/Call Forward Override age)
1023 38 Message Waiting 1033 *04 Park Hold

Aspila EX Software Manual DXE to Aspila EX

DXE to Aspila EX Conversion

Aspila Aspila
DXE Description DXE Description
EX EX
*05 Not used
*06 Loop Key
1056 *07 Trunk Access via Networking
*08 Not used
*09 Not used
1046 *10 ACD Log In/Out
1047 *11 ACD Conversation Recording
1048 *12 ACD Emergency Call
1049 *13 ACD Off Duty
1050 *14 ACD Operation End/Start
1051 *15 ACD terminal Speech Monitor
1052 *16 ACD Waiting
1053 *17 ACD Wrap Up
1095 *18 ACD Overflow Control
1079 *19 ACD Queue Status Check

1078 DXE to Aspila EX Conversion Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index

Numerics Supervisor, ACD System . . .71

2-OPX/Dual OPX Traffic Management Reports . . .71
Work Time . . .71
See Single Line Telephones
ACD MIS (inDepth) . . .222
900 Preamble . . .390, . . .393
ACI . . .64
A ACI Interface Specifications . . .66
Abandoned Call Reporting . . .332 Auxiliary Device Control . . .64
Abbreviated Dialing . . .50 Call Recording . . .65
External Paging . . .64
DSS Console Chaining . . .50
Music on Hold . . .64
One-Touch Calling . . .274
Physical Ports and Software Ports . . .65
Storing a Flash . . .50
Tie Line COS . . .342 Add-On Conference . . .136
Toll Restriction . . .349 Alarm . . .61
Using a Programmable Function Key Alarm Sensors, External . . .192
. . .50 Alphanumeric Display . . .63
Account Codes . . .55 Alternate Answer . . .174
Account Code Capacity . . .56 Analog Communications Interface (ACI) . . .64
Forced Account Codes . . .55 Auxiliary Device Control . . .64
Hiding . . .56 Call Recording . . .65
Operator Notification . . .56 External Paging . . .64
Optional Account Codes . . .55 Music on Hold . . .64
Redialed Numbers Do Not Contain Ac- Announced (Screened) Transfer . . .365
count Codes . . .56
Answer a Message Waiting . . .255
Verified Account Codes . . .55
Answering Central Office Calls . . .116
Account Codes for Incoming Calls . . .56
Answering Machine Emulation . . .378
ACD . . .69
APR
ACD Call Queuing . . .69
ACD Group as Overflow Destination Analog Module w/Ringing . . .144
. . .73 ARS
ACD Overflow (With Announcements) ARS Access, Tie Line COS . . .342
. . .69 Assigned Night Answer (ANA) . . .267
Agent Log In and Log Out Services Attendant Call Queuing . . .68
. . .70 Audible Ringing, CO . . .692
Emergency Call . . .70
Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines . . .233
Enhanced DSS Operation . . .70
Flexible Time Schedules . . .70 Automated Attendant . . .390, . . .392
Headset Operation (With Automatic Automated Attendant (VAU)
Answer) . . .70 Automatic Overflow . . .392
Incoming Call Routing . . .70 Flexible Routing . . .392
Queue Status System Updates Changed Programmable Greetings . . .392
. . .73 Simultaneous Call Answering . . .392
Rest Mode . . .71 Single Digit Dialing . . .392
Supervisor, ACD Group . . .71 Automatic Answer . . .110

Aspila EX Software Manual Index i

Index
Automatic Call Distribution Behind a PBX . . .290
Traffic Management Reports . . .358 BGM . . .82
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) . . .69 Block Camp On . . .271
ACD Call Queuing . . .69 Block Manual Off Hook Signals . . .271
ACD Group as Overflow Destination Blocked Call Reporting . . .332
. . .73 Blocking Incoming Calls
ACD Overflow (With Announcements) See Do Not Disturb
. . .69
Both Ringing Call Forwarding . . .87
Agent Log In and Log Out Services
. . .70 Both Ways Loop Keys . . .238
Emergency Call . . .70 Both Ways Private Line . . .296
Enhanced DSS Operation . . .70 BRI . . .228
Flexible Time Schedules . . .70 BRI - Basic Rate Interface
Headset Operation (With Automatic See ISDN Compatibility
Answer) . . .70 Busy/Not Answered Call Forwarding . . .87
Incoming Call Routing . . .70
Buzzer (Secretary Call) . . .319
Queue Status System Updates Changed
. . .73 Bypassing Toll Restriction . . .353, . . .356
Rest Mode . . .71
Supervisor, ACD Group . . .71
C
Supervisor, ACD System . . .71 Call Coverage
Traffic Management Reports . . .71 Auto Off-Hook Answer and Ringing
Work Time . . .71 Line Preference . . .260
Automatic Extension Ringdown . . .309 Place and Receive Calls on Call Cover-
Automatic Handsfree . . .207 age/Multiple Directory Number
Keys . . .259
Automatic Off Hook Signaling . . .271
See Multiple Directory Numbers / Call
Automatic On-Hook Transfer . . .365 Coverage
Automatic Overflow (VAU Automated Atten- Call Coverage Keys
dant) . . .392
Department Groups Using a Virtual Ex-
Automatic Pause, PBX . . .290 tension as Master Allow Calls to
Automatic Route Selection Camp On . . .260
See Also ARS Call Digit Counting . . .350
Auxiliary Device Control Call Forwarding . . .87
With ACI . . .64 Both Ringing . . .87
Display Reason for Transfer . . .116
B Fixed . . .90
Background Music . . .82 Immediate . . .87
Barge In . . .83 Override . . .103
Conference . . .136 Personal Answering Machine Emula-
DISA/Tie Line . . .169 tion . . .87, . . .378
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) . . .228 To Voice Mail . . .378
Before Reading The Feature Section . . .3 Unanswered . . .87

ii Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index
Call Forwarding when Busy or Not Answered Capacities/System Number Plan . . .41, . . .413
. . .87 Central Office Calls, Answering . . .116
Call Forwarding when Unanswered . . .87 Delayed Ringing . . .116
Call Forwarding with Both Ringing . . .87 Universal Answer . . .116
Call Forwarding with Follow Me . . .101 Central Office Calls, Placing . . .120
Call Forwarding, Fixed . . .90 Charts
Fixed Call Forwarding Chaining . . .91 Class of Service Option (Administrator
Call Forwarding, Off-Premise . . .93 Level) . . .125
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Override Class of Service Option (Answer Ser-
. . .103 vice) . . .128
Class of Service Option (DISA/E&M
Call Pickup, Directed . . .180
Service) . . .133
Call Pickup, Group . . .202 Class of Service Option (Hold/Transfer
Call Pickup, Secretary . . .319 Service) . . .129
Call Queuing Class of Service Option (Incoming Call
See Call Waiting Service) . . .128
Call Restriction, International . . .349 Class of Service Option (Outgoing Call
Call Restriction, Outgoing with Tie Lines Service) . . .126
. . .343 Class of Service Option (Supplementa-
Call Restriction, PBX . . .290, . . .350 ry Service) . . .130
Function Key Codes by Feature . . .25
Call Timer . . .105, . . .107
Service Codes by Feature . . .16
Call Waiting / Camp On . . .108 System Number Plan/Capacities . . .41,
Callback . . .110 . . .413
Callback Automatic Answer . . .110 System Numbering . . .474
Called Extension Block . . .271 Voice Prompting Messages . . .393
Caller ID . . .112, . . .113 Charts and Illustrations . . .5
Caller ID Digits to Voice Mail . . .114 Checking Date/Time/Extension Number
Hardware Considerations . . .114 . . .393
ISDN Calls Display Reason for No Checking Your Voice Mail Messages . . .386
Caller ID Information . . .114 Circular Routing (Department Calling) . . .146
Outputting Caller ID Data . . .114 Class of Service . . .124
Reason for No Caller ID is Displayed
Control Thru ARS
with ISDN . . .228
DISA . . .168
Second Call Display . . .112
Options . . .125, . . .126, . . .128,
Voice Mail . . .379
. . .129, . . .130, . . .133
Caller ID Displays . . .113 Tie Lines . . .342
Camp On CO Audible . . .692
Trunk Queuing . . .375 CO Ringing . . .692
Camp On / Call Waiting . . .108 Combined Paging . . .279, . . .282
Camp-On Common Abbreviated Dialing and DISA
DID . . .159 . . .168
Cancel Message Waiting . . .255

Aspila EX Software Manual Index iii

Index
Common Permit Code Table . . .349 Data Privacy . . .295
Common Restrict Code Table . . .349 Date and Time . . .347
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Appli- Date, Time and Extension Number Check
cations . . .136 (VAU) . . .393
Conference . . .136 DCI . . .144
Barge In . . .136 Keyset-Originated Data Call . . .144
Split . . .136 Terminal-Originated Data Call . . .144
Transfer . . .136 Terminal-Originated Voice Call
Voice Call/Privacy Release . . .140 (Telemarketing Dial) . . .144
Conference, Meet Me . . .241 DDI (Direct Dial In . . .159
Conference, Voice Call/Privacy Release Delayed Ringing
. . .140 Call Coverage Keys . . .259
Privacy Mode . . .140 Delayed Ringing (Outside Calls) . . .116
Confirmation Tone Delayed Ringing with DILs . . .165
Dial Pad . . .156 Department Calling . . .146
Connecting to a PBX . . .290 Circular Routing . . .146
Connecting to Fax Machines . . .193 Department Group Transfer . . .365
Continued Dialing . . .142 DISA Department Calling with Over-
Intercom Calls . . .142 flow Message . . .169
Trunk Calls . . .142 Enhanced Hunting . . .146
Conversation Cutoff, Long . . .236 Overflow Routing . . .146
Priority Routing . . .146
Conversation Record . . .378
User Log Out/Log In . . .146
Converting from Pulse to Tone Dialing . . .300
Department Step Calling . . .153
CTA
Dial Buffering, Enhanced . . .286
RS-232-C CTA Module . . .144
Dial Number Preview . . .155
CTI Applications . . .136 Dial Pad Confirmation Tone . . .156
CTU Module . . .144
Dial Tone Detection . . .157
Customized Date Format . . .332 Dialed Number Translation (DID) . . .159
Cutting Off the Microphone . . .257
Dialing, Converting from pulse to Tone . . .300
D DID . . .159
Data Call Tracking . . .332 Automated Attendant Routing . . .160
Busy Intercept . . .160
Data Communications
Dialed Number Translation . . .159
APR Analog Module w/Ringing . . .144 DID Camp-On . . .159
CTU Module . . .144 DID Intercept . . .160
RS-232-C CTA Module . . .144 DID Intercept Destination for Each
Data Communications Interface (DCI) . . .144 DID Number . . .160
Keyset-Originated Data Call . . .144 DID Routing Through the VAU Auto-
Terminal-Originated Data Call . . .144 mated Attendant . . .160
Terminal-Originated Voice Call Flexible DID Service Compatibility
(Telemarketing Dial) . . .144 . . .159

iv Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index
Ring-No-Answer Intercept . . .160 Direct Trunk Access with DISA . . .168
SMDR Includes Dialed Number . . .160 Directed Call Pickup . . .180
Vacant Number Intercept . . .160 Directory Dialing . . .182
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) . . .159 DISA . . .168
DID Intercept (DID) . . .159 Common Abbreviated Dialing . . .168
DID Off Hook Call Waiting . . .271 Department Calling with Overflow
Digit Counting . . .332, . . .350 Message . . .169
Toll Call . . .350 Direct Trunk Access . . .168
Digit Masking . . .332 DISA Class of Service . . .168
DIL . . .165 DISA Operating Modes . . .169
DISA Toll Restriction . . .169
DIL Delayed Ringing . . .165
Operator Calling . . .168
To Fax . . .193
Paging . . .168
Direct Dial In (DDI) . . .159 Trunk Group Access . . .168
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) . . .159 Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access
DID Camp-On . . .159 . . .168
DID Dialed Number Translation Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls
. . .159 . . .169
DID Intercept . . .160 DISA Long Conversation Tone . . .401
DID Intercept Destination for Each DISA/Tie Trunk Barge In
DID Number . . .160
DISA COS . . .169
DID Routing Through the VAU Auto-
Tie Line COS . . .343
mated Attendant . . .160
Flexible DID Service Compatibility Disconnecting Trunks . . .200
. . .159 Display
SMDR Includes Dialed Number . . .160 Intercom Abandoned Call Display
Direct Inward Line (DIL) . . .165 . . .227
DIL Delayed Ringing . . .165 Display Messages
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) . . .168 See Also Selectable Display Messages
Department Calling with Overflow Display Messaging, Selectable . . .321
Message . . .169 Display Prompts While Programming . . .412
DISA Class of Service . . .168 Display Reason for Transfer . . .116
DISA Operating Modes . . .169 Displays on Telephones . . .63
DISA Toll Restriction . . .169 Distinctive Ringing, Tones and Flash Patterns
Warning Tone for Long DISA Calls . . .184
. . .169
DND . . .186
Direct Messaging (Message Waiting) . . .253
Do Not Disturb . . .186
Direct Station Selection
Display Reason for Transfer . . .116
One-Touch Calling . . .274
Do Not Disturb/Call Forwarding Override
Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console . . .174 . . .103
Direct Trunk Access Door Box . . .188
Placing an Outside Call . . .123 Doorboxes
Tie Line COS . . .343

Aspila EX Software Manual Index v

Index
Off-Premise Call Forward . . .93, . . .97 External Alarm Sensors . . .192
DSS Console . . .174 External Hotline . . .221
Alternate Answer . . .174 External Meet Me Conference . . .242
Calling Extensions and Door Boxes External Meet Me Page . . .246
. . .174 External Paging . . .279
Night Service Switch . . .174
Paging . . .174 F
Placing/Answering/Transferring Out- Fax Machine Compatibility . . .193
side Calls . . .174
First Digit Absorption . . .342
Dual Line Appearance . . .190
Fixed Call Forwarding . . .90
Dual OPX/2-OPX
Flash . . .195
See Single Line Telephones
Flexible Routing (VAU) . . .392
Duration Monitoring . . .332
Flexible System Numbering . . .197
DXE Function Key Equivalent . . .1077
Follow Me Call Forward . . .101
DXE Program Number Equivalent . . .1069
Forced Account Codes . . .55
DXE to Aspila EX Conversion . . .1069
Forced Intercom Ringing . . .209
DXE to Aspila EX Function key conversion
Forced Trunk Disconnect . . .200
. . .1077
Tie Line COS . . .343
E Forwarding Off-Premise . . .93
Enhanced Dial Buffering . . .286 Forwarding to Voice Mail . . .378
Enhanced Hunting . . .146 Forwarding, Fixed . . .90
Exclusive Hold . . .213 Function Key Codes by Features . . .25
Executive Override Function Key Codes by Number . . .32
See Barge In Function Keys (DXE) . . .1077
Exiting Programming Mode . . .409 Function Keys, Programmable . . .298
Extended Park . . .286
G
Extension (Department) Groups Transfer
. . .365 General Message . . .390
Extension Class of Service Group Call Pickup . . .202
See Class of Service Group Hold . . .213
Extension Exclusion . . .332 Group Listen . . .205
Extension Hotline . . .219 Groups, Ring . . .306
Extension Hunting H
Department Calling . . .146 Handsfree and Monitor . . .207
Extension Name or Number . . .333 Handsfree Answerback/Forced Intercom Ring-
Extension Names . . .265 ing . . .209
Extension Ring Group . . .306 Headset Operation . . .211
Extension Ringdown Hiding Account Codes . . .56
See Ringdown Extension Hold . . .213

vi Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index
Exclusive Hold . . .213 Last Number Redial . . .231
Group Hold . . .213 Redial List . . .231
Hold Recall to Operator . . .213 Line Preference . . .233
Intercom Hold . . .213 Auto-Answer of Non-Ringing Lines
System Hold . . .213
. . .233
Hotel/Motel . . .217 Incoming Line Preference . . .233
Hotline . . .219 Outgoing Line Preference . . .233
Hotline, External . . .221 Listening in a Group . . .205
Hunting Long Conversation Cutoff . . .236
See Department Calling Long Conversation Tone . . .401
Loop Keys . . .238
I
Immediate Call Forwarding . . .87 M
Incoming Calls Mailbox
Account Codes . . .56 Calling Voice Mail . . .383
Incoming Only Loop Keys . . .238 Manual Off Hook Signaling . . .271
Incoming Only Private Line . . .296 Meet Me Conference . . .241
InDepth and inDepth+ . . .222 Meet Me External Conference . . .242
Intercom . . .224 Meet Me Internal Conference . . .243
Intercom Abandoned Call Display . . .227 Meet Me Paging . . .245
Intercom Hold . . .213 Meet Me Paging Transfer . . .248
Intercom Ringing, Forced . . .209 Memo Dial . . .251
Internal Meet Me Conference . . .243 Message Waiting . . .253
Internal Paging . . .282 Answering . . .255
International Call Restriction . . .349 Available for Single Line Telephones
Intrusion . . .83 Without Additional Equipment
ISDN (6.00.06) . . .253
Calling Party Number Notification Microphone Cutoff . . .257
Added . . .228 MIS (inDepth) . . .222
Display Shows Why Caller ID is Not Modem Pooling
Available . . .228 See CTA Department Groups
ISDN Compatibility . . .228 MOH . . .263
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) . . .228 Monitor and Handsfree . . .207
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) . . .228 Monitor, Room . . .311
SMDR Includes Dialed Number . . .228 Multiple Directory Numbers
K Department Groups Using a Virtual Ex-
tension as Master Allow Calls to
Key Layout - Super Display . . .45
Camp On . . .260
L Multiple Directory Numbers / Call Coverage
. . .259
Labelmaker . . .230
Music

Aspila EX Software Manual Index vii

Index
See Background Music P
See Music on Hold Paging
Music on Hold . . .263 Tie Line COS . . .343
N Paging with DISA . . .168
Paging, External . . .279
Name Storing . . .265
Combined Paging . . .279
Networking . . .267
Remove Paging Information from Dis-
Night Answer play Phones . . .279
See Night Service Paging, Internal . . .282
Night Service . . .267 Combined Paging . . .282
Assigned Night Answer (ANA) . . .267 Remove Paging Information from Dis-
Automatic Night Service . . .267 play Phones . . .282
Universal Night Answer (UNA) . . .267 Paging, Meet Me . . .245
Not Answered/Busy Call Forwarding . . .87 Paging, Privacy Release
Notepad
See Conference, Voice Call/Privacy
See Memo Dial Release
Number Plan Park . . .286
See Flexible System Numbering Enhanced Dial Buffering . . .286
Number Preview . . .155 Extended Park . . .286
Number Redial . . .231 Splitting Between Parked Calls . . .286
Number Redial, Repeat . . .301 Park and Page . . .390, . . .391
PBX Call Reporting . . .333
O PBX Compatibility . . .290
Off Hook Ringing . . .271 Permit Code Table . . .349
Off Hook Signaling . . .271 Permit Code Table, Common . . .349
Off-Premise Call Forward for Doorboxes Personal Answering Machine Emulation
. . .93, . . .97 . . .378
Off-Premise Extensions Personal Greeting . . .390
See Single Line Telephones Personal Speed Dial
One-Touch Calling . . .274 One-Touch Calling . . .274
Operating Modes in DISA . . .169 Placing Central Office Calls . . .120
Operator Assistance . . .390, . . .392 PRI . . .228
Operator Calling Primary Rate Interface (PRI) . . .228
Tie Line COS . . .343 Prime Line Selection . . .293
Operator Calling with DISA . . .168 Priority Routing (Department Calling) . . .146
Operator Notification . . .56 Privacy (Data) . . .295
Optional Account Codes . . .55 Privacy Release/Voice Call Conference . . .140
Orbits, Park . . .286 Privacy Mode . . .140
Outgoing Only Loop Keys . . .238 Private Line . . .296
Outgoing Only Private Line . . .296 Programmable Function Keys . . .298

viii Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index
Programmable Keys . . .3 Section 1 - Features . . .3
Programming . . .405 Selectable Display Messaging . . .321
Before Reading This Section . . .407 Selectable Off Hook Signaling Mode . . .271
Before You Start Programming . . .407 Selectable Ring Tones . . .324
How to Enter the Programming Mode Serial and Parallel SMDR Communication
. . .408 . . .333
How to Exit the Programming Mode Serial Call . . .326
. . .409
Service Codes
How to Use This Section . . .407
Introduction to Programming . . .407 One-Touch Calling . . .274
Programming Names and Text Messag- Service Codes by Feature . . .16
es . . .411 Service Codes by Number . . .6
System Number Plan/Capacities . . .413 Silent Monitor
Using Keys to Move Around in the Pro- See Barge In
grams . . .410 Single Line Telephones . . .327
What the Soft Key Display Prompts
SLT . . .327
Mean . . .412
SMDR . . .332
Pulse to Tone Conversion . . .300
Abandoned Call Reporting . . .332
R Blocked Call Reporting . . .332
Recording a Conversation . . .378 Customized Date Format . . .332
Data Call Tracking . . .332
Redial List . . .231
Digit Counting . . .332
Redial Saved Number . . .314 Digit Masking . . .332
Redial, Last Number . . .231 Duration Monitoring . . .332
Redial, Repeat . . .301 Extension Exclusion . . .332
Repeat Redial . . .301 Extension Name or Number . . .333
Reports . . .332, . . .358 PBX Call Reporting . . .333
Restrict Code Table . . .349 Serial and Parallel SMDR Communica-
tion . . .333
Restrict Table, Common . . .349
Transferred Call Tracking . . .332
Reverse Voice Over . . .303 Trunk Exclusion . . .333
Ring Groups . . .306 Usage Summaries . . .333
Ring Tones, Selectable . . .324 Soft Key Display Prompts While Programming
Ringdown Extension . . .309 . . .412
Ringing, CO . . .692 Soft Keys . . .331
Room Monitor . . .311 Speakerphone
RS-232-C CTA Module . . .144 See Handsfree and Monitor
Speed Dial
S
See Abbreviated Dialing
Save Number Dialed . . .314
Split . . .136
Screened Transfer . . .365 Between Parked Calls . . .286
Secretary Call (Buzzer) . . .317
Station Message Detail Recording . . .332
Secretary Call Pickup . . .319

Aspila EX Software Manual Index ix

Index
Abandoned Call Reporting . . .332 Tie Line Toll Restriction Class . . .343
Blocked Call Reporting . . .332 Wink Start Mode Does Not Require a
Customized Date Format . . .332 DTMF Receiver . . .343
Data Call Tracking . . .332 Tie/DISA Trunk Barge In
Digit Counting . . .332 DISA COS . . .169
Digit Masking . . .332 Tie Line COS . . .343
Duration Monitoring . . .332
Time and Date . . .347
Extension Exclusion . . .332
Time, Date and Station Number Check . . .390,
Extension Name or Number . . .333
PBX Call Reporting . . .333 . . .393
Serial and Parallel SMDR Communica- TMS . . .358
tion . . .333 Toll Call Digit Counting . . .350
Transferred Call Tracking . . .332 Toll Free Trunks . . .350
Trunk Exclusion . . .333 Toll Restriction . . .349
Usage Summaries . . .333 Call Digit Counting . . .350
Step Calling . . .153 Common Permit Code Table . . .349
Super Display Telephone Key Layout . . .45 Common Restrict Code Table . . .349
System Hold . . .213 DISA Toll Restriction . . .169
System Number Plan/Capacities . . .41, . . .413 For Abbreviated Dialing . . .349
System Numbering . . .197 International Call Restriction . . .349
Permit Code Table . . .349
System Park Orbits . . .286
Restrict Code Table . . .349
T Tie Lines . . .343
Toll Call Digit Counting . . .350
Tandem Trunking (Unsupervised Conference) Toll Free Trunks . . .350
. . .339
Toll Restriction Class, Tie Lines . . .343
Tape Recording
Toll Restriction Override . . .353, . . .356
With ACI . . .65
Toll Restriction with DISA . . .169
Telephone Key Layout
Traffic Management Report (TMS) . . .358
Key Layout - 110-Button DSS Console
Traffic Management Reports (TMS)
. . .47
Key Layout - 24-Button DSS Console ACD . . .71
. . .48 Transfer . . .365
Key Layout - Digital Two-Button Tele- Automatic On-Hook Transfer . . .365
phone . . .49 Conference . . .136
Key Layout - Multibutton . . .46 Display Reason for Transfer . . .116
Key Layout - Super Display . . .45 Extension (Department) Groups Trans-
Tie Lines . . .342 fer . . .365
First Digit Absorption . . .342 Meet Me Paging Transfer . . .248
Flexible Tie Line Service Compatibility Prevent Recall . . .365
. . .343 Screened Transfer . . .365
Tie Line Class of Service . . .342 To Voice Mail . . .378
Tie Line Outgoing Call Restriction Transfer Without Holding . . .365
. . .343 Unscreened Transfer . . .365

x Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 Index
Transfer Without Holding . . .365 Transfer to the VAU Automated Atten-
Transfer, VAU Automated Attendant . . .390, dant . . .390, . . .393
. . .393 VAU Messages . . .390
Transferred Call Tracking . . .332 Voice Prompting Messages . . .390,
. . .393
Trunk
VAU Messages . . .390
One-Touch Calling . . .274
Tie Line COS . . .342 Verified Account Codes . . .55
Trunk Camp On . . .375 Voice Announce Unit . . .390
Trunk Exclusion . . .333 900 Preamble . . .390, . . .393
Automated Attendant (Operator Assis-
Trunk Group Access with DISA . . .168
tance) . . .390, . . .392
Trunk Group Routing . . .369 General Message . . .390
Trunk Group Routing/ARS Access . . .342 Park and Page . . .390, . . .391
Trunk Group Routing/ARS with DISA . . .168 Personal Greeting . . .390
Trunk Groups . . .372 Time, Date and Station Number Check
Trunk Queuing/Camp On . . .375 . . .390, . . .393
Trunk Ring Group . . .306 Transfer to the VAU Automated Atten-
Trunk Rotaries dant . . .390, . . .393
VAU Messages . . .390
SeeTrunk Groups
Voice Prompting Messages . . .390,
U . . .393
Voice Call Conference . . .140
UNA (Universal Night Answer) . . .267
Voice Call/Privacy Release Conference . . .140
Unanswered Call Forwarding . . .87
Privacy Mode . . .140
Universal Answer . . .116
Voice Mail . . .378
See Central Office Calls, Answering
Call Forwarding to Voice Mail . . .378
Universal Night Answer (UNA) . . .267
Caller ID . . .379
Unscreened Transfer . . .365 Calling Your Mailbox . . .383
Unsupervised Conference . . .339 Checking Your Messages . . .386
Usage Summaries . . .333 Conversation Record . . .378
USB CTU Module . . .144 Forwarding Calls to Voice Mail . . .384
Using The Feature Section . . .3 Leaving a Message . . .378
Personal Answering Machine Emula-
V tion . . .378
VAU . . .390 Transfer Calls to Voice Mail . . .384
900 Preamble . . .390, . . .393 Transferring to Voice Mail . . .378
Automated Attendant (Operator Assis- Voice Mail Overflow . . .378
tance) . . .390, . . .392 Voice Mail Queuing . . .379
General Message . . .390 Voice Mail Queuing . . .379
Park and Page . . .390, . . .391 Voice Over . . .387
Personal Greeting . . .390 Voice Over, Reversed . . .303
Time, Date and Station Number Check Voice Prompting Messages . . .393
. . .390, . . .393 Volume Controls . . .400

Aspila EX Software Manual Index xi

Index

W
Walking Class of Service
See Toll Restriction Override
Warning Tone
DISA Calls . . .169
Warning Tone For Long Conversation . . .401
Warning Tone For Long DISA Conversation
. . .401

Z
Zone Paging, Combined . . .279, . . .282
Zone Paging, External . . .279
Zone Paging, Internal . . .282

xii Index Aspila EX Software Manual

 NEC Infrontia Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd.
24, Jalan Juruhebah U1/50,
Temasya Industrial Park Phase 2,
Seksyen U1 Glenmarie, 40150 Shah Alam,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia.
June 2003
Tel: (603) 5569 5888
.